HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87650 Series

HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87660 Series

Service Manual

www.hp.com/videos/laserjet
www.hp.com/support/colorlje87600mfp
www.hp.com/support/colorljE87640mfp
 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640,
E87650, E87660 -Service Manual

SUMMARY

Learn about theory of operation, remove and replace, troubleshooting on the printer. Parts are either customer-
self repair (CSR) replaceable, or field replaceable units (FRUs) which require installation by a trained field-service
technician. Use the provided parts diagrams and tables to identify the required part.
Legal information
Copyright and License

© Copyright 2022 HP Development

Company, L.P.

Reproduction, adaptation, or translation

without prior written permission is
prohibited, except as allowed under the
copyright laws.

The information contained herein is subject

to change without notice.

The only warranties for HP products and

services are set forth in the express
warranty statements accompanying such
products and services. Nothing herein
should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable
for technical or editorial errors or omissions
contained herein.

Edition 3, 5/2024
Revision History

View a list of document revisions.

The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP
products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be
liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

Table Revision History

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

3 5/2024 Added Ref # 31 for JC44-00091D and JC44-00092D, see Parts and diagrams table in Main
assembly.

Removed LVPS Type 3R in Hardware configuration.

2 4/2024 Added new part number (Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit) Covers

NOTE:
Rev 2 is
to match
up our
publicati
on tools
with the
rev
number.

19.3 September, 2023 Add footnote to Booklet Maker speed.

19.2 June, 2023 Added JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED to image scanner lower PN list as per HPPK PR 362.

19.1 April, 2023 Updated the DCF PCA part number JC92-02738A to V1F98-67001 per HPPK PR324.

Updated the 3K sHCI PCA part number JC92-02738C to Y1G20-67001 per HPPK PR324.

19 May, 2023 Updated the 2K HCI PCA part number JC92-02738B to Y1G21-67001 per HPPK PR315.

18.1 October, 2022 Minor graphic change in the "Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA" diagram

18.0 July, 2022 Changed the part number for the "Bridge unit" from JC90-01401B to JC90-01772B.

17.0 June, 2022 Changed the life span of the Z8W51A Flow ADF rollers from 100,000 to 200,000 pages.

16.0 February, 2022 Removed the Automatically Straighten menu item from the Scan menu table in the "Control
panel menus" section, as that option is not available.

15.0 January, 2022 Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI frame to indicate that part #14 (Assy -
frame latch sensor front) is orderable.

Updated the exploded view diagram for the 3K sHCI main 1 to include a new part (callout
#17), and updated the 3K sHCI main 1 parts list (table) to include the new item #17 (Latch
bracket frame) and an accompanying footnote.

14.0 October, 2021 Updated Removal and replacement: Fuser unit.

13.0 April, 2021 Part number updates and general edits.

12.0 May, 2020 Part number updates and general edits.

iii
 Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

11.0 April, 2020 SRM migration to SDL Tridion Docs.

Part number updates and general edits.

Updated SSBM sections to current HPPK content. See Stapler/stacker and booklet maker
(SSBM).

10.0 January, 2020 Updated Setting standard tone in image quality problems and solutions. See Setting
standard tone.

Added Red/Magenta hue printouts to image quality problems and solutions. See Red/
Magenta hue printouts.

Added electrical-mechanical diagrams content. See Electrical-mechanical relationships

diagrams

9.0 June, 2019 Updated all inner finisher content. See Inner finisher.

Updated developer unit remove and replace procedure. See Removal and replacement:
Developer unit.

Added right door dampener kit remove and replace. See Removal and replacement: Right
door dampener and lever kit .

Added high-voltage rail remove and replace procedure. See Removal and replacement:
High-voltage rail assembly.

6.0 December, 2018 Added/updated E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.

Added or updated repair topics for the E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series:

● Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)

● Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX)

● Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)

● Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only)

● Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD; du models)

● Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models)

● Removal and replacement: Formatter (du models)

5.0 September, 2018 Added E87640du/E87650du/E87660du series content.

4.0 July, 2018 Updated parts numbers throughout document to remove "SAM-" prefix and updated new
part numbers as identified.

Minor content edits (including graphics)

iv Revision History
Table Revision History (continued)

Revision Revision Date Revision Notes

Number

3.0 November, 2017 Added formatter cabling content

Added Scan in Low remove and replace procedure

Updated code data for Diagnostics and Service Functions

Replaced Product Overview with the UG-style Printer Views and removed the previous
"Machine external view" section.

Updated R&R TOC level to 1.

Replaced references to SAW with WISE and removed QR codes.

Replaced Samsung Paper Jam content with the UG content

Moved specifications out of the appendix to the Product Specifications chapter

Added additional specification content to the Product Specifications chapter from the UG

Removed the lists of tables and figures and the alphabetical and numerical lists of parts

Replaced the glossary with the updated glossary from Topaz

Placed ESD cautions at the beginning of the R&R sections for the main printer and both
finishers.

Removed the Samsung precaution sections

Updated variable list items to refer only to Diamond

Updated part numbers, part descriptions, diagrams, and photos

Reorganized remove and replace chapter (blended into parts and diagrams)

Integrated over 250 new edits into existing content, including updated video links and
part numbers. Reformatted tables and resource pages, added xrefs, and changed critical
terminology.

2.0 July, 2017 Updated TOC to only consist of 3 levels

Add error code and CPMD overview

Added “How to search for documentation” section.

Updated toner average yield data

Remove all occurrences of ITB

Changed all occurrences of #2 Phillips to #2 JIS

1.0 April, 2017 Service manual initial release

v
 Conventions used in this guide

Learn about the conventions used in this publication.

TIP: Tips provide helpful hints or shortcuts.

NOTE: Notes provide important information to explain a concept or to complete a task.

CAUTION: Cautions indicate procedures that you should follow to avoid losing data or damaging the
product.

WARNING! Warnings alert you to specific procedures that you should follow to avoid personal injury,
catastrophic loss of data, or extensive damage to the product.

vi Conventions used in this guide

Table of contents

1 Product specifications and description............................................................................................................................................................................... 1

Printer views ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
Printer front view................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
Printer back view................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
Interface ports..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
Control-panel view............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 3
Inner finisher view ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
Stapler/stacker finisher view .................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Booklet finisher view....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
Specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
Technical specifications............................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
Supported operating systems ................................................................................................................................................................................ 11
Mobile printing solutions............................................................................................................................................................................................ 13
Printer dimensions.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions ............................................................................... 15
Operating-environment range ............................................................................................................................................................................... 15
General specifications ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
Print specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................................18
Scan specifications....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
Copy specifications...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 23
Supplies................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
Maintenance parts ........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
Paper handling specifications .............................................................................................................................................................................. 29
Network and software specifications............................................................................................................................................................. 34
Options...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................38
Feeding system ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Feeding system overview ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
Main components and functions........................................................................................................................................................................46
Cassette................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
Pickup Assembly............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Registration unit .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 52
Tray 1 feed assembly .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53
Fuser unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Fuser unit overview....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
Fuser unit drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................56
Fuser unit temperature control ............................................................................................................................................................................56
Loop control.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................57
Image creation.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................58
Printing process overview........................................................................................................................................................................................58
Imaging unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 59
Toner cartridge.................................................................................................................................................................................................................63
Dynamic security............................................................................................................................................................................................................64

vii
 Intermediate transfer belt unit..............................................................................................................................................................................65
Toner reservoir unit ........................................................................................................................................................................................................67
Laser scanner unit ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................68
Laser scanner assembly overview....................................................................................................................................................................68
Laser scanning optical path ....................................................................................................................................................................................70
Laser synchronizing detectors..............................................................................................................................................................................70
Automatic CPR adjustment.......................................................................................................................................................................................71
Drive system...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................74
Pickup and cassette lift drive..................................................................................................................................................................................74
Feed drive..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................75
Registration drive ............................................................................................................................................................................................................76
Fuser release/exit drive...............................................................................................................................................................................................77
Drive motors........................................................................................................................................................................................................................78
Main drive unit motors ................................................................................................................................................................................................80
Toner supply/reservoir drive....................................................................................................................................................................................81
Engage transfer roller drive .....................................................................................................................................................................................81
Toner collection unit (TCU) drive .......................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Flatbed Scanner System...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Flatbed scanner system overview..................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Scanning system components.............................................................................................................................................................................85
Caution for moving the scanner........................................................................................................................................................................... 91
Document feeder LX (du models) .................................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Document feeder LX overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 92
Document feeder LX electrical parts ..............................................................................................................................................................93
Document feeder LX registration.......................................................................................................................................................................94
Document feeder LX drive system ....................................................................................................................................................................94
Document feeder LX scanning position .........................................................................................................................................................97
Document feeder LX specifications.................................................................................................................................................................98
Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX).............................................................................................................................................98
Flow document feeder overview.........................................................................................................................................................................98
Flow document feeder sensors...........................................................................................................................................................................99
Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor .........................................................................................................101
Flow document feeder drive system...............................................................................................................................................................101
Flow document feeder specifications ..........................................................................................................................................................103
Flow document feeder registration.................................................................................................................................................................104
Flow document feeder scanning position..................................................................................................................................................104
Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor...............................................................................................................105
Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.......................................................................................................................106
Flow ADF z bundles (GX)............................................................................................................................................................................................107
Hardware configuration.......................................................................................................................................................................................................107
Main controller................................................................................................................................................................................................................109
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) .................................................................................................................................... 121
Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) ....................................................................................................................................... 123
Fuser drive assembly ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 125
High voltage power supply (HVPS) board ................................................................................................................................................... 126
Eraser PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 129
Fuser PCA...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................130

viii
 Waste Sensor PCA ......................................................................................................................................................................................................130
Paper Size sensor PCA.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 131
Flow document feeder PCA ................................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Scan joint PCA ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 132
CCDM PCA ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................133
WLED IF PCA.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................134
WLED PCA..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................134
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)..............................................................................................................................................................................................135
High capacity input tray (HCI) .........................................................................................................................................................................................139
Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)...........................................................................................................................................................................143

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.................................................................................................................................................................147

HP service and support .......................................................................................................................................................................................................147
Order parts by authorized service providers......................................................................................................................................................148
Ordering...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................148
Orderable parts ............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 149
How to use parts lists and diagrams......................................................................................................................................................................... 149
ESD precautions....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Service approach.................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Precautions when replacing parts................................................................................................................................................................... 149
Before performing service ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
After performing service ......................................................................................................................................................................................... 151
Post-service test ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 151
Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 152
Cleaning the paper dust stick ............................................................................................................................................................................. 152
Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)..................................................................................................................... 155
Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).........................................................................................................156
Cleaning the scanner glass...................................................................................................................................................................................157
Main parts .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................158
Main assemblies ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................158
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................399
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................402
Exit assemblies .............................................................................................................................................................................................................404
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 425
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 426
Cassettes tray 2/3 ...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 426
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 428
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 429
Main frame assembly............................................................................................................................................................................................... 429
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 493
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................494
Drive system....................................................................................................................................................................................................................494
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................496
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................497
Drive system.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................497
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 507

ix
 Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................508
Rear frame assembly ...............................................................................................................................................................................................508
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 512
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 513
Drive system..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 513
Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................................................................................................571
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................572
Main frame pickup 1 and 2......................................................................................................................................................................................572
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................609
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................610
Main (sub) frame pickup...........................................................................................................................................................................................610
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................616
Numerical parts list......................................................................................................................................................................................................617
Covers....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................617
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................654
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................655
Right door..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................655
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 700
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 701
Tray 1....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 701
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 718
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 719
Right door guide ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 719
Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................................................................................................721
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................722
Right door exit and takeaway...............................................................................................................................................................................722
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 724
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................725
Drive system.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................725
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 727
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................728
ADF (LX models).............................................................................................................................................................................................................728
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 760
Numerical parts list......................................................................................................................................................................................................761
ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)...................................................................................................................................................761
Alphabetical parts list ................................................................................................................................................................................................771
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................772
ADF main frame assembly (LX models) .......................................................................................................................................................772
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 786
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 787
Flow ADF (GX/sGX) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 787
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................804
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................805
Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) ..........................................................................................................................................................................805
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................814
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................815
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX).......................................................................................................................................................................815
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 823
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 824

x
 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) ................................................................................................................................................................................... 824
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................833
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................834
Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)..........................................................................................................................................................................834
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................886
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 887
Image scanner............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 887
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................902
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................903
Image scanner, lower................................................................................................................................................................................................903
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................916
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 917
Dual cassette feeder (DCF)..............................................................................................................................................................................................918
DCF main ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................918
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 941
Numerical parts list.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 942
DCF frame......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 942
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................947
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................948
DCF rear frame..............................................................................................................................................................................................................948
Alphabetical parts list .............................................................................................................................................................................................. 952
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................953
Opt feed drive.................................................................................................................................................................................................................954
DCF second pickup ....................................................................................................................................................................................................955
2000-sheet HCI (department) .......................................................................................................................................................................................956
2K HCI main......................................................................................................................................................................................................................956
2K HCI drive.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................957
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................970
Numerical parts list......................................................................................................................................................................................................971
2K HCI cassette .............................................................................................................................................................................................................972
2K HCI frame ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................973
Alphabetical parts list ...............................................................................................................................................................................................977
Numerical parts list.....................................................................................................................................................................................................978
2K HCI main pickup......................................................................................................................................................................................................979
3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) ......................................................................................980
3K sHCI main 1................................................................................................................................................................................................................980
Alphabetical parts list ..............................................................................................................................................................................................988
Numerical parts list....................................................................................................................................................................................................989
3K sHCI main 3...............................................................................................................................................................................................................989
Alphabetical parts list ............................................................................................................................................................................................1003
Numerical parts list..................................................................................................................................................................................................1004
3K sHCI main 5.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1005
3K sHCI main 6.............................................................................................................................................................................................................1006
Pickup cover unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1007
3K sHCI frame ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................1009

3 Problem solving..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................1011
Control panel messages document (CPMD) ......................................................................................................................................................1011

xi
 Error codes (types and structure) ...................................................................................................................................................................1011
How to search for printer documentation................................................................................................................................................1013
Troubleshooting process .................................................................................................................................................................................................1016
Determine the problem source ........................................................................................................................................................................1016
Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1027
Problem-solving checklist ................................................................................................................................................................................... 1027
Print menu map...........................................................................................................................................................................................................1029
Print current settings pages..............................................................................................................................................................................1029
Print event log...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1030
Pre-boot menu options ..........................................................................................................................................................................................1030
Control panel menus...............................................................................................................................................................................................1048
Clear paper jams....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1139
Paper jam locations..................................................................................................................................................................................................1139
13.A1 tray 1 paper jam...............................................................................................................................................................................................1140
13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam................................................................................................................................................................ 1141
Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI.............................................................................................................................................................1144
Service mode (tech mode; du models)................................................................................................................................................................... 1145
Entering service mode............................................................................................................................................................................................ 1145
Service mode menu tree.......................................................................................................................................................................................1146
Information......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1150
Maintenance counts ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1152
Diagnostics .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1153
Service functions .......................................................................................................................................................................................................1186
Print quality troubleshooting guide...........................................................................................................................................................................1189
Image quality problems and solutions........................................................................................................................................................1189
Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models).....................................................................................................................................................1210
Adjusting the Flow ADF skew ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1212

4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams.......................................................................................................................................................................................1218
Connection diagrams.........................................................................................................................................................................................................1218
Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER) .......................................................................................................................1218
Connection Diagram (Scanner) .......................................................................................................................................................................1219
Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB) ...................................................................................................... 1220
Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)......................................................................................................... 1221
Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)........................................................................................................................................... 1223
Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) ................................................................................................................................................... 1225
Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams ............................................................................................................................................... 1225
Main drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)...................................................................................................................................... 1225
T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) .............................................................................................................................................1227
WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)...................................................................................................................................... 1229
Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) .................................................................................................................................. 1231
Registration unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)....................................................................................................................... 1233
Pickup unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) .................................................................................................................................... 1233
ACR unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific).......................................................................................................................................... 1235
Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ................................................................................ 1235
Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)................................................................1237

xii
 Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)..........................................................1237
Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared).......................................................................... 1238
Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ...................................................................... 1239
MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ................................................................................. 1240
Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) ...............................................................................1242
Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)............................................................ 1244
Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)................................. 1246
Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)............................................................................. 1248
Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) ........................................................................................1250
Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI)........................................................................................................................................... 1252
Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI)................................................................................................................. 1253
Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI).......................................................................................................................................................................... 1253
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)...................................................................................................................................................................... 1254
Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift
motor (DCF/HCI).......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1256
Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI).............................................. 1258
Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI).............................................................. 1259
Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI)..................................................................................................1260
Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) ..................................... 1261
Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI) .................................................................................................................. 1261
Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI)............................................................................................................................................. 1262
Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI) ....................................................................................................... 1263
Main PCAs (SSBM)....................................................................................................................................................................................................1264
Paper detection sensor (SSBM)...................................................................................................................................................................... 1265
Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM)......1266
Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM)........................................................................................................1267
Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM) ..................................................1268
Feed entrance sensor (SSBM).........................................................................................................................................................................1269
Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed
motor (SSBM)..................................................................................................................................................................................................................1271
Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM) ......................................................................................................................1273
Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM)...............................................................1274
Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM) ................................................................................1275
Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM)........................................................................................1276
Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM)...................................1277
Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM) ...........1279
Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM) ............. 1281
Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM) ............................................................................. 1282
Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM).........................................................................................................................................................1283

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) ............................................................................................................................................................ 1285

Product specification and description.................................................................................................................................................................. 1285
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view .......................................................................................................................... 1285
Detailed Specifications..........................................................................................................................................................................................1287
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.....................................................................................................................1293
Service approach.................................................................................................................................................................................................................1368
Precautions when replacing parts................................................................................................................................................................1368
Before performing service ...................................................................................................................................................................................1371
ESD precautions ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................1371

xiii
 After performing service .......................................................................................................................................................................................1371
Post-service test .........................................................................................................................................................................................................1372
Order parts by authorized service providers ........................................................................................................................................1372
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)..........................................................1372
Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)....................................................................................................................................................................1373
Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) ................................................................................................................................................................. 1407
Bridge unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................1427
Covers................................................................................................................................................................................................................................1450
Entrance unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................................1517
Punch unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1523
Tray diverter unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................................1528
Top exit unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1556
Top output tray unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................1582
Main exit unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................................1595
Paddle unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................1621
End fence unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................1654
Tamper unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1688
Stapler unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................1843
Ejector unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1925
Main output tray unit ...............................................................................................................................................................................................2079
Paper holding unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................2138
Buffer unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................................2196
Booklet maker .............................................................................................................................................................................................................2209
Booklet entrance unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 2220
Booklet paddle unit...................................................................................................................................................................................................2237
Booklet end fence unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2250
Booklet presser unit ................................................................................................................................................................................................2272
Booklet tamper unit................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2294
Booklet stapler unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................2350
Booklet fold unit .........................................................................................................................................................................................................2368
Booklet diverter unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2450
Booklet exit unit........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2474
Booklet output tray unit.........................................................................................................................................................................................2492
PCA.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2495
Problem solving...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2513
Control panel message document (CPMD)............................................................................................................................................ 2513
Clear paper jams ....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2513
Finisher system diagram................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2526

6 Inner finisher ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2528

Product specification and description................................................................................................................................................................. 2528
Inner finisher view .................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2528
Detailed specifications ........................................................................................................................................................................................ 2529
Inner finisher system ............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2533
Service approach.................................................................................................................................................................................................................2572
Precautions when replacing parts................................................................................................................................................................2572
Before performing service ................................................................................................................................................................................. 2574
ESD precautions ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2575

xiv
 After performing service .....................................................................................................................................................................................2575
Post-service test ........................................................................................................................................................................................................2575
Order parts by authorized service providers .......................................................................................................................................2575
Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)...................................................................................................................2576
Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)..............................................................................................................................................................2577
Covers................................................................................................................................................................................................................................2587
Entrance unit.................................................................................................................................................................................................................2610
Exit unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2625
Paper support unit ...................................................................................................................................................................................................2644
Paddle unit ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................2733
Tamper unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2755
Stapler unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2866
Ejector unit.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................2893
End fence unit...............................................................................................................................................................................................................2961
Output tray unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................2971
Paper holding unit......................................................................................................................................................................................................3031
Punch unit....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3076
Problem solving.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3090
Control panel message document (CPMD)...........................................................................................................................................3090
Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)...........................................................................................................................................3090
Punch waste full sensor........................................................................................................................................................................................3091
Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor .................................................................................................................3092
Entrance motor ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................3093
Exit sensor .....................................................................................................................................................................................................................3094
Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding
solenoid ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................3095
Paper support motor & home sensor........................................................................................................................................................3096
Front tamper motor and home sensor...................................................................................................................................................... 3097
Rear tamper motor and home sensor.......................................................................................................................................................3098
End fence sensor......................................................................................................................................................................................................3099
Stapler position motor and sensor...............................................................................................................................................................3100
Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor..............................................3101
Output tray motor and sensor .........................................................................................................................................................................3102
Output tray top of stack sensor......................................................................................................................................................................3103
Top cover switch.........................................................................................................................................................................................................3104
Front cover switch.....................................................................................................................................................................................................3105

Appendix A Certificate of Volatility....................................................................................................................................................................................3106

Certificate of Volatility ......................................................................................................................................................................................................3106

Glossary of terms ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 0

Index............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................3110

xv
1 Product specifications and description

You will learn more about the following sub sections:

Printer views
Learn more specifically about the different views of the printer.

Printer front view

Learn about the printer components (front view).

Figure 1-1 Printer front view

1 2
3
17 4
16 5
6
7
15 8
9 10

12

13
14 11

Item Description

1 Automatic document feeder cover (access for clearing jams)

2 Automatic document feeder width guides

3 Automatic document feeder input tray

4 Automatic document feeder output tray

5 Control panel with color touchscreen display (tilts up for easier viewing)

Product specifications and description 1

 Item Description

6 Physical keyboard (Flow models only). Pull the keyboard straight out to use it. (NOTE: Close the keyboard
when it is not in use.)

7 Right door (access for clearing jams)

8 On/off button

9 Tray 1

10 Power switch

11 Power connection

12 Front door (access to the toner cartridges)

13 Tray 2

14 Tray 3

15 Output bin

16 Easy-access USB port. Insert a USB flash drive for printing or scanning without a computer, or to update
the printer firmware. (NOTE: An administrator must enable this port before use.)

17 Hardware integration pocket (for connecting accessory and third-party devices)

Printer back view

Learn about the printer components (back view).

Figure 1-2 Printer rear view

Item Description

1 Formatter cover

2 Interface ports

3 Serial number and product number label

2 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Interface ports
Learn about the printer components (interface ports).

Figure 1-3 Interface ports

Item Description

1 USB port for connecting external USB devices (NOTE: For easy-access USB printing, use the USB port
near the control panel.)

2 Local area network (LAN) Ethernet network port

3 Hi-Speed USB 2.0 printing port

Control-panel view
Learn about the printer components (control-panel).

NOTE: Tilt the control panel for easier viewing.

The Home screen provides access to the printer features and indicates the current status of the printer.

Return to the Home screen at any time by touching the Home button on the printer control panel.

NOTE: The features that appear on the Home screen can vary, depending on the printer
configuration.

Interface ports 3
 Figure 1-4 Printer control panel
2 3 4 5

6
1

Item Button Description

1 Home button Touch the Home button to return to the Home screen.

2 Reset button The Reset button returns the printer to default settings and is always present
if users are not logged in. The Reset button is not present when the Sign Out
button is present. Touch the Reset button to resume and release jobs from the
previous pause state and interrupt mode, reset the quick copy count in the copy
count field, exit special modes, reset the display language and the keyboard
layout.

3 Sign In or Sign Out Touch the Sign In button to access secured features.
button
Touch the Sign Out button to sign out of the printer. The printer restores all
options to the default settings.

NOTE: This button displays only if the administrator has configured the printer
to require permission for access to features.

4 Information button Touch the information button to access a screen that provides access to several
types of printer information. Touch the buttons at the bottom of the screen for
the following information:

● Display Language: Change the language setting for the current user
session.

● Sleep Mode: Place the printer into sleep mode.

● Wi-Fi Direct: View information for how to connect directly to the printer
using a phone, tablet, or other device with Wi-Fi.

● Wireless: View or change wireless connection settings (only when an

optional wireless accessory is installed).

● Ethernet: View or change Ethernet connection settings.

● HP Web Services: View information to connect and print to the printer using
HP Web Services (ePrint).

4 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Item Button Description

5 Help button Touch the Help button to open the embedded help system.

The status line provides information about the overall printer status.

6 Applications area Touch any of the icons to open the application. Swipe the screen sideways to
access more applications.

NOTE: The available applications vary by printer. The administrator can

configure which applications appear and the order in which they appear.

7 Start Copy button Touch the Start Copy button to start a copy job.

8 Home-screen page Indicates the number of pages on the Home screen or in an application. The
indicator current page is highlighted. Swipe the screen sideways to scroll between pages.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the printer components (inner finisher).

Stapler/stacker finisher view

Learn about the printer components (stapler/stacker finisher).

Booklet finisher view

Learn about the printer components (booklet finisher).

Inner finisher view 5

 Specifications
Learn about the specifications.

Technical specifications
Learn technical specifications for model bundles.

NOTE: Hole punch accessories are optional for the stapler/stacker, inner finisher, and booklet maker
accessories.

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
capacity)

Tray 2 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

Tray 3 (520-sheet Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

capacity)

2 x 520-sheet dual Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

cassette feeder

2,000-sheet high- Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

3,000-sheet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

side-mount high-
capacity input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Stapler/stacker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing
accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

6 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Booklet maker Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

finishing
accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

Inner finisher Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

2/3 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

2/4 hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

Swedish hole Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

punch accessory
(hole punch
accessories are
optional)

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

printing

Connectivity 10/100/1000 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Ethernet LAN
connection with
IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Easy-access USB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

port for printing
without a
computer and
upgrading the
firmware

Hardware Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Integration Pocket
for connecting
accessory and
third-party devices

Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

HP Secure High-
Performance Hard
Disk

Technical specifications 7
 Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Security HP Trusted Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

Platform Module

Control-panel Color touchscreen Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

display control panel

Retractable Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

keyboard supported supported supported

Print Prints 40 pages Supported Supported Not Not Not Not

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper.

Prints 50 pages Not Not Supported Supported Not Not

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper

Prints 60 pages Not Not Not Not Supported Supported

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported supported
on A4 and on
letter-size paper

Easy-access Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

USB printing
(no computer
required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages Supported Not Supported Not Supported Not
per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper

Scans 120 pages Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

per minute (ppm) supported supported supported
on A4 and letter-
size paper

250-page Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

document feeder
with dual-head
scanning for
single-pass duplex
copying and
scanning

HP EveryPage Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

Technologies supported supported supported
including
ultrasonic multi-
feed detection

8 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-1 E87640dn, E87640z, E87650dn, E87650z, E87650z, E87660dn, E87660z (continued)

Model number Item E87640dn E87640z E87650dn E87650z E87660dn E87660z

Product number X3A87A X3A86A X3A90A X3A89A X3A93A X3A92A

Embedded Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

optical character supported supported supported
recognition (OCR)
provides the ability
to convert printed
pages into text
that can be edited
or searched using
a computer

SMART Label Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

feature provides supported supported supported
paper-edge
detection for
automatic page
cropping

Automatic page Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

orientation for supported supported supported
pages that have
at least 100
characters of text

Automatic tone Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

adjustment supported supported supported
sets contrast,
brightness, and
background
removal for each
page

Digital Send Send documents Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported
to E-mail, USB, and
shared folders on
a network

Send documents Not Supported Not Supported Not Supported

to SharePoint® supported supported supported

Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

Paper handling Tray 1 (100-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

Tray 2 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

Tray 3 (520-sheet capacity) Supported Supported Supported

2 x 520-sheet dual cassette Optional Optional Optional

feeder

2,000-sheet high-capacity Optional Optional Optional

input tray

3,000-sheet side-mount high- Optional Optional Optional

capacity input tray

Printer cabinet Optional Optional Optional

Technical specifications 9
 Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

Stapler/stacker finishing Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)

Booklet maker finishing Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)

Inner finisher accessory Optional Optional Optional

(hole punch accessories are
optional)

2/3 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional

(hole punch accessories are
optional)

2/4 hole punch accessory Optional Optional Optional

(hole punch accessories are
optional)

Swedish hole punch Optional Optional Optional

accessory (hole punch
accessories are optional)

HP Job separator Optional Optional Optional

Automatic duplex printing Supported Supported Supported

Connectivity 10/100/1000 Ethernet LAN Supported Supported Supported

connection with IPv4 and IPv6

Hi-Speed USB 2.0 Supported Supported Supported

Easy-access USB port for Supported Supported Supported

printing without a computer
and upgrading the firmware

Hardware Integration Pocket Supported Supported Supported

for connecting accessory
and third-party devices

Memory 7 GB base memory Supported Supported Supported

Mass storage 2 x 320 GB HP Secure High- Supported Supported Supported

Performance Hard Disk

Security HP Trusted Platform Module Supported Supported Supported

Control-panel display Color touchscreen control Supported Supported Supported

panel

Retractable keyboard Not supported Not supported Not supported

Print Prints 40 pages per minute Supported Not supported Not supported
(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper.

Prints 50 pages per minute Not supported Supported Not supported

(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper

Prints 60 pages per minute Not supported Not supported Supported

(ppm) on A4 and on letter-size
paper

10 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-2 E87640du, E87650du, , E87660du (continued)

Model number Item E87640du E87650du E87660du

Product number 5CM64A 5CM65A 5CM66A

Easy-access USB printing (no Supported Supported Supported

computer required)

Fax Optional Optional Optional

Copy and Scan Scans 90 pages per minute Supported Supported Supported
(ppm) on A4 and letter-size
paper

Scans 80-simplex/160-duplex Supported Supported Supported

images per minute (ipm) on
A4 and letter-size paper (LX
du models only)

100-page document feeder Supported Supported Supported

with dual-head scanning for
single-pass duplex copying
and scanning

HP EveryPage Technologies Not supported Not supported Not supported

including ultrasonic multi-
feed detection

Embedded optical character Not supported Not supported Not supported

recognition (OCR) provides
the ability to convert printed
pages into text that can be
edited or searched using a
computer

SMART Label feature Not supported Not supported Not supported

provides paper-edge
detection for automatic page
cropping

Automatic page orientation Not supported Not supported Not supported

for pages that have at least
100 characters of text

Automatic tone adjustment Not supported Not supported Not supported

sets contrast, brightness, and
background removal for each
page

Digital Send Send documents to E-mail, Supported Supported Supported

USB, and shared folders on a
network

Send documents to Not supported Not supported Not supported

SharePoint®

Supported operating systems

Learn about supported operating systems.

The following information applies to the printer-specific Windows PCL 6 and HP print drivers for macOS
and to the software installer.

Windows: The HP Software Installer can be downloaded from the printer support website for this printer
and installs the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, or the "HP PCL-6"

Supported operating systems 11

 version 4 print driver, depending on the Windows operating system, along with optional software when
using the software installer.

Download the "HP PCL.6" version 3 print driver, the "HP PCL 6" version 3 print driver, and the "HP PCL-6"
version 4 print driver from the printer-support website for this printer: www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp
or www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp.

macOS: Mac computers are supported with this printer. Download HP Easy Start either from 123.hp.com/
LaserJet or from the Printer Support page, and then use HP Easy Start to install the HP print driver.
HP Easy Start is not included in the HP Software Installer.

1. Go to 123.hp.com/LaserJet.

2. Follow the steps provided to download the printer software.

Linux: For information and print drivers for Linux, go to www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting.

UNIX: For information and print drivers for UNIX®, go to www.hp.com/go/unixmodelscripts.

Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the Notes
web)

Windows® XP SP3, 32- The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
bit installed for this operating system as part of the Windows XP in April 2009. HP will continue to
software installation. provide best effort support for the discontinued
XP operating system. Some features and page
sizes in the print driver are not supported.

Windows Vista®, 32-bit The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
installed for this operating system as part of the Windows Vista in April 2012. HP will continue to
software installation. provide best effort support for the discontinued
Vista operating system. Some features and page
sizes in the print driver are not supported.

Windows Server 2003 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
SP2, 32-bit available for download from the printer-support Windows Server 2003 in July 2010. HP will
website. Download the driver, and then use the continue to provide best effort support for the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it. discontinued Server 2003 operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

Windows 7 SP1, 32-bit The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
and 64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the
software installation.

Windows 8, 32-bit and The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is Windows 8 RT support is provided through
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
software installation.

Windows 8.1, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is Windows 8.1 RT support is provided through
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the Microsoft IN OS Version 4, 32- bit driver.
software installation.

Windows 10, 32-bit and The "HP PCL-6" V4 printer-specific print driver is
64-bit installed for this operating system as part of the
software installation.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL.6" printer-specific print driver is Microsoft retired mainstream support for
SP2, 32-bit available for download from the printer-support Windows Server 2008 in January 2015. HP will
website. Download the driver, and then use the continue to provide best effort support for the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it. discontinued Server 2008 operating system.
Some features and page sizes in the print driver
are not supported.

12 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-3 Supported operating systems and print drivers (continued)

Operating system Print driver installed (from the software on the Notes
web)

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
SP2, 64-bit available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2008 The "HP PCL 6" printer-specific print driver is
R2, SP 1, 64-bit available for download from the printer-support
website. Download the driver, and then use the
Microsoft Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012, The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.

Windows Server 2012 The PCL 6 printer-specific print driver is available

R2, 64-bit for download from the printer-support website.
Download the driver, and then use the Microsoft
Add Printer tool to install it.

macOS 10.12 (Sierra), To install the print driver, download HP Easy Start
macOS 10.11 (El from 123.hp.com/LaserJet.
Capitan), and macOS
10.10 (Yosemite) Follow the steps provided to install the printer
software and print driver.

NOTE: Supported operating systems can change. For a current list of supported operating systems,
go to www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp for HP's all-inclusive
help for the printer.

NOTE: For details on client and server operating systems and for HP UPD driver support for this
printer, go to www.hp.com/go/upd. Under Additional information, click the links.

Table 1-4 Minimum system requirements

Windows macOS

● An Internet connection ● Internet connection

● Dedicated USB 1.1 or 2.0 connection or a network ● 1 GB of available hard-disk space

connection

● 2 GB of available hard-disk space

Mobile printing solutions

Learn what HP offers for mobile printing solutions.

HP offers multiple mobile and ePrint solutions to enable easy printing to an HP printer from a laptop,
tablet, smartphone, or other mobile device. To see the full list and to determine the best choice, go to HP
Customer Support - Knowledge Base.

● Wi-Fi Direct

● HP ePrint via email (Requires HP Web Services to be enabled and the printer to be registered with
HP Connected)

Mobile printing solutions 13

 ● HP ePrint app (Available for Android, iOS, and Blackberry)

● HP All-in-One Remote app for iOS and Android devices

● HP ePrint software

● Google Cloud Print

● AirPrint

● Android Printing

Printer dimensions
Learn about printer dimensions.

NOTE: A color printer model is shown in the figure below. However, the dimension information applies
to mono and color printers.

2
3 2
3

Table 1-5 Printer dimensions

Item Normal operating dimensions Maximum operating dimensions

Height 932.2 mm (36.7 in) 1389.4 mm (54.7 in)

Depth 771.1 mm (30.3 in) 1676 mm (66 in)

Width 585 mm (23 in) 1134 mm (47 in)

Weight Mono models (82XXX series): 95.6 kg

(210.8 lb)

Color models (87XXX series): 113.1 kg

(249.3 lb)

NOTE: HP recommends that 30 mm (1.81 in) be added to the printer dimensions provided in this
chapter to make sure there is sufficient space to open doors and covers, and to provide proper
ventilation.

14 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain power
specifications.

See www.hp.com/support/ljE87600mfp or www.hp.com/support/ljE87640mfp for current information.

CAUTION: Power requirements are based on the country/region where the printer is sold. Do not
convert operating voltages. This will damage the printer and void the printer warranty.

Operating-environment range
In order to operate properly, the printer must be in an environment that meets certain specifications.

Table 1-6 Operating-environment specifications

Environment Recommended Storage

Temperature 15° to 30°C (59° to 86°F) Not available

Relative humidity 20% to 80% relative humidity (RH) Not available

General specifications
Learn about the general specifications.

Table 1-7 General specifications

Item Description Specification

Processor CPU 1.5 GHz (Quad Core)

User Interface Operational Panel 8 inch touch screen

LED 2 (Power/Status)

Key/Button 1 (Power)

Memory Total 7 GB (3 GB Formatter + 4 GB)

Storage Standard 320 GB HDD

Interface USB (Host) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (Device) Yes (Hi-Speed USB 3.0, 2.0)

USB (EDI) N/A

Wired LAN Standard (Ethernet 10/100/1G Base TX)

Additional Wired LAN Support Yes (optional)

Wireless LAN/NFC ● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n + NFC

Active Type)

● Optional (IEEE 802.11b/g/n/ac + BLE

+ NFC Active Type)

Warmup Time From Power off (power on to ready) 23 sec

From Sleep 12 sec

Power consumption, electrical specifications, and acoustic emissions 15

 Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Power Consumption Ready Less than 30 W

Normal operation Less than 900 W

Max/Peak Less than 1300 W

Sleep/Low Power Mode Less than 2.0 W

TEC (Default Mode) ● E87640: 2.1 kWh

● E87650: 2.717 kWh

● E87660: 3.05 kWh

Power Requirement ● Input voltage (Europe): AC 220–240 V (±6%)

● Input voltage (USA): AC 110–127 V (±10%)

● Input voltage (AP): AC 220–240 V (±6%)

● Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz (±2Hz)

16 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Acoustic Noise Level (Sound Power/ Printing Mode

Pressure)
Simplex

● E87640, E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 54 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 56 dBA

● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 57 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 59 dBA

Duplex

● E87640, E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 57 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 59 dBA

● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 61 dBA

Copying Mode

Simplex

● E87640

– Tray 2: Less than 58 dBA

– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays:

Less than 60 dBA

● E87650, E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 59 dBA

– Tray 1 (MP)/Optional trays:

Less than 61 dBA

Duplex

● E87640

– Tray 2: Less than 60 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 62 dBA

● E87650

– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA

– Tray 1/Optional trays: Less

than 63 dBA
General specifications 17
● E87660

– Tray 2: Less than 61 dBA

 Table 1-7 General specifications (continued)

Item Description Specification

Dimensions (W x D x H) Set (without stand) ● 585 x 771.1 x 932.2 mm (23 x 30.3 x

36.7 in)

Weight Set (with supplies) ● 113.1 kg (249.3 lb)

Recommended Monthly Print Volume ● E87640: 40,000 pages

● E87650: 45,000 pages

● E87660: 50,000 pages

Max Monthly Duty Cycle ● E87640: 200,000 pages

● E87650: 250,000 pages

● E87660: 330,000 pages

Print specifications
Learn about the print specifications.

18 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-8 Print specifications

Item Specification

Print speed Simplex ● E87640

– Up to 40 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 21 ppm in A3 (21 ppm in

11x17)

● E87650

– Up to 50 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 26 ppm in A3 (26 ppm in

11x17)

● E87660

– Up to 60 ppm in A4 (50 ppm in

Letter)

– Up to 31 ppm in A3 (31 ppm in

11x17)

Duplex (Simplex to Duplex) ● E87640

– Up to 40 ipm in A4 (40 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 21 ipm in A3 (21 ipm in

11x17)

● E87650

– Up to 50 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 26 ipm in A3 (26 ipm in

11x17)

● E87660

– Up to 60 ipm in A4 (50 ipm in

Letter)

– Up to 31 ipm in A3 (31 ipm in

11x17)

FPOT From Ready ● E87640: as fast as 9.9 s

● E87650: as fast as 8.9 s

● E87660: as fast as 8.3 s

From Sleep ● E87640: as fast as 21.9 s

● E87650: as fast as 20.9 s

● E87660: as fast as 20.3 s

Resolution 1200 x 1200 dpi (Full Speed)

Printer Language PCL5/PCL6(XL)/PostScript Level 3/PDF

v1.7

Print specifications 19
 Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Font PCL 95 scalable fonts (including OCR-A/OCR-

B)/1 Bitmap

PostScript 3 136 scalable fonts

Supporting Operating Systems Windows ● Windows XP (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2003 Server (32-bit, 64-

bit)

● Windows Vista (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2008 Server (32-bit, 64-

bit)

● Windows 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 2008 Server R2 (64-bit)

● Windows 8 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows 8.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Windows Server 2012 (64-bit)

● Windows Server 2012 R2 (64-bit)

Linux ● Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5, 6 (32-bit,

64-bit)

● Fedora 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20

(32-bit, 64-bit)

● OpenSuSE 11.2, 11.3, 11.4, 12.1, 12.2,

12.3, 13.1 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Ubuntu 10.04, 11.04, 11.10, 12.04, 12.10,

13.04, 13.10, 14.04 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 10,

11 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Debian 6, 7 (32-bit, 64-bit)

● Mint 13, 14, 15, 16 (32-bit, 64-bit)

Mac OS Mac OS X 10.6-10.10

Direct Print PRN/PDF/TIFF/JPEG/XPS

20 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-8 Print specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Print Features ● WSD print

● Secure print

● Stored print

● Booklet

● N-up

● Cover page

● Barcode

● Eco

● Poster

● Glossy

● Watermark

● Tray priority setting

● Auto tray setting

● Tray protection

● USB print

● Secure PDF print

● Google Cloud print

Scan specifications
Learn about the scan specifications.

Table 1-9 Scan specifications

Item Specification

Scan Speed Scan to folder speeds DN bundles (black and

(hardware) white, gray scale, and color)

● Simplex: 90 ipm @ 300

DPI

● 80/160 ipm (du models

only)

● Duplex: 180 ipm @ 300

DPI

Z bundles (black and white,

gray scale, and color)

● Simplex: 120 ipm @

300 DPI

● Duplex: 240 ipm @ 300

DPI

Scan specifications 21
 Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Color Mode Mono/Gray/Color

Compatibility Network TWAIN/Network

SANE

Scan Method MMT

File Formats ● PDF

● Searchable PDF

● Compact PDF

● PDF Encryption

● Digital Signature in
PDF

● PDF/A

● Single-Page PDF

● Multi-page PDF

● TIFF

● Single-Page TIFF

● Multi-page TIFF

● XPS

● Single-Page XPS

● Multi-page XPS

● JPEG

Resolution Optical (ADF) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Optical (Image Scanner) Up to 600 x 600 dpi

Enhanced (ADF) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Enhanced (Image Scanner) Up to 4800 x 4800 dpi

Scan Destinations ● Email

● FTP

● SMB

● HDD

● USB

● WSD

● PC

● Internet FAX

Multi-destinations Yes

22 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-9 Scan specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Communication Protocol ● SMTP (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)

● POP3 (IPv4, IPv6, SSL/

TLS)

● FTP (IPv4, IPv6)

● SMB (IPv4, IPv6)

● WSD

● T4Net

Scan ADF ● Min. A6 SEF 105 mm x

Size 148 mm (4.13 in x 5.83)

● Max. 297 mm x 437

mm (11.7 in x 17.2 in)

Image Scanner Max. 297 mm x 437 mm (11.7

in x 17.2 in)

Scan Original Types Text/Text & Photo/Photo

Copy specifications
Learn about the copy specifications.

Copy specifications 23
 Table 1-10 Copy specifications

Item Specification

Copy Speed Single Document Multiple Copy (SDMC) ● E87640

– Up to 40 cpm in A4

● E87650

– Up to 50 cpm in A4

● E87660

– Up to 60 cpm in A4

Multiple Document Multiple Copy ● E87640

(MDMC)
– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 40
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 40
ipm in A4/Letter

● E87650

– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 50
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 50
ipm in A4/Letter

● E87660

– Simplex to Simplex: Up to 60
cpm in A4/Letter

– Duplex to Simplex: Up to 60
ipm in A4/Letter

FCOT From Ready ● E87640: 6.1 s

● E87650: 5.1 s

● E87660: 4.5 s

Resolution Flow ADF ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Image Scanner ● Scan: 600 x 600 dpi

● Printing: 600 x 600 dpi

Reduce/Enlarge Flow ADF 25–400% in 1% increments

Image Scanner 25–400% in 1% increments

Preset 25% / 50% A3→A5 / 61% A3→B5 /

64% Ledger→Letter / 70% A3→A4 |
B4→B5 | A4→A5 / 77% Ledger→Legal /
78% Legal→Letter / 81% B4→A4 |
B5→A5 / 86% A3→B4 | A4→B5 / 104%
Executive→Letter / 115% B4→A3 / 121%
Legal→Ledger / 122% A4→B4 / 129%
Letter→Ledger / 141% A4→A3 | A5→A4 /
150% / 200% A5→A3 / 400%

Darkness Control 11 levels

24 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-10 Copy specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Contrast Control 11 levels

Multi Copy 1–9,999

Duplex Copy Built-in

Copy Original Type ● Text

● Text and Printed Photo

● Text and Glossy Photo

● Newspaper

● Printed Photo

● Glossy Photo

● Copied Original

● Map

● Light Original

Copy Features ● ID Copy

● N-up

● Booklet

● Image Repeat

● Auto Fit

● Book Copy

● Watermark

● Image Overlay

● Stamp

● Covers

● Job Build

● Preview

● Erase Edge

● Image Shift

● Image Adjustment

● Background Adjustment

Supplies
Learn about the required toner cartridges and TCU.

Supplies 25
 Table 1-11 Supplies

Item Product number Service part number Average yield

Black toner cartridge1 W9050MC X3A92-67904 Approx. 54,400 pages

Standard HP Black Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Black toner cartridge2 W9050MS Not applicable Approx. 12,000 pages

Introductory

Cyan toner cartridge1 W9051MC X3A92-67901 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Cyan Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Cyan toner cartridge2 W9051MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

Magenta toner cartridge1 W9053MC X3A92-67902 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Magenta Managed LJ

Toner Cartridge

Magenta toner cartridge2 W9053MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

Yellow toner cartridge1 W9052MC X3A92-67903 Approx. 52,000 pages

Standard HP Yellow Managed LJ Toner

Cartridge

Yellow toner cartridge2 W9052MS Not applicable Approx. 10,000 pages

Introductory

YMCK kit W5059MS

Introductory

TCU W9058MC Approx. 71,000 pages

1Print cartridge life is approximate, based on average A4 /Letter-size page count with ISO coverage.
Declared cartridge yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19798. Actual yields vary considerably based
on images printed and other factors. For more information, visit www.hp.com/go/learnaboutsupplies.
2Available in APJ countries/regions only.

NOTE: Depending on the print pattern and job mode used, the lifespan of the consumable can vary.

IMPORTANT: Toner cartridges or other supplies must be purchased in the same country/region as
the printer being used. Otherwise, new toner cartridges or other supplies will be incompatible with the
printer. This is due to differing configurations of toner cartridges and other supplies according to the
conditions of a specific country/region.

Maintenance parts
Learn about the printer maintenance parts.

26 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 HP recommends replacing the following maintenance parts at specific intervals to make sure the printer
produces quality copies and to extend the service life of the printer.

Some of the printer parts have a shorter lifespan than the life of the printer.

Table 1-12 Maintenance parts

Item Product number Life Remark

Developer unit cyan Z7Y69A 720,000 pages

Developer unit magenta Z7Y72A 720,000 pages

Developer unit yellow Z7Y73A 720,000 pages

Developer unit black Z7Y68A 720,000 pages

OPC drum unit cyan W9055MC Approx. 140,000pages

OPC drum unit magenta

OPC drum unit yellow

OPC drum unit black W9054MC Approx. 160,000pages

Fuser unit (220V) Z7Y76A 360,000 pages

Fuser unit (1100V) Z7Y75A 360,000 pages

Intermediate transfer belt Z7Y78A 430,000 pages Clean the CPR sensor after
(ITB) replacing the ITB.

ITB cleaner Z7Y80A 180,000 pages

Transfer roller assembly Z7Y90A 360,000 pages

Pick/Feed/Reverse Z9M01A 360,000 pages

(separation) roller (for Tray 2-
X)

Tray 1 (MP) Pick/Feed/Reverse Z7Y88A 200,000 pages

(separation) Roller

Flow ADF pick roller assembly Z8W50A 200,000 pages

(GX and sGX z/dn models)

Flow ADF reverse (separation) Z8W51A 200,000 pages

roller assembly (GX and sGX
z/dn models)

ADF pick roller assy (LX du Z7Y64A 200,000

models)

ADF reverse (separation) Z7Y65A 100,000

roller assy (LX du models)

NOTE: Depending on print patterns and the job mode used, maintenance part lifespans vary. See
Replacing the maintenance part for further instructions.

Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Maintenance parts 27
 Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray1(MP)) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray2,3) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray2,3) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) (Tray2,3) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Feed Roller (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Regi Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

(PH) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Duplex (1,2,3) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

(PH) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set EXIT Roller (1,2) Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
(PH) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path—Set Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) (Tray 2,3) dust.

Paper Path—Set Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path—Set Regi Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path—Set Paper dust brush Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
(PH) dust.

Paper Path— Pickup Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Forward Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Retard Roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray4,5,6) paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Pre-Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI (Tray 4,5,6) dust.

Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
DCF/HCI/sHCI dust.

28 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-13 Maintenance intervals (continued)

Device Item 100K 120K 200K 360K PM Note

Paper Path— Finisher Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher Roller paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Booklet Paddle Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher Roller paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Ejector Reverse Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher Roller paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Tamper Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Ejector Base Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Feeding Roller Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

Finisher paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Paper Path— Punch Chad Bin Clean Empty the chad bin.
Finisher

Paper Path— Feed Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher dust.

Paper Path— Ejector Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (2K/3K Finisher) dust.

Paper Path— End fence Sensor Clean Use dry cloth to remove toner and paper
Finisher (Inner Finisher) dust.

Scanner—ADF ADF Pick-Up roller Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free
Assembly paper moistened with water to clean
maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

roller Assembly (Gx paper moistened with water to clean
- z bundle) maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF ADF Separation Replace Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

roller Assembly (Lx paper moistened with water to clean
- dn, du) maintenance parts.

Scanner—ADF White sheet / White Clean Use a damp cloth or lint-free

sponge / Feed paper moistened with water to clean
roller maintenance parts.

Perform maintenance tasks as needed during a service visit for parts replacement.

Paper handling specifications

Learn about the paper handling specifications.

Paper handling specifications 29

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications

Item Specification

Input Capacity Standard 1040 sheets

Multipurpose 100 sheets

Maximum 6140 sheets

NOTE: Tray 1 (MP) (100) + 2 Tray (1040) + HCI bottom (2000) + sHCI (3000)

30 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Standard Cassette Capacity ● 520 sheets x 2 (Based on Xerox Premier 80g/m2)

Tray
● Envelope: 50 sheets (only Tray 2 support)

NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No.10, No. 9

Media Sizes ● Tray2 : 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 297 mm x 390 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 11.69 in x

15.35 in)

● Tray3 : 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (5.5 in x 7.17 in — 12.59 in

x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Thick Cardstock

● Heavy Cardstock

● Extra Heavy Cardstock 1

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 ,2 ,3 4

● Label

● Transparency

● Envelope (Cassette 1 Only)

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 70-90 g/m² (18.5-24 lb/ Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91-105 g/m² (25-28 lb/ Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper : 106-176 g/m² (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 1 Paper : 177-220 g/m²

● Extra Heavy Weight 2: 221–256 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Extra Heavy Weight 3: 257–300 g/m2

●
Paper handling specifications
Thick Cardstock: 164–216 g/m2 (Duplex)
31

● Heavy Cardstock: 217–256 g/m2 (Duplex)

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Tray 1 Capacity ● Plain Paper: 100 sheets at 80 g/m2

● Envelopes: 10 sheets at 75 g/m2

NOTE: Supported Envelopes: Monarch, DL, C4, C5, C6, No. 10, No. 9

● Labels: 20 sheets at 120–159 g/m2

● Thick Paper: 10 sheets at 176 g/m2

Media Sizes 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2 ,3 ,4

● Envelope

● Transparency

● Label

Media Weight ● 60 to 256 g/m2: Simplex, Duplex

● 257 to 325 g/m2: Simplex

● Envelope: 75–90 g/m2, Simplex

● Label: 120–150 g/m2, Simplex

Sensing Paper Empty Detect: Yes

Paper Size Detect: Yes

32 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

ADF Capacity 250 sheets (GX/sGX)

100 sheets (LX)

Document Size ● Width: 105 mm — 297 mm (5 in — 11.7 in)

● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5in — 17 in)

Document Weight ● Simplex: 60–163 g/m2 (11.25–43.24 lb) (Guarantee) 42–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)

● Duplex: 60–163 g/m2 (13.25–43.25 lb) (Guarantee) 50–60 g/m2 and 163–
220 g/m2 (Support)

Auto Detected Size A3/A4/A5/A6 SEF/B4/B5/Letter/Legal/Statement/Folio/Executive

Image Scanner Document Size ● Width: 140 mm — 297 mm (5.5 in — 11.7 in)

● Length: 140 mm — 432 mm (5.5 in — 17 in)

Output Capacity Standard 500 sheets, face down

Maximum 615 sheets [500 sheets (Standard) + 125 sheets (Job Separator)]

Printing Size Maximum Size 320 mm x 457 mm (12.6 in x 18 in)

Minimum Size 98 mm x 139.7 mm (3.8 in x 5.5 in)

Maximum Printing Area Simplex Top: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 1.5 mm

Duplex Top: 4.2 +/- 2 mm / Left: 4.2 +/- 2 mm

Paper handling specifications 33

 Table 1-14 Paper handling specifications (continued)

Item Specification

Duplex Printing Support Built-in

Media Sizes 139.7 mm x 182 mm — 320 mm x 457 mm (5.5 in x 7.2 in — 12.6 in x 18 in)

Media Types ● Plain

● Thin

● Bond

● Hole Punched

● Pre-Printed

● Recycled

● Thin Cardstock

● Letterhead

● Thick

● Cotton

● Colored

● Archive

● Thin Glossy

● Thick Glossy

● Heavy Glossy

● Heavy Weight

● Extra Heavy Weight 1, 2

Media weight 16–17 lb (60 to 256 g/m2)

Network and software specifications

Learn about the network and software specifications.

Network interface
Learn about the network interface.

34 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-15 Network interface

Item Specifications

Network OS

Windows

● XP (32/64 bit)

● 2003 (32/64 bit)

● Vista (32/64 bit)

● Windows 7

● Windows 8

Mac

● Mac OS 10.5 –10.8

Linux

● RedHat 8–9

● Fedora Core 1–4

● Mandrake 9.2–10.1

● SuSE 8.2–9.2

Novell

● Netware 5.x, 6.x (TCP/IP Only)

Others

● Unix (HP-UX, Solaris, SumOS, SCO)

Network Protocols TCP/IP TCP/IPv4, HTTP, SNMPv1/v2c/v3, LDAP,

SMTP, SSL/TLS, IPSec, DNS, WINS, SLP,
Bonjour, SSDP, DDNS, DHCP/BOOTP,
IPv6

IPX/SPX No

Ether Talk No

NetBIOS over TCP/IP Yes

Others HTTPS, IPSec, 802.1x

IP Addressing Static IP Yes

Auto IP Yes

BOOTP Yes

DHCP Yes

Network interface 35
 Table 1-15 Network interface (continued)

Item Specifications

SNMP/MIB Access MIB-2 (RFC 1213) Yes

Host Resource MIB (RFC 2790) Yes

Printer MIB (RFC 3805) Yes

Finisher MIB (RFC 3806) Yes

Private MIB Yes

HP Compatibility Yes — Partially

SNMP Trap Yes

Printing Protocols Windows Printing (SMB) No

LPR/LPD Yes

IPP Yes

Netware I-Print No

Netware NDPS No

Ether Talk No

Port 9100 Yes

Device Discovery DNS Yes

Dynamic DNS Yes

Multicast DNS (Bonjoure) Yes

WSD (including Print and Scan) Yes (Print and Scan)

SLP Yes

uPNP (SSDP) Yes

Software and solutions

Learn about the software and solutions.

36 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Table 1-16 Software and solutions

Item Specifications

Application Anyweb Print N/A

Easy Printer Manager Windows/Mac

Easy Color Manager Windows/Mac

Easy Document Creator Windows

Net PC Fax Windows/Mac

Direct Printing Utility Windows

Easy Deployment Manager Windows

Easy Eco Driver Windows

Universal Printer Driver Windows

Universal Scan Driver Windows

Mobile Printing Google Cloud Print (GCP) Yes

Airprint Yes

Smart App Smart Workspace Yes

Workbook Composer Yes

Smart Color Manager Yes

Smart Service App Yes

Hancom Office Yes

Solution Device Management Fleet Admin Pro (UniThru)

Output Management CounThru Enterprise/Pro

Document Management and SmarThru Workflow 3.0

Distribution

Security SecuThur Pro 1.0

Mobility SCP 1.0 (14.09)

Security Authentication (Local) Yes

Authentication (Network) Yes (SMB/Kerberos/LDAP/IPSec/EAP)

IP Address Filtering Yes (IPv4 Filtering/IPv6 Filtering/MAC

Filtering)

HDD Overwrite (Standard) 9

HDD Overwrite (Maximum Overwrites) Yes

Secure Print Yes

Encrypted Secure Print Yes

Encrypted PDF Mode (Encrypted Yes

Scanning)

IP Sec Yes

Smart Card Authentication Yes

Software and solutions 37

 Options
Learn about printer options and accessories.

Optional configurations
Learn about optional configurations.

Figure 1-5 Options

1 2
9
3
8 5

7 6 4

Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations

Item Description Product number

1 HP Color LaserJet Managed MFP E87640

E87640, E87650, E87660
● dn model: X3A87A

● du model: 5CM64A

● z model: X3A86A

E87650

● dn model: X3A90A

● du model: 5CM65A

● z model: X3A89A

E87660

● dn model: X3A93A

● du model: 5CM66A

● z model: X3A92A

2 HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G16A

3 HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Y1G21A

Tray Department

4 HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder

5 HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1G20A

38 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-17 Printer options and configurations (continued)

Item Description Product number

6 HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/3 accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/4 accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

Swedish accessory

7 HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G10A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/3 accessory

● Y1G11A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

2/4 accessory

● Y1G12A — HP LaserJet Hole Punch

Swedish accessory

8 HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A

The following punch kits are available:

● Y1G02A — HP LaserJet Inner

Finisher Hole 2/3 punch

● Y1G03A — HP LaserJet Inner

Finisher Hole 2/4 Punch

● Y1G04A — HP LaserJet Inner

Finisher Swedish Punch

9 HP LaserJet Department Job Separator Y1G15A

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A

Department
NOTE: Not shown in configuration.

The following accessories are also

available:

● Y1G22A#BGJ — HP LaserJet
Paper Tray Heaters Accessory
Department (110V)

● Y1G22A#B19 — HP LaserJet
Paper Tray Heaters Accessory
Department (220V)

Options list
Learn about the options list.

Options list 39
 Table 1-18 Options list

Item Product numbers Remark

HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Y1G168

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Y1F98A

Feeder

HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Y1F21A

Tray Department

HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Y1F20A

Fax Kit

Fax Multiline Kit

Foreign interface harness (FIH) Kit B5L31A Service part: B5L31-67902

HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Y1G01A

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Department
For HCI/sHCI

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#BGJ For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Accessory Department (110V)
For HCI/sHCI

HP LaserJet Paper Tray Heaters Y1G22A#B19 For dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Accessory Department (220V)
For HCI/sHCI

Wireless/NFC Kit 3JN69A HP JetDirect 3100w BLE/NFC/Wireless

accessory

Wireless/NFC/BLE Kit

Additional Network Kit (Dual Network Kit)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Y1G00A

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G18A

HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Y1G07A

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Y1G02A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Punch Asia, and Africa)

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4 Y1G03A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)
Punch

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Y1G04A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
Punch

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory Y1G10A Two and three hole punch (for America,
Asia, and Africa)

HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory Y1G11A Two and four hole punch (for Europe)

HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Y1G12A Swedish four hole punch (for Sweden)
Accessory

HP LaserJet Inner/Booklet Finisher Y1G13A ● Regular staples for the HP LaserJet

Staples Inner Finisher

NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet ● Regular saddle staples for the

Finisher and HP LaserJet Stapler/ HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher
Stacker Finisher have two staple slots.

40 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-18 Options list (continued)

Item Product numbers Remark

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Y1G14A ● Regular staples for HP LaserJet

Staples Stapler/Stacker Finisher

NOTE: The HP LaserJet Booklet

Finisher and HP LaserJet Stapler/
Stacker Finisher have two staple slots.

Option specifications
Learn about option specifications.

Option specifications 41
 Table 1-19 Option specifications

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Dual Cassette Department Part number Y1F98A

Feeder
Capacity 520 x 2 sheets

Media Sizes ● Tray4 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x 18
in)

● Tray5 : 139.7mm x 182mm – 320mm

x 457.2mm (5.5inx7.17in – 12.59in x 18
in)

Media Types Plain/Thin/Bond/Hole Punched/

Preprinted/Recycled/Thin
Cardstock/Letterhead/Thick/Cotton/
Colored/Archive/Thin Glossy/Heavy
Weight/Extra Heavy Weight

Media Weight ● Plain Paper: 71–90 g/m2 (18.5–24 lb/

Duplex)

● Thick Paper: 91–105 g/m2 (25–28 lb/

Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper: 106–176 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 1: 177–216 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 2: 217–256

g/m2 (Duplex)

● Heavy Weight Paper 3: 257–300

g/m2

● Thin Paper: 60–69 g/m2 (16–19 lb/

Duplex)

● Cotton Paper: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Colored: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Preprinted: 71–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Recycled: 60–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Bond Paper: 105–120 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Letterhead: 75–90 g/m2 (Duplex)

● Hole Punched Paper: 75–90 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Thin Cardstock: 105–163 g/m2

(Duplex)

● Thin Glossy: 106–163 g/m2 (Duplex)

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: Yes

42 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description
Dimensions 556 mm x 610 mm x 265 mm (22.3 in x 24
in x 10 in)

Weight Net 20 kg, Packing 23.5 kg

Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet 2000 Sheet High Capacity Part number Y1G21A

Tray Department
Capacity 2000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Media Sizes A4, Letter

Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper

Media Weight 60 to 300 gsm

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: No

HP High Capacity Input Tray Side (sHCI) Part number Y1F20A

Capacity 3000 sheets at 20 lb (80 g/m2)

Media Sizes A4, Letter

Media Types Plain Paper, Thin Paper, Thick Paper,

Punched Paper

Media weight 60 to 300 gsm

Sensing ● H/W Install Detect: Yes

● Paper Empty and Low Level Detect:

Yes

● Paper Type Detect: No

● Paper Size Detect: No

HP LaserJet Department Cabinet Part number Y1G16A

Dimensions 585 mm x 670 mm x 257 mm

Weight (Net) 18 kg

HP LaserJet Job Separator Department Part number Y1G01A

Capacity 125 sheets at (80 g/m2)

Option specifications 43
 Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Part number Y1G00A

Capacity 500 sheets stacking, internal

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 50 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 500 sheets (A4/LT at

80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 50

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: Front flat and

corner (45), Dual, Rear flat and
corner (45)

Saddle Stapling N/A

Offline Stapling N/A

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job N/A

Output Stacking Face Down

HP LaserJet Stapler/Stacker Finisher Part number Y1G18A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 3,250 sheets

stacking

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 3000 sheets (A4/LT

at 80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners

(Single , 45 degree), Center (Double)

Offline Stapling Yes

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job Yes

Output Stacking Face Down

44 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Table 1-19 Option specifications (continued)

Item Specification

HP LaserJet Booklet Finisher Part number Y1G07A

Capacity 65 sheets stapling, 2000 sheets stacking

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5000 staples/cartridge

Stacking ● Top Tray: 250 sheets (A4/LT at 80

gsm)

● Finishing Tray: 2000 sheets (A4/LT

at 80 gsm)

Stapling ● Maximum Number of Sheets: 65

sheets stapling with 90 g/m2 sheet

● Stapling Positions: 2 Corners

(Single), Center (Double)

Saddle Stapling Maximum Number of Sheets: 25 sheets

stapling with 80 g/m2 sheet

Offline Stapling Yes

Offset at Non-Staple Job Yes

Offset at Staple Job Yes

Output Stacking Face Down

1. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G10A

Accessory
2. Y1G11A
2. HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4
Accessory 3. Y1G12A

3. HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Accessory hole, Swedish 4

Paper Wight 52–300 g/m2

1. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/3 Part numbers 1. Y1G02A

Punch
2. Y1G03A
2. P LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole 2/4
Punch 3. Y1G04A

3. HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Available Unit Auto change 2/3 hole or auto change 2/4
Punch hole, Swedish 4

Paper Wight 52–256 g/m2

Feeding system
Learn about the feeding system.

Feeding system overview

Learn about the feeding system overview.

Feeding system 45
 The feeding system picks up paper from the cassette or Tray 1 and moves it to the printing mechanism
inside the printer. The feeding system consists of the pickup unit, registration unit, transfer roller
assembly, and exit unit.

Figure 1-6 Feeding system overview

Main components and functions

Learn about main components and their functions.

Rollers
Learn about the rollers.

46 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-7 Rollers

1 Tray 2 13 Tray 4 feed roller (optional)

2 Tray 3 14 Tray 4 trans roller (optional)

3 Tray 4 (optional) 15 Tray 5 feed roller (optional)

4 Tray 5 (optional) 16 Registration sensor

5 Tray 2 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 17 Registration roller

6 Tray 3 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 18 Transfer roller

7 Tray 4 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 19 Exit roller (1st)

8 Tray 5 pickup/reverse/feed rollers (optional) 20 Exit roller (2nd)

9 Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed rollers 21 Exit roller (trans)

10 Tray 2 feed roller 22 Duplex 1 roller

Rollers 47
 11 Tray 3 feed roller 23 Duplex 2 roller

12 Tray 3 trans roller 23 Duplex 3 roller

● Pickup roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller picks up the paper from the tray.

● Feed roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller is placed against the reverse roller. It transfers the paper from the pickup roller to the
feed roller.

● Reverse roller (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)

– This roller is placed against the feed roller and transfers only one sheet of paper to the feed
roller. When two or more sheets of paper are being transferred from the pickup roller, the load of
the torque limiter of the reverse roller is heavier than the frictional force between the sheets of
paper. As a result, the reverse roller is stopped and the lower sheet of paper is not transferred.

● Feed roller

– This roller transfers the paper sent from the feed/reverse roller to the registration roller.

● Registration roller

– This roller aligns the leading edge of the paper and transfers the paper to the transfer roller
assembly.

Table 1-20 Roller period table

Roller Periodic

OPC/Drum 94.5 mm (3.7 in)

Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.5 in)

Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm (1.3 in)

Transfer roller 44.0 mm (1.7 in)

Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm (3.0 in)

Fuser Belt (HR) 110 mm (4.3 in)

Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.5 in)

Sensor, motor, and solenoid

Learn about the sensor, motor, and solenoid.

48 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-8 Sensor, motor, solenoid

Item Function

Tray 2 paper size detection Detects Tray 2 paper size

sensor

Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects Tray 2 paper empty

sensor

Tray 2 upper limit detection Detects Tray 2 upper limit

sensor

Tray 2 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 2 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Sensor, motor, and solenoid 49

 Item Function

Tray 3 paper size detection Detects Tray 3 paper size

sensor

Tray 3 paper empty detection Detects Tray 3 paper empty

sensor

Tray 3 upper limit detection Detects Tray 3 upper limit

sensor

Tray 3 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 3 paper Lead Edge
sensor

Tray 3 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 3 paper feed jam
sensor

Tray 4 paper size detection Detects Tray 4 paper size

(option) sensor

Tray 4 paper empty detection Detects Tray 4 paper empty

(option) sensor

Tray 4 upper limit detection Detects Tray 4 upper limit

(option) sensor

Tray 4 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 4 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Tray 4/4 paper feed jam detection Detects Tray 4/4 paper feed jam
(option) sensor

Tray 5 paper size detection Detects Tray 5 paper size detection

(option) sensor

Tray 5 paper empty detection Detects Tray 5 paper empty

(option) sensor

Tray 5 upper limit detection Detects Tray 5 upper limit

(option) sensor

Tray 5 paper Lead Edge detection Detects Tray 5 paper Lead Edge
(option) sensor

Paper registration jam detection Detects Paper registration jam

sensor

Paper fuser-out jam detection Detects Paper fuser-out jam

sensor

Output Tray 2 paper full detection Detects output Tray 2 paper full
sensor

Output 2 tray path and Return Changes paper path

path solenoid

Return motor Controls 2nd output tray and duplex printing

Output Tray 3 paper full detection Detects output Tray 3 paper full
sensor

Output 2 paper return detection Detects Duplex Return position

sensor

1st Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

2nd Duplex motor Controls duplex printing

Duplex 1 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 1 jam

50 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Item Function

Duplex 2 jam detection sensor Detects Duplex 2 jam

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly: paper empty
empty detection sensor
NOTE: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, that tray takes priority over trays 2,3,4, or 5.

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly Controls Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly pickup roller

Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper Detects Tray 1 (MP) feed assembly paper width
width detection sensor

Tray 2 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 3 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 4 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Tray 5 Pickup and Lift motor Drives the pickup roller and the knock up plate

Paper Loop Detection sensor Detects paper loop between transfer Nip and fusing Nip

At warm-up, Detects the fuser jam

Cassette
Learn about the cassette.

The tray stores paper. The paper size is set using the guides in each tray.

Figure 1-9 Basic cassette

Table 1-21

Item Description

1 Structure: Drawer Type

2 Capacity: 520 sheets (80 g/m² paper standard)

Cassette 51
 Table 1-21 (continued)

Item Description

3 Paper type

NOTE: Tray 2 does not support A3 or 11 x 17 paper.

4 Paper weight

● Plain paper: 60–220 g/m²

5 Plate knock up lift type: Lift Motor + Up Limit Sensor

Pickup Assembly
Learn about the pickup assembly.

When paper pickup occurs, the pickup roller moves down in order to come in contact with the surface of
the paper. If the cassette is installed, the LEVER-INPUT CST is pushed and the pickup roller moves down.
The feed and separation rollers make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved into the paper path, and
that the feed roller moves the paper as far as the registration (REGI) roller.

NOTE: The pickup unit 1 and pickup unit 2 are not interchangeable.

Figure 1-10 Pickup unit 1

Figure 1-11 Pickup unit 2

Registration unit
Learn about the registration unit.

The registration roller is driven by the registration/multipurpose motor.

52 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The registration roller clutch is located between the registration/Tray 1 motor and registration roller, or on
the transfer belt (for color), and it controls power to the registration roller in order to match paper and an
image on the drum at the predetermined registration point.

Figure 1-12 Registration roller

Tray 1 feed assembly

Learn about the Tray 1 feed assembly.

The Tray 1 feed assembly allows feeding of special media cardstock and custom size paper.

Figure 1-13 Tray 1 (MP) feeder assembly

Specification

● Capacity: 100 sheets (80g/m² / 21 lb paper standard)

● Media size: 98 mm x 139.7 mm — 320 mm x 457.2 mm (3.86 in x 5.5 in — 12.59 in x 18 in)

● Media weight: Plain paper 60 – 320 g/m²

● Feeding speed: 32 ppm, 40 ppm, 48 ppm Letter/A4 LEF (Long Edge Feeding)

Tray 1 feed assembly 53

 Paper separation

Figure 1-14 Paper separation

When the Tray 1 (MP) paper detection [A] sensor detects paper and the machine gets a Tray 1 (MP)
printing job, the Tray 1 (MP) solenoid [B] drops the pickup roller [C] onto the top of the paper stack in Tray 1.

This machine uses a Feed and Reverse Roller (FRR) system for feeding paper. The friction between the
reverse roller [D] and feed roller [E] separates the top sheet of paper from the stack.

Fuser unit
Learn about the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview

Learn about the fuser unit.

This section describes the image fusing process used by the printer.

This unit fuses the toner that was transferred by the transfer roller onto the paper, by applying a
combination of heat and pressure to complete the fusing process. This printer uses an instant fusing
system (NIF type). The fuser unit design for this model has improved. The fuser belt has been changed
to require less heat capacity and still fuse the toner properly. Additionally, the life has been improved by
incorporating a sub-bush system with a lubricant storage design.

54 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-15 Fuser unit

● Lamp halogen

The fuser unit has two halogen lamps. One heats the center of the fusing belt, the other heats the
end of axial direction. These halogen lamps are lit alternately to heat the fusing belt. Each lamp has
its coil in a different location. The coil of the center heater lamp is in the center, the coils on the side
heater lamp are on both sides. The lamps are fixed inside of the fusing belt. When the fusing belt
rotates, the lamps do not rotate.

● Belt fuser

The belt fuser gets heat from the halogen lamp and transfers it to the toner and paper. The belt
fuser consists of three thin-layers. The thin fusing belt reduces warm up and mode changing time. To
prevent the fusing belt from adhering to the toner, the surface of the fuser belt is fluorinated. There
is a nip inside the fusing belt. Tension springs are used to keep a constant nip area where the fusing
belt contacts the pressure roller.

● Roller fuser pressure

The pressure roller makes sure there is a proper nip width between the pressure roller and fusing
belt. It is made up of the soft silicone sponge rubber. The pressure roller is driven by the driving
system and drives the fusing belt.

● Thermistor (NC sensor)

The temperature of the fusing belt is maintained by NC sensors (non-contact type thermistors)
located near the center and the end of the fusing belt.

● Thermostats

The thermostat cuts off the power supply to the halogen lamp by opening the circuit when the
fusing belt becomes abnormally hot as a result of a problem, such as a NC sensor malfunction.
The thermostat is used to prevent abnormal operation. When a thermostat is triggered, it must be
replaced as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit.

Fuser unit overview 55

 Fuser unit drive
Learn about the fuser unit drive.

The fuser motor (A) drives the pressure roller (B) through the gear train. The fuser belt is driven by the
pressure roller.

Figure 1-16 Fuser drive

Fuser unit temperature control

Learn about fuser temperature control.

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays on until the NC
sensors detect the standby temperature. The CPU then raises the temperature up to the printing
temperature.

56 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-17 Fuser unit temperature control

Overheat protection

● The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp in the following cases:

– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 220°C for 20 seconds.

– The belt temperature detected by the NC sensors keeps higher than 230°C for 3 seconds.

– The relay off works when the belt temperature detected by the NC sensors is higher than 230°C.

● The following components are used when thermistor overheat protection fails:

– Two thermostats get into line with the common ground wire of the fusing lamp.

– If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 195°C, it opens and cuts power to
the fusing lamp. If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 195°C, it also opens
and cuts power to the fusing lamp.

Loop control
Learn about fuser loop control.

The tension of the paper between the OPC nip and the fuser nip is known as the paper loop level.

Loop control 57
 Figure 1-18 Loop control

The paper loop level is controlled by monitoring photo sensors 1 and 2. The fuser unit controls the motor
speed for the paper loop level.

Image creation
Learn about image creation.

Printing process overview

Learn about the printing process overview.

This printer uses four drum units, four development units, and four laser beams for color printing. Each
drum unit consists of a drum, charge roller, and cleaning blade. Each development unit consists of a
magnetic roller and mixing auger.

Figure 1-19 Printing process overview

The light produced by the laser creates a latent image by discharging on the surface of the OPC drum.
The negatively charged toner is attracted to the latent drum image due to an electric field. The toner

58 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 (real image) on each OPC drum is moved to the ITB (C) by the positive bias applied to the first transfer
roller. All four toners (color image) are transferred to the paper by a positive charge applied to the
second transfer roller (D).

1. OPC drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge.

2. Laser exposure: Light produced by a laser diode hits the charged OPC through the lens and mirrors.

3. Development: The developing roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image on the
drum surface. This printer uses four independent drum and development units (one for each color).

4. Transfer:

● Image transfer: The first transfer roller opposite the OPC drums transfer toner from the drums
to the ITB. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the belt.

● Paper transfer: The second transfer roller transfers the toner from the ITB to the media.
5. Cleaning the OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surface
after image transfer to the paper.

6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the
laser at the end of every job.

Imaging unit
Learn about the imaging unit.

Imaging unit overview

Learn about the imaging unit.

This printer uses a tandem type drum and development units. It uses four color developing during one
paper path to increase color printing productivity.

The development units are not interchangeable, but the drum units for Y, M, and C color are
interchangeable. The black drum unit is independent. The diameter of the drum is 30 mm with a
circumference of about 94.2 mm (3.7 in).

The drum unit has the charge roller to charge the drum surface and cleaning roller to clean the charge
roller.

The e-label is the sub part of the drum unit. It stores the count information and other data. If the drum
unit is replaced, the count information stored by the discarded drum unit is lost.

Imaging unit 59
 Figure 1-20 Imaging unit

Drum drive
Learn about the drum drive unit.

The color OPCs and magnetic roller are driven by each color motor. The OPC drum and magnetic roller
are powered by the coupling.

The Brushless Direct Current (BLDC) motor maintains constant speed. The speed sync for each color
depends on the BLDC motor.

Phase sync for each OPC job prints the pattern on the Intermediate Transfer Belt (ITB) and is adjusted
automatically.

60 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-21 Drum drive

Developer unit
Learn about the developer unit.

This printer uses a dual-component development system that has four development units. Each unit
contains 245 g (8.6 oz) of magnetic toner carrier (developer powder).

The developer powder is supplied to the magnetic (development) roller [A] by the two mixing augers [B].
The diameter of the magnetic roller is 18 mm (0.71 in).

Each development unit has a toner carrier (TC) sensor [C]. It is used for controlling the operating range of
the toner density.

Developer unit 61
 Figure 1-22 Developer unit

Developer agitation

Two mixing augers (A) circulate the developer forward and backward to agitate the developer in
order to sufficiently mix the toner and developer.

Figure 1-23 Developer auger

Agitation occurs at the following times:

62 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ● During the process control self-checking (warm up)

● During toner supply job

● During development job

If the developer unit is stored above 45°C (113°F), the toner might harden and will not work properly. If the
toner in the development unit has hardened, an installation error occurs.

Toner cartridge
Learn about the toner cartridges.

When the toner and carrier in the toner cartridge is mixing:

● The YMC cartridge contains 570 g (20.1 oz) of toner and the K cartridge contains 840 g (29.6 oz) of
toner. Additionally, the YMC cartridge contains 55 g (1.9 oz) of carrier and K cartridge contains 80 g
(2.8 oz) of carrier

● The toner in the YMC cartridge is transferred to the reservoir by the spring-ETC.

● The toner in the K cartridge is transferred to the Spring-ETC by the Wheel-Paddle Toner and
transferred to the reservoir by Spring-ETC.

Toner cartridge 63
 Figure 1-24 Toner cartridge

Dynamic security
Learn about dynamic-security-enabled printers.

Certain HP printers use cartridges that have security chips or electronic circuitry. Cartridges using a
non-HP chip or modified or non-HP circuitry* might not work. And, those that work today might not work
in the future.

As is standard in the printing business, HP has a process for authenticating cartridges. HP continues
to use security measures to protect the quality of our customer experience, maintain the integrity
of our printing systems, and protect our intellectual property. These measures include authentication
methods that change periodically and might prevent some third-party supplies from working now or in
the future. HP printers and original HP cartridges deliver the best quality, security and reliability. When
cartridges are cloned or counterfeited, the customer is exposed to quality and potential security risks,
compromising the printing experience.

*Non-HP Chips and modified or non-HP electronic circuitry are not produced or validated by HP. HP
cannot guarantee that these chips or circuitry will work in your printer now or in the future. If you are

64 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 using a non-original HP cartridge, please check with your supplier to ensure your cartridge has an
original HP security chip or unmodified HP electronic circuitry.

Intermediate transfer belt unit

Learn about the intermediate transfer belt unit.

Intermediate transfer belt overview

Learn about the intermediate transfer belt (ITB).

The toner on the four drums is transferred to the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) by the first transfer
roller

The image overlapped by four colors is transferred to the paper by the second transfer roller. The
remaining toners are removed by the cleaning blade and transferred to the toner collection unit.

This process is completed with one rotation of the ITB. The arrow above the C and M drums on the
following diagram shows the direction of the ITB rotation. The ITB is rotated by friction between the drive
roller and the ITB. The tension roller provides tension to prevent slipping.

There are three color plane registration (CPR) sensors and one photo sensor. Two CPR sensors are for
line position adjustment and one is for process control. The photo sensor monitors the position of the
first transfer rollers.

Figure 1-25 Intermediate transfer belt

Table 1-22 Intermediate transfer belt components

Item Description

1 Intermediate transfer belt (ITB)

2 First transfer roller

3 ITB drive roller

4 Tension roller

5 Photo sensor

6 Cleaning blade

7 Color plane registration (CPR) sensor

8 Second transfer roller

Intermediate transfer belt unit 65

 Table 1-22 Intermediate transfer belt components (continued)

Item Description

9 Toner collection auger

10 Drum unit

Transfer belt drive

Learn about the transfer belt drive.

The drive motor (A) drives the ITB (B) by using gears and the ITB drive roller (C).

The ITB (B) and black OPC (D) is synchronized by the drive motor (A).

Figure 1-26 Transfer belt drive

Cleaning blade
Learn about the transfer belt cleaning blade.

The intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner removes toner during printing. Belt cleaning is completed
while the ITB makes one rotation. The ITB drive motor drives the ITB cleaning motor.

The cleaning blade (A) in the ITB cleaner always contacts the ITB (B). The cleaning blade removes the
used toner from the ITB. The toner collection auger (C) transfers the waste toner to the toner collection
unit.

The seal (D) on the ITB cleaner protects against toner contamination. The driving power by the driver
roller is transferred to the tension roller (E). The toner collection auger gear (F) drives the gear (G) and
collects the toner

66 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-27 Cleaning blade

Toner reservoir unit

Learn about the toner reservoir unit.

Main functions
● Toner Buffer Space (about 0.6 K page volume) which allows users to continue printing until a new
toner cartridge is delivered from purchase.

● A toner supply unit that is more accurate from the toner full sensing algorithm.

– Minimizes the remaining toner in toner cartridge.

– A uniform toner supply volume per second prevents an abnormal case of toner-density control
error in the development unit.

Working mechanism
● Toner level sensing method in the Reservoir unit:

– The toner level is checked by time with a floating actuator shuttering light sensor (toner full
sensor).

Toner reservoir unit 67

 ● Toner supply to Reservoir unit:

– As the toner level (high, middle, and low) in the reservoir unit decreases so does the toner bottle
supply motor 1500 ms, 900 ms, and 600 ms.

Troubleshooting
1. Enter service mode and execute the toner dispense motor.

Service Mode > Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine Test Routines > Toner Dispense Motor
(Y,M,C,BK)

NOTE: There is no test routine for the toner full sensor in the reservoir unit.

2. Check the gear noise and motor operation.

If the reservoir driving gear is working without abnormal noise, then each reservoir unit does not
have a mechanical problem.

Figure 1-28 Toner reservoir unit

Laser scanner unit

Learn about the laser scanner unit.

Laser scanner assembly overview

Learn about the laser scanner assembly.

The laser scanner assembly consists of one polygon motor and four laser diodes (LD) units. The Laser
scanner assembly forms a latent image on the surface of four OPC drums. For this process, the laser
scanner assembly has a collimator lens, cylindrical lens, two F-Theta lenses, and two reflective mirrors
on an optical path for each color.

68 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

This laser scanner assembly uses the cross scan type scanning. K Color and C Color scan the laser
from the rear to the front. M Color and Y Color scan the laser from the front to the rear.

The laser scanner assembly has a skew adjustment function which adjusts the scanning line. An
automatic shutter is used to clean and protect the glass on the laser scanner assembly.

Figure 1-29 Laser scanner assembly overview

Table 1-23 Laser scanner assembly overview

Item Description

1 LD PCA

2 P/Mirror Motor

3 F1 Lens

4 F2 Lens

5 Skew adjust assembly

6 Shutter

7 PD PCA

Laser scanner assembly overview 69

 Laser scanning optical path
Learn about the laser scanning optical path.

The laser from the laser scanner assembly is placed at intervals of 78 mm for each color. All colors use
the same polygon motor for oblique incidence.

The F2 lens (A) determines the slope of the primary scanning line and the image position of the
secondary scanning direction. This setting is adjusted by the manufacturer. The primary scanning line
slope difference is adjusted by the skew adjustment in the laser scanner assembly.

Reflective mirrors (B) on each color path adjust the curvature of primary scanning. This setting is
adjusted by the manufacturer.

Figure 1-30 Laser scanning optical path

Item Specification Remark

LD Unit Laser Diode: Quad Beam LD x 4 (for each color)

Driving IC: Dual LD X 8

P/Motor Speed ● E87640: 22,087 rpm

● E87650: 27,520 rpm

● E87660: 33,071 rpm

Speed ● E87640: 187 mm/s

● E87650: 233 mm/s

● E87660: 280 mm/s

H/W interface Interface with printer: 50 pin + 60 pin + 8 pin FFC + FFC + Wire

Laser synchronizing detectors

Learn about laser synchronizing detectors.

The laser scanner assembly has two beam detector sensor boards (PD PBA includes four sensors). The
PD PBAs are located at each corner of the laser optics housing unit.

70 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The beam is detected by the PD PCA at the scanning start point and creates the horizontal sync signal
(Hsync).

The two PD PBAs detect the following:

● (A, B): Scanning start position for K, C

● (C, D): Scanning start position for M, Y

Figure 1-31 Laser synchronizing detectors

Main scan start detection

The PD PBAs detect four beams at the scanning start point and create the horizontal sync (Hsync)
signal. Data is scanned by Hsync.

The arrow in the previous diagram shows the data scanning direction for each color. Black/Cyan and
Yellow/Magenta use the same polygon motor scanning in opposite directions.

Automatic CPR adjustment

Learn about automatic CPR adjustment.

During automatic CPR adjustment, the line patterns below are created eight times on the intermediate
transfer belt (ITB). The spaces between the lines (KK, CC, MM, YY, KC, KM, KY) are measured by the front,
center, and rear CPR sensors.

Automatic CPR adjustment 71

 The controller takes the average of the spaces and then adjusts the following positions and
magnification:

● Sub scan line position for CMY

● Main scan line position for CMY

● Magnification ratio for CMY

● Skew for CMY

● KK, CC, MM, YY: Spaces between two lines of the same color.

● KC, KM, KY: Spaces between a black line and each color line.

NOTE: The ITB cleaning unit cleans the ITB after the patterns are measured.

Figure 1-32 Automatic CPR adjustment

Adjustment
● Sub Scan line position for CMY

72 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The adjustment of the sub scan line position for CMY is based on the line position for K (black). The
printer measures the gaps between the lines of each color in the pattern on the ITB. When the gaps
for a color are incorrect, the printer moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To
do this, it changes the laser write timing for that color.

● Main Scan line position for CMY

When the printer detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, it changes the
laser write start timing for each scan line.

● Magnification Adjustment for CMY

When the printer detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes the LD clock
frequency for the required color.

● Skew for CMY

The adjustment of the skew for CMY is based on the line position for K (black).

Adjustment Conditions
Line position adjustment can be turned on or off. However, it is normally recommended to turn on this
function.

Line position adjustment timing depends on several settings. These settings include the following:

● ΔT = Temperature change of the laser scanner assembly between the temperature of the previous
line position adjustment and the current temperature.

● Pages = Total printed pages after previous line position adjustment.

Interval during print job

Line position adjustment interrupts printing and then starts automatically when one of these conditions
occurs when the printer checks at the sheet interval:

● ΔT > Temperature threshold (laser scanner assembly temperature: default 3°C (37.4°F)

● Pages > Output threshold for all outputs (default: 500 pages)

Toner collection unit not-installed/installed

● Line position adjustment starts automatically when toner collection unit is removed and reinstalled.

Drum unit or developer unit replaced

● When the printer detects a new drum unit or developer unit, line position adjustment is automatically
performed.

ITB replaced
● When the printer detects a new ITB or other ITB, field technicians have to execute the adjustment
manually.

Main scan skew adjustment

The skew adjustment assembly (A) consists of the worm gear (1) for adjustment and worm gear (2). When
Color Plane Registration (CPR) executes, it detects and adjusts the scanning line slope manually.

Automatic CPR adjustment 73

 The skew adjustment assembly (A) for magenta, cyan, and yellow adjusts the skew angle of the F2 lens
(B). This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

Figure 1-33 Main scan skew adjustment

Drive system
Learn about the drive system.

Pickup and cassette lift drive

Learn about the pickup and cassette lift drive.

74 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-34 Pickup and cassette lift drive

Power train

Pickup: normal rotation (pickup input) counter rotation (cassette lift input)

● 1 PM STEP → normal rotation → 2 Gear (pickup driving)

● 1 PM STEP → counter rotation → 3 Gear → 4 5 Gear → 6 Gear & Coupler (cassette lift driving)

Feed drive
Learn about the feed drive.

Feed drive 75
 Figure 1-35 Feed drive

Power Train

HP STEP → Feed & Tray 1 drive

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 5 E-Clutch &
Gear (Tray 1 driving)

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Pulley & Coupler → 6 Gear & Coupler (Feed Roller driving) → 7 Pulley & Coupler (Feed
Roller driving)

Registration drive
Learn about the registration drive.

76 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-36 Registration drive

Power Train

HP STEP → Registration driving

● 1 HP STEP → 2 Gear → 3 Gear (Registration Roller driving)

Fuser release/exit drive

Learn about the fuser release/exit drive.

Fuser release/exit drive 77

 Figure 1-37 Fuser release/exit drive

Power Train

BLDC → Fuser and exit driving

PM Step → Fuser release driving

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear (Fuser P/R driving)

● 1 BLDC → 3 Gear & Pulley → 4 Gear (exit driving)

● 5 PM Step → 6 Gear → 7 Gear → 8 Gear (Fuser Release driving)

Drive motors
Learn about the drive motors.

The following diagram shows the location of the printer drive motors.

78 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-38 Drive motor

Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

1 Fuser Release PM-STEP 1 Fuser Release driving

2 Fuser and output BLDC 1 Fuser and output driving

3 Main OPC, BLDC 4 OPC and ITB Belt driving

development, and
ITB

4 Registration HP-STEP 1 Registration assembly

assembly driving

5 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) HP-STEP 1 Feed roller 1, 2, 3 driving

E-CLT 1 Feed/Tray 1 (MP) driving

control

6 Pickup PM-STEP 2 Pickup roller/Cassette lift

driving

(reverse driving at cassette

lift driving)

Drive motors 79
 Number Motor Motor type Qty Function

7 Toner supply amd PM-STEP 4 Toner transfer (reservoir to

toner reservoir development unit)

8 Engage transfer PM-STEP 1 T1 engage/disengage driving

assembly

9 Toner collection unit PM-STEP 1 TCU driving

Main drive unit motors

Learn about the main drive unit motors.

Figure 1-39 Main drive unit motors

Power Train

BLDC → OPC, Development and PTB driving

● 1 BLDC → 2 Gear & Coupler → 3 Gear & Coupler (ITB driving)

● 1 BLDC → 4 Gear & Coupler (K OPC driving)

● 1 BLDC → 5 Gear & Pulley → 5 Gear & Coupler (K Development driving)

● 7 BLDC → 8 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C OPC driving)

● 7 BLDC → 9 Gear & Coupler (Y, M, C Development driving)

80 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Toner supply/reservoir drive
Learn about the toner supply/reservoir drive.

Figure 1-40 Toner supply/reservoir drive

Power Train

BLDC → Toner Supply, Reservoir driving

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 3 Gear → 4 Gear & Latch → 5 Gear (Y, C Toner Supply driving)

● 1 PM Step → 2 Gear → 6 Gear (Photo Interrupt) → 7 Gear & Latch → 8 Gear (M, K Toner Supply
driving)

● 9 PM Step → 10 Gear (Y, C Toner Reservoir driving)

● 9 PM Step → 11 Gear → 12 Gear (M, K Toner Reservoir driving)

Engage transfer roller drive

Learn about the engage transfer roller drive.

Toner supply/reservoir drive 81

 Figure 1-41 Engage transfer roller drive

Power Train

PM STEP Motor → Engage transfer roller driving

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear (Engage transfer roller driving)

Toner collection unit (TCU) drive

Learn about the engage transfer roller drive.

Figure 1-42 Toner collection unit (TCU) drive

Power Train

PM STEP Motor → TCU driving

● 1 PM STEP Motor → 2 Gear (TCU driving)

Flatbed Scanner System

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

Flatbed scanner system overview

Learn about the flatbed scanner system.

The scanner converts a hard copy original into data. To scan an original, the scanner uses the lens and
Charge Coupled Device (CCD). The scanner stores and transfers the converted image to the storage
space or transfers the scanned data to the printer engine for copy.

82 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 For scan operation, the scanner uses a full rate (FR) carriage and a half rate (HR) carriage that is moved
by a wire. It scans the original document on the scanner glass or from the ADF.

The scanner system consists of the three following modules:

● Full Rate (FR) carriage: Illuminates the original and reflects the light at a 90 degree angle.

● Half Rate (HR) carriage: Transfers the reflected light from the FR carriage to the lens.

● Imaging lens: Makes an image on the CCD.

The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage. This keeps a regular gap
between the original and the imaging lens.

Figure 1-43 Scanner system overview

Scan process description

Learn about the scan process description.

1. The FR carriage lamp illuminates the original. The reflected light is moved to Mirror #1.

2. The reflected light from Mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through Mirror #2 and #3.

3. The light becomes smaller and makes an optical image.

4. The optical image is generated to the electrical signal by the CCD sensor.

Scan process description 83

 To make a stable image, a gap must be maintained between the original and the lens. To maintain this
gap, the HR carriage moves half the distance and half the speed of the FR carriage.

Figure 1-44 Scan process

The optical image made by the CCD sensor is changed to an electrical-analog signal.

Each color element signal in the optical image is separated by the CCD sensor into red, green, and blue.

The red CCD sensor extracts the red color from the optical image, the green CCD sensor extracts the
green color from the optical image, and the blue CCD sensor extracts the blue color from the optical
image.

The analog image signal is changed to a digital image signal by the A/D converter and is transferred to
the processor.

The image scan of the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD sensor. The CCD sensor
consists of approximately 7500 pixels. The image scan of the sub scanning direction is performed by the
FR carriage and HR carriage. The carriage is moved by a wire driven by the scan motor.

84 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Scan resolution is 600 dpi.

Figure 1-45 Image processing

Scanning system components

The following shows the construction and purpose of the scanning system.

To scan the original on the scanner glass, two carriages driven by the motor move at a regular speed.
The motor drives the timing belt, pulley, and wire. The wire pulley rolls and releases the wire to move the
carriage.

The scanner consists of the scanner glass, FR carriage, HR carriage, imaging unit, and driving unit.

Scanning system components 85

 Figure 1-46 Scanning system components

● FR Carriage

86 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-47 FR carriage

– LED lamp module

This module illuminates the original. Two white LEDs are assembled on the side of the module.
The original is illuminated by the light-guide. The heat sink is attached to the LED PCB. When the
heat sink is broken or expired, an engineer needs to replace it.

○ Light-guide

The light-guide changes the light from point type to line type. The light-guide is made by
transparent resin and controls the amount of light in the scan area uniformly.

○ White LED

The white LED emits white light. The heat sink attached to the PCA prevents heat
deterioration.

○ Reflection holder

The reflection holder reflects the light that has passed through the light-guide.

– Mirror #1

Mirror #1 reflects light at a 90 degree angle.

Scanning system components 87

 HR Carriage (mirror unit)

Figure 1-48 HR carriage

● Mirror #2 and #3

Mirrors #2 and #3 are positioned at a 45 degree angle in order to change the direction of the light.
The reflected light from mirror #1 is sent to the imaging lens through mirrors #2 and #3.

● Pulley

The pulley is a ball bearing type. The pulley rolls and releases the wire which makes the HR carriage
move. The HR carriage moves half the distance at half the speed of the FR carriage.

Imaging unit

The imaging unit changes the optical image to an electrical signal.

Figure 1-49 Imaging unit

● Imaging lens

The reflected light from the imaging lens is focused on the CCD. The image is reduced to the fixed
CCD sensor and pixel size.

● CCD PCA

88 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 The image made by the imaging lens is changed to an electrical signal by the CCD. The CCD
consists of three channel line sensors for image creation. The brightness and darkness of the
image depends on the voltage level from the CCD. The output voltage is changed to a digital signal.
The digital signal makes the scanned image.

Wire driving

To move the carriages, the wire is assembled in the front and rear of the scanner. The pulley rolls and
releases the wire which moves the FR carriage and the HR carriage.

Figure 1-50 Wire driving

Scanning system components 89

 Scanner glass (flatbed glass)

The original is placed on the scanner glass for scan or copy jobs. The scanner glass is made of
tempered glass and is held in place by the frame to prevent distortion.

Drive motor

The scanner drive system uses the step motor to move the carriage. The step motor controls the
position and maintains constant speed. The motor power is transferred to the wire through the timing
belt and pulley.

Timing belt

The timing belt has a regular saw tooth gear and transfers the motor power to the pulley.

Figure 1-51 Timing belt

Paper size sensor

The paper size sensor automatically detects the size of the original on the scanner glass. The paper size
sensor uses two sensors. An infrared LED is used to detect the dark original.

Home sensor

The home sensor detects the FR carriage position. The home sensor is a transmission photo sensor.

Cover open sensor #1

When the ADF unit opens and closes, a function is triggered which detects whether the paper size
sensor is on or off.

Cover open sensor #2

The cover open sensor #2 detects when the ADF unit is closed using magnetic force.

90 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ADF glass

Scanner read the original feed from ADF unit through ADF glass. The FR carriage read the original as it
passes on ADF glass. If ADF glass is contaminated.

Shading sheet

The shading sheet is attached under flat-bed glass. Before every scan job, scanner read the shading
sheet to get reference image with same optical conditions. If shading sheet is contaminated, a vertical
line might occur on scan image.

Figure 1-52 Shading sheet

Caution for moving the scanner

Learn about cautions when moving the scanner.

When shipping or moving the printer, the FR and HR carriages in the scanner must be secured with a
scan locking screw to prevent movement of these parts and possible damage to the scanner

This screw must be installed before moving the printer and then removed once the printer is positioned
in place.

When installing

After unpacking, before turning on the printer, the scan locking screw must be removed. If the locking
screw is not removed scanner failure will occur.

1. When installing the printer, remove the scan locking screw.

2. After removing the screw, assemble the screw cap from the accessory package.

Caution for moving the scanner 91

 Figure 1-53 Remove scan locking screw

When moving the printer

When moving the printer, tighten the scan locking screw to prevent damage to the carriages.

1. Make sure the FR carriage is located in the end of scanner side wall which is screw locked.

2. Remove the screw cap.

3. Tighten the M3x8 screw to secure the FR carriage.

Figure 1-54 Tighten scan locking screw

Document feeder LX (du models)

Learn about the document feeder LX (du models).

Document feeder LX overview

Learn about the document feeder LX.

92 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-55 Document feeder LX overview
R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R7 R8 R9 R10 R11

Table 1-24 Document feeder LX overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 REGISTRATION (REGI) ROLLER Original paper alignment roller

R7 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R8 SIMPLEX WHITE-BAR Support of scanning unit

R9 SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the

exit roller

R10 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R11 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Document feeder LX electrical parts

Learn about the document feeder LX electrical parts.

Figure 1-56 Document feeder LX electrical parts electrical parts locations

Pick~ Roller
4. Paper Length
3.Detect Pickup
2, Registra on Feed Out

Registra on 5. Paper Width

1. Cover Open
Roller
Exit Roller

6. Exit Idle
Scan In

Scan Out

Scan Scan CCD

Document feeder LX electrical parts 93

 Table 1-25 Document feeder LX electrical parts

Callout Item Function

1 Cover Open Detects if cover is open or closed

2 Registration (Regi) Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the registration path

3 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

4 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

5 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

Document feeder LX registration

Learn about the document feeder LX registration.

Figure 1-57 Document feeder LX registration

Registra on Sensor
Registra on Roller

Item Document feeder LX

Registration 1 times registration

Document feeder LX drive system

Learn about the document feeder LX drive system.

The drive system consists of one motor and two clutches to transfer the paper.

94 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-58 Document feeder LX drive system

Pickup Drive sec•on

Registra•on Motor sec•on

Feed Drive sec•on

The document feeder LX drive system consists of two motors (BLDC and STEP) and one clutch that
moves the paper.

● BLDC Motor > Feed and pickup

● STEP Motor > Regi

● Clutch > Pickup

There are three sections: pickup drive section, registration (regi) motor section, and feed drive section.

The pickup drive section has three assemblies: pickup drive assembly, pickup assembly, and guide
pickup assembly.

The registration motor section has the regi motor, trans gear, regi roller, regi-idle roller, regi sensor, and
actuator.

LX ADF original pickup assembly

Learn about the LX ADF original pickup assembly.

LX ADF original pickup assembly 95

 Figure 1-59 LX ADF pickup assembly
Pickup Drive sec•on

Pickup Drive Assy

Pickup Assy

Guide pickup Assy

After detecting the paper, one motor controls the drive system.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC provides the power to pick up the paper.

The CLUTCH cannot rotate inversely. The spring that is included in the ADF GUIDE PICKUP ASSEMBLY
is connected to COVER-OPEN. When the CLUTCH does not drive, stand-by status occurs and stops the
operation.

The ADF roller and pick roller are connected by the belt.

The ADF roller is provided with power while the paper is picked up and transferred to the registration
roller. When the pickup drive is stopped and the registration roller is driven, the ADF roller becomes idle.

The normal process is:

● When the original is setting up, the detect-sensor is activated and the printing job starts. The motor
and pickup clutch begin working. The pick roller then moves down and contacts the original in the
tray.

● When the registration sensor detects paper, the pickup clutch stops.

● When the detect-sensor detects that the tray is empty, the motor stops and the printer enters
stand-by status.

LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly

Learn about the LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly.

96 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-60 LX ADF registration (regi) drive assembly
Registra•on Motor sec•on
istra•on(V)$)/(+'-$%)"

The registration drive uses the CLUTCH-ELECTRIC to drive the registration roller and transfer the paper
to the ROLLER FEED.

The registration roller aligns the leading edge of the original. When the original is placed in the nip, the
roller is rotated for alignment.

The CLUTCH-ELECTRIC repeats on/off to align each original.

Document feeder LX scanning position

Learn about the document feeder LX scanning position.

Document feeder LX scanning position 97

 Figure 1-61 Document feeder LX scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Bar White Bar

Document feeder LX specifications

Learn about the document feeder LX specifications.

Table 1-26 Document feeder LX specification

Item Specification

Capacity 100 pages

Scan Speed 80/160 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 1 times registration

Motor 2 each

Stacker Not applicable

Scanning White Bar

MSO Not applicable

Flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX)

Learn about the flow document feeder dn/z models (GX and sGX).

Flow document feeder overview

Learn about the flow document feeder.

98 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-62 Flow document feeder overview
R7 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1

R8 R9 R1 R11 R1 R1 R1
0 2 3 4

Table 1-27 Flow document feeder overview

Part Description Function

R1 STACKER ASSY Original paper input tray

R2 GUIDE-DOC F&R Original paper guide (front/rear)

R3 PICK ROLLER Pick up original paper from the input tray

R4 ADF ROLLER Original paper feed roller

R5 SEPARATION ROLLER Original paper separation roller

R6 FEED ROLLER Original paper transfer roller (A6 size)

R7 PRE REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (1 round)

R8 REGI ROLLER Original paper alignment roller (2 round)

R9 SCAN IN ROLLER Feeds an original paper before scanning

R10 SIMPLEX WHITE-ROLLER Support of simplex scanning unit

R11 SIMPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
duplex white-roller

R12 D-CIS MODULE Back side image scan unit

R13 DUPLEX SCAN OUT ROLLER Transfer a scanned original paper to the
exit roller

R14 EXIT ROLLER Sends an original paper to the exit tray

Flow document feeder sensors

Learn about the flow document feeder sensors.

Flow document feeder sensors 99

 Figure 1-63 Flow document feeder sensors
10. MSO 8.Cover Open 7. Pickup Position 5. Detect Sensor 2. Paper Width

9.Pickup 1. Paper Length

Pickup Roller
11. Pre Registration
12. Registration

3.LIFT

PRE REGI PICK UP FEED separation 4.CAM RELEASE

6. POSITION
REGI
DUPLEX-SCAN OUT EXIT

Scan CIS
13. SIM Scan Idle
SIMPLEX
Scan In WHITE-R
OLLER

16. Exit

14. SIM Scan

Scan CCD
MSO Sensors 15. DUP Scan

11. Pre Registration

10. MSO

Table 1-28 Flow document feeder sensors

Callout Item Function

1 Paper Length Sensor Detects paper length

2 Paper Width Sensor Detects paper width

3 Stacker Lift Sensor Detects Stacker Position

4 Cam Release Sensor Sensing ‘Separation Roller’ rotation

5 Detect Sensor Detects if tray is empty

6 Position Sensor Detects Stacker Position

7 Pickup Position Sensor Sensing ‘Pickup Roller’ rotation

8 Cover Open Sensor Detects if cover is open or closed

9 Pickup Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the feed path

10 MSO Sensor Detects mix size

11 Pre-Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the pre-regi path

12 Regi Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Regi path

13 SIM Scan Idle Sensor Sensing ‘Scan In Roller’ rotation

14 SIM Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan In path

15 DUP Scan Sensor Detects if there is a jam on the Scan Out path

16 Exit Sensor Paper Exit Sensing

100 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor.

Figure 1-64 Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor
Tx Sensor

Rx Sensor

This sensor detects multi-feeds.

● Component: Ultrasonic Sensor Tx Board, Rx Board , HIC Board (Amp and Filter)

● The Rx Sensor has a different level on each paper status: no paper, one paper, multiple papers.

● Detect the multi-feeding through the level change of Rx Sensor.

● Transmit and receive operation of 300 khz frequency.

Flow document feeder drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder drive system.

The flow document feeder drive system drive system includes eight motors.

The Flow ADF drive system consists for the following sections:

● Pickup release drive

● Pickup drive

● Pre-regi drive

● Regi drive

● Scan-in roller release drive

● Scan drive

● Exit drive

● Lift drive

Flow document feeder ultra sonic multi-feed (USM) sensor 101

 Figure 1-65 Flow document feeder drive system
Pre-Registration Drive section

Registration Drive section

Pickup Drive section Pickup Release Drive section

Scan Drive section

Lift Drive section

Scan in Roller Release Drive section

Exit Drive section

Flow document feeder lifting drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder lifting drive system.

Figure 1-66 Flow document feeder lifting drive system

● Component: LIFT MOTOR, LIFT SHAFT, LIFT BAR, PAPER SENSOR

● LIFT MOTOR Starts > LIFT SHAFT and LIFT BAR lift Tray

● PAPER SENSOR detects paper in the Tray

102 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 ● Paper contacts PICKUP ROLLER and stops movement

● Document is passed through SCAN OUT SENSOR. Duplex scanning starts.

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

Learn about the flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system.

Figure 1-67 Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system

● Holds the rear of the paper using cam motion for improved scan quality

● Component: RELEASE MOTOR, RELEASE CAM, SCAN-IN IDLE ROLLER

● Motor and cam operation repeats for every piece of paper

Flow document feeder specifications

Learn about the flow document feeder specifications.

Table 1-29 Flow document feeder specification

Item Specification

Capacity 250 pages (stacker lifting)

Scan Speed 120/240 ipm

Pickup Semi-Retard

Registration 2 times registration

Motor 8 each

Stacker Lifting

Scanning White Roller/White Bar

MSO Support

Flow document feeder scan-in roller release drive system 103

 Flow document feeder registration
Learn about the flow document feeder registration.

The flow document feeder registration uses a two-times registration process.

Figure 1-68 Flow document feeder registration

Pre Registration Roller
Registration Sensor Pre Registration Sensor

Registration
Roller

Flow document feeder scanning position

Learn about the flow document feeder scanning position.

Figure 1-69 Flow document feeder scanning position

6LPSOH[
'XSOH[

Table 1-30 Flow document feeder scanning position

Item Simplex Duplex

Scanning White Roller White Bar

104 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor
Learn about the flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor.

The MSO sensor detects the size of mixed size papers and sets the alignment of the papers to the rear.

Figure 1-70 Flow document feeder MSO 1

Figure 1-71 Flow document feeder MSO 2

Pre-Registration
MSO Sensor
Sensor

Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

A3 SEF X

(420 mm)
(16.5 in)

A4 LEF X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder mixed size original (MSO) sensor 105

 Table 1-31 Flow document feeder MSO3 (length x max width) (continued)

Length A3 SEF A4 LEF B4 SEF B5 LEF A4 SEF A5 LEF A5 LEF A5 SEF

(297 mm) (297 mm) (257 mm) (257 mm) (210 mm) (210 mm) (182 mm) (148 mm)
(11.7 in) (11.7 in) (10.1 in) (10.1 in) (8.3 in) (8.3 in) (7.2 in) (5.8 in)

B4 SEF X X X

(363 mm)
(14.3 in)

B5 LEF X X X

(182 mm)
(7.2 in)

A4 SEF X X X X X

(297 mm)
(11.7 in)

A5 LEF X X X X X

(148 mm)
(5.8 in)

B5 SEF X X X X

(257 mm)
(10.1 in)

A5 SEF X X

(210 mm)
(8.3 in)

Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method

Learn about the flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method.

● Component: LEVER GUIDE EXIT F, GUIDE-EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY.

● Open LEVER GUIDE EXIT F.

● Cleans with a D-CIS GLASS in the direction indicated.

● Cleans the GUIDE EXIT UPPER ASSEMBLY in the direction indicated.

Figure 1-72 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (1 of 2)

3XOOWKHOHYHU

106 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-73 Flow document feeder dual sensor cleaning method (2 of 2)

Flow ADF z bundles (GX)

Learn about the flow ADF z bundles (GX).

Model Engine Scanner

Platen DN-sGX Z-GX

Color 40 ppm Same at Scan USM Capacity Scan USM Capacity

whole Speed Speed
model
50 ppm 80/160 ipm X 100 sheet 120/240 O 250 sheet
ipm
60 ppm

Mono 40 ppm

50 ppm

60 ppm

Hardware configuration
Learn the functions and specifications of the hardware configuration.

The electronic circuit system consists of the following:

● Main controller (main board)

● OPE unit

● Document feeder (Flow/LX) controller

● HVPS board

Flow ADF z bundles (GX) 107

 ● LVPS board

● Fuser drive assembly

Figure 1-74 Electronic circuit diagram

The main controller handles the video controller, engine controller, and scan controller.

The main controller receives print data from the host through the network or USB port and receives
copy data from the scan controller. The main controller uses this information to generate printable video
bitmap data. It controls all modulesrequired to print, including the laser scanner assembly, HVPS, FAN,
fuser, and so on.

The main controller communicates with the drive system and other devices through Universal
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (UART). The main controller communicates with and checks the
life of the toner cartridge, drum, and developer units through I2C.

The main controller uses Quad Core CPU 1.5 GHz, DDR3 4 GB memory, Micro SD 4 GB, and a 500 GB
SATA HDD to control the engine driving, video signal processing, and user interface.

A MICOM controls power to the fuser lamp and power to the system according to an optimized energy
saving algorithm. The MICOM communicates with the OPE controller through the USB 3.0 protocol to
display the system information on the control panel.

The OPE unit displays the status of the system using the control panel TFT LCD in response to user
actions or the main controller.

The soft power switch in the OPE unit is used to safely shut down the system.

The ADF controller controls some mechanisms required to scan continuously from the ADF. The ADF
controller communicates with the main controller to synchronize scan timing.

The HVPS board generates and controls high-voltage channels. The fuser drive assembly controls
power to the fuser lamp. The LVPS board generates 5 V and 24 V power for the system.

The following diagrams show the locations of the printer circuit boards:

108 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-75 Circuit board locations

HP Formatter
(Not shown)

LVPS (2)

Main controller
Learn about the main controller.

CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do
not use the previous model main controller during replacement.

Main controller (previous model)

Learn about the main controller (previous model).

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 4 GB), Micro SD (4 GB),
1 G Ethernet PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal
interface connection, motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

Main controller 109

 The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with
the various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the
other device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, Modem) by UART.

Figure 1-76 Main controller block diagram

Figure 1-77 Main controller clock diagram

M 41T81
RTC with IRQ
32.768Khz
CrystalInput

RTS5401
U SB3.0 H U B
12M hz
Crystal
Input

A TSA M D A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)

20E15 D D R3 8G b
D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
12M hz K4B8G 1646B
Crystal
Input
RTC D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz)
N .C
D D R3 8G b
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N K4B8G 1646B
12M hz CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 8G b
K4B8G 1646B

M AC0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1 RTL8211 Input

M AC1 NETWORK OPTION PBA

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 NETWORK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) Crystal
Input Clk1
PCI_REFCLK_N RTL8211 Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz PL602-21 Clk0 CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input Clk1 SC AN0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D CIS
U SB3H _REFCLK_N SC AN1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)

RX_CLK_D CIS_N

110 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-78 Main controller connection information

Table 1-32 Main controller connections

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 OUTPUT 12 OPC BLDC 23 FIH JOINT 34 FAX JOINT

MONO

2 FUSER 13 LVPS TYPE5 24 UI IF 35 2ND

DRIVE NETWORK

3 FUSER 14 LVPS 25 USB 36 EFI SIGNAL

DRAWER TYPE3R HOST/HUB

4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 FRONT IF 26 DCIS 37 CPU FAN

Label MONO

5 TONER 16 Fuser drive 27 CCDM

SUP/RES assembly IF

6 CTD/ 17 Laser 28 Flow ADF

Registration scanner
assembly assembly
SENS MONO

7 PICKUP 1/2 18 HVPS 29 HDD

MONO POWER

Main controller (previous model) 111

 Table 1-32 Main controller connections (continued)

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

8 FEED/ 19 USB HOST 30 HDD

Registration 1/2 SIGNAL
assembly
MOT

9 SIDE 20 USB 31 SIDE FAN

DEVICE

10 dual 21 NETWORK 32 MSOK

cassette
feeder
(DCF) IF

11 FINISHER 22 EFI POWER 33 SD CARD

CAUTION: The main controller for the previous model is not compatible with the new model (IR/UI). Do
not use the previous model main controller during replacement.

Main controller
Learn about the printer main controller.

The main controller consists of the main processor (A3000), memory (DDR3 6 GB), eMMC (4 GB)1
G Ethernet PHY, USB 3.0 HUB, and Micom (Power/Fuser control). It can control Video/UI/FAX signal
interface connection, motor driving IC, engine signal interface connection, and power interface.

The main processor (Quad Core 1.5 GHz CPU) controls video, engine, UI display, and communicates with
the various devices. The HDD is connected to the main controller by a SATA cable and connected to the
other device (such as ADF, dual cassette feeder (DCF), Finisher, and Modem) by UART.

112 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-79 Main controller block diagram
O P E IR
IR P B A
C h3
FU S E R
10.1" C h2 PTB SC A N N ER
T FT LC D
TO N ER C R U M
C h1 O PC C R U M D SD F
U S B 3.0 H U B P B A
R TC
W IFI/N FC M O D U LE C h0
D E B U G _M C B
FR O N T 2 nd N W
R T S 5411 C h0 P LA T E N
C A R D R EA D ER U SB D IM M C h1
D E B U G _S C B
4Port H U B H O ST
M S O K /T P M C h2
D E B U G _U I
C h3
E N G IN E P A N E L
LC D C h4
A T S A M D 2E 15
C on. I2C SPI S C A N IF S C A N IF
C h5
CH0 CH1 D SD F
R EA R U SB
U SB H O ST
R T S 5401 3.0
C h6
DCF
1/2 4Port H U B H O ST C h7
FIN IS H E R
C h9
R EA R U SB UART E FI
U SB 3.0 C h10
M O D EM 0
D EVIC E D E V IC E C h11
M O D EM 1
D D R 3 6G B DDRC
FU S E R FU S E R U N IT
O n-board 4G B 800M hz
D IM M 2G B 32bit
N C TH 1 C /D N C TH 2 C /D
M A G IC 12B it AD C A T S A M D 2E 15
IO ExternalAD C 12b A N A LO G M U X
A N A LO G M U X READ M H V YM C K, TH V YM C K
M P SIZE / PAPER SIZE1,2 / ADC TC YM C K / C TD ,AC R / FU SER / W TB
IN N ER, O U TTER, EXIT, LSU TEM P 1.8V
H U M ID ITY, M O D EL SEL, AC Level E FI V ID E O
P C Iex C O N T R O LLE R
Step M otor FB / 24V FB
* C olor m odel

EN G IN E

STEP M O T
PIC KU P1/2, FEED , REG I, T1 EN G AG E,
D R V 8825
X15
A 3000 M AC0 R T L8211E
G igabit phy
R J45
B ASE

D U PLEX_RET/1/2, SKEW Y/M /C , S I-7321M CTRL.

W TB , FU SER RELEASE, TO N ER SU PPLY X2 R T L8211E R J45
YM /C K, TO N ER RESERVO IR YM /C K, M AC1
A N 44061A G igabit phy EXTEN D
C ST LO C K, X1 O PTIO N KIT

FA N SA TA
SEN SO R EXIT1/2/3/4,SM PS(LX/G X), SA TA
2.5", 320G B
EM PTY 1/2, LIFT1/2, PRE FEED 1/2, FEED C PU , LSU , D EVE,SID E,
REG I, M P_EM PTY/SIZEL/W , C U RL2, FU SER O U T CTRL. G P IO
FU SER IN /O U T, B IN _FU LL_EXIT1/2, PW M
D U PLEX_JAM 1/2, D U PLEX_RETU RN , B LD C 4B E A M LS U
PAPER_SIZE1/2, W ASTE_IN STALL, O PC Y,M ,C ,K/ITB , YM CK
O PC _PH ASE Y/M /C /K, RESERVO IR Y/M /C /K, FU SER LS U C CTRL. LD 1,2,3,4
TO N ER SU P YM /C K, ITB H O M E, FU SER PO S, LSU _M O T1
C O VER O PEN FRO N T/SID E, H V PS VD O 1B _YM C K
SC AN H O M E / APS 1,2 SH U TTER AC R, M H V YM C K
VD O 2B _YM C K
PLATEN C O VER O PEN 1,2 D EV D C YM C K H PV C VD O D ATA VD O 3B _YM C K
D EV AC VPP YM C K
VD O 4B _YM C K
S O LE N O ID / C LT D EV AC
C LT : M P D EV AC EN YM C K
SO L : M P / EXIT TH V1 YM C K
TH V2(C V/C C ) / TH V eM M C
DC M OT C LEAN MMC CTRL. 4G B
AC R SH U TTER, C ST LO C K 1/2 SAW / FU SER B IAS B oot D evice

Main controller 113

 Figure 1-80 Main controller clock diagram
32.768Khz
M 41T81
Crystal Input RTC w ith IRQ

12M hz
RTS5401 A3000 CH 0_CLK_P(800M hz)
Crystal
U SB3.0 H U B D D R3 2G B
Input D D R3 C H 0 CH 0_CLK_N
(4G b*8*4ea)

RTC D D R3 2G B
(4G b*8*4ea)
CH 1_CLK_P(800M hz) D D R3 2G B
N .C
12M hz
ASM 3P2863 Clk0 D D R3 C H 1 CH 1_CLK_N (4G b*8*4ea)
CLK_M A IN (Spread 12M hz)
Crystal Clk1
Input CLK_PU RE(Reference 12M hz)
Sel Clk2 D D R3 2G b_tem p
(4G b*8*4ea)

M AC 0
SA TA _REFCLK_P(100M hz) M A C0_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
Crystal SA TA _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N M A C0_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

PCI_REFCLK_P(100M hz)
M AC 1 N ETW O RK O PTIO N PBA
D IF_CLK_P M A C1_G TX_CLK(125M hz)
PCI_REFCLK_N N ETW O RK PH Y 12M hz
D IF_CLK_N M A C1_RX_CLK(125M hz) RTL8211 Crystal
Input

CLK_M A IN _CCD M _P(35M hz)

U SB3D _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CCD M
25M hz ID T6U 41362 D IF_CLK_P CLK_M A IN _CCD M _N
Crystal U SB3D _REFCLK_N
Input D IF_CLK_N SC AN 0 RX_CLK_CCD M _P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_CCD M _N

U SB3H _REFCLK_P(100M hz) CLK_M A IN _D CIS_P(35M hz)

D IF_CLK_P
U SB3H _REFCLK_N D CIS
D IF_CLK_N SC AN 1 CLK_M A IN _D CIS_N
RX_CLK_D CIS_P(35M hz)
RX_CLK_D CIS_N

114 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-81 Main controller connection information

Table 1-33 Main controller connections

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

1 OUTPUT 12 FINISHER 23 Laser 34 DCIS

scanner
assembly 1
COLOR

2 FUSER 13 OPC E- 24 Laser 35 CCDM

DRIVE Label/T1 scanner
assembly 2
COLOR

3 FUSER 14 OPC HOME 25 HVPS 36 Flow ADF

DRAWER SENS COLOR

4 TB/DEVE/E- 15 OPC BLDC 26 USB HOST 37 HDD

Label COLOR 1/2 POWER

5 TONER 16 TC 27 USB 38 HDD

SUP_/RES SENS/RES DEVICE SIGNAL
FULL

6 CPR_CTD 17 LVPS TYPE5 28 NETWORK 39 CPU FAN

COLOR

Main controller 115

 Table 1-33 Main controller connections (continued)

Item Description Item Description Item Description Item Description

7 Registration 18 HVPS 29 EFI POWER 40 SIDE FAN

assembly/T POWER/
1 POS SENS Laser
scanner
assembly
SKEW

8 PICKUP 1/2 19 LVPS TYPE4 30 FIH JOINT 41 MSOK

9 FEED/ 20 FRONT IF 31 HUB IF 42 FAX JOINT

Registration COLOR
assembly
MOT

10 SIDE 21 Fuser drive 32 USB 43 EFI SIGNAL

assembly IF HOST/HUB

11 dual 22 Laser 33 UI IF 44 2ND

cassette scanner NETWORK
feeder assembly 45
(DCF) IF PD DDR3 DIMM

Information

● Part Number

– E876z, E876dn series: JC82-00543A

– E876du series: 5CM63-67001

● Part Name: MainPCA

Master system operation key (MSOK)

Learn about the master system operation key (MSOK).

MSOK PCA is used to store all system information and consists of serial flash memory, an EEPROM, and
a X-E-Label. The flash memory (4 MB), EEPROM (256 KB) and X-E-Label are used for all system operations
such as system parameter, device status, tech information, and service information.

NOTE: When a main board needs to be exchanged, reinstall the MSOK PCA to the new main board to
retain the system information.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main
board in the same orientation as when it was removed in order for the printer to function.

116 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-82 MSOK

1 Main PCA I/F connector

Formatter cabling
Learn about the formatter cabling.

Figure 1-83 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

sGX/GX ADF Only Cable Rev A CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX

Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) Std sGX/GX

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt
2x Host Ports Device

Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

Formatter cabling 117

 Figure 1-84 Formatter cabling (LX)
LX ADF Only Cable Rev A
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

CP HDMI (J30)

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Fan (J47)
Gigabit
RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt
2x Host Ports Device

Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card

a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

118 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Cable Rev A
sGX/GX ADF Only CPS (J28)
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown Card insGX/GX

Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A

Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

w/ Keyboard “Z” bundle Accelerator Card
CP HDMI (J30) StdsGX/GX

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02557A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host
eMMC
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Figure 1-85 Formatter cabling (sGX/GX)

Fan (J47) RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) SAM
- -JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS(Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

Formatter cabling
119
120
Cable Rev A
LX ADF Only

Cable
Power Supply CPS Aux 5V Power Power Connector location on Toast not shown
Engine HDMI (J29) (PCIe x1 Gen 2) JC39 - 02584A
Engine Engine
g LAN (J8)
( ) JC39 - 002567A

Formatter cabling
Controller Board Engine
g Control (J36)
( ) JC39 - 02553A
HIP2 USB (J12)
These three cables are
Front of Product wrapped together Front/Walkup USB (J20)

NA
Jxx
8” Control Panel JC39-02579A

Table 1-34 Formatter cabling

CP HDMI (J30)
Figure 1-86 Formatter cabling (LX)

CP Sideband (J16)
( )
JC39-02583A
Power
Dual USB 2.0
Button Host

Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

eMMC

LVPS
From
Expansion (J18)
IOD (Island of Data) J51
Inside Formatter Cage Gigabit
Fan (J47) RJ45

Internal USB/AA Int. USB/AA (J21) USB 2.0

Opt Device
2x Host Ports
Engine Engine Power (J6) Kani Fax Card
a

To
Power Supply
Fax (J15)
STMS (J57) JC39 - 02594A Opt
STMS (Smart Transducer Monitoring
System)

Accelerator
Purpose

Power for accelerator

 Table 1-34 Formatter cabling (continued)

Cable Jxx From To Purpose

Engine HDMI J29 Main board Formatter High speed print data
(JC39-02584A)

Engine LAN J8 Main board Formatter High speed print data

(JC39-02584A)

Engine control J36 Main board Formatter Low level engine

control (JC39-02553A)

HIP2 USB J12 Formatter HIP USB for HIP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

Front walk-up USB J20 Formatter Front of printer USB for walk u

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP HDMI J30 Formatter CP Data to CP

NOTE: Cable bundled.

CP side band J16 Formatter CP Power, reset, wake

lines, display
power, keyboard
(JC39-02557A)

Power button J16 Formatter Power button Power ON/OFF

IOD J16 Formatter IOD Data to/from Island of

Data

Internal USB/AA J21 Formatter Accessory Accessory

Engine power J6 LVPS Formatter 5V supply to formatter

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H).

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards.
The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 5H) 121

 Figure 1-87 LVPS PCA (Type 5H)

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V 1/2/3/4 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

4 OUTPUT_DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 8.0 A (110 V)/5.0 A (220 V)

– Output power: 275 W

○ DC 5 V: 35 W

○ DC 24 V: 240 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00249A JC44-00250A

Part name LVPS 110V Type 5H LVPS 220V Type 5H

122 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN2)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

● DC output connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +24V1 Power

2 GND 24 V ground

3 +24V2 Power

4 GND 24 V ground

5 +24V3 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V4 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

● Signal Connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4)

Learn about the low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4).

NOTE: Some models have three LVPS boards. (Type5 x 1 each, Type4 x 2 each)

The low voltage power supply (LVPS) board supplies electric power to the main board and other boards.
The voltage provided includes +5 V, and +24 V from a 110 V/220 V power input. It has safety protection
modes for over current and overload.

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) PCA (Type 4) 123

 Figure 1-88 LVPS PCA (Type 4)

1 INPUT_AC

2 OUTPUT_DC +24 V1/2/3 and DC +5 V 1/2 (to Main PCA)

3 24 V on/off

Specification

● General input/output voltage

– AC 110 V (110 V — 127 V)

– AC 220 V (220 V — 240 V)

– Input current: 6.3 A (110 V)/5 A (220 V)

– Output power: 205 W

○ DC 5 V: 25 W

○ DC 24 V: 180 W

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00091D JC44-00092D

Part name LVPS 110V Type 4 LVPS 220V Type 4

Input/output connector

● AC input connector (CN1)

124 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 PIN assign PIN name Description

1 AC_L AC input

2 AC_N

● DC output connector (CN4)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 +5V1 Power

2 GND 5 V ground

3 +5V2 Power

4 GND 5 V ground

5 +24V1 Power

6 GND 24 V ground

7 +24V2 Power

8 GND 24 V ground

9 +24V3 Power

● Signal Connector (CN3)

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 GND Active Low

2 24 V On/Off

3 GND

Fuser drive assembly

Learn about the fuser drive assembly.

This board supplies voltage to the fuser AC, heater, and main board.

Fuser drive assembly 125

 Figure 1-89 Fuser drive board

1 Option Heater

2 Fuser Lamp

3 Fuser drive assembly I/F

4 LVPS (Type 5H)

5 Main Switch

6 AC Inlet

7 Option Heater Switch

8 LVPS (Type 4)

9/10 Reactor

Information

110 V 220 V

Part number JC44-00235B JC44-00236B

Part name Fuser Drive Board 110V Fuser Drive Board 220V

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Learn about the high-voltage power supply (HVPS).

The HVPS board generates 15 high-voltage channels, including ITHV (4), MHV (4), DEV (4), FUSER, SAW,
and 2THV(+/-).

126 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Figure 1-90 HVPS PCA

PIN assign PIN name Description

1 DETECT

2 PWM_ITHV_C PWM signal

3 PWM_ITHV_K PWM signal

4 PWM_ITHV_M PWM signal

5 READ_ITHV_C Output voltage

6 PWM_ITHV_Y PWM signal

7 READ_ITHV_K Output voltage

8 READ_ITHV_M Output voltage

9 PWM_FUSEBIAS PWM signal

10 READ_ITHV_Y Output voltage

11 PWM_SAW PWM signal

12 READ_MHV_Y Output voltage

13 PWM_THV2_MINUS PWM signal

14 READ_MHV_M Output voltage

15 PWM_THV2_P_CV PWM signal

16 READ_MHV_C Output voltage

High voltage power supply (HVPS) board 127

 PIN assign PIN name Description

17 READ_THV2 Output voltage

18 PWM_MHV_Y PWM signal

19 PWM_DEVE_DC_K PWM signal

20 PWM_MHV_M PWM signal

21 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_K PWM signal

22 PWM_MHV_C PWM signal

23 PWM_DEVE_DC_C PWM signal

24 PWM_MHV_K PWM signal

25 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_C PWM signal

26 PWM_THV2_P_CC PWM signal

27 PWM_DEVE_DC_M PWM signal

28 THV2_CV_SELECT PWM signal

29 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_M PWM signal

30 NC

31 PWM_DEVE_DC_Y PWM signal

32 READ_MHV_K Output voltage

33 PWM_DEVE_AC_VPP_Y PWM signal

34 PWM_DEVE_AC_VFREQ PWM signal

35 DETECT

CN2

1 24 V Input voltage

2 24 V Input voltage

3 24 V Input voltage

4 3.3 V Input voltage

5 GND GND

6 GND GND

7 GND GND

8 READ_HVPS_24 Output voltage

9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y nEN signal

10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M nEN signal

11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C nEN signal

12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K nEN signal

Connections

CN3 ITHV Y/M/C/K Output voltage

CN5 2THV ± Output voltage

128 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 PIN assign PIN name Description

CN6 MHV Y Output voltage

CN7 MHV M Output voltage

CN8 MHV C Output voltage

CN9 MHV K Output voltage

CN10 DEVE Y Output voltage

CN11 DEVE M Output voltage

CN12 DEVE C Output voltage

CN13 DEVE K Output voltage

CN4

1 FUSER_BIAS Output voltage

2 SAW_PLATE Output voltage

Specification

● Input voltage: DC 24 V, 3.3 V

● Output voltage:

– MHV Y/M/C/K: -1395 V

– DEVE DC Y/M/C/K: -606 V

– DEV AC Y/M/C/K: Vpp 920 V

– THV1 Y/M/C/K: 45.5 uA

– THV2+(CV): 2020 V

– THV2+(CC): 25.5 uA

– THV2–: –1310 V

– FUSER: 998 V

– SAW: -998 V

Information

● Part number: JC44-00240B

● Part name: HVPS

Eraser PCA
Learn about the eraser PCA.

The eraser PCA has one LED. The LED is used for erasing the negative charges on the surface of the
drum after printing.

Eraser PCA 129

 Figure 1-91 Eraser PCA

Information

● Part name: PCA-ERASER

Fuser PCA
Learn about the fuser PCA.

The Fuser PCA includes a CRU memory for Fuser Unit Life Cycle counting. The Fuser PCA provides a
connection interface for the pressure sensor.

Figure 1-92 Fuser PCA

1 Fuser EEPROM, Pressure Sensor I/F

2 Pressure Sensor (Not used)

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-FUSER

Waste Sensor PCA

Learn about the waste sensor PCA.

The waste sensor PCA detects the waste toner level inside the toner collection unit.

130 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-93 Waste sensor PCA

Information

● Part name: WASTE SENSOR RX

Paper Size sensor PCA

The paper size sensor PCA is used for detecting the size of the paper in the tray.

Figure 1-94 Paper size sensor PCA

Flow document feeder PCA

Learn about the flow document feeder PCA.

The flow document feeder PCA uses the R5F562TAEDFP (100 MHz Main Clock) for controlling the flow
document feeder and interfaces with the main board through UART.

The flow document feeder PCA has three motor driver ICs to control the BLDC/step motor and controls
one BLDC motor, two step motors, one clutch, one fan, and 11 sensors.

Paper Size sensor PCA 131

 Figure 1-95 Flow document feeder PCA

1 Scan Position 1/2, Registration, Feed Sensor

2 Pickup, Paper Detect, Cover Open Sensor

3 BLDC Motor, Registration Motor, Pickup Clutch

4 Output Sensor, Fan

5 Paper Length 1/2, Width Sensor

6 Scan Joint PCA

Information

● Part number: JC92-02964A

● Part name: Flow PCA - ADF HIC (GX only)

● Part number: JC92-02964B

● Part name: Flow ADF-PCA (sGX)

● Part number: JC92-02962A

● Part name: LX (du models) ADF PCA

Scan joint PCA

The scan joint PCA has a Bipolar Step Motor driving IC and interfaces with the WLED, APS sensor (1, 2),
cover open sensor (1, 2), home position sensor, and main board.

The scan joint PCA also functions as the relay board to interface with the ADF I/F and power board.

132 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

 Figure 1-96 Scan joint PCA

1 WLED IF PCA

2 MAIN PCA

3 Cover Open 2, Home Sensor

4 ADF/flow ADF PCA

5 Image Scanner Motor

Information

● Part number: JC92-02781A

● Part name: PCA-SCAN JOINT

CCDM PCA
The CCDM PCA is used in the scanner unit and converts the reflected light from an original document
to electrical signals. The reflected light from an original document is converted to three-color analog
signals: red, green, and blue. The ADC converts each analog signal to digital. For a high speed data
transmission, the digital data signal is converted to a LVDS format with serialization. The CCDM PCA
includes the CCD, ADC, Logic IC, and so on.

Figure 1-97 CCDM PCA

1 MAIN PCA

Information

● Part number:

CCDM PCA 133

 ● Part name: PBA-CCDM

WLED IF PCA
The WLED IF PCA interfaces with the WLED and sensors inside the Image Scanner unit.

Figure 1-98 WLED IF PCA

1 APS1, APS2 Sensor

2 Cover Open1 Sensor

3 SCAN JOINT PCA

4 WLED PCA

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-WLED IF

WLED PCA
The WLED PCA consists of two WLEDs used as scanner light.

Figure 1-99 WLED PCA

1 WLED PCA

Information

● Part number:

● Part name: PBA-WLED

134 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder.

The DCF is an optional device that stores additional paper.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-100 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the

prefeed roller.

4 R3 Reverse Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

(separation) roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4/5 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4/5 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

5 R8 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

5 R9 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the

prefeed roller.

5 R10 Reverse Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

(separation) roller

5 R11 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

5 R12 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 135

 Paper path

Figure 1-101 Paper path

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-102 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 3.

136 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Tray number Callouts Description Function

4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 3.

4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.

4/5 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-

R7.

5 S5 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in Tray 4.

5 S6 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting-up of

Tray 4.

5 S7 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R9-R10 and

R11-12.

4 S8 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper

size in Tray 3.

5 S9 Paper size sensor Detects tray insertion and paper

size in Tray 4.

4/5 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of right cover.

4 M1 Tray 3 pickup motor

5 M2 Tray 4 pickup motor

4/5 M3 Tray feed motor

Dual cassette feeder (DCF) 137

 PCA connection

Figure 1-103 PCA connection and DCF

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN801 2 PICK/LIFT4 MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/LCT HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN802 9 SENSOR PAPER SIZE

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

138 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

High capacity input tray (HCI)
Learn the functions and specifications of the high capacity input tray.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-104 Paper feeding system

Tray number Roller number Roller name Function

4 R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

4 R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the

prefeed roller.

4 R3 Reverse Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

(separation) roller

4 R4 Prefeed roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

4 R5 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

4 R6 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the basic

machine.

4 R7 Idle roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

High capacity input tray (HCI) 139

 Paper path

Figure 1-105 HCI paper path

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-106 Electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Tray number Callouts Description Function

3/4 S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in main tray.

3/4 S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of

main tray.

3/4 S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and

R4-5.

3/4 S4 Path sensor Detects paper passing through R6-

R7.

3/4 S5 Tray insertion sensor Detects tray insertion.

3/4 S6 Knockup home sensor Detects home position of knock-

plate.

140 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Tray number Callouts Description Function

3/4 S7 Main tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper

quantity in main tray.

3/4 S8 Main tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper

quantity in main tray.

3/4 S9 Shift tray no paper sensor Detects paper empty in sub tray.

3/4 S10 Shift tray level sensor 1 Detects paper residual quantity in
sub tray.

3/4 S11 Shift tray level sensor 2 Detects paper residual quantity in
sub tray.

3/4 S12 Shift plate home sensor Detects home position of shift
plate.

3/4 S13 Shift plate end sensor Detects end position of shift plate.

3/4 S14 Solenoid home sensor Detects home position of solenoid.

3/4 SW1 Side door open switch Detects opening of solenoid.

3 M1 Tray pickup motor

3 M2 Tray feed motor

3 M3 Tray lift up motor

3 M4 Paper shift motor

3 A1 Solenoid

High capacity input tray (HCI) 141

 PCA connection

Figure 1-107 HCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN902 1 DC MOTOR I/F

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN901 10 HCI INNER DRAWER

CN302 11 SUB I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

142 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI)
Learn the functions and specifications of the side high capacity input tray.

Paper feeding system (rollers and functions)

Figure 1-108 Paper feeding system

Roller number Roller name Function

R1 Pickup roller Transports paper from the paper stack.

R2 Feed roller Transports one sheet of paper to the prefeed roller.

R3 Reverse (separation) Makes sure paper is moved one at a time.

roller

R4 Idle roller Transports paper to the feed roller.

R5 Feed roller Makes paper transportation smooth.

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 143

 Paper path

Figure 1-109 sHCI paper path

144 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

Electrical parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Figure 1-110 sHCI electric parts locations, descriptions, and functions

Callouts Description Function

S1 Pickup no paper sensor Detects paper empty in tray.

S2 Pickup level sensor Detects upper limit of lifting up of main tray.

S3 Prefeed sensor Detects paper between R2-R3 and R4-5.

S4 Paper level sensor 1 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

tray.

S5 Paper level sensor 2 Detects paper residual paper quantity in

tray.

S6 Install sensor 1 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.

S7 Install sensor 2 Detects installation of SL-sHCI501S to the

basic machine.

SW1 Top door open switch Detects opening of the top door.

M1 Tray pickup motor Drives the pickup roller.

M2 Tray feed motor Drives the feed roller

Side high capacity input tray (sHCI) 145

 Callouts Description Function

M3 Tray lift up motor Lifts up the tray.

PCA connection

Figure 1-111 sHCI PCA connection

Connector number Item number Connection

CN601 3 PICK/LIFT3 & FEED MOTOR I/F

CN701 4 LOCKMOT/MOT LIFT/sHCI HOME I/F

CN1001 5 TOPCOVER/OPEN INTERLOCK

CN301 6 MAIN I/F

CN401 7 UART DEBUG I/F

CN402 8 E1 JTAG DEBUG I/F

CN1101 12 BBP I/F

CN501 13 T4 SENSOR

CN502 14 T3 SENSOR

146 Chapter 1 Product specifications and description

2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement.

HP service and support

Learn about access to additional service and support information.

Additional service and support for channel partners

Channel partners can use the HP Partner Portal or the Channel Services Delivery Platform (CSDP) to
access the HP Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE).

Find information about the following topics.

● Service manuals, service cost data, and service advisories

● The latest control panel message (CPMD) troubleshooting information

● Remove and replace part instructions and videos

● Solutions for printer issues and emerging issues

● Printer specifications, warranty, and regulatory information

● Install, configure, and how to information

View a video of how to use the HP Partner First Portal to access WISE.

Access WISE for Channel partners (HP Partner Portal)

1. Sign-in to the HP Partner Portal (click https://partner.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Services & Support item (near the top of the screen).

3. Select the Technical Support (WISE) item.

4. Select the Technical Documentation item.

5. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Access WISE for Channel partners (CSDP)

1. Sign-in to the CSDP portal (click csdp.hp.com to access the sign-in page).

2. Select the Knowledge and Training item.

3. Select theHP Technical Documentation item.

4. Use the WISE portal to search for printer information.

Additional service and support for HP internal personnel

HP internal personnel, go to one of the following Web-based Interactive Search Engine (WISE) sites:

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement 147

 View a video of how to access WISE for internal HP users.

Americas (AMS)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Spanish

● WISE - Portuguese

● WISE - French

Asia Pacific / Japan (APJ)

● WISE - English

● WISE - Japanese

● WISE - Korean

● WISE - Chinese (simplified)

● WISE - Chinese (traditional)

● WISE - Thai

Europe / Middle East / Africa (EMEA)

● WISE - English

Additional technical support WISE videos

The videos below provide additional ways to access printer information using WISE.

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (model number search).

View a video of how to use WISE to find technical support videos (Product detail page [PDP]
search).

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 2-1 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

148 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-1 Ordering (continued)

Item or provider Description

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

How to use parts lists and diagrams

Learn how to use the parts lists and diagrams.

The figures in this chapter show the major sub-assemblies in the printer and their component parts.
A parts list table follows each exploded view assembly diagram. The table lists the item number, the
associated part number, and the description of each part. If a part is not listed in the table, then it is not a
field replacement unit (FRU).

NOTE: Be sure to order the correct part. When looking for part numbers for electrical parts, pay
careful attention to the voltage that is listed in the part description. Doing so will make sure that the
selected part number is for the correct printer model.

NOTE: The abbreviation “PCA” stands for “printed circuit-board assembly.” Components described as
a PCA might consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and
sensors.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Service approach
Learn more about the service approach.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Orderable parts 149

 Precautions when assembling and disassembling
● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

150 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Remove any finishing devices and the side HCI, if they are installed.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges, if needed.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Before performing service 151

 Copy-quality test
Learn about the copy-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder, print a copy job, and then verify the results.

2. Place the configuration page on the flatbed glass, print a copy job, and then verify the results

Fax-quality test
Learn about the fax-quality test.

1. Place the configuration page in the document feeder.

2. Type a valid fax number, and send the fax job.

3. Verify that the send quality and the receive quality meet expectations.

Parts removal order

For procedures and/or steps that require identifying the right, left, or rear side of the printer, face the
front of the printer for correct orientation.

Maintenance
Learn about preventive maintenance and printer cleaning procedures.

Cleaning the paper dust stick

Learn about cleaning the paper dust stick.

The paper dust stick needs to be cleaned after a specified number of pages are printed. A clean the
paper dust stick message will appear. This is when the paper dust stick must be cleaned. Use the
following procedure to complete this task.

1. Open the front door.

Figure 2-1 Open the front door

152 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Figure 2-2 Remove the TCU

3. Pull out the paper dust stick.

Figure 2-3 Remove paper dust stick

4. Remove the paper dust.

Figure 2-4 Remove the paper dust

Cleaning the paper dust stick 153

 5. Insert the paper dust stick back into the slot.

Figure 2-5 Install the paper dust stick

6. Insert the toner collection unit (TCU) until it locks in place on each side.

Figure 2-6 Install the TCU

154 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 7. Close the front door. Make sure the cover is securely closed. If the message still appears, repeat
Steps 3 and 4.

Figure 2-7 Close the front door

Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX)

Learn about cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX).

1. Open the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-8 Open document feeder unit

Cleaning the document feeder white bar and CIS (LX) 155
 2. Clean the document feeder white bar and CIS using a lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-9 Clean document feeder white bar

CIS

Simplex
White bar

Duplex
White bar

Cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX)
Learn about cleaning the flow document feeder white bar and CIS (GX).

1. Open the document feeder, peel back the white backing , and then release the green tab.

Figure 2-10 Peel back the white backing and release one tab

156 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the access door. Clean the simplex white bar (callout 1), the CIS (callout 2), and the duplex
white bar (callout 3) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-11 Clean flow document feeder white bar

Cleaning the scanner glass

Learn about cleaning the scan glass.

■ Open the document feeder. Clean the scanner glass (callout 1) using a soft, lint-free, clean cloth.

Figure 2-12 Clean the scanner glass

Cleaning the scanner glass 157

 Main parts
Learn about the printer main parts.

Main assemblies
View the main assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the main assembly.

158 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-13 Main assembly

49

30

43

Table 2-2 Main assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01610A Cassette tray 2 1 Not applicable

2 JC90-01611A Cassette tray 3 1 Not applicable

5 JC44-00240 HVPS 24V 1 Removal and replacement:

B High voltage power supply
(HVPS) board

6 JC97-04863A Laser scanner unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner assembly

7 JC93-01414A Fan type 8 2 Removal and replacement:

Laser scanner fan assembly

8 JC96-11639A HP LaserJet yellow developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit

Main assembly 159

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 JC96-11640A HP LaserJet magenta developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit

10 JC96-11641A HP LaserJet cyan developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit

11 JC96-11642A HP LaserJet blk developer unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer unit

12 JC93-01026B Paper dust brush 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper dust brush

13 JC98-05425 Image transfer belt assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

A Intermediate transfer belt
(ITB) unit

13-1 JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade 1 Removal and replacement:

Intermediate transfer belt
(ITB) cleaner

15 JC97-04907A Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 1 Removal and replacement:

Image scanner assembly
(flatbed)

16 JC63-05410A White backing (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF white backing (LX)

16 JC63-05795A White backing (GX) 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF white backing (GX)

17 JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit 1 Removal and replacement:

ADF whole unit (LX)

17 JC97-04955A Flow ADF-GX 1 Not applicable

17 JC97-04956A Non-Flow ADF-sGX 1 Not applicable

18 JC90-01369A Exit assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit unit

18-1 C90-01374A Exit assembly, second 1 Not applicable

18-2 JC90-01370A Exit assembly, first 1 Not applicable

19 JC82-00483 220V fuser assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

A Fuser unit

19 JC82-00477A 110V fuser assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser unit

22 JC95-02092 Right door assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

A Right door

29 JC44-00236 Fuser drive board, 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

B Fuser drive board

29 JC44-00235 Fuser drive board, 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

B Fuser drive board

Not shown JC39-02569 Wire harness FDB interface to main PCA 1 Removal and replacement:
A Fuser drive board

160 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

30 JC44-00250 LVPS 220V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement:

A Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) type 5H

30 JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H 1 Removal and replacement:

Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) type 5H

31 JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4 1 Removal and replacement:

Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) Type 4

31 JC44-00092 LVPS 220V Type 4 1 Removal and replacement:

D Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) Type 4

34-1 JC31-00161A Fan type 7 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser fan

38 X3A92-67926 Toner collection unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner collection unit

40 JC61-07088A Return guide 1 Not applicable

41 JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket 1 Not applicable

42 5851-6712 Main PCA HDD 500GB 1 Removal and replacement:

Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

43 Y1G22-67901 Tray Heater (110v) 1 Not applicable

43 Y1G22-67902 Tray Heater (220v) 1 Not applicable

49 JC82-00543 PCA-Main Board w/heat sink 1 Removal and replacement:

A (E876z, Main board
E876dn
series)

5CM63-6700
1 (E876du
series)

Not shown B5L47-60101 Pulsar Control Panel 1 Removal and replacement:

Control panel

Not shown X3A92-6000 Formatter (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:

3 Formatter (du models)

Not shown X3A92-60001 Formatter 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter

Not shown X3A62-60001 Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Accelerator board (GX ADF
only)

Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:
Island of data (IOD; du
models)

Not shown X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data 1 Removal and replacement:

Island of data (IOD)

Main assembly 161

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive
(HDD; du models)

Not shown 5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive
(HDD)

Not shown L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500GB 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter hard disk drive
(HDD)

Not shown B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle 1 Removal and replacement:

Formatter hard disk drive
(HDD)

Not shown T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module 1 Removal and replacement:
Formatter hard disk drive
(HDD)

Not shown B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles)

Not shown B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy 1 Removal and replacement:

Keyboard (z bundles)

Not shown X3A92-67905 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit 1 Removal and replacement:
Imaging drum unit

Not shown X3A92-67906 HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit 1 Removal and replacement:
Imaging drum unit

Not shown B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness 1 Install accessory: HP Foreign

interface harness (FIH)
solution

Not shown J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit 1 Removal and replacement:
NFC Kit Installation

Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch 1 Removal and replacement:
Front power switch

Not shown JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) 1 Removal and replacement:
Low voltage power supply
(LVPS) fans

Not shown JC39-02187A Lower tray connector 1 Removal and replacement:

Lower tray connector

Not shown JC31-00130A Developer fan 1 Removal and replacement:

Developer fan

Not shown JC90-01772B Bridge unit 1 Removal and replacement:

Bridge unit

Not shown JC27-00012A Inductor unit 110V 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit

Not shown JC27-00009A Inductor unit 220V 1 Removal and replacement:

Inductor unit

Not shown JC93-01467A Switch Assy - Right Door 1 Removal and replacement:
Right door switch assembly

162 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-2 Main assembly (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC93-01063C Drive, pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2)

Not shown JC93-00492 TCU sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

A Toner collection unit (TCU)
sensors

Not shown JC93-01277A Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector 1 Removal and replacement:
CRUM connector

Not shown 0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) 1 Removal and replacement:
Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit
unit)

Not shown 0604-001393 Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) 1 Removal and replacement:
Exit 1 bin full sensor (on the
exit unit)

Not shown 0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 1 Removal and replacement:
Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit
2)

Not shown 0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit
1)

Not shown JC39-02253 FFC cable, laser scanner unit 1 Not applicable
A

Not shown JC39-02252A FFC Cable, HVPS 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-01202A Cable, SATA main HDD 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-01943A Cable, PWR main HDD 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB 1 Not applicable

Not shown X3A92-6000 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel 1 Not applicable

3

Not shown X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02194A Wiring harness (output device) 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02252A HVPS FFC cable 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit

Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU).

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit 163

 Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-3 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-67926 HP Managed LJ Toner Collection Unit

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

164 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-14 Remove the TCU

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 165

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: High voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Learn how to remove and replace the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HVPS.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-4 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00240B HVPS 24V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

166 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-15 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-16 Remove the left cover

Remove the left cover 167

 2. Remove the HVPS
Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one
retainer in the center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-17 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-18 Disconnect three connectors

168 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. If you are replacing the HVPS board, release two tabs and rotate the cover off of the board. Attach
the cover to the replacement part before installing.

Figure 2-19 Remove the HVPS cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 169

 Removal and replacement: Laser scanner assembly
Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-5 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04863A Laser Scanner Unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

170 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the left cover
Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-20 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-21 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board

Follow these steps to remove the high voltage power supply (HVPS) board.

Remove the left cover 171

 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one
retainer in the center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-22 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-23 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove the laser scanner assembly

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly.

172 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. To remove the laser scanner fan and holder, disconnect one connector, and then remove two
screws on the fan holder.

Figure 2-24 Remove the laser scanner fan and holder

2. Remove two screws, and then disconnect two in-line connectors on the left.

Figure 2-25 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

3. Slide the laser scanner partially out of the printer (callout 1), and then disconnect two flat cables
and one connector on the left. One of the flat cable connectors is a zero insertion force (ZIF)

Remove the laser scanner assembly 173

 connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable. After disconnecting the
connectors, remove the laser scanner assembly from the printer.

Figure 2-26 Laser scanner assembly

TIP: Align the locator pin on the back of the assembly with the opening in the printer sheet metal
frame to guide the assembly into place. The screw holes on the front of the assembly will line up
with the screw holes in the sheet metal when the assembly is correctly installed.

When reinstalling the laser scanner assembly, make sure that the flat cable that routes over the
top of the assembly does not become trapped under the assembly.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

174 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner fan assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the laser scanner assembly fan.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-6 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01414A Fan Type 8

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Laser scanner fan assembly 175

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-27 Top left cover

176 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-28 Remove the left cover

2. Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

Figure 2-29 Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the laser scanner assembly fan 177

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer unit

Learn how to remove and replace the developer unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the developer unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

178 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-7 Part information

Part number Part description

JC96-11642A HP LaserJet Blk Developer Unit

JC96-11641A HP LaserJet Cyan Developer Unit

JC96-11640A HP LaserJet Magenta Developer Unit

JC96-11639A HP LaserJet Yellow Developer Unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

2. Remove the drum unit to the right of the developer to be replaced..

TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.

Remove the developer unit 179

 3. Rotate the reservoir shutter lever down to ensure it is closed..

Figure 2-30 Shutter open/close

4. Release the valve from the developer by rotating the valve side-to-side while pulling it firmly away
from the printer.

TIP: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the developer before rotating it to the open
position.

Figure 2-31 Release the toner collection valve

180 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Reach to the top of the toner supply pipe, and then rotate it up.

Figure 2-32 Tilt toner supply pipe up

6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the metal
bracket (callout 3).

TIP: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.

Figure 2-33 Remove the metal bracket

TIP: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.

7. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and slide it away from the printer to remove it.

NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.

Figure 2-34 Developer unit removal

TIP: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.

Remove the developer unit 181

 2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Special installation instructions (Developer unit)

Also use the following special installation instructions.

1. Fill the empty replacement developer unit with developer powder prior to installation.

IMPORTANT: During filling, place the developer unit on sheets of paper or a disposable cover to
catch any spilled developer powder.

a. Unpack the developer unit and silver packet of developer powder from the kit box.

b. Open the developer unit cover.

CAUTION: Do not touch the silver roller.

c. Carefully open the developer packet, and then distribute the developer powder evenly into the
developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Before opening the packet, shake it three or four times. This prevents the
developer powder from scattering.

182 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 d. Close the developer unit cover.

e. Install the developer unit in the printer.

2. Reset the firmware counter and initialize the toner concentration.

IMPORTANT: The front door must be open at the beginning of this procedure. Do not close the
door until instructed.

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
service access code.

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. On the Information tab, select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Development Unit (Developer) (CMYK).

h. Select the check box on the right side of the screen for the replaced developer unit.

i. Select Reset, to clear the counter and begin the toner concentration initialization.

j. Close the front door, wait for the toner concentration initialization process to complete, and
then exit service mode (touch the Home button).

Removal and replacement: Paper dust brush

Learn how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

View a video of how to remove and replace the paper dust brush.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Paper dust brush 183

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-8 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01026B Paper dust brush

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

184 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-35 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-36 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the paper dust brush 185

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

186 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner

Learn how to remove and replace the ITB cleaner blade.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ITB cleaner blade.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-9 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) cleaner 187

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-37 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

188 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-38 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along
the side of the cleaner.

Figure 2-39 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 189

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

4. Special installation instructions: ITB cleaner

After the replacement cleaner is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

1. Select the Service menu.

2. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the access
code (04087617).

3. Select the Service Tools menu.

4. Select the Supply Status menu.

5. Select Field Replacement Unit.

6. Select ITB Cleaner.

7. Select Transfer Cleaning Unit.

8. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit

Learn how to remove and replace the intermediate transfer belt (ITB) unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ITB.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

190 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-10 Part information

Part number Part description

JC98-05425A HP Laserjet Image Transfer Belt Assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

For replacement ITB installations: Perform a Setting Standard Tone procedure. See Setting Standard
Tone.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 191

 1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-40 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

Figure 2-41 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

192 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along
the side of the cleaner.

Figure 2-42 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

3. Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the cable from the retainer, and then disconnect one connector. Slide the ITB latch toward
the front of the printer to release the coupled drive.

Figure 2-43 Disconnect one connector and slide the latch

3. Remove two screws securing the ITB unit.

TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer..

Remove the ITB 193

 Figure 2-44 Remove two screws

4. Pull the ITB unit partially out of the printer, and then lift it up and out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage the it by hitting it on the door
during removal.

Figure 2-45 Remove the ITB

5. While pushing the color plane registration (CPR) shutter toward the rear of the printer, clean the
three CPR sensors with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-46 Clean the CPR sensors

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

194 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

ITB install and firmware counter reset

NOTE: If the ITB was removed to gain access to another assembly, follow step 1 and skip step 2.

If a replacement ITB is installed, follow both steps 1 and 2.

1. Installing an ITB: Align the arrow on the gear with the arrowhead on the ITB frame.

Figure 2-47 Align arrows

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 195

 2. ITB replacement installations: Follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. Select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select ITB (Image Transfer Belt).

h. Select Transfer Belt.

i. Select Reset.

6. Setting Standard Tone

Follow the steps below if a replacement ITB is installed.

For a replacement ITB installation (or after cleaning the CTD sensor), perform a Setting Standard Tone
procedure.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Setting Standard Tone

1. From the control panel, select Support Tools and then Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04087617

3. Select Service Tools.

Figure 2-48 Service Tools

196 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Select Diagnostics.

Figure 2-49 Diagnostics

5. Select Image Management.

Figure 2-50 Image Management

Setting Standard Tone 197

 6. Select Setting Standard Tone.

Figure 2-51 Setting Standard Tone (1 of 4)

7. Load Tray 2 with paper, and then select Start.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper is loaded for short-edge first (SEF) feeding into the printer.

Figure 2-52 Setting Standard Tone (2 of 4)

198 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 8. A color patch page prints.

Figure 2-53 Setting Standard Tone (3 of 4)

9. Position the color patch page on the flatbed glass as shown below, and then select Start.

NOTE: If when the process is completed the results are not satisfactory, use the Cancel Setting
Standard Tone menu item to return to the default value.

Support Tools > Service > Service Tools > Diagnostics > Image Management > Cancel Setting
Standard Tone

Figure 2-54 Setting Standard Tone (4 of 4)

Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed)

Learn how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

Removal and replacement: Image scanner assembly (flatbed) 199

 View a video of how to remove and replace the image scanner assembly.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-11 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04907A Scanner whole unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

200 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-55 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-56 Remove the upper rear cover

Remove the formatter cover 201

 3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-57 Remove the document feeder connector cover

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 2-58 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

202 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-59 Release the document feeder hinge screws

5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-60 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 203

 1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-61 Remove document feeder connector cover

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-62 Remove the cable choke

204 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-63 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

Figure 2-64 Alignment marks

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 205

 5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-65 Remove screws

6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-66 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

206 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-67 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

6. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

Remove the control panel 207

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two
screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 2-68 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-69 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control
panel.

7. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).

208 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 2-70 Disconnect one FFC

2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-71 Remove the control-panel keyboard

8. Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed)

Follow these steps to remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed).

Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 209

 1. Remove six screw-caps and six screws. It might be necessary to use leverage near the left hinge
and then pull the cover toward the back.

Figure 2-72 Remove screw-caps and screws and release scan-front cover

2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 2-73 Release scan-left cover

210 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove three screw-caps and three screws (callout 1). Release the scan-right cover.

Figure 2-74 Remove scan-right cover

2
1

NOTE: At the front of the scanner, remove the bracket (callout 2) and install it on the replacement
scanner whole unit.

4. Disconnect the two scan cables and one FFC at the top of the main board.

Figure 2-75 Disconnect scan cables

Remove the Image scanner assembly (flat bed) 211

 5. Remove three screws from the left.

Figure 2-76 Remove screws

6. Remove two screws from the right.

Figure 2-77 Remove screws

7. Lift up and release the image scanner unit.

Figure 2-78 Lift up and release image scanner unit

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

212 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (LX).

This document provides the procedures to remove the white backing assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (LX) 213

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-12 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05410A ADF white backing (LX)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder white backing

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

IMPORTANT: Remove all the tape and foam from the bottom of the document feeder.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Peel the adhesive tape backing off the new white backing.

214 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Figure 2-79 Close the document feeder cover

6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-80 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 215

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: ADF white backing (GX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF white backing (GX ADF).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder white backing (GX ADF).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

216 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-13 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05795A ADF white backing (GX ADF)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the white backing

Follow these steps to remove the white backing.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

2. Peel the white backing away to remove.

3. Position the new white backing on the scanner glass.

4. Replace any damaged or missing hook-and-loop fasteners by positioning them on the new white
backing.

5. Close the document feeder cover to attach the white backing.

Remove the white backing 217

 6. Open the cover again and smooth the white backing.

Figure 2-81 Smooth the white backing

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

218 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door

Learn how to remove and replace the right door.

View a video of how to remove and replace the right door.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-14 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02092A Right door assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Right door 219

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-82 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-83 Remove the right rear cover

220 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-84 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-85 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 221

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-86 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-87 Remove the right door

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

222 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit unit

Learn how to remove and replace the exit unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Exit unit 223

 Table 2-15 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01369A Exit unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-88 Remove four screws

224 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-89 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-90 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 225

 Figure 2-91 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-92 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

226 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-93 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-94 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 227

 Figure 2-95 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-96 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

228 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-97 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-98 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Remove the fuser unit 229

 Figure 2-99 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-100 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-101 Remove the exit unit

230 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser unit.

Mean time to repair: 3 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 231

 ○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-16 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A73-60016 HP LaserJet 110V fuser assembly

X3A73-60017 HP LaserJet 220V fuser assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

232 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-102 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-103 Fuser unit removal

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

Unpack the replacement assembly 233

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Install the fuser support brackets

Follow these steps to install the fuser support brackets.

NOTE: Installing the fuser support brackets is only required if the fuser PEM nut is damaged.

If the PEM nut separates from the printer frame, a service part for replacing this fastener is required. The
replacement parts are two brackets that support the fuser unit in the place of the PEM nut.

Figure 2-104 PEM nut

Table 2-17 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A76-67002 SVC AS-Bracket repair

You will receive two brackets, shown below, to install in the fuser cavity.

234 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-105 Fuser support brackets

1. Remove five screws to remove the two covers shown below. Removing the covers reveals the
mounting points for the support brackets.

Figure 2-106 Remove covers

Install the fuser support brackets 235

 2. Locate the left bracket mounting point (callout 1) and the right bracket mounting point (callout 2).

Figure 2-107 Fuser support mounting points

2
1

236 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Line up the left support bracket (part number X3A76-00005) to the corresponding mounting point
holes, as shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.

Figure 2-108 Install the left bracket

Install the fuser support brackets 237

 4. Line up the right support bracket (part number X3A76-00004) to the corresponding mounting point
holes, as shown below, and then fasten the bracket to the frame with four screws.

Figure 2-109 Install the right bracket

238 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Install the fuser, and then confirm that the printer works correctly.

Figure 2-110 Install the fuser

6. Reinstall the two covers by fastening the five screws.

NOTE: The brackets feature lines for taking apart the legs. You can tear off partial sections if needed.
Use metal tools to remove them.

NOTE: Verify that the brackets are installed as shown below. The two brackets are not
interchangeable.

Install the fuser support brackets 239

 Removal and replacement: Fuser drive board
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser drive board.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-18 Part information

Part number part description

JC44-00235B Fuser drive board 110V

240 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-18 Part information (continued)

Part number part description

JC44-00236B Fuser drive board 220V

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-111 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 241

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-112 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-113 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive board

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive board.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

242 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer
before attempting to disconnect the connector.

■ Disconnect twelve connectors and release one retainer on the lower left. Remove four screws, and
then remove the fuser drive board.

TIP: Two of the connectors (callout 1) can be mistakenly switched and connected to the wrong
connector on the fuser drive board. If this happens, the printer will not power on. Make sure that the
cables are installed in the correct positions.

Figure 2-114 Fuser drive board

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 243

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 5H

Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) Type 5.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS Type 5.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-19 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H

JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

244 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-115 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 245

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-116 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-117 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the LVPS type 5H

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 5H.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

246 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board use retainers. Be sure to release the retainer before
attempting to disconnect the connector.

■ Disconnect all connectors. Remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 5H.

Figure 2-118 LVPS type 5H

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 247

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Fuser fan

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuse fan.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-20 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00161A Fan, type 7

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

248 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-119 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 249

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-120 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-121 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

250 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then
remove three screws.

Figure 2-122 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind
the cage. Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-123 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

Remove the fuser fan 251

 1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-124 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-125 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you
are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-126 Release five tabs

252 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If
you are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-127 Remove the fuser fan

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 253

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Internal hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the internal hard-disk drive (installed beneath the rear-exit cover).

View a video of how to remove and replace the internal hard-disk drive.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-21 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Main PCA HDD 500 GB

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

254 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-128 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 255

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-129 Remove the exit cover

3. Remove the HDD

Follow these steps to remove the HDD.

1. Remove four screws, and then release the HDD cover.

Figure 2-130 Remove the HDD cover

256 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screws, disconnect the HDD cable, and then remove the HDD with its holder.

Figure 2-131 Remove the HDD

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main board

Learn how to remove and replace the main board.

View a video of how to remove and replace the main board.

Unpack the replacement assembly 257

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-22 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00543A Main PCA for E876z, E876dn series

5CM63-67001 MainPCA for E876du series

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

258 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-132 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-133 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 259

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-134 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-135 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

260 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-136 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-137 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 261

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-138 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board

Follow these steps to remove the main board.

1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull
the cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the
center latch.

Figure 2-139 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 1) are zero
insertion force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables.

262 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Remove the MSOK board (callout 2) and install it on the replacement main board. Remove nine
screws, and then remove the main board.

IMPORTANT: Do not lose or damage the MSOK chip. It must be installed on the replacement main
board in the correct orientation in order for the printer to function. The MSOK chip is extremely
difficult to replace if it is lost or damaged.

IMPORTANT: A shade Test for the ADF must be completed after replacing the ADF unit or the Main
board.

Figure 2-140 Remove the main board

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 263

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Main board

1. When reinstalling the MSOK board, note the dashed outline (callout 1) on the main board. When the
MSOK board is installed correctly, it fits within this outline.

Figure 2-141 Position of MSOK board

2. Make sure that the MSOK board is installed correctly on the replacement main board.

264 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-142 Install the MSOK board

3. When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
connector before closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-143 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only)

Learn how to remove and replace the accelerator board.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

Removal and replacement: Accelerator board (GX ADF only) 265

 View a video of how to remove and replace the accelerator board.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-23 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA

NOTE: An accelerator PCA is only installed on some early models during original release. This has
been removed from all new models.

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

266 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-144 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

■ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Remove the formatter cover 267

 Figure 2-145 Remove the accelerator PCA

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD; du models)

Learn how to remove and replace the IOD (du bundles).

268 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the IOD (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-24 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver withs a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD; du models) 269

 1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-146 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the island of data (IOD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD; du models).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

270 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-147 Remove the IOD (du models)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 271

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Island of data (IOD)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Island of Data (IOD).

View a video of how to remove and replace the Island of Data (IOD).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-25 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

272 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-148 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the island of data (IOD)

Follow these steps to remove the island of data (IOD).

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove one screw, and then remove the IOD.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Remove the formatter cover 273

 Figure 2-149 Remove the IOD

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

274 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-26 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB (du models)

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD; du models) 275
 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-150 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).

■ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

276 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-151 Remove the HDD (du models)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 277

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter hard disk drive (HDD)

Learn how to remove and replace the HDD.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the HDD.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-27 Part information

Part number Part description

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500 GB

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

278 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-152 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

■ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Remove the formatter cover 279

 Figure 2-153 Remove the HDD

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

280 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (du models)

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter (du models).

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter (du models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-28 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA (du models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver withs a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

Removal and replacement: Formatter (du models) 281

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-154 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models)

Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD; du models).

■ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

282 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-155 Remove the HDD (du models)

3. Remove the formatter PCA (du models)

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA (du models).

■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-156 Remove the formatter PCA (du models)

Remove the formatter PCA (du models) 283

 4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Formatter

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the formatter.

View a video of how to remove and replace the formatter.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

284 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-29 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-60001 Formatter PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 285

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-157 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the accelerator board

Follow these steps to remove the accelerator board.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

■ Loosen two screws, retained in plastic clips, on the outside of the formatter cage. Disconnect one
connector, release the plastic locator pin, and then gently lift the accelerator board away from the
formatter by the edges.

NOTE: A connector on the back of the accelerator board holds the board on the formatter.

IMPORTANT: Do not lift the accelerator board by the heat sink.

Figure 2-158 Remove the accelerator PCA

286 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD)
Follow these steps to remove the hard-disk drive (HDD).

■ Release one retainer, and then rotate the HDD away from the formatter to remove it.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the HDD and the island of data (IOD) at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Figure 2-159 Remove the HDD

4. Remove the formatter PCA

Follow these steps to remove the formatter PCA.

■ Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter board, remove seven screws, and then remove the
formatter PCA.

CAUTION: ESD sensitive part.

IMPORTANT: Do not replace the formatter and the main PCA at the same time. Replace one
component, turn the printer on and off, and then replace the second component.

Remove the hard-disk drive (HDD) 287

 Figure 2-160 Remove the formatter PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

288 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Control panel

Learn how to remove and replace the control panel.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the control panel.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-30 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60101 Control panel

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Control panel 289

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Verify that the control panel illuminates and displays information while the printer is initializing. Verify
control panel functionality after initialization.

1. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-161 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

290 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two
screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 2-162 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-163 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control
panel.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 291

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Keyboard (z bundles)

Learn how to remove and replace the keyboard.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the keyboard.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

292 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-31 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L47-60102 US English keyboard assembly

B5L47-60103 UK English keyboard assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Type on the keyboard and verify that it is recognized by the control panel.

1. Remove the control panel bezel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel bezel.

Remove the control panel bezel 293

 1. Open the document feeder, and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-164 Remove the control panel bezel.

2. Place the control panel in the upright position.

3. Gently pry the control-panel bezel from the center screw hole, and then pry from the center of the
control-panel bezel to the edges to release.

CAUTION: Do not pry against the scanner glass when removing the control-panel bezel.

2. Remove the control panel

Follow these steps to remove the control panel.

1. Place the control panel in the upright position.

294 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one FFC, one connector, and one HDMI connector (callout 1), and then remove two
screws on the control-panel frame.

Figure 2-165 Remove the control panel screws and disconnect connectors

3. Remove the USB interconnect cable from its retainer and reroute out of the way.

Figure 2-166 Remove the USB interconnect cable

4. Lift the control panel up from the front to release the tabs at the rear, and then remove the control
panel.

Reinstallation tip: Align the four tabs at the rear or control panel, and then snap in the control
panel.

3. Remove the keyboard (z bundles)

Follow these steps to remove the keyboard (z bundles).

Remove the keyboard (z bundles) 295

 Keyboard bundles only. For all other models, skip this step.

1. Disconnect one FFC.

Figure 2-167 Disconnect one FFC

2. Slide the keyboard out, and then depress two latches to remove the keyboard.

Figure 2-168 Remove the control-panel keyboard

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

296 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit

Learn how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the imaging drum unit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Imaging drum unit 297

 Table 2-32 Part information

Part number Part description

X3A92-67905 HP Black Managed LJ Imaging Drum

X3A92-67906 HP Managed LJ Imaging Drum

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

2. There are four locking levers, one for each color. Pull down on the locking lever for the color drum
unit that is being replaced.

Figure 2-169 Release locking lever

3. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.

NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.

CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper while it
is out of the printer to limit light exposure.

298 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-170 Remove the drum unit

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Install accessory: HP Foreign interface harness (FIH) solution

Lear how to install the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Foreign Interface Harness (FIH) accessory.

Mean time to repair: 1 minute

Service level: Basic

Unpack the replacement assembly 299

 Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-33 Part information

Part number Part description

B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness

Required tools
● No special tools are required to remove this part.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Connect a third party solution to the FIH, and then verify it correctly functions.

1. Unpack the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to unpack the FIH accessory.

■ Unpack the accessory from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

300 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

2. Install the FIH accessory

Follow these steps to install the FIH accessory.

■ Locate the USB connector on the printer formatter. Connect the FIH to this connector

Figure 2-171 Connect the FIH

Removal and replacement: NFC Kit Installation

Learn how to install the NFC kit.

View a video of how to install the NFC kit.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

○ Disconnect the power cable.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the printer off, wait 30 seconds, and then remove
the power cable before attempting to service the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-34 Part information

Part number Part description

J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit

Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver.

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Install the FIH accessory 301

 ○ Connect the power cable.

○ Use the power switch to turn the power on.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Make sure that the printer initializes to a Ready state.

Verify that the light on the NFC accessory illuminates to confirm the installation is correct.

Verify that a wireless network icon appears on the control panel.

1. Unpack the NFC kit

Follow these steps to unpack the NFC kit.

■ Unpack the kit from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service
work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the
sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect
the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the part prior to installation.

2. Install the NFC kit

Follow these steps to install the NFC kit.

302 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the HIP cover.

Figure 2-172 Release the HIP cover

2. Remove the HIP cover.

Figure 2-173 Remove the HIP cover

3. Identify the USB connector in the HIP, and then attach the appropriate USB cable:

Install the NFC kit 303

 a. Locate the USB connector that is along one of the short edges. A USB Mini B receptacle
(callout 1) is the most common. However, on some models, a USB Mini B plug (callout 2) is used.

Figure 2-174 Identify USB connector

b. Select the appropriate cable from the two that are provided.

Figure 2-175 Select USB cable

304 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. Install the USB cable in the socket in the HIP. Note that the USB logo on the connector may
face down on some models.

Figure 2-176 Install the USB cable

4. Attach the power and grounding ends of the USB cable:

Install the NFC kit 305

 a. Attach the white power connector of the cable into the corresponding receptacle on the NFC
accessory.

Figure 2-177 Install the white power connector

b. Attach the metal ground connector of the cable to the grounding tab on the NFC accessory.

Figure 2-178 Attach the metal ground connector

5. Install the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

306 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

a. Install the hook-shaped clips on the NFC accessory into the HIP recess.

Figure 2-179 Position the NFC accessory in the HIP recess

b. Gently push the NFC accessory onto the rounded clips so that it is held securely in place
within the recess.

Figure 2-180 Install the NFC accessory

Install the NFC kit 307

 Removal and replacement: Front power switch
Learn how to remove and replace the front power switch.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front power switch.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02969A Front power switch

308 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Press the power switch and verify that the printer turns on.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-181 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 309

 Figure 2-182 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-183 Remove the front power cover

3. Remove the front power switch

Follow these steps to remove the front power switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the power switch board.

NOTE: If necessary, remove the power switch button assembly after removing the PCA.

310 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-184 Remove one screw and the power switch

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 311

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans

Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS fans.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

312 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-185 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 313

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-186 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS fans

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS fans.

■ Disconnect two connectors, release four tabs, and then remove the LVPS fans.

TIP: When installing replacement fans, make sure that the arrow embossed on the fans points into
the printer.

Figure 2-187 Remove the LVPS fans

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

314 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following sSpecial installation instructions.

LVPS fans

■ When installing the replacement fans, make sure that the embossed arrow on the fans point toward
the printer.

Figure 2-188 Correct installation of LVPS fans

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 315

 Removal and replacement: Low voltage power supply (LVPS) Type 4
Learn how to remove and replace the low voltage power supply (LVPS) type 4.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LVPS type 4.

Mean time to repair: 8 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4

JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

316 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove the formatter cover
Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-189 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-190 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 317

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-191 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS type 4

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS type 4.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

NOTE: Many of the connectors on this board have retainers attached. Be sure to release the retainer
before attempting to disconnect the connector.

1. Remove three screws, then remove the shield-LVPS sub upper.

Figure 2-192 Remove the shield-LVPS sub upper

318 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), remove four screws, and then remove the LVPS type 4.

Figure 2-193 LVPS Type 4

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 319

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lower tray connector

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the lower tray connector.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-38 Part information

Lower tray connector part number

JC39-02187A Lower tray connector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

320 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-194 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 321

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-195 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-196 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the lower tray connector

Follow these steps to remove the lower tray connector.

322 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release one retainer, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-197 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove three screws, and then remove the lower tray
connector.

Figure 2-198 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 323

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Developer fan

Learn how to remove and replace the developer fan.

View a video of how to remove and replace the developer fan.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-39 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00130A Developer fan

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

324 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-199 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 325

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-200 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-201 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

326 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors
(callout 1) that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS
and fuser drive boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and
then tilt the top of the cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-202 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the developer fan

Follow these steps to remove the developer fan.

1. Remove Tray 2.

2. Inside the Tray 2 opening, disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-203 Disconnect one connector

3. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), release two retainers (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-204 Disconnect one connector and remove four screws

4. Remove the fan shroud under the cables.

Figure 2-205 Remove the fan shroud

Remove the developer fan 327

 5. Release the cables from two retainers.

Figure 2-206 Release the cables

6. Turn the fan shroud over to the other side. Remove two screws, and then release five tabs (callout 1)
to remove the fan cover.

Figure 2-207 Remove two screws and release five tabs

7. Remove the developer fan (callout 1).

Figure 2-208 Remove the developer fan

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

328 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge unit

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge unit.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bridge unit.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01772B Bridge unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Bridge unit 329

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge unit

Follow these steps to remove the bridge unit.

■ Remove one screw, and then slightly lift and slide the bridge unit away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-209 Remove the bridge unit

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

330 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Inductor unit

This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the inductor unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Inductor unit 331

 Table 2-41 Part information

Inductor unit part number

JC27-00012A Inductor unit - 110v

JC27-00009A Inductor unit - 220v

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-210 Remove the formatter cover

332 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the lower rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-211 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-212 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage.

Remove the lower rear cover 333

 WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

■ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors
(callout 1) that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS
and fuser drive boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and
then tilt the top of the cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-213 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the inductor unit

Follow these steps to remove the inductor unit.

■ Disconnect the wire harness, remove two screws, and then remove the inductor unit.

Figure 2-214 Remove the inductor unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

334 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly

Learn how to remove the right door open switch.

View a video of how to remove and replace the right door open switch.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-42 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01467A Switch assembly, right door

Removal and replacement: Right door switch assembly 335

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-215 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

336 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-216 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-217 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

Remove the upper rear cover 337

 1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then
remove three screws.

Figure 2-218 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind
the cage. Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-219 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

338 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-220 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-221 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you
are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-222 Release five tabs

Remove the fuser fan 339

 4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If
you are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-223 Remove the fuser fan

6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws,
and then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 2-224 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

1
2

7. Remove the right door switch assembly

Follow these steps to remove the right door switch assembly.

340 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector. Remove one screw, and then remove the right door switch assembly.

Figure 2-225 Remove the side door open sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 341

 9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the following special installation instructions.

LVPS Type 4 and cage

■ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make
sure that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.

Figure 2-226 LVPS connectors installation

1
2
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive unit 1 (Tray 2)

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 2).

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 2).

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

342 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 2)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 343

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-227 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-228 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

344 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-229 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

■ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors
(callout 1) that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS
and fuser drive boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and
then tilt the top of the cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-230 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the pickup drive unit 1

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 1.

Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage 345
 ■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 2).

Figure 2-231 Remove pickup drive (Tray 2)

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

346 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors
Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) level sensor and the toner collection
unit (TCU) detect sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner collection unit level sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner collection unit detect sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00492A TCU sensors

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) sensors 347

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-232 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

348 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-233 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-234 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front cover 349

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-235 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-236 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

350 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-237 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-238 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

Remove the exit cover 351

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-239 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-240 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the TCU sensors

Follow these steps to remove the TCU sensors.

■ Release the corresponding sensor.

● [A]: Toner collection unit level sensor.

● [B]: Toner collection unit detect sensor.

352 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-241 Remove the TCU unit detect sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: CRUM connector

Learn how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.

Unpack the replacement assembly 353

 View a video of how to remove and replace the CRUM connector.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01277A CRUM connector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

354 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-242 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-243 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 355

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-244 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-245 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

356 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-246 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-247 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 357

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-248 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull
the cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the
center latch.

Figure 2-249 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero

358 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 insertion force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables.
Release the cables from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-250 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-251 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to
remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.

■ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2).
Release the cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply
drive unit.

TIP: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

Figure 2-252 Remove the toner supply drive unit

8. Remove the CRUM connector

Follow these steps to remove the CRUM connector.

Remove the toner supply drive unit 359

 ■ If replacing the yellow CRUM connector, disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove the screw
next to the defective CRUM connector. Release one tab on the right, and then remove the CRUM
connector.

Figure 2-253 Remove the CRUM connector

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Main board and cage

■ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
connector before closing the latch to secure the cable.

360 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-254 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit)

Learn how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the duplex 1 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

Removal and replacement: Duplex 1 sensor (on the exit unit) 361
 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-255 Remove four screws

362 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-256 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-257 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 363

 Figure 2-258 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-259 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

364 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-260 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-261 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 365

 Figure 2-262 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-263 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

366 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-264 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-265 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Remove the fuser unit 367

 Figure 2-266 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-267 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-268 Remove the exit unit

368 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

8. Remove the duplex 1 sensor
Follow these steps to remove the duplex 1 sensor.

1. Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Remove two screws, and then lift the sensor holder up.

Figure 2-269 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect the connector, and then remove the duplex 1 sensor.

Figure 2-270 Remove the duplex 1 sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

Remove the duplex 1 sensor 369

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit 1 bin full sensor (on the exit unit)
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit 1 bin full sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit 1 bin full sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-47 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

370 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-271 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 371

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-272 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-273 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

372 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-274 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-275 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 373

 Figure 2-276 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-277 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

374 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-278 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-279 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

Remove the top right cover 375

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-280 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-281 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

376 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-282 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-283 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-284 Remove the exit unit

Remove the exit unit 377

 8. Remove the output 1 bin full sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output 1 bin full sensor.

1. On the exit unit, remove one self-tapping screw (callout 1), and then remove the guide (callout 2).

Figure 2-285 Remove one screw and the guide

2. Remove the black adhesive strip from the exit unit.

Figure 2-286 Remove the black adhesive strip

378 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Release two tabs, and then unhook the sensor from the sheet metal.

Figure 2-287 Release two tabs

4. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-288 Disconnect one connector

Remove the output 1 bin full sensor 379

 5. Rotate the shaft to release the sensor, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-289 Remove the exit 1 bin full sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

380 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2)

Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.

View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 2 for pickup unit 2.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-48 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 381

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-290 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-291 Remove the right rear cover

382 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-292 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-293 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 383

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-294 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-295 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

384 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-296 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-297 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 385

 Figure 2-298 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-299 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the prefeed sensor 2

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 2.

386 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Open the guide-pickup, and then remove the prefeed sensor 2.

Figure 2-300 Remove prefeed sensor 2

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 387

 6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly
Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-301 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1)

Learn how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1.

View a video of how to remove and replace the prefeed sensor 1 for pickup unit 1

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Photo interrupter

388 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-302 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 389

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-303 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-304 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

390 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-305 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-306 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 391

 Figure 2-307 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-308 Remove one screw and the cover

392 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-309 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Figure 2-310 Rotate pickup unit 2

Remove pickup unit 2 393

 5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-311 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-312 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

394 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-313 Rotate pickup unit 1

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-314 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the prefeed sensor 1

Follow these steps to remove the prefeed sensor 1.

Remove the prefeed sensor 1 395

 1. Remove five screws, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 2-315 Remove five screws and the bracket.

2. Remove the sensor from its holder.

Figure 2-316 Remove the sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

396 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-317 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 397

 Figure 2-318 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

398 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

110V fuser assembly JC82-00477A Main assembly on page 159

220V fuser assembly JC82-00483A Main assembly on page 159

ADF LX whole unit JC97-05074A Main assembly on page 159

Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) X3A62-60001 Main assembly on page 159

Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel X3A62-60002 Main assembly on page 159

Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector JC93-01277A Main assembly on page 159

Bridge unit JC90-01772B Main assembly on page 159

Cable, PWR main HDD JC39-01943A Main assembly on page 159

Cable, SATA main HDD JC39-01202A Main assembly on page 159

Cassette tray 2 JC90-01610A Main assembly on page 159

Cassette tray 3 JC90-01611A Main assembly on page 159

Developer fan JC31-00130A Main assembly on page 159

Drive, pickup JC93-01063C Main assembly on page 159

Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 Main assembly on page 159

Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) 0604-001393 Main assembly on page 159

Exit assembly JC90-01369A Main assembly on page 159

Exit assembly, first JC90-01370A Main assembly on page 159

Exit assembly, second C90-01374A Main assembly on page 159

FFC Cable, HVPS JC39-02252A Main assembly on page 159

FFC cable, laser scanner unit JC39-02253A Main assembly on page 159

Fan type 7 JC31-00161A Main assembly on page 159

Fan type 8 JC93-01414A Main assembly on page 159

Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB JC31-00154A Main assembly on page 159

Flow ADF-GX JC97-04955A Main assembly on page 159

Foreign interface harness B5L31-67902 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter X3A92-60001 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter (du models) X3A92-60003 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter HDD 500GB L41606-011 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter HDD 500GB Kit 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter HDD Cradle B5L46-40014 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module T3U55-60001 Main assembly on page 159

Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel X3A92-60003 Main assembly on page 159

Alphabetical parts list 399

 Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Fuser drive board, 110V JC44-00235B Main assembly on page 159

Fuser drive board, 220V JC44-00236B Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67905 Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit X3A92-67906 Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet blk developer unit JC96-11642A Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet cyan developer unit JC96-11641A Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet magenta developer unit JC96-11640A Main assembly on page 159

HP LaserJet yellow developer unit JC96-11639A Main assembly on page 159

HVPS 24V JC44-00240B Main assembly on page 159

ITB cleaner blade JC93-01377A Main assembly on page 159

Image scanner assembly (flat bed) JC97-04907A Main assembly on page 159

Image transfer belt assembly JC98-05425A Main assembly on page 159

Inductor unit 110V JC27-00012A Main assembly on page 159

Inductor unit 220V JC27-00009A Main assembly on page 159

Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit J8030-61001 Main assembly on page 159

LVPS 110V Type 4 JC44-00091D Main assembly on page 159

LVPS 110V Type 5H JC44-00249A Main assembly on page 159

LVPS 220V Type 4 JC44-00092D Main assembly on page 159

LVPS 220V Type 5H JC44-00250A Main assembly on page 159

Laser scanner unit JC97-04863A Main assembly on page 159

Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) JC31-00161A Main assembly on page 159

Lower tray connector JC39-02187A Main assembly on page 159

Main PCA HDD 500GB 5851-6712 Main assembly on page 159

Main PCA HDD bracket JC97-02276A Main assembly on page 159

Non-Flow ADF-sGX JC97-04956A Main assembly on page 159

PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A Main assembly on page 159

PCA-Island of Data X3A92-60002 Main assembly on page 159

PCA-Island of Data (du models) X3A92-60002 Main assembly on page 159

PCA-Main Board w/heat sink JC82-00543A Main assembly on page 159

(E876z, E876dn
series)5CM63-67001
(E876du series)

Paper dust brush JC93-01026B Main assembly on page 159

Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) 0604-001490 Main assembly on page 159

Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) 0604-001381 Main assembly on page 159

400 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-50 Alphabetical parts list (continued)

Description Part number Table and page

Pulsar Control Panel B5L47-60101 Main assembly on page 159

Return guide JC61-07088A Main assembly on page 159

Right door assembly JC95-02092A Main assembly on page 159

Switch Assy - Right Door JC93-01467A Main assembly on page 159

TCU sensor JC93-00492A Main assembly on page 159

Toner collection unit X3A92-67926 Main assembly on page 159

Tray Heater (110v) Y1G22-67901 Main assembly on page 159

Tray Heater (220v) Y1G22-67902 Main assembly on page 159

UK English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60103 Main assembly on page 159

US English Keyboard Assy B5L47-60102 Main assembly on page 159

White backing (GX) JC63-05795A Main assembly on page 159

White backing (LX) JC63-05410A Main assembly on page 159

Wiring harness (output device) JC39-02194A Main assembly on page 159

Alphabetical parts list 401

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-51 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Prefeed sensor 2 (pickup unit 2) Main assembly on page 159

0604-001393 Duplex 1 sensor (photo interrupter) Main assembly on page 159

0604-001393 Exit 1 bin full sensor (photo interrupter) Main assembly on page 159

0604-001490 Prefeed sensor 1 (pickup unit 1) Main assembly on page 159

5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit Main assembly on page 159

5851-6712 Formatter HDD 500GB Kit (du models) Main assembly on page 159

5851-6712 Main PCA HDD 500GB Main assembly on page 159

B5L31-67902 Foreign interface harness Main assembly on page 159

B5L46-40014 Formatter HDD Cradle Main assembly on page 159

B5L47-60101 Pulsar Control Panel Main assembly on page 159

B5L47-60102 US English Keyboard Assy Main assembly on page 159

B5L47-60103 UK English Keyboard Assy Main assembly on page 159

C90-01374A Exit assembly, second Main assembly on page 159

J8030-61001 Jetdirect Wireless Print Server with NFC Kit Main assembly on page 159

JC27-00009A Inductor unit 220V Main assembly on page 159

JC27-00012A Inductor unit 110V Main assembly on page 159

JC31-00130A Developer fan Main assembly on page 159

JC31-00154A Fan-type 3 24V LVPS/FDB Main assembly on page 159

JC31-00161A Fan type 7 Main assembly on page 159

JC31-00161A Low voltage power supply (LVPS) fans (Type 7) Main assembly on page 159

JC39-01202A Cable, SATA main HDD Main assembly on page 159

JC39-01943A Cable, PWR main HDD Main assembly on page 159

JC39-02187A Lower tray connector Main assembly on page 159

JC39-02194A Wiring harness (output device) Main assembly on page 159

JC39-02252A FFC Cable, HVPS Main assembly on page 159

JC39-02253A FFC cable, laser scanner unit Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00091D LVPS 110V Type 4 Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00092D LVPS 220V Type 4 Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00235B Fuser drive board, 110V Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00236B Fuser drive board, 220V Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00240B HVPS 24V Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00249A LVPS 110V Type 5H Main assembly on page 159

JC44-00250A LVPS 220V Type 5H Main assembly on page 159

402 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-51 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-07088A Return guide Main assembly on page 159

JC63-05410A White backing (LX) Main assembly on page 159

JC63-05795A White backing (GX) Main assembly on page 159

JC82-00477A 110V fuser assembly Main assembly on page 159

JC82-00483A 220V fuser assembly Main assembly on page 159

JC82-00543A PCA-Main Board w/heat sink Main assembly on page 159

(E876z, E876dn
series)5CM63-67001
(E876du series)

JC90-01369A Exit assembly Main assembly on page 159

JC90-01370A Exit assembly, first Main assembly on page 159

JC90-01610A Cassette tray 2 Main assembly on page 159

JC90-01611A Cassette tray 3 Main assembly on page 159

JC90-01772B Bridge unit Main assembly on page 159

JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Main assembly on page 159

JC93-00492A TCU sensor Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01026B Paper dust brush Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01063C Drive, pickup Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01277A Assy- Engine Side Crum Connector Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01377A ITB cleaner blade Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01414A Fan type 8 Main assembly on page 159

JC93-01467A Switch Assy - Right Door Main assembly on page 159

JC95-02092A Right door assembly Main assembly on page 159

JC96-11639A HP LaserJet yellow developer unit Main assembly on page 159

JC96-11640A HP LaserJet magenta developer unit Main assembly on page 159

JC96-11641A HP LaserJet cyan developer unit Main assembly on page 159

JC96-11642A HP LaserJet blk developer unit Main assembly on page 159

JC97-02276A Main PCA HDD bracket Main assembly on page 159

JC97-04863A Laser scanner unit Main assembly on page 159

JC97-04907A Image scanner assembly (flat bed) Main assembly on page 159

JC97-04955A Flow ADF-GX Main assembly on page 159

JC97-04956A Non-Flow ADF-sGX Main assembly on page 159

JC97-05074A ADF LX whole unit Main assembly on page 159

JC98-05425A Image transfer belt assembly Main assembly on page 159

L41606-011 Formatter HDD 500GB Main assembly on page 159

Numerical parts list 403

 Table 2-51 Numerical parts list (continued)

Part number Description Table and page

T3U55-60001 Formatter HDD SATA Riser Module Main assembly on page 159

X3A62-60001 Accelerator PCA - Toast (GX ADF only) Main assembly on page 159

X3A62-60002 Accelerator PCA-toast Blue Angel Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-60001 Formatter Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-60002 PCA-Island of Data (du models) Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-60003 Formatter (du models) Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-60003 Formatter PCA-Obsidian Blue Angel Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-67905 HP LaserJet Black Imaging Drum Unit Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-67906 HP LaserJet CMY Imaging Drum Unit Main assembly on page 159

X3A92-67926 Toner collection unit Main assembly on page 159

Y1G22-67901 Tray Heater (110v) Main assembly on page 159

Y1G22-67902 Tray Heater (220v) Main assembly on page 159

Exit assemblies
View the exit assemblies exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Exit assemblies
Parts diagram and parts list for the exit assemblies.

404 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-319 Exit assemblies

Table 2-50 Exit assemblies

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3-1 JC93-00802 Drive, motor step 2 Removal and replacement:

A Exit gate solenoid/motors/
sensor (on the exit unit)

3-2 JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit gate solenoid/motors/
sensor (on the exit unit)

3-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit gate solenoid/motors/
sensor (on the exit unit)

3-5 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Return sensor (on the exit
unit)

Exit assemblies 405

 Removal and replacement: Exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor (on the exit unit)
Learn how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00031B Solenoid , lifting

JC93-00802A Drive, motor step (qty 2)

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

406 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-320 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-321 Remove the right rear cover

Remove the right rear cover 407

 2. Remove the right door
Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-322 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-323 Release the right hinge

408 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-324 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-325 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 409

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-326 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-327 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

410 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-328 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-329 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

Remove the top right cover 411

 1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-330 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Figure 2-331 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

412 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-332 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-333 Remove the exit unit

8. Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor.

1. Disconnect one connector. Gently pry the black gear from behind to remove it. Remove the e-ring,
and then remove the white gear.

NOTE: If necessary, remove two motors, and then remove one sensor.

Remove the exit gate solenoid/motors/sensor 413

 Figure 2-334 On the exit unit, disconnect one connector and remove two gears

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the exit gate solenoid (callout A).

Figure 2-335 Exit gate solenoid

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

414 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit)

Learn how to remove and replace the return sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the return sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-52 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Return sensor (on the exit unit) 415
 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-336 Remove four screws

416 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-337 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-338 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 417

 Figure 2-339 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-340 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

418 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-341 Remove the right door

3. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-342 Remove the front top inner cover

4. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 419

 Figure 2-343 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-344 Remove the front power cover

5. Remove the top right cover

Follow these steps to remove the top right cover.

420 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-345 Remove the top right cover

6. Remove the fuser unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser unit.

1. Open the right door.

NOTE: If the fuser is removed to access another part, the right door might already be removed.

2. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-346 Fuser unit screw locations

3. Pull out the fuser unit.

CAUTION: The temperature in the vicinity of the fuser becomes heated. To prevent the potential of
getting burned, make sure the fuser unit has cooled before replacing it.

Remove the fuser unit 421

 Figure 2-347 Fuser unit removal

7. Remove the exit unit

Follow these steps to remove the exit unit.

1. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2), and then remove four screws
(callout 3).

Figure 2-348 Disconnect two connectors and remove four screws

2. Remove the exit unit while pushing the coupler to the right.

Figure 2-349 Remove the exit unit

422 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

8. Remove the return sensor
Follow these steps to Remove the return sensor.

■ Locate the sensor on the exit unit. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then peel the black
adhesive strip (callout 2) away from the top of the sensor. Release two small tabs (callout 3), and then
remove the sensor.

Figure 2-350 Return sensor

1
3

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Remove the return sensor 423

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

424 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive, motor step JC93-00802A Exit assemblies on page 405

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Exit assemblies on page 405

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Exit assemblies on page 405

Solenoid, lifting JC33-00031B Exit assemblies on page 405

Alphabetical parts list 425

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Exit assemblies on page 405

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Exit assemblies on page 405

JC33-00031B Solenoid, lifting Exit assemblies on page 405

JC93-00802A Drive, motor step Exit assemblies on page 405

Cassettes tray 2/3

View the cassettes tray 2/3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Cassettes Tray 2/3

Parts diagram and parts list for the cassettes tray 2/3.

426 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-351 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Table 2-53 Cassettes Tray 2/3

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 1 Not applicable

0 JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 1 Not applicable

Cassettes Tray 2/3 427

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-54 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cassette, Tray 2 JC90-01610A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 427

Cassette, Tray 3 JC90-01611A Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 427

428 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-55 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC90-01610A Cassette, Tray 2 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 427

JC90-01611A Cassette, Tray 3 Cassettes Tray 2/3 on page 427

Main frame assembly

View the main frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame assembly.

Numerical parts list 429

 Figure 2-352 Main assembly frame

12-1

6R

7R 5R
1R

2R
3R

4R

8R

9R

Table 2-54 Main assembly frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-00466 Front Door Switch Open 1 Removal and replacement:

A Front cover open sensor

3R JC39-02204 Registration cable 1 Removal and replacement:

A Registration sensor assembly

4R 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration sensor assembly

5 JC93-01039A ACR assembly 1 Not applicable

430 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-54 Main assembly frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC93-01116A Main frame registration assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Registration assembly

8 JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly 2 Removal and replacement:

Tray closing unit

12-1 5CM63-6790 Right door damper and lever kit 1 Removal and replacement:
1 Right door dampener and
lever kit

Not shown JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

High-voltage rail assembly

Removal and replacement: Front cover open sensor

Learn how to remove the front cover open sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover open sensor.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00466A Front door switch open

Removal and replacement: Front cover open sensor 431

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-353 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

432 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-354 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-355 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front cover 433

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-356 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-357 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

434 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-358 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-359 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

Remove the exit cover 435

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-360 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-361 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the front cover open sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front cover open sensor.

1. Remove the toner cartridges.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front cover open sensor.

Figure 2-362 Remove one screw and the cover open sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

436 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration sensor.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Registration sensor assembly 437

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-56 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

438 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-363 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-364 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the paper dust brush 439

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-365 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-366 Remove the right rear cover

4. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

440 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-367 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-368 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 441

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-369 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-370 Remove the right door

5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

442 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-371 Remove two screws

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 2-372 Remove the gear cover

3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-373 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.

Figure 2-374 Remove the registration assembly

6. Remove the registration sensor

Follow these steps to remove the registration sensor.

1. Remove three self-tapping screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-375 Remove three screws and the cover

Remove the registration sensor 443

 2. Release the cables from one lower retainer (callout 1) and one upper retainer (callout 2). Remove
five screws.

Figure 2-376 Release retainers and remove five screws

3. Carefully lift the registration sensor assembly slightly away from the printer. Release one retainer
(callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2).

Figure 2-377 Release one retainer and disconnect two connectors

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

444 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Registration assembly

1. Install the back, gear side of the shaft (callout 1) into the opening in the sheet metal (callout 2).

Figure 2-378 Install the gear side of the shaft

2. Remove the bushing (callout 1) from the end of the front of the shaft.

Figure 2-379 Remove the bushing

3. Install the bushing in the opening in the sheet metal.

NOTE: The bushing is flat along the top and bottom edges. Install the bushing so the flat edges
match the keyed opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 2-380 Install the bushing

4. Install the front of the shaft into the bushing.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 445

 Figure 2-381 Install the front of the shaft

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Registration assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-57 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01116A Registration assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

446 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-382 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 447

 ■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-383 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-384 Remove four screws

448 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-385 Remove the right rear cover

4. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-386 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 449

 Figure 2-387 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-388 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

450 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-389 Remove the right door

5. Remove the registration assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration assembly.

1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-390 Remove two screws

2. Remove the gear cover.

Figure 2-391 Remove the gear cover

3. Disconnect one in-line connector, and then remove two screws.

Figure 2-392 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

Remove the registration assembly 451

 4. Rotate the left side of the registration assembly away from the printer, and then remove it.

Figure 2-393 Remove the registration assembly

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Tray closing unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the tray closing unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

452 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01370A Tray closing unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

Remove the formatter cover 453

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-394 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-395 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the LVPS cover

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS cover.

454 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector, and then remove four screws. Slide the LVPS cover to the left, and then
remove the cover.

Figure 2-396 Remove the LVPS cover

4. Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage
Follow these steps to remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

■ Before removing the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage, note the location of four connectors
(callout 1) that do not have to be disconnected. Disconnect the remaining connectors on the LVPS
and fuser drive boards, and then release the cables from five retainers. Remove three screws, and
then tilt the top of the cage out to remove it.

Figure 2-397 Remove the fuser drive and LVPS boards and cage

5. Remove the tray closing unit

Follow these steps to remove the tray closing unit.

1. Remove Tray 2.

Remove the fuser drive and low-voltage power supply (LVPS) boards and cage 455
 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cassette rail cover.

Figure 2-398 Remove the CST rail cover

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the tray closing unit.

Figure 2-399 Remove the tray closing unit

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

456 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit

Learn how to remove and replace the right door dampener.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-59 Part information

Part number Part description

5CM63-67901 Right door dampener and lever kit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Right door dampener and lever kit 457
 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-400 Remove the front top inner cover

Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

458 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-401 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-402 Remove the front power cover

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the toner collection unit (TCU) 459

 Figure 2-403 Remove the TCU

Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-404 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

460 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-405 Remove the exit cover

Remove the exit cover 461

 Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-406 Remove the front cover

Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-407 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-408 Remove the inner cover

462 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-409 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-410 Remove the right rear cover

Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 463

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-411 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-412 Release the right hinge

464 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-413 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-414 Remove the right door

Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

Remove pickup unit 2 465

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-415 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-416 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

466 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-417 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-418 Disconnect one connector

Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

Remove pickup unit 1 467

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-419 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Figure 2-420 Rotate pickup unit 1

468 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-421 Disconnect one connector

Remove the right door dampener

Follow these steps to remove the right door dampener.

1. Remove two screw caps and three screws, and then remove the right front cover.

Figure 2-422 Remove the right front cover

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front lower cover.

Remove the right door dampener 469

 Figure 2-423 Remove the front lower cover

3. Remove four screws to detach the front end of the tray rails.

CAUTION: The rails can be easily damaged when they are detached.

Figure 2-424 Detach the tray rails

4. Before proceeding, use paper reams to support the printer chassis.

CAUTION: When the sheet-metal corner bracket is removed the chassis will become misaligned if
it is not supported.

470 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-425 Support the chassis

5. Remove six screws (callouts 1-6).

Reinstallation tip: These screws are labeled 1 to 6. When the bracket is reinstalled, make sure that
the screws are installed in order (1 to 6).

Figure 2-426 Remove six screws

3
5 4

2
1

Remove the right door dampener 471

 6. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-427 Remove three screws

7. Rotate the top of the bracket away from the printer (callout 1), and then lift it up (callout 2) to release
the tab (callout 3) at the bottom of the bracket.

Figure 2-428 Remove the corner bracket

1 2

8. Remove the dampener gear assembly from the bracket.

IMPORTANT: Do not discard the failed dampener. Return the assembly to HP for failure analysis.

472 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-429 Remove the dampener

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 473

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 1

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-430 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 2

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

474 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-431 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: High-voltage rail assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the high-voltage rail assembly.

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-60 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: High-voltage rail assembly 475

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-432 Top left cover

476 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-433 Remove the left cover

Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Follow these steps to remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

■ Disconnect one connector, remove two screws, and then remove the laser scanner assembly fan.

Figure 2-434 Remove the laser scanner assembly fan

Remove the HVPS

Follow these steps to remove the HVPS.

Remove the laser scanner assembly fan 477

 1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), remove seven screws (callout 2), and then release one
retainer in the center of the board (callout 3).

Figure 2-435 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

2. Tilt the board away from the printer, and then disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 2-436 Disconnect three connectors

3. If you are replacing the HVPS board, release two tabs and rotate the cover off of the board. Attach
the cover to the replacement part before installing.

Figure 2-437 Remove the HVPS cover

478 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the front top inner cover
Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-438 Remove the front top inner cover

Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-439 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front top inner cover 479

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-440 Remove the front power cover

Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-441 Remove the exit cover

Remove the toner cartridges and toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner cartridges and toner collection unit (TCU).

1. Open the front cover.

480 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the toner cartridges (callout 1), and then push both hooks (callout 2) to release and remove
the TCU.

Figure 2-442 Remove the toner cartridges and TCU

Remove the ITB cleaner

Follow these steps to remove the ITB cleaner.

1. Loosen the screw securing the ITB cleaner.

NOTE: The screw is captive and cannot be completely removed.

Figure 2-443 ITB screw location

2. Grasp the ITB cleaner housing, and pull it out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not grasp the waste toner connector.

Use care when removing the ITB cleaner as loose toner might be present on the metal shelf along
the side of the cleaner.

Remove the ITB cleaner 481

 Figure 2-444 ITB cleaner removal

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

Remove the ITB

Follow these steps to remove the ITB.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the cable from the retainer, and then disconnect one connector. Slide the ITB latch toward
the front of the printer to release the coupled drive.

Figure 2-445 Disconnect one connector and slide the latch

3. Remove two screws securing the ITB unit.

TIP: Use a magnetized screwdriver to prevent the screws from falling into the printer..

482 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-446 Remove two screws

4. Pull the ITB unit partially out of the printer, and then lift it up and out of the printer.

CAUTION: Do not touch the ITB belt and be careful not to damage the it by hitting it on the door
during removal.

Figure 2-447 Remove the ITB

5. While pushing the color plane registration (CPR) shutter toward the rear of the printer, clean the
three CPR sensors with a damp, lint-free cloth.

Figure 2-448 Clean the CPR sensors

Remove the imaging drum

Follow these steps to remove the imaging drum.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU).

Remove the imaging drum 483

 2. There are four locking levers, one for each color. Pull down on the locking lever for the color drum
unit that is being replaced.

Figure 2-449 Release locking lever

3. Grip the handle and remove the drum unit.

NOTE: Open the right door to remove the black drum.

CAUTION: Do not grip the waste toner connection when removing the drum unit.

Do not touch the shiny surface on the imaging drum. Cover the drum with a sheet of paper while it
is out of the printer to limit light exposure.

Figure 2-450 Remove the drum unit

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the developer unit

Follow these steps to remove the developer unit.

IMPORTANT: Update the firmware to the latest version before replacing the developer unit.

1. Remove the toner collection unit (TCU)

2. Remove the drum unit to the right of the developer to be replaced..

TIP: Also remove the adjacent drum unit to allow better access to the toner supply pipe.

484 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Rotate the reservoir shutter lever down to ensure it is closed..

Figure 2-451 Shutter open/close

4. Release the valve from the developer by rotating the valve side-to-side while pulling it firmly away
from the printer.

TIP: Make sure that the valve is fully installed on the developer before rotating it to the open
position.

Figure 2-452 Release the toner collection valve

Remove the developer unit 485

 5. Reach to the top of the toner supply pipe, and then rotate it up.

Figure 2-453 Tilt toner supply pipe up

6. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the metal
bracket (callout 3).

TIP: Note the orientation of the bracket when reinstalling it.

Figure 2-454 Remove the metal bracket

TIP: Reinstall the bottom of the bracket first.

7. Hold the grip point of the developer unit and slide it away from the printer to remove it.

NOTE: Do not grip the toner collection unit connection when removing the developer unit.

Figure 2-455 Developer unit removal

TIP: Hold the toner supply pipe up and out of the way when reinstalling the developer unit.

486 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Remove the paper dust brush
Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-456 Remove the paper dust brush

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the paper dust brush 487

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-457 Remove the front cover

Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-458 Remove seven screws

488 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-459 Remove the inner cover

Remove the reservoir unit

Follow these steps to remove the reservoir unit.

NOTE: The reservoir units must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir unit, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoir units must all be removed
first. Follow the instructions below to remove only those reservoir units required to reach the target
reservoir unit.

1. Close the reservoir unit shutters (callout 1), and then release the cables from the retainers
(callout 2).

Figure 2-460 Close the shutters and release the cables

2. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 2-461 Disconnect four connectors

Remove the reservoir unit 489

 3. Lower the release levers (callout 1), and then remove the yellow, magenta, and cyan drum units
(callout 2).

Figure 2-462 Remove drum units

4. Lower and close the release levers for all of the developer units. This stops the flow of toner from
the reservoir units to the developer units.

Figure 2-463 Lower the developer release levers

5. Release the valves from the toner connections by rotating the valves side-to-side while pulling them
firmly away from the printer.

Figure 2-464 Release the toner supply pipes

6. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-465 Remove eight screws

7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables from eight retainers.

Figure 2-466 Disconnect one connector and release the cables

490 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 8. Remove the reservoir unit by sliding it out of the printer. The figure below shows the black reservoir
unit. The procedure is the same for all of the reservoir units.

NOTE: The reservoir units must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you
are replacing the yellow reservoir unit, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoir units must all be
removed first.

NOTE: Removing the yellow reservoir unit requires removing the high voltage power supply.

Figure 2-467 Remove the black reservoir unit

Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Follow these steps to remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

1. Before proceeding, take note from the front of the printer where the six high-voltage rail screws are
located.

Figure 2-468 Locate six screws

2. From inside the printer remove six screws, and then remove the high-voltage rail assembly.

Figure 2-469 Remove the high-voltage rail assembly

Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the high-voltage rail assembly 491

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

492 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ACR assembly JC93-01039A Main assembly frame on page

430

Front Door Switch Open JC93-00466A Main assembly frame on page

430

Harness, engine side for DCF + connector JC39-02187A Main assembly frame on page
430

Harness, fuser connector JC39-02217A Main assembly frame on page

430

High-voltage rail assembly JC93-01023A Main assembly frame on page

430

Main frame registration assembly JC93-01116A Main assembly frame on page

430

Registration cable JC39-02204A Main assembly frame on page

430

Right door damper and lever kit 5CM63-67901 Main assembly frame on page
430

Tray closing assembly JC93-01370A Main assembly frame on page

430

Alphabetical parts list 493

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

5CM63-67901 Right door damper and lever kit Main assembly frame on page
430

JC39-02187A Harness, engine side for DCF + connector Main assembly frame on page
430

JC39-02204A Registration cable Main assembly frame on page

430

JC39-02217A Harness, fuser connector Main assembly frame on page

430

JC93-00466A Front Door Switch Open Main assembly frame on page

430

JC93-01023A High-voltage rail assembly Main assembly frame on page

430

JC93-01039A ACR assembly Main assembly frame on page

430

JC93-01116A Main frame registration assembly Main assembly frame on page

430

JC93-01370A Tray closing assembly Main assembly frame on page

430

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ACR frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the ACR frame assembly.

494 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-470 ACR frame assembly

Table 2-61 ACR frame assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01039A ACR Assembly 1 Not applicable

1 JC32-00014A CTD sensor 3 Not applicable

2 JC31–00078A Motor, dc 1 Not applicable

ACR frame assembly 495

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-62 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ACR Assembly JC93-01039A ACR frame assembly on page

495

CTD sensor JC32-00014A ACR frame assembly on page

495

Motor, dc JC31–00078A ACR frame assembly on page

495

496 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-63 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC31–00078A Motor, dc ACR frame assembly on page

495

JC32-00014A CTD sensor ACR frame assembly on page

495

JC93-01039A ACR Assembly ACR frame assembly on page

495

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Parts diagram and parts list for the toner reservoir (CMYK).

Figure 2-471 Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Numerical parts list 497

 Table 2-62 Toner reservoir (CMYK)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01089B Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y 3 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir unit

2 JC93-01088B Toner Reservoir Assy K 1 Removal and replacement:

Reservoir unit

Removal and replacement: Reservoir unit

Learn how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the reservoir unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01089B Toner reservoir assembly C/M/Y

JC93-01088B Toner reservoir assembly K

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

498 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-472 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

Remove the TCU 499

 ■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-473 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-474 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

500 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-475 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-476 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

Remove the front power cover 501

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-477 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-478 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

502 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-479 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-480 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the reservoir unit

Follow these steps to remove the reservoir unit.

NOTE: The reservoir units must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you are
replacing the yellow reservoir unit, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoir units must all be removed
first. Follow the instructions below to remove only those reservoir units required to reach the target
reservoir unit.

1. Close the reservoir unit shutters (callout 1), and then release the cables from the retainers
(callout 2).

Figure 2-481 Close the shutters and release the cables

Remove the reservoir unit 503

 2. Disconnect four connectors.

Figure 2-482 Disconnect four connectors

3. Lower the release levers (callout 1), and then remove the yellow, magenta, and cyan drum units
(callout 2).

Figure 2-483 Remove drum units

4. Lower and close the release levers for all of the developer units. This stops the flow of toner from
the reservoir units to the developer units.

Figure 2-484 Lower the developer release levers

5. Release the valves from the toner connections by rotating the valves side-to-side while pulling them
firmly away from the printer.

Figure 2-485 Release the toner supply pipes

6. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-486 Remove eight screws

504 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 7. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then release the cables from eight retainers.

Figure 2-487 Disconnect one connector and release the cables

8. Remove the reservoir unit by sliding it out of the printer. The figure below shows the black reservoir
unit. The procedure is the same for all of the reservoir units.

NOTE: The reservoir units must be removed in this order: black, cyan, magenta, and yellow. If you
are replacing the yellow reservoir unit, the black, cyan, and magenta reservoir units must all be
removed first.

NOTE: Removing the yellow reservoir unit requires removing the high voltage power supply.

Figure 2-488 Remove the black reservoir unit

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 505

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

■ Position the locator pins on the toner reservoir into the openings in the sheet metal inside the printer.

Figure 2-489 Position the locator pins

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

506 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-64 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y JC93-01089B Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

498

Toner Reservoir Assy K JC93-01088B Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

498

Alphabetical parts list 507

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-65 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01088B Toner Reservoir Assy K Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

498

JC93-01089B Toner Reservoir Assy C/M/Y Toner reservoir (CMYK) on page

498

Rear frame assembly

View the rear frame assembly exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Rear frame assembly

Parts diagram and parts list for the rear frame assembly.

Figure 2-490 Rear frame assembly

508 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-64 Rear frame assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-00018A Rear holder autosize 3 Not applicable

1-1 JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor

Not shown JC93-00486 Humidity sensor Not applicable

A

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor

Learn how to remove the paper size sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the paper size sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Disconnect the power cable.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-65 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02622A Paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor 509

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-491 Remove the paper size sensor

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

510 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 511

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A Rear frame assembly on page

509

Rear holder autosize JC93-00018A Rear frame assembly on page

509

512 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor Rear frame assembly on page

509

JC93-00018A Rear holder autosize Rear frame assembly on page

509

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Drive system
Parts diagram and parts list for the drive system.

Numerical parts list 513

 Figure 2-492 Drive system

Table 2-66 Drive system

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01059C Main drive assembly 1 Removal and replacement:

Main drive unit

1-1 JC93-01048B Main drive 1 Not applicable

1-2 JC31-00123D Motor, bldc 4 Not applicable

2 JC93-01065B Toner drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply drive

2-1 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

2-2 JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit 2 Removal and replacement:

Toner supply and toner
reservoir motors

514 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-66 Drive system (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC93-01064A Fuser/exit drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser/exit drive unit

3-1 JC31-00123B Motor, bldc 1 Not applicable

3-2 JC93-01084A Drive motor, step alienation 1 Not applicable

3-3 6602-001581 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

4 JC93-01062A Feed drive 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or
motor

4-1 JC31-00132A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or
motor

4-2 JC47-00037A Electric clutch 1 Not applicable

4-3 6602-001730 Timing gear belt 1 Not applicable

5 JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3) 2 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor

5-1 JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 2 Removal and replacement:

Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor

6 JC93-01068A Engage T1 1

6-1 JC31-00110B Step motor, circuit 1 Removal and replacement:

Alienation drive unit or motor

7 JC93-01070A Drive, toner collection unit 1

8 JC93-01061A Registration drive 1

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the main drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Main drive unit 515

 ○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01059C Main drive assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

516 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-493 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-494 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 517

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-495 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-496 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

518 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-497 Remove one screw

2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-498 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

Remove the formatter and cage 519

 3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-499 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers
(callout 3). Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide
(callout 5).

Figure 2-500 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a
zero insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable.
Remove the flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-501 Disconnect flat cables

520 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-502 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then
remove it from under the cables.

Figure 2-503 Remove the main drive unit

5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit
and transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-504 Remove cables and guides

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Unpack the replacement assembly 521

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply drive

Learn how to remove and replace the toner supply drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner supply drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01065B Drive, toner

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

522 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-505 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 523

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-506 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-507 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

524 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-508 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-509 Remove one screw

Remove the formatter and cage 525

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-510 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-511 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

526 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull
the cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the
center latch.

Figure 2-512 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero
insertion force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables.
Release the cables from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-513 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-514 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to
remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply drive unit.

Remove the toner supply drive unit 527

 ■ Disconnect three connectors (callout 1), and then release cables from three retainers (callout 2).
Release the cables from the guides (callout 3). Remove five screws and then remove the toner supply
drive unit.

TIP: Transfer the cables from the toner supply drive unit to the replacement part.

Figure 2-515 Remove the toner supply drive unit

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

Top flat cable

528 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
connector before closing the latch to secure the cable.

Figure 2-516 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply and toner reservoir motors

Learn how to remove and replace the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

View a video of how to remove and replace the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-69 Part information

Part numbers Part description

JC31-00110A Motor - step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Toner supply and toner reservoir motors 529
 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-517 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

530 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-518 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-519 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

Remove the upper rear cover 531

 ■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-520 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-521 Remove one screw

532 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-522 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-523 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main board and cage

Follow these steps to remove the main board and cage.

Remove the main board and cage 533

 1. One of the connectors that must be released above the main board is a spade connector.

IMPORTANT: Press in on the center part of the cable connector to release the latch, and then pull
the cable away from the printer to disconnect it. Do not pull on connector without depressing the
center latch.

Figure 2-524 Disconnect one connector

2. Do not disconnect the two hard disk drive (HDD) connectors at the top of the main board (callout 1).
Disconnect all of the remaining connectors. Two of the flat cable connectors (callout 2) are zero
insertion force (ZIF) connectors. Open the latch on the connectors before removing the flat cables.
Release the cables from six retainers (callout 3).

Figure 2-525 Remove one screw

3. Remove five screws.

Figure 2-526 Remove five screws

4. Lift the main board cage up, and then rotate the lower edge of the cage away from the printer to
remove it.

7. Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors

Follow these steps to remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors.

534 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect one connector and remove two screws for each motor that is replaced.

Figure 2-527 Remove the toner supply and toner reservoir motors

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

9. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Main board and cage

■ When reinstalling the top flat cable, make sure that the cable is correctly installed in the ZIF
connector before closing the latch to secure the cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 535

 Figure 2-528 Install the flat cable

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Fuser/exit drive unit

Learn how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser/exit drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-70 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01064A Drive, fuser exit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

536 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-529 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 537

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-530 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-531 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage

Follow these steps to remove the LVPS Type 4 and cage.

WARNING! Wait five minutes after turning the printer off to allow the capacitors to dissipate any
residual energy.

538 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Release the cables from two retainers (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then
remove three screws.

Figure 2-532 Disconnect connectors and remove screws

1
2

2. Lift the LVPS board and cage slightly away from the printer, and disconnect one connector behind
the cage. Remove the LVPS board and cage.

Figure 2-533 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the fuser fan

Follow these steps to remove the fuser fan.

Remove the fuser fan 539

 1. Release the cables (callout 1) from the cable guides (callout 2), and then remove three screws.

Figure 2-534 Release the harness and remove three screws

2. Pull the fuser fan housing slightly away from the printer, and then disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-535 Disconnect one connector

3. Optional step: For a replacement fan, release five tabs along the edges of the fan housing. If you
are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Figure 2-536 Release five tabs

540 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Optional step:For a replacement fan, separate the fan housing, and then remove the fuser fan. If
you are removing the fuser fan housing to access an assembly behind it, skip this step.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the fan in the housing and install the replacement fan in
the same orientation.

Figure 2-537 Remove the fuser fan

6. Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect two connectors (callout 2). Remove four screws,
and then remove the fuser/exit drive unit.

Figure 2-538 Remove the fuser/exit drive unit

1
2

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the fuser/exit drive unit 541

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

LVPS Type 4 and cage

■ Two of the connectors are the same size and might be installed in the incorrect positions. Make
sure that the two-wire harness (callout 1) is installed on the LVPS Type 4 and the three-wire harness
(callout 2) is installed in the fan connector behind the LVPS Type 4 cage.

542 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-539 LVPS connectors installation

1
2
NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Alienation drive unit or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the alienation motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the alienation motor.

Mean time to repair: 25 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Alienation drive unit or motor 543

 Table 2-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01068A Assembly (drive, engage T1)

JC31-00110B Motor circuit step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-540 Remove the formatter cover

544 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the lower rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-541 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-542 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 545

 ■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-543 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-544 Remove one screw

546 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-545 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-546 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

Remove the main drive unit 547

 1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers
(callout 3). Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide
(callout 5).

Figure 2-547 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a
zero insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable.
Remove the flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-548 Disconnect flat cables

3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-549 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then
remove it from under the cables.

Figure 2-550 Remove the main drive unit

548 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit
and transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-551 Remove cables and guides

7. Remove the alienation motor

Follow these steps to remove the alienation motor.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the alienation
motor.

Figure 2-552 Remove the alienation motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the alienation motor 549

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Feed/Tray 1 drive unit or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

View a video of how to remove and replace the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01062A Drive, Feed

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

550 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-553 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 551

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-554 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove four screws, and then remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit.

NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.

Figure 2-555 Remove the feed/Tray 1 drive unit

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

552 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor

Learn how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Pickup drive (Tray 3) or motor 553

 Table 2-73 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3)

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-556 Remove the formatter cover

554 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the lower rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-557 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the pickup drive unit 2

Follow these steps to remove the pickup drive unit 2.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the pickup drive (Tray 3).

NOTE: If replacing only the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive unit.

Figure 2-558 Remove pickup drive unit 2

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the lower rear cover 555

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Toner collection unit (TCU) drive and motor
Learn how to remove and replace the toner collection unit (TCU) drive.

View a video of how to remove and replace the TCU drive.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

556 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01070A Drive, Toner Collection Unit

JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the TCU

Follow these steps to remove the TCU.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the TCU 557

 Figure 2-559 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-560 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

558 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-561 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-562 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 559

 Figure 2-563 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-564 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

560 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-565 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-566 Remove seven screws

Remove the inner front cover 561

 4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-567 Remove the inner cover

8. Remove the TCU drive

Follow these steps to remove the TCU drive.

■ Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the TCU drive.

NOTE: To replace the motor, remove the drive unit from the printer and then remove the motor from
the drive unit.

Figure 2-568 Remove the TCU drive

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

562 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

View a video of how to remove and replace the registration drive assembly.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Registration drive assembly 563

 Table 2-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01061A Drive, registration

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-569 Remove the formatter cover

564 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the lower rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-570 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-571 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

Remove the lower rear cover 565

 ■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-572 Remove the left rear corner cover

5. Remove the formatter and cage

Follow these steps to remove the formatter and cage.

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-573 Remove one screw

566 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect all of the connectors on the formatter. Release the cables from two retainers on the
sheet metal cage (callout 1), and then remove three screws (callout 2).

Figure 2-574 Disconnect formatter connectors and screws

3. Before removing the formatter cage, place a piece of tape or a wire tie (callout 1) around the cables
disconnected from the formatter on the left side. This will identify the cables that will be connected
to the formatter during reassembly.

Figure 2-575 Identify the formatter cables

4. Lift the formatter cage up, push it to the right to clear the boss on the right side, and then pull it
away from the printer to remove it.

6. Remove the main drive unit

Follow these steps to remove the main drive unit.

Remove the main drive unit 567

 1. Remove the cables (callout 1) from the cable guide (callout 2), and then release three retainers
(callout 3). Disconnect four connectors (callout 4), and then release the cables from the cable guide
(callout 5).

Figure 2-576 Disconnect and release cables

2. Disconnect three flat cables from the main board (callout 1). One of the flat cable connectors is a
zero insertion force (ZIF) connector. Open the latch on the connector before removing the flat cable.
Remove the flat cables (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3).

Figure 2-577 Disconnect flat cables

3. Remove eight screws.

Figure 2-578 Remove eight screws

4. Lift the main drive unit up to release the hooks in the sheet metal, rotate it to the right, and then
remove it from under the cables.

Figure 2-579 Remove the main drive unit

568 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Optional step: Move all the cables (callout 1) and cable guides (callout 2) from the old main drive unit
and transfer them to the replacement unit.

Figure 2-580 Remove cables and guides

7. Remove the registration drive assembly

Follow these steps to remove the registration drive assembly.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1). Remove three screws (callout 2), then remove the registration
drive assembly.

NOTE: To replace the motor, remove the drive assembly from the printer and then remove the motor
from the drive assembly.

Figure 2-581 Remove the registration drive assembly

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the registration drive assembly 569

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

570 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-01083A Drive system on page 514

Drive motor, step alienation JC93-01084A Drive system on page 514

Drive, toner collection unit JC93-01070A Drive system on page 514

Electric clutch JC47-00037A Drive system on page 514

Engage T1 JC93-01068A Drive system on page 514

Feed drive JC93-01062A Drive system on page 514

Fuser/exit drive JC93-01064A Drive system on page 514

Main drive JC93-01048B Drive system on page 514

Main drive assembly JC93-01059C Drive system on page 514

Motor, bldc JC31-00123B Drive system on page 514

Motor, bldc JC31-00123D Drive system on page 514

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Drive system on page 514

Pickup drive (Tray 3) JC93-01063C Drive system on page 514

Registration drive JC93-01061A Drive system on page 514

Step motor, circuit JC31-00110A Drive system on page 514

Step motor, circuit JC31-00110B Drive system on page 514

Step motor, ip JC31-00132A Drive system on page 514

Timing belt 6602-001581 Drive system on page 514

Timing gear belt 6602-001730 Drive system on page 514

Toner drive JC93-01065B Drive system on page 514

Alphabetical parts list 571

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Drive system on page 514

6602-001581 Timing belt Drive system on page 514

6602-001730 Timing gear belt Drive system on page 514

JC31-00110A Step motor, circuit Drive system on page 514

JC31-00110B Step motor, circuit Drive system on page 514

JC31-00123B Motor, bldc Drive system on page 514

JC31-00123D Motor, bldc Drive system on page 514

JC31-00132A Step motor, ip Drive system on page 514

JC47-00037A Electric clutch Drive system on page 514

JC93-01048B Main drive Drive system on page 514

JC93-01059C Main drive assembly Drive system on page 514

JC93-01061A Registration drive Drive system on page 514

JC93-01062A Feed drive Drive system on page 514

JC93-01063C Pickup drive (Tray 3) Drive system on page 514

JC93-01064A Fuser/exit drive Drive system on page 514

JC93-01065B Toner drive Drive system on page 514

JC93-01068A Engage T1 Drive system on page 514

JC93-01070A Drive, toner collection unit Drive system on page 514

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step Drive system on page 514

JC93-01084A Drive motor, step alienation Drive system on page 514

Main frame pickup 1 and 2

View the main frame pickup 1 and 2 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup 1 and 2.

572 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-582 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Table 2-76 Main frame pickup 1 and 2

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 1

1-5 0604-001490 Photo interrupter 1 Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty
sensor (pickup unit 1)

2 JC93-01365A Main Pick Up 2nd Removal and replacement:

Pickup unit 2

2-3 0604-001381 Photo interrupter Removal and replacement:

Pickup lifting and empty
sensor (pickup unit 2)

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 1

Learn how to remove and replace pickup unit 1.

View a video of how to remove and replace pickup unit 1.

Mean time to repair: 12 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 1 573

 Before performing service
○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-77 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01364A Main pick up 1st

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

574 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-583 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-584 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right door 575

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-585 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-586 Release the right hinge

576 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-587 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-588 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

Remove pickup unit 2 577

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-589 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-590 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

578 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-591 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-592 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

Remove pickup unit 1 579

 1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-593 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Figure 2-594 Rotate pickup unit 1

580 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-595 Disconnect one connector

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 581

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-596 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

582 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-597 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 1.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 1.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 1) 583
 Table 2-78 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-598 Remove four screws

584 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-599 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-600 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 585

 Figure 2-601 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-602 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

586 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-603 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-604 Remove one screw and the cover

Remove pickup unit 2 587

 3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-605 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Figure 2-606 Rotate pickup unit 2

588 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-607 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove pickup unit 1

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 1.

1. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-608 Remove three screws

2. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 1 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Remove pickup unit 1 589

 Figure 2-609 Rotate pickup unit 1

3. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-610 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.

■ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.

● Empty sensor (callout A)

● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

590 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-611 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 591

 Pickup unit 2.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-612 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-613 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup unit 2

Learn how to remove and replace pickup unit 2.

592 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace pickup unit 2.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-79 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01365A Main pick up 2nd

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

Remove the right rear cover 593

 1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-614 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-615 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

594 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-616 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-617 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 595

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-618 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-619 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

596 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-620 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-621 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 597

 Figure 2-622 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-623 Disconnect one connector

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

598 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

5. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Pickup unit 2.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 599

 Figure 2-624 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Pickup unit 1.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 1, align the gear, couplers, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-625 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Removal and replacement: Pickup lifting and empty sensor (pickup unit 2)
Learn how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit 2.

View a video of how to remove and replace the pickup lifting and empty sensor for pickup unit
2.

600 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-80 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Photo Interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 601

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-626 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-627 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

602 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-628 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-629 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 603

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-630 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-631 Remove the right door

3. Remove pickup unit 2

Follow these steps to remove pickup unit 2.

1. Remove the paper trays.

604 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-632 Remove one screw and the cover

3. Remove three screws.

Figure 2-633 Remove three screws

4. Rotate the left side of pickup unit 2 away from the printer.

CAUTION: The pickup unit is still attached to the printer by a connector. Do not remove it
completely.

Remove pickup unit 2 605

 Figure 2-634 Rotate pickup unit 2

5. Disconnect one connector.

Figure 2-635 Disconnect one connector

4. Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor.

■ Disconnect the corresponding sensor connector, and then remove the sensor.

● Empty sensor (callout A)

● Pickup lifting sensor (callout B)

606 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-636 Remove the pickup lifting and empty sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

6. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 607

 Pickup unit 2.

■ When reinstalling pickup unit 2, align the gear, coupler, and bracket on the right side.

Figure 2-637 Align gear, coupler, and bracket

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

608 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-81 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Main Pick Up 1st JC93-01364A Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

Main Pick Up 2nd JC93-01365A Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

Photo interrupter 0604-001490 Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

Alphabetical parts list 609

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-82 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

0604-001490 Photo interrupter Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

JC93-01364A Main Pick Up 1st Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

JC93-01365A Main Pick Up 2nd Main frame pickup 1 and 2 on

page 573

Main (sub) frame pickup

View the main (sub) frame pickup exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Main frame pickup

Parts diagram and parts list for the main frame pickup

610 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-638 Frame main pickup

Table 2-81 Frame main pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01421A Sub Pick Up Upper 1 Not applicable

1-2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

3 JC66-04625 Feed roller, first exit 1 Not applicable

A

5 JC93-01092A HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers 3 Removal and replacement:

Trays 2–x pick, feed, and
separation rollers

6 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

Main frame pickup 611

 Removal and replacement: Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers
Learn how to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01092A Tray 2,3 main pick, feed, sep rollers

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

612 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers

Follow these steps to remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers.

NOTE: HP recommends replacing all three rollers at the same time.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the two cassettes.

Figure 2-639 Remove the two cassettes

3. Inside the tray opening, slide the return guide toward the front of the printer until it stops.

Figure 2-640 Slide the return guide

Reinstallation tip: After installing the new rollers, slide the return guide toward the rear of the
printer to prevent paper jams.

Remove the Trays 2–x pick, feed, and separation rollers 613
 4. Release the latch at the end of the rollers (callout 1) by pulling the latch tab away from the shaft, and
then slide the pick, feed, and separation rollers off of the shaft (callout 2) to remove them.

Figure 2-641 Remove rollers

5. When removing the rollers, make sure to leave the white couplers (callout 1) in place. If the couplers
become dislodged, reinstall them as shown in the figure below.

NOTE: The figure shows the pickup assembly removed from the printer to more clearly show the
positions of the couplers and rollers.

Figure 2-642 Coupler locations

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

614 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the followingspecial installation instructions.

■ After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

a. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

b. Select the Service menu.

c. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the
access code (04087617).

d. Select the Service Tools menu.

e. Select the Supply Status menu.

f. Select Field Replacement Unit.

g. Select Tray X Rollers.

h. Select the tray number for the rollers just replaced.

i. Select Reset.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 615

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-83 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Feed roller, first exit JC66-04625A Frame main pickup on page 611

HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers JC93-01092A Frame main pickup on page 611

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Frame main pickup on page 611

Sub Pick Up Upper JC93-01421A Frame main pickup on page 611

616 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-84 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Frame main pickup on page 611

JC66-04625A Feed roller, first exit Frame main pickup on page 611

JC93-01092A HP LaserJet Trays 2-x rollers Frame main pickup on page 611

JC93-01421A Sub Pick Up Upper Frame main pickup on page 611

Covers
View covers exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Covers
Parts diagram and parts list for the covers.

Figure 2-643 Covers

Table 2-83 Covers

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

1 JC95-02109A Front cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Front cover

Numerical parts list 617

 Table 2-83 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

2 JC95-02110A Inner cover front 1 Removal and replacement:

Front inner cover

4 JC63-02105A Right middle cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Front power cover

5 JC63-04861B Front cover, lower 1 Not applicable

6 JC63-05635 Middle left cover 1 Removal and replacement:

A Front top inner cover

7 JC95-02101A Cover, exit 1 Removal and replacement:

Exit cover

9 JC63-05587A Scan left cover 1 Not applicable

10 JC63-05638 Left cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

A Upper left cover

11 JC63-04840 Cover, exit rear 1 Not applicable

B

14 JC63-05571A Scan right cover 1 Not applicable

16 JC63-04847 Right cover, front 1 Not applicable

C

17 JC95-02102A Right cover, rear 1 Removal and replacement:

Right rear cover

18 JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear 1 Removal and replacement:

Lower rear cover

19 JC63-05633 Rear cover, upper 1 Removal and replacement:

A Upper rear cover

21 JC63-04863 Rear cover, dummy 1 Not applicable

B

22 JC63-04859 Rear scan cover 1 Not applicable

C

22 JC63-04859 Rear scan cover (du model) 1 Not applicable

D

24 JC95-02100A Left cover 1 Removal and replacement:

Left cover

25 JC63-04862 Left cover, top 1 Not applicable

B

26 JC63-05639 Cover, control panel bottom 1 Not applicable

A

27 JC63-05640 Cover, control panel top 1 Not applicable

A

Not shown JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door 1 Removal and replacement:
Upper right door cover

Not shown JC61-04626A Strap, front cover Not applicable

Not shown JC41-00964A PCA, sub USB Host Not applicable

618 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-83 Covers (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair Procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Not applicable

Not Shown X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-84 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02109A Cover, front

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

Removal and replacement: Front cover 619

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-644 Remove the front cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

620 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the inner front cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the inner front cover.

Mean time to repair: 30 minutes

Service level: Advanced

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-85 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02110A Cover, inner front

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

Removal and replacement: Front inner cover 621

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the toner collection unit

Follow these steps to remove the toner collection unit.

1. Open the front cover.

2. Push both hooks to release the toner collection unit (TCU).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 2-645 Remove the TCU

2. Remove the paper dust brush

Follow these steps to remove the paper dust brush.

622 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove the paper dust brush.

Figure 2-646 Remove the paper dust brush

3. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

■ Remove two screws securing the front cover. While pushing the right hook, remove the front cover.

Figure 2-647 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front cover 623

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-648 Remove the front top inner cover

5. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

Figure 2-649 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

624 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-650 Remove the front power cover

6. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-651 Remove the exit cover

7. Remove the inner front cover

Follow these steps to remove the inner front cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove the all of the toner cartridges.

Remove the exit cover 625

 3. Remove seven screws.

Figure 2-652 Remove seven screws

4. Lift the inner cover away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 2-653 Remove the inner cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

626 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front power cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front power cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-02105A Cover, middle right

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Front power cover 627

 After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-654 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the front power cover

Follow these steps to remove the front power cover.

1. Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Release two tabs on the right, and then rotate the cover
slightly away from the printer.

CAUTION: The cover is still attached to the printer by a cable. Do not completely remove the cover.

628 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-655 Remove two screws and rotate the cover

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-656 Remove the front power cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 629

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front top inner cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the front top inner cover.

Mean time to repair: 2 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

630 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05635A Cover, middle left

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-657 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the front top inner cover 631

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit cover

Learn how to remove and replace the exit cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the exit cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

632 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02101A Cover, exit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 633

 ■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-658 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the exit cover

Follow these steps to remove the exit cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws, and then lift the exit cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-659 Remove the exit cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

634 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper left cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the left rear corner cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Upper left cover 635

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05638A Cover, upper left

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

636 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-660 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the left rear corner cover

Follow these steps to remove the left rear corner cover.

■ Remove two screw caps and five screws. Slide the left rear corner cover up and away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-661 Remove the left rear corner cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the left rear corner cover 637

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Right rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the right rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

638 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02102A Cover, right rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

Remove the right rear cover 639

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-662 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-663 Remove the right rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

640 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the lower rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Removal and replacement: Lower rear cover 641

 Table 2-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-664 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

642 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-665 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 643

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the upper rear cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-92 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-05633A Cover, rear upper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

644 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-666 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the lower rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the lower rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 645

 ■ Remove 8 screw-caps and 11 screws. Lift left side, and then pull the cover straight out on the right.

Figure 2-667 Remove the lower rear cover

3. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-668 Remove the upper rear cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

646 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the left cover.

Mean time to repair: 10 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Left cover 647

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC95-02100A Cover, left

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

648 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Remove the top left cover.

Figure 2-669 Top left cover

2. Remove seven screw-caps and eight screws, and lift the left cover off of the printer.

Figure 2-670 Remove the left cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 649

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Upper right door cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top right cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the top right cover.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

650 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04916B Cover, right upper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

No post service test is available for this assembly.

1. Remove the front top inner cover

Follow these steps to remove the front top inner cover.

■ Remove two screw-caps and two screws. Lift the front top inner cover away from the printer to
remove it.

Figure 2-671 Remove the front top inner cover

2. Remove the upper right door cover

Follow these steps to Remove the upper right door cover.

Remove the front top inner cover 651

 ■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then rotate the upper right door cover away from the
printer to remove it.

Figure 2-672 Remove the upper right door cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

652 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 653

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, control panel bottom JC63-05639A Covers on page 617

Cover, control panel top JC63-05640A Covers on page 617

Cover, exit JC95-02101A Covers on page 617

Cover, exit rear JC63-04840B Covers on page 617

Cover, lower rear JC95-02117A Covers on page 617

Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B Covers on page 617

Front cover JC95-02109A Covers on page 617

Front cover, lower JC63-04861B Covers on page 617

Inner cover front JC95-02110A Covers on page 617

Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit X3A92-67924 Covers on page 617

Left cover JC95-02100A Covers on page 617

Left cover, top JC63-04862B Covers on page 617

Left cover, upper JC63-05638A Covers on page 617

Middle left cover JC63-05635A Covers on page 617

PCA, front power switch JC92-02969A Covers on page 617

PCA, sub USB Host JC41-00964A Covers on page 617

Rear cover, dummy JC63-04863B Covers on page 617

Rear cover, upper JC63-05633A Covers on page 617

Rear scan cover JC63-04859C Covers on page 617

Rear scan cover (du model) JC63-04859D Covers on page 617

Right cover, front JC63-04847C Covers on page 617

Right cover, rear JC95-02102A Covers on page 617

Right middle cover JC63-02105A Covers on page 617

Scan left cover JC63-05587A Covers on page 617

Scan right cover JC63-05571A Covers on page 617

Strap, front cover JC61-04626A Covers on page 617

654 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC41-00964A PCA, sub USB Host Covers on page 617

JC61-04626A Strap, front cover Covers on page 617

JC63-02105A Right middle cover Covers on page 617

JC63-04840B Cover, exit rear Covers on page 617

JC63-04847C Right cover, front Covers on page 617

JC63-04859C Rear scan cover Covers on page 617

JC63-04859D Rear scan cover (du model) Covers on page 617

JC63-04861B Front cover, lower Covers on page 617

JC63-04862B Left cover, top Covers on page 617

JC63-04863B Rear cover, dummy Covers on page 617

JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door Covers on page 617

JC63-05571A Scan right cover Covers on page 617

JC63-05587A Scan left cover Covers on page 617

JC63-05633A Rear cover, upper Covers on page 617

JC63-05635A Middle left cover Covers on page 617

JC63-05638A Left cover, upper Covers on page 617

JC63-05639A Cover, control panel bottom Covers on page 617

JC63-05640A Cover, control panel top Covers on page 617

JC92-02969A PCA, front power switch Covers on page 617

JC95-02100A Left cover Covers on page 617

JC95-02101A Cover, exit Covers on page 617

JC95-02102A Right cover, rear Covers on page 617

JC95-02109A Front cover Covers on page 617

JC95-02110A Inner cover front Covers on page 617

JC95-02117A Cover, lower rear Covers on page 617

X3A92-67924 Kit-Screws c-clips e-clips kit Covers on page 617

Right door
View the right door exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door
Parts diagram and parts list for the right door

Numerical parts list 655

 Figure 2-673 Right door

Table 2-95 Right door

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01352B Tray 1 door 1 Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 unit (on the right door)

2 JC63-04910B Cover, right door front 1 Not applicable

3 JC63-04918B Cover, dummy LCT 1 Not applicable

4 JC63-04920 Cover, right 1 Not applicable

B

5 JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door 1 Not applicable

8 JC95-01970A Right door, link 1 Not applicable

9 JC66-04400 Right door, side hinge 1 Not applicable

A

11 JC93-01085A Motor - step 1 Not applicable

12 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

14 JC61-07372A Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

23 6602-003183 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

29 JC66-04398 Right door damper 1 Not applicable

A

Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Tray 1 empty sensor

656 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-95 Right door (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown 0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor 1 Removal and replacement:
Tray 1 paper length sensor

Not shown 0604-001393 Fuser out sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Fuser out sensor (on the right
door)

Not shown 0604-001490 Feed 2 sensor 1 Removal and replacement:

Feed 2 sensor (on the right
door)

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit (on the right door)

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit on the right door.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 unit on the right door.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01352B Tray 1, door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 unit (on the right door) 657
 After performing service
○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-674 Remove four screws

658 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-675 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-676 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Remove the right door 659

 Figure 2-677 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-678 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

660 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-679 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-680 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-681 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-682 Remove two screws

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 661
 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-683 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-684 Remove the feed guide take away lower

6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-685 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one
connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-686 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-687 Release the hinge arm

662 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-688 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-689 Remove one e-ring and bushing

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-690 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-691 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-692 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 663

 7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-693 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-694 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-695 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-696 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-697 Rotate the feed roller assembly

664 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-698 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-699 Remove the duplex lower guide

14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-700 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-701 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-702 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

Remove the Tray 1 unit 665

 17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-703 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 2-704 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

666 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-97 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo Interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 empty sensor 667

 1. Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-705 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-706 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

668 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-707 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-708 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 669

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-709 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-710 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

670 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-711 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-712 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-713 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-714 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-715 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 671
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-716 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one
connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-717 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the Tray 1 unit

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open Tray 1, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-718 Release the hinge arm

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-719 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-720 Remove one e-ring and bushing

672 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-721 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-722 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-723 Remove one screw

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-724 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-725 Remove one screw

Remove the Tray 1 unit 673

 9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-726 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-727 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-728 Rotate the feed roller assembly

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-729 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-730 Remove the duplex lower guide

674 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-731 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-732 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-733 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-734 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the Tray 1 unit.

Figure 2-735 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor 675

 ■ Disconnect the connector, and then remove the Tray 1 empty sensor.

Figure 2-736 Remove the Tray 1 empty sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

676 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper length sensor
Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-98 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Photo interrupter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 paper length sensor 677

 1. Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-737 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-738 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

678 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-739 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-740 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 679

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-741 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-742 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

680 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-743 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-744 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-745 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-746 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-747 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 681
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-748 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one
connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-749 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the MP unit

Follow these steps to remove the MP unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open the MP tray, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-750 Release the hinge arm

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-751 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-752 Remove one e-ring and bushing

682 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-753 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-754 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-755 Remove one screw

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-756 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-757 Remove one screw

Remove the MP unit 683

 9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-758 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-759 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-760 Rotate the feed roller assembly

12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-761 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-762 Remove the duplex lower guide

684 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-763 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-764 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-765 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-766 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the MP unit.

Figure 2-767 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor 685

 1. Remove the Tray 1 Tray upper.

Figure 2-768 Remove the Tray 1 Tray upper

2. Disconnect one connector, and then remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor.

Figure 2-769 Remove the Tray 1 paper length sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

686 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor (on the right door)
Learn how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the fuser out sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-99 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Fuser out sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Fuser out sensor (on the right door) 687
 1. Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-770 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-771 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

688 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-772 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-773 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 689

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-774 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-775 Remove the right door

3. Remove the fuser out sensor

Follow these steps to remove the fuser out sensor.

690 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove one screw on the back, top corner of the door.

Figure 2-776 Remove one screw

2. Remove one screw on the front, top corner of the door, and then open the cover-side exit.

Figure 2-777 Remove one screw

3. Remove one screw, and then rotate the sensor holder up.

Figure 2-778 Remove one screw

Remove the fuser out sensor 691

 4. Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the fuser-out sensor from its holder.

Figure 2-779 Disconnect one connector

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

692 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Feed 2 sensor (on the right door)
Learn how to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the feed 2 sensor.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-100 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001490 Feed sensor 2

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Feed 2 sensor (on the right door) 693
 1. Remove the right rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-780 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-781 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

694 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-782 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-783 Release the right hinge

Remove the right door 695

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-784 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-785 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

696 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-786 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-787 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-788 Remove two screws

4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-789 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-790 Remove the feed guide take away lower

Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper 697
 6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-791 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one
connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-792 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the feed 2 sensor

Follow these steps to remove the feed 2 sensor.

■ Disconnect the sensor connector, and then remove the feed 2 sensor located on the feed guide take
away upper.

Figure 2-793 Disconnect one connector and remove the feed 2 sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

698 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 699

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, dummy LCT JC63-04918B Right door on page 656

Cover, right JC63-04920B Right door on page 656

Cover, right door front JC63-04910B Right door on page 656

Cover, upper right door JC63-04916B Right door on page 656

Feed 2 sensor 0604-001490 Right door on page 656

Fuser out sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 656

Motor - step JC93-01085A Right door on page 656

Right door damper JC66-04398A Right door on page 656

Right door, link JC95-01970A Right door on page 656

Right door, side hinge JC66-04400A Right door on page 656

Spring, ts JC61-07372A Right door on page 656

Timing belt 6602-003183 Right door on page 656

Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 Right door on page 656

Tray 1 door JC90-01352B Right door on page 656

Tray 1 empty sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 656

Tray 1 paper length sensor 0604-001393 Right door on page 656

700 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Fuser out sensor Right door on page 656

0604-001393 Tray 1 empty sensor Right door on page 656

0604-001393 Tray 1 paper length sensor Right door on page 656

0604-001490 Feed 2 sensor Right door on page 656

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear Right door on page 656

6602-003183 Timing belt Right door on page 656

JC61-07372A Spring, ts Right door on page 656

JC63-04910B Cover, right door front Right door on page 656

JC63-04916B Cover, upper right door Right door on page 656

JC63-04918B Cover, dummy LCT Right door on page 656

JC63-04920B Cover, right Right door on page 656

JC66-04398A Right door damper Right door on page 656

JC66-04400A Right door, side hinge Right door on page 656

JC90-01352B Tray 1 door Right door on page 656

JC93-01085A Motor - step Right door on page 656

JC95-01970A Right door, link Right door on page 656

Tray 1
View the tray 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Tray 1
Parts diagram and parts list for tray 1.

Numerical parts list 701

 Figure 2-794 Tray 1

Table 2-101 Tray 1

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC90-01357B Tray 1, main pickup 1 Not applicable

10 JC93-00540 Tray 1, main rollers 3 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed
roller

11 JC90-01355A Tray 1, bracket pickup 1 Not applicable

11-1 JC33-00029 Solenoid, tray 1 1 Removal and replacement:

B Tray 1 solenoid

11-4 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

11-5 JC66-04459 Actuator lever, empty 1 Not applicable

A

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 pickup/reverse/feed roller.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

702 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-102 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00540B Tray 1 (MP) roller

Required tools
● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

○ Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller.

Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller 703

 1. Open Tray 1. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of the cover.

NOTE: The plastic tabs on the edges of the cover might require extra pressure to remove.

Figure 2-795 Remove the cover

2. Remove the cover shown using a small flat blade screwdriver to release the tab on the right side of
the cover.

NOTE: The flag, it will need to be moved out of the way to remove cover.

Figure 2-796 Remove cover

Note the orientation of the flag.

3. Release the small tab and remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller (callout 2). The flag (callout 1)
will need to be moved out of the way to release rollers. Use caution and remove slowly to avoid

704 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 loosening the parts behind the rollers. If these parts come loose, they might fall into the printer and
will be difficult to retrieve. Note the location of all components.

NOTE: It is recommended to replace all three rollers at the same time.

Figure 2-797 Remove the Tray 1 pick/reverse/feed roller

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 705

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

After the replacement rollers are installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select Tray X Rollers.

8. Select Tray 1 Roller Kit.

9. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Tray 1 solenoid

Learn how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.

View a video of how to remove and replace the Tray 1 solenoid.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

○ A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

706 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts

Table 2-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00029B Solenoid, Tray 1

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-798 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 707

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-799 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-800 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

708 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-801 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-802 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 709

 Figure 2-803 Remove the right door

3. Remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper
Follow these steps to remove the feed guide take away lower and feed guide take away upper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-804 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the lower cable cover.

Figure 2-805 Remove two screws and the lower cable cover

3. Remove two screws.

Figure 2-806 Remove two screws

710 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-807 Remove one screw

5. Remove the feed guide take away lower.

Figure 2-808 Remove the feed guide take away lower

6. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-809 Remove two screws

7. Lift the feed guide take away upper slightly away from the right door, and then disconnect one
connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-810 Remove the feed guide take away upper

4. Remove the MP unit

Follow these steps to remove the MP unit.

1. Hold the right door upright, open the MP tray, and then release the hinge arm (callout 1).

Figure 2-811 Release the hinge arm

Remove the MP unit 711

 2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the bushing cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-812 Remove one screw and bushing cover

3. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-813 Remove one e-ring and bushing

4. Remove one e-ring and bushing (callout 1).

Figure 2-814 Remove one e-ring and bushing

5. Remove the shaft.

Figure 2-815 Remove the shaft

6. Pull the hinge arm up (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 2-816 Remove one screw

712 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

7. Release the hinge.

Figure 2-817 Release the hinge

8. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then release one retainer (callout 2).

Figure 2-818 Remove one screw

9. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-819 Remove one screw

10. Lift up on the feed roller assembly (callout 1), and then slide it to the left (callout 2) to release it.

Figure 2-820 Release the feed roller assembly

11. Rotate the feed roller assembly to the side.

CAUTION: The feed roller assembly is still attached to the right door. Do not attempt to remove it
completely.

Figure 2-821 Rotate the feed roller assembly

Remove the MP unit 713

 12. Remove three screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-822 Remove three screws

13. Remove the duplex lower guide.

Figure 2-823 Remove the duplex lower guide

14. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-824 Remove one screw

15. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 2-825 Remove two screws

16. Release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect three connectors (callout 2), and then remove two
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-826 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

714 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 17. Release the Tray 1 unit from the right door.

Figure 2-827 Release the Tray 1 unit

18. Remove the MP unit.

Figure 2-828 Remove the Tray 1 unit

5. Remove the Tray 1 solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the Tray 1 solenoid.

1. Remove two screws, remove three gears, and then release Tray 1.

Figure 2-829 Remove two screws and three gears

Remove the Tray 1 solenoid 715

 2. Remove two screws, three e-rings, and three bushings. Remove the bracket-rear.

Figure 2-830 Remove the bracket-rear

3. Remove seven screws, and then remove the frame-base.

Figure 2-831 Remove seven screws

4. Remove two screws, and then remove the Tray 1 solenoid.

Figure 2-832 Remove two screws

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

716 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 717

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, empty JC66-04459A Tray 1 on page 702

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 Tray 1 on page 702

Solenoid, tray 1 JC33-00029B Tray 1 on page 702

Tray 1, bracket pickup JC90-01355A Tray 1 on page 702

Tray 1, main pickup JC90-01357B Tray 1 on page 702

Tray 1, main rollers JC93-00540B Tray 1 on page 702

718 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter Tray 1 on page 702

JC33-00029B Solenoid, tray 1 Tray 1 on page 702

JC66-04459A Actuator lever, empty Tray 1 on page 702

JC90-01355A Tray 1, bracket pickup Tray 1 on page 702

JC90-01357B Tray 1, main pickup Tray 1 on page 702

JC93-00540B Tray 1, main rollers Tray 1 on page 702

Right door guide

View the right door guide exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door guide

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door guide.

Figure 2-833 Right door guide

Numerical parts list 719

 Table 2-104 Right door guide

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC95-01969A Side cover guide 1 Not applicable

2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

3 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

4 JC66-04405 Actuator lever, dup 1 Not applicable

A

6 6107-001731 Spring, cs 4 Not applicable

7 JC66-02289 Idle roller, rubber 4 Not applicable

B

8 JC61-06988A Feed guide 1 Not applicable

720 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-105 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, dup JC66-04405A Right door guide on page 720

Feed guide JC61-06988A Right door guide on page 720

Idle roller, rubber JC66-02289B Right door guide on page 720

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Right door guide on page 720

Side cover guide JC95-01969A Right door guide on page 720

Spring, cs 6107-001731 Right door guide on page 720

Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door guide on page 720

Alphabetical parts list 721

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-106 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Right door guide on page 720

6107-001731 Spring, cs Right door guide on page 720

6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door guide on page 720

JC61-06988A Feed guide Right door guide on page 720

JC66-02289B Idle roller, rubber Right door guide on page 720

JC66-04405A Actuator lever, dup Right door guide on page 720

JC95-01969A Side cover guide Right door guide on page 720

Right door exit and takeaway

View the right door exit and takeaway exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Right door exit and takeaway

Parts diagram and parts list for the right door exit and takeaway.

Figure 2-834 Right door exit and takeaway

Table 2-105 Right door exit and takeaway

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC95-01968A Right door side exit 1 Not applicable

722 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-105 Right door exit and takeaway (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-2 6107-001737 Spring, ts 1 Not applicable

1-3 JC66-04406 Actuator lever, fuser out 1 Not applicable

A

1-4 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

2 JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway 1 Not applicable

2-2 0604-001490 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door 1 Not applicable

Right door exit and takeaway 723

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-106 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Actuator lever, fuser out JC66-04406A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

Photo interrupter 0604-001490 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

Photo-interrupter 0604–001393 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

Right door side exit JC95-01968A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

Side cover, takeaway JC95-01972A Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

Spring, ts 6107-001737 Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

Switch assembly - right door JC93-01467A Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

724 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-107 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001490 Photo interrupter Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

0604–001393 Photo-interrupter Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

6107-001737 Spring, ts Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

JC66-04406A Actuator lever, fuser out Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

JC93-01467A Switch assembly - right door Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

JC95-01968A Right door side exit Right door exit and takeaway
on page 722

JC95-01972A Side cover, takeaway Right door exit and takeaway

on page 722

Drive system
View the drive system exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

T2 transfer assembly
Parts diagram and parts list for the T2 transfer assembly.

Numerical parts list 725

 Figure 2-835 T2 transfer assembly

Table 2-106 T2 transfer assembly

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01078A T2 transfer 1 Not applicable

1 JC93-01080A T2 transfer roller assembly 1 Not applicable

726 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-107 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

T2 transfer JC93-01078A T2 transfer assembly on page

726

T2 transfer roller assembly JC93-01080A T2 transfer assembly on page

726

Alphabetical parts list 727

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-108 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC93-01078A T2 transfer T2 transfer assembly on page

726

JC93-01080A T2 transfer roller assembly T2 transfer assembly on page

726

ADF (LX models)

View the ADF (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF (LX models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF (LX models).

Figure 2-836 ADF (LX models)

Table 2-107 ADF (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) jam
access cover (LX)

2 JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) 1 Not applicable

728 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-107 ADF (LX models) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

3 JC63-05563 ADF, front cover (LX) 1 Not applicable

A

4 JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) 1 Not applicable

7 JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX)

7 X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder (ADF) input
tray (LX)

7-4 JC66-04079 ADF pinion gear (LX) 1 Not applicable

A

7-5 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX bundles).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (LX/du bundles).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: ADF whole unit (LX) 729

 Table 2-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-05074A Document feeder whole unit assembly (LX models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-837 Remove the formatter cover

730 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the upper rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-838 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-839 Remove the document feeder connector cover

Remove the upper rear cover 731

 2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 2-840 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-841 Release the document feeder hinge screws

732 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-842 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 733

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) jam access cover (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-109 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04853A Jam access cover (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

734 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-843 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-844 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 735

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-845 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

1. Open the jam access cover, and then remove one screw.

Figure 2-846 Remove the jam access cover screw

736 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the pivot pin, and then pivot the cover and release the hinge to remove the jam access
cover.

Figure 2-847 Remove the jam access cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 737

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) input tray (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (E778xx series)

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

738 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-848 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 739

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-849 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-850 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

740 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-851 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-852 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 741

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-853 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) input tray.

■ Disconnect one connector on document feeder board (callout 1), remove one screw and hinge pin
(callout 2), and then remove the input tray.

NOTE: Carefully guide the cable out of the chassis while removing the tray.

Figure 2-854 Remove the input tray connector, screw, and hinge pin

1
2

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

742 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) 743

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-111 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS)

JC97-04722A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E778xx series)

JC97-04920A Contact image sensor (CIS) (E783xx series)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

744 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-855 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-856 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 745

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-857 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-858 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

746 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-859 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-860 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the pick and feed roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the pick and feed roller assembly.

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 747

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 2-861 Remove four screws

2. Remove two screws on the front cover.

Figure 2-862 Remove two screws on front cover

748 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Open the ADF and then remove three screw caps.

Figure 2-863 Remove three screw caps

4. Remove three screws, and then remove the front cover.

Figure 2-864 Remove three screws and front cover

Remove the pick and feed roller assembly 749

 5. Rotate the pick/feed roller assembly to release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame.

Figure 2-865 Release the sheet metal tab from ADF frame

6. To remove the pick/feed roller assembly lift up on the front side (callout 1) and, then slide towards
the front (callout 2) to release the pick/feed roller assembly.

Figure 2-866 Release the pick/feed roller assembly

750 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 7. Rotate the roller assembly over, and then disconnect one connectors. Remove the document
feeder pick roller assembly.

Figure 2-867 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly

TIP: Note the four flags (callout 1) on the bottom of the pick/feed roller assembly. When
reinstalling, hold up the flags while reinstall to allow for proper installation.

Figure 2-868 Pick/Feed roller assembly four flags

4. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.

Remove the CIS assembly 751

 Figure 2-869 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 2-870 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

752 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder main motor (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of this procedure for HP Color LaserJet MFP.

View a video of this procedure for HP LaserJet MFP

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) main motor (LX) 753
 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Main motor assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

754 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-871 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-872 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 755

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-873 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the main motor

Follow these steps to remove the main motor.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove the tension spring (callout 2), and then remove four
screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-874 Remove the main motor connector, spring, and screws

2
1

2. Carefully lift the motor out while releasing the gear belt.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

756 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-875 Main motor and gear belt

3. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.

Figure 2-876 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

Remove the CIS assembly 757

 2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 2-877 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

758 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 759

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF cover open (LX) JC97-04853A ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF pickup (LX) JC97-04856B ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) JC97-04859A ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) X3A84-60103 ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF, cover rear (LX) JC63-05561A ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF, front cover (LX) JC63-05563A ADF (LX models) on page 728

760 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05561A ADF, cover rear (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 728

JC63-05563A ADF, front cover (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 728

JC97-04853A ADF cover open (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 728

JC97-04856B ADF pickup (LX) ADF (LX models) on page 728

JC97-04859A ADF stacker (LX) (For E77822, E77825, E77830) ADF (LX models) on page 728

X3A84-60103 ADF stacker (LX) (For E78323, E78325, E78330) ADF (LX models) on page 728

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

View the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models).

Figure 2-878 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Numerical parts list 761

 Table 2-113 ADF exterior and ADF pickup (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC92-02962A LX PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA-Scanner (LX)

1-5 JC97-04528A LX, hinge r 1 Not applicable

1-6 JC97-04527A LX, hinge l 1 Not applicable

2-2 0604-001393 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder (ADF) pick/
feed roller assembly (LX)

2-5-1 JC97-04099A LX pick roller 1 Not applicable

2-5-6 JC97-04860A LX feed roller 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Document feeder (ADF) pick/feed roller assembly (LX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly (LX/du models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup/feed roller assembly
(LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

762 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-114 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04857A Pick feed roller assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-879 Open the document feeder cover

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 763
 2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-880 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-881 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

764 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-882 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Figure 2-883 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 765
 Figure 2-884 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

766 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02962A Document feeder PCA assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner (LX) 767

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-885 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-886 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

768 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-887 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA.

■ Disconnect six connectors and the ground wire from PCA, remove four screws, and then remove the
document feeder PCA (LX).

Figure 2-888 Document feeder PCA (LX)

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the document feeder (ADF) PCA 769

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

770 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

LX PCA JC92-02962A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

LX feed roller JC97-04860A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

LX pick roller JC97-04099A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

LX, hinge l JC97-04527A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

LX, hinge r JC97-04528A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

Photo interrupter 0604-001393 ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

Pick Roller Assy - LX JC97-04857A ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

Alphabetical parts list 771

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001393 Photo interrupter ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC92-02962A LX PCA ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC97-04099A LX pick roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC97-04527A LX, hinge l ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC97-04528A LX, hinge r ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC97-04857A Pick Roller Assy - LX ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

JC97-04860A LX feed roller ADF exterior and ADF pickup

(LX models) on page 762

ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

View the ADF main frame assembly (LX models) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF main frame assembly (LX models).

772 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-889 ADF main frame (LX models)

13

Table 2-116 ADF main frame assembly (LX models)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04586A LX separation housing 1 Not applicable

1-2 JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller 1 Removal and replacement:

Document feeder separation
roller assembly (LX)

1-2-1 JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller Not applicable

1-3 JC69-01326A Friction pad 1 Not applicable

5-5 JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 1 Not applicable

6-2 JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out 1 Not applicable

6-3 JC66-04103A Actuator, registration 1 Not applicable

6-4 0604-001381 Photo interrupter 1 Not applicable

6-5 0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 1 Not applicable

ADF main frame assembly (LX/du models) 773

 Table 2-116 ADF main frame assembly (LX models) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (Motor, bldc type 1) 1 Removal and replacement:
Document feeder feed motor
(LX)

13 JC31-00163A Motor - Step main 1 Not applicable

16 JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC 1 Not applicable

17 JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) 1 Not applicable

19 JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) 1 Not applicable

1Early models only during original release. This part removed from newer models.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder separation roller assembly (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly
(LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

774 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-117 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04852A ADF separation roller assembly (LX)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder cover.

Figure 2-890 Open the document feeder cover

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 775
 2. Remove four screws in the document feeder pick roller assembly cover.

NOTE: Remove one spring (callout 2; not shown)

Figure 2-891 Remove the document feeder cover screws

3. Rotate the document feeder pickup cover up, and then disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-892 Turn the cover over and disconnect connector

776 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-893 Document feeder pick roller cover and roller assembly

5. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the sensor flag bracket (callout 2).

Reinstallation tip: When the roller assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the sensor flags (on
both sides of the assembly) are correctly installed and move freely.

Figure 2-894 Remove one screw and the sensor flag bracket

6. Release two plastic clips (callout 1), slide bushing toward roller assembly (callout 2), and then slide
the shaft towards front of printer to release it (callout 3). Remove the roller assembly.

CAUTION: Do not damage the sensor flags when handling the roller assembly.

NOTE: The bushing is not captive. Do not lose it when handling the roller assembly.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) (LX/du models) pick and feed roller assembly 777
 Figure 2-895 Remove the document feeder pick roller assembly clips

2. Remove the LX document feeder separation roller

Follow these steps to remove the LX document feeder separation roller.

1. Rotate the separation roller cover up to release it, and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-896 Remove the separation roller cover

778 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Before proceeding, take note of the removed roller cover and the roller assembly.

Figure 2-897 Document feeder separation roller cover and roller assembly

3. Release two claws, and then remove the separation roller assembly.

NOTE: The separation roller assembly spring under the roller is not captive.

Figure 2-898 Remove the separation roller assembly

Remove the LX document feeder separation roller 779

 4. When the assembly is reinstalled, make sure that the spring is correctly seated in the holder.

Figure 2-899 Separation roller assembly spring

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

780 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed motor (LX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00156C Feed motor assembly (LX) (bldc type 1)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Document feeder feed motor (LX) 781

 ○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-900 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-901 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

782 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-902 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Loosen the cables in the cable guide, remove two screws and then move the cable guide out of the
way.

Figure 2-903 Feed motor cable guide

Remove the feed motor 783

 2. Disconnect one connector, remove four screws, and then carefully lift the motor out to remove.

Figure 2-904 Remove the feed motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

784 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 785

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF LX separation roller JC97-04852A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

ADF LX separation sub roller JC97-04861A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

Actuator, feed out JC66-04105A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Actuator, output1 JC66-04104A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Actuator, registration JC66-04103A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) JC97-04920A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) JC97-04722A ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

Friction pad JC69-01326A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

LX - Link Cover Open JC66-04100A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

LX - Motor feed DC JC47-00038A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

LX separation housing JC97-04586A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Motor - Step main JC31-00163A ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Photo interrupter 0604-001381 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

Photo interrupter1 0604–001393 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

786 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E783xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

0604-001381 Photo interrupter ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

0604–001393 Photo interrupter1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC31-00163A Motor - Step main ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC47-00038A LX - Motor feed DC ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC66-04100A LX - Link Cover Open ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC66-04103A Actuator, registration ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC66-04104A Actuator, output1 ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC66-04105A Actuator, feed out ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC69-01326A Friction pad ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC97-04586A LX separation housing ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC97-04722A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) (E778xx series) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

JC97-04852A ADF LX separation roller ADF main frame assembly (LX

models) on page 773

JC97-04861A ADF LX separation sub roller ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

JC97-04920A Contact Image Sensor (CIS) ADF main frame assembly (LX
models) on page 773

Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF (GX/sGX).

Numerical parts list 787

 Figure 2-905 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)

Table 2-119 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04869A ADF Cover open 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX 1 Not applicable

3 JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

6 JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

8 JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

9 JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

10 JC97-04883A Main frame - GX 1 Not applicable

10 JC97-04882A Main frame sGX 1 Not applicable

13 JC63-05566 Cover, rear - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

A

788 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-119 ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX/sGX)

Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor
with PCA (GX/sGX)

Complete JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)

Complete JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX bundles).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-120 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF whole unit (GX/sGX) 789

 Table 2-120 Part information (continued)

Part number Part description

JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-906 Remove the formatter cover

790 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the upper rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-907 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-908 Remove document feeder connector cover

Remove the upper rear cover 791

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-909 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-910 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

792 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-911 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-912 Remove screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 793

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-913 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

794 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder ultrasonic sensor (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder feed ultrasonic sensor
(GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-121 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only)

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF ultrasonic sensor with PCA (GX/sGX) 795
 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-914 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

796 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-915 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-916 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 797

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-917 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-918 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

798 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-919 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-920 Remove 4 screws.

Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 799

 2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-921 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

4. Remove the paper path cover

Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

800 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-922 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA

Follow these steps to remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA.

1. Remove the separation roller, and then remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 2-923 Remove one screw

Remove the ultrasonic sensor with PCA 801

 2. Remove the pick/feed cover.

Figure 2-924 Remove the pick/feed cover

3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the ultrasonic sensor.

Figure 2-925 Remove the ultrasonic sensor

6.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

802 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

803
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

ADF Cover open JC97-04869A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Cover, bottom - GX/sGX JC97-04880A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Cover, front - GX/sGX JC97-04881A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Cover, hinge - GX/sGX JC66-02270A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Cover, rear - GX/sGX JC63-05566A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Damper - GX/sGX JC97-04692A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Dummy, front - GX/sGX JC97-04879A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Flow ADF - GX JC97-04955A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Main frame - GX JC97-04883A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Main frame sGX JC97-04882A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Non Flow ADF - sGX JC97-04956A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02967A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
788

PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) JC92-02966A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
788

Pickup, upper - GX JC97-04872A ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Pickup, upper - sGX JC97-04646B ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

804 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC63-05566A Cover, rear - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC66-02270A Cover, hinge - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
788

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (ultrasonic) (GX only) ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page
788

JC97-04646B Pickup, upper - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04692A Damper - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04869A ADF Cover open ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04872A Pickup, upper - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04879A Dummy, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04880A Cover, bottom - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04881A Cover, front - GX/sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04882A Main frame sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04883A Main frame - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04955A Flow ADF - GX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

JC97-04956A Non Flow ADF - sGX ADF/ Scanner sGX/GX on page

788

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the ADF open cover (GX/sGX).

Numerical parts list 805

 Figure 2-926 ADF open cover (GX/sGX)

Table 2-122 Flow ADF open cover

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF jam access cover
(GX/sGX)

2 JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) 1 Not applicable

2-5-1 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

806 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder jam access cover (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-123 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04869A Open cover - GX

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF jam access cover (GX/sGX) 807
 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-927 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-928 Open the document feeder

808 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-929 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-930 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 809

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-931 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-932 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder jam access cover.

810 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Disconnect connector at document feeder PCA and route cable out.

Figure 2-933 Disconnect one connector

2. Disconnect the ground wire.

Figure 2-934 Remove the jam access cover ground wire

Remove the document feeder jam access cover 811

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1), remove hinge (pivot) pin, and then remove door arm support (callout
2)

Figure 2-935 Remove the jam access cover door arm support

4. Remove the jam access cover.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

812 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

813
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cover, open (GX/sGX) JC97-04869A Flow ADF open cover on page

806

Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) JC97-04696B Flow ADF open cover on page
806

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF open cover on page

806

814 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF open cover on page

806

JC97-04696B Cover, open lower (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page
806

JC97-04869A Cover, open (GX/sGX) Flow ADF open cover on page

806

Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX).

Numerical parts list 815

 Figure 2-936 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Table 2-124 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-1 JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) 1 Removal and replacement:
Flow ADF pickup roller
assembly (GX/sGX)

2-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

2-5 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

816 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder pickup roller assembly
(GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly - GX/sGX

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF pickup roller assembly (GX/sGX) 817
 1. Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly
Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly.

1. Open the document feeder top cover.

2. Remove the pickup roller assembly:

a. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-937 Remove 4 screws.

b. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-938 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

818 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Remove the pickup rollers:

a. Remove four screws and then remove the cover.

Figure 2-939 Remove the pickup roller assembly cover

b. Remove two plastic clips and two bushings, disconnect two springs, and then remove the
shaft coupler.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Remove the flow ADF pickup roller assembly 819

 Figure 2-940 Remove the pickup roller components

Figure 2-941 Pickup roller components-disassembled

c. Slide the roller shaft and then remove the pickup roller assembly.

Figure 2-942 Remove the pickup roller assembly

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

820 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

ADF pick roller (GX/sGX)

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Pick Roller.

8. Select ADF Pick Roller.

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 821

 9. Select Reset.

822 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-126 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 816

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 816

Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) JC97-04650A Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/
sGX) on page 816

Alphabetical parts list 823

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-127 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 816

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/

sGX) on page 816

JC97-04650A Pick feed roller assembly (GX/sGX) Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/
sGX) on page 816

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX).

Figure 2-943 Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX)

824 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-126 Flow ADF stacker

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX)

1-6 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

6 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC82-00693 Flow ADF - stacker upper CM 1 Not applicable

A

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder input tray (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-127 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04658B Stacker - Gx/sGX

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF input tray (GX/sGX) 825

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-944 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

826 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-945 Open the document feeder

3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-946 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 827

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-947 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-948 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

828 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-949 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the dampening unit

Follow these steps to remove the dampening unit.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the damping unit.

Figure 2-950 Remove the document feeder dampening unit

4. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

Remove the dampening unit 829

 1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-951 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-952 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

830 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

5. Remove the input tray
Follow these steps to remove the input tray.

1. Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector, and then remove cable from guide.

Figure 2-953 Disconnect the document feeder PCA connector

2. Lift the tray from the front, and pivot the tray outward to remove.

Remove the input tray 831

 6.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

832 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Flow ADF - stacker upper CM JC82-00693A Flow ADF stacker on page 825

Photo-interrupter 0604-001381 Flow ADF stacker on page 825

Photo-interrupter 0604-001393 Flow ADF stacker on page 825

Stacker -GX/sGX JC97-04658B Flow ADF stacker on page 825

Alphabetical parts list 833

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001381 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 825

0604-001393 Photo-interrupter Flow ADF stacker on page 825

JC82-00693A Flow ADF - stacker upper CM Flow ADF stacker on page 825

JC97-04658B Stacker -GX/sGX Flow ADF stacker on page 825

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

View the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

Parts diagram and parts list for the flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

Figure 2-954 Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)

1-3

834 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Table 2-128 Flow ADF main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF separation roller
assembly

1-2 JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

1-3 JC61-08235A Spring CS 1 Not applicable

5 JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF scan in lower
assembly (GX/sGX)

7 0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF contact image
sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX)

8 JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF rear motors (GX/
sGX)

11 JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)

11 JC92-02964B PCA - sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models
only)

12 JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX 4 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF front motor (GX/
sGX)

13 JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

14 JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan 1 Not applicable

17 JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) 1 Removal and replacement:

Contact image sensor (CIS)
fan (GX/sGX)

19 JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF rear motors (GX/
sGX)

20 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF rear motors (GX/
sGX)

21 JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX 1 Removal and replacement:

Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)

23 JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

26 JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

27 JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX 1 Not applicable

29 JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan 1 Not applicable

36 6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 3 Not applicable

Not shown JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) 1 Not applicable

Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX) 835

 Table 2-128 Flow ADF main (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

Not shown JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF separation roller assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder separation roller assembly
(GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair: 20 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-129 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX\sGX

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

836 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly

Follow these steps to remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly.

1. Slightly lift the input tray, and then remove the separation roller cover.

Figure 2-955 Remove the separation roller cover

2. Remove one plastic clip.

NOTE: The shaft is engaged in the coupler.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 837

 Figure 2-956 Remove one plastic clip

3. Slide the roller assembly to the front, and then pull up to release the claws from the shaft.

Reinstallation tip: Position the spring and shaft before attaching the claws to the shaft.

Figure 2-957 Release the separation roller

4. Remove the separation roller.

NOTE: Make sure that the sponge washer (circled in a previous step) is retained during the
removal of the roller assembly–it might fall off.

838 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-958 Remove the separation roller

TIP: Re-assembly tip

1. Put the spring to the arrow direction at the bottom of the holder.

2. Insert the spring at the hole carefully.

Remove the flow ADF separation roller assembly 839

 3. Push the separation roller assembly to the bottom (Callout 1), then insert the assembly (2
joints) to the shaft (Callout 2)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

840 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

3. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Also use the following special installation instructions.

Flow ADF separation roller

After the replacement roller is installed, follow these instructions to reset the firmware counter:

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select the Support Tools menu.

2. Select the Service menu.

3. Make sure that Service Access Code is selected in the drop-down menu, and then enter the service
access code.

4. Select the Service Tools menu.

5. Select the Supply Status menu.

6. Select Field Replacement Unit.

7. Select ADF Separation (Reverse) Roller.

8. Select ADF Separation Roller.

9. Select Reset.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF contact image sensor (CIS) (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly 841

 ● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-130 Part information

Part number Part description

0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

842 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-959 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-960 Open the document feeder

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 843

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-961 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-962 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

844 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-963 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-964 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly.

Remove the document feeder pickup and feed assembly 845

 1. Remove 4 screws.

Figure 2-965 Remove 4 screws.

2. Remove 2 cables (callout 1) then remove the document feeder pickup roller assembly

Figure 2-966 Remove the pickup roller assembly

TIP: Re-assembly

● Make sure shape of both the holes on the assembly and the shafts at the frame.

846 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

4. Remove the paper path cover
Follow these steps to remove the paper path cover.

■ Remove five screws, and then remove the paper path cover.

Figure 2-967 Remove the document feeder paper path cover

5. Remove the CIS assembly

Follow these steps to remove the CIS assembly.

Remove the paper path cover 847

 1. Remove one screw, and then remove the CIS front alignment cover.

Reinstallation tip: Note the orientation of the CIS front alignment cover. The cover must be
reinstalled in the same orientation.

Figure 2-968 Remove the CIS front alignment cover screws

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then lift the alignment pin to release the CIS assembly
(callout 2).

Figure 2-969 Disconnect the CIS connector and lift the alignment pin

3. Remove the CIS assembly from the chassis.

6.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

848 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder rear motors (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF rear motors (GX/sGX) 849

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX

JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX

JC97-04680A Pickup motor

JC97-04680A Pre-REGI motor

JC97-04680A Exit motor

JC97-04680A Feed motor

JC31-00177A REGI motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Identify the document feeder motors

Follow these steps to identify the document feeder motors.

850 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Use the figure below to locate the motor.

Figure 2-970 Document feeder motors identification

1 2 3 4

5 6 7

Callout Description

1 Motor 1

2 Motor 2

3 Pickup motor

4 Pre-REGI motor

5 Exit motor

6 Feed motor

7 REGI motor

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 851

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-971 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-972 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

852 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-973 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove motors 1 and 2

Follow these steps to remove motors 1 and 2.

■ Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip: Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

Figure 2-974 Remove the motor

4. Remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors

Follow these steps to remove the pickup and pre-REGI motors.

1. Loosen the cable retainer, and then disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Remove motors 1 and 2 853

 Figure 2-975 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pickup
motor off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-976 Pickup motor

854 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove one spring (callout 1), and then loosen (but do not remove) three screws. Slide the pre-REGI
motor off the screws to remove it.

NOTE:

● Reinstall the motor on the motor mounting screws, and then lift the gear belt up to engage the
motor pulley.

● Install the tension spring.

● Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-977 Pre-REGI motor

5. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

Remove the exit motor 855

 1. Remove two screws and one connector, and then remove the CIS fan.

Figure 2-978 Remove the main fan

2. Remove the spring (callout 1), disconnect one connector (callout 2), loosen three screws, and then
remove the exit motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-979 Remove the motor

856 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

6. Remove the feed motor
Follow these steps to remove the feed motor.

1. Disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 2-980 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws, and then remove motor.

Figure 2-981 Remove the motor

7. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.

Remove the feed motor 857

 3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to
remove it.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

8.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

858 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX)
Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA fan (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00146A Document feeder PCA fan assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF PCA fan (GX/sGX) 859

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-982 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-983 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

860 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-984 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder PCA fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder PCA fan.

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and then release two tabs (callout 2) to remove the fan.

Reinstallation tip: Install the fan with the correct orientation when reinstalling.

Figure 2-985 Remove the document feeder PCA fan connector

3. Remove the REGI motor

Follow these steps to remove the REGI motor.

1. Remove the rear cover.

2. Remove the Pre-REGI motor.

3. Disconnect one connector from the motor.

TIP: Remove the connector harness from the cable retainer, and then disconnect the connector.

Remove the document feeder PCA fan 861

 4. Remove one spring, loosen (do not remove) 3 screws, and then slide the motor off the screws to
remove it.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Install the tension spring.

c. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

862 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder front motor (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Motor, step

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF front motor (GX/sGX) 863

 1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover
Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-986 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-987 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

864 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-988 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the front motor

Follow these steps to remove the front motor.

■ Remove two screws and disconnect one connector, and then remove the motor.

Reinstallation tip:

a. Reinstall the motor and lift the gear belt up to engage the motor pulley.

b. Loosely install the motor mount screws.

c. Install the tension spring.

d. Tighten the motor mount screws just enough so that the tension spring (not the motor mount
screws) is providing the tension to the belt.

Figure 2-989 Remove the document feeder front motor

Remove the front motor 865

 3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Contact image sensor (CIS) fan (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder CIS fan (GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

866 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-134 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00168A CIS fan

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 867

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-990 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-991 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

868 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-992 Release the top back cover.

2. Remove the document feeder CIS fan

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder CIS fan.

■ Remove one connector, and then remove two mounting screws to remove the fan.

Figure 2-993 Remove the document feeder CIS fan

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the document feeder CIS fan 869

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Flow ADF scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly (GX/sGX).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder scan in lower assembly
(GX/sGX).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

870 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-135 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover.

Remove the document feeder (ADF) front cover 871

 1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-994 Remove the document feeder front cover top screws

2. Open the document feeder. Detach a sticker and then remove a screw (Callout 1) from the bottom
of the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-995 Open the document feeder

872 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove the document feeder front cover.

Figure 2-996 Remove the document feeder front cover

2. Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover.

1. Remove two screws from the top of document feeder back cover.

Figure 2-997 Remove the document feeder back cover top screws

Remove the document feeder (ADF) back cover 873

 2. Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

Figure 2-998 Remove 3 caps and 3 screws.

3. Release the top back cover.

Figure 2-999 Release the top back cover.

3. Remove the scan in lower assembly

Follow these steps to remove the scan in lower assembly.

874 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remove two screws (ADF front).

Figure 2-1000 Remove two screws

2. Remove five screws (ADF back; four sheet-metal and one ground).

Figure 2-1001 Remove five screws

3. Remove one screw (ADF back).

Figure 2-1002 Remove one screw

4. At the front corner, carefully pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF frame.

IMPORTANT: Locate the dimples in the scan in lower assembly. Separate the dimples from the
ADF frame.

Remove the scan in lower assembly 875

 NOTE: When installing a replacement scan in lower assembly, do not crease or wrinkle the
attached Mylar.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 2-1003 Pry the scan in lower assembly away from the ADF

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

876 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models only)

Learn how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn models).

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the document feeder PCA-scanner (sGX dn
models).

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-136 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02964A PCA-scanner (sGX dn models)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: PCA-Scanner sGX (dn models only) 877

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1004 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

878 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-1005 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1006 Remove document feeder connector cover

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 879

 2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1007 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-1008 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

880 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1009 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1010 Remove screws

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 881

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1011 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the scan joint board

Follow these steps to remove the scan joint board.

1. Remove three screw-caps and three screws. Release the scan-left cover.

Figure 2-1012 Release scan-left cover

882 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove three screw-caps and three screws, and then remove the scan-right cover.

Figure 2-1013 Remove scan-right cover

3. At the top of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws.

Figure 2-1014 Remove three screws

Remove the scan joint board 883

 4. At the back of the scanner, remove three screw caps and three screws, and then remove the
scan-rear cover.

Figure 2-1015 Remove three screws and the scanner rear cover

5. Disconnect all harnesses. Remove four screws, and then release the scanner PCA.

NOTE: There are two empty connectors.

Figure 2-1016 Remove screws and release scanner PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

884 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 885

 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-4 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Contact image sensor - GX/sGX 0609-001558 Flow ADF main on page 835

Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX JC97-04652A Flow ADF main on page 835

Drive - GX/sGX JC97-04679A Flow ADF main on page 835

Drive release pickup - GX/sGX JC97-04681A Flow ADF main on page 835

Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) JC31-00168A Flow ADF main on page 835

Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX JC31-00146A Flow ADF main on page 835

Hinge L - GX/sGX JC97-04640A Flow ADF main on page 835

Hinge R - GX/sGX JC97-04641A Flow ADF main on page 835

Input tray - GX/sGX JC97-04668B Flow ADF main on page 835

Motor, ADF fan JC61-07694A Flow ADF main on page 835

Motor, drive release scan JC97-04682A Flow ADF main on page 835

Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX JC97-04680A Flow ADF main on page 835

PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) JC92-02967A Flow ADF main on page 835

PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) JC92-02966A Flow ADF main on page 835

PCA - AF HIC (GX only) JC92-02964A Flow ADF main on page 835

PCA - sGX JC92-02964B Flow ADF main on page 835

Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04656B Flow ADF main on page 835

Scan out - GX/sGX JC97-04830A Flow ADF main on page 835

Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX JC97-04915A Flow ADF main on page 835

Spring CS JC61-08235A Flow ADF main on page 835

Step motor, ip JC31-00177A Flow ADF main on page 835

Timing belt gear - GX/sGX 6602-001730 Flow ADF main on page 835

White roller - GX/sGX JC97-04687A Flow ADF main on page 835

886 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-5 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0609-001558 Contact image sensor - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

6602-001730 Timing belt gear - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC31-00146A Fan type 4 ADF GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC31-00168A Fan - GX/sGX (CIS) Flow ADF main on page 835

JC31-00177A Step motor, ip Flow ADF main on page 835

JC61-07694A Motor, ADF fan Flow ADF main on page 835

JC61-08235A Spring CS Flow ADF main on page 835

JC92-02964A PCA - AF HIC (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 835

JC92-02964B PCA - sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC92-02966A PCA - ADF transmitter (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 835

JC92-02967A PCA - ADF receiver (GX only) Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04640A Hinge L - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04641A Hinge R - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04652A Cover, separation roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04656B Scan in lower assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04668B Input tray - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04679A Drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04680A Motor, feed drive - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04681A Drive release pickup - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04682A Motor, drive release scan Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04687A White roller - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04830A Scan out - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

JC97-04915A Separation roller assembly - GX/sGX Flow ADF main on page 835

Image scanner
View the image scanner exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner
Parts diagram and parts list for the image scanner.

Numerical parts list 887

 Figure 2-1017 Image scanner

Table 2-137 Image scanner

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04522B Scanner glass 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner glass

2 JC92-02781A PCA scanner 1 Not applicable

3 JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass 1 Not applicable

4 JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor 1 Not applicable

888 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-137 Image scanner (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

5 JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp 1 Removal and replacement:

LED lamp module

7 JC31-00158A Motor, step 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02128A Harness - Scanjoint to main 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02129A Harness - Home open sensor 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Scanner glass

Learn how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner glass.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-138 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04522B Scanner glass

Removal and replacement: Scanner glass 889

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-1018 Remove scanner glass

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

890 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: LED lamp module

Learn how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the LED lamp module.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: LED lamp module 891

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-139 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

892 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1019 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-1020 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

Remove the upper rear cover 893

 1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1021 Remove document feeder connector cover

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1022 Remove the cable choke

894 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-1023 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

Figure 2-1024 Alignment marks

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 895

 5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1025 Remove screws

6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1026 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

896 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-1027 Remove the document feeder connector cover

2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 2-1028 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 897

 4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-1029 Release the document feeder hinge screws

5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-1030 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

898 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-1031 Remove scanner glass

6. Remove the LED lamp module

Follow these steps to remove the LED lamp module.

1. CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed. then
remove the LED lamp module.

Remove the transparent tape.

Figure 2-1032 Remove transparent tape

Remove the LED lamp module 899

 2. Disconnect the flat cable.

Figure 2-1033 Disconnect cable

3. Remove four screws. Remove the LED lamp module.

Figure 2-1034 Remove screws and release LED lamp module

7.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

900 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

901
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Flat Cable-WLED JC39-02120A Image scanner on page 888

Harness - Home open sensor JC39-02129A Image scanner on page 888

Harness - Scanjoint to main JC39-02128A Image scanner on page 888

Motor, step JC31-00158A Image scanner on page 888

PCA scanner JC92-02781A Image scanner on page 888

Scanner - front lamp JC97-04521A Image scanner on page 888

Scanner glass JC97-04522B Image scanner on page 888

Scanner open sensor JC97-04516A Image scanner on page 888

Tempered scan glass JC01-00101A Image scanner on page 888

902 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC01-00101A Tempered scan glass Image scanner on page 888

JC31-00158A Motor, step Image scanner on page 888

JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED Image scanner on page 888

JC39-02128A Harness - Scanjoint to main Image scanner on page 888

JC39-02129A Harness - Home open sensor Image scanner on page 888

JC92-02781A PCA scanner Image scanner on page 888

JC97-04516A Scanner open sensor Image scanner on page 888

JC97-04521A Scanner - front lamp Image scanner on page 888

JC97-04522B Scanner glass Image scanner on page 888

Image scanner, lower

View the image scanner, lower exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

Image scanner, lower

Parts diagram and parts list for the lower image scanner.

Numerical parts list 903

 Figure 2-1035 Image scanner, lower

Table 2-140 Image scanner, lower

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD 1 Not applicable

2 JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness 1 Not applicable

(JC39-02131 WLED I/F Harness, JC92-02728A

WLED I/F PBA included)

3 JC97-04507A Scanner - APS 1 Removal and replacement:

APS sensor

3-1 604-001453 Photo interrupter 2 Not applicable

4 JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens 1 Removal and replacement:

Scanner assembly - CDD and
lens

Not shown JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED 1 Not applicable

904 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly - CDD and lens
Learn how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the scanner CDD and lens.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04523B Scanner assembly -CDD and lens

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Scanner assembly - CDD and lens 905

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: APS sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the APS sensor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the APS sensor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-142 Part information

Part number Part description

JC97-04507A APS sensor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

906 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the formatter cover

Follow these steps to remove the formatter cover.

■ Unscrew two captive thumbscrews on the formatter cover. Slide the formatter cover to the left, and
then to the right to remove it.

Figure 2-1036 Remove the formatter cover

2. Remove the upper rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the upper rear cover.

Remove the formatter cover 907

 ■ Remove three screw-caps and five screws. Lift the upper rear cover away from the printer to remove
it.

Figure 2-1037 Remove the upper rear cover

3. Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (GX).

1. Open the document feeder cover, and then remove the document feeder connector cover.

Figure 2-1038 Remove document feeder connector cover

908 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the plastic cable choke from the wire harness, and then disconnect the document feeder
harness from the main board. Disconnect the insulated ground wire from the chassis.

Figure 2-1039 Remove the cable choke

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the scanner PCA. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

Figure 2-1040 Disconnect document feeder harness

4. Release two hinge stops on the back of the document feeder to allow the document feeder to open
to a full 90°.

IMPORTANT: Note the alignment marks on the hinge stops. Any new document feeder must be
reinstalled with the same alignment.

Remove the document feeder whole unit (GX) 909

 Figure 2-1041 Alignment marks

5. Remove two screws on each hinge stop.

Figure 2-1042 Remove screws

910 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 6. Pull back and then lift up to release the document feeder unit.

Figure 2-1043 Release the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

4. Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX)

Follow these steps to remove the document feeder whole unit (LX).

1. Remover one screw cap and screw (callout 1), and then remove the document feeder connector
cover (callout 2).

Figure 2-1044 Remove the document feeder connector cover

Remove the document feeder whole unit (LX) 911

 2. Remove one screw to release the ground wire (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors
(callout 2).

Figure 2-1045 Remove the document feeder harness and ground wire

3. Disconnect the document feeder harness from the PCA - ADF HIC. Remove one connector and one
grounding wire.

4. Release one screw on each hinge stop on the back of the document feeder.

Figure 2-1046 Release the document feeder hinge screws

912 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 5. Remove two screws. Slide the assembly back, and then lift the document feeder to remove.

Figure 2-1047 Lift and remove the document feeder

NOTE: Complete a shading test and a skew alignment after replacing the document feeder unit.

5. Remove the scanner glass

Follow these steps to remove the scanner glass.

■ CAUTION: Make sure not to be contaminated in scanner while scanner glass is removed.

Open the document-feeder cover, remove two screws, and then slide the scanner glass to the right
to remove it.

Figure 2-1048 Remove scanner glass

6. Remove the APS sensor

Follow these steps to remove the APS sensor.

Remove the scanner glass 913

 1. Remove the joint board cover.

Figure 2-1049 Remove joint board cover

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 2-1050 Remove screw

3. Disconnect the harness.

Figure 2-1051 Disconnect harness

914 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 4. Remove two screws. Release the APS sensor.

Figure 2-1052 Remove screws and release APS sensor

7.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

915
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 JC81-09891A Image scanner, lower on page
904

Flat Cable-WLED JC39-02120A Image scanner, lower on page

904

Photo interrupter 604-001453 Image scanner, lower on page

904

Scanner - APS JC97-04507A Image scanner, lower on page

904

Scanner - FFC CCD JC97-04509A Image scanner, lower on page

904

Scanner - guide harness JC97-04512A Image scanner, lower on page

904

Scanner assembly - CCD and lens JC97-04523B Image scanner, lower on page
904

916 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

604-001453 Photo interrupter Image scanner, lower on page

904

JC39-02120A Flat Cable-WLED Image scanner, lower on page

904

JC81-09891A Auto adjustment chart A3 Ver. 1.0 Image scanner, lower on page
904

JC97-04507A Scanner - APS Image scanner, lower on page

904

JC97-04509A Scanner - FFC CCD Image scanner, lower on page

904

JC97-04512A Scanner - guide harness Image scanner, lower on page

904

JC97-04523B Scanner assembly - CCD and lens Image scanner, lower on page
904

Numerical parts list 917

 Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
Learn about the dual cassette feeder (DCF) exploded diagrams, parts lists, and repair procedures.

DCF main
View the DCF main exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF main
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF main.

Figure 2-1053 DCF main

918 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-143 DCF main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC60-00078 Machinery, fastener screw 2 Not applicable

A

2 JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
right door

3 6009-001665 Hex screw 19 Not applicable

4 JC93-01135A Feed drive opt 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
motor

5 JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly 2 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup motor

6 JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth 1 Not applicable

7 JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth 1 Not applicable

8 JC90-01680A DCF second pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup units

9 JC90-01679A DCF first pickup 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
pickup units

10 6602-003185 Timing belt 1 Not applicable

14 JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep 2 Not applicable

Not shown 0604-001490 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC66-00977A Clutch one way 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable

Not shown JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly 2 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF right door.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF right door.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 919
 Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-144 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01649A DCF right door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

920 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-1054 Remove four screws

3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-1055 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

Remove the right door 921

 1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-1056 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

Figure 2-1057 Release the right hinge

922 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-1058 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Figure 2-1059 Remove the right door

3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door 923

 1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-1060 Remove the lower right cover

2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the
tab (callout 1).

Figure 2-1061 Slide the hinge pin

924 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the
right to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 2-1062 Remove the DCF right door

4.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

925
 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF cassette motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-145 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01135A SF drive feed assy (Opt)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

926 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1063 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) motor.

1. Disconnect two connectors, and then open one retainer.

Figure 2-1064 Disconnect two connectors and open one retainer

Remove the DCF rear cover 927

 2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 2-1065 Remove the feed drive unit

3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 2-1066 Remove the feed motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

928 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor 929
 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1067 Remove the DCF rear cover

930 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor
Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the DCF pickup assembly.

Figure 2-1068 Remove the DCF pickup assembly

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup motor 931

 b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to
http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF pickup units.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-147 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01679A First pickup assembly

JC90-01680A Second pickup assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

932 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the right rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the right rear cover.

1. Open the right door.

2. Remove four screw-caps and four screws.

Figure 2-1069 Remove four screws

Remove the right rear cover 933

 3. Lift the handle and remove the right rear cover.

Figure 2-1070 Remove the right rear cover

2. Remove the right door

Follow these steps to remove the right door.

1. Disconnect the right door connector by moving it side-to-side until it releases.

Figure 2-1071 Disconnect one connector

2. Slightly raise the right door and carefully release the right hinge from the hinge pin.

CAUTION: The hinge is spring-loaded and might snap back forcefully. Raise the door to take the
tension off of the spring, and then hold the hinge firmly while releasing it from the hinge pin.

934 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Figure 2-1072 Release the right hinge

3. Slightly raise the right door, and then release the left dampener.

Figure 2-1073 Release the left dampener

4. Open the lower paper feeder door. Lower the right door to 90°, and then rotate the rear side of the
door away from the printer. Slide the door to the rear of the printer to remove it.

CAUTION: Do not lower the door more than 90°. This might result in damage to the door.

Remove the right door 935

 Figure 2-1074 Remove the right door

3. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) right door.

1. Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the lower right cover.

Figure 2-1075 Remove the lower right cover

936 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 2. Open the DCF right door and slide the hinge pin to the left. Make sure that the pin slides under the
tab (callout 1).

Figure 2-1076 Slide the hinge pin

3. Rotate the right edge of the door away from the feeder (callout 1), and then slide the door to the
right to remove it (callout 2).

Figure 2-1077 Remove the DCF right door

4. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units.

Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup units 937

 1. Remove two screws, and then remove the cable cover.

Figure 2-1078 Remove two screws and the cable cover

2. Remove five screws, and then remove two brackets.

Figure 2-1079 Remove five screws and two brackets

938 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the wire harness from the cable guide
(callout 2). Remove eight screws (callout 3).

Figure 2-1080 Disconnect two connectors and remove eight screws

4. Rotate both pickup units away from the feeder on the left (callout 1). Release the belt (callout 2) that
connects the two units. Slide the pickup units to the left (callout 3) to remove them.

Figure 2-1081 Remove the pickup units

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

939
 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

940 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Cassette, fifth JC90-01652A DCF main on page 919

Cassette, fourth JC90-01654A DCF main on page 919

Clutch one way JC66-00977A DCF main on page 919

Coupler, torque limiter JC67-00455A DCF main on page 919

DCF first pickup JC90-01679A DCF main on page 919

DCF second pickup JC90-01680A DCF main on page 919

DCF, sub-auto closing JC90-01677A DCF main on page 919

DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) JC90-01649A DCF main on page 919

Drive pickup assembly JC93-01063C DCF main on page 919

Feed drive opt JC93-01135A DCF main on page 919

Hex screw 6009-001665 DCF main on page 919

Machinery, fastener screw JC60-00078A DCF main on page 919

Photo-interrupter 0604-001490 DCF main on page 919

Rollers - pick, feed, sep JC93-01092A DCF main on page 919

SF left cassette rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF main on page 919

SF right cassette rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF main on page 919

Timing belt 6602-003185 DCF main on page 919

Alphabetical parts list 941

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

0604-001490 Photo-interrupter DCF main on page 919

6009-001665 Hex screw DCF main on page 919

6602-003185 Timing belt DCF main on page 919

JC60-00078A Machinery, fastener screw DCF main on page 919

JC66-00977A Clutch one way DCF main on page 919

JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter DCF main on page 919

JC90-01649A DCF, sub-takeaway (right door) DCF main on page 919

JC90-01652A Cassette, fifth DCF main on page 919

JC90-01654A Cassette, fourth DCF main on page 919

JC90-01677A DCF, sub-auto closing DCF main on page 919

JC90-01679A DCF first pickup DCF main on page 919

JC90-01680A DCF second pickup DCF main on page 919

JC93-01045A SF right cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 919

JC93-01063C Drive pickup assembly DCF main on page 919

JC93-01092A Rollers - pick, feed, sep DCF main on page 919

JC93-01135A Feed drive opt DCF main on page 919

JC93-01435A SF left cassette rail assembly DCF main on page 919

DCF frame
View the DCF frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF frame.

942 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Figure 2-1082 DCF frame

32 31

31
32

Table 2-148 DCF frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable

2 JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly 2 Not applicable

6 JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock 1 Not applicable

14 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable

DCF frame 943

 Table 2-148 DCF frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

15 JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust 4 Not applicable

18 V1F98-67001 DCF PCA 1 Removal and replacement:

Dual cassette feeder (DCF)
PCA

23 JC39-02276A DCF, main harness 1 Not applicable

25 JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness 1 Not applicable

30 JC39-02268 DCF, t1mot harness 1 Not applicable

A

31 JC61-06655A Rear holder-hinge 1 Not applicable

32 JC61-06713A Front holder-hinge 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

944 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-149 Part information

Part number Part description

V1F98-67001 PCA-MX7 DCF

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the DCF rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the DCF rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1083 Remove the DCF rear cover

2. Remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA

Follow these steps to remove the dual cassette feeder (DCF) PCA.

Remove the DCF rear cover 945

 ■ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the DCF PCA.

Figure 2-1084 Remove the DCF PCA

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

946 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Caster 6109-001138 DCF frame on page 943

DCF PCA V1F98-67001 DCF frame on page 943

DCF guide adjust JC61-04871A DCF frame on page 943

DCF sub-takeaway interlock JC90-01385A DCF frame on page 943

DCF, main harness JC39-02276A DCF frame on page 943

DCF, sub harness JC39-02278A DCF frame on page 943

DCF, t1mot harness JC39-02268A DCF frame on page 943

Frame, left cst rail assembly JC93-01435A DCF frame on page 943

Frame, right cst rail assembly JC93-01045A DCF frame on page 943

Alphabetical parts list 947

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster DCF frame on page 943

JC39-02268A DCF, t1mot harness DCF frame on page 943

JC39-02276A DCF, main harness DCF frame on page 943

JC39-02278A DCF, sub harness DCF frame on page 943

JC61-04871A DCF guide adjust DCF frame on page 943

JC90-01385A DCF sub-takeaway interlock DCF frame on page 943

JC93-01045A Frame, right cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 943

JC93-01435A Frame, left cst rail assembly DCF frame on page 943

V1F98-67001 DCF PCA DCF frame on page 943

DCF rear frame

View the DCF rear frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

DCF rear frame

Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF rear frame.

Figure 2-1085 DCF rear frame

948 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-150 DCF rear frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC61-03002A Ground plate 2 Not applicable

6 JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder 2 Not applicable

6-2 JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor 2 Removal and replacement:

Paper size sensor

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor

Learn how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.

To view a short video of this procedure, click the link below.

View a video of how to remove and replace the DCF paper size sensor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-151 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02622A Paper size sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Paper size sensor 949

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the paper size sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper size sensor.

■ Do the following:

● Remove all trays to access the inside of the printer.

● Disconnect the connector. Remove two screws, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 2-1086 Remove screws

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

950 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

951
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Ground plate JC61-03002A DCF rear frame on page 949

Main frame rear auto-size holder JC93-00018A DCF rear frame on page 949

PCA, paper size sensor JC92-02622A DCF rear frame on page 949

952 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

JC61-03002A Ground plate DCF rear frame on page 949

JC92-02622A PCA, paper size sensor DCF rear frame on page 949

JC93-00018A Main frame rear auto-size holder DCF rear frame on page 949

Numerical parts list 953

 Opt feed drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the opt feed drive.

Figure 2-1087 Opt feed drive

Table 2-152 Opt feed drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01135A Opt feed drive 1 Not applicable

1 6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

2 JC31-00177A Step motor, ip 1 Not applicable

8 6009-001665 Hex screw 1 Not applicable

954 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

DCF second pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the DCF second pickup.

Figure 2-1088 DCF second pickup

Table 2-153 DCF second pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

4 6044-000125 E-ring 6 Not applicable

8 JC66-00977A Clutch one way 4 Not applicable

11 JC63-03776A Sheet sensor 2 Not applicable

13 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 3 Not applicable

14 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

16 6003-000269 Screw, tap type 4 Not applicable

17 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

20 JC61-00884A Bush-6, dl 2 Not applicable

DCF second pickup 955

 2000-sheet HCI (department)
View the 2000-sheet HCI (department) exploded diagrams and parts lists.

2K HCI main
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main.

Figure 2-1089 2K HCI main

Table 2-154 2K HCI main

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 JC93-01114A Feed drive, HCI 1 Not applicable

3 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable

4 JC93-01118A Lift drive, shift assembly 1 Not applicable

5 JC90-01646A HCI right door (takeaway) 1 Not applicable

6 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable

7 JC90-01736A Assy - main pickup 1 Not applicable

8 JC93-01119A Drive takeaway roller 1 Not applicable

956 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-154 2K HCI main (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

10 JC90-01382A Sub-auto closer 1 Not applicable

2K HCI drive
View the 2K HCI drive exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

2K HCI drive
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI drive.

Figure 2-1090 2K HCI drive

Table 2-155 2K HCI drive

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1-1 JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray feed motor

1-2 6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

2 JC93-01115A Pickup drive 1 Not applicable

2K HCI drive 957

 Table 2-155 2K HCI drive (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2-1 JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

3-1 JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 1 Not applicable

3-2 JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Not shown JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 1 Removal and replacement:

Bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray feed motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-156 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00177A Bottom HCI tray feed motor

958 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1091 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray feed motor.

Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 959

 1. Disconnect two motor connectors, and open the harness clamp.

Figure 2-1092 Disconnect two connectors and open the clamp

2. Remove three screws, and then remove the feed drive unit.

Figure 2-1093 Remove the feed drive unit

960 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the feed motor.

Figure 2-1094 Remove the feed motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

961
 a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-157 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

962 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1095 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor.

Figure 2-1096 Remove the bottom HCI tray pickup motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 963

 a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

964 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-158 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A Bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1097 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 965

 2. Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor
Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

■ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and the remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor.

Figure 2-1098 Remove the bottom HCI tray lift-up motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

966 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray shaft motor
Learn how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-159 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00125A Bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Removal and replacement: Bottom HCI tray shaft motor 967

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1099 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

■ Disconnect the connector. Remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray shaft motor.

Figure 2-1100 Remove the shaft motor

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

968 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

969
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive motor, step JC93-01083A 2K HCI drive on page 957

HCI motor gear JC31-00109A 2K HCI drive on page 957

HCI shaft motor JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 957

Motor shift gear JC31-00125A 2K HCI drive on page 957

Motor step, 1p JC31-00177A 2K HCI drive on page 957

Pickup drive JC93-01115A 2K HCI drive on page 957

Timing belt, gear 6602-003670 2K HCI drive on page 957

970 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6602-003670 Timing belt, gear 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC31-00109A HCI motor gear 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC31-00125A HCI shaft motor 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC31-00125A Motor shift gear 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC31-00177A Motor step, 1p 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC93-01083A Drive motor, step 2K HCI drive on page 957

JC93-01115A Pickup drive 2K HCI drive on page 957

Numerical parts list 971

 2K HCI cassette
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI cassette.

Figure 2-1101 2K HCI cassette

Table 2-160 2K HCI cassette

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC90-01642A Cassette 1 Not applicable

2 JC61-01742A Connector holder, scf 1 Not applicable

3 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 4 Not applicable

14 JC61-00076A Spring, etc torsion doc (cc2-f) 1 Not applicable

29 JC61-07471A Cassette guide rail 1 Not applicable

972 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2K HCI frame
View the 2K HCI frame exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

2K HCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI frame.

Figure 2-1102 2K HCI frame

17

18

17

18

Table 2-161 2K HCI frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2 Not applicable

6 JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 4 Not applicable

7 6109-001138 Caster 4 Not applicable

13 Y1G21-67001 PCA - Department HCI 1 Removal and replacement: 2K

HCI tray PCA

14 JC39-02285 Cable harness, sub if 1 Not applicable

A

2K HCI frame 973

 Table 2-161 2K HCI frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

15 JC39-02284 Cable harness, heater 1 Not applicable

A

16 JC39-02283 Harness, main if 1 Not applicable

A

17 JC61-06655A Rear Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable

18 JC61-06713A Front Holder Hinge 1 Not applicable

19 JC39-02286 Harness, inner tray 1 Not applicable

A

20 JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: 2K HCI tray PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.

View a video of how to remove and replace the 2K HCI tray PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-162 Part information

Part number Part description

Y1G21-67001 PCA - department HCI

974 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the 2K HCI rear cover.

■ Remove four screw caps and four screws, and then remove the rear cover.

Figure 2-1103 Remove the 2K HCI rear cover

2. Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

Follow these steps to remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.

Remove the 2K HCI rear cover 975

 ■ Disconnect eight connectors, remove three screws, and then remove the bottom HCI tray PCA.

Figure 2-1104 Remove the bottom HCI tray PCA

3.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

976 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Adjust guide, DCF JC61-04871A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Cable harness, heater JC39-02284A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Cable harness, motor JC39-02279A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Cable harness, sub if JC39-02285A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Caster 6109-001138 2K HCI frame on page 973

Harness, inner tray JC39-02286A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Harness, main if JC39-02283A 2K HCI frame on page 973

Idle roller, cst JC61-03331A 2K HCI frame on page 973

PCA - Department HCI Y1G21-67001 2K HCI frame on page 973

Alphabetical parts list 977

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6109-001138 Caster 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC39-02279A Cable harness, motor 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC39-02283A Harness, main if 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC39-02284A Cable harness, heater 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC39-02285A Cable harness, sub if 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC39-02286A Harness, inner tray 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC61-03331A Idle roller, cst 2K HCI frame on page 973

JC61-04871A Adjust guide, DCF 2K HCI frame on page 973

Y1G21-67001 PCA - Department HCI 2K HCI frame on page 973

978 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

2K HCI main pickup
Parts diagram and parts list for the 2K HCI main pickup.

Figure 2-1105 2K HCI main pickup

Table 2-163 2K HCI main pickup

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

0 JC93-01139A HCI main 1 Not applicable

4 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

5 JC93-01092A Roller, pick, feed, and separation 3 Not applicable

6 0604-001381 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

11 JC66-04607 Roller - feed takeaway 1 Not applicable

A

16 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 1 Not applicable

25 JC66-04670A Roller - right door feed takeaway 1 Not applicable

28 JC66-04281A Pulley belt 1 Not applicable

2K HCI main pickup 979

 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and
E87640/50/60 only)
View the 3000-sheet sHCI (department; E82540/50/60 and E87640/50/60 only) exploded diagrams and
parts lists.

3K sHCI main 1
View the 3K sHCI main 1 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

3K sHCI main 1
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 1.

Figure 2-1106 3K sHCI main 1

17

980 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-164 3K HCI main 1

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

1 JC63-04797B Left cover 1 Not applicable

2 JC67-00711D Screw cap 3 Not applicable

3 JC63-04798B Pickup cover 1 Not applicable

4 JC90-01660A Assembly, rear 1 Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover
cover LCT

5 JC66–04279A Link door 2 Not applicable

6 JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 1 Not applicable

7 JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 1 Not applicable

15 JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 1 Not applicable

16 JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 1 Not applicable

17 JC93-01143A Latch bracket 2 Not applicable

frame*

Not shown V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA

Not shown 6001-000130 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6001-002284 Screw, M4 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6009-001664 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

Not shown 6009-001665 Screw, M3 1 Not applicable

* This part is assembled with DCF or HCI

Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI rear cover.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair: 5 minutes

Service level: Basic

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI rear cover 981

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01660A Assy - cover, rear LCT

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

982 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1107 Remove the sHCI rear cover

2.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

983
 Removal and replacement: Side sHCI PCA
Learn how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side sHCI PCA.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair: 15 minutes

Service level: Intermediate

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-166 Part information

Part number Part description

V1G20-67001 Side HCI PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

984 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1108 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

■ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1109 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

Remove the side HCI right cover 985

 ■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1110 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI PCA

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI PCA.

■ Disconnect all connectors. Remove three screws, and replace the sHCI PCA.

Figure 2-1111 sHCI PCA

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

986 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

987
 Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Assembly, rear cover LCT JC90-01660A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Left cover JC63-04797B 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Link door JC66–04279A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Link door, front 2 JC66-04278A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Link door, rear 2 JC66-04277A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Link holder, hinge f JC61-06567A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Link holder, hinge r JC61-06568A 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

PCA - 3K sHCI V1G20-67001 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Pickup cover JC63-04798B 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw cap JC67-00711D 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw, M3 6001-000130 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw, M3 6009-001664 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw, M3 6009-001665 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw, M4 6001-002284 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

Screw, tap type M4 6003-001256 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

988 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6001-000130 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

6001-002284 Screw, M4 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

6003-001256 Screw, tap type M4 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

6009-001664 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

6009-001665 Screw, M3 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC61-06567A Link holder, hinge f 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC61-06568A Link holder, hinge r 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC63-04797B Left cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC63-04798B Pickup cover 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC66-04277A Link door, rear 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC66-04278A Link door, front 2 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC66–04279A Link door 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC67-00711D Screw cap 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

JC90-01660A Assembly, rear cover LCT 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 3K HCI main 1 on page 981

3K sHCI main 3
View the 3K sHCI main 3 exploded view, parts list, and repair procedures.

3K sHCI main 3
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 3.

Numerical parts list 989

 Figure 2-1112 3K sHCI main 3

Table 2-167 3K sHCI main 3

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

8-1 6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 1 Not applicable

8-3 JC66-04295 Feed pulley gear 1 Not applicable

A

8-4 JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI pickup motor

8-5 JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI feed motor

8-6 JC66-04294 Drive gear 1 Not applicable

A

9-1 JC31-00109A Gear motor 1 Removal and replacement:

Side HCI lift-up motor

10 JC39-02287A Motor harness 1 Not applicable

Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.

990 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI pickup motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 2-168 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01083A Side HCI pickup motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI pickup motor 991

 1. Remove the side HCI right cover
Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1113 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

■ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1114 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

992 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1115 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI pickup motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI pickup motor.

■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove two screws, and then replace the pickup motor.

Figure 2-1116 Pickup motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

Remove the side HCI pickup motor 993

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI feed motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI feed motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

994 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-169 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Side HCI feed motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1117 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

Remove the side HCI right cover 995

 ■ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1118 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1119 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI feed motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI feed motor.

996 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 1. Disconnect two connectors. Open the cable clamp. Remove three screws, and then remove the
Drive-PH

Figure 2-1120 Drive PH

2. Remove two screws, and then replace the feed motor.

Figure 2-1121 Feed motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

997
 If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

Removal and replacement: Side HCI lift-up motor

Learn how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.

View a video of how to remove and replace the side HCI lift-up motor.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

998 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 Table 2-170 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00109A Side HCI lift-up motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn on the power switch next to the power cable, and then press the power button on the front of
the printer.

○ Verify that the service performed was successful.

○ Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

○ Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the side HCI right cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI right cover.

■ Remove seven screw caps and seven screws, and then remove the sHCI right cover.

Figure 2-1122 Right sHCI cover

2. Remove the side HCI cable cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI cable cover.

Remove the side HCI right cover 999

 ■ Remove the side HCI cable cover.

Figure 2-1123 Remove the sHCI cable cover

3. Remove the side HCI rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI rear cover.

■ Remove three screws from the top, and then remove the sHCI rear cover.

Figure 2-1124 Remove the sHCI rear cover

4. Remove the side HCI lift-up motor

Follow these steps to remove the side HCI lift-up motor.

1000 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

 ■ Disconnect the motor connector. Remove three screws, and then replace the sHCI lift-up motor.

Figure 2-1125 sHCI lift-up motor

5.

1. Unpack the replacement assembly.

a. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

b. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform
service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches
when they are out of the printer.

If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on the
roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching
rollers or pads.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are
removed from the replacement part prior to installation.

1001
 c. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all
special installation instructions.

2. Remove the accessory from its package.

a. Save all packaging for recycling.

b. For complete information about HP recycling programs, go to

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html.

1002 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Alphabetical parts list
Table 2-121 Alphabetical parts list

Description Part number Table and page

Drive gear JC66-04294A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Drive motor, stepJC93 JC93-01083A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Feed pulley gear JC66-04295A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Gear motor JC31-00109A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Motor harness JC39-02287A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Step motor, ip JC31-00163A 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Timing belt, gear 6602-001730 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

Alphabetical parts list 1003

 Numerical parts list
Table 2-122 Numerical parts list

Part number Description Table and page

6602-001730 Timing belt, gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC31-00109A Gear motor 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC31-00163A Step motor, ip 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC39-02287A Motor harness 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC66-04294A Drive gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC66-04295A Feed pulley gear 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

JC93-01083A Drive motor, stepJC93 3K sHCI main 3 on page 990

1004 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3K sHCI main 5
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 5.

Figure 2-1126 3K sHCI main 5

Table 2-171 3K sHCI main 5

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

9 JC66-04290 Actuator SNS 1 Not applicable

A

12-2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

15 JC39-02291A Connect sensor harness 1 Not applicable

16 JC39-02288 Plow harness 1 Not applicable

A

3K sHCI main 5 1005

 3K sHCI main 6
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI main 6.

Figure 2-1127 3K sHCI main 6

Table 2-172 3K sHCI main 6

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

8 JC67-00455A Coupler, torque limiter 1 Not applicable

9 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 1 Not applicable

13 JC39-02288 Plow harness 1 Not applicable

A

1006 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

Pickup cover unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the pickup cover unit

Figure 2-1128 Pickup cover unit

Table 2-173 Pickup cover unit

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

2 0604-001393 Photo-interrupter 1 Not applicable

9 JC66-00977A Clutch, one way 2 Not applicable

10 JC61-01288A Idle holder, one way 1 Not applicable

16 JC63-04799A Pickup cover lever 1 Not applicable

17 JC61-00884A Bush-6, D (L) 2 Not applicable

25 0604–001393 Photo-interrupter 2 Not applicable

Pickup cover unit 1007

 Table 2-173 Pickup cover unit (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

26 JC66-04276A Actuator, empty pickup 1 Not applicable

30 JC93-01092A Frame, main pickup roller 3 Not applicable

1008 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3K sHCI frame
Parts diagram and parts list for the 3K sHCI frame

Figure 2-1129 3K sHCI frame

Table 2-174 3K sHCI frame

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

7 V1G20-67001 PCA - 3K sHCI 1 Not applicable

11 JC93-01124A Assembly, frame latch rear sensor 1 Not applicable

14 JC93-01125A Assy - frame latch sensor front 1 Not applicable

3K sHCI frame 1009

 Table 2-174 3K sHCI frame (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty Repair procedure

No

15 JC93-01123A Assembly, frame interlock 1 Not applicable

1010 Chapter 2 Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement

3 Problem solving

Learn about problem solving.

Control panel messages document (CPMD)

Learn about the printer control panel messages document (CPMD).

NOTE: A complete CPMD is not included in this service manual.

Click here to access the complete CPMD for this printer.

Error codes (types and structure)

Error codes and control-panel messages display on the printer control panel to indicate the current
printer status or situations that might require action. Error codes are numerical, or alphanumerical, and
have a set structure with six characters (example: 13.WX.YZ).

● The first two characters are numeric and represent the system component that is causing the error.
For example, in error code 10.22.15, 10 = Supplies for HP LaserJets.

● The remaining four characters (W, X, Y, and Z values) further define the error.

HP LaserJet and HP PageWide Enterprise error codes are documented in the control panel message
document (CPMD) for each printer.

The CPMD is a comprehensive list of error codes, diagnostic and troubleshooting steps to clear or
resolve the error, and other helpful information such as service mode pins and part numbers.

The CPMD is continually updated and republished with the latest information for the following error
codes.

Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters

Error code System Component System Error Description

10.WX.YZ Supplies (LaserJet) Supply error or supply memory error.

11.WX.YZ Real-time clock Internal error with the clock on the formatter.

13.WX.YZ Jam (LaserJet) Paper jam or open door jam error.

15.WX.YZ Jam (PageWide) Paper jam or open door jam error.

17.WX.YZ Supplies (PageWide) Supply error or supply memory error.

20.WX.YZ Printer memory Insufficient memory or buffering error.

21.WX.YZ Page Page complexity causing a decompression error

when trying to process job.

30.WX.YZ Scanner Flatbed scanner error occurring inside the unit.

31.WX.YZ Document feeder Document feeder, scanner, or jam error.

32.WX.YZ Backup, restore, or reset Backup, restore, or reset notification or error.

Problem solving 1011

 Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

33.WX.YZ Security Backup, Disk, EFI BIOS, Firmware integrity

(SureStart), or Trusted Platform Module (TPM)
notification or error.

40.WX.YZ Input/Output (I/O) Partition manager, secure erase, or USB

accessory error.

41.WX.YZ Fuser, Laser scanner, or Paper path Miscellaneous error including general and
misprint or mismatch errors typically involving
(but not limited to) the fuser, the laser scanner,
or the paper path.

42.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving the Event Log, Shell,

System Manager, or other component.

44.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware failure involving a digital sending

component.

45.WX.YZ OXPd/Web Kit (PageWide) Informational notifications involving the OXPd

Web Kit (communications log).

46.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) Engine communication error.

47.WX.YZ Firmware Job parser or printer calibration error.

48.WX.YZ Firmware PJA job accounting, job management, or job

pipeline error.

49.WX.YZ Firmware Firmware communication error.

50.WX.YZ Fuser (LaserJet) Fuser error.

51.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner beam error.

52.WX.YZ Laser scanner (LaserJet) Laser scanner startup error.

54.WX.YZ Sensor Sensor error (not jam related).

55.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller communication error.

56.WX.YZ Paper handling (LaserJet) Paper input/output or accessory error.

57.WX.YZ Fan Fan error.

58.WX.YZ Sensor Engine sensor failure.

59.WX.YZ Motor (LaserJet) Motor error.

60.WX.YZ Tray motor error (LaserJet) Tray lifting or pick up error.

61.WX.YZ Engine (PageWide) Print engine error with the 8–bit data package.

62.WX.YZ System (LaserJet) LaserJet internal system error.

Print bar (PageWide) PageWide print system error.

63.WX.YZ Engine (LaserJet) General engine error (electrical, communication,

etc.).

65.WX.YZ Connector Output accessory connection error.

66.WX.YZ Output accessory Output accessory error.

67.WX.YZ Input accessory Input accessory connection error

69.WX.YZ Duplexer Duplexer error.

1012 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-1 ERROR CODES: The first two characters (continued)

Error code System Component System Error Description

70.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) DC controller firmware error.

76.WX.YZ DC controller (LaserJet) Power supply fluctuations causes formatter and

DC controller communication issue and results
them not to be in synchronization.

80.WX.YZ Managed device Embedded Jetdirect error.

81.WX.YZ Near Field Communication (NFC) Wireless, Bluetooth or internal EIO error.

82.WX.YZ Memory (hard disk, EMMC, etc.) Disk hardware error.

90.WX.YZ Internal diagnostics Internal test of systems (i.e. disk, CPB, display) or
interconnection error.

98.WX.YZ Hard disk Hard disk partition error.

99.WX.YZ Firmware installer Remote Firmware Upgrade (RFU), firmware install

(engine or accessory), or disk error.

How to search for printer documentation

Find printer documentation using the internal HP portals.

The CPMD, error codes, and other support documentation for each printer is found on the internal HP
portals GCSN and WISE (formerly SAW). GCSN is available to HP channel partners and WISE is available
to call agents, service technicians, and other HP internal users. The level of detail available will depend
on your access credentials.

How to search WISE for printer documentation

These instructions are for HP internal use by call agents, service technicians, and other internal users.
View a video of how to find support content in WISE.

To view a list of control panel message documents per printer in WISE, enter document ID c05048451, to
locate CPMD list.

Go to WISE and enter this document ID c05791539 for written instructions.

How to search GCSN for printer documentation

These instructions are for internal use by HP Channel Partners. View a video of how find support content
in GCSN, or follow the steps below.

1. On the Home screen in GCSN, open Technical information using one of the following two methods:

● Type TINF in the Speedcode field found in the upper right corner and press Enter, or

● On the Home page, click Technical information in the left pane.

How to search for printer documentation 1013

 Figure 3-1 GCSN home page

2. Under Product Search, select the Type, Category, Family, and Series that match your product model
(leave the Model field as blank or the default).

NOTE: Make sure to login to GCSN using your service-qualified credentials to access the most
comprehensive content list available. To find out how to become service-qualified, contact your HP
representative.

Figure 3-2 Sample product search criteria (GCSN)

3. Click Add Favorites and then click Add to add the printer to your Favorites list and allow you to
bypass the Product Search fields next time for that particular model (optional).

1014 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-3 Add favorites (GCSN)

4. Clear all of the high-level check boxes.

Figure 3-4 Clear search criteria (GCSN)

5. Select the check boxes for the document types for which you want to search.

NOTE: Select only the high-level Manuals and Guides search option if you are not sure in which
type of manual or guide the content might be listed.

Figure 3-5 Select search criteria (GCSN)

6. Select Submit.

How to search for printer documentation 1015

 7. If needed, click Back To selection Criteria and narrow your search (the maximum allowed search
result is 100 documents).

NOTE: Do not select the Top Issue option unless you only want to view top issues for that model.
All other available content is filtered out.

Table 3-2 Information type selections

Technical information type Select this checkbox

Control panel message document (CPMD) CPMD-Map

List of all CPMDs per product Support Information

Installation Guide or Hardware Install Guide Maintenance/Service Guide or Install Guide

Service cost document Install Guide or Service Guide/Manual

Service guide or Service manual Service Guide/Manual

Self-solve or troubleshooting document Support Information

User manual or User guide User Guide

Warranty and Legal Guide Warranty Statement

Troubleshooting process
Learn about the troubleshooting process.

Determine the problem source

When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts
you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible
causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem.
The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems.

● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The
flowchart guides you to the section of this chapter that contains steps for correcting the
malfunction.

Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following issues:

● Are supply items within their rated life?

● Are supply items Genuine HP supplies?

● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors?

NOTE: The customer or service provider is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies
that are in good condition.

Power subsystem
Learn about the power subsystem.

1016 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Power-on checks
The basic printer functions should start up when the printer is connected into an electrical outlet and
the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this
section to isolate and solve the problem.

If the control-panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control-
panel display, perform power-on checks to find the cause of the problem.

Power-on troubleshooting overview

If the control panel is blank 1 minute after turning on the printer, check the following items:

During normal operation, a cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place
your hand over the vents at the rear of the printer, next to the formatter, or on the on the rear of the
scanner. If the fan is operating, you will feel air passing out of the printer. You can lean close to the printer
and hear the fan operating.

A fan begins to blow on the right door (fuser), and then the control panel goes through a series of set
up functions. The main motor turns on (unless the left door or cartridge access door is open, a jam
condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You might be able to visually and audibly
determine if the main motor is turned on.

If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine,
formatter, and control panel problems.

1. Make sure that the printer is connected directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip)
that delivers the correct voltage.

2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position, and then verify that the LED is on.

3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational.

4. Depress the button on the back of the control panel to test the control panel functionality.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness is connected.

6. Remove any external solutions, and then try to turn the printer on again.

Troubleshooting a blank display, black display, no display, or no power situation

Customers usually report that the control-panel display is not showing anything. It is very important to
collect as much information as possible from the customer about the issue to help resolve it.

Following are some printer behaviors the customer might encounter:

● The control panel is completely blank (no LEDs or back light).

● The control panel is blank, but there might be LEDs illuminated.

● The control panel is blank (LEDs are on or flashing) and the back light is on (but no text visible).

Following are some possible causes of a blank control-panel display:

● No power to the printer.

● The control panel contrast setting is not correctly adjusted.

● The formatter connector(s) are not fully seated into the connector(s) on the DC controller, or the
connectors are not fully seated on the formatter.

Power-on checks 1017

 ● A faulty component is installed on the formatter (for example a memory DIMM, fax PCA, network
PCA, USB device, or other component).

● The formatter is defective.

● The control panel connector is not fully seated, or the control panel is defective.

● The DC controller is defective.

Following are some questions to ask the customer:

● Was the printer newly install or has the printer been properly functioning?

– For a new install, investigate to see if there was any shipping damage to the printer.

– Did the customer notice any damage to the shipping box or any visible damage to the printer?

● What happened just prior to the control panel going blank?

– Was the printer serviced recently, a power outage occurred?

– Has a lightning storm recently occurred?

– Did the customer recently add a memory DIMM or install a third-party component?

● Make sure to get a complete description of the failure.

– Is the control-panel display completely blank (might be faint text and no back light)?

– Is the control-panel display back light on?

– Has a print job been sent to the printer? The customer might report that their print jobs seemed
to print but when they go to the printer the control-panel display is blank.

Recommended actions
If the control-panel display is completely blank (no LEDs illuminated or no back light) check to see if the
printer is getting power. Listen for fans or any printer initialization sounds when the power is turned on.

If there are no signs of power, then perform the following:

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip or
interruptible power supply) that delivers the correct voltage.

TIP: Try using a different power cable if possible.

2. Turn the printer power on, and make sure that the fan(s) run briefly (this indicates that the power
supply is operational).

3. Check if the yellow LED on formatter is flashing. If so, there is a communication issue between the
formatter and the control panel.

4. Turn the printer power off.

5. Make sure that the control-panel display wire harness (and/or flat cable) is properly connected (and
fully seated), and then turn the printer power on again.

6. Check control panel diagnostics by pressing the button on the back of the control panel to run
different diagnostic tests.

1018 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 7. Verify the status LEDs are illuminated, but the control-panel display is blank. If applicable: Check
if the contrast setting is adjusted to very low. If so, try turning the contrast knob to see if the
control-panel display becomes visible.

8. From a host computer, send a print job to the printer.

NOTE: If the print job correctly prints, then the problem is most likely to a defective control panel.

9. Turn the printer power off, and then make sure that the memory DIMM is installed in the correct slot
and is fully seated.

NOTE: For some printers, there may be more than one memory DIMM installed. Some printers
have third-party solutions/applications or fonts that use memory.

10. Remove all of the components/accessories installed on the formatter (for example, hard drive,
solid-state drive, memory DIMM(s), fax PCA, network PCA, USB devices, or other devices).

● Make sure that the formatter is fully seated.

IMPORTANT: This is important because the formatter or a component on the formatter might
be defective or shorted, which causes the printer to lose power.

11. Reinstall the formatter. Make sure that it makes a good connection and is fully seated.

Make sure that all of the connectors on the formatter are correctly connected and fully seated.

12. Turn the printer power on, and then check the control-panel display.

13. If the printer control panel is properly working, replace each removed component (one at a time) to
determine which one is causing the problem.

CAUTION: Turn the printer power off, and then on again, after replacing a component on the
formatter.

14. If the control-panel display is still blank after performing the above troubleshooting steps, and the
control panel diagnostics do not function, replace the control panel. If the control panel diagnostics
are functioning, then replace the formatter.

Control panel checks

Learn about the control panel checks.

Control panel diagnostic flowcharts

Learn about the control panel diagnostic flowcharts.

Use the flowcharts in this section to troubleshoot the following control panel problems.

● Touchscreen is blank, white, or dim (no image).

● Touchscreen is slow to respond or requires multiple presses to respond.

● Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

● No control panel sound.

● Home button is unresponsive.

● Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Control panel checks 1019

 Touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image)
Learn about the touchscreen black, white, or dim (no image).

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

Figure 3-6 Touchscreen blank, white, or dim (no image)

Black display White display Dim display

(no backlight (no image) (no image)
or image)

Is the Home button

Y
illuminated
(bright white)?
Is the product in bright
Open the sunlight?
diagnostic function. If yes, move the
N
product to a
different location.

Touch the display or Home button

to exit sleep mode. Make sure that
the product is plugged in and
the power is turned on. Does an image
appear on the Y
control panel?
Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
N backlight test.

Turn the product power off.

Does the display
Y Inspect and reseat the
turn on?
control panel cables.
Remove and reseat the
formatter cables.
Make sure that the
Problem solved.
formatter LEDs function. Is the backlight
N Y Y
adjustable?

Are the formatter

LEDs functioning? Problem fixed? Y

Do not replace the control panel.

N Turn the product power off.
Check connection and cables on the formatter
and at the comtrol panel.

Turn the product power off. N

Remove and reseat the formatter
cables.
Do not replace the control panel.
N

Replace the
control panel.

Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone

Learn about how the touchscreen has an unresponsive zone.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

1020 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-7 Touchscreen has an unresponsive zone
Touchscreen
has an
unresponsive
zone

Is the area of the

touchscreen you are touching
greyed out (intentionally
deactivated)?

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
touch test.

Does the previously

inactive area respond
to a touch?

Y
Turn the product
power off,
and then
on again.

Replace the Does the previously

N inactive area respond
control panel.
to a touch?

Do not replace the

control panel.

No control panel sound

Learn what to do when there is no control panel sound.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

No control panel sound 1021

 Figure 3-8 No control panel sound

Control panel
has no
sound

Open the following menus:

Administration
Display Settings
Key Press Sound
Select the following:
On
Save

Can sounds
be heard?

N
Y

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the sound test.

Can sounds
be heard?
Y

N
Do not replace the
control panel.
Turn the product power off.
Remove the control panel.
Check the cables to the speaker.
Replace the control panel. N Reseat the cables to the speaker.
Turn the product power on.
Can sounds be heard?

Home button is unresponsive

Learn what to do when the home button is unresponsive.

NOTE: To open the diagnostic function, press the button on the back of the control panel.

1022 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-9 Home button is unresponsive
Home button
unresponsive
Note: If illuminated: continue.
If not illuminated: verify that
the power is turned on,
the printer is not in sleep mode,
turn the power off, and
then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the Home
button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?

Turn the product power off,

and then on again.

Open the
diagnostic function.
Perform the
Home button test.

Does the virtual LED

illuminate green when
the Home button is pressed?
Y

Replace the Do not replace the

control panel. control panel.

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Learn about when the hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional).

Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional) 1023
 Figure 3-10 Hardware integration pocket (HIP) is not functioning (control panel functional)

Hardware integration
pocket (HIP)
not functional
(control panel
functional)

Check that all installed hardware integration

pocket devices are within HP specifications.
The control panel provides only 0.5 Amps to
the port. If an installed device attempts to draw
more power than is provided, the port is
automatically disabled. Troubleshoot third-party
devices with the device manufacturer.

Individual component diagnostics

Learn about individual component diagnostics.

Tools for troubleshooting: LED diagnostics

LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems.

Understand lights on the formatter

Three LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly.

Figure 3-11 LEDs

Table 3-3 LEDs

Item Description

1 Heartbeat LED

2 HP Jetdirect LEDs

1024 Chapter 3 Problem solving

HP Jetdirect LEDs
Learn about the HP Jetdirect LEDs.

The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and
the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is
off, a link has failed.

For link failures, check all the network cable connections. In addition, try to manually configure the link
settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control-panel menus.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, select Settings.

2. Open the following menus:

● Networking

● Ethernet

● Link Speed

3. Select the appropriate link speed, and then select OK.

Tools for troubleshooting: Engine diagnostics

The printer contains extensive internal engine diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality,
paper path, noise, assembly, and timing issues.

Defeating interlocks
Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For assembly or noise isolation, run the
diagnostic test when the toner cartridge door or right door is open.

Defeating the door interlocks allows observation of the paper pick operation (and view the page enter
registration).

WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service
personnel should open and run the diagnostics with a door open. Never touch any of the power
supplies when the printer is turned on.

Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Learn how to defeat the toner cartridge door interlock.

1. Open the toner cartridge door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the cartridge door logic switches.

HP Jetdirect LEDs 1025

 Figure 3-12 Defeat the toner cartridge door interlock

Defeat the right door interlock

Learn how to defeat the right door interlock.

1. Open the right door.

2. Insert a folded piece of paper into the slot.

TIP: Fold a stiff piece of paper, for example a business card or index card, into two 10 mm (.375 in)
strips, and insert the strips into the slot for the front door logic switches.

Figure 3-13 Defeat the right door interlock

Tools for troubleshooting

Use the procedure below to test various printer mechanical and electromechanical assemblies.

1026 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test)
Learn about the individual component diagnostics (special-mode test).

This test activates individual parts independently to isolate problems.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly.

NOTE: The cartridge door interlocks must be defeated to run the component tests.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Select one of the following tests:

● Continuous Scan

● Run Fax Test

3. Select the component test options for the test.

Tools for troubleshooting

Learn about tools for troubleshooting.

Problem-solving checklist
Follow these steps when trying to solve a problem with the printer.

Step 1: Check that the printer power is on

Learn how to check that the printer power is on.

1. Make sure that the printer is plugged in and turned on. The power button should be lit with a white
light. If it is not, press the power button. If the power button does not light up, check the following
conditions.

● Make sure that the power cable is connected to the printer and the outlet.

● Check the power source by connecting the power cable to a different outlet.

2. If the printer motors do not rotate, make sure that the toner cartridges are installed and that the
doors are all closed. The control panel displays messages to indicate these problems.

Step 2: Check the control panel for error messages

Learn how to check the control panel for error messages.

The control panel should indicate ready status. If an error message appears, resolve the error.

Print a supplies status page to ensure that the supplies are not at or over end of life.

NOTE: HP long-life consumable and maintenance kit life specifications are estimations. Actual
individual life or yield during normal use will vary depending on usage, environment, media, and other
factors. Estimated life is not an implied warranty.

Individual component diagnostics (special-mode test) 1027

 Step 3: Test print functionality
Learn how to test print functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Reports menu, touch the Configuration/Status Pages menu, select the Configuration
Page item, and then touch the Print button to print the report.

3. If the report does not print, make sure that paper is loaded in the tray, and check the control panel
to see if paper is jammed inside the printer.

NOTE: Make sure that the paper in the tray meets specifications for this printer.

Step 4: Test copy functionality

Learn how to test copy functionality.

1. Place the configuration page into the ADF and make a copy. If paper does not feed smoothly
through the ADF, you might need to clean the ADF rollers and separation pad. Make sure that the
paper meets specifications for this printer.

2. Place the configuration page onto the scanner glass and make a copy.

3. If the print quality on the copied pages is not acceptable, clean the scanner glass and the small
glass strip.

Step 5: Test the fax sending functionality

Learn how to test the fax sending functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tools menu. Touch the Run Fax Test
button to test the fax functionality.

3. Touch the Fax on the printer control panel, and then touch the Start Fax button.

Step 6: Test the fax receiving functionality

Learn how to test the fax receiving functionality.

1. From the control panel Home screen, touch the Support Tools button.

2. Touch the Troubleshooting menu, and then open the Diagnostics Tests menu. Touch the Run Fax
Test button to test the fax functionality.

3. Use another fax machine to send a fax to the printer.

4. Review and reset the printer fax settings.

Step 7: Try sending a print job from a computer

Learn how to try sending a print job from a computer.

1. Use a word-processing program to send a print job to the printer.

2. If the job does not print, make sure that you selected the correct printer driver.

3. Uninstall and then reinstall the printer software.

1028 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality
Learn how to test the plug and print USB drive printing functionality.

1. Load a .PDF document or .JPEG photo onto a USB flash drive, and insert it in the USB port near the
control panel.

2. The USB Flash Drive menu opens. Try printing the document or photo.

3. If no documents are listed, try a different type of USB flash drive.

Factors that affect printer performance

Several factors affect the time it takes to print a job:

● The software program that you are using and its settings

● The use of special paper (such as heavy paper or custom-size paper)

● Printer processing and download time

● The complexity and size of graphics

● The speed of the computer you are using

● The USB or network connection

● Whether the printer is printing in color or in monochrome

● The type of USB drive, if you are using one

● Environmental factors, such as low temperature or high humidity

Print menu map

Learn how to print the menu map.

To more easily navigate individual settings, print a report of the complete Reports menu.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

3. Select the Settings Menu Map option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print current settings pages

Learn how to print current settings pages.

Printing the current settings page provides a map of the user configurable settings that might be helpful
in the troubleshooting process.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Reports button.

2. Open the Configuration/Status Pages menu.

Step 8: Test the Plug and Print USB Drive printing functionality 1029
 3. Select the Current Settings Page option.

4. Touch the Print button to print the report.

TIP: Multiple report pages can be selected, and then printed together.

Print event log

Printing the event log might be helpful in the troubleshooting process. For more information, see the
Interpret control-panel messages and event log entries section in the printer troubleshooting manual.

Print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Reports menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the following menus:

● Troubleshooting

● Event Log

3. The event log displays on the screen. To print it, touch the Print button.

Print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to print the event log from the Service menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04082517

4. Touch the Event Log item.

Clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to clear the event log from a touchscreen control panel.

1. From the Home screen on the printer control panel, scroll to and touch the Support Tools button.

2. Open the Service menu.

3. On the sign-in screen, select the Service Access Code option from the drop-down list.

4. Enter the following service access code for the printer:

● Access code: 04082517

5. Select the trash icon to clear the event log.

Pre-boot menu options

The Pre-boot menus are available prior to the printer initializing.

1030 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 CAUTION: The Format Disk option (printers with a hard-disk drive only) performs a disk initialization
for the entire disk. The operating system, firmware files, and third party files (among other files) will be
completely lost. HP does not recommend this action.

TIP: The Pre-boot menu can be remotely accessed by using a telnet network protocol to establish an
administration connection to the printer. See Remote Admin.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel

Learn how to open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-14 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. On the Pre-boot menu screen, use the following buttons to navigate the tests.

Figure 3-15 Pre-boot menu

Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons

Use this button to see more information about a selected item.

Open the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1031

 Table 3-4 Pre-boot screen buttons (continued)

Use this button to scroll up through menu items.

Use this button to select a highlighted menu item.

Use this button to scroll down through menu items.

Use this button to go back to the previous menu.

Not used.

Use this button to exit a diagnostic test.

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to navigate the Pre-boot menu.

4. Touch the OK button to select a menu item.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel
Learn how to cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer configurations and settings to factory defaults (customer
configurations and settings are lost).

1. Touch the middle of the control-panel display when you see the 1/8 under the logo.

Figure 3-16 Open the Pre-boot menu

1 2

2. Use the button to highlight the +3:Administrator item, and then touch the OK button.

3. Use the button to highlight the +8:Startup Options item, and then touch the OK button.

1032 Chapter 3 Problem solving

4. Use the button to highlight the 2 Cold Reset item, and then touch the OK button to select it.

5. Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item, and
then touch the OK button.

NOTE: The printer will initialize.

NOTE: Some of the pre-boot options in the following tables are not supported by the current version
of the printer firmware and are included for information only. Future versions of firmware will support
these options.

Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Continue Selecting the Continue item exits the Pre-boot menu

and continues the normal boot process.

If a selection is not made in the initial menu within

30 seconds, the printer returns to a normal boot (the
same as selecting Continue).

If the user navigates to another menu, the timeout

does not apply.

Sign In Enter the administrator PIN or service PIN if one is

required to open the Pre-boot menu.

Administrator This item navigates to the Administrator submenus.

If authentication is required (and the user is not

already signed in) the Sign In prompt displays. The
user is required to sign in.

Download Network This item initiates a Pre-boot firmware download

process. A USB Thumbdrive option will work on all
USB FutureSmart printers. USB or Network connections
are not currently supported.
USB
Thumbdrive

Format Disk This item reinitializes the disk and cleans all disk
partitions.

CAUTION: Selecting the Format Disk item

removes all data.

A delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

The system is not bootable after this action and

a 99.09.67 error displays on the control panel. A
firmware download must be performed to return
the system to a bootable state.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1033
 Table 3-5 Pre-boot menu options (1 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Partial Clean This item reinitializes the disk (removing all data
except the firmware repository where the master
firmware bundle is downloaded and saved).

CAUTION: Selecting the Partial Clean item

removes all data except the firmware repository. A
delete confirmation prompt is not provided.

CAUTION: This procedure resets all printer

configurations and settings to factory defaults
(customer configurations and settings are lost).

This allows a user to reformat the disk by removing

the firmware image from the active directory
without having to download new firmware code
(printer remains bootable).

Change Select this item to set or change the administrator

Password password.

Clear Password Select the Clear Password item to remove a

password from the Administrator menu. Before the
password is actually cleared, a message will be
shown asking to confirm that the password should
be cleared. Press the OK button to confirm the
action.

When the confirmation prompt displays, press the

OK button to clear the password.

Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Clear disk Select the Clear disk item to enable using an
external device for job storage. Job storage is
normally enabled only for the Boot device. This will
be grayed out unless the 99.09.68 error is displayed.

Lock Disk Select the Lock Disk item to lock (mate) a new
secure disk to this printer.

The secure disk already locked to this printer will

remain accessible to this printer. Use this function
to have more than one encrypted disk accessible by
the printer when using them interchangeably.

The data stored on the secure disk locked to this

printer always remains accessible to this printer.

Leave Unlocked Select the Leave Unlocked item to use a new secure
disk in an unlocked mode for a single service event.
The secure disk that is already locked to this printer
will remain accessible to this printer and uses the
old disk's encryption password with the new disk.

The secure disk that is already locked to this printer

remains accessible to this printer.

1034 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-6 Pre-boot menu options (2 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Clear Disk Pwd Select the Clear Disk Pwd item to continue using the
non-secure disk and clear the password associated
with the yet-to-be installed secure disk.

CAUTION: Data on the missing secure disk will be

permanently inaccessible.

Retain Password Select the Retain Password item to use the non-
secure disk for this session only, and then search
for the missing secure disk in future sessions.

Boot Device Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command is a one-pass overwrite, which erases the
entire disk including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all data on the disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the system

files are reinstalled. It erases the encryption key. The
encryption key is erased, so the disk becomes a non-
encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Manage Disk Internal Select the Internal Device item to erase the internal
Device device or get a status about the internal device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The ATA secure-erase
command erases the entire disk, including firmware.
The disk remains an encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow the user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The HP High
Performance Secure Hard Disk is erased.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1035
 Table 3-7 Pre-boot menu options (3 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

External Select the External Device item to erase the

Device external device or get status about the external
device.

Secure Select the Secure Erase item to erase all of the data
Erase on the disk and unlock it if required.

This might take a long time.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled.

The ATA secure-erase command erases the entire

disk, including firmware. The disk remains an
encrypted disk.

Erase/ Select the Erase/Unlock item to cryptographically

Unlock erase all of the data on disk and unlock the disk to
allow a user to gain access to it from any printer.

NOTE: The system will be unusable until the

system files are reinstalled. The encryption key is
erased, so the disk becomes a non-encrypted disk.

Get Status This item provides disk status information if any is

available.

Table 3-8 Pre-boot menu options (4 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Configure LAN IP Mode The network can be configured to obtain the
[DHCP] network settings from a DHCP server or as static.
NOTE: This
configuration is Use this item for automatic IP address acquisition
only active when from the DHCP server.
the Pre-boot
menu is open.

IP Mode Use this item to manually assign the network

[STATIC] addresses.

IP Address Use this item to manually enter the IP addresses.

Subnet Mask Use this item to manually enter the subnet mask.

Default Use this item to manually enter the default

Gateway gateway.

Save Select the Save item to save the manual settings.

Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Startup Options Select the Startup Options item to specify options
that can be set for the next time the printer is
turned on and initializes to the Ready state.

1036 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-9 Pre-boot menu options (5 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Show Revision Not currently functional: Select the Show Revision

item to allow the printer to initialize and show the
firmware version when the printer reaches the
Ready state.

Once the printer power is turned on the next time,

the Show Revision item is unchecked so that the
firmware revision is not shown.

Cold Reset Select the Cold Reset item to clear the IP address
and all customer settings. (This item also returns
all settings to factory defaults.)

NOTE: Items in the Service menu are not reset.

Skip Disk Load Select the Skip Disk Load item to disable installed
third-party applications.

Skip Cal Select the Skip Cal item to skip the printer
calibration for the very next power-initialization
cycle only.

Lock Service CAUTION: Select the Lock Service item to lock

the Service menu access (both in the Pre-boot
menu and the Device Maintenance menu).

Service personnel must have the administrator

remove the Lock Service setting before they can
open the Service menu.

Skip FSCK Select the Skip FSCK item to disable Chkdisk/

ScanVolume during startup.

First Power Not currently functional: This item allows the

printer to initialize as if it is the first time it has
been turned on.

For example, the user is prompted to configure

first-time settings like date/time, language, and
other settings.

Select this item so that it is enabled for the next

time the printer power is turned on.

When the printer power is turned on the next time,

this item is unchecked so that the pre-configured
settings are used during configuration, and the
first-time setting prompt is not used.

Embedded Select the Embedded Jetdirect Off item to disable

Jetdirect Off the embedded HP Jetdirect.

By default this item is unchecked so that

HP Jetdirect is always enabled.

WiFi Accessory Select the WiFi Accessory item to enable the

wireless accessory.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1037
 Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Diagnostics Diagnostic items are

useful to diagnose
hardware components
and their interface
connections. Use these
items to troubleshoot
specific hardware
components, and the
interface between
them and other
components.

Memory Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Memory diagnostic
when executing
multiple diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief memory
test.

NOTE: This test

requires about four
minutes to execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
memory test.

NOTE: This test

requires about twenty
minutes to execute.

Disk Do Not Run Use the Do Not Run

item to exclude the
Disk diagnostic when
executing multiple
diagnostics.

Short Use the Short item to

select a brief firmware
self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about two or
three minutes to
execute.

Long Use the Long item

to select an extended
firmware self-test.

NOTE: This test

requires about sixty
minutes to execute.

Optimized Use the Optimized

item to select a test
that checks the active
sectors on the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about thirty
minutes to execute.

1038 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-10 Pre-boot menu options (6 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Raw Use the Raw item

to select a test that
checks every sector on
the disk.

NOTE: This test

requires about fifty
minutes to execute.

Smart Use the Smart item

to select a very brief
test that checks the
drive self-monitoring
analysis and reporting
technology (SMART)
status—the drive
detects and reports
reliability indicators
to help anticipate
disk failures (SMART
status).

CPB Use the CPB item to

verify the integrity of
the copy processor
board (CPB) and
the formatter PCA
connections.

Interconnect Use the Interconnect

item to verify the
integrity of the
interconnect PCA (ICB)
and its connections.

Run Selected Select the Run

Selected item to
execute a selected
test.

NOTE: If more than

one test is selected,
they are executed in
sequence.

Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Administrator Remote Admin Start Telnet The Remote Admin item allows a service technician to
access to the printer Pre-boot menu remotely, and to
navigate the menu selections from a remote location.

IMPORTANT: A Remote Admin connection must be

initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This person will also need to provide a randomly

generated PIN to the remote service technician.
NOTE: For more information about using the
Remote Admin function, see Remote Admin.

Cold reset using the Pre-boot menu from a touchscreen control panel 1039
 Table 3-11 Pre-boot menu options (7 of 7) (continued)

Menu option First level Second level Third level Description

Stop Telnet

Refresh IP

System Triage Copy Logs If the device will not boot to the Ready state, or the
diagnostic log feature found in the Troubleshooting
menu is not accessible, then use the System Triage
item to copy the diagnostic logs to a USB flash drive
at the next printer start up.

The files can then be sent to HP to help diagnose the

problem.

Change Svc Use this item to change the Service menu personal
PWD identification number (PIN).

Reset Svc PWD If the Service menu personal identification number

(PIN) has been changed. Use this item to reset it to the
original PIN.

Service Tools Reset Password Use this item to reset the Pre-boot administrator
password.

Subsystems For manufacturing use only. Do not change these

values.

Developer Tools Netexec

Remote Admin
The Remote Admin feature allows remote access the printer Pre-boot menu (BIOS environment). The
printer functions as a telnet server which uses the telnet networking protocol to transmit text data. Any
computer (with telnet installed and enabled) can function as the telnet client to remotely display and
interact with the Pre-boot menu.

IMPORTANT: While the Remote Admin function allows remote access the Pre-boot menu, for security
reasons the Remote Admin connection must be initiated by a person that is physically present at the
printer.

This section describes the following Remote Admin items.

Required software and network connection

Before using the Remote Admin feature, make sure that the telnet network protocol is installed, and
enabled, on the remote telnet client computer.

NOTE: This section describes enabling and configuring the telnet feature for computers using a
Windows® operating system.

HP recommends that the telnet client computer be a Windows based system, however, there are
other operating systems that support the telnet network protocol. For information about enabling and
configuring the telnet network protocol for other operating systems, see the owner's manual for that
operating system.

Telnet client
All computers using the Windows operating system have the telnet client installed, however, the telnet
client function might not be enabled by default.

1040 Chapter 3 Problem solving

NOTE: The figures and menus in this section are for the Windows 7 Enterprise® operating system.
Screens and menu selections might vary slightly for other operating systems.

1. Use the Start menu to open the Control Panel, and then click the Programs item to select it.

Figure 3-17 Open the Control Panel

2. Click the Turn Windows features on or off item to select it.

Figure 3-18 Turn Windows features on or off

3. In the Windows Features box, scroll down to Telnet Client. If the check box is not checked, click the
box to select it, and then click the OK button.

TIP: If the check box is already checked then the telnet client function is already enabled. Click the
Cancel button.

Telnet client 1041

 Figure 3-19 Enable the telnet client feature

Network connection
The remote telnet client computer must have direct network access to the printer for the Remote Admin
function to operate. This means that the telnet client computer must be on the same network as the
printer. The Remote Admin function cannot be accessed through a network firewall or other remote
access network security programs.

If a private network is not accessible, ask the network administrator to set up a virtual private network
(VPN) connection to the network.

Connect a remote connection

Learn how to connect a remote connection using telnet.

Start the telnet server function at the printer

For security reasons the Remote Admin feature must be initiated by a person that is physically present
at the printer. The following steps must be performed by a person that is physically present at the printer.

NOTE: This person might need to sign in with an administrator or service password depending on how
the printer is configured.

1. Turn the printer on.

2. The HP logo displays on the printer control panel. When a "1/8" with an underscore displays, touch
the middle of the screen to open the Pre-boot menu.

1042 Chapter 3 Problem solving

3. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +3:Administrator item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-20 Select the +3:Administrator item

4. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the +A:Remote Admin item,
and then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-21 Select the +A:Remote Admin item

5. Use the arrow buttons on the touchscreen to scroll down and highlight the 1:Start Telnet item, and
then touch the OK button to select it.

Figure 3-22 Select the 1:Start Telnet item

6. Do one of the following

● If a connecting message displays briefly, go to step 7.

Figure 3-23 Telnet connecting message

● If an error message displays, use the steps below to identify the problem.

Start the telnet server function at the printer 1043

 Figure 3-24 Telnet error message

a. The printer network cable is not correctly connected.

b. The BIOS LAN settings are incorrect.

○ The printer should be configured to use a static IP address, but is configured to use
DHCP instead.

○ The printer is configured to use a static IP address, but the IP address is incorrect.

c. The printer is correctly configured to use DHCP, but the DHCP server is not turned on or is
malfunctioning.

7. When the printer telnet server function is initialized, the following screen appears. Use the
information on this screen to connect the remote telnet client computer to the printer.

NOTE: The printer is now ready to receive remote telnet client commands.

● IP: The static or dynamically allocated IP address for the printer.

● Port: The standard telnet port (23).

● Pin: A randomly generated 4-digit personal identification number (PIN).

Figure 3-25 Telnet server function initialized

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer

The following steps establish a Remote Admin connection from a remote computer to the printer.

1044 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. From the Start menu click Run to open a dialog box, type cmd in the Open field, and then click the
OK button to open a Windows command window.

Figure 3-26 Open a command window

2. From any displayed directory, type telnet at the prompt, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-27 Start a telnet session

3. Type o <IP ADDRESS> at the telnet prompt, and then press the Enter key.

NOTE: For <IP ADDRESS>, substitute the IP address that was displayed in step 7 in Start the
telnet server function at the printer.

TIP: If the telnet connection fails to establish a connection, the printer is probably behind a firewall
or on a different network that the remote telnet client computer. See Network connection.

Start the telnet client function at the remote computer 1045

 Figure 3-28 Establish a telnet connection

4. Type the PIN that was displayed in step 7 in Start the telnet server function at the printer at the
prompt, and then press the Enter key.

IMPORTANT: Make sure to type the PIN correctly. After five incorrect PIN entries, the printer
terminates the Remote Admin connection. The Remote Admin feature must be re-initiated at the
printer. See Start the telnet server function at the printer.

Figure 3-29 Enter the PIN

5. The following screen displays when the correct PIN is entered and the Remote Admin connection is
successful. For information about the Pre-boot menu and options, see Pre-boot menu options.

NOTE: Because a Remote Admin connection is an unsecure telnet network protocol connection,
the following Pre-boot menu items are disabled for the remote telnet client computer.

● The +3:Administrator menu 4:Change Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 5:Clear Password item.

● The +3:Administrator menu 6:Disk Manage item.

1046 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-30 Remote Admin window

Disconnect a remote connection

Learn how to disconnect a remote connection.

The Remote Admin connection can be terminated from the printer control panel or the remote telnet
client computer.

NOTE: The following procedure describes terminating a Remote Admin connection from the remote
telnet client computer.

1. From the Pre-boot main menu, use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the
+3:Administrator item, and then press the Enter key.

Figure 3-31 Access the administrator menu

Disconnect a remote connection 1047

 2. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the +A:Remote Admin item, and then press
the Enter key.

Figure 3-32 Access the remote admin menu

3. Use the arrow buttons on the keyboard to scroll down to the 2:Stop Telnet item, and then press the
Enter key. The Remote Admin connection between the printer and the remote telnet client computer
terminates.

IMPORTANT: The printer remains in the Pre-boot menu. Have the person that is physically present
at the printer do the following:

● Touch the Home button to return to the main Pre-boot menu and highlight the 1:Continue item,
and then touch the OK button. The printer will continue to initialize.

Figure 3-33 Terminate the telnet connection

Control panel menus

You can perform basic printer setup by using the Settings menu. Use the HP Embedded Web Server for
more advanced printer setup. To open the HP Embedded Web Server, enter the printer IP address or
host name in the address bar of a web browser.

Reports menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select Reports.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1048 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-12 Reports menu

First level Second level Values Description

Configuration/Status Pages Settings Menu Map Print Shows a map of the entire
Settings menu and the
View selected values for each
setting.

Current Settings Page Print Shows the current printer

settings.
View

Configuration Page Print Shows the printer settings

and installed accessories.
View

How to Connect Page Print Shows the IP address, the

host name, and the hardware
View (MAC) address for the printer
if it is connected to a network.

Supplies Status Page Print Shows the approximate

remaining life for the
View supplies; reports statistics
on total number of pages
and jobs processed, serial
number, page counts, and
maintenance information.

HP provides approximations
of the remaining life for
the supplies as a customer
convenience. The actual
remaining supply levels
might be different from the
approximations provided.

Usage Page Print Shows a count of all paper

sizes that have passed
View through the printer; lists
whether they were simplex,
duplex, monochrome, or color;
and reports the page count.

File Directory Page Print Shows the file name and

folder name for files that are
View stored in the printer memory.

Web Services Status Page Print Shows the detected Web

Services for the printer.
View

HP Flex Build Configuration Print Shows installed Flex

Page Build components and
View replacement history.

NOTE: 877/826/786/731
printers only.

Event Log Print Displays or prints event logs

listing event code, date/time,
View cycles and repetitions on the
printer.

Paper Path Page Print Shows paper path usage on

the printer.
View

Reports menu 1049

 Table 3-12 Reports menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Fax Reports (MFP fax models Fax Activity Log Print Contains a list of the faxes
only) that have been sent from or
View received by this printer.

Billing Codes Report Print Provides a list of billing codes

that have been used for
View outgoing faxes. This report
shows how many sent faxes
were billed to each code.

Blocked Fax List Print Provides a list of phone

numbers that are blocked
View from sending faxes to this
printer.

Fax Call Report Print Provides a detailed report of

the last fax operation, either
View sent or received.

Other Pages PCL Font List Print Prints the available PCL fonts.

PS Font List Print Prints the available PS fonts.

Secure Drum Data Erase Print Prints the secure drum data
erase pattern to overwrite
any residual image data that
might be left on the drum
from the previous print job.

Settings menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Settings menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-13 Settings menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

General Date/Time Date/Time Format Date Format DD/MMM/YYYY Use the Date/Time
Settings Settings menu to
MMM/DD/YYYY specify the date
and time and
YYYY/MMM/DD to configure date/
time settings.

Time Format 12 hour (AM/PM) Select the format

that the printer
24 hours uses to show the
date and time, for
example 12-hour
format or 24-hour
format.

Date/Time Date Select the time Select the time

zone from a list. zone, date, and
time that the
printer uses.

Time Select the date

from a pop-up
calendar.

1050 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Time Zone Select the time

from a pop-up
keypad.

Energy Sleep Schedule A list of + (Add) Use to configure

Settings scheduled the printer
events Edit to automatically
displays. wake up or go to
Delete sleep at specific
times on specific
days. Using this
feature saves
energy.

NOTE: You must

configure the date
and time settings
before you can use
this feature.

New event Event Type Select whether to

add or edit a Wake
event or a Sleep
event, and then
select the time
and the days for
the wake or sleep
event.

Time Set the wake or

sleep event time
parameters.

Event Days Select days of the Set the wake or

week from a list. sleep event day
parameters.

Sleep Settings Sleep After Range: 1 to 110 Set the number

Inactivity minutes of minutes after
which the printer
Shut Down Default = 0 enters Sleep or
minutes Auto Off mode.
Touch the existing
number to open
the virtual keypad,
and then increase
or decrease
the number of
minutes.

Display Display Brightness Manual The Manual Use to specify the

Settings setting uses a intensity of the
slider to manually LCD control panel
control the display display.
brightness.

System Sound On* Use to specify

whether you hear
Off a sound when you
touch the screen
or press buttons
on the control
panel.

Settings menu 1051

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Language Settings Language Select from a Use to select a

list of languages different language
that the printer for control panel
supports. messages and
specify the default
keyboard layout.
When you select a
new language, the
keyboard layout
automatically
changes to match
the factory default
for the selected
language.

Keyboard Each language has Select the default

Layout a default keyboard keyboard layout
layout. To change that matches the
Flow models it, select from a list language you want
only of layouts. to use.

Information Show connection Use this menu

Screen information* item to display or
hide connection
Hide connection information on the
information Home screen.

DisplayDate and Yes* Select whether to

Time display or hide the
No date and time on
the control panel
Home screen.

Job Status Fewer* Use this feature

Notifications to control how
More many job status
notifications
appear while a job
is proceeding

● If the setting
is Fewer,
there will only
be a
notification to
indicate the
job has been
added to the
job queue
(except Fa,
which always
indicates
success or
failure).

● If the setting
is More, there
will be status
notifications
while the job
is proceeding
including a
completion
notification.

1052 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Inactivity Timeout Range: 10-300 Specifies the

seconds amount of time
that elapses
Default = 60 between any
seconds activity on the
control panel and
when the printer
resets to the
default settings.
When the timeout
expires, the control
panel display
returns to the
Home menu, and
any user signed in
to the printer is
signed out.

Clearable On Use this feature

Warnings to set the period
Job* that a clearable
warning displays
on the control
panel. If the
On setting is
selected, clearable
warnings appear
until the Clearable
Warnings button is
pressed. If the Job
setting is selected,
clearable warnings
stay on the display
during the job
that generated
the warning and
disappear from
the display when
the next job starts.

Continuable Auto-continue (10 Use this option

Events seconds)* to configure the
printer behavior
Touch OK to when the printer
continue encounters certain
errors. If the
Auto-continue (10
seconds) option
is selected, the
job will continue
after 10 seconds.
If the Touch OK
to continue option
is selected, the
job will stop and
require the user
to touch the
OK button before
continuing.

Settings menu 1053

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Enabled* Use this feature

Device USB to enable or
Disabled disable the USB
port, which allows
connecting to a
computer by using
a USB device.

Jam Auto* This printer

Recovery provides a jam
Off recovery feature
that reprints
On jammed pages.
Select one of the
following options:

Auto: The printer

attempts to
reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

Off: The printer

does not attempt
to reprint jammed
pages. Because no
memory is used
to store the most
recent pages,
performance is
optimal.

NOTE: When
using this option, if
the printer runs
out of paper and
the job is being
printed on both
sides, some pages
can be lost.

On: The printer

always reprints
jammed pages.
Additional memory
is allocated to
store the last few
pages printed. This
might cause a
decrease in overall
performance.

Auto Enabled The printer

Recovery attempts to
Disabled* reprint jammed
pages when
sufficient memory
is available. This is
the default setting.

1054 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Enable Disabled Use the Enable

AutoSend AutoSend menu
Enabled* to enable or
disable the
AutoSned feature.
The AutoSend
feature enables
your product
to periodically
send product
configuration
information
including serial
number, event
logs, page usage
counts, and
supplies status
information to HP
web addresses
(URLs), or
email addresses.
Information sent
to HP is used to
improve products
and services, and
to monitor the
product if you
have a relationship
with HP that
provides you
serives such as
proactive cartidge
replacement,
pay-per-page
contracts, support
agreements, or
usage tracking.

Hold Off Print Enabled* Enable this feature

Job if you want to
Disabled prevent print jobs
from starting while
a user is initiating
a copy job from
the control panel.
Held print jobs
start printing after
the copy job is
finished, provided
that no other copy
job is in the print
queue.

Copy/Print Copy Image Preview Display a preview

Settings of the image
before printing it.

Enable Print Enabled Enables the printer

from USB to open a file from
Drive Disabled* a USB drive.

Settings menu 1055

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Job Sort Order Job Name* This option

Stored Jobs allows you list
Date the jobs either
alphabetically or
chronologically.

Retain Temporary Do not retain* Sets which

Jobs After Reboot temporary jobs will
Personal jobs only be retained in the
event of a printer
All temporary jobs reboot.

Temporary Job 1-300 Configure global

Storage Limit settings for jobs
Default = 32 that are stored
in the printer
memory.

The Temporary
Job Storage Limit
feature specifies
the number of
temporary jobs
that can be stored
on the printer. The
maximum allowed
value is 300.

Temporary Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
temporary jobs
1 week that can be stored
on the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

Standard Stored Off* Configure global

Job Retention settings for jobs
30 minutes that are stored
in the printer
1 hour memory.

4 hours The Temporary

Stored Job
1 day Retention feature
specifies the
3 days number of
standard jobs that
1 week can be stored on
the printer. The
4 weeks maximum allowed
value is 300.

1056 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Print Number of Copies Range: Sets the default

Options 1-32000 number of copies
for a copy
Default = 1 job. This default
applies when the
Copy function or
the Quick Copy
function is initiated
from the printer
Home screen.

Paper Selection Select from a Configures the

list of sizes default paper size
that the used for print jobs.
printer
supports.

Default Custom X Dimension Range: 3-8.5 Configures the

Paper Size inches default paper size
that is used when
Default = 8.5 the user selects
inches Custom as the
paper size for a
print job.

Y Dimension Range: 5-14

inches

Default = 14
inches

Use Inches Enabled*

Disabled

Output Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate

whether the
2-sided original document
is printed on one
or both sides,
and whether the
copies should be
printed on one or
both sides. For
example, select
the 1-sided original,
2-sided output
option when the
original is printed
on one side, but
you want to make
two-sided copies.

Fit to Page (PDF) On Use this feature to

reduce or enlarge
Off* the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Settings menu 1057

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page (TIFF, On* Use this feature to

BMP, JPG, PNG) reduce or enlarge
Off the image/content
of each page to
fit the currently
selected paper
size.

Quality and Speed Quick View

Normal*

Fine Lines

1058 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Edge Control Automatic* The Edge Control

setting determines
Off how edges are
rendered. Edge
Light Control has
two components:
Normal adaptive
halftoning and
Maximum trapping. Adaptive
halftoning
increases edge
sharpness.
Trapping reduces
the effect
of color-plane
misregistration by
overlapping the
edges of adjacent
objects slightly..

● Automatic:
The printer
uses the
default Edge
Control
setting.

● Off: Turns off

both trapping
and adaptive
halftoning.

● Light: Sets
trapping at a
minimal level,
and adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Normal:
Trapping is at
a medium
level and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

● Maximum:
Trapping is at
the highest
level, and
adaptive
halftoning is
on.

Settings menu 1059

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Halftone Automatic* Use this feature to

control the default
Smooth halftone screen
that the printer
Detail uses for print jobs.

Select from the

following options:

● Automatic:
The halftone
screen
frequency is
picked
automatically
by the printer
to provide the
best print
quality for a
range of
content.

● Smooth: Low
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
smooth
gradients and
vector
graphics.

● Detail: High
frequency
halftone
screen
optimized for
printing
detailed
content, such
as
photographs.

1060 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Neutral Grays Automatic* Neutral Grays

determine the
Black Only method for
creating gray
CMYK Gray colors in text,
graphics, and
photographs.

● Automatic:
The printer
combines
colors for
each
document
element to
provide high-
quality output
for most
color printing
needs.

● Black Only:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by using
only the black
color. This
guarantees
neutral colors
without a
color cast
(tint of a
particular
color).

● CMYK Gray:
Generates
neutral colors
(black and
shades of
gray) by
combining
the printer
colors. This
method
produces
smoother
gradients and
transitions to
other colors,
and it
produces the
darkest black.

Settings menu 1061

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Envelope Off* Use this feature

Rotate to enable rotation
90 Degrees when printing on
envelopes.
180 degrees
Envelopes are
usually loaded
into the printer
as short-edge
feed. However,
if the Envelope
Rotate function is
enabled, you can
load envelopes as
long-edge feed.
The printer rotates
the image to be
printed so that it
appears correctly
on the envelopes.

● Off (default):
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed
direciton.

● 90 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
long-edge
feed
direction.

● 180 degrees:
Load
envelopes in
short-edge
feed direction
with the flap
on the bottom
side.

PCL and Suppress Blank Off* When set to On,

PostScript Pages any blank pages
Settings On will not be printed.

Courier Font Regular* Select which

version of the
Dark Courier font you
want to use. The
factory default
setting is Regular,
which uses an
average stroke
width. The Dark
setting can be
used if a heavier
Courier font is
needed.

1062 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print PS Errors Enabled Use this feature

to select whether
Disabled* a PostScript (PS)
error page is
printed when the
printer encounters
a PS error.

Print PDF Errors Enabled Selects whether a

PDF error page is
Disabled* printed when the
printer encounters
a PDF error.

Personality Auto* Configures the

default print
PCL language or
personality for the
PS printer. Normally
you should not
PDF change the printer
language. If you
change the setting
to a specific
printer language,
the printer does
not automatically
switch from one
language to
another unless
specific software
commands are
sent to it.

PCL Font Settings Font Source Internal Selects the font

source for the
Disk resident user-soft default
font. The list of
available options
varies depending
on the installed
printer options.

Font Number Range: 0-110 Specifies the

font number for
Default = 0 the user-soft
default font using
the source that
is specified in
the Font Source
menu. The printer
assigns a number
to each font and
lists it on the PCL
font list. The font
number displays in
the Font # column
of the printout.

Settings menu 1063

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Font Pitch Range: 0.44-99.99 If the Font Source

option and the
Default = 10 Font Number
setting indicate a
contour font, then
use this feature
to select a default
pitch (for a fixed-
spaced font).

PCL Settings Form Length Range: 5-128 Controls the PCL

print-command
Default = 60 options. PCL is
a set of printer
commands that
HP developed to
provide access to
printer features.

Use the Form

Length feature
to select the
user-soft default
vertical form
length.

Orientation Portrait* Select the

orientation that is
Landscape most often used
for copy or scan
originals. Select
the Portrait option
if the short edge is
at the top or select
the Landscape
option if the long
edge is at the top.

Symbol Set Select from a list Select any one of

of symbol sets. several available
symbol sets from
the control panel.
A symbol set
is a unique
grouping of all the
characters in a
font. The factory
default value
for this option
is PC-8. Either
PC-8 or PC-850
are recommended
for line-draw
characters.

1064 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Append CR No* Configure whether

to LF a carriage return
Yes (CR) is appended
to each line feed
(LF) encountered
in backwards-
compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no
job control). Select
Yes to append the
carriage return.
The default setting
is No. Some
environments,
such as UNIX,
indicate a new line
by using only the
line-feed control
code. This option
allows the user
to append the
required carriage
return to each line
feed.

Media Standard* Use to select

Source and maintain input
Mapping Classic trays by number
when you are not
using the printer
driver, or when the
software program
has no option for
tray selection. The
following options
are available:

Standard: Tray
numbering is
based on newer
HP LaserJet
models.

Classic: Tray
numbering is
based on
HP LaserJet 4 and
older models.

Settings menu 1065

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Print Quality Adjust paper types Select from a list If print quality
of paper types problems occur,
use this menu to
Reset Paper Types adjust the Print
Mode for the
paper type in use.
If a user-defined
type (enabled in
the Embedded
Web Server) has
preprinted content
that makes the
sides of the paper
different, set the
paper type as
Marked Paper.

Customize Colors RGB: Office (sRGB)

NOTE: Color
CMYK: SWOP printers only.

Manage Use Requested Exclusively* Controls how the

Trays Tray printer handles
First jobs that have
specified a
specific input tray.
Two options are
available:

Exclusively: The
printer never
selects a different
tray when the user
has indicated that
a specific tray
should be used,
even if that tray is
empty.

First: The printer

pulls from another
tray if the
specified tray
is empty, even
though the
user specifically
indicated a tray for
the job.

1066 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manually Feed Always* Indicate whether

Prompt a prompt should
Unless loaded appear when the
type or size for a
job does not match
the specified
tray and the
printer pulls from
the multipurpose
tray instead.
Two options are
available:

Always: A prompt
always displays
before using the
multipurpose tray.

Unless loaded: A
message displays
only if the
multipurpose tray
is empty.

Size/Type Prompt Display* Controls whether

the tray
Do not display configuration
message displays
whenever a
tray is closed.
Two options are
available:

Display: Shows the

tray configuration
message when a
tray is closed. The
user is able to
configure the tray
settings directly
from this message.

Do not display:
Prevents the
tray configuration
message from
automatically
appearing.

Settings menu 1067

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Use Another Tray Allow* Use to turn on

or off the control
Do not allow panel prompt to
select another tray
when the specified
tray is empty.
Two options are
available:

Enabled: When
this option is
selected, the user
is prompted either
to add paper to the
selected tray or to
choose a different
tray.

Disabled: When
this option is
selected, the
user is not
given the option
of selecting a
different tray. The
printer prompts
the user to add
paper to the tray
that was initially
selected.

Alternative Off* Use to load

Letterhead Mode letterhead or
On preprinted paper
into the tray the
same way for all
print jobs, whether
you are printing
to one side of
the sheet or to
both sides of the
sheet. When this
option is selected,
load the paper
as you would for
printing on both
sides. See the user
documentation
that came with
the printer for
instructions about
loading letterhead
for printing on both
sides. When this
option is selected,
the printer speed
slows to the
speed required for
printing on both
sides.

1068 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Duplex Blank Automatic* Controls how the

Pages printer handles
Always two-sided jobs
(duplexing). Two
options are
available:

Auto: Enables
Smart Duplexing,
which instructs
the printer not
to process blank
pages.

Yes: Disables
Smart Duplexing
and forces the
duplexer to flip the
sheet of paper
even if it is
printed on only one
side. This might
be preferable for
certain jobs that
use paper types
such as letterhead
or prepunched
paper.

Image Rotation Left to right* The Image

Rotation setting
Right to left allows alternatives
affecting how
Alternate preprinted paper
is loaded into the
tray

NOTE: For
stapled print or
copy jobs, make
sure the Staple/
Collate setting
matches the
Image Rotation
setting as to which
side of paper (left
or right) you want
stapled. If these
setting do not
match each other,
you will need to
change the loading
orientation of the
paper so that the
job is stapled in the
correct spot.

Settings menu 1069

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Override A4/Letter Yes* Prints on letter-size

paper when an A4
No job is sent but
no A4-size paper
is loaded in the
printer (or to print
on A4 paper when
a letter-size job
is sent but no
letter-size paper
is loaded). This
option will also
override A3 with
ledger-size paper
and ledger with
A3-size paper.

Unsupported Size Use default size Use this feature

Behavior automatically* to print documents
that are on a
Prompt for user paper size that the
response product does not
support

● Select Use
default size
automatically
to use the
paper size
selected in
Default Print
Options.

● Select
Prompt for
user
response to
be asked to
use the size
selected in
Default Print
Options or to
cancel the
job.

1070 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Rotate Offset Automatic Use this feature

to separate each
NOTE: When set Off* copy by rotating
to Automatic, its position in
rotation does not the output bin.
occur if: Two options are
available:
● The tray is
specified in Off: Jobs are
the job and printed normally
the User with separating
Selected Tray each copy.
setting is set
to Exclusively. Automatic: Copies
are rotated
● The specified automatically.
bin in the job
does not
support both
orientations.

● The job is
uncollated.

● The job is
collated, but
only has one
sheet per
copy.

● The job has

mixed paper
size or type.

● The user
selects a
different
paper after
the job has
started.

● A job setting
works only
with a
specific
orientation.

● The Job
Offset setting
is available
and set to On.

Tray Priority Tray 4 You can set the

tray priority. If
Tray 3 first setting is
Tray 1, the printer
Tray 2 automatically
prints from Tray 1
Tray 1 after the current
tray runs out of
paper.

Settings menu 1071

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Tray Protection NOTE: You can When this option

select all but one is chosen, the
of the trays. At selected tray will
least one tray be protected. This
must be prevents paper
unselected at all from being fed if
times Use Another Tray
is enabled. If you
Tray 4 select Tray 1, for
example, then Tray
Tray 3 1 is excluded when
using another tray.
Tray 2

Tray 1

Paper Out Action Auto Continue Specify the action

Time-Out the printer will take
when the paper
Auto Continue configured for the
Action print job does not
match the paper
loaded in the input
tray

Scan/Digital Scan+ Image Make optional* Use this menu to

Send Settings Preview configure settings
Require preview that affect scan
apps.
Disable preview

E-mail E-mail Setup Use to configure

Settings settings that
NOTE: Email apply to sending
Settings only documents
through email or
saving documents
to a folder on the
network or on a
USB multi-drive.

The E-mail
Setup Wizard
feature configures
the printer to
send scanned
images as email
attachments. To
open the printer
HP Embedded
Web Server and
set up the email
notification server,
enter the printer IP
address into a Web
browser.

1072 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 1073

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Network Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Folder job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

1074 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

SharePoint Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Settings job options for
Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

Settings menu 1075

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Scan to USB Image Preview Make optional* Defines the default

Drive job options for
Settings Require preview each function. If
you do not specify
Disable preview the job options
when creating
the job, the
default options are
used. For complete
setup, go to the
HP Embedded
Web Server by
typing the IP
address of the
printer into a Web
browser.

Use the Image

Preview feature to
scan a document
and display a
preview before
completing the job.
Select whether
this feature is
available on the
printer.

Make optional: The

feature is optional,
depending on the
user who is signed
in.

Require preview
Previews are
required for all
users.

Disable preview:
Previews are
disabled for all
users.

1076 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Digital Allow Use of a DSS Disabled Configure how

Sending Server the printer
Software Enabled* interacts with the
Setup Allow Transfer to HP Digital Sending
New DSS server Software (DSS)
server. HP DSS
handles digital
sending tasks,
such as faxing,
emailing, and
sending scanned
documents to a
network folder
or USB storage
device.

Use the Allow Use

of a DSS Server
and Allow Transfer
to New DSS
server options
to configure the
printer to use
HP DSS.

Fax Internal Fax Line 1

Modem
Setup Line 2

Fax Send Image Preview

Settings

Fax Dialing Line Monitor Off These settings

Settings Volume control how the
Low* fax modem dials
the outgoing fax
High number when
faxes are sent.

Dialing Mode Tone*

Pulse

Redial 1-5 Minutes

Interval
Default = 5
minutes

Fax Send Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Dialing Prefix

Detect Dial
Tone

Redial on Range: 0-9

Error
Default = 2

Settings menu 1077

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Redial on No Range: 0-2

Answer
Default = 0

Redial on Range: 0-9

Busy
Default = 3

General Fax Send Fax Number Enabled If this feature

Settings Confirmation is enabled, you
Disabled* must enter the fax
number twice.

Fax Line Automatic*

Selection
Line 1

Line 2

PC Fax Send Enabled* Enables users

who have the
Disabled correct driver
installed to send
faxes through the
printer from their
computers.

Error Line 1* Enabled* When error-

Correction correction mode
Mode Line 2* Disabled is enabled
and an error
occurs during fax
transmission, the
printer sends or
receives the error
portion again.

Fax Header Prepend* Use to prepend

or overlay the fax
Overlay header page.

1078 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Billing Code Enable Billing Off* When billing codes

Settings Codes are enabled, a
On prompt displays
that asks the
user to enter the
billing code for an
outgoing fax. This
prompt does not
appear if the Allow
users to edit billing
codes check box is
not checked.

You can also

use the billing
codes report in the
Reports menu to
view the list of the
billing codes that
have been used
for faxes that have
been sent from the
printer. The list is
grouped by billing
code and also
shows fax details.
This feature can be
used for billing or
usage tracking.

Default Specify a default

Billing Code billing code for
faxing. If you
specify a default
billing code, this
code displays in
the Billing Code
field when the
user sends an
outgoing fax. If this
field is blank, no
default billing code
is provided for the
user.

Minimum Range: 1-16 Specify the

Length required length of
Default = 1 the billing code.
Billing codes can
be between 1 and
16 characters long.

Allow users Off

to edit billing
codes On*

Fax Receive Fax Receive Setup Ring Volume Off Use to configure
Settings settings for
Low* receiving faxes.

High

Rings To Range: 1-6

Answer
Default = 1

Settings menu 1079

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fax Receive Fast*

Speed
Medium

Slow

Fax Printing Always store faxes If you have

Schedule concerns about
Always print faxes* the security of
private faxes, use
Use Fax Printing this feature to
Schedule store faxes rather
than having them
automatically
print. Open the Fax
Printing Schedule
sub-menu, and
then you can
choose to always
store faxes, always
print them, or you
can set up a
schedule for each
day of the week.

Schedule + (Add) Print incoming If you are using

faxes a fax printing
Touch this to Edit schedule, use this
set up a fax Store incoming menu to configure
printing Delete (trash faxes when to print
schedule if can) faxes.
you selected Time
the Use Fax
Printing Event Days
Schedule
option.

1080 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Blocked Fax Fax Number The blocked fax

Numbers to Block list can contain
up to 30 numbers.
When the printer
receives a call
from one of
the blocked fax
numbers, it deletes
the incoming fax.
It also logs
the blocked fax
in the activity
log along with
job-accounting
information.

Add blocked
numbers: Enter a
fax number into
the Fax Number
to Block field, and
then touch the
arrow button to
add a new number
to the blocked fax
list.

To remove blocked
numbers: Select a
number and touch
the Delete button
to delete it from
the blocked fax list.

To clear all blocked

numbers: Touch
the Delete All
button to clear all
of the numbers
from the blocked
fax list.

You also can use

the Blocked Fax
List report in the
Information menu
to view the list of
the fax numbers
that have been
blocked on this
printer.

Settings menu 1081

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Default Job Notification Do not notify* Configure

Options to receive
Notify when job notification about
completes the status of a
sent document.
Notify only if job
fails Do not notify:
Turns off this
feature.

Notify when
job completes:
Select to receive
notification for this
job only.

Notify only
if job fails:
Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print E-mail: Select

to receive the
E-mail* notification in an
email. Touch the
text box following
Email Address, and
then enter the
email address for
the notification.

Include NOTE: When

Thumbnail sending an analog
fax, select Include
Thumbnail to
receive a
thumbnail image
of the first page of
the fax in your
notification.

Notification Touch this text

E-mail field, provide the
address email address to
which you want
notifications sent,
and then touch the
OK button.

Stamp On Use this option to

Received add the date, time,
Faxes Off* sender’s phone
number, and page
number to each
page of the faxes
that this printer
receives.

1082 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Fit to Page On* Use to shrink faxes

that are larger
Off than Letter-size or
A4-size so that
they can fit onto
a Letter-size or
A4-size page. If
this feature set
to Disabled, faxes
larger than Letter
or A4 will flow
across multiple
pages.

Paper Tray Automatic*

Select from a list

of the trays.

Out Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First
Page flips up select whether the
original document
is printed on one
side or both sides.

Fax Enable Fax Disabled* Use to forward

Forwarding Forwarding received faxes
Enabled to another fax
machine.

Type of Fax All faxes Use to select the

Job to type of fax jobs
Forward Sent faxes that you want
forwarded.
Received faxes*

Fax IP Fax
Forwarding
Method Internal Modem*

Fax Provide the

Forwarding forwarding phone
Number number, and then
touch the OK
button.

Clear Fax Clears all events

Activity Log from the fax
activity log.

Settings menu 1083

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Manage Low Warning Black 0 %* Set the estimated

Supplies Thresholds Cartridge percentage at
0 %* which the printer
Cyan notifies you when
Cartridge 0 %* a toner cartridge is
very low.
Magenta 0 %*
Cartridge
10 %*
Yellow
Cartridge

Document
feeder kit

Low Warning On Displays a

Threshold message on the
Message Off control panel when
a cartridge is very
low.

Very Low Black Cartridge Stop

Behavior
Color Cartridges Continue

Document Feeder Prompt to continue

Kit

Staples Stop

Prompt to continue

Delay Very Stop Yellow Cartridge 0 After a supply

Low Message pages* reaches the very
Continue low state, the
Magenta warning message
Cartridge 0 pages* can be delayed by
a specified page
Cyan Cartridge 0 count.
pages*

Black Cartridge 0
pages*

Restrict Enable Use this feature

Color Use to enable, restrict,
Disable Color or disable color
printing or copying.
Color if allowed*

1084 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Color/Black Auto Instructs the

Mix printer when
Mostly Color to switch
Pages between color
and monochrome
Mostly Black printing modes for
Pages the best overall
performance.

Auto: Uses the

mode that is
appropriate for
the first page
of the job. If
necessary, the
printer switches
modes during the
middle of a job and
then stays in that
mode until the job
is finished.

Mostly Color
Pages: The printer
uses color mode
for all jobs, even if
the job contains no
color pages.

Mostly Black
Pages: The printer
uses monochrome
mode until it
detects a color
page. The printer
switches back
to monochrome
mode when
it detects
a sequence
of several
monochrome
pages.

Settings menu 1085

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

Store Usage On supplies The Store Usage

Data Data provides
Not on supplies a way to
suppress the toner
cartridges from
storing most of
the information
gathered
exclusively for
the purpose of
understanding the
usage of the
printer. Select
the On supplies
setting to store
the data on the
toner cartridge
memory chip.
Select the Not
on supplies setting
to suppress the
information from
being stored on
the memory chip.

Supply Off* Select to

Protection permanently
Protect Supplies protect cartridges
so that they can
be used only in this
product or fleet of
products.

Cartridge Off* Set Authorized

Policy HP to allow
Authorized HP only genuine HP
cartridges to be
used in this
product.

Reset Document Feeder After replacing a

Supplies Kit supply kit, select it
from the list and
touch "Reset."

Manage Job Offset On

Stapler/
Stacker Off

Developer Use this menu

Options to configure
developer settings
for the product.

Networking Ethernet INFORMATION PRINT YES Yes: Prints a page

SECURITY that contains the
REPORT NO* current security
settings on the
HP Jetdirect print
server.

No: A security
settings page is
not printed.

1086 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

TCP/IP HOST NAME Use the arrow An alphanumeric

buttons to edit the string, up to
host name. 32 characters,
used to identify
NPIXXXXXX* the printer. This
name is listed on
the HP Jetdirect
configuration
page. The default
host name is
NPIxxxxxx, where
xxxxxx is the
last six digits of
the LAN hardware
(MAC) address.

IPV4 CONFIG BOOTP Specifies the

SETTINGS METHOD method that TCP/
DHCP* IPv4 parameters
will be configured
AUTO IP on the HP Jetdirect
print server.
MANUAL
Bootp (Bootstrap
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a BootP server.

DHCP (Dynamic
Host Configuration
Protocol): Use
for automatic
configuration from
a DHCPv4 server.
If selected and
a DHCP lease
exists, the DHCP
Release menu and
the DHCP Renew
menu are available
to set DHCP lease
options.

Auto IP: Use

for automatic
link-local IPv4
addressing. An
address in the
form 169.254.x.x
is assigned
automatically.

If you set this

option to the
Manual setting,
use the Manual
Settings menu to
configure TCP/IPv4
parameters.

DHCP YES
RELEASE
NO*

Settings menu 1087

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCP YES
RENEW
NO*

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

Secondary Range: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
Default = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

IPV6 ENABLE OFF Use this item to

SETTINGS enable or disable
ON* IPv6 operation on
the print server.

Off: IPv6 is
disabled.

On: IPv6 is
enabled.

ADDRESS MANUAL Use this item

SETTINGS to enable
and manually
ENABLE configure a TCP/
IPv6 address.
ADDRESS

1088 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

DHCPV6 ROUTER Router Specified:

POLICY SPECIFIED The stateful
auto-configuration
ROUTER method to be used
UNAVAILABLE* by the print server
is determined by
ALWAYS a router. The
router specifies
whether the print
server obtains
its address,
its configuration
information, or
both from a
DHCPv6 server.

Router
Unavailable: If
a router is
not available,
the print server
should attempt to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

Always: Whether a
router is available,
the print server
always attempts to
obtain its stateful
configuration from
a DHCPv6 server.

PRIMARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = a Primary Domain
xxx.xxx.xx.xx Name System
(DNS) Server.

SECONDARY RANGE: 0-255 Specify the IP

DNS address (n.n.n.n) of
DEFAULT = 0.0.0.0 a Secondary DNS
Server.

Settings menu 1089

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

PROXY Specifies the proxy

SERVER server to be
used by embedded
applications in the
printer. A proxy
server is typically
used by network
clients for Internet
access. It caches
Web pages, and
provides a degree
of Internet security
for those clients.

To specify a
proxy server, enter
its IPv4 address
or fully-qualified
domain name. The
name can be up to
255 octets.

For some
networks, you
might need to
contact your
Internet Service
Provider (ISP) for
the proxy server
address.

PROXY PORT DEFAULT = 00080 Enter the port

number used by
the proxy server
for client support.
The port number
identifies the port
reserved for proxy
activity on your
network, and can
be a value from 0
to 65535.

IDLE DEFAULT = 0270 The time period,

TIMEOUT in seconds, after
which an idle
TCP print data
connection is
closed (default
is 270 seconds,
0 disables the
timeout).

SECURITY SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED*

HTTPS OPTIONAL

IPSEC KEEP

DISABLE*

FIREWALL KEEP

DISABLE*

1090 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-13 Settings menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Fifth level Values Description

802.1X RESET

KEEP*

ANNOUNCE ENABLE*
MENT AGENT
DISABLE

RESET YES
SECURITY
NO*

FIPS KEEP

RESET & REBOOT

DEVICE

LINK SPEED AUTO*

10T HALF

10T FULL

10T AUTO

100TX HALF

100TX FULL

100TX AUTO

1000T FULL

I/O Timeout 15* seconds

Range: 5 to 300

Copy menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Copy menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-14 Copy menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Sides Original Sides 1-sided* Use to indicate whether

the original document
2-sided is printed on one or
both sides.

Output Sides 1-sided Use to indicate whether

the copies should be
2-sided printed on one or both
sides.

Copy menu 1091

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

Quick Sets and Load

Defaults
Save

Options Sides Original Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Output Sides 1-sided

2-sided

Color/Black (color Automatically detect* Select how the copy

printers only) should be printed.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Prints color documents
in color, and black and
white documents in
black and white. For
mixed documents, the
printer will determine
whether to print in
color or black and
white.

Color: Prints
documents in color.

Black: Prints
documents in black
and white or grayscale.

1092 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document

Secure ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
the page.

● Secure:
Background text
and pattern that
is barely visible on
the first copy of a
document.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Center stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Right be printed there.
Some positions might
Bottom Left require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Center predefined options.

Bottom Right

Copy menu 1093

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Image Overlay Add New Image Use this feature to add

an image to each page
None* of a copy job.

After scanning and

saving the desired
image from the control
panel, this image will
be placed behind the
content on each page
of the copy job.

NOTE: To use this

feature, the images
must be scanned from
the scanner glass.

Follow these steps to

copy using an overlay
image.

1. Touch Image
Overlay, touch
Add New Image,
and then follow
the on-screen
instructions to
scan the desired
image from the
scanner glass.

TIP: For best

results, use the
same paper size
and the same
orientation for the
saved image and
the copy job.

2. Select the saved

image that you
want to add to
each page of the
copy job.

3. Start the copy

job, or select the
Preview option
to preview the
output.

Staple None* Sets the position of the

staple on the page.
Top left angled

Two left

Two to

Top right angled

Two right

Top left or right

1094 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Hole Punch None*

Three left

Two left

Three top

Two top

Three right

Two right

Two bottom

Four left

Four right

Four left or top

C-fold Max sheets folded Controls the C-fold

together action of the booklet
maker.
Inward fold; opens left
or up

Inward fold; opens right

or down

Outward fold; opens

left or up

Outward fold; opens

right or down

Scan mode Standard Document Book Mode allows the

user to scan pages
Book Mode from a book.

2–sided ID 2–sided ID allows the

user to scan both sides
of an identification
card onto one sheet.

Copy menu 1095

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Reduce/Enlarge Automatic* Use to scale the

size of the document
Manual up or down. Select
one of the predefined
● 25% percentages, or select
the Scaling field and
● 50% type a percentage
between 25 and
● 63% (Letter to 400. The Auto option
Statement) automatically scales
the image to fit the
● 64% (11x17 to paper size in the tray.
Letter)
NOTE: To reduce the
● 77% (11x17 to image, select a scaling
Legal) percentage that is less
than 100. To enlarge the
● 78% (Legal to image, select a scaling
Letter) percentage that is
greater than 100.
● 85% (Letter to
Exec)

● 100% (Letter to
Legal)

● 105% (Exec to
Letter)

● 122% (Legal to
11x17)

● 131% (Letter to
11x17)

● 131% (Statement
to Letter)

● 150%

● 200%

● 400%

● Custom1

● Custom2

Image Shift Off* Use this feature to

shift the content of
Automatically center the page. This is useful
for moving the image
Manual away from punched
holes, staples, folds, or
binding edges.

Original Size Select from a list of Describes the page

sizes that the printer size of the original
supports. document.

1096 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Paper Selection Paper Size For the best color and

image quality, select
Paper Type the appropriate paper
type from the control
Paper Tray panel menu or from the
print driver.

Booklet Booklet Format (Checkbox) Use to copy two or

more pages onto one
sheet of paper so you
can fold the sheets
in the center to form
a booklet. The printer
arranges the pages
in the correct order.
For example, if the
original document has
eight pages, the printer
prints pages 1 and 8 on
the same sheet.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.
Portrait orientation
means the short edge
of the page is along
the top. Landscape
orientation means the
long edge of the page
is along the top. In
the Orientation area,
select whether the
original document has
a portrait or landscape
orientation.

Pages per Sheet One (1) Copies multiple pages

onto one sheet of
Two (2) paper.

Four (4) NOTE: Before using

this screen, use the
Content Orientation
screen to describe the
original document
orientation.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing the
sharpness could make
text appear crisper,
but decreasing it could
make photographs
appear smoother.

Copy menu 1097

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Darkness Use to improve the

overall quality of the
copy.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Background Cleanup Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Automatic Tone

Auto Paper Color

Removal

Optimize Text/Picture Text Use this setting to

optimize the output for
Mixed* a particular type of
content.
Printed picture
Use Text for documents
Photograph that contain mostly
text. This option is
also best suited for
scanning documents
with highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for

documents that
contain a mix of text
and graphics.

Use Printed picture

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books. If you
see bands of irregular
intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed
picture to improve the
quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

1098 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Erase Edges Front Side Use this menu item

to remove blemishes,
● Top edge such as dark borders
or staple marks, by
● Bottom edge cleaning the specified
edges of the scanned
● Left edge image. In each of
the text boxes enter
● Right edge the measurements, in
millimeters or inches,
Back Side for how much of the top
edge, bottom edge, left
● Top edge edge, and right edge to
clean.
● Bottom edge

● Left edge

● Right edge

Collate Collate on (Sets in If you are making more

page order)* than one copy, select
the Collate on (Sets
Collate off (Pages in page order) option
grouped) to assemble the pages
in the correct order in
each set of copies.

Select the Collate off

(Pages grouped) option
to group the same
pages together. For
example, if you are
making five copies of
an original document
that has two pages,
all five first pages
would be grouped
together and all five
second pages would
be grouped together.

Blank Page Off* When enabled, blank

Suppression pages found in the
Suppress Blank Pages original document are
not included in the
output document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning
Automatically to automatically
Straighten on straighten the scanned
image when pages
are skewed during
scanning.

Copy menu 1099

 Table 3-14 Copy menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Output Bin Automatically select

Output bin 1

Output bin 2

Alternate bin

Lower booklet bin

Standard bin

Upper bin

Middle bin

Scan menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Scan menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-15 Scan menu

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Email File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
● PDF* file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
● PDF/A sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
● JPEG

● TIFF

● MTIFF

● XPS

Resolution

● 600 dpi

● 400 dpi

● 200 dpi*

● 150 dpi

● 75 dpi

Quality and File Size

● Very Low (smaller file)

● Low

● Medium*

● High

● Very High (larger file)

1100 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan menu 1101

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of sizes that Describes the page size of
the printer supports. the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

1102 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 1103

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed Picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed Picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

1104 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum Pages Per File output into multiple files.

Blank Page Separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode Page Separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do Not Notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● SelectDo Not Notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

Scan menu 1105

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan to Folder Paths

Network
Folder

File Name

Quick Sets
and Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original 1-sided* Use this feature to describe

Sides the layout for each side of the
2-sided original document

Pages Flip Up Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

1106 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard document* Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output

● Prompt for additional Use Standard document to

pages scan regular documents
using the default scan
settings.

Use Prompt for additional

pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Orientation Portrait* For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Landscape the way the content of
the original document is
placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Scan menu 1107

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

1108 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Text Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Mixed* type of content.

Printed picture Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Photograph option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank being included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan menu 1109

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

● White page Touch the Create Multiple

Files checkbox. Enter the
● Red/pink page maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● Green page Maximum pages per file field.

● Yellow page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Any color page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

Scan to USB Folder Path

Drive

File Name

Quick Set
Defaults

Options File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

1110 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Original sides 1-sided Use to describe the layout

for each side of the
2-sided original document. First
select whether the original
document is printed on one
side or both sides. Then touch
the Orientation setting to
indicate whether the original
has portrait or landscape
orientation. If it is printed on
both sides, also select the
2-sided format that matches
the original document.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of
the page is along the top.
In the Orientation area,
select whether the original
document has a portrait or
landscape orientation.

Use Automatically Detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically Detect setting.
Using Automatically Detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 1111

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Darkness Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Contrast Adjust the Contrast setting

to increase or decrease
the difference between the
lightest and darkest color on
the page.

Background Adjust the Background

Cleanup Cleanup setting if you are
having trouble copying a faint
image.

Sharpness Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or soften
the image. For example,
increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

1112 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automatic The printer automatically

Tone adjusts the Darkness,
Contrast, and Background
Cleanup settings to the most
appropriate for the scanned
document.

Auto Paper
Color
Removal
(Flow models
only)

Default Select this to make the

selected Image Adjustment
setting the default value.

Optimize Manually Adjust* Use to optimize the output for

Text/Picture a particular type of content.
Text You can optimize the output
for text, printed pictures, or a
Printed picture mixture.

Photograph Manually Adjust: Use to

manually optimize the setting
for text or for pictures.

Text: Use to optimize the text

portion of the copy when text
and/or pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use for

line drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books.

Photograph: Best suited for

making copies of printed
pictures.

Erase Edges Use inches Use this menu item to remove

blemishes, such as dark
Back side erase borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
Front side erase of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.

Cropping Do not crop Use this menu item to

Options automatically crop the scan
Crop to content for digital sending. Use the
Crop to content option to
Crop to paper scan the smallest possible
area that has detectable
content.

Scan menu 1113

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Blank Page Off* Use to prevent blank pages

Suppression in the original document from
Suppress Blank Pages being included in the output
document.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically retry
(E877, E826 z bundles
only)

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
● White page Maximum pages per file field.

● Red/pink page When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
● Green page is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
● Yellow page ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
● Any color page are generated per original
document.
Barcode page separator
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z When scanning to email,
bundles only) the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify Configure to receive

notification about the status
Notify when job completes of a sent document.

Notify only if job fails Do not notify: Turns off this

feature.

Notify when job completes:

Select to receive notification
for this job only.

Notify only if job fails: Select

to receive notification only
if the job is not sent
successfully.

1114 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Include Select Include Thumbnail to

Thumbnail receive a thumbnail image of
the first page of the job in
your notification.

Scan to Job Sides Original Sides

Storage
● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Output Sides

● 1-sided

● 2-sided

Color/Black Automatically detect Use to enable or disable color

scanning.
Color*
Automatically detect:
Black/Gray Automatically scans
documents in color if at least
Black one page has color.

Color: Scans documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Scans
documents in grayscale.

Black: Scans documents in

black and white with a
compressed file size.

Scan Mode Standard document*

Book

2-sided ID

Reduce/ Automatic*
Enlarge
Manual

Image Shift Off*

Automatically center

Manual

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Paper Paper Size

Selection
Paper Type

Paper Tray

Booklet Booklet Format

Scan menu 1115

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Pages per One

Sheet
Two

Four (right, then down)

Four (down, then right)

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjust Sharpness to clarify

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

1116 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited
for scanning documents with
Photograph highlighter marks.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Collate Collate*

Collate off

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten on straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Scan menu 1117

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Scan to Save Use this feature to save

Sharepoint Settings the current settings as the
default settings for an app or
to create a new Quick Set.
First configure the desired
options. Then touch Save
and choose to either save
the current settings as the
default settings for the app or
as a new Quick Set.

File Type and File Type Select File Type and

Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

PDF Encryption

Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

1118 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

Scan menu 1119

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

1120 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Content option to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Scan menu 1121

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator (E877, Touch the Create Multiple

E826, E785, E731 z bundles Files checkbox. Enter the
only) maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Barcode page separator Maximum Pages Per File field.
(E877, E826, E785, E731 z
bundles only) When a file type that does
not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum six of
the email also interacts with
this feature. In this case, the
more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Remote Scan Use the Remote Scan

Request Request app to scan and
send documents requested
by a remote computer.

Remote scans are initiated on

a computer with applications
such as TWAIN Software
or other AirPrint Compatible
devices

1122 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan+ Common Scan Redact and Sign Scan Shortcuts can be used
Shortcuts to quickly set up a job for
OCR specialty tasks.

Document Separation

Barcode Separation

Sticky Notes and Envelopes

2-sided ID

Auto Sense Fastest Scan Speeds Auto Sense Presets make it

Preset easy to optimize a scan job
Best Productivity for fastest scan speeds or
(Recommended) best productivity.

● Fastest Scan Speeds

disables some
automatic features,
which requires less
image processing and
allows scanning at
the fastest speeds
available.

● Best Productivity
enables several
automatic features,
including automatic
sides, automatic content
orientation, automatic
image straightening,
and automatic image
optimization.

NOTE: Unlike Quick Sets,

Auto Sense Preset presets do
not affect destinations and
recipients.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add a

watermark to the document
Text
● Text: Text is placed at the
center of the page.

Stamps Top Left Select up to six preset

positions for a stamp
Top Center and configure the content
that will be printed there.
Top Right Some positions might require
selecting the stamp from a
Bottom Left list of predefined options.

Bottom Center

Bottom Right

Scan menu 1123

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use this feature to receive

notification about the status
Notify When Job Completes of the sent document.

Notify Only If Job Fails ● Select Do not notify to

turn off this feature

● Select Notify When Job

Completes to receive
notification for this job
only.

● Select Notify Only If

Job Fails to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully

Scan Color/Black Automatically detect color or If Automatically detect color

black or black is selected and the
current settings do not allow
Automatically detect color or scanning in black, pages will
gray be scanned in grayscale.

Color

Black/Gray

Black

Create Off* Use this item to enable the

Multiple Files product to separate scanned
Maximum pages per file output into multiple files.

Blank page separator Touch the Create Multiple

Files check box. Enter the
Barcode page separator maximum number of pages
for each output file in the
Maximum Pages Per File field.

When a file type that does

not support multiple pages
is selected, such as JPEG
or TIFF, this feature is
ignored. When scanning front
and back sides, two pages
are generated per original
document.

When scanning to email,

the configuration option that
specifies the maximum size
of the email also interacts
with this feature. In this case,
the more restrictive of the two
settings will take effect.

Signing and Signing A digitally signed email

Encryption ensures the recipient that you
Encrypt sent this email. An encrypted
message can be opened only
by the recipient.

1124 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Cropping Do not crop* Use this menu item to specify

Options a method to automatically
Crop to Paper crop the scan for digital
sending. Use the Crop to
Crop to Content Paper option to crop the scan
to the edge of the document
being scanned. Use the Crop
to Contentoption to scan the
smallest possible area that
has detectable content.

NOTE: The Crop to Paper

option is effective only when
you scan pages by using the
document feeder. It has an
unpredictable effect for
pages that you scan from the
glass.

Copy Number of Copies (1 to 9999) Use this feature to set the

Copies number of printed copies.

Output Sides 1-sided* Use this feature to set the

layout and format for the
2-sided output.

Pages flip-up Select from the following

options:

● Use 1-sided for originals

that are printed on one
side of the page.

● Use 2-sided for originals

that are printed on both
sides of the page.

● Select Pages flip-up for

originals othat flip on the
top/bottom edge of the
page, such as calendars.

Color/Black Automatically detect* Automatically detect: Prints

color documents in color, and
Color black and white documents
in black and white. For mixed
Black/Gray documents, the product will
determine whether to print in
color or black and white.

Color: Prints documents in

color.

Black/Gray: Prints documents

in grayscale.

Scan menu 1125

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Paper Paper Size Use this feature to select the

Selection paper for the job.
Paper Type
Use Paper Size or Paper
Paper Tray Type to enable the printer
to automatically find the
selected paper size or type.

Use Paper Tray to select a

source tray. Depending on the
administrator's setting, the
product will either print from
that tray first, or it will limit
printing from that tray.

Fax Resolution Standard (100 x 200dpi) Select the resolution for

outgoing faxes. If you
Fine (200 x 200dpi) increase the resolution, faxes
might be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x 300dpi) could transmit more slowly.

Auto Sense Original Auto (keep sides with content) Use this feature to describe
Sides the layout for each side of the
1-sided* original document

2-sided Use 1-sided for originals that

are printed on one side of the
Pages Flip Up page.

Use 2-sided for originals that

are printed on both sides of
the page.

Select Pages Flip Up for

originals that flip on the top/
bottom edge of the page,
such as calendars.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the page size
supported sizes. of the original document.

Content Automatically detect For some features to work

Orientation correctly, you must specify
Portrait* the way the content of
the original document is
Landscape placed on the page. Portrait
orientation means the short
edge of the page is along the
top. Landscape orientation
means the long edge of the
page is along the top.

Use Automatically detect

when the format of the
original document is known
to specifically work with the
Automatically detect setting.
Using Automatically detect is
not recommended in other
circumstances.

1126 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Image Sharpness Use this feature to improve

Adjustment the quality of the scanned
Darkness image.

Contrast Adjusting Sharpness clarifies

or soften the image.
Background Cleanup Increasing the sharpness
could make text appear
Automatic Tone crisper, but decreasing it
could make photographs
Auto Paper Color Removal appear smoother.

Adjusting Darkness
increases or decreases the
amount of white and black in
the colors.

Adjusting Contrast increases

or decreases the difference
between the lightest and
darkest color on the page.

Adjust Background Cleanup

to improve copying a faint
image.

Automatic Tone options

automatically adjusts
the Darkness, Contrast,
and Background Cleanup
settings.

The Auto Paper Color

Removal option dynamically
adjusts the color balance and
lightness of the background.
Slide left: Most white paper
with normal brightness is
output as white background
in the scanned output.
Slider right: Very colorful
paper/background colors are
converted to white in the
scanned output.

Scan menu 1127

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Optimize Automatically detect Use this setting to optimize

Text/Picture the output for a particular
Text type of content.

Mixed* Use Text for documents that

contain mostly text. This
Printed picture option is also best suited for
scanning documents with a
Photograph highlighter.

Use Mixed for documents

that contain a mix of text and
graphics.

Use Printed picture for line

drawings and preprinted
images, such as magazine
clippings or pages from
books. If you see bands of
irregular intensity on copies,
try selecting Printed Picture
to improve the quality.

Use Photograph for

photographic prints.

Automaticall Off* Enable this feature prior to

y Straighten scanning to automatically
Automatically Straighten straighten the scanned image
when pages are skewed
during scanning.

Multi-feed Off Use this feature to prevent

Detection multiple pages being fed
On* through the document feeder
during document scans.
● Automatically Retry
(E877. E826 z bundles
only)

Blank Page Off* Use this feature to prevent

Suppression blank pages in the original
Suppress Blank Pages document from being
included in the output
document.

Advanced File Type and File Type Select File Type and
Resolution Resolution to select the
Resolution file format for the scanned
image. Each file type has
Quality and File Size sub-settings, some of which
affect resolution and file size.
High Compression (smaller
file)

DF EncryptionP

1128 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-15 Scan menu (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Scan Mode Standard Document Use this feature to provide

information about the type of
Book document to be scanned and
to change the format of the
2-sided ID output.

Prompt for Additional Pages Use Standard Document

to scan regular documents
using default scan settings.

Use Prompt for Additional

Pages to create a single job
from multiple scans without
having to do a preview.

Use Book to scan the pages

of an open book and to print
the pages on separate sheets
of paper.

Use 2-sided ID to scan both

sides of an ID and print them
on one side of a sheet of
paper.

Erase Edges Front Side Use this feature to remove

blemishes, such as dark
● Top Edge borders or staple marks, by
cleaning the specified edges
● Bottom Edge of the scanned image. In each
of the text boxes enter the
● Left Edge measurements, in millimeters
or inches, for how much of the
● Right Edge top edge, bottom edge, left
edge, and right edge to clean.
Back Side

● Top Edge

● Bottom Edge

● Left Edge

● Right Edge

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed)

To display: At the printer control panel, select the Fax menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Dialing Prefix

Fax Recipients

Quick Sets and

Defaults

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1129

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Options Original Sides 1-sided* Use to describe

the layout for each
2-sided side of the original
document. First select
whether the original
document is printed
on one side or both
sides. Then touch the
Orientation setting to
indicate whether the
original has portrait or
landscape orientation.
If it is printed on both
sides, also select the
2-sided format that
matches the original
document.

Watermark None* Use this feature to add

a watermark to the
Text document.

● Watermark Text ● Text: Text is placed

at the center of
● Text Font the page.

● Text Size NOTE: Flow models

only.
● Text Color

Stamps None* Select up to six

preset positions for a
Top Left stamp and configure
the content that will
Top Center be printed there.
Some positions might
Top Right require selecting the
stamp from a list of
Bottom Left predefined options.

Bottom Center NOTE: Flow models

only.
Bottom Right

Resolution Standard (100 x Select the resolution

200dpi)* for outgoing faxes.
If you increase the
Fine (200 x 200dpi) resolution, faxes might
be clearer but they
Superfine (300 x could transmit more
300dpi) slowly. Some file types,
for example a file that
will be processed with
OCR, require a specific
resolution. When these
file types are selected,
the Resolution setting
might be automatically
changed to a valid
value.

Original Size Select from a list of Use to describe the

sizes that the printer page size of the
supports. original document.

1130 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Content Orientation Orientation Portrait* For some features to

work correctly, you
Landscape must specify the way
the content of the
original document is
placed on the page.

Portrait: This setting

means the short edge
of the page is along the
top.

Landscape: This
setting means the long
edge of the page is
along the top.

Image Adjustment Sharpness Use to improve the

overall quality of
Darkness the copy. Adjust
the darkness and
Contrast sharpness, and you
can use the
Background Cleanup Background Cleanup
setting to remove
Automatic tone faint images from
the background or
Auto Paper Color to remove a light
Removal background color.

Adjust the Darkness

setting to increase or
decrease the amount
of white and black in
the colors.

Adjust the Contrast

setting to increase
or decrease the
difference between the
lightest and darkest
color on the page.

Adjust the Background

Cleanup setting if you
are having trouble
copying a faint image.

Adjust the Sharpness

setting to clarify or
soften the image. For
example, increasing
the sharpness could
make text appear
crisper, but decreasing
it could make
photographs appear
smoother.

Fax menu (when a fax option is installed) 1131

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Optimize Text/Picture Manually Adjust* Optimize For: Optimizes the output

for a particular type
Automatically detect Text of content. You can
optimize the output for
NOTE: Flow models Mixed text, printed pictures, or
only. a mixture.
Printed picture
Manually Adjust: Use to
Photograph manually optimize the
setting for text or for
pictures.

Text: Use to optimize

the text portion of the
copy where text and/or
pictures are on the
original.

Printed picture: Use

for line drawings
and preprinted images,
such as magazine
clippings or pages
from books.

Photograph: Best
suited for making
copies of printed
pictures.

Fax Line Selection Automatic* HP MFP Analog Dual

Fax 810 Accessory
Line 1 needs to be installed

Line 2

Blank Page Disabled* Prevents blank pages

Suppression in the original
Enabled document from being
included in the output
document.

Automatically Off* Enable this feature

Straighten prior to scanning to
Automatically automically straighten
Straighten* the scanned image
when pages are
skewed during
scanning.

1132 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-16 Fax menu (fax models only) (continued)

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Notification Do not notify* Use to receive

notification about the
Notify when job status of a sent
completes document.

Notify only if job fails Do Not Notify: Turns off

this feature.

Notify When Job

Completes: Select to
receive notification for
this job only.

Notify Only If Job

Fails: Select to receive
notification only if
the job is not sent
successfully.

Print menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Print menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-17 Print Options menu

First level Second level Values Description

Print from Job Storage Stored Job to Print Untitled Print a job stored on the
printer.
Stored Faxes

Print from USB Drive USB File to Print Choose file to print on USB Print a job stored on a USB
drive. drive.

Fax Polling Fax Polling Number Use the Fax Polling app to
print faxes sent to another fax
machine.

Supplies menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Supplies menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-18 Supplies menu

First level Values Description

Supplies Summary

Black Cartridge Status

Cyan Cartridge Order HP Part

Magenta Cartridge Pages Printed

Yellow Cartridge Approximate Pages Remaining

Print menu 1133

 Table 3-18 Supplies menu (continued)

First level Values Description

Toner Collection Unit Status

Document Feeder Kit Order HP Part

Stapler 1

Trays menu
To display: At the printer control panel, select the Trays menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-19 Trays menu

First level Second level Values Description

Tray 1 Size Select paper size from a list Choose the paper size for the
of supported sizes. tray
Tray 2–x

Type Select paper type from a list Choose the paper type for
of supported types. the tray.

Troubleshooting menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Support Tools menu, and then select the
Troubleshooting menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

1134 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-20 Troubleshooting

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Configuration/ ● Settings Select

Status Pages Menu Map the configuration/
Status reports to
● Current review, and then
Settings touch the Print or
Page View button.

● Configuration
Page

● How to
Connect
Page

● Supplies
Status Page

● sage Page

● File Directory
Page

● Web Services
Status Page

● Color Usage
Job Log

Reports

Other Pages ● Demonstratio

n Page

● RGB Samples

● CMYK
Samples

● PCL Font List

● PS Font List

Event Log Print Prints the 50 most

recent events in
the Event Log.
For each event,
the printed log
shows the error
number, page
count, error code,
and description or
personality.

Paper Path Page View Shows how many

pages were
Print printed from each
tray.

Troubleshooting menu 1135

 Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Fax (Fax is Fax T.30 Trace Print T.30 Report Print Use to print
optional) or configure the
fax T.30 trace
report. T.30 is
the standard
that specifies
handshaking,
protocols, and
error correction
between fax
machines.

When to Print Never Configure the

Report automatically T.30 report to
print* print after certain
events. You can
Print after every choose to print
fax the report after
every fax job, every
Print only after fax fax job sent, every
send jobs fax job received,
every send error,
Print after any fax or every receive
error error.

Print only after fax

send errors

Print only after fax

receive errors

Fax V.34 Normal* Use to disable

V.34 modulations if
Off several fax failures
have occurred
or if phone line
conditions require
it.

Fax Speaker Mode Normal* Used by a

technician to
Diagnostic evaluate and
diagnose fax
issues by listening
to the sounds of
fax modulations

Fax Log Entries On The standard fax

log includes basic
Off* information such
as the time and
whether the fax
was successful.
The detailed
fax log shows
the intermediate
results of the redial
process not shown
in the standard fax
log.

Print Quality Pages Print Fuser Test Print Use to print pages
Page that help you
resolve problems
with print quality.

1136 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-20 Troubleshooting (continued)

First level Second level Third level Fourth level Values Description

Diagnostic Tests

Continuous Scan 2-sided

Run Fax Test Start Use this menu

to perform a
test on specific
components within
the product to
determine whether
the components
are functioning
correctly.

Retrieve Insert a US drive Create files

Diagnostic Data into the USB that contain
port. The exported information about
data might the product that
contain personally can help identify
identifiable the cause of
information. problems.

Generate Debug Start

Data

Maintenance menu
Learn about the Maintenance menu.

Backup/Restore menu
To display: At the product control panel, select Support Tools and then Maintenance, and then select the
Backup/Restore menu.

In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-21 Backup/Restore menu

First level Second level Third level Values Description

Backup Data Enable Scheduled Backup Time Enter a time

Backups

Days Between Enter the number of

Backups days

Backup Now

Export Last Backup

Restore Data Insert a USB drive that

contains the backup
file.

Calibration/Cleaning menu
To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the Calibrate/
Cleaning menu.

Maintenance menu 1137

 In the following table, asterisks (*) indicate the factory default setting.

Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu

First level Second level Values Description

Calibration/Cleaning Page Print Use to process the cleaning

page that was created by
using the Create Cleaning
Page menu. The process
takes up to 1.5 minutes.

Calibration Start The product automatically

calibrates itself at various
times. However, you can
calibrate the product
immediately if you see
problems with print quality.
Use this feature to perform a
full calibration, which can take
up to three minutes. Use this
calibration if the color layers
seem to be shifted on the
page.

Before calibrating the

product, make sure that the
Ready indicator displays on
the control-panel display. If
a job is in progress, the
calibration occurs when that
job is complete.

1138 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-22 Calibrate/Cleaning menu (continued)

First level Second level Values Description

Delay Calibration at Wake/ No Delay Controls the timing of power-

Power On on calibration when the
Delay 15 minutes product wakes up or is turned
on.

Wake: Select if you are not

using the feature and want to
print jobs immediately when
the product wakes up or is
turned on, before calibration
begins.

No: The product will calibrate

immediately when it wakes up
or is turned on. The product
will not print any jobs until it
finishes calibrating.

Yes: Enables the product that

is asleep to accept print
jobs before it calibrates. It
might start calibrating before
it has printed all the jobs
it has received. This option
allows quicker printing when
coming out of sleep mode or
when you turn the product
on, but print quality might be
reduced.

NOTE: For the best results,

allow the product to calibrate
before printing. Print jobs
performed before calibration
might not be of the highest
quality.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu

To display: At the product control panel, select the Maintenance menu, and then select the USB
Firmware Upgrade menu.

Insert a USB storage device with a firmware upgrade bundle into the USB port, and follow the on-screen
instructions.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Paper jam locations

Learn about paper jam locations.

USB Firmware Upgrade menu 1139

 1

1 Tray 1

2 Tray 2

3 Tray 3

13.A1 tray 1 paper jam

Learn about A1 tray 1 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to the Tray 1. When a
jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing the jam.

● 13.A1.XX Jam in tray 1

1. . Gently remove the jammed paper.

1140 Chapter 3 Problem solving

2. . Open and then close the front door to resume
printing.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam

Learn about A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jams.

Use the following procedure to check for paper in all possible jam locations related to Tray 2 or Tray 3.
When a jam occurs, the control panel might display a message and an animation that assists in clearing
the jam.

● 13.A2.XX Jam in tray 2

● 13.A3.XX Jam in tray 3

CAUTION: The fuser can be hot while the printer is in use. Wait for the fuser to cool before handling it.

NOTE: The procedure to clear a paper jam in Tray 3 is the same as for Tray 2. Only Tray 2 is shown
here.

1. . Open the right door.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 1141

 2. . Gently remove any jammed paper.

3. . Close the right door.

1142 Chapter 3 Problem solving

4. . Open the tray.

5. . Gently remove any jammed paper.

13.A2, 13.A3 tray 2, tray 3 paper jam 1143

 6. . Close the tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Clear paper jams in the Bottom HCI

Learn about clearing paper jams in the bottom HCI.

1. Open the HCI.

1144 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 2. Remove any jammed paper.

3. Close the HCI.

Service mode (tech mode; du models)

Learn about service mode (tech mode; du models).

Entering service mode

Learn about entering service mode.

1. From the control panel, select Support tools and then Service.

2. Enter the Service PIN ID.

● 04087617

Service mode (tech mode; du models) 1145

 3. Select Service tools.

Figure 3-34 Service tools view

Service mode menu tree

Learn about the service mode menu tree.

Figure 3-35 Information

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Information General Engine Board Serial

Number

Supply Status Customer Replacement Toner (CMYK)

Unit

Field Replacement Unit Imaging Unit (CMYK)

1146 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Development Unit (CMYK)

TCU

Intermediate transfer belt

(ITB)

ITB cleaner

Transfer roller/T2 roller

Fuser

Tray x rollers

Flow ADF Roller

Software Version System Firmware Version

Main Firmware Version

Engine Firmware Version

Boot ROM Version

File System Version

Flow ADF Firmware Version

Finisher Version

Scanner Version

Scan Control Version

Tray 2 Version

Tray 3 Version

Tray 4 Version

Tray 5 Version

Tray 6 Version

EP Version

Fuser Version

TR Version

Toner Version

Print CMS Version

Copy CMS Version

Scan CMS Version

Print Reports Supplies Information

Full Color Plane

Registration

Color Plane Registration

Service mode menu tree 1147

 Figure 3-36 Maintenance counts

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Maintenance counts Part Replacement Count Toner Cartridge (CMYK)

Imaging Unit (CMYK)

Development Unit (CMYK)

Image Transfer Belt (ITB)

ITB cleaner

Fuser

Tray x rollers

Flow ADF Pickup Roller

1148 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-37 Diagnostics

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Diagnostics Engine Diagnostics Engine NVM Initialization

Engine NVM Read/Write

Engine Test Routines

Scanner Diagnostics Shading Test Shade and Print Report

Print Last Shade Report

Shade and Print Report

(Flow ADF)

Print Last Shade Report

(Flow ADF)

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM

Read/Write

Scanner/Flow ADF Test

Routines

Adjustment Print Adjustment Image Position

Print Test Patterns

Copy Adjustment Image Position

Scan Area Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

Flow ADF Adjustment Automatic Adjustment

Manual Adjustment

ACS ACS Level Adjustment [1–5]: 3*

ACS Page Adjustment [1–5]: 5*

Image Management Auto Tone Adjustment Normal

Activation

Service mode menu tree 1149

 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Full

Print Test Patterns

Figure 3-38 Service functions

Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4

Service Functions Main Memory Clear

Debug Log Job Status

Details

Capture Log All

Period Start Date/End Date

Transfer Assembly Control T2 Control Mode Paper Group/Paper Side/

Mode Paper Direction/T2 PWM

Envelope Rotate Off

90 degrees

180 degrees

Information
Learn more service mode information.

General
Learn general information about the menus.

1150 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Information > General

This menu displays the following information:

● Printer serial number

● Ethernet IP address

● Ethernet Mac address

● Optional Ethernet IP address

● Optional Ethernet Mac address

● Total printed impressions

● Installed date and time

Supply status
Learn about supply status.

Information > Supply Status > Customer Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s customer replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the
list to check the information of the selected unit.

Field replacement unit (FRU)

Information > Supply Status > Field Replacement Unit

● This menu displays the printer’s field replacement unit status. Users can select one item in the list to
check the information of the selected unit.

In this menu, there are five columns: Item, Threshold, Status, Count, and Maximum Life.

● Status: This column shows the current status of the selected item.

– OK: The current count is smaller than the default warning value.

– Check: The current count is bigger than the default warning value.

– OFF: The current count exceeds the maximum life.

● Count: This column shows the current count of the selected item.

● Maximum Life: This column shows the maximum capacity of the selected item.

The technician can edit the default warning value within the given threshold.

Selecting some items will enable the reset button to reset the current count to zero after replacing the
unit.

Software version
Learn about the software version.

Supply status 1151

 Information > Software Version

● This menu displays the version of the software installed on the printer.

Print reports
Learn how to print reports.

Information > Print Reports

This menu displays reports that can be printed from the system. The following reports are available to
print:

● Supplies Information

● Auto Toning History

Information > Print Reports > Auto Toning History

NOTE: TRC means Tone Reproduction Curve.

This report shows a history of execution of the TRC control. The TRC control preserves color
consistency against changes in supplies resulting from long-time use and environmental change. The
purpose of the history report is to check if the TRC control is working normally.

● If the TRC control performs normally, Pass count must be a non-zero value and Fail count must be
zero.

● If Fail count is not zero, check the image density sensor.

Maintenance counts
Learn about Maintenance counts.

Part replacement count

Learn about part replacement count.

Maintenance Counts > Part Replacement Count

● This menu displays the replacement counts for the system parts. Users can select one group and
press OK to see the exact name of the part and the occurrence of the replacement.

The following table shows replaceable parts groups of the system:

Table 3-23 Part Replacement Count

Unit Item Sensing Method

Toner Cartridge Toner (C) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (M) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (Y) Auto Sensing

Toner Cartridge Toner (K) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (C) Auto Sensing

1152 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-23 Part Replacement Count (continued)

Unit Item Sensing Method

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (M) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (Y) Auto Sensing

Imaging Unit Imaging Unit (K) Auto Sensing

Fuser Fuser Auto Sensing

Transfer Transfer Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 2 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 3 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 4 Roller Count Clear

Roller Tray 5 Roller Count Clear

Flow ADF Roller Flow ADF Roller Count Clear

Diagnostics
Learn about diagnostics.

Engine diagnostics
Learn about the engine diagnostics.

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Initialization

● This menu initializes all engine NVM values to the default.

Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine NVM Read/Write

Table 3-24 Engine Diagnostics (Engine NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To change a configuration value for the engine firmware

Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can
navigate through the list of codes with descriptions and
saved values.

Users can also input a code through the text box to find a
configuration value directly.

After selecting one value, press the Edit button to open an

interface for user input.

Table 3-25 Engine NVM Read/Write codes

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

112–0120 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Yellow (multi-hsync) for yellow

112–0130 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Magenta (multi-hsync) for magenta

112–0140 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Cyan (multi-hsync) for cyan

Diagnostics 1153
 Table 3-25 Engine NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning Default Max/Min

112–0150 Manual Color Registration X- Distant from hsync to lsync 100 200/0
Offset Cyan (multi-hsync) for black

112–0160 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 200 400/0
Offset Yellow area for yellow

112–0170 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 200 400/0
Offset Magenta area for magenta

112–0180 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 200 400/0
Offset Cyan area for cyan

112–0190 Manual Color Registration Y- Distant from psync to image 200 400/0
Offset Black area for balck

112–0240 Manual Color Registration Image area left width for yellow 500 1000/0
Yellow

112–0250 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for 500 1000/0
Right Width Yellow yellow

112–0260 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for 500 1000/0
Width Magenta magenta

112–0270 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for 500 1000/0
Right Width Magenta magenta

112–0280 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for cyan 500 1000/0
Width Cyan

112–0290 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for cyan 500 1000/0
Right Width Cyan

112–0300 Manual Color Registration Left Image area left width for black 500 1000/0
Width Balck

112–0310 Manual Color Registration Image area right width for black 500 1000/0
Right Width Black

112–0320 Color Registration Laser Laser scanner assembly skew 200 400/0
Scanner Assembly Skew Yellow for yellow

112–0330 Color Registration Laser Laser scanner assembly skew 200 400/0
Scanner Assembly Skew for magenta
Magenta

112–0340 Color Registration Laser Laser scanner assembly skew 200 400/0
Scanner Assembly Skew Cyan for cyan

Engine test routines

● Diagnostics > Engine Diagnostics > Engine Test Routines

1154 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-26 Engine Diagnostics (Engine Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the engine

Operation procedure When the main Engine Test Routines window displays, users
can navigate through the list of routines and descriptions
that display. Users can directly input an EDC code through
the text box to search for a routine. A maximum of three
routines can be selected at the same time.

After selecting one or more routines, press the OK button to

open the test window. The selected routines will display and
users can start/start the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes

Code Display Meaning

100-004 Yellow drum motor Yellow drum BLDC motor is on/off

1

100-004 Magenta drum motor Magenta drum BLDC motor is on/off

2

100-004 Cyan drum motor Cyan drum BLDC motor is on/off

3

100-004 Black drum motor Black drum BLDC motor is on/off

4

100-004 Yellow drum motor ready Detect if yellow drum BLDC motor runs at normal
6 speed

100-004 Magenta drum motor ready Detect if magenta drum BLDC motor runs at normal
7 speed

100-004 Cyan drum motor ready Detect if cyan drum BLDC motor runs at normal speed
8

100-004 Black drum motor ready Detects if black drum BLDC motor is running at
9 normal speed

100-008 ITB Engage Motor ITB engage motor on/off

0

100-009 ITB Engage Sensor Detects if the ITB engage is on or off

0

100-014 Duplex Motor Forward Duplex motor forward on/off

0

100-0141 Duplex Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow on/off

100-0142 Duplex Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest on/off

100-016 Duplex Fan 1 Run Start/stop duplex fan 1 run

0

100-018 Duplex Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if duplex fan 1 is running at normal speed
0

Engine diagnostics 1155

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-020 Tray 2 Elevating Motor Tray 2 elevate motor on/off

0

100-021 Tray 3 Elevating Motor Tray 3 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-022 Tray 4 Elevating Motor Tray 4 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-023 Tray 5 Elevating Motor Tray 5 elevate motor on/off (optional)

0

100-0231 Tray 6 Elevating Motor Tray 6 elevate motor on/off (optional)

100-024 Waste Toner Motor Waste toner motor on/off

0

100-0241 Waste Toner LED Waste Toner LED on/off

100-025 Waste Toner Full Sensor Detects if the Waste Toner is full
0

100-026 SMPS Fan Run Start/stop SMPS fan run

0

100-027 SMPS Fan Run Ready Detects if SMPS fan is running at normal speed
0

100-034 Feed Motor Feed motor is on/off

0

100-0341 Feed Motor Slow Feed motor slow is on/off

100-034 Feed Motor Slowest Feed motor slowest is on/off

2

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Tray 2 motor is on/off

0

100-0371 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 2 motor slow on/off

100-037 Tray 2 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 2 motor slowest on/off

2

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Tray 3 motor is on/off

0

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 3 motor slow on/off

1

100-038 Tray 3 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 3 motor slowest on/off

2

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Tray 4 motor is on/off

0

100-0391 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 4 motor slow on/off

100-039 Tray 4 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 4 motor slowest on/off

2

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Tray 5 motor is on/off

0

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 5 motor slow on/off

1

1156 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

100-040 Tray 5 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 5 motor slowest on/off

2

100-041 Registration Motor Registration motor is on/off

0

100-0411 Registration Motor Slow Registration motor slow on/off

100-0412 Registration Motor Slowest Registration motor slowest on/off

100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Tray 1 Feed motor is on/off

0

100-0421 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slow Tray 1 Feed motor slow on/off

100-042 Tray 1 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 1 Feed motor slowest on/off
2

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Exit 2 motor is on/off

0

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slow Exit 2 motor slow on/off

1

100-043 Exit 2 Motor Forward Slowest Exit 2 motor slowest on/off

2

100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Duplex motor forward is on/off

0

100-0491 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slow Duplex motor forward slow is on/off

100-049 Duplex 2 Motor Forward Slowest Duplex motor forward slowest is on/off
2

100-060 Return Motor Forward Return motor forward is on/off

0

100-060 Return Motor Forward Slow Return motor forward slow is on/off
1

100-060 Return Motor Forward Slowest Return motor forward slowest is on/off
2

100-060 Return Motor Backward Return motor backward is on/off

3

100-060 Return Motor Backward Slow Return motor backward slow is on/off
4

100-060 Return Motor Backward Slowest Return motor backward slowest is on/off
5

100-070 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Tray 6 motor is on/off

0

100-0701 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slow Tray 6 motor slow on/off

100-070 Tray 6 Pickup Motor Slowest Tray 6 motor slowest on/off

2

101-0101 Tray 4 Shift Gate Solenoid Tray 4 shift gate solenoid on/off

101-0140 Tray 4 Feed Motor Tray 4 feed motor on/off

101-0141 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slow Tray 54 feed motor slow on/off

Engine diagnostics 1157

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

101-0142 Tray 4 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 4 feed motor slowest on/off

101-0150 Tray 5 Feed Motor Tray 5 feed motor on/off

101-0151 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slow Tray 5 feed motor slow on/off

101-0152 Tray 5 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 5 feed motor slowest on/off

101-0160 Tray 6 Feed Motor Tray 6 feed motor on/off

101-0161 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slow Tray 6 feed motor slow on/off

101-0162 Tray 6 Feed Motor Slowest Tray 6 feed motor slowest on/off

101-0190 Output Bin Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin full sensor

101-0191 Output Bin 2 Full Sensor Detects when paper is at output bin 2 full sensor

101-0206 Developer Suction Fan Run Start/stop developer fan run

101-0207 Developer Suction Fan Run Ready Detects if developer suction fan runs at normal speed

101-0270 Tray 1 Clutch Tray 1 clutch on/off

101-0271 Tray 1 Solenoid Tray 1 solenoid on/off

101-0280 Return Gate Solenoid Return Gate solenoid on/off

101–1000 Power 24V1

101–1001 Power 24V2

101–1002 Power 24V3

101–1003 Power 24V4

102-000 Tray 2 Home Position Detects when Tray 2 is closed

0

102-0001 Tray 2 Lock Detect Detect Tray 2 lock unit

102-000 Tray 2 Lock Position Check Tray 2 lock position

2

102-0010 Tray 2 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 2

102-0041 Tray 2 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 2 size.

102-005 Tray 2 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 2 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-0070 Tray 3 Home Position Detects when Tray 3 is closed

102-0071 Tray 3 Lock Detect Detect Tray 3 lock unit

102-0072 Tray 3 Lock Position Check Tray 3 lock position

102-008 Tray 3 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 3

0

102-0111 Tray 3 Paper Size Read Detects paper Tray 3 size.

102-0120 Tray 3 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 3 is elevated to the sensor

102-0140 Tray 4 Home Position Detects when Tray 4 is closed

102-0141 Tray 4 Lock Detect Detect Tray 4 lock unit

1158 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102-0142 Tray 4 Lock Position Check Tray 4 lock position

102-0150 Tray 4 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4

102-0181 Tray 4 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 4 size.

102-0190 Tray 4 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 4 is elevated to the sensor

102– Tray 4 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level sensor 1
0201

102– Tray 4 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 level sensor 2
0202

102-0210 Tray 5 Home Position Detect when Tray 5 is closed.

102-0211 Tray 5 Lock Detect Detect Tray 5 lock unit

102-0212 Tray 5 Lock Position Check Tray 5 lock position

102-022 Tray 5 Paper Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Tray 5

0

102-0251 Tray 5 Paper Size Read Detects Paper Tray 5 size

102-026 Tray 5 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 5 is elevated to the sensor
0

102–0271 Tray 5 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 level sensor 1

102– Tray 5 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 5 level sensor 2
0272

102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 1

0273

102– Tray 5 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 5 install sensor 2

0274

102-028 Tray 1 Empty Sensor Detects when paper is in Bypass Tray (Tray 1)
0

102-0281 Tray 1 Paper Size Read Detect Paper Tray 1 size

102-029 Prefeed 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 2 sensor

2

102-030 Tray 3 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 3 feed sensor (optional)
0

102-0301 Prefeed 3 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 3 sensor

102-032 Tray 4 Feed Sensor (or Door Open) Detects when paper is at Tray 4 feed sensor (optional)
0

102-0321 Prefeed 4 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 4 sensor

102-033 Tray 4 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 4 is closed

0

102-034 Prefeed 5 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 5 sensor

3

102-035 Tray 5 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 5 is closed

0

102-0351 Tray 6 Door Open Sensor Detect when Tray 6 is closed

Engine diagnostics 1159

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

102-035 Prefeed 6 Sensor Detects when paper is at prefeed 6 sensor (optional)

3

102-036 Registration Sensor Detects when paper is at the registration sensor

0

102-0361 Fuser Out Sensor Detects when paper is at the fuser out sensor.

102-0371 Exit 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at exit 2 sensor.

102-038 Duplex Jam 1 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 1 sensor.
0

102-039 Duplex Jam 2 Sensor Detects when paper is at duplex jam 2 sensor.
0

102-043 Front Cover Sensor Detects status of front cover

5

102-043 Side Cover Sensor Detects status of side cover

6

102-048 Tray 6 Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 6

0

102-052 Tray 6 Stack Height Sensor Detects if paper in Tray 6 is elevated to the sensor
0

102-0531 Tray 6 Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 1

102-053 Tray 6 Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 6 level sensor 2
2

102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 1 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 1

3

102-053 Tray 6 Install Sensor 2 Detect when Tray 6 install sensor 2

4

102-0730 Tray 4 Knock Up Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 knock up home sensor

102-0731 Tray 4 Shift Tray Paper Empty Sensor Detect when paper is in Tray 4 shift tray

102-0732 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 1 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
sensor 1

102-0733 Tray 4 Shift Tray Level Sensor 2 Detects when the stack height of Tray 4 shift tray level
sensor 2

102-0734 Tray 4 Shift Plate Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate home sensor

102-0735 Tray 4 Shift Plate End Sensor Detect when Tray 4 shift plate end sensor

102-0736 Tray 4 Gate Solenoid Home Sensor Detect when Tray 4 gate solenoid home sensor

104-000 Waste Install Sensor Detects if waste is installed

0

105-000 Yellow MHV Bias Yellow MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

105-001 Magenta MHV Bias Magenta MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

105-002 Cyan MHV Bias Cyan MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

1160 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

105-003 Black MHV Bias Black MHV bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-000 Yellow Developer Bias Yellow developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-001 Magenta Developer Bias Magenta developer bias voltage on at normal drive
0 level

106-002 Cyan Developer Bias Cyan developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-003 Black Developer Bias Black developer bias voltage on at normal drive level
0

106-003 Black Developer AC Bias Black developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
1 level

106-003 Cyan Developer AC Bias Cyan developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
2 level

106-003 Magenta Developer AC Bias Magenta developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
3 level

106-003 Yellow Developer AC Bias Yellow developer bias AC voltage on at normal drive
4 level

106-020 HVPS Installed Detect HVPS unit

0

107-0033 THV(-) Bias THV minus bias voltage on at normal drive level

107-0034 THV CC Bias THV constant current plus bias voltage

107-0035 THV CV Bias THV constant voltage plus bias voltage

107-0162 Yellow Eraser On Yellow eraser lamp on/off

107-0163 Magenta Eraser On Magenta eraser lamp on/off

107-0164 Cyan Eraser On Cyan eraser lamp on/off

107-0165 Black Eraser On Black eraser lamp on/off

107-0166 Yellow Eraser Detect Detect yellow eraser status

107-0167 Magenta Eraser Detect Detect magenta eraser status

107-0168 Cyan Eraser Detect Detect cyan eraser status

107-0169 Black Eraser Detect Detect black eraser status

107-0201 ITHV Yellow Bias Transfer assembly yellow bias on/off

107-0202 ITHV Magenta Bias Transfer assembly magenta bias on/off

107-0203 ITHV Cyan Bias Transfer assembly cyan bias on/off

107-0204 ITHV Black Bias Transfer assembly black bias on/off

109-000 Fuser Temperature A Detects what the temperature A is on fuser

0

109-001 Fuser Temperature B Detects what the temperature B is on fuser

0

109-0011 LSU Temperature LSU temperature

Engine diagnostics 1161

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

109-0012 Inner Temperature Inner temperature

109-001 Outer Temperature Outer temperature

3

109-001 Humidity Humidity

4

109-002 Fuser Fan Run Ready Detects if fuser fan motor runs at normal speed
0

109-0021 Exit 2 Fan Run Start/stop exit 2 fan run

109-002 Exit 2 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 2 fan runs at normal speed
2

109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Start/stop exit 3 fan run

3

109-002 Exit 3 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 3 fan runs at normal speed
4

109– Exit 4 Fan Run Start/stop exit 4 fan run

0025

109– Exit 4 Fan Run Ready Detects if exit 4 fan runs at normal speed
0026

109-003 Fuser Motor Forward Fuser motor forward on/off

0

109-003 Fuser Motor Ready Detects if fuser motor runs at each speed
4

109-004 Fuser Fan Run Fuser fan motor on/off

0

109-004 Exit Fan Run Exit fan motor on/off

6

109-004 Exit Fan Run Ready Detects if exit fan runs at normal speed
7

109-013 Fuser Gap Motor Fuser press control motor on/off

0

109-014 Fuser Gap Home Sensor Detects if the fuser press is located home position
0

109-020 Detect Fuser Relay Detect fuser relay status

0

109-0210 Detect Zero Cross Period Detect zero cross period

109-030 Fuser Installed Detect fuser unit

0

110-000 LSU Motor 1 Run Ready Detects if LSU motor 1 runs at normal speed
0

110-0020 LUS Motor Fan 1 Run Ready Detects if the LSU fan motor 1 runs at normal speed

110-006 LSU Motor 1 Run LSU motor 1 on/off

0

1162 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

110-008 LSU LD Power 1 LSU LD 1 power on/off (yellow)

0

110-009 LSU LD Power 2 LSU LD 2 power on/off (magenta

0

110-0100 LSU LD Power 3 LSU LD 3 power on/off (cyan)

110-0110 LSU LD Power 4 LSU LD 4 power on/off (black)

110-0120 LSU Fan 1 Run Start/stop the LSU fan run

110-0140 LSU HSync 1 Detect the LSU HSync 1 (yellow)

110-0150 LSU HSync 2 Detect the LSU HSync 2 (magenta)

110-0160 LSU HSync 3 Detect the LSU HSync 3 (cyan)

110-0170 LSU HSync 4 DetectsLSU HSync 4 (black)

110-0200 LSU Installed Detect LSU

110-0320 LSU Shutter Open Detects if the LSU shutter is open

110-0330 LSU Shutter Closed Detects if the LSU shutter is closed

111-0000 Toner Dispense Motor Yellow Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off

111-0010 Toner Dispense Motor Magenta Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off

111-0020 Toner Dispense Motor Cyan Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off

111-0030 Toner Dispense Motor Black Toner dispense (supply) motor on/off

111-0040 Toner Sensor Yellow TC sensor in developer tank

111-0050 Toner Sensor Magenta TC sensor in developer tank

111-0060 Toner Sensor Cyan TC sensor in developer tank

111-0070 Toner Sensor Black TC sensor in developer tank

111-0110 Toner Control Voltage Yellow Yellow toner voltage on/off

111-0120 Toner Control Voltage Magenta Magenta toner voltage on/off

111-0130 Toner Control Voltage Cyan Cyan toner voltage on/off

111-0140 Toner Control Voltage Black Black toner voltage on/off

111-0200 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Yellow Yellow supply motor lock sensor

111-0210 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Magenta Magenta supply motor lock sensor

111-0220 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Cyan Cyan supply motor lock sensor

111-0230 Toner Supply Lock Sensor Black Black supply motor lock sensor

111-0300 Toner Reservoir Motor Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off

111-0310 Toner Reservoir Motor Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off

111-0320 Toner Reservoir Motor Cyan Cyan reservoir motor on/off

111-0330 Toner Reservoir Motor Black Black reservoir motor on/off

111-0340 Toner Reservoir Level Yellow Yellow reservoir motor on/off

Engine diagnostics 1163

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

111-0350 Toner Reservoir Level Magenta Magenta reservoir motor on/off

111-0360 Toner Reservoir Level Cyan Cyan reservoir level display

111-0370 Toner Reservoir Level Black Black reservoir level display

112-0010 Clear Manual Offset Value of Color Registration Clear manual offset value of color registration

112-0101 Yellow Drum Home Sensor Status Yellow drum home sensor status display

112-0111 Magenta Drum Home Sensor Status Magenta drum home sensor status display

112-0121 Cyan Drum Home Sensor Status Cyan drum home sensor status display

112-0131 Black Drum Home Sensor Status Black drum home sensor status display

112-0200 ACR Shutter Motor Run ACR shutter motor on/off

112-0210 ACR Shutter Detect Detect ACR shutter

112-0220 ACR Shutter Open ACR shutter open

112-0230 ACR Shutter Close ACR Shutter Close

112-0300 Front ID Sensor P Read Front ID sensor P value display

112-0310 Front ID Sensor S Read Front ID sensor S value display

112-0320 Rear ID Sensor P Read Rear ID sensor P value display

112-0330 Rear ID Sensor S Read Rear ID sensor S value display

112-0340 Center ID Sensor P Read Show center ID sensor P value

112-0350 Center ID Sensor S Read Show center ID sensor S value

113-000 Finisher Present Sensor Detect if the finisher is in place

0

113-0350 Finisher Entrance Sensor Detects when paper is at entrance sensor

113-0360 Finisher Exit Sensor Detects when paper is at exit sensor

113-0361 Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect when a paper is at compile sensor

113-0370 Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detects paddle home position

113-0380 Finisher Left Tamper Home Sensor Detects lift tamper home position

113-0390 Finisher Right Tamper Home Sensor Detects right tamper home position

113-0410 Finisher Stapler Door Sensor Detects if stapler door cover is closed

113-0420 Finisher Jam Cover Sensor Detects if jam door cover is closed

113-0430 Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detects stapler home position

113-0440 Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detects stapler level

113-0451 Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect stapler ready sensor

113-0461 Finisher Ejector 1 Home Sensor Detect ejector 1 home position

113-0462 Finisher Ejector 2 Home Sensor Detect ejector 2 home position

113-0463 Finisher Ejector 2 Encoder Sensor Detect ejector 2 encoder Sensor

113-0470 Finisher Main Tray Home Sensor Detects main tray home position

1164 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-0471 Finisher Main Tray Beam Sensor Detect main tray beam sensor

113-0472 Finisher Main Tray Low Limit Sensor Detect main tray low limit sensor

113-0473 Finisher Main Tray Encoder Sensor Detect main tray encoder sensor

113-0481 Finisher Paper Support Sensor Detect paper support home sensor

113-0491 Finisher Traverse Front Sensor Detect traverse front home sensor

113-0492 Finisher Traverse Rear Sensor Detect traverse rear home sensor

113-0501 Finisher Entrance Motor Finisher entrance motor on/off

113-0502 Finisher Exit Motor Finisher exit motor on/off

113-0510 Finisher Paddle Motor Finisher paddle motor on/off

113-0520 Finisher Left Tamper Motor Finisher left tamper motor on/off

113-0530 Finisher Right Tamper Motor Finisher right tamper motor on/off

113-0550 Finisher Staple Unit Motor Finisher staple unit motor on/off

113-0561 Finisher Ejector 1 Motor Finisher ejector 1 motor on/off

113-0562 Finisher Ejector 2 Motor Finisher ejector 2 motor on/off

113-0563 Finisher Ejector 2 Reverse Motor Finisher ejector 2 reverse direction on/off

113-0570 Finisher Main Tray Motor Finisher main tray motor on/off

113-0571 Finisher Paper Support Motor Finisher paper support motor on/off

113-0581 Finisher Traverse Motor Finisher staple unit traverse motor on/off

113-0591 Finisher Paper Hold Solenoid Finisher paper hold solenoid on/off

113-060 Finisher Punch Motor Finisher punch motor on/off

0

113-0610 Finisher Punch Encoder Sensor Detect finisher punch encoder sensor

113-0611 Finisher Punch Position Sensor Detect finisher punch position sensor

113-0612 Finisher Punch Home Sensor Detect finisher punch home sensor

113-0620 Finisher Hopper Install Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper install sensor

113-0621 Finisher Hopper Full Sensor Detect finisher punch hopper full sensor

113-2000 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer lift sensor

113-2010 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher clamp home sensor

113-2020 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher diverter home sensor

113-2030 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Away Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 away sensor

113-2031 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 home sensor

113-2032 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 1 encoder sensor

113-2040 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 home sensor

113-2041 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher eject 2 encoder sensor

113-2050 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher end fence sensor

Engine diagnostics 1165

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-2060 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher paddle home sensor

113-2070 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge entrance sensor

113-2071 2 Bin Finisher IPTU Middle Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher Bridge Unit middle sensor

113-2080 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher entrance sensor

113-2090 2 Bin Finisher Main Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main exit sensor

113-2091 2 Bin Finisher Sub Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub exit sensor

113-2100 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Exit Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher buffer exit sensor

113-2110 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Home Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler home sensor

113-2111 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Rear Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler rear sensor

113-2112 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Front Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler front sensor

113-2113 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Manual Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler manual sensor

113-2114 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Head Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler head sensor

113-2115 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Low Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler low sensor

113-2116 2 Bin Finisher Stapler Ready Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stapler ready sensor

113-2120 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front tamper sensor

113-2130 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher rear tamper sensor

113-2140 2 Bin Finisher Main Beam Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main beam sensor

113-2141 2 Bin Finisher Main Front Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main front level sensor

113-2142 2 Bin Finisher Main Rear Level Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main rear level sensor

113-2143 2 Bin Finisher Main Encoder Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main encoder sensor

113-2144 2 Bin Finisher Main Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher main full sensor

113-2145 2 Bin Finisher Sub Full Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher sub full sensor

113-2150 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet paper sensor

113-2160 2 Bin Finisher Staple Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple paper sensor

113-2161 2 Bin Finisher Staple Button Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher staple button sensor

113-2170 2 Bin Finisher Compile Paper Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher compile paper sensor

113-2180 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge cover sensor

113-2181 2 Bin Finisher Top Cover Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher top cover sensor

113-2182 2 Bin Finisher Front Door Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher front door sensor

113-2190 2 Bin Finisher Stack Top Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher stack top sensor

113-2200 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher bridge detect sensor

113-2201 2 Bin Finisher Punch Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher punch detect sensor

113-2202 2 Bin Finisher Booklet Detect Sensor Detect 2 bin finisher booklet detect sensor

113-2210 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam home sensor Detects 2 bin finisher booklet exit cam home sensor

1166 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-2500 2 Bin Finisher Buffer Lift Motor 2 bin finisher buffer lift motor on/off

113-2510 2 Bin Finisher Clamp Motor 2 bin finisher camp motor on/off

113-2520 2 Bin Finisher Diverter Motor 2 bin finisher diverter motor on/off

113-2530 2 Bin Finisher Eject 1 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 1 motor on/off

113-2540 2 Bin Finisher Eject 2 Motor 2 bin finisher eject 2 motor on/off

113-2560 2 Bin Finisher Bridge Feed Motor 2 bin finisher bridge feed motor on/off

113-2570 2 Bin Finisher Entrance Motor 2 bin finisher entrance motor on/off

113-2580 2 Bin Finisher Exit Feed Motor 2 bin finisher exit feed motor on/off

113-2590 2 Bin Finisher End Fence Motor 2 bin finisher end fence motor on/off

113-2600 2 Bin Finisher Paddle Motor 2 bin finisher paddle motor on/off

113-2610 2 Bin Finisher Main Tray Motor 2 bin finisher main tray motor on/off

113-2620 2 Bin Finisher Staple Move Motor 2 bin finisher staple move motor on/off

113-2621 2 Bin Finisher Staple Head Motor 2 bin finisher staple head motor on/off

113-2630 2 Bin Finisher Front Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher front tamper motor on/off

113-2640 2 Bin Finisher Rear Tamper Motor 2 bin finisher rear tamper motor on/off

113-2650 2 Bin Finisher Manual Blue LED 2 bin finisher manual blue LED on/off

113-2651 2 Bin Finisher Manual Red LED 2 bin finisher Manual red LED on/off

113-2660 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Motor

113-2670 2 Bin Finisher BM exit cam Solenoid

113-3000 Booklet Stopper Home Sensor Detect booklet Stopper home sensor

113-3010 Booklet Staple Home Sensor Detect booklet staple home sensor

113-3020 Booklet Front Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet front staple empty sensor

113-3030 Booklet Rear Staple Empty Sensor Detect booklet rear staple empty sensor

113-3040 Booklet Knife Home Sensor Detect booklet knife home sensor

113-3050 Booklet Guide Home Sensor Detect booklet guide home sensor

113-3060 Booklet Diverter Home Sensor Detect booklet Diverter home Sensor

113-3080 Booklet Tamper Home Sensor Detect booklet tamper home sensor

113-3090 Booklet Paddle Home Sensor Detect booklet paddle home sensor

113-3100 Booklet Entrance Paper Sensor Detect booklet entrance paper sensor

113-3110 Booklet Tray Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold output paper sensor

113-3120 Booklet Fold Exit Paper Sensor Detect booklet fold exit paper sensor

113-3130 Booklet Press Home Sensor Detect booklet press home sensor

113-3500 Booklet Feed Motor Booklet feed motor on/off

113-3510 Booklet Fold Motor Booklet fold motor on/off

Engine diagnostics 1167

 Table 3-27 Engine Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Display Meaning

113-3520 Booklet Stopper Solenoid Booklet stopper solenoid on/off

113-3530 Booklet Stopper Motor Booklet stopper motor on/off

113-3540 Booklet Tamper Motor Booklet tamper motor on/off

113-3550 Booklet Knife Motor Booklet knife motor on/off

113-3560 Booklet Diverter Motor Booklet diverter motor on/off

113-3570 Booklet Press Motor Booklet press motor on/off

113-3580 Booklet Paddle Motor Booklet paddle motor on/off

113-3590 Booklet Guide Motor Booklet guide motor on/off

113-3600 Booklet Staple Motor Booklet staple motor on/off

113-4000 Punch Scan Home Sensor Detect punch scan home sensor

113-4010 Punch Scan Edge 1 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 1 sensor

113-4011 Punch Scan Edge 2 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 2 sensor

113-4012 Punch Scan Edge 3 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 3 sensor

113-4013 Punch Scan Edge 4 Sensor Detect punch scan edge 4 sensor

113-4020 Punch Home Sensor Detect punch home sensor

113-4030 Punch Position A Sensor Detect punch position A sensor

113-4031 Punch Position B Sensor Detect punch position B sensor

113-4040 Punch Encoder Sensor Detect punch encoder sensor

113-4050 Punch Hopper Full Sensor Detect punch hopper full sensor

113-4060 Punch Type 1 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 1 detect sensor

113-4061 Punch Type 2 Detect Sensor Detect punch type 2 detect sensor

113-4500 Punch Scan Motor Punch scan motor on/off

113-4510 Punch Motor Punch motor on/off

Fax diagnostics
Learn about the fax diagnostics.

Fax NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax NVM Read/Write

Table 3-28 Fax Diagnostics )Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.

Operation procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays, users can navigate through
the list of configuration values and descriptions that display.

Users can input a code through the text box to search for a configuration value.

After selecting a value, press the Edit button to open an interface for user input.

1168 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-28 Fax Diagnostics )Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write) (continued)

Purpose To change a configuration value for fax firmware.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes

Code Name Description Default Range

20-200 Pause dial time Pause time (value * 1000 ms) Country/ 0-200
region value

20-210 Dial pulse M/B ratio 33/66 40/60 Country/ 0=

region value OPTION_DP_
33

1=
OPTION_DP_
40

2=
OPTION_DP_
37

3=
OPTION_DP_
50

20-220 Auto dial start pause time Pause time before auto- 1 0-10
dialing (second)

20-300 Ring on time Ring on time (ms) 170 90-800

20-310 Ring off time Ring off time (ms) 560 90-800

20-320 Ring detection frequency Sets the call indication 1 1 = 12-80 hz

frequency range that will be
detected by LIU. 2 = 16-55 hz

3 = 20-55 hz

4 = 22-55 hz

20-330 Ring on max time Ring on max time (ms) 5100 3000-12000

20-340 Ring off max time Ring off max time (ms) 11100 9000-22000

20-400 DTMF high-frequency level DTMF high-frequency level Country/ 0-15

(dBm) region value

20-410 DTMF low-frequency level DTMF low-frequency level Country/ 0-15

(dBm) region value

Fax diagnostics 1169

 Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Name Description Default Range

20-420 DTMF timing DTMF duration of on/off 8 1 = 80/80

output (ms)
2 = 70/70

3 = 70/150

4 = 60/60

5 = 80/100

6 = 150/50

7 = 150/240

8 = 100/100

9 = 100/80

20-500 Dial mode Select tone/pulse Country/ 0=

region value OPTION_TON
E_MODE

1=
OPTION_PUL
SE_MODE

20-520 Error rate Adjust error rate 2 0=

(Off/5%/10%/20%) OPTION_RAT
E_OFF

1=
OPTION_RAT
E_5

2=
OPTION_RAT
E_10

3=
OPTION_RAT
E_20

20-530 Dial tone detect Detect dial tone prior to Country/ 0=

sending region value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-540 Loop current detect Detect if loop current is Country/ 0=

present prior to sending region value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-550 Busy signal detect Detect busy signal to allow Country/ 0=

redials region value OPTION_OFF

1=
OPTION_ON

20-560 TCF duration Adjust TCF duration (ms) 1500 1000-3000

20-800 Modem speed Select modem start speed 24

20-810 Fax transmission level Adjust fax transmission level Country/ Country/
(dBm) region value region value

1170 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-29 Fax Diagnostics Fax NVM Read/Write codes (continued)

Code Name Description Default Range

20-830 Auto dial timeout Adjust auto dial timeout Country/ 30-150
(second) region value

20-920 CNG detection count CNG tone detection check 2 1-15

count during ANS/FAX mode

20-930 Caller ID This option is needed to Country/ 0=

guide Caller ID off for user region value OPTION_OFF
environment
1=
OPTION_ON

20-940 Ext. phone Ext. phone detection enable/ 1 0 = Disable

disable (default: enable 1)
1 = Enable

21-999 Fax line setting Fax test line setting (dual fax) 0 0 = Line 1

1 = Line 2

21-800 Modem speed line 2 Select modem start speed for 24

line 2. This item will display
only when a dual line fax kit
is installed

Fax test routines

● Diagnostics > Fax Diagnostics > Fax Test Routines

Table 3-30 Fax Diagnostics (Fax Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the fax machine.

Operation When the main Fax Test Routines window displays, users can navigate through the list of routines
procedur and descriptions that display. Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.
e
After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the selected routine. Users can
start/stop the selected test routine.

Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes

Code Name Description State

Displayed

20-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln1 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 1 On/Off

20-020 DTMF # Line1 Emits DTMF # on line 1 On/Off

20-021 DTMF * Line1 Emits DTMF * on line 1 On/Off

20-022 DTMF 0 Line1 Emits DTMF 0 on line 1 On/Off

20-023 DTMF 1 Line1 Emits DTMF 1 on line 1 On/Off

20-024 DTMF 2 Line1 Emits DTMF 2 on line 1 On/Off

Fax diagnostics 1171

 Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

20-025 DTMF 3 Line1 Emits DTMF 3 on line 1 On/Off

20-026 DTMF 4 Line1 Emits DTMF 4 on line 1 On/Off

20-027 DTMF 5 Line1 Emits DTMF 5 on line 1 On/Off

20-028 DTMF 6 Line1 Emits DTMF 6 on line 1 On/Off

20-029 DTMF 7 Line1 Emits DTMF 7 on line 1 On/Off

20-030 DTMF 8 Line1 Emits DTMF 8 on line 1 On/Off

20-031 DTMF 9 Line1 Emits DTMF 9 on line 1 On/Off

20-040 V.21 300 bps Line1 Emits V.21 300 bps Line 1 On/Off

20-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-043 V.29 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-044 V.29 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-045 V.17 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-046 V.17 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-047 V.17 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-048 V.17 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-049 V.34 2400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-050 V.34 4800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-051 V.34 7200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-052 V.34 9600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-053 V.34 12000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-054 V.34 14400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-055 V.34 16800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-056 V.34 19200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-057 V.34 21600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line1 On/Off

20-058 V.34 24000 bps Line1 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line1 On/Off

20-059 V.34 26400 bps Line1 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line1 On/Off

20-060 V.34 28800 bps Line1 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line1 On/Off

20-061 V.34 31200 bps Line1 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line1 On/Off

20-062 V.34 33600 bps Line1 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line1 On/Off

21-012 Single tone 1100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1100Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-014 Single tone 1650Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1650Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-015 Single tone 1850Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 1850Hz on line 2 On/Off

21-016 Single tone 2100Hz Ln2 Emits single tone 2100Hz on line 2 On/Off

1172 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

21-020 DTMF # Line2 Emits DTMF # on line 2 On/Off

21-021 DTMF * Line2 Emits DTMF * on line 2 On/Off

21-022 DTMF 0 Line2 Emits DTMF 0 on line 2 On/Off

21-023 DTMF 1 Line2 Emits DTMF 1 on line 2 On/Off

21-024 DTMF 2 Line2 Emits DTMF 2 on line 2 On/Off

21-025 DTMF 3 Line2 Emits DTMF 3 on line 2 On/Off

21-026 DTMF 4 Line2 Emits DTMF 4 on line 2 On/Off

21-027 DTMF 5 Line2 Emits DTMF 5 on line 2 On/Off

21-028 DTMF 6 Line2 Emits DTMF 6 on line 2 On/Off

21-029 DTMF 7 Line2 Emits DTMF 7 on line 2 On/Off

21-030 DTMF 8 Line2 Emits DTMF 8 on line 2 On/Off

21-031 DTMF 9 Line2 Emits DTMF 9 on line 2 On/Off

21-040 V.21 300 bps Line2 Emits V.21 300 bps Line2 On/Off

21-041 V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 2400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-042 V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.27ter 4800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-043 V.29 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.29 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-044 V.29 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.29 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-045 V.17 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.17 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-046 V.17 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.17 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-047 V.17 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.17 12000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-048 V.17 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.17 14400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-049 V.34 2400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 2400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-050 V.34 4800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 4800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-051 V.34 7200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 7200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-052 V.34 9600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 9600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-053 V.34 12000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 12000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-054 V.34 14400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 14400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-055 V.34 16800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 16800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-056 V.34 19200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 19200 bps Line2 On/Off

21-057 V.34 21600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 21600 bps Line2 On/Off

21-058 V.34 24000 bps Line2 Emits V.34 24000 bps Line2 On/Off

21-059 V.34 26400 bps Line2 Emits V.34 26400 bps Line2 On/Off

21-060 V.34 28800 bps Line2 Emits V.34 28800 bps Line2 On/Off

21-061 V.34 31200 bps Line2 Emits V.34 31200 bps Line2 On/Off

Fax diagnostics 1173

 Table 3-31 Fax Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Description State

Displayed

21-062 V.34 33600 bps Line2 Emits V.34 33600 bps Line2 On/Off

Scanner diagnostics
Learn about the scanner diagnostics.

Shading test

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test

1174 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-32 Scanner Diagnostics (Shading Test)

Purpose ● To check the quality of scanned images, especially if there might be defects in optical
devices such as the lens, mirror, or lamp.

● Check the quality problem as shown below:

Operation For the Image Scanner Unit

Procedure
Press Shade and Print report to see if the current shading value is correct. Mono, red, green,
and blue gray shading values will be shown on the printed report. When the previous shading
value is needed, press “Print Last Shade Report”.

For the Flow ADF unit

1. Load the shading sheet on the Flow ADF tray.

2. Enter SCV mode. Select the following menu items:

Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Shading Test > Shade and Print Report (Flow ADF)

Press Print Last Shade Report (ADF) for the previous shading value report.

3. Check if the printed results are correct.

NOTE:

● When executing Flow ADF shading, use only the shading sheet (JC63–05055A).

● A Shading Test for the Flow ADF unit must be completed after replacing the Flow ADF
unit or main board.

Verification Look at the bottom of the report page for a "RESULTS : OK" message.

Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write

Scanner diagnostics 1175

 Table 3-33 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write)

Purpose To read and/or write values in the scanner and Flow

ADF memory.

Operation Procedure When the main NVM Read/Write window displays,

users can navigate through the list of codes with
descriptions and saved values. Users can also directly
input a code through the text box to search for an
NVM.

After selecting a code, the Edit button will be enabled

only if the code is writable.

If the selected code is writable and the Edit button

is enabled, press the button to configure the desired
value for the code.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

Table 3-34 Scanner/Flow ADF NVM Read/Write codes

Code NVM description Default GX Model

05-0000 Pick Up Count 0 O

05-0001 Separation Roller Count 0 O

05-0010 Document Duplex Reverse Point 0 O

05-0030 Simplex Registration Value (Registration 1) 0 O

05-0040 Duplex Registration Value (Registration 2) 0 O

05-0050 Width Guide Max Value Depends on Flow O

ADF

05-0060 Width Guide Min Value Depends on Flow O

ADF

Scanner/Flow ADF test routines

● Diagnostics > Scanner Diagnostics > Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines

Table 3-35 Scanner Diagnostics (Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines)

Purpose To perform test routines for the scanner and Flow ADF.

Operation Procedure When the main Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines window displays, users
can navigation through the list of routines and descriptions that display.
Users can input a code through the text box to search for a routine.

After selecting a routine, press OK to open the test window that lists the
selected routine. Users can start/stop the selected test routine.

Verification N/A

Specification N/A

Reference See the following table.

1176 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes

Code Name Value GX model

06-0000 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 1

06-0001 Scanner Original Size High/Low O

Detecting Sensor 2

06-0010 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O

Close Sensor 1

06-0011 Scanner Cover Open/ High/Low O

Close Sensor 2

06-0020 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

06-0030 Scanner Platen Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

06-0040 Scanner Platen Home High/Low O

Position Sensor

05-0000 Document Length .1 High/Low O

Sensor

05-0001 Document Length .2 High/Low O

Sensor

05-0020 Document Cover Open High/Low O

Sensor

05-0040 Document Detect Sensor High/Low O

05-0050 Document Feed Sensor High/Low O

05-0060 Document Simplex High/Low O

Registration Sensor

05–0061 Document Duplex

Registration Sensor

05-0070 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 1

05-0071 Document Scan Read High/Low O

Sensor 2

05-0080 Document Exit Sensor High/Low O

05-0090 Document Pickup Clutch Start/Stop X

05-0110 Document Motor Forward Start/Stop O

05-0111 Document Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

05-0123 Document width 1 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0124 Document width 2 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0125 Document width 3 MSO High/Low O

Sensor

05-0130 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Forward

Scanner diagnostics 1177

 Table 3-36 Scanner/Flow ADF Test Routines codes (continued)

Code Name Value GX model

05-0131 Document Pickup Motor Start/Stop O

Backward

05-0140 Document Pickup Roller High/Low X

Detect Sensor

05-0151 Document Stacker Lift High/Low O

Lower Sensor

05-0160 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0162 Document Registration 1 Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05-0170 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0171 Document Registration 2 Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05-0180 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Forward

05-0181 Document Stacker Lift Start/Stop O

Motor Backward

05–0182 Document Exit Motor

Forward

05–0183 Document Exit Motor

Backward

05–0184 Document Pickup

Release Motor Forward

05–0185 Document Pickup

Release Motor Backward

05–0186 Document Scan ln

Release Motor Forward

05–0187 Document Scan ln

Release Motor Backward

05-0190 Document Width Guide 10Bit (0~1023) O

ADC Sensor

05–0191 Document USM ADC

Sensor

05–0192 Document USM

Calibration Test

05-0210 Document Jig Test Low Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex

05-0230 Document Jig Test High Start/Stop O

Speed Simplex

Adjustment
Learn about the print adjustment.

1178 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Print adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Image Position

Table 3-37 Print Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the printed image on

the paper in the print engine.

Operational Procedure 1. Select a tray to adjust.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or -

buttons, then press the OK button to save the
changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

NOTE:

● Adjustment must be done for each tray (Tray

1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).

● Do not choose ALL for the tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray

selection.

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image

is adjusted. If not, repeat Step 2.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Print Adjustment > Print Margin Test

This menu is used to print out the test pattern manually.

Copy adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Copy Adjustment > Image Position

Adjustment 1179
 Table 3-38 Copy Adjustment (Image Position)

Purpose Manually adjust the position of the copied image on the paper in the
copy engine.

Operation Procedure NOTE: Before copy adjustment:

● Make sure that the initial values of margin adjustment are the same
as the values of the print adjustment.

● Perform an adjustment for each tray. Do not choose All for tray
selection, as this can confuse the adjustment.
NOTE:

● Complete adjustment for each tray (Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5).

● Do not choose All for tray selection.

● Adjust for the tray with each new tray selection.

1. Locate the Scanner A/S Chart on the Flow ADF tray.

2. Change the adjustment value using the + or - button, and then press
OK to save the changes.

● Simplex Leading Edge

● Simplex Side Edge

● Duplex Leading Edge

● Duplex Side Edge

3. Print out the test pattern and check if the image has moved. If not,
repeat Step 2.

Scan area adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

1180 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-39 Scan Area Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of scanned images automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

Note that the Lead Edge arrows point to the left side of the scanner glass
and are placed face down. The Scanner A/S Chart comes in two sizes, A4 and
Letter.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the scanner glass.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Scan Area Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 1181
 Table 3-40 Scan Area Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation Procedure 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:

● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification,
press +, otherwise press -.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -,
otherwise, press +.

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the scanner glass.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

Flow ADF adjustment

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Automatic Adjustment

1182 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-41 Flow ADF Adjustment (Automatic Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the image position and magnification of images scanned with the Flow
ADF automatically.

Operation Procedure 1. Locate the Scanner A/S chart at the scanner glass.

2. Press OK. A scan begins and the system will automatically calculate the
proper value based on the scanning result of the chart.

3. The new value saves to the system.

4. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned
from the Flow ADF.

5. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b)
from the chart to the scanned image.

6. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the
scanned image.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm
NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test.
Refer to Scanner Diagnostics.

● Diagnostics > Adjustment > Flow ADF Adjustment > Manual Adjustment

Adjustment 1183
 Table 3-42 Flow ADF Adjustment (Manual Adjustment)

Purpose To correct the position and magnification of scanned images manually.

Operation 1. Choose one item from the table. There are three items to choose from:
procedure
● Image Position — Leading Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Image Position — Side Edge (Unit: mm, Scale: 0.1, Min/Max: -6/+6)

● Magnification — Vertical Direction (Unit: %, Min/Max: 98.5/101.5)

2. Select one item and press the Edit button.

3. Change the adjustment value using the arrow button.

4. Image position (a, b): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press +,
otherwise press -.

5. Magnification (c): If the current value is smaller than the specification, press -, otherwise,
press +.

NOTE: Specifications:

● a, b: 10, ± 1.5 mm

● c: 190, ± 1.5 mm

6. Press the OK button to apply the new value to the system.

7. Scan the Scanner A/S Chart and send it to a PC. The chart must be scanned from the Flow
ADF.

8. To check the image position, compare the position of the scale marks (a, b) from the chart
to the scanned image.

9. To check the magnification, compare the length of line c from the chart to the scanned
image.

10. If Auto Skew Correction during job box is checked, skewed image is corrected by digitally
rotating the scanned images.

NOTE: When this function is enabled, visual artifact (like checkerboard patterns) might
appear on the image depending on the original contents or copy option settings.

1184 Chapter 3 Problem solving

NOTE: After executing the Flow ADF adjustment, perform a shading test. Refer to Scanner
Diagnostics.
Image management
Learn about image management.

Auto tone adjustment activation

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Normal

Table 3-43 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Normal)

Purpose To correct image quality when density of the image

is poor. Normal TRC Control is recommended after
changing a unit, such as a toner cartridge, imaging
unit, and PTB, or after restarting the printer.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Normal TRC Control

execution.

● Off: Normal TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Normal TRC Control will execute during

the determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Normal TRC

Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Normal

TRC Control based on the count of printed
pages since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes

Normal TRC Control when the system
returns from a power save mode and the
rest time exceeds the configured value.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.

● Diagnostics > Image Management > Auto Tone Adjustment Activation > Full

Table 3-44 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full)

Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is

replaced, the life of the OPC drum is changed, the
density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or
humidity in the room changes suddenly.

Operation Procedure 1. Select On or Off for Full TRC Control execution.

● Off: Full TRC Control will not execute.

● On: Full TRC Control will execute during the

determined conditions,

2. Change the execution condition(s) of Full TRC

Control.

● Page Count: The system executes Full TRC

Control based on the count of printed pages
since the last execution.

● Time Left Alone: The system executes Full

TRC Control when the system returns from
a power save mode and the rest time
exceeds the configured value.

Image management 1185

 Table 3-44 Auto Tone Adjustment Activation (Full) (continued)

Purpose To correct image quality when any OPC drum is

replaced, the life of the OPC drum is changed, the
density of the image is poor, or the temperature and/or
humidity in the room changes suddenly.

Verification Print out a test job and make sure the image quality
has recovered.

Print test patterns

Learn about the print test patterns.

Diagnostics > Print Test Patterns >

● EP Calibration Pattern1 Contone

Service functions
Learn about service functions.

Main memory clear

Learn about the main memory clear.

Service Functions > Main Memory Clear

● This function resets the main memory of the system to the factory default setting. This function can
be used to reset the system to the initial value when the product is functioning abnormally. User
configured values return to the default values.

To clear the main memory, select the country/region where the system is located, and restart the
printer.

Debug log
Learn about the debug log.

Service Functions > Debug Log

● This function sets the system log message level. Users can select three options:

– Off: This option disables the logging option.

– Job Status: This option only enables the logging of user created jobs.

– Details: This option enables all the logging options of the running tasks of the system. This
option might affect the performance of certain system operations. Use this option when the
system performs abnormally and engineers need to investigate the problem.

Capture log
Learn about the capture log.

1186 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Service Functions > Capture Log

● This function copies all the saved logs in the system to a USB flash drive as a .zip file. The size of the
system log could reach up to 1 GB. If the system log size becomes very large, it will take a longer time
to copy to the USB flash drive.

1. Connect the USB flash drive to the printer.

2. Tap the Service Mode app. When the pop-up displays, press the area below the pop-up until the
password window appears. Enter 4087617 and press the OK button.

3. Go to Service Functions > Debug Log and change the debug log level to INFO.

4. Go to Service Functions > Capture Log.

5. Select All or Period. If selecting Period, enter the start and end date.

6. Press the Capture Log button.

7. Once the log is completed, a completion message will display. Restore the debug log level to
JOB STATUS.

NOTE: If the system log size becomes very large, it will take longer to copy to the USB flash
drive.

8. Check that the Log File has been saved to the USB flash drive.

Transfer assembly control mode

Learn about the transfer assembly control mode.

Transfer assembly control mode 1187

 Service Functions > Transfer Assembly Control Mode

Table 3-45 Transfer Assembly Control Mode

●
Purpose To correct transfer related problems. This function can be used to change the
transfer value to optimize image quality to a certain type of paper.

Operation Procedure ● T2 Control Mode

– Choose the paper group, paper side, and paper direction.

– Adjust PWM value based on the problem type.

○ Blur: Increase PWM value

○ Poor Transfer: Increase PWM value

○ Re-transfer: Decrease PWM value

○ White Spot: Decrease PWM value

○ OPC Cylic Ghost: Decrease PWM value

Verification Print a test job and make sure the transfer problem has been resolved.

Specification N/A

Reference N/A

Envelope rotate
Learn about the envelope rotate function.

Service Functions > Envelope Rotate

● This menu enables rotation when printing on an envelope. The machine usually guides loaded
envelopes with SEF direction. If this function is enabled, the user can load an envelope with LEF
direction and the machine will rotate the image for printing on the envelope.

This function provides the following setting options:

– Off (default): Load envelope SEF direction

– 90 degrees: Load envelope LEF direction.

1188 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 – 180 degrees: Load envelope SEF direction with flap on bottom side.

NOTE: If the paper source is Auto, the device will feed from the Tray 1 because the LEF envelope
can only be loaded in the Tray 1 according to paper specification.

If the length of envelope is over the maximum size of the custom width, the device will not rotate
the image and determine that the direction of the envelope is SEF. For example, the A4 model
supports custom sizes like W 98–216 ~ L148–356. This model does not support C5 Env (162x229) DL
Env (110x220), No 9 Env (98x225), No 10 Env (105x241) rotation.

Print quality troubleshooting guide

Learn about print quality troubleshooting.

Image quality problems and solutions

Learn about print -quality troubleshooting.

Print quality defects can be caused by printer components, consumables, media, internal software,
external software applications, and environmental conditions.

To successfully troubleshoot print quality problems, eliminate as many variables as possible.

First, generate prints using printable pages using laser paper. Use paper from an unopened ream that
has been acclimated to room temperature. Make sure that genuine HP toner is installed in the printer.

Print quality troubleshooting guide 1189

 Figure 3-39 A/S chart (A3)

1190 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-40 A/S chart

Table 3-46 A/S chart

Item Description Use

[1] Grid pattern For adjusting margin and

magnification

[2] Black patches For adjusting skew error

[3] Barcode For checking the reproduction of the

barcode

[4] Note area For recording the date, conditions,

and so on.

[A] Halftone band For checking banding and jitter (K

50%)

[B, L] Resolution patterns For checking resolution

[C, D, E] Images For checking color reproduction

[F] Map image For checking fine line reproduction

[G] Color patches For checking color reproduction and

uniformity

[H] Gradation pattern For checking tone reproduction of

seven colors (C, M, Y, K, R, G, B/
10~100%)

Image quality problems and solutions 1191

 Table 3-46 A/S chart (continued)

Item Description Use

[I] Color/Mono text For checking the reproduction of

color, mono text

[J] Multilingual feature For checking the reproduction of

small text

[K] White gap pattern For checking color to color, color to

mono white gap

[M] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: cm)

[N] Rulers For checking the magnification error

(unit: inch)

How to analyze image defects

See the following flowchart.

TIP: Depending on the remaining life of the part, the cause of the defect can vary. Check the
remaining life of the part.

Check for defects even if the defect is not repeated.

1192 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Figure 3-41 Defect analysis flowchart

How to analyze image defects (rollers)

Use the following table to isolate rollers suspected of causing defects.

Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects)

Roller Periodic

Magnetic roller (MR) 32.3 mm (1.27 in)

Charge Roller (CR) 37.7 mm (1.48 in)

Image quality problems and solutions 1193

 Table 3-47 Roller period table (repetitive defects) (continued)

Roller Periodic

Transfer roller 44.o mm (1.73 in)

Transfer roller (T2) 75.4 mm (2.97 in)

OPC/Drum 94.5 mm (3.72 in)

Fuser Belt (HR) 110.0 mm (4.33 in)

Fuser Pressure Roller (PR) 114.7 mm (4.51 in)

Vertical black lines

Learn about vertical black lines.

Figure 3-42 Typical faulty images

Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Charge roller (CR) is contaminated. Check if the CR is contaminated.

Replace the Drum unit if there are additional

problems.

1194 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-48 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

2 ITB is contaminated. Check if the ITB is contaminated.

● The ITB cleaning is poor.

● The ITB clean-blade is partially broken.

Replace the ITB Cleaner if there are additional

problems.

3 Scanner unit is contaminated. Wipe the surface of the contaminated parts with a
soft cloth.
● Scan glass contamination
CAUTION: The scanner unit contains fragile parts.
● Mirror contamination Use caution while cleaning.

● CCD sensor contamination

Vertical light or white lines

Learn about vertical light or white lines.

Figure 3-43 Typical faulty images

Vertical light or white lines 1195

 Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 A foreign substance is between the magnetic roller Remove the foreign substance.
and the blade.

No toner on magnetic roller.

Make the hook (transparency sheet is recommended.)

Put the hook into the gap between magnetic roller and
blade.

Pull out foreign substances.

2 The developer in the developer unit is empty or the ● Check the life remaining of the developer unit on
developer unit life has expired. the supply information report.

– If its life has expired, replace the developer

unit.

● Check if the developer layer on magnetic roller is

uniform.

– If the developer layer is short, replace the

developer unit.

3 The laser beam path is blocked. Clean the laser scanner assembly window.

(Foreign substance is on the laser scanner assembly

window.)

1196 Chapter 3 Problem solving

Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

4 The OPC is scratched or contaminated in a vertical Replace the drum unit.

direction.

Vertical light or white lines 1197

 Table 3-49 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

5 ITB cleaner or T2 transfer unit is contaminated with Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis.
paper dust build up.

● ITB cleaner contamination

NOTE: The paper dust stick (Callout 1 ) may vary

depending on the product.

NOTE: Clean the paper dust stick on a regular basis

in order to prevent horizontal light band. Frequent
cleaning can help maintain product quality.
● T2 contamination (Callout 1) & Image defect
HP recommends to clean this item when replacing
TCU at a minimum.

Horizontal periodic black lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic black lines and dots.

1198 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-44 Typical faulty images

Table 3-50 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic band or dot (CR 38 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the charge roller
with a soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the charge roller is
contaminated or scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.

2 Horizontal periodic band or dot (OPC 188 mm). Clean the contaminated surface on the OPC drum
with a soft cloth.
Check if the surface of the OPC drum is contaminated
or scratched. If the surface is scratched, replace the drum unit.

3 Check if the charge roller contact plate had debris or Clean the charge roller contact plate.
is contaminated.
If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.

If the problem persists after replacing the drum unit,

replace the HVPS board.

Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots

Learn about horizontal periodic light/dark lines and dots.

Figure 3-45 Typical faulty images

Horizontal periodic light/dark lines, dots 1199

 Table 3-51 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Horizontal periodic bands (OPC, 94.2 mm) This problem is likely to resolve itself over time.

● OPC was exposed for too long. If the problem persists, replace the drum unit.

● Damage was caused by a high voltage in a short

amount of time.

2 Horizontal periodic bands (magnetic roller, 35 mm) Replace developer unit.

The magnetic roller is in poor condition.

V-groove of the surface of magnetic roller is not

uniform.

Foggy image
Learn about foggy images.

Figure 3-46 Typical faulty images

Table 3-52 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Replace the drum unit.

2 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS board.

HVPS is damaged or broken.

1200 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-52 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Cause Action

3 Toner is over supplied by abnormal TC sensor. Replace the toner cartridge.

4 Voltage of OPC motor is abnormally low. Check the transfer assembly connection in the HVPS.

Transfer assembly voltage is abnormally high. Check if the transfer assembly roller spring in the ITB
is connected correctly.

Replace HVPS.

Light image
Learn about light image.

Figure 3-47 Typical faulty images

Table 3-53 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 TRC operates abnormally. Perform TRC three to four times.

2 Poor transfer has occurred. Force a jam during the print job. Check the image on
the transfer belt. If the image on the transfer belt is
normal, refer to the Blurred image section.

3 Output voltage of HVPS is abnormally low. Replace HVPS.

● Color density decreases.

4 TC down and toner spills. Replace the developer unit.

5 Toner spills by eraser. Check if the eraser is contaminated.

Replace the drum unit.

Blurred image
Learn about blurred images.

Light image 1201

 Figure 3-48 Typical faulty images

Table 3-54 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 High humidity and/or the quality of the paper. Use new, high quality paper.

2 T2 transfer voltage is low. Turn up the T2 transfer voltage.

3 Connection between HVPS and THV is incorrect. Check if the connection between T2 high voltage
terminal and HVPS THV terminal is correct.

Check if the connection between the HVPS and ITB is

correct.

4 HVPS operates abnormally. Replace the HVPS.

Incorrect color registration

Learn about the incorrect color registration defect.

1202 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Figure 3-49 Typical faulty images

Text of lines appear jagged, unclear, or blurred. This defect is usually caused by a faulty laser/scanner
diode.

NOTE: Feed direction (callout 1).

Table 3-55 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 CPR sensor is contaminated. Execute CPR manually.

2 Environment has changed. To recognize the environment change, execute CPR

after a certain amount of time.

3 Belt surface is contaminated. Remove the ITB. If the surface of the belt is
contaminated, clean it with soft cloth.

Uneven pitch and jitter image

Learn about uneven pitch and jitter image.

Figure 3-50 Typical faulty images

Uneven pitch and jitter image 1203

 Table 3-56 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Under 3 mm periodic jitters or horizontal bands have Remove foreign substance from the drive gears.
occurred.
Grease the drive gears.

● Developer unit gears

● Drum unit gears

● Main drive unit gears.

If the problem persists, replace the abnormal units.

● Developer unit

● Drum unit

● Main drive unit

2 Under 1 mm periodic jitter or horizontal bands have Check if the laser scanner assembly is assembled
occurred. correctly. If not, replace the screws.

Replace the laser scanner assembly.

Skewed image
Learn about skewed images.

Figure 3-51 Typical faulty images

Table 3-57 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Check item Action

1 Is the tray properly installed? Reinstall the tray correctly.

2 Is too much paper loaded in the tray? Remove some paper.

3 Are the paper guides properly set? Adjust the paper guides.

4 Is the surface of the pickup/reverse/feed Clean or replace the contaminated roller.

roller dirty?

1204 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-57 Troubleshooting procedure (continued)

Step Check item Action

5 Is the Flow ADF installed and adjusted Reinstall the Flow ADF unit.
properly?
Adjust the Flow ADF skew.

6 Is the intermediate transfer belt installed Reinstall the ITB unit.

properly?

Poor fusing performance

Learn about poor fusing performance.

Figure 3-52 Typical faulty images

Poor fusing performance 1205

 Table 3-58 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Check the paper type. Check that the paper type displayed on the control
panel is the same type of paper being used for the
Depending on what type of paper is used, print speed print job.
varies.

● Plain (71~90g/), Thick (91~105g/): Full Speed

● Heavy weight (106~175g/): Half Speed

● Envelope (75~90 g/), Label (120~150 g/): Half

Speed

2 The fuser unit is worn out. Replace the fuser unit.

3 Check the surface of the fuser belt and pressure Replace the fuser unit.
roller for scratches.

4 Check the temperature control system for problems. Check the non-contact thermistor sensor

● Thermistor is broken or operates abnormally

● Halogen lamp is broken or operates abnormally

Check the halogen lamp.

If parts are broken, replace the broken parts or the

fuser unit.

5 Check if the pressure control system operates Check the pressure control system.
properly.
If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

6 Paper is wrapped on the heating roller. Remove the wrapped paper and print a test page.

If the problem persists, replace the fuser unit.

Stain on the paper back side

Learn about the stain on the paper back side.

Figure 3-53 Typical faulty images

1206 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 Table 3-59 Troubleshooting procedure

Step Cause Action

1 Is the transfer roller dirty or worn out? Clean or replace the transfer roller assembly.

2.1 Is there any stain caused by poor cleaning on the ITB? Clean the ITB.

If the problem persists, replace the ITB unit.

2.2 Is the ITB cleaning blade in proper contact with the Take off the ITB and check that the ITB cleaning blade
ITB? pressure spring and the pressure hook are installed
correctly.

3.1 Are the fuser belt and pressure roller dirty? Clean the fuser belt and pressure roller.

3.2 Check the pressure roller surface for damage or Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.

Duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out

Learn about the duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out defect.

Figure 3-54 Typical faulty images

Troubleshooting procedure

1. Enter SVC Mode → Service Functions → TR Control Mode.

2. Select T2 Control Mode.

3. Select the paper setting based on the site. (Paper Group, Paper Side, Paper Direction).

4. Increase value for T2 PWM and check if the blur problem is resolved.

5. When the problem persists after changing the T2 Control Mode values, change the T1 Control Mode
values.

6. Decrease the value for each color and see whether the symptom disappears.

In this case, [-4] was applied and solved the blur.

7. As there can be variation for each device, change T1, T2 and observe the results.

Setting standard tone

Learn about setting a standard tone.

Duplex blur, white spot blur on color print-out 1207

 When to perform the set the standard tone procedure

● When the printer is installed for the first time.

● After replacing the transfer belt (PTB or ITB) or cleaning the color toner density (CTD) sensor.

● When there is a difference in color between models.

● When image brightness changes in comparison to a previous printing.

Figure 3-55 Image brightness (color image shown for contrast)

Normal image Dark image Light image

NOTE: If the problem persists after performing the setting standard tone procedure, investigate other
print-quality causes.

Perform a Setting Standard Tone

Use this procedure to adjust the color tone standard set during manufacturing.

1. Load A4- or Letter-size in a short-edge feeding (SEF) tray.

2. At the control panel, select the Setting item.

3. Log in as an Admin user.

4. Open the following menus:

● Adjustment

● Tone Adjustment

● Setting Standard Tone

5. Select the OK item to print a scan ID chart.

6. Place the scan ID chart on the flatbed glass, and then start a scan.

7. When prompted after the scan is complete, Select the OK item.

8. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.

Cancel a Setting Standard Tone

Use this procedure to cancel a setting standard tone and return to the customized tone (set by the user
after setting the standard tone).

1. Open the following menus:

● Adjustment

● Tone Adjustment

● Cancel Setting Standard Tone

1208 Chapter 3 Problem solving

 2. When cancellation is complete, select the OK item

3. Perform a FullTRC function: Adjustment > Auto Tone Adjustment > Full + Execute Now.

Scan image fail

When a problem occurs on the scanned ID chart, an error message displays. Check the following items:

● Check the scanned ID chart for correct placement.

● Make sure that the chart direction is horizontal.

● Retry the setting standard tone procedure.

Red/Magenta hue printouts

Learn about the red/magenta hue printouts defect.

NOTE: The printed image shows a red or magenta tone in areas where red/magenta should not be
present.

Figure 3-56 Typical faulty images

1 2
Troubleshooting procedure

1. Use the printer control panel to print a demo page (Reports > Other Pages > Demonstration Page).

NOTE: If the defect is not present on this page, the issue is occurring in the application on the
host computer.

2. If the defect appears on the demo page, perform a color calibration.

a. Open the following menus: Support Tools > Maintenance > Calibration/Cleaning.

b. Select the Color Calibrations item and then select the Start item.

NOTE: If this menu is locked, contact the printer administrator.

c. Print another demo page and check for the defect.

Red/Magenta hue printouts 1209

 3. If the error persists, replace the laser/scanner assembly (PN JC97-04864A).

Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models)

Learn about adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models).

1. Open the ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

Figure 3-57 Open ADF and loosen screws

2. Adjust the position of the ADF hinge according to the skew status.

Figure 3-58 Adjust ADF hinge

1210 Chapter 3 Problem solving

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-59 Adjust hinge

Adjusting the ADF/ADF skew (LX du models) 1211

 b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Figure 3-60 Adjust hinge

3. Detach the ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the ADF sponge on the scanner glass.
Close the ADF unit to attach the sponge.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew

Learn about adjusting the flow ADF skew.

1212 Chapter 3 Problem solving

1. Open the Flow ADF. Loosen the two screws securing both hinges.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1213

 2. Adjust the position of the Flow ADF hinge according to the skew status.

1214 Chapter 3 Problem solving

a. If the skew image is similar to the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1215

 b. If the skew image is like the following example, adjust the hinge unit in the direction of the
arrow. (1 scale = >1.0 mm skew adjustment)

1216 Chapter 3 Problem solving

3. Detach the Flow ADF sponge after adjusting the skew. Place the Flow ADF sponge on the scanner
glass. Close the Flow ADF unit to attach the sponge.

Adjusting the Flow ADF skew 1217

 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical diagrams.

Connection diagrams
Learn about the electrical-mechanical connection diagrams.

Connection Diagram (FUSER/EXIT/DUPLEX/TONER)

Learn about the connection diagram for the fuser/exit/duplex/toner.

1218 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 HDD

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4

SATA SIGNA L
SATA PO W ER
CN 22-SATA PO W ER

CN 19-SATA SIGN AL

SATA_RX_N
SATA_RX_P
SATA_TX_P
SATA_TX_N
5V2_SATA
DGND

DGND
DGND

DGND

DGND

DGND
DGND
DGND
EXIT/DU PLEX
I.5m m / 14*2P
Color
CN 33 EXIT/DU PLEX
4 1 14 1 A_DU P_RET TO NER CRUM
DU P_RET 3 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET 1.5mm / 17*1P
M OT STEP 2 3 12 3 nB_DU P_RET CN 50 TB CRU M JC39-02261A JC39-02214A
1 4 11 4 B_DU P_RET 3.3V_CRUM 1 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
5 10 5 A_DU PLEX1 3 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M K
4 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K
3 6 9 6 nA_DUPLEX1 DGN D 4 2 4 1 4 1
DUP1 M O T STEP 2 7 8 7 nB_DU PLEX1 1 5
1 8 7 8 B_DU PLEX1
JC39-02214A
3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
3 9 6 9 R_5V_PS SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
D up RETU RN 10 5 10 DGND 7 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M C
2 SCL_CRUM_ TB_C
SEN 11 4 11 nSEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN DGN D 8 2 4 1 4 1
1
1 5
2 12 3 12 DGND
EXIT TEM P JC39-02214A
1 13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP 3.3V_CRUM 9 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_M 10 4 2 3 2 3
14 1 14 NC SCL_CRUM_ TB_M 11 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M M
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 3
DGN D 12 2 4 1 4 1
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS 1 5
BIN FU LL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 3.3V_CRUM 13 1
JC39-02214A
5 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14 4 2 3 2 3
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15 3 3 2 3 2 TB CRU M Y
BIN FU LL2 2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND DGN D 16 2 4 1 4 1
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT2 1 5
NC 17
JC39-02190A
7 8 21 R_5V_PS
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
TO NER CRUM
3 10 5 24 24V4 1.5mm / 17*1P Mono
SO L

EXIT GATE
SO LEN O ID 2 CN 50 TB CRU M
1
JC39-02237A 5
11 4 25 EN _EXIT_SO L 3.3V_CRUM 1 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_K 2 4 2 3 2 3
12 3 26 R_5V_PS 3 3 2 3 2 BTL CRU M
3 SCL_CRUM_ TB_K 3
D UP 13 2 27 DGND 4 2 4 1 4 1
2 DGN D
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSEN SE_JAM_ DU PLEX1 1 5
1

3.3V_CRUM 5 5 1 4 1 4
SDA_CRUM_ TB_C 6 4 2 3 2 3
FU SER DRIVE 3 2 3 2 DEVE CRU M
SCL_CRUM_ TB_C 7 3
1.5mm / 16*2P 8 2 4 1 4 1
DGN D
1 5
JC39-02195A CN 30 FU SER DRIVE
10 1 R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 9
9 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER 5V_PS 10 2 1 ERASER LED
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_FU SER M_ O N _ERASER 11 1 2
7 4 nEN_BLDC_FU SER
FU SER BLDC
6 DGN D 12
BLDC 5
5
6
NC
R_DGND 3.3V_CRUM 13
4 7 DG ND SDA_CRUM_ TB_Y 14
3 8 DG ND SCL_CRUM_ TB_Y 15
2 9 24V2_SW DGN D 16
1 10 24V2_SW NC 17

3 11 FAN_FUSER_O UT
FUSER OU T 2 12 FB_OUT_FAN _FUSER_OUT
FAN 1 13 DG ND

SIDE CO M 1 3 14 DG ND TO N ER RESERVOIR
COVER OPEN N .O .
N .C.
2
3
2
1
15 CO VER_O PEN _SIDE
16 nCO VER_O PEN_SIDE
I.5mm / 11*2P Color
CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02257A
4 17 A_FUSER_REL A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
TO N ER
3 18 nA_FUSER_REL nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
FU SER REL M O T STEP 2 19 nB_FU SER_REL nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M O T_KC
1 20 B_FU SER_REL B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1

3 3
1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1 R_5V_PS 5 TN R LO CK
2 2
EXIT FAN 1 2 8 22 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT1 DGN D 6 SEN S_KC
1 1
3 7 23 DG ND nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2 A_RES_KC 8 4
EXIT FAN 2 2 5 5 25 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT2 nA_RES_KC 9 3 RESERVO IR
1 6 4 26 DG ND nB_RES_KC 10 2 M O T_KC
JC39-02191A B_RES_KC 11 1
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_O U T_FAN_EXIT3 A_TNR_SU P_M Y 12 4
29 DG ND 13 TO N ER
1 9 1 nA_TNR_SUP_M Y 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_MY 14 2
30 R_5V_PS 15 M O T_M Y
3 3 B_TN R_SU P_M Y 1
Fuser 2 31 DG ND
2
POSI 1 32 nSENS_FU SER_PO S1 R_5V_PS 16 3
1 RES LO CK
DGN D 17 2
nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_MY 18 1 SEN S_M Y

FU SER DRAWE R
A_RES_MY 19 4
I.5m m / 9*2P
JC39-02218A JC39-02217A nA_RES_M Y 20 3 RESERVO IR
CN 40 FUSER DRAW ER nB_RES_M Y 21 2 M O T_M Y
1 11 1 DGND B_RES_M Y 22 1
2 10
FU SER N C TH ERM
CEN TER
3
2
1
3
4
9
8
2
3
4
DGND
N C_C_TD
N C_C_TC
TO N ER RESERVOIR

3 5 7 5
I.5mm / 11*2P Mono
N C TH ERM DGN D CN 27 Toner M otor/L
o ck JC39-02242A
2 6 6 6 N C_S_TD A_TNR_SU P_KC 1 4
SIDE TO NER
1 7 5 7 N C_S_TC nA_TNR_SUP_KC 2 3
SU PP
nB_TN R_SU P_KC 3 2
M OT
8 4 8 nDETECT_FU SER B_TN R_SU P_KC 4 1

9 3 5 3
R_5V_PS TN R LO CK
10 2 6 2
DGN D SEN S
11 1 1
21P-RW ZV-K4GG -P4

21R-RW ZV-K2G G-P4

nSEN SE_TN R_LO CK_KC 7

JC39-02243A
8
JST

JST

A_RES_KC 7 1 4
nA_RES_KC 9 6 2 3 RESERVO IR
6 1 10 9 R_5V_PS 10
nB_RES_KC 5 3 2 M OT
5 2 9 10 3.3V_CRUM 11
B_RES_KC 4 4 1
4 3 8 11 ADC_CU RL_TEST
3 7 3 5 3
4 12 DGND RES FU LL
FUSER 2 6 2 6 2
5 13 SDA2_FU SER SEN S
EEPRO M 1 5 1 7 1
6 14 SCL2_FU SER

7 4 15 THERM_ REAR1
8 3 16 THERM_ REAR2
JC39-02244A 4
DGN D 12 4 1
M_ TC_VIN _K 13 3 2 3 TC
9 2 17 THERM_ FRO N T1 14 2 3 2 SENSO R
24V1_TC
10 1 18 THERM_ FRO N T2 15 1 4 1
M_ TN R_VCON _K

R_5V_PS 16
DGN D 17
nSEN SE_RES_FULL 18

A_RES_MY 19
nA_RES_M Y 20
nB_RES_M Y 21
To FDB B_RES_M Y 22

Connection Diagram (Scanner)

Learn about the connection diagram for the scanner.

Connection Diagram (Scanner) 1219

 ???

CN 55 ???
1 3.3V_MICOM
2 PA30|SWCLK
3 PA31|SWDIO
4 DGND
5 nRST_XMEGA

FLOW DOCUMENT FEEDER

-1.5mm / 17*2P

CN 42 D SDF
M S1_STEP_SCAN 1
CUR_STEP_SCAN 2
DIR_STEP_SCAN 3
nEN _STEP_SCAN 4
PLS_STEP_SCAN 5
PW M _W LED 6
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 2 7
nCO VER_O PEN _PLATEN 1 8
??? nSEN SE_SCAN _HO M E 9
-1.5mm / 6*1P nSEN SE_APS2 10
nSEN SE_APS1 11
CN 51 ??? nDETECT_RSDF 12
6 1 6 1 DG N D nSENSE_PAPER_RADF 13
5 2 5 2 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R1 nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_1 14
4 3 4 3 5V_PS TXD_DSDF 15
3 4 3 4 DG N D RXD_DSDF 16
2 5 2 5 nSEN SE_P_REG I_R2 nRST_RSDF 17
1 6 1 6 5V_PS nSENSE_SCAN_PO S_2 18
DGN D 19
DGN D 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
3.3V_SCAN 23
DGN D 24
5V_W KUP 25
DGN D 26
5V_SCAN 27
5V_SCAN 28
DGN D 29
24V_SCAN 30
24V_SCAN 31
24V_SCAN 32
24V_SCAN 33
M S2_STEP_SCAN 34

DCIS
40P FFC

CN 43 DCIS
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_P 1
CLK_M AIN _DCIS_N 2
DGN D 3
LVDO _DCIS_4_P 4
LVDO _DCIS_4_N 5
DGN D 6
LVDO _DCIS_3_P 7
LVDO _DCIS_3_N 8
DGN D 9
LVDO _DCIS_2_P 10
LVDO _DCIS_2_N 11
DGN D 12
RX_CLK_DCIS_P 13
RX_CLK_DCIS_N 14
DGN D 15
LVDO _DCIS_1_P 16

DCIS
LVDO _DCIS_1_N 17

DSDF
DGN D 18
LVDO _DCIS_0_P 19
LVDO _DCIS_0_N 20
DGN D 21
DGN D 22
SDI_DCIS 23
SCLK_DCIS 24

Scanner Unit
SDO _DCIS 25
SLO AD_DCIS 26
DGN D 27
DGN D 28
PI_SH_DCIS 29
DGN D 30
3.3V_SCAN 31
3.3V_SCAN 32
3.3V_SCAN 33
3.3V_SCAN 34
3.3V_SCAN 35
3.3V_SCAN 36
3.3V_SCAN 37
3.3V_SCAN 38
DGN D 39
DGN D 40

CCDM
BBP 50P FFC
50P
CN 41 BBP CN 44 CCDM
1 5V DGN D 1
2 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX1 CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ P 2
3 EN _M P_CLU TCH CLK_M AIN _CCDM_ N 3
4 N EN_STEP_FU SER_REL DGN D 4
5 CO VER_OPEN _SIDE SLO AD_CCDM 5
6 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SCLK_CCDM 6
7 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_KC SDI_CCDM 7
8 EN _EXIT_SO L DGN D 8
9 N EN_STEP_DUP_RET PITG_CCDM 9
10 NSENSE_T1_PO S nRST_AFE 10
11 N EN_STEP_TNR_SU P_KC SDO _CCDM 11
12 PW M _M P_SO L DGN D 12
13 CLK_BLDC_FU SER LVDO _CCDM _4_N 13
14 N EN_BLDC_FUSER LVDO _CCDM _4_P 14
15 CO VER_OPEN _FRO N T DGN D 15
16 N SEN SE_P_EM PTY2 LVDO _CCDM _3_N 16
17 PLS_STEP_T1 LVDO _CCDM _3_P 17
18 N EN_STEP_T1 DGN D 18
19 nEN_STEP_FEED RX_CLK_CCDM _N 19
20 NSENSE_FUSER_PO S1 RX_CLK_CCDM _P 20
21 nEN_STEP_REGI DGN D 21
22 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _2_N 22
23 nSEN SE_CU RL1 LVDO _CCDM _2_P 23
24 N SEN SE_P_BIN FU LL_EXIT1 DGN D 24
25 DIR_STEP_TNR_SUP_M Y LVDO _CCDM _1_N 25
26 N EN_STEP_DU PLEX2 LVDO _CCDM _1_P 26
27 PLS_STEP_DU P_RET DGN D 27
28 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX1 LVDO _CCDM _0_N 28
29 N SEN SE_P_DUP_RETU RN LVDO _CCDM _0_P 29
30 N SEN SE_P_REGI DGN D 30
31 PLS_STEP_DU PLEX2 3.3V_SCAN 31
32 PLS_STEP_FEED 3.3V_SCAN 32
33 PLS_STEP_PICKU P1 3.3V_SCAN 33
34 PLS_STEP_PICKU P2 3.3V_SCAN 34
35 PLS_STEP_REG I 3.3V_SCAN 35
36 nSEN SE_CU RL2 3.3V_SCAN 36
37 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED1 3.3V_SCAN 37
38 N SEN SE_P_PRE_FEED2 3.3V_SCAN 38
39 N SEN SE_P_FEED DGN D 39
40 N SEN SE_P_FU SER_O UT DGN D 40
41 N SENSE_JAM_ DUPLEX2 5V_SCAN 41
42 N EN_STEP_PICKU P1 5V_SCAN 42
43 N EN_STEP_PICKU P2 5V_SCAN 43
44 ADC_FB_FR 5V_SCAN 44
45 ADC_FB_REGI DGN D 45
46 ADC_FB_FEED DGN D 46
47 FB_DU P2 10V_CCD 47
48 FB_PU1 10V_CCD 48
49 FB_PU2 10V_CCD 49
50 DGN D 10V_CCD 50

BBP
16P
CN 54 BBP
1 5V
2 N EN_BLDC_O PC_K
3 N READY_BLDC_O PC_K
4 N EN_BLDC_O PC_C
5 N READY_BLDC_O PC_C
6 N EN_BLDC_O PC_M
7 N READY_BLDC_O PC_M
8 N EN_BLDC_O PC_Y
9 N READY_BLDC_O PC_Y
10 NSEN SE_SHUT_ACR
11 NREADY_BLDC_FU SER
12 N EN_STEP_RES_KC
13 DIR_STEP_RES_KC
14 N EN_STEP_RES_M Y
15 DIR_STEP_RES_M Y
16 DGN D

Connection Diagram (Laser Scanner Assembly/OPE/USB)

Learn about the connection diagram for the laser scanner assembly/OPE/USB.

1220 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 SPEAKER

HUB

FDIJOINT
-1.5m m / 11P

CN20 FDIJO INT

DGND 1
DGND 2
3.3VSUSP 3
5V_SUSP 4
nDETECT_FDI 5
NOT_READY_FDI 6
EN_COPY_EXIT_FDI 7
nEN_COPY_CNT_FDI 8
nDETECT_PSIZE_FDI 9
nDETECT_COLOR_DFI 10
nEN_FDI 11

N/W RJ45
CN1 NETW ORK 1
TD+ 2
TD- 3
RD+ 4
TERM1 5
Color Only LSU SIGNAL M Y
50FFC
TERM2
RD-
6
7
CN25 LSU SIGNAL TERM3 8
MY TERM4 9
1 DGND GREEN- 10
2 PW M _LD_POW ER_M GREEN+ 11 NTWORK
3 DGND YELLOW - 12
4 nHSYNC_M _DP YELLOW +
5 nHSYNC_M _DN
6 DGND
7 nVDO_M _B1_DP
USB
8 nVDO_M _B1_DN
9 DGND CN14 USB 1
10 nSH_M1 USB3D_VBUS 2
11 nSH_M2 USB3D_DN 3
12 DGND USB3D_DP 4
13 VDO_M _B2_DP DGND 5
14 nVDO_M _B2_DN USB3D_PXN 6
15 DGND USB3D_PXP 7
16 nVDO_M _B3_DP DGND 8
17 nVDO_M _B3_DN USB3D_RXN 9
18 DGND USB3D_RXP
19 nSH_M3
20 nSH_M4
21 DGND PC
22 nVDO_M _B4_DP
23 nVDO_M _B4_DN USB HOST Ch2
24 DGND
25 CN17 USB HOST Ch2 1
nLDON_LSU_M
26 USB3H_VBUS_REAR2 2
nLDON_LSU_Y
27 USB3H_REAR2_DN 3
DGND
28 USB3H_REAR2_DP 4
nHSYNC_Y_DP
29 DGND 5
nHSYNC_Y_DN
30 USB3H_REAR2_RXN 6
DGND
31 USB3H_REAR2_RXP 7
nVDO_Y_B1_DP
32 DGND 8
VDO_Y_B1_DN
33 USB3H_REAR2_TXN 9
DGND
34 USB3H_REAR2_TXP
nSH_Y1
35 nSH_Y2
36 DGND
EXT.DRIVE
37 nVDO_Y_B2_DP
38 nVDO_Y_B2_DN USB HOST Ch1
39 DGND
40 nVDO_Y_B3_DP CN16 USB HOST Ch1 1
41 nVDO_Y_B3_DN USB3H_VBUS_REAR1 2
42 DGND USB3H_REAR1_DN 3
43 nSH_Y3 USB3H_REAR1_DP 4
44 nSH_Y4 DGND 5
45 DGND USB3H_REAR1_RXN 6
46 nVDO_Y_B4_DP USB3H_REAR1_RXP 7
47 nVDO_Y_B4_DN DGND 8
48 DGND USB3H_REAR1_TXN 9
LASER SCANNER 49
50
PW M _LD_POW ER_Y
DGND
USB3H_REAR1_TXP

ASSEMBLY CARD READER

(COLR) LSU SIGNAL KC
60FFC
CN2 LSU SIGNALKC
1 DGND
2 DGND
3 DGND
4 DGND
5
6
7
DGND
DGND
DGND
LSU
40FFC
Mono Only
8 DGND
9 DGND CN28 LSU
10 PW M _LD_POW ER_C DGND 1
11 DGND NC 2
12 nVDO_C_B4_DN 24V3 3
13 nVDO_C_B4_DP 24V3 4
14 DGND NC 5
15 nSH_C4 DGND 6
16 nSH_C3 nSTART_LSU_M OT 7
17 DGND nREADY_LSU 8
18 nVDO_C_B3_DN CLK_LSU_M OT 9
19 nVDO_C_B3_DP 5V_LSU 10
20 DGND 5V_LSU 11
21 nVDO_C_B2_DN DGND 12
22
23
24
nVDO_C_B2_DP
DGND
PW M _LD_POW ER_K
DGND
13
14
15
LASER SCANNER
nSH_C2 nHSYNC_K_DP
25
26
nSH_C1
DGND
nHSYNC_K_DN
DGND
16
17
ASSEMBLY
27
28
nVDO_C_B1_DN
nVDO_C_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DP
nVDO_K_B1_DN
18
19
(MONO)
29 DGND DGND 20
30 nHSYNC_C_DN nSH_K1 21
31 nHSYNC_C_DP nSH_K2 22
32 DGND DGND 23
33 nLDON_LSU_C nVDO_K_B2_DP 24
34 nLDON_LSU_K nVDO_K_B2_DN 25
35 DGND DGND 26
36 nVDO_K_B4_DN nVDO_K_B3_DP 27
37 nVDO_K_B4_DP nVDO_K_B3_DN 28
38 DGND DGND 29
39 nSH_K4 nSH_K3 30
40 nSH_K3 nSH_K4 31
41 DGND DGND 32
42 nVDO_K_B3_DN nVDO_K_B4_DP 33
43 nVDO_K_B3_DP nVDO_K_B4_DN 34
44 DGND DGND 35
45 nVDO_K_B2_DN nLDON_LSU_K 36
46 nVDO_K_B2_DP DGND 37
47 DGND DGND 38
48 nSH_K2 DGND 39
49 nSH_K1 CON_DETECT_LSU 40
50 DGND
51 nVDO_K_B1_DN
52 nVDO_K_B1_DP
53 DGND
54 nHSYNC_K_DN
55 nHSYNC_K_DP
56 DGND
57 PW M _LD_POW ER_K
58 DGND
59 ADC_LSU_TEMP
60 CON_DETECT_LSU

Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup)

Learn about the connection diagram for the Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup.

Connection Diagram (Side/MP/Feed/Registration/Pickup) 1221

 REAR/FRONT/LED
Color Only I.5m m /10*2P TB CRUM
1.5m m /8*1P Color
JC39-02229A JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED
1 1 15 1 ACR_REAR CN48 TB CRUM
LEFT 2 2 14 2 5VA ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
ACR 3 3 13 3 DGND 5VA 2
REAR 4 4 12 4 NC DGND 3
5 5 11 5 PW M _ACR_LED_REAR ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4
JC39-02239A JC39-02258A
1 6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P R_5V_PS 5 1 3 3
2 2 T1 POSI
RIGHT 2 7 9 7 5VA DGND 6 2
3 1 SENSOR
ACR 3 8 8 8 DGND SENS_T1_POS 7 1
FRONT 4 9 7 9 NC
5 10 6 10 PW M _ACR_LED_FRONT DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 PAPER REGI
2
5V_PS 10 SENSOR
1 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1
2 12 4 12 5VA
CENTER
3 13 3 13 DGND
CTD
4 14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S TB CRUM
5 15 1 15 PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 1.5m m /8*1P
CN48 TB CRUM
Mono
ACR SHUTTER 2 1 5 16 DGND ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 JC39-02236A 7 1 JC39-02235A 1
M OT DC 1 2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1 6 2
5VA 2 2
JC39-02220A DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
3 3 3 18 R_5V_PS 4 4
ACR SHUTTER ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4
2 4 2 19 DGND 3 5
SENS PW M _ACR_LED_CENTER 5 5
1 5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEM P 7 1 7 1 TEM P

PICKUP 8
DGND 3 1 3
9 PAPER REGI
nSENSE_P_REGI 2 2 2
10 SENSOR
CN49 PICKUP 5V_PS 1 3 1
JC39-02234A 1 JC39-02204A
3 1 9 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EM PTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EM PTY1
JC39-02201A 4 m icroSD SOCKET
3 4 6 R_5V_PS
2 5 5 5 DGND
PAPER_LIFT1 CN12 microSD SOCKET
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1 1
DATA2_SD
2
3 7 3 7 DGND DATA3_SD
3
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1 CM D_SD
4
1 9 1 9 5V_PS 3.3V
5
CLK_SD
6
4 10 A_PICKUP1 DGND
7
3 11 nA_PICKUP1 DATA0_SD
PICKUP1 8
M OT STEP 2 12 nB_PICKUP1 DATA1_SD
9
1 13 B_PICKUP1 DGND
10
DGND
11
3 14 R_5V_PS DGND
1 10 12
2 15 DGND DGND
PAPER_EM PTY2 2 9 13
1 16 nSENSE_P_EM PTY2 DGND
3 8 14
DGND
3
JC39-02202A 17 R_5V_PS
4 7
2 5 6 18 DGND M SOK
PAPER_LIFT2
1 6 5 19 nSENSE_C_LIFT2
CN21 M SOK
20 DGND 1
3 7 4 DGND
FEED2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2 2
2 8 3 SCK_M SOK
22 5V_PS 3
1 9 2 DGND
4
10 1 M SOI_M SOK
5
DGND
4 23 A_PICKUP2 6
nSS_M SOK
PICKUP2 3 24 nA_PICKUP2 7
DGND
M OT STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2 M SIO_M SOK
8
1 26 B_PICKUP2 9
3_3V_PS
10
SCL0_M SOK
11
3_3V_PS
FEED_REGI 12
SDA0_M SOK

DEBUGGER M AIN
CN53 FEED_REGI
JC39-02336A -2.0mm /4*1P
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5 2 24V4 CN8 DEBUGGER M AIN
FEED M OT
STEP 3 4 3 nA_FEED 3.3V 1
4 3 4 nB_FEED RXD_M CB 2
HYBRID
5 2 5 24V4 TXD_M CB 3
6 1 6 B_FEED DGND 4

1 6 7 A_REGI DEBUGGER SCAN

2 5 8 24V1_SW -2.0mm /4*1P
REGIM OT
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
CN9 DEBUGGER SCAN
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 11 24V1_SW 3.3V 1
5 2 2
12 B_REGI RXD_SCB
6 1 3
TXD_SCB
M P CLUTCH DGND 4
1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH
DEBUGGER ENGINE
-2.0mm /4*1P
SIDE /MP CN10 DEBUGGER
ENGINE
1.5m m /20*2P
3.3V 1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A CN32 SIDE / M P /PTB RXD_ENG 2
2 1 5 1 20 1 24V3 TXD_ENG 3
M P SO L
1 2 4 2 19 2 PW M _MP _SOL DGND 4
INNER
JC39-02210A ENGINE PANEL
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
-1.5m m /5*1P FINISHER
M P EM PTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EM PTY CN11 ENGINE PANEL
DGND 1
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS 5V_SUSP 2
M P PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_W IDTH RXD_ENG_PANEL 3
W IDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND R_5V_SUSP 4
JC39-02211A TXD_ENG_PANEL 5
3 4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
M P PAPER
2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH
1 6 1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH DUAL FAX

3 1 3 12 9 12 DGND CN24 DUALFAX

PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8 13 nSENSE_P_FEED 5V_SUSP 1 FINISHER
1 3 1 14 7 14 5V_PS DGND 2
JC39-02208A 3.3V 3
3K
4 15 6 15 A_DUPLEX2 3.3V 4
DUP2 3 16 5 16 nA_DUPLEX2 DGND 5
M OT STEP 2 17 4 17 nB_DUPLEX2 DGND 6
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2 CM L_M ODEM 1 7
3 CM L_M ODEM 2 8 *****-****/
19 2 19 NC AOUT0 9 M OLEX
20 1 20 NC AOUT1 10
nRST_M ODEM 1 11
JC39-02338A 1 6
JC39-02240A 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS nCTS_M ODEM 1 12
3 54679-1619/
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND nCTS_M ODEM 2 13
M OLEX
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1 nRTS_M ODEM 1 14
nRTS_M ODEM 2 15
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS DGND 16
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND nDETECT_MO DEM 1 17
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2 nDETECT_MO DEM 2 18
TXD_M ODEM1 19
4 7 4 TXD_M ODEM2 20
3 8 3 RXD_M ODEM1 21
PTB CRUM
2 9 2 RXD_M ODEM2 22
Mono 1 10 1 nRI_MOD EM _1
nRI_MOD EM _2
23
24
nINT_M ODEM _1 25
nINT_M ODEM _2 26
nDCD_M ODEM _1 27
PTB 4 1 7 27 DGND nDCD_M ODEM _2 28
7 14
W ASTE 3 2 6 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL nRST_M ODEM _2 29
8 13
FULL 2 3 5 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED DGND 30
9 12
1 4 4 30 R_5V_PS
10 11

11 10 31 3.3V_CRUM
JC39-02207A 12 9 32 SCL2_PTB
13 8 33 SDA2_PTB
14 7 34 DGND

3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX 6 2
2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2 7 1
1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM _DUPLEX2

3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 39 DGND
2 2 2 19 2
OUT 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
1 3 1 20 1
JC39-02209A

3 1 3
FAN
2 2 2
SIDE
1 3 1

To FDB

2-292246-2/
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A TYCO
3 1 6 1
CURL1 2 2 5 2
1 3 4 3
2-292249-2/
3 4 3 4 TYCO
CURL2 2 5 2 5
1 6 1 6

7
8 DCF
Color 9
10

LC T HCF

1222 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock)
Learn about the connection diagram for the OPC/WTB/CST Lock.

Connection Diagram (OPC/WTB/CST Lock) 1223

 T1 /ERASER /OPC CRUM
-1.5mm /16*2P OPC HOM E
CN36 T1 / ERASER /
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM CN29 O PC HO M E
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
JC39-02240A
R_5V_PS 1 3
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K DGND 2 2
3 3 4 3
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_K 3 1
4 4 3 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4 SDA_CRUM _OPC_K
2 R_5V_PS 4 3
5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM _OPC_K
1 DGND 5 2
6 1 6 1 6 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_C 6 1

R_5V_PS 7 3
JC39-02256A DGND 8 2
1 1 6 1 6 7 5V_PS 9 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_M
2 2 5 2 5 8 ON_ERASER_C
3 3 4 3 R_5V_PS 10 3
4 4 3 4 4 9 3.3V_CRUM 11 2
DGND
3 10 SDA_CRUM _OPC_C 12 1
nSENSE_OPC_HOM E_Y
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM _OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND

2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND OPC K
15 NC
16 NC CN29 OPC K JC39-02239A
JC39-02256A 1 10
DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 9
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS 2
CLK_BLDC_OPC_K 8
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M 3
nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 7
3 3 4 3 4
nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 6
4 4 3 4 4 19 3.3V_CRUM 5
3 20 SDA_CRUM _OPC_M
NC
6 5 BLDC
2 BRK_BLDC_OPC_K 4
5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM _OPC_M 7
1 DGND 3
6 1 6 1 22 DGND 8
DGND 2
9
DGND 1
10
DGND
11
JC39-02256A NC
1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS 12
1
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3
4 4 3 4 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
3 26 SDA_CRUM _OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM _OPC_Y T/C SENSOR
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND -1.5m m /15*2P
CN34 T/C SENSOR
1 4 29 A_T1 DGND 1 JC39-02260A JC39-02259A
2 3 30 nA_T1 4 1 4
TC_VIN_K 2 3 2 3
3 2 31 nB_T1 3
24V1_TC 2 3 2
4 1 32 B_T1 4
TNR_VCON_K 1 4 1

DGND 5 4 1
JC39-02259A 4
TC_VIN_C 6 3 2 3
24V1_TC 7 2 3 2
TNR_VCON_C 8 1 4 1

R_5V_PS 9
12 1 3
DGND 10
11 2 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_K 11
10 3 1
R_5V_PS 12
9 4 3
DGND 13
BLDC OPC KCMY 8 5 2
nSENSE_FULL_RES_C 14
7 6 1
JC39-02342A
CN47 BLDC OPC NC 15
6 7 3
JC39-02232A KCM Y 5 8 2
10 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K 4 9 1
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K 3 10 3
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K 2 11 2
6 5 NC
BLDC 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
1 12 1
4 7 DGND DGND 16
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
3 8 DGND TC_VIN_M 17
3 2 3
2 9 24V1_SW 24V1_TC 18
2 3 2
1 10 24V1_SW TNR_VCON_M 19
1 4 1
10 11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C DGND 20
4 1
JC39-02259A 4
9 12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C TC_VIN_Y 21
3 2 3
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 24V1_TC 22
2 3 2
7 14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C TNR_VCON_Y 23
1 4 1
6 15 NC
BLDC 5 16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 24
4 17 DGND DGND 25
3 18 DGND nSENSE_FULL_RES_M 26
2 19 24V7
1 20 24V7 R_5V_PS 27
DGND 28
10 21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_FULL_RES_Y 29
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
8 23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M NC 30
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
6 25 NC
BLDC 5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
4 27 DGND
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7 HVPS2 /SKEW MO TOR
-1.5mm /12*2P
10 31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y CN4 HVPS2 / SKEW CN2
9 32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y M O TOR
33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
JC39-02228A 12 nEN_DEVE_AC_K
8 nEN_DEVE_AC_K 1 12
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_C 2 11 11 nEN_DEVE_AC_C
6 35 NC nEN_DEVE_AC_M 3 10 10 nEN_DEVE_AC_M
BLDC 5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y nEN_DEVE_AC_Y 4 9 9 nEN_DEVE_AC_Y
4 37 DGND ADC_READ_HVPS_24V 5 8 8 ADC_READ_HVPS_24V
3 38 DGND DGND 6 7 7 GND
2 39 24V5 DGND 7 6 6 GND
1 40 24V5 DGND 8 5 5 GND
3.3V_PS 9 4 4 3.3V
24V2_SW 10 3 3 24V
24V2_SW 11 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 12 1 1 24V

A_SKEW _Y 13 12
nA_SKEW _Y 14 11
B_SKEW _Y 15 10
nB_SKEW _Y 16 9
A_SKEW _M 17 8
nA_SKEW _M 18 7
B_SKEW _M 19 6
nB_SKEW _M 20 5
A_SKEW _C 21 4
nA_SKEW _C 22 3
B_SKEW _C 23 2
nB_SKEW _C 24 1

W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_ FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1

A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1

DGND 8 3 1 COM
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.

DGND 11 4 1 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1

R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 10 1 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9 2 1 2

R_5V_PS 20 8 3 3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23 5 6 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 4 7 1 2

R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1

NC 28

LSU PD /RESERVOIR SENSOR

-1.5m m /22*1P

CN26 LSU P M OTOR JC39-02231A

5V_LSU 1
5V_LSU 2
DGND 3
24V2 4
DGND 5
nSTART_LSU_M OT 6
nREADY_LSU 7
CLK_LSU_M OT 8

1224 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB)
Learn about the connection diagram for the HVPS/LVPS/FDB.

M ono Only
HVPS(MONO)
HVPS
24FFC

HEATER SW ITCH
M AIN SW ITCH
CN31 HVPS
nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
24V2_SW 2 2 24V
24V2_SW 3 3 24V
ADC_HVPS_24V 4 4 ADC_HVPS_24V
24V2_SW 5 5 24V
GND 6 6 GND

JC39-02250A
GND 7 7 GND
3.3V 8 8 3.3V
GND 9 9 GND
NC 10 10 NC
ADC_READ_M HV 11 11 ADC_READ_M HV

JC39-02197A
AC
PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid 12 12 PW M _THV+_CV_hybrid

JC39-02203A
PW M _M HV 13 13 PW M _M HV
PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid 14 14 PW M _THV+_CV_SELECT_hybrid

J
9
-
A
7
C03
21
ToFUSER
PW M _SAW 15 15 PW M _SAW
ADC_READ_THV 16 16 ADC_READ_THV

INLET
PW M _THV_N 17 17 PW M _THV_N
nEN_DEVE 18 18 nEN_DEVE
PW M _FUSER_BIAS 19 19 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _DEVE_DC 20 20 PW M _DEVE_DC

GND
PW M _THV_P 21 21 PW M _THV_P
PW M _DEVE_VPP 22 22 PW M _DEVE_VPP

JC39-02199A
PW M _DEVE_AC 23 23 PW M _DEVE_AC
GND 24 24 GND

JC39-02248A
4
3
2
1

HEATER SW ITCH
4
3
2
1

2
1

3
2
1
M AIN SW ITCH

LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN10
LIVE
LIVE
NEUTRAL
NEUTRAL
CN5

NEUTRAL
LIVE
CN1

COM M ON
LAM P2
LAM P1
CN6

FUSER
INLET
DEVE HV M 2

JC39-02249A
To INPUT OPTION
THV M

JC39-02247A
SAW /M HV
CN2 1
1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL 2
M ono :SM PS TYPE3R

TYPE5 3
Color SM

INPUT OPTION
(OPTI

CN7 (Blue)
1 LIVE CN3

JC39-02246A
2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE 1
O N/SCAN)

: PS TYPE4

FDB

2 NEUTRAL FUSER HV M 2
TYPE3R TYPE3R
DCF
JC39-02193A

CON1 CN8(Red)
LIVE 1 1 LIVE CN4
NEUTRAL 2 2 NEUTRAL 1 LIVE
2 NEUTRAL JC39-02
6196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
A
JC39-02192A

ColorOnly
HVPS

220V Only
35FFC

HVPS(COLOR)
CN11
CN3 HVPS
ON_FUSER_CENTER 1

1
REACTOR
ON_FUSER_RELAY 5

nDETECT_HVPS 1 1 nDETECT_HVPS
ON_SM PS_RELAY 7
FUSER_ON
24VS
RELAY_ON
24V_ON/OFF
GND
CON4

+24V3
GND
+24V2
GND
+24V1
GND
+5V
CON3

2
ON_FUSER_SIDE 2

PW M _D_AC_FREQ 2 2 PW M _D_AC_FREQ
TYPE3R S

ZERO_CROSS 10
SM PS TYPE 3R

M AIN IF

PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y 3 3 PW M _D_AC_VPP_Y
AC_SENSE 9

ADC_R_M HV_K 4 4 ADC_R_M HV_K

+24VS2 6

+24VS1 4

PW M _D_DC_Y 5 5 PW M _D_DC_Y
CN12
GND 8

GND 3

CN9
IGNAL

NC 6 6 NC
1
PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M 7 7 PW M _DC_AC_VPP_M
2
8 8 PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
5
4
3
2
1

7
6
5
4
3
2
1

PW M _THV+_CC_SEL
PW M _D_DC_M 9 9 PW M _D_DC_M
JC27-00 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb 10 10 PW M _THV+CC_Hyb
90009A
J
2
7
0
A
C
- 0 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C 11 11 PW M _D_AC_VPP_C
PW M _M HV_K 12 12 PW M _M HV_K

JC39-02252A
SM PS TYPE5 6*2P PW M _D_DC_C 13 13 PW M _D_DC_C
CN5 SM PS TYPE5 PW M _M HV_C 14 14 PW M _M HV_C
1 5V1 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K 15 15 PW M _D_AC_VPP_K
2 5V2 PW M _M HV_M 16 16 PW M _M HV_M
SM PS TYPE5 PW M _D_DC_K 17 17 PW M _D_DC_K
TYPE5 3 24V1
4 24V2 PW M _M HV_Y 18 18 PW M _M HV_Y
CN3 JC39-02213A(C) 19 19 ADC_R_THV2
CN1 +24V1 1 3
2
1
A
J
9
-
4
)
M
(-
32
C
0
40
A2 M )
JC39-02344A(
5
6
24V3 ADC_R_THV2
ADC_R_M HV_C 20 20 ADC_R_M HV_C
1 LIVE 24V4 HV_OPC_Y
GND 2

JC39-02225A
7 DGND PW M _THV_2 21 21 PW M _THV_2
2 NEUTRAL +24V2 3
8 DGND ADC_R_M HV_M 22 22 ADC_R_M HV_M HV_OPC_M
GND 4 23 23 PW M _THV2_CLEAN
9 DGND PW M _THV2_CLEAN
+24V3 5 24 24 ADC_R_M HV_Y
10 DGND ADC_R_M HV_Y HV_OPC_C
GND 6 25 25 PW M _SAW
11 DGND PW M _SAW
+24V4 7 26 26 ADC_R_ITHV_Y
12 DGND ADC_R_ITHV_Y HV_OPC_K
(M ain SYSTEM )

GND 8 27 27 PW M _FUSER_BIAS
PW M _FUSER_BIAS
SM PS TYPE5

SM PS TYPE3 4*2P ADC_R_ITHV_M 28 28 ADC_R_ITHV_M

ADC_R_IHTV_K 29 29 ADC_R_IHTV_K
TYPE5 SIGNAL CN6 SM PS TYPE4
PW M _ITHV_Y 30 30 PW M _ITHV_Y
/ TYPE3R
CN4 JC39-02212A(C) 8 1 ADC_R_IHTV_C 31 31 ADC_R_IHTV_C
5V_OPT

JC39-02223A
HV_DEVE_Y
GND 1 C
9
10
J
3
9
2
(
A
)
C
-
4
M-
20 M )
3
JC39-02343A( 7 2 24V5 PW M _ITHV_M 32 32 PW M _ITHV_M
+24V_ON/OFF 2 6 3 PW M _ITHV_K 33 33 PW M _ITHV_K
24V6 HV_DEVE_M
GND 3 5 4 PW M _ITHV_C 34 34 PW M _ITHV_C
24V7
4 5 GND 35 35 GND
DGND HV_DEVE_C
3 6 DGND
SM PS TYPE5 2 7 DGND
1 HV_DEVE_K
8 DGND
CN2
+5V1 1
GND 2

JC39-02226A
HV_T1_Y 1
+5V2 3 AC CTRL./FDB /PAPER 2
GND 4
DET 1.5m m /17*2P HV_T1_M 3
JC39-02221A(C) CN39 AC CTRL./ 4
-
2
1
)
C
J
C
0
3
M
3
2
A3
9 M)
9
2
(
JC39-02233A( JC39-02569A FDB / PAPER DET HV_T1_C 5
JC39-02196A
J
C
3
9
-
0
2
1
6
A 6
17 1 ZEROCROSS
10 1 HV_T1_K 7
16 2 AC_SENS
9 2
15 3 DGND
8 3
14 4 ON_SM PS_RREAY
7 4
13 5 24V3
6 5

C39-02227A
12 6 ON_FUSER_RELAY T2HV
5 6
11 7 24VS_FUSER
4 7
10 8 DGND
3 8
9 9 ON_FUSER_SIDE
2 9
8 10 ON_FUSER_CENTER
1 10 1
3
2 11 11 EN_24V_ENGINE 2
7
JC39-02224A
1 12 6 12 DGND HV_SAW
3
5
4
3
2 13 5 13 EN_24V_OPTION
1 14 4 14 DGND

3 15 3 15 FAN_SM PS
SM PS
FAN

2 16 2 16 FB_OUT_FAN_SM PS
1 17 1 17 DGND

4 18 nDETECT_CST1
PAPER SIZE1 PAPER SIZE2

3 19 DGND
2 20 ADC_P_SIZE1
1 21 DGND

4 22 nDETECT_CST2
3 23 DGND
2 24 ADC_P_SIZE2
1 25 1.8V_PS

26 FAN_DEVE
DEVE / OPC

3
2 27 FB_OUT_FAN_DEVE
FAN

1 28 DGND

4 29 ADC_OUT_TEM P
3 30 DGND
2 31 ADC_OUT_HUM I
1 32 3.3V_PS
OUT TEM P
/HUM ID

33 NC
34 NC

Electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagrams.

Main drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the toner supply drive.

Connection Diagram (HVPS/LVPS/FDB) 1225

 Figure 4-1 Main drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

321 5v

321 5v

321 5v

321 5v

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

24v 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

BLDC OPC KCMY

CN47 BLDC OPC

KCM Y
JC39-02232A 1 DIR_BLDC_OPC_K
10
9 2 CLK_BLDC_OPC_K
8 3 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_K
7 4 nEN_BLDC_OPC_K
6 5 NC
24v 5 6 BRAKE_BLDC_OPC_K
4 7 DGND
3 8 DGND
2 9 24V1_SW
1 10 24V1_SW OPCHOME

11 DIR_BLDC_OPC_C CN 29 OPCHOME JC39-02240A

10 R_5V_PS 1 3
12 CLK_BLDC_OPC_C
9 DGND 2
8 13 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_C 2
14 nEN_BLDC_OPC_C nSENSE_OPC_HOME_K 3 1 5v
7
6 15 NC
16 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_C R_5V_PS 4 3
24v 5
17 DGND DGND 5 2
4
3 18 DGND nSENSE_OPC_HOME_C 6 1 5v
2 19 24V7
R_5V_PS 7 3
1 20 24V7
DGND 8 2
21 DIR_BLDC_OPC_M nSENSE_OPC_HOME_M 9 1 5v
10
9 22 CLK_BLDC_OPC_M
23 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_M R_5V_PS 10 3
8 DGND 11 2
7 24 nEN_BLDC_OPC_M
25 NC nSENSE_OPC_HOME_Y 12 1 5v
6
5 26 BREAK_BLDC_OPC_M
24v 27 DGND
4
3 28 DGND
2 29 24V7
1 30 24V7

31 DIR_BLDC_OPC_Y
10
32 CLK_BLDC_OPC_Y
9
8 33 nREADY_BLDC_OPC_Y
7 34 nEN_BLDC_OPC_Y
6 35 NC
5 36 BRK_BLDC_OPC_Y
24v 37 DGND
4
3 38 DGNG
2 39 24V5
1 40 24V5

1226 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the T1 drive.

T1 drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1227

 Figure 4-2 T1 drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

4
3
2
1
24v

T1/ERASER/OPC CRUM
-1.5mm / 16*2P
CN36 T1/ERASER/
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A OPC CRUM
1 1 6 1 6 1 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 2 ON_ERASER_K
3 3 4 3
4 4 4 3 3.3V_CRUM
3 4
3 4 SDA_CRUM_OPC_K
2 5 2 5 2 5 SCL_CRUM_OPC_K
1 6 1 6 1 6 DGND

JC39-02256A JC39-02255A 7 5V_PS

1 1 6 1 6
8 ON_ERASER_C
2 2 5 2 5
3 3 4 3
4 9 3.3V_CRUM
4 4 3 4
3 10 SDA_CRUM_OPC_C
2 5 2 5 2 11 SCL_CRUM_OPC_C
1 6 1 6 1 12 DGND
JC39-02255A
2 13 ADC_INNER_TEMP
1 14 DGND

15 NC
16 NC
JC39-02256A JC39-02255A
1 1 6 1 6 17 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 18 ON_ERASER_M
3 3 4 3
4 4 4 19 3.3V_CRUM
3 4
3 20 SDA_CRUM_OPC_M
2 5 2 5 2 21 SCL_CRUM_OPC_M
1 6 1 6 1 22 DGND

JC39-02256A JC39-02255A
1 1 6 1 6 23 5V_PS
2 2 5 2 5 24 ON_ERASER_Y
3 3 4 3 4 25 3.3V_CRUM
4 4 3 4 3 26 SDA_CRUM_OPC_Y
2 5 2 5 2 27 SCL_CRUM_OPC_Y
1 6 1 6 1 28 DGND
JC39-02256A 29 A_T1
4
3 30 nA_T1
2 31 nB_T1
24v
32 B_T1
1
24v

1228 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the WTB drive.

WTB drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1229

 Figure 4-3 WTB drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

4 JC31-00110A
24v
3
2
1

WTB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN 38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
24v
JC39-02337A
A_W TB 4 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2 24v
B_W TB 7 1
24v
DGND 8 JC39-02337A COM
3 1
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 3 N.C.
24v
JC39-02337A 4 1
DGND 11 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 2 3
EN_W TB_LED 13 2 3 2
5V_PS 14 1 4 1
24v
JC39-02337A
R_5V_PS 15 3
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 24v 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18 JC39-02337A 10
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9
24v
R_5V_PS 20 JC39-02337A 8
DGND 21 7
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6
24v
JC39-02337A 5
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 24v
4
JC39-02337A
R_5V_PS 25 3
DGND 26 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 24v
1

NC 28

1230 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup drive.

Pickup drive (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1231

 Figure 4-4 Pickup drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

JC93-01083A
PICKUP1
4
MOT
3
2
1
24v

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
3 1 9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
JC39-02201A
3 4 6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 2 5 5 5 DGND
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1

3 7 3 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2
8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS

PICKUP1 4 10 A_PICKUP1
MOT 24v 3 11 nA_PICKUP1
2 12 nB_PICKUP1
1 13 B_PICKUP1
24v

3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A
3 4 7
17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2

3 7 4
FEED2 3 20 DGND
2 8
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10

4 23 A_PICKUP2
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOT
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

1232 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Registration unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration unit.

Figure 4-5 Registration unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

JC39-02204A

PAPER REGI
3
SENSOR
2
5v
1
0604-001381

TB CRUM
-1.5mm /8*1P

CN48 TB CRUM JC39-02236A JC39-02235A

ADC_CTD_CENTER_P 1 7 1 1
5VA 2 6 2 2
DGND 3 5 3 3 CTD SENSOR
ADC_CTD_CENTER_S 4 4 4 4
PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER 5 3 5 5
JC39-02236A
DGND 6 2 6 2 INNER
ADC_INNER_TEMP 7 1 7 1 TEMP

JC39-02236A
DGND 8 3
nSENSE_P_REGI 9 2
5V_PS 10 JC39-02204A PAPER REGI
1
SENSOR
5v

Pickup unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup unit.

Registration unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1233

 Figure 4-6 Pickup unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

9 0604-001393
6 8 PAPER_EMPTY1
0604-001393 5v
5 7
PAPER_LIFT1
4
5v

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 5v JC39-02234A
8 2 DGND
7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
5v
JC39-02234A
6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 5v JC39-02201A 5 5 DGND
4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1
5v
JC39-02201A JC39-02234A
3 7 3
7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2
8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC39-02234A
4 10 A_PICKUP1
PICKUP1 3
MOT STEP 2
11 nA_PICKUP1
12 nB_PICKUP1
1 13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7
17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
JC39-02202A 4 JC39-02234A
3 7 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8 3
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOT
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

1234 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

ACR unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the ACR unit.

Figure 4-7 ACR unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific)

6
7
RIGHT
8
ACR
9
FRONT
10 5v
JC32-00014A

JC31–00078A
ACR SHUTTER
JC32-00014A 1
MOT
2
24v
11
12 CENTER
CTD 0604-001393 3
13 ACR SHUTTER
JC32-00014A 5v 4
14 SENS 5
15 5v
1
LEFT
2
ACR
3 REAR
4 5v
5

REAR/FRONT/LED
-1.5mm/10*2P

LEFT JC39-02230A CN35 REAR/FRONT/LED

ACR 1 15 1 ACR_REAR
REAR 2 14 2 5VA
3 13 3 DGND
JC39-02229A
4 12 4 NC
5 11 5v 5 PW M_ACR_LED_REAR

RIGHT JC39-02230A
6 10 6 ADC_ACR_FRONT_P
ACR
7 9 7 5VA
FRONT
8 8 8 DGND
9 7 9 NC
10 6 10 PW M_ACR_LED_FRONT
5v
JC39-02230A
CENTER 11 5 11 ADC_CTD_CENTER_P
CTD 12 4 12 5VA
13 3 13 DGND
14 2 14 ADC_CTD_CENTER_S
15 1 15 PW M_ACR_LED_CENTER
5v
ACR SHUTTER JC39-02230A
MOT 1 5 16 DGND
2 4 17 OUT_DC_ACR_SHUT1
24v
ACR SHUTTER JC39-02230A
SENS 3 3 18 R_5V_PS
4 2 19 DGND
JC39-02220A
5 1 20 nSENSE_SHUT_ACR
5v

Exit unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit unit.

ACR unit (E87640, E87650, E87660 specific) 1235

 Figure 4-8 Exit unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC93-00802A
5
JC93-00802A
6
7 1
8 2
3
DUP1 MOT 4
DUP_RET
MOT

JC93-00802A
24v 24v
EXIT GATE 3
SOLENOID 2
1

24v

CN 33 Connector on Main PCA

EXIT/DUPLEX
-1.5Vmm /14*2P

CN33 EXIT/DUPLEX
DUP_RET JC39-02188A
1 14 1 A_DUP_RET
MOT 2 13 2 nA_DUP_RET
3 24v 12
3 nB_DUP_RET
4 11 4 B_DUP_RET

JC39-02188A 5 A_DUPLEX1
5 10
DUP1 MOT 6 nA_DUPLEX1
6 24v 9 7 nB_DUPLEX1
7 8
8 7 8 B_DUPLEX1

JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 6 10 DGND
Dup RETURN 5
SEN 2 10 11 nSENSE_P_DUP_RETURN
1 11 4
JC39-02189A 3 JC39-02188A
2 12 12 DGND
13 2 13 ADC_EXIT_TEMP
1
14 1 14 NC

JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 14 15 R_5V_PS
BINFULL1 2 2 13 16 DGND
1 3 12 17 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT1
BINFULL2
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 1 5 4 11 18 R_5V_PS
2 2 4 5 10 19 DGND
1 3 3 6 9 20 nSENSE_P_BINFULL_EXIT2

JC39-02188A 21 R_5V_PS
JC39-02189A 7 8
4 2 8 7 22 DGND
5 1 9 6 23 nDETECT_JOB_SEP
EXIT GATE JC39-02189A JC39-02188A
3 10 5 24 24V4
SOLENOID 24v
2
24v 11 4 25 EN_EXIT_SOL
1
JC39-02189A JC39-02188A 26 R_5V_PS
3 12 3
DUP 13 2 27 DGND
2
JAM 1 14 1 28 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX1
1

1236 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the fuser exit drive.

Figure 4-9 Fuser exit drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)

FUSER BLDC
JC39-02195A
24v

1
2
3
4
5
6
7 17 FUSER
8 18 REL MOT
9 19
10 20

FUSER DRIVE
-1/5mm /16*2P
FUSER BLDC
CN30 FUSER DRIVE
JC39-02195A
1 R_DGND
24v 2 CLK_BLDC_FUSER
3 nREADY_BLDC_FUSER
4 nEN_BLDC_FUSER
5 NC
6 R_DGND
7 DGND
8 DGND
9 24V2_SW
10 24V2_SW

3 11 FAN_FUSER_OUT
FUSER OUT 2
FAN 1 12 FB_OUT_FAN_FUSER_OUT
13 DGND
COM 1 3
SIDE 14 DGND
N.O. 2 2 15 COVER_OPEN_SIDE
COVER OPEN N.C. 3 1 16 nCOVER_OPEN_SIDE

17 A_FUSER_REL
FUSER REL MOT 18 nA_FUSER_REL
19 nB_FUSER_REL
20 B_FUSER_REL

3 1 9 21 FAN_EXIT1
EXIT FAN 1 2 2 8 22 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT1
1 3 7 23 DGND

3 4 6 24 FAN_EXIT2
2 5 5 25 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT2
EXIT FAN 2
1 6 4 26 DGND
JC39-02191A
3 7 3 27 FAN_EXIT3
EXIT FAN 3 2 8 2 28 FB_OUT_FAN_EXIT3
1 9 1 29 DGND

3 3 30 R_5V_PS
Fuser 2 2 31 DGND
POSI 1 1 32 nSENSE_FUSER_PO S1

Registration drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the registration drive.

Fuser exit drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1237
 Figure 4-10 Registration drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)

JC31-00132A
6 REGI MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1

CN 53 Connector on Main PCA

FEED_REGI

FEED MOT CN53 FEED+REGI

JC39-02336A
1 6 1 A_FEED
2 5
STEP 3 4
2 24V4
3 nA_FEED
4 3
HYBRID 5 2
4 nB_FEED
5 24V4
6 1
6 B_FEED
24v
6 7 A_REGI
5 8 24V1_SW
REGI MOT
4 9 nA_REGI
24v 3 10 nB_REGI
2 11 24V1_SW
1 12 B_REGI

MP CLUTCH 1 2 13 24V4
CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH

Feed drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed drive.

1238 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-11 Feed drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC31-00132A
6 FEED MOT
5 24v
4
3
2
1

CN 53 Connector on Main PCA

FEED_REGI

CN53 FEED+REGI
JC39-02336A
6 1 A_FEED
JC31-00132A 5 2 24V4
FEED MOT 4 3 nA_FEED
3 4 nB_FEED
24v
2 5 24V4
1 6 B_FEED
24v
1 6 7 A_REGI
2 5 8 24V1_SW
STEP 3 4 9 nA_REGI
REGI MOT
4 3 10 nB_REGI
HYBRID 5 2 11 24V1_SW
6 1 12 B_REGI

1 2 13 24V4
MP CLUTCH CL 2 1 14 EN_M P_CLUTCH

Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup drive.

Pickup drive (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1239
 Figure 4-12 Pickup drive electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 MOTOR
10
24v
11
12
13

PICKUP

CN49 PICKUP
JC39-02234A
3 1 9 1 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY1 2 2 8 2 DGND
1 3 7 3 nSENSE_P_EMPTY1
JC39-02201A JC39-02234A
3 4 6 4 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT1 2 5 5 5 DGND
1 6 4 6 nSENSE_C_LIFT1

7 3 JC39-02234A
3 7 DGND
FEED1 2 8 2 8 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED1
1 9 1
9 5V_PS
JC93-01083A
PICKUP1 10 A_PICKUP1
MOTOR 24v 11 nA_PICKUP1
24v 12 nB_PICKUP1
13 B_PICKUP1
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 1 10 14 R_5V_PS
PAPER_EMPTY2 2 2 9 15 DGND
1 3 8 16 nSENSE_P_EMPTY2
JC39-02202A JC39-02234A
3 4 7 17 R_5V_PS
PAPER_LIFT2 2 5 6
18 DGND
1 6 5
19 nSENSE_P_PRE_LIFT2
JC39-02202A 4 JC39-02234A
3 7
3 20 DGND
FEED2 2 8
2 21 nSENSE_P_PRE_FEED2
1 9
1 22 5V_PS
10
JC39-02234A 23 A_PICKUP2
4
3 24 nA_PICKUP2
PICKUP2
MOTOR
STEP 2 25 nB_PICKUP2
1 26 B_PICKUP2

MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the MP unit.

1240 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-13 MP unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

JC33-00029B 2
MP SOL 1
5v

0604-001393 3
MP EMPTY 4
5v 5

0604-001393
JC39-02211A MP PAPER MP PAPER 3
WIDTH LENGTH 4
1.8v 5v 5
SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

MP SOL JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
24v 2 PW M_MP_SOL
24v 2 4 2 19
0604-001393
MP EMPTY JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
5v JC39-02210A
4 2 4 5v 17 4 DGND
5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
WIDTH 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
2 5 7 1.8v 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
1.8v 8 13 8 DGND
3 4
MP PAPER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 9 12 9 R_5V_PS
LENGTH JC39-02211A
5 2 10 5v 11 10 DGND
5v 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02208A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 12 DGND
12 9
2 2 2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
15 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2 STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
MOT 18 B_DUPLEX2
1 18 JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9
Color 10
2
1

4 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A

MP unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1241

 Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the side unit.

1242 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-14 Side unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

0604-001393
1 5v
2
3

0604-001393
4
3
2
0604-001490 1
3 24v
2
1
0604-001393
5 5v
6
7

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
5 1 20
4 2 19 2 PW M_MP_SOL

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 9 12
2 10 11 10 DGND
1 11 10 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND

PRE FEED 5v JC39-02208A 3 12 9
2 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
13 8
1 7 14 5V_PS
14 5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
DUP2 4 15 6
MOT 16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3 5
2 17 17 nB_DUPLEX2
4 24v
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02240A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
4 7 4
3 8 3
PTB CRUM 2 9 2

Mono 1 10 1

4 7 JC39-02205A
PTB 1 7 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
JC39-02207A 12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
JAM 2
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
P FUSER JC39-02205A JC39-02206A
5v 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT
2 2 19 2 39 DGND
JC39-02209A 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v

Side unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1243
 Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door guide.

1244 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-15 Right door guide electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640,
E87650, E87660 shared)

0604-001393
DUPLEX
5
JAM 2
6
5v
7

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 6 6 15 6 1.8V_PS
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
DUP2 3
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
3 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2

Color 10 1

JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS
JC39-02205A
11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
JC39-02207A 14 34 DGND
7
DUPLEX JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
JAM 2 5v 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
6 2 16 5 36 DGND
7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2
5v
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 1 3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
P FUSER 2 2 2 19 2 39 DGND
OUT 1 3 1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
JC39-02209A

Right door guide (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1245
 Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660
shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the right door output takeaway.

1246 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-16 Right door output takeaway electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560,
E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)

3
2
1

JC39-02209A
P FUSER
OUT
5v

SIDE/MP
-1.5mm/20*2P

CN32 SIDE/M P/PTB

2 JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 1 24V3
1 5 1 20
MP SOL 1 2 PW M_MP_SOL
2 4 2 19
JC39-02210A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 3 3 3 18 3 R_5V_PS
MP EMPTY 2 4 2 4 17 4 DGND
1 5 1 5 16 5 nSENSE_P_M P_EMPTY

JC39-02206A 15 JC39-02205A 6 1.8V_PS

3 1 6 6
MP PAPER 2 2 5 7 14 7 ADC_P_M P_WIDTH
WIDTH 1 3 4 8 13 8 DGND

JC39-02211A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 9 R_5V_PS

3 4 3 9 12
MP PAPER 2 5 2 10 11 10 DGND
LENGTH 1 6 1 11 11 nSENSE_P_M P_LENGTH
10
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 12 DGND
3 1 3 12 9 13 nSENSE_P_M P_FEED
PRE FEED 2 2 2 13 8
1 3 1 7 14 5V_PS
JC39-02208A 14
JC39-02206A JC39-02205A 15 A_DUPLEX2
4 15 6
16 16 nA_DUPLEX2
3
DUP2
MOT
STEP 2 17
5
4
17 nB_DUPLEX2
1 18 18 B_DUPLEX2
JC39-02205A
3
19 2 19 NC
20 1 20 NC

JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 1 6 1 10 1 20 21 R_5V_PS
CURL1 2 2 5 2 9 2 19 22 DGND
1 3 4 3 8 3 18 23 nSENSE_CURL1
JC39-02338A JC39-02341A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 4 3 4 7 4 17 24 R_5V_PS
CURL2 2 5 2 5 6 5 16 25 DGND
1 6 1 6 5 6 15 26 nSENSE_CURL2
JC39-02206A
7 4
8 3
9 2

Color 10 1

JC39-02207A JC39-02205A
4 1 7 7
PTB 14 27 DGND
3 2 6 8 13
WASTE 28 ADC_PTB_W TB_FULL
2 3 5 9 12
FULL 29 EN_PTB_W TB_LED
1 4 4 10 11
30 R_5V_PS

11 31 3.3V_CRUM
10
12 32 SCL2_PTB
9
13 33 SDA2_PTB
8
14 34 DGND
7
JC39-02207A JC39-02206A JC39-02205A
3 5 3 15 6 35 R_5V_PS
DUPLEX
2 6 2 16 5 36 DGND
JAM 2
1 7 1 17 4 37 nSENSE_JAM_DUPLEX2

P FUSER JC39-02206A JC39-02205A

3 18 3 38 R_5V_PS
OUT 5v JC39-02209A 2
2 19 39 DGND
1 1 40 nSENSE_P_FUSER_OUT
20
5v

Right door output takeaway (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1247
 Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front unit.

1248 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-17 Front unit electrical-mechanical relationships (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650,
E87660 shared)

1
2
3
COM
N.O.
N.C.

4
3
ADC_WTB_FULL 2
EN_W TB_LED 1
5v

3 nDETCT_W TB
2 5v
1

W TB/CST LOCK/FAN_LSU

CN 38 W TB/CST
LOCK/FAN_LSU JC39-02337A
FAN_LSU 1 3
FB_OUT_FAN_LSU 2 2
DGND 3 1
JC39-02337A 4
A_W TB 4
nA_W TB 5 3
nB_W TB 6 2
B_W TB 7 1

DGND 8 JC39-02337A COM

3
COVER_OPEN_FRONT 9 2 N.O.
nCOVER_OPEN_FRONT 10 1 N.C.
ADC_WTB_FULL
JC39-02337A EN_W TB_LED
DGND 11 4
ADC_W TB_FULL 12 3 5v
EN_W TB_LED 13 2
5V_PS 14 1
JC39-02337A nDETCT_W TB
R_5V_PS 15 3 5v
DGND 16 2
nDETECT_W TB 17 1

OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_2 18
JC39-02337A 10 1
JC39-02186A
2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK1_1 19 9 2 1 2
R_5V_PS 20 JC39-02337A 8 3 JC39-02186A
3
DGND 21 7 4 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK1 22 6 5 1
JC39-02337A JC39-02186A
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_2 23
5 6 2 1
OUT_DC_CST_LOCK2_1 24 4 7 1 2
JC39-02337A JC39-02186A
R_5V_PS 25 3 8 3
DGND 26 2 9 2
nSENSE_CST_LOCK2 27 1 10 1

NC 28

Front unit (E82540, E82550, E82560, E87640, E87650, E87660 shared) 1249
 Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pickup lift motors, feed motor, and
cover open sensor (DCF/HCI).

1250 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-18 Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships
(DCF/HCI)

Pickup lift 1 motor

(JC31-00009C)

Pickup lift 2 motor

24V (JC31-00009C)

24V Cover open sensor 1 2 3 4

with harness 24V
9 10
1 2 3 4

6 1
4 3
3 4
1 3 4 6 24V
1 6
Feed motor
(JC31-00177A)
JC39-02268A JC39-02274A

CN601 CN801
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 B_PICK_LIFT2 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 nB_PICK_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 nA_PICK_LIFT2 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 A_PICK_LIFT2 4
5 B_FEED
24V 6 nB_FEED
7 nA_FEED DCF PCA
8 A_FEED
(V1F98-67001)
24V 9 DGND
10 nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN

Pickup lift motors, feed motor, and cover open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1251
 Paper empty and limit-2 sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty and limit-2 sensors
(DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-19 Paper empty and limit-2 sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Prefeed 2 sensor
(0604-001381)
Paper empty 2 sensor
5V 7 8 9
1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V

5V
4 5 6 Paper limit 2 sensor
(0604-001393)

DCF PCA (V1F98-67001)

JC39-02270A
CN501
1 VCC
5V
1 9 2 GND
5V
2 8 3 SENS_P_EMPTY2
3 7 4 VCC
4 6 5V
5V JC39-02269A 5 GND
5 5
6 4 6 SENS_P_LIMIT2
7 3 7 GND
5V
8 2 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED2
9 1
9 VCC

1252 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper empty, path, limit-1, and path
sensors (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-20 Paper empty , path, limit-1, and path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Path 1 sensor
(0604-001490) 10 11 12

5V
7 8 9

5V
Prefeed 1 sensor
(0604-001490)

Paper empty 1 sensor

1 2 3 (0604-001393)
5V

Paper limit 1 sensor

4 5 6 5V
(0604-001393)

JC39-02272A

DCF PCA (V1F98-67001)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
1 12 2 GND
5V
2 11 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 10
4 9 4 VCC
5V 5V
5 8 5 GND
6 7 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
7 6 JC39-02271A
5V 8 5 7 GND
5V
9 4 8 SENS_PREFEED1
10 3 9 VCC
5V 11 2
12 1 10 GND
5V
11 SENS_PATH1
12 VCC
13 NC
14 NC

Paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper size sensors (DCF/HCI).

Paper empty, path, limit-1, and path sensors (DCF/HCI) 1253

 Figure 4-21 Paper size sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Paper size 1 sensor

(JC32-00013A)

3.3V
1 2 3 4

3.3V

5 6 7 8
Paper size 2 sensor
(JC32-00013A)

JC39-02275A

JC39-02606A
CN802 CN301
1 TRAY1_OPEN
3.3V 2 DGND
3 ADC_P_SIZE1
4 3.3V DCF PCA
Engine
5 TRAY2_OPEN
(V1F98-67001)
Contoller
3.3V 6 DGND Board
7 ADC_P_SIZE2 (ECB)
8 3.3V

HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI).

1254 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Figure 4-22 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)

HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN301
nSYNC_TRAY 1
nCMD_REQ_TRAY 2
DETECT_TRAY_OPEN 3
NC 4
nDETECT_TRAY (DGND) 5
DGND 6
DGND 7 Engine
DGND 8 Controller
DGND 9 JC39-02605A
Board
24V 10
24V 11
(ECB)
24V 12
5V 13
5V 14
5VS 15
nRST_TRAY 16
RXD_ENG2TRAY 17
TXD_TRAY2ENG 18

CN901 CN5
3.3V 1 8 3.3V
SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2 9 nP_EMPTY_R
7 7
SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3 6 6 10 HOME2
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4 5 5 11 nP_LEVEL2_F
SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 4 4 12 nP_LEVEL1_F
3 3
SENS_P_SUB_END 6 13 END
2 2
SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7 JC39-02286A 1 1 JC39-02356A 14 HOME1
SENS_P_EMPTY2 8 7 7 1 SOL_HOME
6 6 2 GND
HCF TRAY OPEN 9
5 5
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10 4 4 3 nP_LEVEL2_R
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11 3 3 4 nP_LEVEL1_R
GND 12 2 2 5 GND
1 1
OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13 6 SOL_A
24V 14 7 SOL_B
VCC 15
DGND 16
HCI sub PCA
SENS_P_LIMIT2 17 (JC92-02792A)

HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI) 1255

 Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2
motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the cover open sensor, cassette
installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI).

1256 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-23 Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors,
and shift motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Cover open sensor

with harness 9 24V
10

24V
1 2 3 4 Pickup/lift 1 motor Cassette installation
(JC31-00009C) sensor
5V
(0604-001393)

Feed motor 15 16 17
(JC31-00177A)

24V
5 6 7 8
JC39-02279A Lift 2 motor Shift motor
(JC31-00109A) (JC31-00125A)
1 2
24V
JC39-02282A
24V 4 5

CN601 CN901
B_PICK_LIFT1 1 3.3V 1
nB_PICK_LIFT1 2 SENS_P_EMPTY_SUB 2
nA_PICK_LIFT1 3 24V SENS_P_SUB_HOME 3
A_PICK_LIFT1 4 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN2 4
B_FEED 5 SENS_P_LEVEL_MAIN1 5 JC39-02286A
nB_FEED 6 SENS_P_SUB_END 6
nA_FEED 7 24V SENS_KNOCKUP_HOME 7
A_FEED 8 HCI PCA SENS_P_EMPTY2 8
DGND 9 (JC92-02738E) HCF_TRAY_OPEN 9
nSIDE_C_OPEN_IN 10 24V SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB2 10
SENS_P_LEVEL_SUB1 11
CN902 GND 12
LIMIT_SW_OUT 1 24V OUT_SOL_P_GATE 13
OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V 14
NC 3 VCC 15
5V
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT1 4 24V DGND 16
OUT_DCMOT_SHIFT2 5 SENS_P_LIMIT2 17
NC 6

Cover open sensor, cassette installation sensor, feed motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, and shift motor (DCF/HCI)
1257
 Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed
sensor, main limit and empty sensors (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-24 Limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed sensor, main limit and empty sensors electrical-
mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

10
11
13 5V 12
14
Limit switch Feed sensor
with harness (0604-001490)
5V Prefeed sensor
(0604-001381) 7 8 9
5V

Main limit sensor

4 5 6
(0604-001393)
5V
5V
1 2 3 Empty main sensor
(0604-001393)

JC39-02281A

HCI PCA (JC92-02738E)

CN502
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14 3 SENS_P_EMPTY_MAIN
2 13
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_MAIN_LIMIT
7 8 JC39-02280A 7 GND
8 7 5V
8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6
10 5 9 VCC
11 4 10 GND
12 3 5V
13 2 11 SENS_PATH
14 1 12 VCC

5V 13 LIMIT_SW_IN
14 LIMIT_SW_OUT

1258 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the level-1/2 front/rear sensors,
solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-25 Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid electrical-mechanical
relationships (DCF/HCI)

CN6 HCI sub PCA

1 SOL_B (JC92-02792A)
2 NC CN4
24V
3 SOL_A VCC 1
GND 2 3.3V

CN1 nP_LEVEL1_R 3
1 VCC VCC 4
1 6 3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 5
2 5
3 4 3 nP_LEVEL1_F nP_LEVEL2_R 6
JC39-02352A
4 3 4 VCC VCC 7
5 2 5 GND GND 8 3.3V
6 1 3.3V
6 nP_LEVEL2_F SOL_HOME 9

JC39-02351A JC39-02355A

1 7
1
2 8
2
4 3 9
3
5 Level1 front 4
6 Level1 rear sensor
sensor 5
(0604-001393) 6
3.3V (0604-001393) Solenoid
24V with harness 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
(JC33-00031B) Level2 rear
3.3V 1 2 3 Solenoid home sensor
Level2 front sensor sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393) (0604-001393)

Level-1/2 front/rear sensors, solenoid home sensor, and solenoid (DCF/HCI) 1259
 Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and
empty sensor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-26 Home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and empty sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/
HCI)

HCI sub PCA (JC92-02792A)

CN2 CN 3
1 VCC VCC 1
3.3V 3.3V
2 GND GND 2
3 HOME1 nP_EMPTY_R 3
4 VCC VCC 4
3.3V 3.3V
5 GND GND 5
6 END HOME2 6
NC 7

JC39-02352A
Home 1 sensor JC39-02352A
3.3V 4
(0604-001393) 5
1 2 3 6 3.3V
3.3V Home 2 sensor
4 5 6
Empty sensor (0604-001393)
End sensor (0604-001393)
(0604-001393)
3.3V 1 2 3

1260 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/
HCI)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor,
prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI).

Figure 4-27 Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)

Prefeed sensor
5V (0604-001490)
7 8 9
sHCI PCA
13 14 (JC92-02738F)
Limit switch 24V CN502
with harness
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
1 14
2 13 3 SENS_P_EMPTY1
3 12 4 VCC
4 11 5V
5 GND
5 10
6 9 6 SENS_P_LIMIT1
JC39-02290A
7 8 7 GND
8 7 JC39-02289A 8 SENS_PREFEED
9 6 5V
9 VCC
10 5
11 4 10 NC
12 3 11 NC
13 2 12 NC
14 1
13 LIMIT_SW_IN
24V 14 LIMIT_SW_OUT
Paper empty 1 sensor
(0604-001393) 5V 1 2 3

5V 4 5 6
Paper limit 1 sensor
(0604-001393)

Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and
feed motor (DCF/HCI).

Limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, prefeed sensor, and paper empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) 1261
 Figure 4-28 Pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and feed motor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
JC39-02291A

CN601 CN701
1 B_PICK_LIFT1 LIMIT_SW_OUT 1
24V 2 nB_PICK_LIFT1 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2 2 24V
3 nA_PICK_LIFT1 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1 3
4 A_PICK_LIFT1 GND 4
5 B_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_F 5
24V 6 nB_FEED VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2 6
7 nA_FEED GND 7
8 A_FEED SENS_LCT_HOME_R 8
9 NC
10 NC sHCI PCA
CN701
(JC92-02738F)

JC39-02294A

JC39-02287A
Engine
Controller
Board
(ECB)

5
6
7 Pick/lift 1 motor
8 (JC31-00009B)
24V
Feed motor
(JC31-00163A)
24V
1 2 3 4

1 2 24V

Lift 2 motor
(JC31-00109A)

Upper/lower paper low sensors (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the upper/lower paper low sensors
(DCF/HCI).

1262 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-29 Upper/lower paper low sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/HCI)
sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
CN501
1 VCC
5V
2 GND
3 SENS_P_LOW_U
4 VCC
5V
5 GND
6 SENS_P_LOW_L
7 NC
8 NC
JC39-02288A
9 NC

4
5
6
1
2 5V
3 5V
Upper paper low sensor
Lower paper (0604-001393)
low sensor
(0604-001393)

Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear home sensors and tray
open sensor (DCF/HCI).

Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor (DCF/HCI) 1263

 Figure 4-30 Front/rear home sensors and tray open sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (DCF/
HCI)

Tray open sensor

with harness sHCI PCA (JC92-02738F)
1 2 3
3.3V
CN1001
JC39-02346A
1 GND
3.3V 2 LCT_TRAY_OPEN
3 NC

Front home sensor CN701

5V (0604-001393)
1 LIMIT_SW_OUT
3
4 2 OUT_DCMOT_LIFT2
5
3 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT1
5V
JC39-02291A 4 GND
5 SENS_LCT_HOME_F
6 VCC / CST_LOCK_DETECT2
7 GND
5V
8 SENS_LCT_HOME_R

Rear home sensor

(0604-001393) 5V
6
7
8

Main PCAs (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the main PCAs (SSBM).

1264 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-31 Main PCAs electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
CN6 CN7 CN8 CN9 CN10
Bridge Punch Rear upper Safety Staple

CN5 CN11
Front compile Eject

CN4
CN12
Front path
Front lower
Finisher main PCA
CN17 (JC92-02968A)
Engine Controller Cover CN13
SCU
Board (ECB)
CN3
Top door CN14
CN1 CN16 CN15 Stacker
CN2 Engine Log Booklet
Front door

JC39-02308A

CN4
Staple

CN9
Stopper
CN5
Feed Booklet PCA
JC39-02296A (JC92-02790B) CN10
CN6 BLDC
Tamper CN1 CN3 CN7 CN8
Interface Log Paddle Guide

Paper detection sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the paper detection sensor (SSBM).

Paper detection sensor (SSBM) 1265

 Figure 4-32 Paper detection sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

3.3V 21 Paper detection sensor

(0604-001415)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
3 FRONT_T_M_A
4 FRONT_T_M_NA
3.3V 5 VCC(100ohm)
6 GND
7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
8 VCC(100ohm)
9 GND
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME

Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter
close sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the entrance motors A/B, end fence
motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor (SSBM).

1266 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-33 Entrance motors A/B, end fence motor, buffer motor and sensor, and diverter close sensor
electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A) Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
3.3V 7 VCC(100ohm) 24V 7 BUFFER_M_A
8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 ENT_M_A 11 PADDLE_M_A
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 GND 13 END_FENCE_M_NB
3.3V
14 VCC(100ohm) 24V 14 END_FENCE_M_B
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 GND 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 VCC(100ohm) 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND 18 GND
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH 19 VCC(100ohm)
20 3.3V 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 ENT_M_NB 21 GND
24V 22 ENT_M_B 22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND

JC39-02313A 26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT

Entrance motor A 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT

(JC90-01459A) 29 5V
2
1 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
24V
31 GND
2
1
32 VCC(100ohm)
24V
Entrance motor B 4
24V
4
(JC90-01459A) 3 3
2 2 24V
3 1 1
2 End fence motor
3.3V
1
Buffer motor
(JC90-01467A) 3 (JC90-01453A)
Diverter 2
close sensor 1 3.3V
(0604-001393) Buffer open sensor
(0604-001393)

Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-beam out sensor, stack motor,
and SKU motor (SSBM).

Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor (SSBM) 1267
 Figure 4-34 Top-beam out sensor, stack motor, and SKU motor electrical-mechanical relationships
(SSBM)

3.3V

Top beam
out sensor
(0601-003440)

4
24V 3
2
3.3V 3 1 SCU motor
2
1 (JC90-01414A)

JC39-02319A

2 Stack motor Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA

24V 1 (JC90-01415B) (JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN8, Rear upper CN13, SCU
1 EXIT_M_NA 1 SCU_M_NB
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 24V 2 SCU_M_B
3 EXIT_M_B 3 SCU_M_A
4 EXIT_M_NB 4 SCU_M_NA
24V 5 STACK_MTR_P 5 GND
6 STACK_MTR_M 6 BOOKLET_BEAM_IN
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 3.3V
3.3V
8 GND 8 BOOKLET_BEAM_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 9 VCC(100ohm)
10 3.3V 10 GND
3.3V 11 3.3V 11 IN_STACK_FULL_DETEXT
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT

Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert
home sensor, and guide home sensor (SSBM).

1268 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-35 Curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert home sensor, and guide home sensor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)

4
3
2
1 24V Booklet PCA
Curl pawl motor (JC93-01153A)
(JC92-02790B)
CN7, Paddle (Booklet)
1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
5 PADDLE_M_B
Divert home sensor 3 6 PADDLE_M_A
(0604-001415) 2 3.3V
1 7 PADDLE_M_NA
3.3V 8 3.3V
9 GND
10 DIVERT_HOME
11 DIVERT_M_NB

24V 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA

CN8, Guide (Booklet)

3
2 4 3.3V 1 3.3V
3.3V 1 3
Guide home 2 24V 2 FOLD_EXIT
sensor 1 3 GND
(0604-001393)
Fold motor 4 GND
JC39-02304A
(JC93-01154A) 3.3V
5 GND
6 GUIDE_HOME
7 GUIDE_M_NA
8 GUIDE_M_A
24V 9 GUIDE_M_B
10 GUIDE_M_NB

Fold exit sensor

3
(JC32-00020A)
2
1 3.3V

Feed entrance sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the feed entrance sensor (SSBM).

Feed entrance sensor (SSBM) 1269

 Figure 4-36 Feed entrance sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)

CN4, Staple (Booklet)
3.3V 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 FEED_ENT
4 5V
5 LOW_STAPLE2
6 GND
7 LOW_STAPLE1
8 STAPLE_HOME
JC39-02302A 9 STAPLE_M+
10 STAPLE_M+
11 NA
12 STAPLE_M-
13 STAPLE_M-

3.3V 3 Feed entrance sensor

2
1 (0604-001415)

1270 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor,
press motor, and feed motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the press home sensor, tamper home
sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM).

Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor, and feed motor (SSBM)
1271
 Figure 4-37 Press home sensor, tamper home sensor, paper detect sensor, tamper motor, press motor,
and feed motor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA (JC92-02790B)
CN5, Feed (Booklet)
1 3.3V
Feed motor 3.3V
Press home sensor
(JC93-01152A) 2 GND
(0604-001393)
3 4 3 PRESS_HOME
2
3
1 3.3V 4 PRESS_M_NB
2
24V
1 24V 5 PRESS_M_B
6 PRESS_M_A
4 7 PRESS_M_NA
3 24V
8 FEED_M_NB
2
1 24V 9 FEED_M_B
Press motor 10 FEED_M_A
(JC93-01155A) 11 FEED_M_NA

CN6, Tamper (Booklet)

JC39-02298A 1 VCC(100ohm)
2 GND
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
3.3V
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
4
Tamper motor 3 24V 24V 8 TAMP_M_B
(JC93-01155A) 2
9 TAMP_M_A
1
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V

3 12 PAPER_DETECT
Tamper home sensor 3.3V
2 13 GND
(0604-001393) 3.3V
1

Paper detect sensor 3 CN7, Paddle (Booklet)

(JC32-00020A) 2
1 3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 PADDLE_HOME
4 PADDLE_M_NB
24V 5 PADDLE_M_B
6 PADDLE_M_A
7 PADDLE_M_NA
8 3.3V
Paddle motor (JC93-01001A)
9 GND
4 10 DIVERT_HOME
3
2 JC39-02304A 11 DIVERT_M_NB
24V
1 12 DIVERT_M_B
13 DIVERT_M_A
14 DIVERT_M_NA

1272 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top-exit path and compile-exit path
sensors (SSBM).

Figure 4-38 Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA Finisher main PCA
(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02968A)
CN4, Front path CN5, Front compile
1 3.3V 1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 GND 3 REAR_T_M_A
4 3.3V 4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH 5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 GND 6 BUFFER_M_B
7 VCC(100ohm) 7 BUFFER_M_A

8 GND 8 BUFFER_M_NA

9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE 9 PADDLE_M_NB

10 ENT_M_NA 10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A
11 ENT_M_A
12 PADDLE_M_NA
12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN 3.3V
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
13 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B
14 VCC(100ohm)
15 END_FENCE_M_A
15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH 3.3V
3.3V 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
16 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
17 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND
18 GND
3.3V 19 VCC(100ohm)
19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
20 3.3V
21 GND
21 ENT_M_NB
22 VCC(100ohm)
22 ENT_M_B JC39-02322A 3.3V 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
25 GND
26 OP_BUTTON
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
3
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
2
1 3.3V 29 5V
Top exit
path sensor Compile exit path 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME

(0604-001393) sensor 31 GND

3
2 3.3V (JC32-00020A) 32 VCC(100ohm)
1

3.3V 2
1
Top beam in sensor
(JC32-00020A)

Top-exit path and compile-exit path sensors (SSBM) 1273

 Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the knife motor, stopper home sensor,
and stopper solenoid and motor (SSBM).

Figure 4-39 Knife motor, stopper home sensor, and stopper solenoid and motor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)
Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN10, BLDC (Booklet)
1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT
2 FOLD_M_CLOCK
3 FOLD_M_READY
4 FOLD_M_START_OUT
5 NA
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
7 GND
8 GND
9 24V1
10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
Stopper solenoid 12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
(JC33-00038A)
13 KNIFE_M_READY
2 14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
1
24V 15 NA
24V
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2
Stopper home JC39-02305A
sensor
Booklet PCA (0604-001393) 3 10
2
(JC92-02790B) 3.3V 1 9
8
CN9, Stopper (Booklet) JC39-02305A 7
24V 1 24V 6
5
STOPPER_SOL_OUT 2 24V 4
3.3V 3 3
2 Knife motor
GND 4 1 (JC31-00144A)
3.3V Stopper 4
STOPPER_HOME 5 motor 3 24V
STOPPER_M_NB 6 (JC93-01155A) 2
1
STOPPER_M_B 7
STOPPER_M_A 8 24V
STOPPER_M_NA 9

1274 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the top door sensor, fold motor, and
knife home position sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-40 Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)

Finisher main PCA Booklet PCA

(JC92-02968A) (JC92-02790B)
CN3, Cover CN10, BLDC (Booklet)

1 TOP_DOOR_IL_IN 1 FOLD_M_DIR_OUT

24V 2 NC 2 FOLD_M_CLOCK

3 NC 3 FOLD_M_READY

4 DOOR_IL_IN 4 FOLD_M_START_OUT

10 24V 5 NA
9
6 FOLD_M_BRAKE_OUT
Top door sensor 8 JC39-02305A
7 7 GND
with harness 6
(JC39-02310A) 5
24V 8 GND
4
24V Fold motor 3 9 24V1
2
(JC31-00144A) 1 10 24V1
11 KNIFE_M_DIR_OUT
12 KNIFE_M_CLOCK
13 KNIFE_M_READY
14 KNIFE_M_START_OUT
15 NA
16 KNIFE_M_BRAKE_OUT
17 GND
18 GND
19 24V2
20 24V2

Knife home sensor 3

2
(0604-001393) 1 3.3V Booklet PCA
(JC92-02790B)
CN6, Tamper (Booklet)
1 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
3.3V
2 GND
JC39-01336A
3 KNIFE_HOME
4 VCC(100ohm)
5 GND
6 TAMP_HOME
7 TAMP_M_NB
8 TAMP_M_B
9 TAMP_M_A
10 TAMP_M_NA
11 3.3V
12 PAPER_DETECT
13 GND

Top door sensor, fold motor, and knife home position sensor (SSBM) 1275
 Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the operational panel button PCA and
entrance path sensor (SSBM).

Figure 4-41 Operational panel button PCA and entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical relationships
(SSBM)

Operational panel button PCA

(JC92-02789B)
5
5V 4
3
2
1 3
2
3.3V 1 Entrance path
sensor
(JC32-00020A)

Finisher main PCA JC39-02321A

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
8 BUFFER_M_NA Finisher main PCA
9 PADDLE_M_NB (JC92-02968A)
10 PADDLE_M_B CN4, Front path
JC39-02345A 11 PADDLE_M_A 1 3.3V
12 PADDLE_M_NA 2 IN_BM_EXIT_PATH
13 END_FENCE_M_NB 3 GND
14 END_FENCE_M_B 4 3.3V
15 END_FENCE_M_A 5 IN_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
16 END_FENCE_M_NA 6 GND
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME 7 VCC(100ohm)
18 GND 8 GND
19 VCC(100ohm) 9 IN_DIVERTER_CLOSE
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME 10 ENT_M_NA
21 GND 11 ENT_M_A
22 VCC(100ohm) 12 IN_BUFFER_OPEN
23 TOP_BEAM_IN 13 GND
24 GND 14 VCC(100ohm)
25 GND 15 IN_TOP_EXIT_PATH
26 OP_BUTTON 16 GND
27 OP_LED_FR_OUT 17 VCC(100ohm)
5V
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT 18 GND
29 5V 19 IN_COMPILE_EXIT_PATH
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME 20 3.3V
31 GND 21 ENT_M_NB
32 VCC(100ohm) 22 ENT_M_B

1276 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor
(SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the exit cam home sensor, main paddle
home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM).

Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor (SSBM) 1277
 Figure 4-42 Exit cam home sensor, main paddle home sensor, paddle motor, and exit motor electrical-
mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)
CN17, Front path
3.3V 1 3.3V
2 GND
3 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_HOME
4 24V1
Exit cam home
sensor 5 BM_EXIT_MTR_NB
(JC32-00020A) 3 6 BM_EXIT_MTR_B
2
7 BM_EXIT_MTR_A
1 3.3V
8 BM_EXIT_MTR_NA
JC39-02320A
9 IN_BM_EXIT_CAM_DETECT
10 24V1

Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
1 REAR_T_M_NB
2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
Paddle motor 8 BUFFER_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 9 PADDLE_M_NB
4 24V 10 PADDLE_M_B
3 24V 11 PADDLE_M_A
2
1 12 PADDLE_M_NA
13 END_FENCE_M_NB
14 END_FENCE_M_B
JC39-02313A 15 END_FENCE_M_A
16 END_FENCE_M_NA

3 17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
2 Finisher main PCA 18 GND
3.3V
Main paddle 1 (JC92-02968A) 19 VCC(100ohm)
home sensor CN8, Rear upper 20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
(0604-001393)
1 EXIT_M_NA 21 GND
3.3V
JC39-02312A 2 EXIT_M_A 22 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
Exit motor
(JC31-00163B) 24V 3 EXIT_M_B 23 TOP_BEAM_IN
4 EXIT_M_NB 24 GND
4
3 5 STACK_MTR_P 25 GND
2 6 STACK_MTR_M 26 OP_BUTTON
24V
1
7 VCC(100ohm) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
8 GND 28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
9 IN_STACK_ENCODER 29 5V
10 3.3V 30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
11 3.3V 31 GND
12 TOP_BEAM_OUT 32 VCC(100ohm)

1278 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home
sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the front/rear tamper motors, front/rear
tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM).

Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor (SSBM) 1279
 Figure 4-43 Front/rear tamper motors, front/rear tamper home sensors, and end-fence home sensor
electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)
Finisher main PCA
4
(JC92-02968A)
3 JC39-02318A CN12, Front lower
24V 2
1
1 FRONT_T_M_NB
2 FRONT_T_M_B
24V 3 FRONT_T_M_A
Front tamper motor 4 FRONT_T_M_NA
(JC93-01001A) 3 5 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
2
6 GND
1
End fence 7 IN_MANUAL_PAPER_DETECT
home sensor 8 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
(0604-001393) 9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_END_FENCE_HOME
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_STAPLER_MOVE_MANUAL_HOME

Finisher main PCA

(JC92-02968A)
CN5, Front compile
3 Front tamper home sensor
2 1 REAR_T_M_NB
3.3V 1 (0604-001393)
24V 2 REAR_T_M_B
3 REAR_T_M_A
4 REAR_T_M_NA
5 BUFFER_M_NB
6 BUFFER_M_B
7 BUFFER_M_A
JC39-02313A 8 BUFFER_M_NA
9 PADDLE_M_NB
10 PADDLE_M_B
11 PADDLE_M_A

Rear tamper motor (JC93-01001A) 12 PADDLE_M_NA

13 END_FENCE_M_NB
4 14 END_FENCE_M_B
3
2 15 END_FENCE_M_A
24V 1 16 END_FENCE_M_NA
17 IN_FRONT_TAMP_HOME
18 GND
3.3V
19 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V
20 IN_MAIN_PADDLE_HOME
21 GND
22 VCC(100ohm)
23 TOP_BEAM_IN
24 GND
3 25 GND
2
Rear tamper home sensor 1 3.3V 26 OP_BUTTON
(0604-001393) 27 OP_LED_FR_OUT
28 OP_LED_YG_OUT
29 5V
30 IN_REAR_TAMP_HOME
31 GND
3.3V
32 VCC(100ohm) 3.3V

1280 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out
sensors (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU
home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM).

Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors (SSBM) 1281
 Figure 4-44 Tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, and stack beam in/out sensors
electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

3
2 3.3V 3.3V SCU home detect sensor
1 Tray upper home (0604-001393)
rear sensor 3 3
2
(0604-001393) 2
1 1 3.3V
Tray upper front sensor (0604-001393)

3.3V
Stack beam
out sensor
(0603-003440)

3.3V

Stack beam in sensor

Finisher main PCA
(0603-001309)
JC39-02325A
(JC92-02968A)
CN14, Stacker

3.3V 1 3.3V
2 STACK_BEAM_OUT
3 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
4 GND
5 IN_TRAY_UPPER_HOME_REAR
6 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_SCU_HOME_DETECT
9 VCC(100ohm)
3.3V
10 GND
11 IN_TRAY_UPPER_FRONT

3.3V 12 GND
13 STACK_BEAM_IN
14 NC

Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor (SSBM)
Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge motor, bridge middle sensor,
and bridge guide sensor (SSBM).

1282 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

 Figure 4-45 Bridge motor, bridge middle sensor, and bridge guide sensor electrical-mechanical
relationships (SSBM)

Bridge middle sensor

3 (0604-001393)
2
1 3.3V
Bridge guide sensor
(0604-001393) 3 3.3V
2
1

4
3
2
24V 1
JC39-02327A
Bridge motor
(JC31-00163B)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
24V 3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
3.3V
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
3.3V
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID

Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM)

Learn about the electrical-mechanical relationships diagram for the bridge entrance path sensor
(SSBM).

Bridge entrance path sensor (SSBM) 1283

 Figure 4-46 Bridge entrance path sensor electrical-mechanical relationships (SSBM)

Finisher main PCA (JC92-02968A)

CN6, Bridge
1 BRIDGE_M_NA
2 BRIDGE_M_A
3 BRIDGE_M_B
4 BRIDGE_M_NB
5 3.3V
6 IN_BRIDGE_ENTRANCE_PATH
3.3V
7 GND
8 IN_BRIDGE_DETECT
9 GND
10 IN_BRIDGE_GUIDE
JC39-02327A 11 VCC(100ohm)
12 GND
13 IN_BRIDGE_MID

Bridge entrance
path sensor
(JC32-00020A)
3 3.3V
2
1

1284 Chapter 4 Electrical-mechanical diagrams

5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Learn about the stapler/stacker and booklet maker.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Figure 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher - front view

C1

C4

C3

C2

Figure 5-2 Booklet finisher - front view

C3’

C5

Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front door JC90-01444B

C2 Caster cover JC63-04985B (*)

Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM) 1285

 Table 5-1 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - front view (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C3 Left lower cover (Stapler/stacker) JC63-05001B (*)

C3' Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B (*)

C4 Left upper cover JC90-01475B (*)

C5 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B, JC63-04978B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

C6
2

C7
C8

Table 5-2 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - rear view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C6 Top Output tray JC63-04996B

JC63-05003B (*)

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B

C8 Rear cover JC63-04988B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-4 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

C9

C10

1286 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-3 Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher - top view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C9 Top cover JC90-01446B

C10 Top door JC90-01445B (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-5 Booklet finisher – front-right view

C11

C14 C12

C13

Table 5-4 booklet finisher - front-right view

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C11 Right upper cover JC90-01448B (*)

C12 Front cover JC63-04986B

C13 Front lower cover JC63-04987B

C14 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Detailed Specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the stapler-stacker finisher and booklet maker.

Stapler-stacker finisher
Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Speed PPM 18.3~70,(70ppm) 18.3~70,(70ppm)

Stack Capacity Main 3,000 sheets 2,000 sheets

(A4/Letter 80gsm)
Top 250 sheets 250 sheets

Detailed Specifications 1287

 Table 5-5 Stapler-stacker finisher detailed specifications (continued)

Item Stapler-stacker finisher Booklet maker

Paper Size Main Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457 Statement SEF ~ 320 x 457

Top 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200) 98 x 148 ~ 13" x 19.2" (330×1200)

Paper Weight Main 52 ~ 350 gsm 52 ~ 350 gsm

Top 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

Offset (Non Staple) 15mm(minimum) 15mm(minimum)

※Exception SRA3 and larger size.

Staple Clinching position ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat) ● Front/Rear Corner(45°,Flat)

● Dual ● Dual

Paper weight 52~256 gsm 52~256 gsm

Capacity 65 sheets (90gsm) 65 sheets (90gsm)

Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge 5,000 clinching/cartridge

Offline Yes Yes

Hole Punch Paper weight 52 ~ 300 gsm 52 ~ 300 gsm

available unit (Auto NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish NA2/3, EU2/4, Swedish

change)

Booklet maker
Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications

Item Description

Set Speed PPM 18.3~70(70ppm)

See Footnote: 1

Paper size B5 SEF ~ 12'' x 18''

Paper weight 60 ~ 120 gsm

Staple + Fold Capacity(80gsm) 25 sheets

Fold Capacity(80gsm) 5 sheets

Tray Capacity 5 sets / 25 sheets

Staple Cartridge Capacity 5,000 clinching/cartridge

1288 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-6 Booklet maker specifications (continued)

Item Description

C - Folding 3 sheets

Letter SEF, A4 SEF (52~90gsm)

1 The output speed of booklet making is the same as the device's printing speed, which varies depending on paper size, printing
mode, etc. Depending on specific usage conditions, such as the paper size used and the number of copies, the output speed
may decrease by up to 90% of the product's maximum output speed.

Physical
Table 5-7 Physical

Module Option Size Module Weight Packed Weight

(Reference) W X D X H [mm] [Kg] [Kg]

Stapler-stacker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 40 62

Booklet maker 751.7 x 610 x 1016.4 62 84.5

Hole punch 80 x 485 x 235 2.8 4.1

Paper size
Table 5-8 Paper size specification

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

A5 210 8.3X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

X14 8
8

State 216 8.5X5. LEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O X X

ment X14 5
0

Letter 279 11X8.5 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21
6

A4 297 8.3X11. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

X21 7
0

B5(JIS) 257 10.1×7.2 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

X18
2

B5(ISO 250 9.8×6.9 LEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O X X

) X17
6

Detailed Specifications 1289

 Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

Execut 267 10.5X7. LEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O X X

ive X18 3
4

No 9 98X 3.9X8. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env 225 9

Monar 98.4 3.9×7.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

ch Env ×19
0.5

Postca 101. 4.0×6.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

rd 6×1
52.4
4x6

A6 105 4.1X5.8 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

X14
8

No 10 105 4.1×9.5 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

Env ×241

DL Env 110× 4.3×8.7 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

220

C6 Env 114× 4.5×6.4 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

162

B6 128 5.0x7.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

x18
2

State 140 5.5X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

ment X21 5
6

A5 148 5.8X8. SEF O X O X X X O X O X O X X

X21 3
0

C5 Env 162 6.4×9.0 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×22
9

B5(ISO 176× 6.9×9.8 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O X X

) 250

B5(JIS) 182 7.2X10.1 SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

X25
7

Execut 184 7.3X10. SEF O O O X F/R X O X O X O O X

ive X26 5
7

1290 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

16k 195 7.7X10. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X27 6
0

A4 210 8.3X11. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X29 7
7

Legal 216 8.5X14 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X35
6

Letter 216 8.5X11 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O O

X27
9

Folio 216 8.5X13 SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

X33
0

Oficio 215. 8.5×13. SEF O O O X F/R O O X O X O O X

9×3 5
42.9

C4 Env 229 9.1X12. SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

×32 8
4

Tabloid 254 10 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O X O O X

X37 X14.7
4

B4 257 10X14. SEF O O O F/R X O O O X O O O X

X36 3
4

8K 270 10.6X1 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X39 5.4
0

Ledger 279 11X17 SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X43
2

A3 297 11.7X16. SEF O O O F/R X O O O O O O O X

X42 5
0

Tabloid 304. 12×18 SEF O X O X X X X X X X X O X

8×4
Extra 57.2

SRA3 320 12.6×17. SEF O X O X X X X X X X X X X

×45 7
0

Detailed Specifications 1291

 Table 5-8 Paper size specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientati Output Staple position Punch Booklet C- Folding
on Maker

mm Inches direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL NA 2/3 EU Swedis
2/4H h 4H

52-350 Of 52-300g 45° Flat 2 3 2 4

g fse H H H H
t

13"x19. 330 13x19.2 SEF X X O X X X X X X X X X X

2" x48
7

Custo W9 W3.86- - X NA O NA NA NA N N N N NA NA NA
m 8-32 12.59 A A A A
0
L5.5-18
L13
9.7-
457.
2

* “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Media performance
Table 5-9 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 O O O O O X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 O O O O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 O O X O O X X

g/m2)

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O X X X X X

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O O O O

1292 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-9 Media performance (continued)

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple HP BM

Cover Content C-Fold

Bond O O O O O O X

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O O O X

Letterhead O O O O O O X

Pre-Punched O O O X X X X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O X X X

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X X X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 O O X X X X X

g/m²)

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 O X X X X X X

g/m2)

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O O X X

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X O X X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O O O X O X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) X O X X X X X

Transparency (138~146 gsm) O O X X X X X

Labels (120~150 gsm) X O X X X X X

Tab O O X O X X X

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system

Learn about the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system.

Overview
Learn about the overview of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Work flow
Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher work flow

Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher system 1293

 Figure 5-6 Work flow overview
6. Top output tray
14. Paper holding 5. Top exit
4. Tray diverter
13. Main output tray
3. Punch
2. Entrance
7. Main exit 1. Bridge
8. Paddle
10. Tamper
12. Ejector
9. End fence 15. Buffer
11. Stapler

16. Booklet entrance

19. Booklet presser
24. Booklet exit
23. Booklet diverter 21. Booklet stapler
17. Booklet paddle
22. Booklet fold
20. Booklet tamper
25. Booklet output tray
18. Booklet end fence

Table 5-10 work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Bridge unit Moves paper from the printer to the finisher.

2 Entrance unit Allows paper to move into the finisher.

3 Punch unit(optional) Holes in a specific location on paper sheet.

4 Tray diverter unit Changes the paper direction whether it is main output tray or top output tray.

5 Top exit unit Moves paper from the diverter to the top output tray.

6 Top output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

7 Main exit unit Moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit with forward direction or to the
buffer unit with backward direction.

8 Paddle unit Pushes to the end fence to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

9 End fence unit Sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper.

10 Tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper.

11 Stapler unit Staples a bundle of an aligned documents.

12 Ejector unit Transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the output tray.

13 Main output tray unit Stacks paper that completed its printing job.

1294 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-10 work flow overview (continued)

Item Unit Description

14 Paper holding unit Keeps paper static and controls the output tray movement.

15 Buffer unit Maintains paper inside the unit for a while or moves it to the booklet maker.

16 Booklet entrance unit Receives the paper into the booklet maker.

17 Booklet paddle unit Pushes to the booklet end fence.

18 Booklet end fence unit Supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper to the
designated position for folding and stapling.

19 Booklet presser unit Presses paper that enters to the booklet tamper unit to prevent paper shuffled.

20 Booklet tamper unit Aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper to make booklet.

21 Booklet stapler unit Staples a bundle of aligned documents to make a booklet.

22 Booklet fold unit Fold a bundle of aligned documents as a booklet.

23 Booklet diverter unit Changes the paper direction to the booklet exit unit or the location to make c-fold.

24 Booklet exit unit Moves paper to the booklet output tray.

25 Booklet output tray unit Stacks the bundle of booklet.

Sensor
Figure 5-7 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

S12
S11 S1

S10 S2

S9
S3

S8 S4

S5
S7
S6

Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the bridge entrance unit.

S2 Bridge door 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Photo Checks whether the bridge door is
sensor interrupter opened.

Overview 1295
 Table 5-11 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_1 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S3 Bridge exit 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
sensor interrupter the bridge exit unit.

S4 Tray diverter 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Photo Checks whether the tray diverter
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S5 Main exit cam 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Photo Check whether the main exit CAM
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S6 Front tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Photo Checks whether the front tamper
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Photo Checks whether the end fence
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S8 Paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Photo Checks whether the paddle
sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S9 Rear tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Photo Checks whether the rear tamper
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S10 Main exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the main exit unit.

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Photo Checks whether paper comes into
interrupter the top exit unit.

S12 Entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes into
sensor the entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-8 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

S35 S13
S34
S14
S33
S15

S32 S16

S31
S17
S30 S18
S29
S19
S28 S20
S21
S27
S26 S22
S23
S25
S24

1296 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Paper sensor Checks whether paper exits out of
the buffer unit

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Paper sensor Checks whether paper is on the
ejector or not.

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 LED IR, Photo TR Checks whether the top output
paper full tray is full or not.
sensor

S16 Buffer home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Photo Checks whether the buffer roller
sensor interrupter and the idle roller whether
attached or detached.

S17 Front Paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.

S18 Front door JC39-02309A 113-2182 Switch Check whether the front door is
switch open.

S19 Manual staple 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Photo Check whether the paper comes
sensor interrupter into the manual staple position.

S2 Main output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 LED IR, Photo TR Check whether the main output
0 tray top of stack tray reaches the top of stack.
sensor

S21 Stapler front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Photo Makes the stapler positioned
sensor interrupter in accordance with the manual
stapling position.

S2 Paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Photo Checks whether the paper holding
2 home sensor interrupter actuator locates at the home
position.

S2 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
3 sensor interrupter motor is operational.

S24 Stapler mid 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
front sensor interrupter exact stapling position.

S2 Stapler mid rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Photo Make the stapler positioned at the
5 sensor interrupter exact stapling position.

S2 Main output 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Photo Checks whether the lower limit of
6 tray lower limit interrupter the output tray (=output tray is full).
sensor

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
sensor interrupter motor is operational.

S2 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
8 sensor interrupter locates at the end position.

S2 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Photo Checks whether the ejector1
9 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S3 Stapler rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Photo Checks whether the stapler
0 sensor interrupter locates at the home(rear) position.

S31 Rear paper 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Photo Checks whether the location of
holding sensor interrupter the paper holding actuator for
controlling the position of the main
output tray.

Overview 1297
 Table 5-12 Sensor – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher_2 (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S3 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Photo Checks whether the ejector2
2 sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

S3 Main output 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Photo Checks whether the Main output
3 tray motor interrupter tray motor is operational.
sensor

S3 Main output JC39-02316A 113-2190 Switch Checks whether the main output
4 tray top of stack tray reaches at the top of stack.
switch

S3 Top door switch JC39-02310A 113-2181 Switch Checks whether the top door is
5 open.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-9 Sensor – Booklet finisher

S46
S36 S37
S45

S44 S38

S39

S43 S40

S41
S42

Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S36 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Photo Checks whether paper comes
entrance interrupter into the bridge entrance unit.
sensor

S37 Booklet 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Photo Checks whether the booklet
presser home interrupter presser locates at the home
sensor position.

S38 Booklet tamper 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter tamper locates at the home
position.

S39 Booklet c-fold 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Photo Checks whether the booklet c-
blade home interrupter fold blade locates at the home
sensor position.

1298 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S40 Booklet 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Photo Checks whether the booklet
diverter home interrupter diverter locates at the home
sensor position.

S41 Booklet paddle 0604-001393 (*) 113-3090 Photo Checks whether the booklet
home sensor interrupter paddle locates at the home
position.

S42 Booklet end 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Photo Checks whether the booklet
fence home interrupter end fence locates at the home
sensor position.

S43 Booklet output JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 LED IR, Photo Checks whether paper goes out
tray sensor TR on the booklet output tray.

S44 Booklet exit JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet exit unit.

S45 Booklet blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Photo Checks whether the booklet blade
home sensor interrupter locates at the home position.

Overview 1299
 Table 5-13 Sensor – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S46 Booklet tamper JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110 Paper sensor Checks whether paper comes
sensor into the booklet tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-10 Sensor – Paper path

S15 S11 S10 S4

S12
S1

S13 S3
S20

S36

S26

S43

S46

S44
S43

1300 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Motor and solenoid
Figure 5-11 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

M13 M14
M12

M11

M10 M1
SL1
M9 M2

M3
M8

M7 M4
M5
M6

Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the paddle and moves the
paddle pusher up and downward
at the same time.

M2 Main exit cam JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Step motor Rotates the main exit cam to
motor detach the exit roller from the exit
idle roller.

M3 End fence JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Step motor Moves front and rear end fence
motor depending on paper size(width) so
that paper is well arranged at the
end fence.

M4 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Step motor Moves the front tamper unit.
motor

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 DC motor Moves the ejector2 and grabs
paper.

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 DC motor Moves the ejector1 forward and
backward

M7 Paper holding JC93-01156A (*) 113-2510 Step motor Moves paper holding actuator
motor up when paper goes out to the
output tray

M8 Stapler position JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Hybrid Step Moves the stapler.
motor motor

M9 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Step motor Moves the rear tamper unit.
motor

SL1 Buffer Solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Solenoid Holds paper not to fall out to the
booklet maker during buffering
task.

Overview 1301
 Table 5-14 Motor, solenoid – Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Step motor Moves paper to the buffer space
or the booklet maker.

M11 Main output JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 DC motor Moves the main output tray up
tray motor and down.

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Hybrid Step Operates the entrance roller,
motor middle roller, and top middle roller
when driving in the forward and
moves the diverter cam when
driving in the backward.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Hybrid Step Rotates the main exit roller and
motor the top exit roller.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Hybrid Step Rotates the bridge entrance roller,
motor the bridge middle roller and the
bridge exit roller.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-12 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

M23 M15

M16
M22
M17
M21
M18

M19
M20 SL2 71

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M15 Booklet JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Step motor Rotates the booklet entrance
entrance motor roller.

M16 Booklet JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Step motor Operates the booklet presser.
presser motor

M17 Booklet C-fold JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Step motor Drives the booklet c-fold blade
blade motor and the moving guide.

M18 Booklet JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Step motor Drives the booklet diverter
diverter motor

1302 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-15 Motor, solenoid – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

M19 Booklet paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Step motor Rotates the booklet paddle.
motor

M20 Booklet end JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Step motor Moves the booklet end fence up
fence motor and down.

M21 Booklet Fold JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 BLDC motor Rotates the booklet fold roller,
motor the booklet c-fold roller, and the
booklet exit roller.

M22 Booklet blade JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 BLDC motor Drives the booklet blade.
motor

M23 Booklet tamper JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Step motor Moves the booklet tamper unit.
motor

SL2 Booklet end JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 Solenoid Operates the gripper of the
fence solenoid booklet end fence to grip paper
that comes in the booklet end
fence.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: The motor sensor which is mounted near the driving motor detects whether the motor is
operating or not. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an event code only for the motor will occur. On the
other hand, the home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference position or
location when the specific unit is operating.

Figure 5-13 Motor sensor in the ejector unit

Motor sensor

Motor

Figure 5-14 Home sensor in the stapler unit

Home sensor

Overview 1303
 Roller
Figure 5-15 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher

R9
R1
R2

R8
R3
R7
R4
R6 R5

Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
bridge unit.

R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Bridge motor Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Entrance Moves paper from the entrance unit to
motor the exit unit

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Buffer motor Moves paper to the booklet maker, and
makes the gap between the buffer roller
and the idle roller so that paper stays
for the buffering.

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the ejector unit or the
Main exit cam buffer unit and makes the gap between
motor the main exit roller and the idle roller so
that paper stays for the buffering.

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Entrance Moves paper to the top output tray.
motor

1304 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-16 Roller - Stapler/stacker finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Exit motor Moves paper to the top output tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 5-16 Roller – Booklet finisher

R10
R13

R11

R12

Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R10 Booklet entrance JC66-04717A Booklet Moves paper from the machine to the
roller entrance bridge unit.
motor

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Booklet fold Presses a stack of paper to fold
motor completely.

R12 Booklet c-fold JC66-04744A (*) Booklet fold In case of c-fold, presses a stack of
roller motor paper to fold completely.

Overview 1305
 Table 5-17 Roller – Booklet finisher (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Drive motor Description

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Booklet fold Moves paper to the booklet output tray
motor unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA
Figure 5-17 PCA

P1

P3

P2

Table 5-18 PCA

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description

P1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B This PCA shows the manual stapling condition
and accepts the button input for manual staple.

P2 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02789B (*) This PCA controls the booklet maker module
and consists of the micro-controller and driver
ICs.

P3 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A (*) This PCA controls the finisher modules and
consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

1306 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-18 PCA (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Description

Not Hole punch PCA - This PCA controls the hole punch module and
shown consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit
The Bridge Unit is the asset to transfer paper from the printer to the finisher. The bridge entrance sensor
(S1) detects paper entering the bridge unit from the printer. In the same way, the bridge exit sensor (S3)
checks that the paper leaves from the bridge unit to the finisher. The bridge motor (M14) drive the bridge
entrance roller, bridge middle roller, and bridge exit roller. It makes paper moves through the bridge unit.
The jam removal door locating at the front side of the unit helps user to remove the jammed paper.

Figure 5-18 Bridge unit overview

R1
R2
M14 R3

S1

S2
S3

Figure 5-19 Bridge unit detail view

R3 R2 R1

M14
S2

S1

U1
S3

Bridge unit 1307

 Table 5-19 Bridge unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B (*) Moves paper from the printer to the
finisher.

S2 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2180 Detects if the bridge door is open.

S1 Bridge entrance JC32-00020A (*) 113-2070 Checks whether paper comes into the
sensor bridge entrance unit.

S3 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2071 Checks whether paper move out of the
bridge unit.

M14 Bridge motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2560 Rotates the bridge entrance roller, the
bridge middle roller and the bridge exit
roller.

R3 Bridge entrance JC66-04733A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R2 Bridge middle JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the machine to the
roller bridge unit.

R1 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A (*) Moves paper from the bridge unit to the
finisher entrance unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit
Entrance unit moves paper from the bridge unit to the inside of the finisher.The Entrance sensor (S12)
installed at the right side of the unit senses that the paper is entering the unit. The Entrance motor (M12)
rotates forward to drive the entrance roller and the middle roller to move paper to the exit unit.

Figure 5-20 Entrance unit overview

M12 S12

R4
R5

1308 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-21 Entrance unit detail view - front

R4
R5

R3
R4

Figure 5-22 Entrance unit detail view - rear

M12

Figure 5-23 Entrance unit detail view - right

S12

Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S12 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2080 Detects whether paper enters at the
entrance unit.

Entrance unit 1309

 Table 5-20 Entrance unit parts information (continued)

No Part Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Operates the entrance roller and middle
roller when driving forward.

R4 Entrance roller JC66-04722A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.

R5 Middle roller JC66-04724A (*) Moves paper from the entrance unit to
the exit unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
positioned right after the entrance unit.

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory —Y1G10A

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory — Y1G11A

● HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory — Y1G12A

NOTE: Puncher types are various depending on the country.

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
forward, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make the
holes on the paper. When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the backward direction and the inner gear
rotates to the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the hole-punches are detected
and controlled by the 3 punch position sensors.

Figure 5-24 Punch unit overview

1310 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-25 Punch unit detail view
5 6 1 2

5 4 3

Table 5-21 Punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

U1 Punch unit

2-3 hole Y1G10A (*)

2-4 hole Y1G11A (*)

Swedish hole Y1G12A (*)

1 Punch scan home 113-4000 Detects the home position of

sensor the punch unit

3 Punch scan edge 113-4010 Check the paper width to make

sensor hole on the right position of
113-4011 paper.

113-4012

113-4013

2 Punch scan motor 113-4500 Transmits the force to move

the punch unit in the horizontal
direction.

4 Punch position sensor 113-4020 Detects the travel distance and

position of the hole-punches.
113-4030

113-4031

5 Punch motor sensor 113-4040 Checks whether the punch

motor is operational

6 Punch motor 113-4510 Transmits the force to make

holes on the paper
(*) This part is in system.

Punch unit operation

1. A paper enters into the punch unit, and it is aligned to drill holes.

2. The motor rotates forward or backward, then the punch rail in the punch unit moves in order to move
the punch hole makers (callout 1).

Punch unit (optional) 1311

 2

3. The punch position sensors determine the punch rail location (callout 2). It drives the punch hole
makers up and down to make holes (callout 3).

4. In some paper size, paper might be jammed in a place where punch hole maker is located. Therefore,
the punch unit moves left and right (callout 4).

1312 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tray diverter unit
Learn about the Tray diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tray diverter unit is responsible for determining the paper feed direction so that paper can be
ejected to the main output tray or top output tray.

The entrance motor (M12) rotates this unit. When the entrance motor rotates backward, the phase of the
divertor cam (callout1) changes so that the paper path direction changes. The tray diverter home sensor
(S4) checks whether the tray diverter is located at the home position or not. (callout2).

Figure 5-26 Tray diverter unit overview

M12 1

S4

Tray diverter unit 1313

 Figure 5-27 Tray diverter unit detail view – front-top

Figure 5-28 Tray diverter unit detail view – rear

S4

Table 5-22 Tray diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Tray diverter JC61-07205A Selects the paper path of either

the main output tray or the top
output tray

2 Tray diverter cam JC66-04560A 113-2520 Changes the paper path

S4 Tray diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2020 Checks whether home position
sensor of the tray diverter

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) Operates the tray diverter cam
when driving in the backward
direction.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray diverter unit operation

1. When printing or copying documents, the entrance motor operates backward so that the diverter
cam (Callout 2) can be rotate.

1314 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. The direction of the tray diverter(callout1) is changed to the main output tray or the top output tray
by the tray diverter cam(callout2).

2
7RSRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ 0DLQRXWSXWWUD\GLUHFWLRQ

Top exit unit

Learn about the Top exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top exit unit sends paper from the tray diverter unit to the top output tray unit.

The top exit sensor(S11) detects paper entry into the top exit unit. The entrance motor(M12) drives the top
middle roller, and the exit motor(M13) transmit the force to rotate the top exit roller so that paper moves
to the top output tray unit.

Figure 5-29 Top exit unit overview

M13 M12

S11

R8

R9

Top exit unit 1315

 Figure 5-30 Top exit unit detail view – front-top

S11

R9

Table 5-23 Top exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S11 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2091 Checks whether paper has
entered at the top exit unit

M12 Entrance motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2570 Rotates the top middle roller
when driving in the forward
direction.

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the top exit roller

R8 Top middle roller JC66-04725A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray

R9 Top exit roller JC66-04727A (*) Moves paper to the top output
tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top output tray unit

Learn about the Top output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The top output tray unit loads discharged paper from the finisher.

It has the paper pull sensor(S15) to detect whether the tray is full with paper.

1316 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-31 Top output tray unit overview

S15

Figure 5-32 Top output tray unit detail view – front-left

S15

Table 5-24 Top output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Top output tray JC63-04996B Loads ejected paper

JC63-05003B (*)

S15 Top output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2145 Detects whether paper
paper full sensor is fully staked on the
(receiver, led) output tray.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit

Learn about the Main exit unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The main exit unit delivers paper from the tray diverter unit to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Main exit unit 1317

 The main exit sensor (S10) detects whether paper comes in from main exit unit. The exit motor (M13)
drives the main exit roller to send the paper to the ejector unit or buffer unit.

Figure 5-33 Main exit unit overview

M13

S5

M2

R7

S10

Figure 5-34 Main exit unit detail view – (front-rear)

M13

R7

S5
M2

1318 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-25 Main exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S10 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2090 Detects whether paper entered
at the main exit unit

M13 Exit motor JC31-00163B (*) 113-2580 Rotates the main exit roller

R7 Main exit roller JC66-04726A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit
or the buffer unit

1 Main exit cam Adjusts the gap between the

main exit roller and the idle
roller for the buffering. (*Please
refer to ‘buffer unit’)

S5 Main exit cam home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2000 Detects the home position of
sensor the main exit cam

M2 Main exit cam motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-2500 Rotates the main exit cam.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit operation

1. The exit motor(M13) drives forward so that paper will moves towards the ejector unit.

2. On the other hand, if the exit motor rotates backwards paper moves towards the buffer unit.

Main exit unit 1319

 Paddle unit
Learn about the Paddle unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit rotates the rubber paddles mounted on the shaft to move paper to the end fence unit,
allowing paper to be arranged well for the next job. The paddle presser is mounted behind the rubber
paddles and presses the end of paper to help paper be stacked well at the end fence unit. The Paddle
home sensor (S8) checks the home position to drive the paddles. And the paddle motor(M1) drives the
paddle and paddle presser.

Figure 5-35 Paddle unit overview

1320 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-36 Paddle unit detail view - front

Figure 5-37 Paddle unit detail view - left

Table 5-26 Paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paddle JC90-01480A Moves paper into the end fence

unit

2 Paddle presser JC61-07206A Presses the end of bent paper

helps paper to be loaded well at
the end fence unit

S8 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2060 Detect the home position of the
paddle

M1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2600 Rotates the paddle, and moves
the paddle presser up and
downward at the same time
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. A paper falls downward by exit unit.

2. The paddles rotate to make a paper moves into the end fence unit. (callout 1)

Paddle unit 1321

 3. The paddle presser presses the end of a paper so as not to be scattered. (callout 2).

End fence unit

Learn about the End fence unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper.

End fence motor(M3) operates the two end fences and adjust width of them in order to stack paper
correctly. The end fence home sensor(S7) detects the home position of the end fence.

Figure 5-38 End fence unit overview

1322 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-39 End fence unit detail view – front

Figure 5-40 End fence unit detail view - left

Table 5-27 End fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence Aligns top and bottom side of

paper.

S7 End fence home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2050 Detects the home position of
sensor the end fence

M3 End fence motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2590 Moves front and rear end fence
depending on paper size(width)
so that paper arranged well at
the end fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. The end fence motor(M3) moves the front and rear end fences in the arrow direction (callout 1)
depending on paper width.

End fence unit 1323

 2. Paper goes into the end fence unit by the paddle unit. (callout 2)

3. At the same time the end fence unit aligns paper to the direction of yellow line. (callout 3)

Tamper unit
Learn about the Tamper unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper. When a certain amount
of paper is collected after printing, the tamper unit hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the
paper correctly.

Each tamper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The tamper home sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit to check the home position of the tamper unit.

1324 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-41 Tamper unit overview

2 S9

M4

S6 1

Figure 5-42 Tamper unit detail view - left

Figure 5-43 Tamper unit detail view - left-right

M9
2 1

S9

S6 M4

Tamper unit 1325

 Table 5-28 tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00901A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.

S6 Front tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2120 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.

M4 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2630 Moves the front tamper unit.

2 Rear tamper JC82-00898A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper.

S9 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2130 Detects the home position of
sensor the tamper unit.

M9 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-2640 Moves the front tamper unit.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. A stack of paper is arranged at the end fence unit.

2. The left and right tampers arrange them.

3. In case of offset printing, the tamper unit arranges the next bundle to be shifted. (callout 3)

1326 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Stapler unit
Learn about the Stapler unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Stapler unitis a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 5-44 Stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor(M8) installed inside. The one home sensor (rear sensor,
S30) and two position sensors (mid-front,S24 and mid-rear sensor,S25) are mounted so that the stapler
can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on the left, the right, or at the center
of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler assembly.

In addition, manual staple feature is available on the front-upper side of the finisher. The manual staple
sensor(S19) detects whether a stack of paper comes into the manual staple location or not. The front
sensor (stapler front sensor, S21) makes the stapler moves at the manual staple location.

Stapler unit 1327

 Figure 5-45 Stapler unit overview

Figure 5-46 Stapler unit detail view - front

Figure 5-47 Stapler unit detail view

M8

S21

S30 S25 S24

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler unit JC82-00894A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

2 Staple cartridge JC81-09882B (*) 113-2115 Staple cartridge

113-2116

S21 Stapler front sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2113 Detect the stapler at the
manual stapling position

1328 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-29 Stapler unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S24 Stapler mid-front 0604-001393 (*) 113-2112 Detect the stapler location
sensor

S25 Stapler mid-rear 0604-001393 (*) 113-2111 Detect the stapler location
sensor

S30 Stapler rear sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2110 Detect the home position of the
stapler

S19 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2160 Detect paper when manual
stapling

M8 Stapler position motor JC31-00163A (*) 113-2620 Moves the stapler

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor drives the stapler assembly to direction 1.

2. The stapler assembly moves through the rail using three stapler position sensors (callout2) and
staples a stack of paper.

3. In case of staple cartridge replacement, the stapler moves to direction 3.

Stapler unit 1329

 4. For manual stapling, the stapler moves in direction 4.

Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The ejector unit ejects a bundle of paper out to the main output tray. The ejector unit consists of ejector1
and ejector2.

The ejector1 moves a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And ejector1 motor sensor
checks the ejector1 motor operation. And the ejector1 home sensor detects the home position of the
ejector1. The ejector1 end sensor detects the end position of the ejector1.

When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the
main output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor
helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2 home sensor checks the location of the
ejector2.

Figure 5-48 Ejector unit overview

1
2

M5

S23
S32
M6

S27

1330 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-49 Ejector unit detail view - left

S32
S23

S27 M6 M5

Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Ejector unit JC90-01409A (*)

S14 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2170 Detects whether paper

is on the ejector or not.

1 Ejector1 Moves the stack of

paper from the end
fence to the ejector2

S29 Ejector1 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2031 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector1

S28 Ejector1 end 0604-001415 (*) 113-2030 Detects the end

sensor position of the ejector1

S27 Ejector1 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2032 Detects whether the

sensor Ejector1 motor rotates

M6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 113-2530 Moves the ejector1

forward and backward

2 Ejector2 Moves paper from the

ejector1 to the main
output tray

S32 Ejector2 home 0604-001415 (*) 113-2040 Detects the home

sensor position of the ejector2

S23 Ejector2 motor 0604-001415 (*) 113-2041 Detects the ejector2

sensor motor rotation

Ejector unit 1331

 Table 5-30 Ejector unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M5 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 113-2540 Moves the ejector2 and

grabs paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. The ejector1(callout1) pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector2 unit(callout2).

S28
1

S29 S14

S27
M6

2. The ejector2(callout2) picks up paper, then moves forward to the main output tray direction.

S23
S32

M5

1332 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Main output tray unit
Learn about the Main output tray unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

Printouts are stacked on the main output tray (C7). The main output tray moves up and down along the
rails inside the finisher, and the main output tray motor (M11) controls those movements according to the
signals of the front & rear paper holding sensor. Main output tray motor sensor (S33) checks whether
the main output tray motor rotates properly.

When main output tray hits the lower limit sensor of the main output tray (S26), the machine detects that
paper tray is full. The main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) detects that the main output tray is on
the top.

Figure 5-50 Main output tray unit overview

M11
S34
S33
S20

C7

S26

Main output tray unit 1333

 Figure 5-51 Main output tray unit detail view - left

S20

C7

S26

Figure 5-52 Main output tray unit detail view - rear

S33

M11

Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

C7 Main output tray JC63-05002B Stacking plate for ejected paper

S20 Main output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-2140 Checks the upper limit of main
stack sensor (receiver, output tray
led)

1334 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-31 Main output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S6 Main output tray lower 0604-001415 (*) 113-2144 Detects the lowest position of
limit sensor the output tray

S33 Main output tray motor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2143 Detects whether the main
sensor output tray motor rotates

M11 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B (*) 113-2610 Moves the main output tray up
and down
JC90-01415B (*)

S34 Main output tray top of JC39-02316A 113-2190 Checks the upper limit of main
stack switch output tray so that detects
abnormal movement of output
tray
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper holding unit

Learn about the Paper holding unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The paper holding unit holds printouts on the main output tray. It has a sensor that detects the height of
stacked paper so that the output tray moves up and down to stack paper in a stable manner.

The paper holding motor(M7) lifts the paper holding actuator when printouts come out to the main
output tray. The paper holding home sensor(S22) detects the location of paper holding actuator at the
home position. The front & rear paper holding sensor (S17, S31) checks the volume of printouts on the
main output tray and makes the main output tray move downward

Figure 5-53 Paper holding unit overview

S31
S17

M7 S22

Paper holding unit 1335

 Figure 5-54 Paper holding unit detail view - left
1

S17 S31

S22

Figure 5-55 Paper holding unit detail view - left

M7

Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator Control the height of the main

output tray and hold printouts
so as not to be scattered

S17 Front paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2141 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S31 Rear paper holding 0604-001393 (*) 113-2142 Detects stacked paper position
sensor

S22 Paper holding home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2010 Detects the home position of
sensor paper holding actuator

M7 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A (*) 113-2510 Lift paper holding actuator up
when printouts delivered to the
main output tray

1336 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-32 paper holding unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

2 Left upper cover JC90-01475B

(*) This part is in ordering system.

paper holding unit operation

1. When printouts are delivered to the main output tray, a paper holding motor moves paper holding
actuator upward to create a paper path to prevent jam (callout1).

2. When printouts are stacked on top of the main output tray, the paper holding actuator goes down to
hold them(callout2).

3. As paper stacks up on the main output tray, the paper holding actuator is lifted by papers. The front
& rear paper holding sensors make the main output tray moves downward to store more printouts.
(callout3)

Paper holding unit 1337

 4. As printouts are stacked on the main output tray, the tray goes down. When it reaches at the end of
its moving range (callout 4), the main output tray touches the lower limit sensor. The sensor detects
that the main output tray is full of printouts.

Buffer unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the Stapler/stacker finisher and booklet finisher.

The buffer unit keeps paper inside the unit or moves them to the booklet maker.

The buffer diverter creates a paper path so that paper can move to the buffer unit, and the buffer
sensor detects whether paper moved out from the buffer unit. The buffer motor controls buffer roller,
and buffer home sensors checks the location of buffer rollers. The buffer solenoid holds papers so that
they do not fall into the booklet maker while buffering.

NOTE: buffering: It is to maintain print speed when users print multiple copies continuously.

The 1st page of a print job stays in the buffer unit for a moment while the previous job is being ejected.
After the previous print job was ejected, the 1st and 2nd page of the job move to the ejector unit
together.

1338 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-56 Buffer unit overview

SL1

M10

R6

S13

S16

Figure 5-57 Buffer unit detail view - front

S16

R6

Figure 5-58 Buffer unit detail view - rear

M10

Buffer unit 1339

 Figure 5-59 Buffer unitdetail view - top

SL1

Table 5-33 Buffer unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Buffer diverter JC61-07204A Makes the way to the buffer

space

S13 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-2100 Detects whether paper has
moved out from the buffer unit

S16 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-2210 Detects the home position of
the buffer roller.

M10 Buffer motor JC93-01152A (*) 113-2660 Moves paper to the buffer
space or the booklet maker

SL1 Buffer solenoid JC33-00038A (*) 113-2670 Holds paper to prevent them
from falling out to the booklet
maker during buffering

R6 Buffer roller JC66-05161A Moves paper to the booklet

maker or makes the gap so that
paper stays in this space.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer unit operation

1. When the buffer motor rotates backward to move the cam, the buffer roller(R6) can have gap and
then paper can stay inside the buffer unit

a. When the exit motor rotates backward to drive the main exit roller(R7), paper moves to the buffer
unit through the buffer diverter(callout1).

1340 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

b. The main exit cam motor moves the main exit cam so that the main exit roller(R7) is separated
with the idle roller to have a gap, and then paper can stay in this place for a while.

c. When the next sheet comes to the main exit unit, the main exit motor turns the man exit cam so
that the main exit roller is attached to the idle roller.

d. he exit motor rotates forward and operates the main exit roller. It makes 2 paper moves to the
ejector together.

Buffer unit 1341

 2. In case of booklet job, the buffer unit moves paper to the booklet maker.

a. The buffer motor rotates, the buffer roller(R6) is attached to the idle roller.

b. When paper arrives at the main exit unit, the exit motor rotates backward and moves the main
exit roller(R7) so that paper moves to the buffer unit through the buffer diverter.

c. The buffer motor rotates the buffer roller to move paper to the booklet maker.

Booklet entrance unit

Learn about the Booklet entrance unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet entrance unit receives paper into the booklet maker. The entrance sensor(S36) detects
whether the paper enters the entrance unit. The entrance motor(M15) drives the booklet entrance
roller(R10) to move the paper.

1342 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-60 Booklet entrance unit overview

Figure 5-61 Booklet entrance unit detail view

Table 5-34 Entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S36 Booklet entrance 0604-001415 (*) 113-3100 Detects whether paper has
sensor come into the booklet entrance
unit

M15 Booklet entrance JC93-01152A (*) 113-3500 Drives the booklet entrance
motor roller

R10 Booklet entrance roller JC66-04717A Moves paper into the booklet
maker
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet paddle unit

Learn about the Booklet paddle unit of the booklet finisher.

Booklet paddle unit 1343

 The booklet paddle unit pushes paper to the booklet end fence by rotating the rubber paddles. The
booklet paddle motor (M19) rotates two booklet paddles, and the booklet paddle home sensor(S41)
connected to the lower booklet paddle checks the home position of the booklet paddle.

Figure 5-62 Booklet paddle unit overview

Figure 5-63 Booklet paddle unit detail view

Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

1344 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-35 booklet paddle unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A Moves paper to the booklet end

fence unit

JC61-07225A (*)

JC66-04719A (*)

S41 Booklet paddle home 0604-001393 (*) 113-2590 Check the home position of the
sensor booklet paddle

M19 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-3580 Drives two booklet paddles
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit

Learn about the Booklet end fence unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet end fence unit supports paper that enters from the booklet paddle unit, then moves paper
to the designated position for folding and stapling. The Booklet end fence motor (M20) moves the
booklet end fence up and down. The booklet end fence home sensor (S42) checks the home position of
the booklet end fence. The booklet end fence solenoid (SL2) drives the clamp to hold paper that comes
into the booklet end fence.

Figure 5-64 Booklet end fence unit overview

Booklet end fence unit 1345

 Figure 5-65 Booklet end fence unit detail view - left

Figure 5-66 Booklet end fence unit detail view - right

Table 5-36 booklet end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet end fence JC90-01432A Supports paper, then moves it

to the designated location to
fold or staple

S42 Booklet end fence 0604-001393 (*) 113-3000 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet end fence

M18 Booklet end fence JC93-01155A (*) 113-3530 Moves the booklet end fence up
motor and down

Sl2 Booklet end fence JC33-00038A (*) 113-3520 drives the clamp to hold paper
solenoid that comes into the booklet end
fence
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit operation

1. The booklet end fence is located at the home position (callout1). When the booklet maker starts its
job, the end fence goes to the direction 2.

1346 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. The booklet end fence unit supports paper comes from the booklet paddle unit and holds paper so
as not to be scattered(callout3). Then it moves to the certain location to fold or staple it (callout 4).

Booklet presser unit

Learn about the Booklet presser unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet presser unit sort print pages that enter to the booklet maker in order.The Booklet presser
motor (M16) moves the booklet presser, and the booklet presser home sensor (S37) checks whether the
booklet presser is at the home position.

Booklet presser unit 1347

 Figure 5-67 Booklet presser unit overview

Figure 5-68 Booklet presser unit detail view

Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet presser JC61-07237A Accumulates paper from the

entrance unit not to be shuffled

S37 Booklet presser home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3130 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet presser

1348 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-37 Booklet presser unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M16 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3570 Drives the booklet presser
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet presser unit operation

1. Paper comes into the booklet presser unit (callout1). At this time the presser is located on the left
side of the finisher (callout 2).

2. After paper exits the entrance roller, the booklet presser hits the end of paper. (callout 3).

3. When a next sheet arrives at the unit, it will fall on the left side of the previous sheet pushed by the
booklet presser (callout 4).

Booklet presser unit 1349

 Booklet tamper unit
Learn about the Booklet tamper unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet tamper unit aligns the left and right side of documents for stapling or folding.

The booklet tamper motor(M23) adjusts the booklet tampers’ width according to paper size. The booklet
tamper home sensor(S38) checks the home position of the booklet tamper.

Figure 5-69 Booklet tamper unit overview

1350 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-70 Booklet tamper unit detail view

Table 5-38 Booklet tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet tamper JC90-01431A Aligns documents for stapling

or folding.

S38 Booklet tamper home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3080 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet tamper

M23 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A (*) 113-3540 Drives the booklet tamper

S46 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3110

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet tamper unit operation

■ When a certain amount of paper is collected, the booklet tamper unit hits the left and right sides of
the paper to align the paper correctly.

Booklet tamper unit 1351

 Booklet stapler unit
Learn about the Booklet stapler unit of the booklet finisher.

Booklet stapler unitis a device installed inside the booklet maker that staples a bundle of aligned
documents as a booklet.

There is only 1 option to make a bundle. If the user selects the option, this unit staples at the two location
in the middle of stacks.

Figure 5-71 Booklet staple option

1352 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-72 Booklet stapler unit overview

Figure 5-73 Booklet stapler unit detail view

Table 5-39 Booklet stapler unitparts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet stapler JC81-08274B

2 Booklet stapler JC81-09881B (*) 113-3020

cartridge
113-3030
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet stapler unit operation

1. When a stack of sheets is collected in booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout2)
changes its location to be stapled.

Booklet stapler unit 1353

 2. The booklet stapler(callout1) staples at the middle of stacks.

Booklet fold unit

Learn about the Booklet fold unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet fold unit is a device installed inside the booklet maker that folds a bundle of aligned
documents as a This unit consists of 2 types of blades: blade and c-fold blade. So, it creates two types of
output.

Figure 5-74 Fold options

The booklet blade motor (M22) drives the booklet blades and lightly folds the stack of paper. The folded
paper passes through the booklet fold rollers to be fully folded. The booklet blade home sensor (S45)
checks the home position of the booklet blade, and the booklet fold motor (M21) drives the rollers that
enable folding.

In case of c-fold, the booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade and lightly folds the
stack of paper once more. The folded paper passes through the booklet c-fold roller to be fully folded.
The booklet c-fold blade home sensor(S39) checks the home position of the c-fold blade.

1354 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-75 Booklet fold unit overview – right-rear

Figure 5-76 Booklet fold unit overview – left-front

Booklet fold unit 1355

 Figure 5-77 Booklet fold unit detail view - right

Figure 5-78 Booklet fold unit detail view – left

Figure 5-79 Booklet fold unit detail view – left-front

1356 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-40 Booklet fold unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet blade JC93-01163A Pushes a stack of paper to fold.

S45 Booklet blade home 0604-001393 (*) 113-3040 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet blade.

M22 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3550 Drives the booklet blade

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet roller and c-
fold blade

R11 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A Presses a stack of paper to be

fully folded

2 Booklet c-fold blade JC61-07366A Pushes a stack of paper to fold

for the c-fold task

S39 Booklet c-fold blade 0604-001393 (*) 113-3050 Checks the home position of
home sensor the booklet c-fold blade

M17 Booklet c-fold blade JC93-01154A (*) 113-3590 Drives the booklet c-fold blade
motor

R12 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A (*) In case of c-fold, presses

a stack of paper to fold
completely.
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet fold unit operation

1. In case of v-fold.

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1)
moves to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push the center of paper.

c. Paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

Booklet fold unit 1357

 d. The folded paper stack is discharged to the booklet output tray via the booklet exit roller(R13).

2. In case of c-fold

a. After a stack of paper is collected at a booklet end fence unit, the booklet end fence(callout1) is
moved to a designated location.

b. The booklet blade motor(M22) drives the booklet blade(callout2) to push one-third of paper.

c. he paper enters between the booklet fold rollers(R11) by the booklet blade and it is completely
folded between the rollers.

d. The folded sheets move to s location where they will be c-folded by a booklet diverter.

e. The booklet c-fold blade motor(M17) drives the booklet c-fold blade(callout3), pokes two-thirds of
paper.

f. Paper enters between the booklet c-fold roller(R12) and the booklet fold roller by the booklet
c-fold blade and it is completely folded between the rollers.

Booklet diverter unit

Learn about the Booklet diverter unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet diverter unit determines a paper path to allow the stack of folded paper to exit to the booklet
output tray during the v-fold. In case of c-fold, it makes another paper path so folded sheets can move
to a location that can be c-folded. The booklet diverter motor(M18) drives the booklet diverter, and the
booklet diverter home sensor(S40) checks whether the booklet diverter is at the home position

1358 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-80 Booklet diverter unit overview

M18

S40

Figure 5-81 Booklet diverter unit detail view – left-front

M18

S40

Booklet diverter unit 1359

 Table 5-41 Booklet diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A Determines the paper path for

either the booklet exit unit or
the location for c-fold

S40 Booklet diverter home 0604-001415 (*) 113-3060 Checks the home position of
sensor the booklet diverter

M18 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A (*) 113-3560 Drives the booklet diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet diverter unit operation

1. In case of v-fold, the booklet diverter(callout1) determines the paper path so that the folded sheets
exit to the booklet exit unit and into the booklet output tray.

2. On the other hand, in c-fold, it makes another paper path to fold it by c-fold blade(callout2).

Booklet exit unit

Learn about the Booklet exit unit of the booklet finisher.

The booklet exit unit ejects a stack of v-fold paper to the booklet output tray unit. The booklet exit
sensor(S44) detects paper entry into the booklet exit unit, and the booklet fold motor(M19) drives the
booklet exit roller(R4) to discharge paper.

1360 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-82 Booklet exit unit overview – front-right

Figure 5-83 Booklet exit unit detail view

Table 5-42 Booklet exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S44 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A (*) 113-3120 Check whether paper has come
into the booklet unit

M21 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A (*) 113-3510 Drives the booklet exit roller

R13 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A (*) Moves paper to the booklet
output tray unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet output tray unit

Learn about the Booklet output tray unit of the booklet finisher.

Booklet output tray unit 1361

 The booklet output tray unit is the place where the ejected paper is stacked. The booklet output tray
sensor(S43) detects whether paper is on the booklet output tray or not.

Figure 5-84 Booklet output tray unit overview

Figure 5-85 Booklet output tray unit detail view

1362 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-43 Booklet output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B (*) Stores paper stacks from the
booklet exit unit
JC63-04978B (*)

S43 Booklet output tray JC82-01039A (*) 113-2150 Detects whether paper is on the
sensor booklet output tray.pa
(*) This part is in ordering system.

How to print large number of booklets

Y1G07A Booklet finisher is support available to print a large number of booklets.

1. Remove the booklet output tray (Callout 1).

2. Install the booklet sub tray at the booklet output (Callout 2).

NOTE:

● The booklet sub tray is included in the Booklet finisher product box. If a user misses the part,
order and use the new part.

● Booklet sub tray part number : JC61-07088A

Booklet output tray unit 1363

 3. Install a box to store printouts(Callout 3).

PCA connection information

Learn about the PCA connection information.

1364 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-86 Stapler / Stacker finisher system - PCA connection information

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN1 MainPCA
interface

CN2 Front door switch(S35) 113-2181

CN3 Top door switch(S18) 113-2182

CN4 Entrance 113-2570 Buffer sensor(S13) 113-2100

motor(M12)

Entrance sensor(S12) 113-2080

Tray diverter home 113-2020

sensor(S4)

Buffer home 113-2210

sensor(S16)

Top exit sensor(S11) 113-2091

Main exit sensor(S10) 113-2090

PCA connection information 1365

 Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN5 Rear tamper 113-2640 Front tamper home 113-2120 Manual staple
motor(M9) sensor(S6) PCA(P3)

Buffer 113-2660 Paddle home sensor(S8) 113-2060

motor(M10)

Paddle 113-2600 Top output tray paper 113-2145

motor(M1) full sensor(S15)

End fence 113-2590 Rear tamper home 113-2130

motor(M3) sensor(S9)

CN6 Bridge 113-2560 Bridge entrance 113-2070

motor(M14) sensor(S1)

Bridge door sensor(S2) 113-2180

Bridge exit sensor(S3) 113-2143

CN7 Punch unit

CN8 Exit motor(M13) 113-2580 Main output tray motor 113-2143

sensor(S33)

Main output 113-2610 Top output tray paper 113-2145

tray motor(M11) full sensor(S15)

CN9 Main output tray top of 113-2190

stack switch(S34)

CN10 Staple clinch Staple home sensor

motor

Stapler 113-2620 Staple ready sensor

position motor
(M8)

Staple low sensor

Stapler rear 113-2110

sensor(S30)

Stapler mid front 113-2112

sensor(S24)

Stapler mid rear 113-2111

sensor(S25)

CN11 Ejector2 113-2540 Ejector2 motor 113-2041

motor(M5) sensor(S23)

Ejector1 113-2530 Ejector1 motor 113-2032

motor(M6) sensor(S27)

Ejector2 home 113-2040

sensor(S32)

Ejector sensor(S14) 113-2170

Ejector1 end 113-2030

sensor(S28)

Ejector1 home 113-2031

sensor(S29)

1366 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-44 Stapler/Stacker finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor, Switch Diagnostics Solenoid, PCA Diagnostics

CN12 Front tamper 113-2630 Manual staple 113-2160

motor(M4) sensor(S19)

End fence home 113-2050

sensor(S7)

Stapler front 113-2113

sensor(S21)

CN13 Paper holding 113-2510 Booklet output tray 113-2150

motor(M7) sensor(S43)

CN14 Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

Rear paper holding 113-2142

sensor(S31)

Front paper holding 113-2141

sensor(S17)

Paper holding home 113-2010

sensor(S22)

Main output top of stack 113-2140

sensor(S20)

CN15 Booklet
interface

CN16 Log

CN17 Main exit cam 113-2500 Main exit cam home 113-2000
motor(M2) sensor(S5)

Buffer 113-2670
solenoid(SL1)

Figure 5-87 Booklet finisher system - PCA connection information

PCA connection information 1367

 Table 5-45 Booklet finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

Connector Motor Diagnostics Sensor Diagnostics Switch, Solenoid, Diagnostics

PCA

CN1 Stapler/
Stacker
interface

CN4 Booklet staple Booklet entrance 113-3100

motor sensor(S36)

Booklet staple low

sensor

Booklet staple home

sensor

CN5 Booklet presser 113-2580 Booklet presser 113-3130

motor(M16) home sensor(S37)

Booklet entrance 113-2100

motor(S13)

CN6 Booklet tamper 113-3540 Booklet blade home 113-3040

motor(M23) sensor(S45)

Booklet tamper 113-3080

home sensor(S38)

Booklet tamper 113-3110

sensor(S46)

CN7 Booklet paddle 113-3580 Booklet paddle 113-3090

motor(M19) home sensor(S41)

Booklet diverter 113-3560 Booklet diverter 113-3060

motor(M18) home sensor(S40)

CN8 Booklet c-fold blade 113-3590 Booklet exit 113-3120

motor(M17) sensor(S44)

Booklet c-fold blade 113-3050

home sensor(S39)

CN9 Booklet end fence 113-3530 Booklet end fence 113-3000 Booklet end fence
motor(M20) home sensor(S42) solenoid(SL2)

CN10 Booklet fold 113-3510 113-3520

motor(M21)

Booklet blade 113-3550

motor(M22)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

1368 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Precautions when replacing parts
Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Precautions when replacing parts 1369

 Releasing plastic latches
Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

1370 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Before performing service
Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Before performing service 1371

 Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

Table 5-46 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and

booklet finishers)
Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (stapler/ stacker and booklet finishers)

1372 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

Learn about parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Parts, diagrams (stapler/stacker) 1373

 Cover & hanress

Cover & hanress

Parts diagram and parts list for the cover and hanress.

Figure 5-88 cover

2 21

18

12

17
6

19 16

7 13
5
13
9 14
20 22

8 24
3 14
23
15-1

15-2

Table 5-47 cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Finisher mount bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

3 Caster cover JC63-04985B 1 (*)

4 Front cover JC63-04986B 1 (*)

5 Front lower cover JC63-04987B 1 (*)

6 Rear cover JC63-04988B 1 (*)

1374 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-47 cover (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Top output tray upper JC63-04996B 1 (*)

8 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

9 Top output tray lower JC63-05003B 1 (*)

12 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

13 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Stacker-stapler) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

14 Left lower cover (Booklet) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

15-1 Booklet output tray JC61-07253B 1 (*)

15-2 Booklet output tray cover JC63-04978B 1 (*)

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

19 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

20 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

22 Hinge JC66-04767A 1 (*)

23 Caster JC61-07452A 4 (*)

24 Caster fix nut JC61-07444A 4 (*)

Table 5-48 harness

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

Not shown Harness, finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher to copier PWR JC39-02308A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher rear upper JC39-02312A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front upper JC39-02313A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher punch relay JC39-02314A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher staple relay JC39-02315A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher eject relay JC39-02317A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher front lower JC39-02318A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K finisher stack relay JC39-02319A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3k finisher exit path JC39-02322A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Sub JC39-02327A 1 (*)

Not shown Harness, 3K Finisher Bridge Pa JC39-02328A 1 (*)

Not shown Stack full harness JC39-02331A 1 (*)

Cover & hanress 1375

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1376 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the front door, top door, top cover, right upper cover.

Figure 5-89 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

16
17

16-1

18 21
18-1
18-2
18-3

18-4

Table 5-49 Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

16 Front door JC90-01444B 1 (*)

16-1 Cover link JC63-05004A 1 (*)

17 Top door JC90-01445B 1 (*)

18 Top cover JC90-01446B 1 (*)

18-1 Manual staple PCA JC92-02789B 1 (*)

18-2 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

18-3 Manual staple button LED JC64-00996A 1 (*)

18-4 Manual staple button JC64-00995A 1 (*)

21 Right upper cover JC90-01448B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Front door, Top door, Top cover, Right upper cover 1377
 Bridge unit

Upper bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, upper bridge.

Figure 5-90 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

2-2
2-1

3
2-3

Table 5-50 Bridge unit, Upper bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Bridge unit JC90-01772B 1 (*)

2 Upper bridge unit JC90-01406B 1

2-1 Bridge entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07431A 4 (*)

2-3 Spring JC61-07430A 2 (*)

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

1378 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Upper bridge 1379

 Lower bridge
Parts diagram and parts list for the bridge unit, lower bridge.

Figure 5-91 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

3-2

3-1

3-3

3-4 3-6
3 3-5

3-7

Table 5-51 Bridge unit, Lower bridge

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Lower bridge unit JC90-01401B 1

3-1 Bridge entrance roller JC66-04733A 1

3-2 Bridge middle roller JC66-04732A 1 (*)

3-3 Bridge exit roller JC66-04732A 4 (*)

3-4 Bridge exit actuator JC66-04569A 2 (*)

3-5 Bridge exit sensor 0604-001393 1

3-6 Bridge door sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

3-7 Bridge motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

1380 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Lower bridge 1381

 Entrance unit

Entrance unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit.

Figure 5-92 Entrance unit

4

7
9
5

10

3
1

11
6

Table 5-52 Entrance unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

2 Entrance roller JC66-04722A 1 (*)

3 Middle roller JC66-04724A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

5 Gear JC66-04656A 3

1382 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-52 Entrance unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Gear JC66-04546A 1

7 Belt 6602-003646 1

8 Belt 6602-003647 1 (*)

9 Belt 6602-003645 1 (*)

10 Bushing 6601-001478 2 (*)

11 Bushing 6601-002584 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Entrance unit 1383

 Entrance unit, Entrance motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the entrance unit, entrance motor.

Figure 5-93 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

4 4-1
1

1-1
1-2

Table 5-53 Entrance unit, Entrance motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Entrance unit JC90-01449A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07408A 2 (*)

1-2 Entrance sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

4 Entrance motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

4-1 Entrance motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1384 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tray diverter unit

Tray diverter unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the tray diverter unit.

Figure 5-94 Tray diverter unit

6

8
1

4
3 9

5
2

Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

Tray diverter unit 1385

 Table 5-54 Tray diverter unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Tray diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

4 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

5 Belt 6602-003639 1 (*)

6 Top door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

7 Frame mount JC61-06663A 1 (*)

8 Frame mount side bracket JC90-01442A 1 (*)

9 Clutch JC90-01474A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1386 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM
Parts diagram and parts list for the tray jam cover, tray diverter CAM.

Figure 5-95 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

1-6

1-4
1-5
1-1

1
1-7

1-2
1-3

Table 5-55 Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top jam cover assembly JC90-01455A 1 (*)

1-1 Seal JC62-01328A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07417A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07415A 1 (*)

1-4 Spring JC61-07410A 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07409A 1 (*)

1-6 Tray diverter JC61-07205A 1 (*)

1-7 Tray jam cover JC61-07196A 1 (*)

3 Tray diverter cam JC90-01458A 1 (*)

3-1 Pin JC70-40360A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tray jam cover, Tray diverter CAM 1387

 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the top output tray unit, top exit unit, main exit unit.

Figure 5-96 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit
1

6 3
4
13

8
12
5

9
14
12
10 7

11

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Top output tray JC63-04995B 1 (*)

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

3 Top exit roller JC66-04727A 1 (*)

4 Top middle roller JC66-04725A 1 (*)

5 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

1388 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-56 Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

8 Gear JC66-04657A 2

9 Clutch JC90-01404A 1 (*)

10 Gear JC66-04602A 1 (*)

11 Front door switch JC39-02310A 1 (*)

12 Top output tray paper full sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

13 Top-brush exit JC67-00818A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003649 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top output tray unit, Top exit unit, Main exit unit 1389
 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the top lower cover, exit motor, main exit CAM motor.

Figure 5-97 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor
2-4

2-2
2-1

2-3

6
6-1 7

7-1

7-2

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Top lower feed assembly JC90-01454A 1 (*)

2-1 Top exit actuator JC66-04525A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07411A 1 (*)

2-3 Top exit sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-4 Main exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

6 Exit motor assembly JC90-01459A 1 (*)

6-1 Exit motor JC31-00163B 1 (*)

7 Main exit CAM motor assembly JC90-01453A 1 (*)

1390 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-57 Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7-1 Main exit CAM motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

7-2 Main exit CAM home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Top lower cover, Exit motor, Main exit CAM motor 1391
 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the main exit unit, paddle unit, end fence unit.

Figure 5-98 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit
23

2 1
3
4
18

19

16

17
14
11

15
5
12 13
6

7
8
20

10 9

22
21

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Main exit CAM guide JC90-01451A 1 (*)

2 Main exit CAM JC66-04561A 3

3 Main exit CAM shaft JC66-04715A 1

4 Pin JC70-40360A 3 (*)

5 Main exit roller JC66-04726A 1 (*)

6 Paddle pesser JC61-07206A 1 (*)

1392 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-58 Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

8 Brush JC67-00819A 1 (*)

9 Brush JC67-00820A 1 (*)

10 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

12 Paddle home gear JC66-04558A 1

13 End fence motor JC90-01467A 1 (*)

14 Belt 6602-003270 1 (*)

15 Belt 6602-003640 1 (*)

16 CAM JC66-04562A 1

17 CAM guide JC66-04526A 1 (*)

18 End fence JC90-01466A 1 (*)

19 Spring JC61-07414A 2 (*)

20 Main output tray top of stack switch guide JC61-07189A 1 (*)

21 Main output tray top of stack switch lower JC61-07192A 1 (*)

guide

22 Ground JC63-04984A 1 (*)

23 Brush JC67-00817A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main exit unit, Paddle unit, End fence unit 1393

 Paddle, Paddle motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the paddle, paddle motor.

Figure 5-99 Paddle, Paddle motor

11

11-1

7-1
7-2 11-2

Table 5-59 Paddle, Paddle motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

7 Paddle JC90-01480A 1 (*)

7-1 Paddle wing JC90-01463A 2 (*)

7-2 Paddle mid JC90-01462A 1 (*)

11 Paddle motor assembly JC90-01461A 1 (*)

11-1 Paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

11-2 Paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1394 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit, ejector unit, stapler unit, main PCA.

Figure 5-100 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

6 5

Table 5-60 Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

4 Stapler unit JC82-00894A 1 (*)

5 Stapler cartridge JC81-09882B 1 (*)

6 Finisher main PCA JC92-02968A 1 (*)

7 Roller JC66-04523A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit, Ejector unit, Stapler unit, Main PCA 1395

 Tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the tamper unit.

Figure 5-101 Tamper unit

1-2
1-3

1-4

1-1

2-2

2-3

2-1

Table 5-61 Tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Front tamper unit JC82-00901A 1 (*)

1-1 Front tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

1-3 End fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

2 Rear tamper unit JC82-00898A 1 (*)

2-1 Rear tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

2-2 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

2-3 Belt 6602-003644 1 (*)

1396 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit 1397

 Ejector unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the ejector unit.

Figure 5-102 Ejector unit

3

3-5

3-1 3-2
3-7
3-3

3-9
3-6

3-4
3-10
3-8

Table 5-62 Ejector unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3 Ejector unit JC90-01409A 1 (*)

3-1 Ejector sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

3-2 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-3 Ejector1 end sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-4 Ejector1 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-5 Ejector1 motor assembly JC90-01411A 1 (*)

3-6 Ejector1 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

3-7 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-8 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

3-9 Ejector2 motor assembly JC90-01410A 1 (*)

3-10 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1398 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the paper holding unit, main output tray unit.

Figure 5-103 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

11

4 10

8
9

12

3 6

2 1

Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover(Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

3 Main output tray JC63-05002B 1 (*)

4 Main output tray motor aseembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit 1399

 Table 5-63 Paper holding unit, Main output tray unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

5 Paper holding motor JC90-01414A 1 (*)

6 Belt 6602-003652 2 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04663A 4

8 Gear JC66-04605A 1

9 Gear JC61-07305A 1

10 Spring JC61-07429A 1

11 Main output tray top of stack switch JC39-02316A 1 (*)

12 Main output tray support JC61-06668A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1400 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Left upper cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left upper cover.

Figure 5-104 Left upper cover

1-3
1-5 1-2


1-1
1-6 1-4

1-7

1-7

Table 5-64 Left upper cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Left upper cover JC90-01475B 1 (*)

1-1 Paper holding home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Front paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-3 Rear paper holding sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-4 Left upper cover JC63-04999B 1 (*)

1-5 Spring JC61-07428A 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07427A 1 (*)

1-7 Main output tray top of stack sensor JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Left upper cover 1401

 Left lower cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the left lower cover.

Figure 5-105 Left lower cover

2 2

stapler-stacker booklet finisher

2-3
2-1 2-3
2-2 2-1
2-2
2-5

2-4

Table 5-65 Left lower cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Left lower cover (Booklet finisher) JC90-01417B 1 (*)

2 Left lower cover (Stapler-stacker finisher) JC90-01771B 1 (*)

2-1 Main output tray lower limit switch 0604-001415 1 (*)

2-2 Main output tray lower limit actuator JC81-07930A 1 (*)

2-3 Spring JC81-09396A 1 (*)

2-4 Spring (Booklet finisher) JC61-07407A 1 (*)

2-5 Booklet output tray sensor (Booklet finisher) JC82-01039A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1402 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the main output tray motor, paper holding motor.

Figure 5-106 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

5

4
4-1

4-5 5-1
4-4

4-2

4-3

5-2

Table 5-66 Main output tray motor, paper holding motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Main output tray motor assembly JC90-01415B 1 (*)

4-1 Pin JC70-40542A 1 (*)

4-2 Gear JC81-07637A 1 (*)

4-3 Main output tray motor JC31-00178B 1 (*)

4-4 Bearing 6601-001478 1 (*)

4-5 Main output tray motor sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Paper holding motor assembly JC90-01414A 1 (*)

5-1 Paper holding motor JC93-01156A 1 (*)

5-2 Gear JC66-04604A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Main output tray motor, Paper holding motor 1403

 Cover & hanress

Buffer unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer unit.

Figure 5-107 Buffer unit

3-1

6
7
4

10
9

Table 5-67 Buffer unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

3 Budder roller assembly JC90-01672A 1 (*)

1404 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Table 5-67 Buffer unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

3-1 Buffer roller JC66-05161A 1

4 Buffer solenoid JC90-01675A 1 (*)

5 Buffer motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

6 Gear JC66-04582A 1 (*)

7 Belt 6602-003641 1

8 Manual staple sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

9 Manual staple actuator JC66-04528A 1 (*)

10 Buffer jam cover JC90-01450A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Buffer unit 1405

 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover
Parts diagram and parts list for the buffer diverter, front jam cover.

Figure 5-108 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

2-2
1

1-4
2-1
1-2 2

1-5

1-3 1-1

Table 5-68 Buffer diverter, Front jam cover

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Buffer diverter assembly JC90-01674A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07413A 2 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07409A 2 (*)

1-3 Bufer diverter JC61-07204A 1 (*)

1-4 Buffer home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-5 Buffer sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

2 Front jam cover assembly JC90-01457A 1 (*)

2-1 Magnet JC81-08263A 1 (*)

2-2 Spring JC61-07418A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1406 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher)
Learn about parts, diagrams (booklet finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

Booklet maker
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker.

Figure 5-109 Booklet maker

2
4

5
3

Table 5-69 Booklet maker

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker JC82-00905A 1 (*)

2 Booklet front cover JC90-01478B 1 (*)

3 Booklet maker PCA JC92-02790B 1 (*)

Parts, diagrams (Booklet finisher) 1407

 Table 5-69 Booklet maker (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Rail 6102-003369 2 (*)

5 Harness guide JC90-01477A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1408 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance unit, booklet presser unit.

Figure 5-110 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

1

Table 5-70 Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

3 Booklet entrace roller JC66-04717A 1 (*)

4 Booklet presser unit JC61-07237A 1

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet entrance unit, Booklet presser unit 1409

 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet entrance, booklet entrance-presser motor.

Figure 5-111 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

1

2-3 2-1
1-2

1-5 1-1

1-4

2-2
1-3

Table 5-71 Booklet entrance, Booklet entrance-presser motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet entrance unit JC90-01424A 1

1-1 Booklet entrance sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet entrance actuator JC66-04520A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet presser guide JC61-07331A 1

1-4 Booklet presser guide actuator JC66-04644A 1 (*)

1-5 Bushing JC61-02372A 2 (*)

2 Booklet entrance-presser motor assembly JC90-01425A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet entrance motor JC93-01152A 1 (*)

2-2 Booklet presser motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

2-3 Booklet presser home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1410 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet stapler unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet stapler unit.

Figure 5-112 Booklet stapler unit

1
2

Table 5-72 Booklet stapler unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet stapler unit JC81-08274B 1 (*)

2 Booklet stapler cartridge JC81-09881B 2 (*)

3 Spring JC61-07398A 1 (*)

4 Spring JC61-07397A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet stapler unit 1411

 Booklet tamper unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet tamper unit.

Figure 5-113 Booklet tamper unit

1-3

1-1

1-4 1-2

Table 5-73 Booklet tamper unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet tamper unit JC90-01431A 1

1-1 Booklet tamper home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet tamper motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet tamper sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

1-4 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1412 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold unit, booklet diverter unit, booklet exit unit.

Figure 5-114 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

12

10
6
5

11
4
3

Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

7 Gear JC66-04573A 1 (*)

8 Bushing 6601-003037 3

9 Bushing JC61-00426A 1 (*)

10 Bushing JC61-00423A 2 (*)

11 Bushing JC61-02372A 1 (*)

Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit 1413
 Table 5-74 Booklet fold unit, Booklet diverter unit, Booklet exit unit (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

12 Gear JC90-01479A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1414 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet c-fold blade, booklet exit, booklet diverter.

Figure 5-115 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

1-1

1-2-1
1-3

1-2

2
3
2-2

2-3

2-4
3-1
2-1

Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet c-fold blade assembly JC90-01438A 1 (*)

1-1 Booklet sub exit roller assembly JC90-01395A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet c-fold blade JC90-01394A 1 (*)

1-2-1 Spring JC61-07391A 2 (*)

1-3 Jam guide sheet JC63-05044A 3 (*)

2 Booklet exit unit JC90-01400A 1 (*)

2-1 Booklet c-fold roller JC66-04744A 1

2-2 Booklet exit roller JC66-04721A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 4 (*)

Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter 1415

 Table 5-75 Booklet c-fold blade, Booklet exit, Booklet diverter (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2-4 E-ring 6044-000129 2 (*)

3 Booklet diverter JC90-01398A 1 (*)

3-1 Booklet exit sensor JC32-00020A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1416 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet diverter motor, booklet c-fold motor, booklet fold motor.

Figure 5-116 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

6
6-3

6-1

6-2

5-1
5-3

5-2

4-1

4-2

Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4 Booklet diverter motor assembly JC90-01397A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet diverter motor JC93-01153A 1 (*)

Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor 1417
 Table 5-76 Booklet diverter motor, Booklet c-fold motor, Booklet fold motor (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

4-2 Booklet diverter home sensor 0604-001415 1 (*)

5 Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly JC90-01396A 1 (*)

5-1 Booklet c-fold blade motor JC93-01154A 1 (*)

5-2 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

5-3 Gear JC66-04579A 1 (*)

6 Booklet fold motor assembly JC90-01436A 1 (*)

6-1 Booklet fold motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

6-2 Gear JC66-04592A 1 (*)

6-3 Gear JC66-04593A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1418 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet fold roller
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet fold roller.

Figure 5-117 Booklet fold roller

2-1
2

Table 5-77 Booklet fold roller

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet fold roller JC66-04748A 2 (*)

2 Booklet fold exit JC90-01399A 1 (*)

2-1 C-ring 6044-000159 1 (*)

Booklet fold roller 1419

 (*) This part is in ordering system.

1420 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet blade motor, booklet blade.

Figure 5-118 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

1 1
1-3

1-2
1-1

2-1 2

2-2

2-3

Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet blade motor assembly JC90-01435A 1 (*)

1-1 Gear JC66-04595A 1 (*)

1-2 Gear JC66-04594A 1 (*)

1-3 Booklet blade motor JC31-00144A 1 (*)

Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade 1421

 Table 5-78 Booklet blade motor, Booklet blade (continued)

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

2 Booklet blade assembly JC90-01437A 1 (*)

2-1 Gear JC66-04591A 1 (*)

2-2 Bushing JC61-00423A 1 (*)

2-3 Bushing JC61-00426A 2 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

1422 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Booklet paddle unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet paddle unit.

Figure 5-119 Booklet paddle unit

4
2

4-1

2
4

2-2
2-1

Table 5-79 Booklet paddle unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Upper booklet paddle JC66-04718A 1 (*)

2 Lower booklet paddle JC90-01429A 1 (*)

2-1 Lower booklet paddle wing JC61-07225A 1 (*)

2-2 Lower booklet paddle mid JC66-04719A 1 (*)

3 Booklet paddle home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

4 Booklet paddle motor assembly JC90-01430A 1 (*)

4-1 Booklet paddle motor JC93-01001A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet paddle unit 1423

 Booklet end fence unit
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet end fence unit.

Figure 5-120 Booklet end fence unit

1-5 1-2

1 1-3 1-4

1-6
1-7

1-1

Table 5-80 Booklet end fence unit

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet end fence unit JC90-01432A 1

1-1 Booklet end fence motor JC93-01155A 1 (*)

1-2 Spring JC61-07403A 1 (*)

1-3 Spring JC61-07401A 1 (*)

1-4 Solenoid JC33-00038A 1 (*)

1-5 Booklet end fence home sensor 0604-001393 1 (*)

1-6 Spring JC61-07400A 1 (*)

1-7 Gear JC66-04583A 1 (*)

1424 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Booklet end fence unit 1425

 Booklet maker base
Parts diagram and parts list for the booklet maker base.

Figure 5-121 Booklet maker base

1-1
1-2

2
2

1426 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-81 Booklet maker base

Ref Description Part number Qty Orderable

1 Booklet maker base JC90-01476A 1 (*)

1-1 Spring JC61-07392A 1 (*)

1-2 Booklet maker base support JC61-07279A 1 (*)

2 Booklet output jam cover JC90-01433A 1 (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Bridge unit

Removal and replacement: Bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge entrance sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-82 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Bridge entrance sensor

Bridge unit 1427

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-122 Open the front door

1428 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-123 Pull the locker out

3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-124 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

Remove the bridge from the machine 1429

 4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-125 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-126 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge door

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door.

1430 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove four screws(callout 1) and remove the metal holders each side then disconnect one
connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-127 Remove the screws and a connector

2. Lift the bridge door up(callout 1) and then remove the bridge door(callout 2)

Figure 5-128 Remove the bridge door

4. Remove the bridge paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the bridge paper guide.

Remove the bridge paper guide 1431

 ■ Remove thirteen screws(callout 1~3) and remove the bridge paper guide(callout 4) from the bridge
door

Figure 5-129 Remove the bridge paper guide

5. Remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1).

1. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-130 Unplug one connector

1432 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge entrance sensor (S1, callout 1)

Figure 5-131 Remove the bridge entrance sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1433

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Bridge motor (M14)

Learn how to remove and replace the bridge motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-83 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163B Bridge motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

1434 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the bridge from the machine

Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-132 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-133 Pull the locker out

Remove the bridge from the machine 1435

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-134 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-135 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the bridge rear cover.

1436 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove four screws(callout 1) and the bridge rear cover.

Figure 5-136 Remove the bridge rear cover

3. Remove the bridge motor (M14)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge motor (M14).

1. Remove three screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-137 Remove three screws

2. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

NOTE: It located on the bottom of the bridge

Remove the bridge motor (M14) 1437

 Figure 5-138 Disconnect one connector

3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-139 Remove the belt

1438 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove the Bridge motor (M14, callout1)

Figure 5-140 Remove the Bridge motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1439

 Removal and replacement: Bridge exit sensor (S3)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-84 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1440 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the bridge from the machine
Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-141 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-142 Pull the locker out

Remove the bridge from the machine 1441

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-143 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-144 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge exit sensor (S3).

1. Unplug one connector

NOTE: Bridge exit sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

1442 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Figure 5-145 Unplug one connector

Figure 5-146 Unplug one connector

Remove the bridge exit sensor (S3) 1443

 2. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge exit sensor(S3, callout1)

Figure 5-147 Remove the bridge exit sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1444 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2)
Learn how to remove and replace the bridge door sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the bridge door sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-85 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Bridge door sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Bridge door sensor (S2) 1445

 1. Remove the bridge from the machine
Follow these steps to remove the bridge from the machine.

1. Open the front door (callout 1)

Figure 5-148 Open the front door

2. Pull the locker out (callout 1)

Figure 5-149 Pull the locker out

1446 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors (callout 1)

Figure 5-150 Separate the finisher from the printer and disconnect the two connectors

4. Pull out the bridge unit(Callout 1) from the printer

Figure 5-151 Pull out the bridge unit

2. Remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Follow these steps to remove the bridge door sensor (S2).

Remove the bridge door sensor (S2) 1447

 1. Bridge door sensor(callout 1) located on the bottom of the bridge

Figure 5-152 Location of the bridge door sensor

2. Open the bridge door to remove the bridge door sensor (S2)

Figure 5-153 Open the bridge door

1448 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Use a tweezer to remove the bridge door sensor(S2, callout 1)

Figure 5-154 Remove the bridge door sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1449

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Covers

Removal and replacement: Right upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the right upper cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the right upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-86 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01448B Right upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1450 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-155 Remove the right upper cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1451

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Top cover

Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top cover of the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-87 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01446B Top cover

1452 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-156 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1453

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-157 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-158 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1454 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-159 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1455

 Removal and replacement: Front door
Learn how to remove and replace the front door.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front door for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-88 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01444B Front door

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1456 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-160 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-161 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1457

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-162 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-163 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1458 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-164 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-165 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1459

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-166 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-167 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1460 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-168 Remove the front door

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1461

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-89 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04988B Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

1462 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-169 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1463

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-170 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-171 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1464 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-172 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-173 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1465

 Figure 5-174 Remove the rear cover

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1466 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-90 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04986B Front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Front cover 1467

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-175 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1468 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-176 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-177 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1469

 Figure 5-178 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-179 Lift the top hinge pin

1470 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-180 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-181 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1471

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-182 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-183 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1472 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-184 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-185 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1473

 Figure 5-186 Remove the front cover

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1474 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the front lower cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front lower cover for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-91 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04987B Front lower cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Front lower cover 1475

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-187 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1476 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-188 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-189 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1477

 Figure 5-190 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-191 Lift the top hinge pin

1478 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-192 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-193 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1479

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-194 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-195 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1480 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-196 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-197 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1481

 Figure 5-198 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the front lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front lower cover (finisher).

■ Remove three machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front lower cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-199 Remove the front lower cover

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1482 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover

Learn how to remove and replace the caster cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the caster cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Caster cover 1483

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-92 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04985B Caster cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-200 Remove the booklet output tray

1484 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-201 Install the booklet output tray

2. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-202 Remove four screws

Remove the caster cover 1485

 2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-203 Remove the caster cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1486 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left lower cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left lower cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-93 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01771B Left lower cover (for stapler/stacker finisher)

JC90-01417B Left lower cover (for booklet finisher)

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Left lower cover 1487

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-204 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1488 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-205 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-206 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1489

 Figure 5-207 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-208 Lift the top hinge pin

1490 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-209 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-210 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1491

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-211 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-212 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1492 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-213 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-214 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1493

 Figure 5-215 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-216 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1494 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-217 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-218 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1495

 Figure 5-219 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-220 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1496 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-221 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-222 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1497

 Figure 5-223 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-224 Disconnect two connectors

1498 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-225 Remove the left lower cover

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1499

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left upper cover

Learn how to remove and replace the left upper cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the left upper cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-94 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01475B Left upper cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1500 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-226 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1501

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-227 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-228 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1502 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-229 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-230 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1503

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-231 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-232 Release the lower hinge pin

1504 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-233 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-234 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1505

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-235 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-236 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1506 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-237 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-238 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1507

 Figure 5-239 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-240 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1508 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-241 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-242 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1509

 Figure 5-243 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-244 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1510 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-245 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-246 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1511

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-247 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-248 Lower the output tray

1512 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-249 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-250 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1513

 Figure 5-251 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-252 Remove the left upper cover

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1514 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet front cover.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet front cover on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher front cover 1515

 Table 5-95 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01478B Booklet front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-253 Remove five screws and the cover

1516 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M12)

Learn how to remove and replace the feed entrance motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the entrance motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1517

 Before performing service
○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-96 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Entrance motor assembly

JC31-00163B Entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1518 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-254 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-255 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1519

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-256 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-257 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1520 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-258 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-259 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the entrance motor (M12)

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor (M12).

Remove the entrance motor (M12) 1521

 ■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the entrance motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-260 Remove the entrance motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

1522 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit

Removal and replacement: Dummy feed guide

Learn how to remove and replace the dummy feed guide.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the dummy feed guide on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-97 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01161A Dummy feed guide

Y1G10-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/3 Accessory

Y1G11-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch 2/4 Accessory

Y1G12-67901 HP LaserJet Hole Punch Swedish Accessory

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Punch unit 1523

 After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-261 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1524 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-262 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-263 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1525

 Figure 5-264 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-265 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1526 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-266 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the dummy feed guide (finisher).

■ At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the dummy feed guide
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-267 Remove two screws and the feed guide

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the dummy feed guide (finisher) 1527

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tray diverter unit

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top jam access cover
Learn how to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top jam cover assembly for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

1528 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-98 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01455A Top jam cover assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1529

 Figure 5-268 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-269 Remove six screws

1530 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-270 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-271 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1531

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-272 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-273 Remove the top hinge pin

1532 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-274 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-275 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1533

 Figure 5-276 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-277 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1534 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-278 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-279 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1535

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-280 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-281 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

1536 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-282 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-283 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top jam access cover 1537

 Figure 5-284 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1538 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter
Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-99 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07205A Tray diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Tray diverter 1539

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-285 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-286 Remove six screws

1540 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-287 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-288 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1541

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-289 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-290 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the tray diverter

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter.

1542 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) to take out the exit motor (callout 2)

Figure 5-291 Take out the exit motor

2. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-292 Remove two screws

Remove the tray diverter 1543

 3. Pull the top jam cover assembly out.

Figure 5-293 Pull the top jam cover assembly out

4. Remove the tray diverter (callout 1) from top jam cover assembly.

Figure 5-294 Remove the tray diverter

1544 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1545

 Removal and replacement: Tray diverter home sensor (S4)
Learn how to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the tray diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-100 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Tray diverter home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1546 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-295 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-296 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1547

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-297 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-298 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1548 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-299 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-300 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1549

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-301 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-302 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1550 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-303 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-304 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1551

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-305 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-306 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4)

Follow these steps to remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4).

1552 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Disconnect one connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-307 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove the green handle (callout 1)

Figure 5-308 Remove the green handle

Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4) 1553

 3. Remove the belt (callout 1)

Figure 5-309 Remove the belt

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) and remove the bracket (callout 2) to reach out the tray diverter home
sensor

Figure 5-310 Remove two screws and remove the bracket

1554 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Remove the tray diverter home sensor (S4, callout 1)

Figure 5-311 Remove the tray diverter home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1555

 Top exit unit

Removal and replacement: Top lower feed assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top lower feed assembly for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-101 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01454A Top lower feed assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

1556 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-312 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1557

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-313 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-314 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1558 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-315 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-316 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1559

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-317 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-318 Release the lower hinge pin

1560 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-319 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-320 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1561

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-321 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-322 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1562 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-323 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-324 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1563

 Figure 5-325 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-326 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1564 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-327 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-328 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1565

 1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-329 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-330 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

1566 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-331 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-332 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1567

 Figure 5-333 Locate sensors and connector

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

1568 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-
E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11)
Learn how to remove and replace the top exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-102 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Top exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Top exit sensor (S11) 1569
 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-334 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-335 Remove six screws

1570 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-336 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-337 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1571

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-338 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-339 Remove the top hinge pin

1572 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-340 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-341 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1573

 Figure 5-342 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-343 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1574 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-344 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-345 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1575

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-346 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-347 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

1576 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-348 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-349 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top jam access cover 1577

 Figure 5-350 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-351 Remove two screws

1578 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-352 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-353 Remove three screws

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1579

 4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-354 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-355 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the top exit sensor(S11)

Follow these steps to remove the top exit sensor(S11).

1580 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-356 Remove one screw and then top lower feed assembly

2. Remove harness(callout 1) and top exit sensor(S11, callout 2)

Figure 5-357 Remove harness and then top exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

Unpack the replacement assembly 1581

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Top output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Top output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-103 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04995B Top output tray

Required tools
● No special tools are needed to remove or install this assembly.

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1582 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the top output tray

Follow these steps to remove the top output tray.

■ Raise the end of the top output tray (callout 1), and then lift it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-358 Remove the top output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

Remove the top output tray 1583

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Top output tray paper full sensor (S15)
Learn how to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the top output tray paper full sensor for
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-104 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Top output tray paper full sensor

1584 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-359 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1585

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-360 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1586 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-363 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1587

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-364 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-365 Release the lower hinge pin

1588 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1589

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1590 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1591

 Figure 5-372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15)

Follow these steps to remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2) and then
remove the sensor assembly (callout 3)

Figure 5-373 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

1592 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- detector (callout 1).

Figure 5-374 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

3. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-375 Remove four screws

Remove top output tray paper full sensor (S15) 1593

 4. Remove screw (callout 1), disconnect the connector (callout 2), and then remove the sensor
assembly (callout 3).

Figure 5-376 Remove screw and connector and sensor assy

5. Remove top output tray paper full sensor- emitter (callout 1).

Figure 5-377 Remove top output tray paper full sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

1594 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main exit unit

Removal and replacement: Main exit sensor (S10)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-105 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Main exit sensor

Main exit unit 1595

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-378 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1596 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-379 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-380 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1597

 Figure 5-381 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-382 Lift the top hinge pin

1598 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-383 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-384 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1599

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-385 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-386 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1600 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-387 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-388 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1601

 Figure 5-389 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-390 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1602 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-391 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-392 Remove the exit motor

7. Remove the top jam access cover

Follow these steps to remove the top jam access cover.

Remove the exit motor (M13) 1603

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-393 Remove two screws

2. Remove the top jam access cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-394 Remove the top jam access cover

8. Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher).

1604 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. At the front of the printer, remove two screws (callout 1) on the main exit cam motor housing, and
then tilt the motor aside to access the screws under it.

Figure 5-395 Remove two screws

2. At the front of the finisher, remove three self-tapping screws (callout 1), and then disconnect one
connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-396 Remove three screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the top lower feed assembly (finisher) 1605

 3. At the rear of the finisher, remove three machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-397 Remove three screws

4. At the top of the finisher, lift the feed assembly straight up to disengage two tabs on the bottom and
remove the assembly.

Figure 5-398 Remove the top lower feed assembly

5. If you are replacing the top lower feed assembly, locate two sensors (callout 1) and one connector
(callout 2) on the back of the assembly. Remove these items and transfer them to the replacement
part.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1606 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-399 Locate sensors and connector

9. Remove the main exit sensor(S10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit sensor(S10).

■ Remove one screw (callout 1) and main exit sensor (S10; callout 2) at the top lower feed assembly.

Figure 5-400 Remove the main exit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

Remove the main exit sensor(S10) 1607

 IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M13)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the exit motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-106 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01459A Exit motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

1608 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 After performing service
○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-401 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1609

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-402 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-403 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1610 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-404 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-405 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1611

 Figure 5-406 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the exit motor (M13)

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor (M13).

■ Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2). Remove two screws
(callout 3), and then remove the exit motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt (callout 4) is positioned on the gear behind the motor when reinstalling
the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-407 Remove the exit motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1612 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the main exit cam motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main exit cam motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Main exit cam motor (M2) 1613

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-107 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01453A Main exit cam motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1614 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-408 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-409 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1615

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1616 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-412 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-413 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1617

 Figure 5-414 Remove the front cover

4. Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2)

Follow these steps to remove the Main exit cam motor (M2).

1. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-415 Disconnect two connectors and then two screws

1618 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. If you are replacing the gear, slide it off of the shaft

Figure 5-416 Slide the gear off of the shaft

3. If you are replacing the sensor (callout 1), remove it from the motor housing.

Figure 5-417 Remove the sensor

4. If you are replacing the motor, do the following.

Remove the Main exit cam motor (M2) 1619

 a. Remove two screws (callout 1)

b. Lower the motor (callout 1) and then pull it away from the housing (callout 2) to remove it.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1620 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Paddle

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Paddle unit 1621

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-108 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01462A Paddle mid

JC90-01463A Paddle wing

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1622 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-418 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-419 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1623

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-420 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-421 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1624 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-422 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-423 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1625

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-424 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-425 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1626 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-426 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-427 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1627

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-428 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-429 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1628 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-430 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-431 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the paddle (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle (finisher).

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1629

 1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-432 Remove two screws

2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-433 Remove two screws

1630 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Do not remove the frame (callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-434 Pull it one side

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-435 Remove two screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1631

 5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-436 Remove four screws

6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.(S11)

Figure 5-437 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

1632 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-438 Remove two screws

8. Remove two screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-439 Remove two screws

Remove the paddle (finisher) 1633

 9. Take supporter of top output bin (callout 1) forward and put it down.

Figure 5-440 Take supporter of top output bin forward and put it down.

10. Remove three paddles (callout 1) from shaft

Figure 5-441 Remove the paddle

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1634 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle home sensor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Paddle home sensor (S8) 1635

 Table 5-109 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1636 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-442 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-443 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1637

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-444 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-445 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1638 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-446 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-447 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1639

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-448 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-449 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1640 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-450 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-451 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1641

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-452 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-453 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle home sensor (S8)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle home sensor (S8).

1642 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-454 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

2. Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

Figure 5-455 Disconnect connector from paddle home sensor

Remove the paddle home sensor (S8) 1643

 3. Remove paddle home sensor (S8; callout1)

Figure 5-456 Remove paddle home sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1644 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the paddle motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paddle motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-110 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01461A Paddle motor assembly

JC93-01001A Paddle motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Removal and replacement: Paddle motor (M1) 1645

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-457 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1646 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-458 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-459 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1647

 Figure 5-460 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-461 Lift the top hinge pin

1648 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-462 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-463 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1649

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-464 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-465 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1650 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-466 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-467 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1651

 Figure 5-468 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the paddle motor (M1)

Follow these steps to remove the paddle motor (M1).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect two connectors (callout 2)

Figure 5-469 Remove two screws and disconnect two connectors

1652 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws (callout 1) and then remove paddle motor (M1; callout 2)

Figure 5-470 Remove the paddle motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1653

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

End fence unit

Removal and replacement: End fence home sensor (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the end fence home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-111 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 End fence home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1654 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-471 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1655

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-472 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-473 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1656 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-474 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-475 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1657

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-476 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-477 Release the lower hinge pin

1658 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-478 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-479 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1659

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-480 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-481 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1660 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-482 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-483 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1661

 Figure 5-484 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-485 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1662 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-486 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-487 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1663

 Figure 5-488 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-489 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1664 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-490 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-491 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1665

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-492 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-493 Lower the output tray

1666 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-494 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-495 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1667

 Figure 5-496 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-497 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1668 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-498 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-499 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1669

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-500 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-501 Remove one screw

1670 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-502 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-503 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1671

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-504 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-505 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1672 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-506 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-507 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1673

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-508 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-509 Disconnect one connector

1674 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-510 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-511 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1675

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-512 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-513 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1676 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

Remove the front tamper unit 1677

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-514 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the end of fence home sensor(S7)

Follow these steps to remove the end of fence home sensor(S7).

■ At the front tamper, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove end fence home sensor(S7,
callout 2)

Figure 5-515 Remove end fence home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

1678 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the end fence motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the end fence motor for the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3) 1679
 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-112 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01467A End fence motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1680 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-516 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-517 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1681

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-518 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-519 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1682 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-520 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-521 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1683

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-522 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-523 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1684 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-524 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-525 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1685

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-526 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-527 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the end fence motor(M3)

Follow these steps to remove the end fence motor(M3).

1686 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-528 Remove two screws and disconnect connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and end fence motor (M3, callout 1)

Figure 5-529 Remove end fence motor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1687

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Tamper unit

Front tamper

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Front tamper unit
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

1688 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-113 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00901A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1689

 Figure 5-530 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-531 Remove six screws

1690 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-532 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-533 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1691

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-534 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-535 Remove the top hinge pin

1692 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-536 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-537 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1693

 Figure 5-538 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-539 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1694 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-540 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-541 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1695

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-542 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-543 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1696 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-544 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-545 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 1697

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-546 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-547 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1698 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-548 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-549 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1699

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-550 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-551 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1700 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-552 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-553 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1701

 Figure 5-554 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-555 Disconnect one connector

1702 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-556 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-557 Move the staple unit to the center

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1703

 2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-558 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-559 Remove two screws

1704 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-560 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-561 Rotate the sensor

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1705

 6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-562 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-563 Remove the front tamper shaft

1706 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-564 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-565 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1707

 10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-566 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-567 Disconnect one connector

1708 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-568 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-569 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1709

 14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-570 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-571 Lift the edges of the tampers

1710 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-572 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1711

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-573 Remove the front tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1712 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S6) 1713

 ○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-114 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1714 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-574 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-575 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1715

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-576 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-577 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1716 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-578 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-579 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1717

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-580 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-581 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1718 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-582 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-583 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1719

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-584 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-585 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1720 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-586 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-587 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1721

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-588 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-589 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1722 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-590 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-591 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1723

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-592 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-593 Release the lower shield

1724 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-594 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-595 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1725

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-596 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-597 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1726 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-598 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-599 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1727

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-600 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-601 Move the staple unit to the center

1728 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-602 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-603 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1729

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-604 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-605 Rotate the sensor

1730 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-606 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-607 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1731

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-608 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-609 Remove one screw

1732 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-610 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-611 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1733

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-612 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-613 Disconnect one connector

1734 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-614 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-615 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1735

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-616 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

1736 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-617 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper home sensor(S6)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor(S6).

Remove the front tamper unit 1737

 1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at front tamper.

Figure 5-618 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1)

Figure 5-619 Remove one screw

1738 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove front tamper home sensor(S6, callout 1)

Figure 5-620 Remove front tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1739

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M4)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-115 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

1740 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-621 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1741

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-622 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-623 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1742 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-624 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-625 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1743

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-626 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-627 Release the lower hinge pin

1744 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-628 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-629 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1745

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-630 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-631 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1746 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-632 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-633 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1747

 Figure 5-634 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-635 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1748 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-636 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-637 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1749

 Figure 5-638 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-639 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1750 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-640 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-641 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1751

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-642 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-643 Lower the output tray

1752 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-644 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-645 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1753

 Figure 5-646 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-647 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1754 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-648 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-649 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1755

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-650 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-651 Remove one screw

1756 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-652 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-653 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1757

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-654 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-655 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1758 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-656 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-657 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1759

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-658 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-659 Disconnect one connector

1760 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-660 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-661 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1761

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-662 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-663 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1762 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the front tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper unit.

Remove the front tamper unit 1763

 ■ Lift the front tamper away from the finisher to remove it

Figure 5-664 Remove the front tamper

12. Remove the front tamper motor (M4)

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor (M4).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-665 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the front tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1764 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-666 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1765

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper unit

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-116 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00898A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

1766 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-667 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1767

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-668 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-669 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1768 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-670 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-671 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1769

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-672 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-673 Release the lower hinge pin

1770 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-674 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-675 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1771

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-676 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-677 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1772 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-678 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-679 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1773

 Figure 5-680 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-681 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

1774 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-682 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-683 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 1775

 Figure 5-684 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-685 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

1776 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-686 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-687 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1777

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-688 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-689 Lower the output tray

1778 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-690 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-691 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1779

 Figure 5-692 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-693 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1780 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-694 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-695 Disconnect three connectors

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1781

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-696 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-697 Remove one screw

1782 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-698 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-699 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1783

 7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-700 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-701 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

1784 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-702 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-703 Remove the rear tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1785

 11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-704 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-705 Disconnect one connector

1786 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-706 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-707 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1787

 15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-708 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-709 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

1788 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the rear tamper unit 1789

 Figure 5-710 Remove therear tamper

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1790 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-117 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S9) 1791

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-711 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1792 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-712 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-713 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1793

 Figure 5-714 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-715 Lift the top hinge pin

1794 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-716 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-717 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1795

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-718 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-719 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1796 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-720 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-721 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1797

 Figure 5-722 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-723 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1798 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-724 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-725 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1799

 Figure 5-726 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-727 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1800 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-728 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-729 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1801

 Figure 5-730 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-731 Disconnect two connectors

1802 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-732 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-733 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1803

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-734 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-735 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1804 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-736 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-737 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1805

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-738 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-739 Disconnect three connectors

1806 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-740 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-741 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1807

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-742 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-743 Remove one screw

1808 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-744 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-745 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1809

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-746 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-747 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1810 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-748 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-749 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1811

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-750 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-751 Remove two screws

1812 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-752 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-753 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1813

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1814 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-754 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the rear tamper.

Figure 5-755 Remove two screws

Remove the rear tamper home sensor(S9) 1815

 2. Remove one screw in front side(callout 1)

Figure 5-756 Remove one screw

3. Remove rear tamper home sensor(S9, callout 1)

Figure 5-757 Remove rear tamper home sensor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1816 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M9) 1817

 Table 5-118 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-758 Remove the right upper cover

1818 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-759 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-760 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1819

 Figure 5-761 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-762 Lift the top hinge pin

1820 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-763 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-764 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1821

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-765 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-766 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1822 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-767 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-768 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1823

 Figure 5-769 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-770 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1824 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-771 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-772 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1825

 Figure 5-773 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-774 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1826 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-775 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-776 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1827

 Figure 5-777 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-778 Disconnect two connectors

1828 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-779 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-780 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1829

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-781 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-782 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1830 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-783 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-784 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1831

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-785 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-786 Disconnect three connectors

1832 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-787 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-788 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1833

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-789 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-790 Remove one screw

1834 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-791 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-792 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1835

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-793 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-794 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1836 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-795 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-796 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1837

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-797 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-798 Remove two screws

1838 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-799 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-800 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1839

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the rear tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper unit.

■ Lift the rear tamper away from the finisher to remove it

NOTE: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1840 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-801 Remove therear tamper

12. Remove the rear tamper motor (M9)

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor (M9).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-802 Remove two screws

2. Release the belt (callout 1), and then remove the rear tamper motor.

TIP: Make sure that the belt is routed correctly when reinstalling the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the rear tamper motor (M9) 1841

 Figure 5-803 Release the belt and remove the motor

13. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1842 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler unit

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-119 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00894A Stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Stapler unit 1843

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1844 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-805 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1845

 Figure 5-807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-808 Lift the top hinge pin

1846 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-809 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-810 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1847

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-811 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-812 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1848 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-813 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-814 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1849

 Figure 5-815 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-816 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1850 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-817 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-818 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1851

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-819 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-820 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1852 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-821 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-822 Remove the staple unit

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Unpack the replacement assembly 1853

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler front sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler front sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler front sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1854 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-120 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler front sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1855

 Figure 5-823 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-824 Remove six screws

1856 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-825 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-826 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1857

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-827 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-828 Remove the top hinge pin

1858 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-829 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-830 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1859

 Figure 5-831 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-832 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1860 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-833 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-834 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1861

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-835 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-836 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1862 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-837 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-838 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler unit 1863

 3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-839 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-840 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1864 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-841 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler front sensor(S21)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler front sensor(S21).

■ Remove stapler front sensor from staple unit.

Figure 5-842 Remove the stapler front sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the stapler front sensor(S21) 1865

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-front sensor (S24)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-front sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1866 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-121 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-front sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1867

 Figure 5-843 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-844 Remove six screws

1868 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-845 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-846 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1869

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-847 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-848 Remove the top hinge pin

1870 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-849 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-850 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1871

 Figure 5-851 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-852 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1872 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-853 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-854 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1873

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-855 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-856 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1874 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-857 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-858 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler unit 1875

 3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-859 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-860 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1876 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-861 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24).

1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-862 Disconnect the connector

Remove the stapler mid-front sensor(S24) 1877

 2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-863 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1878 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler mid-rear sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-122 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler mid-rear sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Stapler mid-rear sensor (S25) 1879

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-864 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1880 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-865 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-866 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1881

 Figure 5-867 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-868 Lift the top hinge pin

1882 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-869 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-870 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1883

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-871 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-872 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1884 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-873 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-874 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1885

 Figure 5-875 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-876 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1886 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-877 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-878 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1887

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-879 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-880 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1888 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-881 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-882 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25).

Remove the stapler mid-rear sensor(S25) 1889

 1. Turn over staple unit and disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-883 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove stapler mid-rear sensor(S24, callout 1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-884 Remove stapler mid-rear sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1890 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler rear sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Stapler rear sensor (S30) 1891

 Table 5-123 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler rear sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-885 Remove the right upper cover

1892 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-886 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-887 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1893

 Figure 5-888 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-889 Lift the top hinge pin

1894 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-890 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-891 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1895

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-892 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-893 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1896 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-894 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-895 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1897

 Figure 5-896 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-897 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1898 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-898 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-899 Move the staple unit to the front

Remove the stapler unit 1899

 2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-900 Remove the staple cartridge

3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-901 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

1900 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-902 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-903 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler rear sensor(S30).

Remove the stapler rear sensor(S30) 1901

 1. Remove stapler rear sensor(callout 1, S30) from staple unit.

Figure 5-904 Remove stapler rear sensor from staple unit.

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from stapler rear sensor.

Figure 5-905 Disconnect the connector from stapler rear sensor.

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1902 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the manual staple sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the manual staple sensor for the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Manual staple sensor (S19) 1903

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-124 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Manual staple sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1904 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-906 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-907 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1905

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-908 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-909 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1906 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-910 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-911 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1907

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-912 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-913 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1908 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-914 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-915 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1909

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-916 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-917 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the manual staple sensor(S19)

Follow these steps to remove the manual staple sensor(S19).

1910 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ At the front of the finisher, disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove manual staple sensor(S19,
callout 2).

Figure 5-918 Remove the manual staple sensor

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 1911

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the stapler position motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

1912 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-125 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00163A Stapler position motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 1913

 Figure 5-919 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-920 Remove six screws

1914 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-921 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-922 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 1915

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-923 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-924 Remove the top hinge pin

1916 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-925 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-926 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 1917

 Figure 5-927 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-928 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

1918 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-929 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-930 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 1919

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-931 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-932 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the stapler unit.

1920 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the front until it stops.

Figure 5-933 Move the staple unit to the front

2. Lower the green latch (callout 1), and then slide the staple cartridge away from the finisher to
remove it (callout 2).

Figure 5-934 Remove the staple cartridge

Remove the stapler unit 1921

 3. At the back of the finisher, release one retainer (callout 1), disconnect two connectors (callout 2),
and then remove two screws (callout 3).

Figure 5-935 Disconnect three connectors and remove two screws

4. At the front of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-936 Disconnect one connector and remove two screws

5. Lift up, and then slide the staple unit to the front of the finisher to remove it.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1922 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-937 Remove the staple unit

7. Remove the stapler position motor(M8)

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor(M8).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-938 Remove two screws

Remove the stapler position motor(M8) 1923

 2. Remove stapler position motor(M8, callout1) from staple unit.

Figure 5-939 Remove stapler position motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

1924 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector unit

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-126 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01409A Ejector unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Ejector unit 1925

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-940 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1926 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-941 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-942 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1927

 Figure 5-943 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-944 Lift the top hinge pin

1928 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-945 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-946 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1929

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-947 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-948 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1930 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-949 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-950 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1931

 Figure 5-951 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-952 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1932 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-953 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-954 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 1933

 Figure 5-955 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-956 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

1934 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-957 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-958 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1935

 Figure 5-959 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-960 Disconnect two connectors

1936 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-961 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-962 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1937

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-963 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-964 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1938 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-965 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-966 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1939

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-967 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-968 Disconnect three connectors

1940 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-969 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-970 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1941

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-971 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-972 Remove one screw

1942 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-973 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-974 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1943

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-975 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-976 Remove the rear tamper shaft

1944 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-977 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-978 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1945

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-979 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-980 Remove two screws

1946 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-981 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-982 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1947

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1948 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector1

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor sensor (S27)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Ejector1 1949
 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-127 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector1 motor enor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1950 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-983 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-984 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1951

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-985 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-986 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1952 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-987 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-988 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1953

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-989 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-990 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1954 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-991 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-992 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1955

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-993 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-994 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1956 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-995 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-996 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1957

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-997 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-998 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1958 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-999 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1000 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1959

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1001 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1002 Release the lower shield

1960 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1003 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1004 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1961

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1005 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1006 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1962 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1007 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1008 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1963

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1009 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1010 Move the staple unit to the center

1964 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1011 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1012 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1965

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1013 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1014 Rotate the sensor

1966 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1015 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1016 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1967

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1017 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1018 Remove one screw

1968 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1019 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1020 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1969

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1021 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1022 Disconnect one connector

1970 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1023 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1024 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1971

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1025 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

1972 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(callout 2, M6) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1026 Disconnect the connector

Remove the ejector1 motor sensor(S27) 1973

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1027 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector1 motor sensor(S27, callout 2)

Figure 5-1028 Remove the ejector1 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

1974 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector1 motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector1 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Removal and replacement: Ejector1 motor (M6) 1975

 Table 5-128 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector1 motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1976 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1029 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1030 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 1977

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1031 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1032 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1978 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1033 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1034 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 1979

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1035 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1036 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

1980 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1037 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1038 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 1981

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1039 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1040 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1982 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1041 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1042 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 1983

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1043 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1044 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1984 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1045 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1046 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 1985

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1047 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1048 Release the lower shield

1986 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1049 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1050 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1987

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1051 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1052 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

1988 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1053 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1054 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 1989

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1055 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1056 Move the staple unit to the center

1990 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1057 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1058 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1991

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1059 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1060 Rotate the sensor

1992 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1061 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1062 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1993

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1063 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1064 Remove one screw

1994 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1065 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1066 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1995

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1067 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1068 Disconnect one connector

1996 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1069 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1070 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 1997

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1071 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

1998 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector1 motor(M6)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector1 motor(M6).

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector1 motor(M6, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1072 Disconnect the connector

Remove the ejector1 motor(M6) 1999

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1073 Remove two screws

3. Remove the ejector1 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1074 Remove the ejector1 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2000 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector2 unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 home sensor (S32)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Ejector2 unit 2001

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-129 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2002 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1075 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1076 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2003

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1077 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1078 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

2004 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1079 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1080 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2005

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1081 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1082 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2006 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1083 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1084 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2007

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1085 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1086 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2008 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1087 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1088 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 2009

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1089 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1090 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

2010 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1091 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1092 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2011

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1093 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1094 Release the lower shield

2012 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1095 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1096 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2013

 1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1097 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1098 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

2014 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1099 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1100 Disconnect one connector

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2015

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1101 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1102 Move the staple unit to the center

2016 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1103 Disconnect three connectors

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1104 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2017

 4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1105 Remove one screw

5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1106 Rotate the sensor

2018 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1107 Remove one screw

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1108 Remove the front tamper shaft

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2019

 8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1109 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1110 Remove one screw

2020 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1111 Remove the rear tamper shaft

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1112 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2021

 12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1113 Disconnect one connector

13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1114 Disconnect one connector

2022 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1115 Remove two screws

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1116 Lift the edges of the tampers

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2023

 16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1117 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

2024 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32).

1. Remove sensor(callout 1, S32) using tweezers from the ejector unit.

Figure 5-1118 Remove sensor

Remove the ejector2 home sensor(S32) 2025

 2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 home sensor.

Figure 5-1119 Disconnect the connector from ejector2 home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2026 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-130 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Ejector2 motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor sensor (S23) 2027

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1120 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2028 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1121 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1122 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2029

 Figure 5-1123 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1124 Lift the top hinge pin

2030 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1125 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1126 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2031

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1127 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1128 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2032 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1129 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1130 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2033

 Figure 5-1131 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1132 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2034 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1133 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1134 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2035

 Figure 5-1135 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1136 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2036 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1137 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1138 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2037

 Figure 5-1139 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1140 Disconnect two connectors

2038 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1141 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1142 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2039

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1143 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1144 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2040 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1145 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1146 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2041

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1147 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1148 Disconnect three connectors

2042 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1149 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1150 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2043

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1151 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1152 Remove one screw

2044 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1153 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1154 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2045

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1155 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1156 Remove the rear tamper shaft

2046 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1157 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1158 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2047

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1159 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1160 Remove two screws

2048 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1161 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1162 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2049

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23).

2050 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1163 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1164 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector2 motor sensor(S23) 2051

 3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit, disconnect the connector(callout 1), and then remove
the ejector2 motor sensor(S23, callout 2)

Figure 5-1165 Remove the ejector2 motor sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2052 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector2 motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the ejector2 motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-131 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Ejector2 motor (M5) 2053

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1166 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2054 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1167 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1168 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2055

 Figure 5-1169 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1170 Lift the top hinge pin

2056 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1171 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1172 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2057

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1173 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1174 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2058 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1175 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1176 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2059

 Figure 5-1177 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1178 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2060 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1179 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1180 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2061

 Figure 5-1181 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1182 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2062 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1183 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1184 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2063

 Figure 5-1185 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1186 Disconnect two connectors

2064 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1187 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1188 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2065

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1189 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1190 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2066 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1191 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1192 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the ejector unit (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector unit (finisher).

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2067

 1. Rotate the green wheel to move the staple unit to the center of the finisher.

Figure 5-1193 Move the staple unit to the center

2. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect three connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1194 Disconnect three connectors

2068 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1195 Remove two screws

4. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1196 Remove one screw

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2069

 5. Press up on the hinge (callout 1), release one tab (callout 2), and then rotate the sensor away from
the finisher (callout 3).

Figure 5-1197 Rotate the sensor

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1198 Remove one screw

2070 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the front and pull down to release and
remove one shaft (callout 1) on the front tamper unit.

Figure 5-1199 Remove the front tamper shaft

8. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove three screws
(callout 2).

Figure 5-1200 Disconnect two connectors and remove three screws

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2071

 9. At the left side of the finisher, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1201 Remove one screw

10. Look inside the finisher through the stapler opening in the rear and pull down to release and remove
one shaft (callout 1) on the rear tamper unit.

Figure 5-1202 Remove the rear tamper shaft

2072 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. At the left side of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1203 Disconnect one connector

12. At the rear of the finisher, disconnect one connector (callout 1).

Figure 5-1204 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2073

 13. At the rear of the finisher, press the wire retainer to the right to access and remove two screws
(callout 1).

Figure 5-1205 Disconnect one connector

14. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1206 Remove two screws

2074 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

15. Lift the inside edges of the front and rear tampers up.

Figure 5-1207 Lift the edges of the tampers

16. Rotate the rear edge of the ejector unit away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide it toward
the rear of the finisher (callout 2) to remove it. Make sure that the PCA (callout 3) stays clear of the
sheet metal frame.

Figure 5-1208 Remove the ejector unit

17. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Ejector unit

Remove the ejector unit (finisher) 2075

 a. When the front tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft
will drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the
shaft in the notch (callout 1).

b. When the rear tamper shaft is removed, the retainer arm that held the one end of the shaft will
drop down. When reinstalling the shaft, raise the retainer arm and position the end of the shaft
in the notch (callout 1).

11. Remove the ejector2 motor(M5)

Follow these steps to remove the ejector2 motor(M5).

2076 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Disconnect the connector(callout 1) from ejector2 motor(M5, callout 2) of ejector unit.

Figure 5-1209 Disconnect the connector

2. Remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1210 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector2 motor(M5) 2077

 3. Remove the ejector2 motor from ejector unit and remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1211 Remove the ejector2 motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2078 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Main output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack sensor (S20)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack sensor
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-132 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A Main output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Main output tray unit 2079

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1212 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2080 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1213 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1214 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2081

 Figure 5-1215 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1216 Lift the top hinge pin

2082 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1217 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1218 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2083

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1219 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1220 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2084 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1221 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1222 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2085

 Figure 5-1223 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1224 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2086 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1225 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1226 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Remove the booklet output tray 2087

 Figure 5-1227 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1228 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2088 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1229 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1230 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2089

 Figure 5-1231 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1232 Disconnect two connectors

2090 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1233 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1234 Lower the output tray

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2091

 2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1235 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1236 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2092 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1237 Disconnect one connector

5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1238 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20).

Remove the main output tray top of stack sensor(S20) 2093

 ■ Remove detector and emitter sensor(S20, callout 1)

Figure 5-1239 Remove detector and emitter sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

2094 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray top of stack switch
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-133 Part information

Part number Part description

JC39-02316A Main output tray top of stack switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray top of stack switch (S34) 2095
 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1240 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2096 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1241 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1242 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2097

 Figure 5-1243 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1244 Lift the top hinge pin

2098 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1245 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1246 Release the lower hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2099

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1247 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1248 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

2100 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1249 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1250 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2101

 Figure 5-1251 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1252 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2102 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1253 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34).

1. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1254 Remove two screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2103

 2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1255 Remove two screws

3. Do not remove the frame(callout 1) but pull it one side.

Figure 5-1256 Pull it one side

2104 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. At the front of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1257 Remove two screws

5. At the rear of the finisher, remove four screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1258 Remove four screws

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2105

 6. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver or tweezers on the clutch
(callout 1) and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released
position and lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1259 Pressing to the right to release the clutch

7. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1260 Remove two screws

2106 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1261 Remove two screws

9. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1262 Separate two parts

Remove the main output tray of stack switch(S34) 2107

 10. Separate two parts (callout 1,callout 2)

Figure 5-1263 Separate two parts

11. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) And switch(callout 2, S34)

Figure 5-1264 Disconnect the connector

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2108 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray lower limit sensor
on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray lower limit sensor (S26) 2109
 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-134 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Main output tray lower limit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

● Small, flat-blade screwdriver

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2110 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1265 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1266 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2111

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1267 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1268 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

2112 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1269 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1270 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2113

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1271 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1272 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2114 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1273 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1274 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2115

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1275 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1276 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2116 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1277 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1278 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 2117

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1279 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1280 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

2118 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1281 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1282 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2119

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1283 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1284 Release the lower shield

2120 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1285 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1286 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26).

Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor(S26) 2121

 ■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S26, callout 2) from the lower shield
assembly.

Figure 5-1287 Remove the main output tray lower limit sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2122 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-135 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main output tray motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor sensor (S33) 2123
 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1288 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2124 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1289 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1290 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2125

 Figure 5-1291 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1292 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2126 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1293 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33).

1. Disconnect the connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1294 Disconnect the connector

Remove the main output tray motor sensor (S33) 2127

 2. Remove the tape using tweezers and remove the sensor (S33, callout 1).

Figure 5-1295 Remove the sensor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2128 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-

E87660du, E72525-E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor
(M11)
Learn how to remove and replace the main output tray motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main output tray motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-136 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01415B Main output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

HP LaserJet Managed MFP E82540-E82560, E87640-E87660, E82540du-E82560du, E87640du-E87660du, E72525-

E72535, E77822-E77830 - Removal and replacement: Main output tray motor (M11) 2129
 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1296 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2130 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1297 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1298 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2131

 Figure 5-1299 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1300 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2132 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1301 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main output tray motor (M11)

Follow these steps to remove the main output tray motor (M11).

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position

Figure 5-1302 Lower theoutput tray

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2133

 2. Open two retainers (callout 1), and then release the green wires (callout 2).

Figure 5-1303 Open two retainers

3. Disconnect three connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1304 Disconnect three connectors

2134 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then thread the cable up through the opening in the top of
the bracket.

Figure 5-1305 Disconnect one connector

5. Remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor assembly.

Figure 5-1306 Remove four screws and the motor assembly

Remove the main output tray motor (M11) 2135

 6. Carefully pull the motor assembly away from the printer to remove it.

Figure 5-1307 Remove the motor assembly

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: Main tray moving motor (M11)

a. Before installing the motor assembly, slide the bushing (callout 1) off of the shaft.

2136 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 b. Align the flat edges on the bushing with the flat edges on the opening in the motor assembly
bracket, and then install the bushing.

c. Position the bushing over the shaft, and then install the motor assembly.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2137

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding home sensor (S22)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2138 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-137 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2139

 Figure 5-1308 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1309 Remove six screws

2140 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1310 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1311 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 2141

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1312 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1313 Remove the top hinge pin

2142 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1314 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1315 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 2143

 Figure 5-1316 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1317 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

2144 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1318 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1319 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2145

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1320 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1321 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

2146 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1322 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1323 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 2147

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1324 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1325 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

2148 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1326 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1327 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2149

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1328 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1329 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the left upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left upper cover (finisher).

2150 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Bring the lower output tray down by positioning the shaft of a screwdriver on the clutch (callout 1)
and gently pressing to the right to release the clutch. Hold the clutch in the released position and
lower the tray (callout 2) to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1330 Lower the output tray

2. Remove six machine screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1331 Remove six screws

3. Rotate the lower edge of the shield away fromthe finisher (callout 1), and then slide the shield down
(callout 2) to release it from two tabs (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the two tabs (callout 3) when reinstalling it.

Remove the left upper cover (finisher) 2151

 Figure 5-1332 Release the shield

4. Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove the upper shield assembly.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1333 Disconnect one connector

2152 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. If you are replacing the left upper cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left upper
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1334 Remove the left upper cover

10. Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding home sensor(S22).

■ Disconnect the connector(callout 1) and remove the sensor(S22, callout 2) from the upper shield
assembly.

Figure 5-1335 Remove the paper holding home sensor

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the paper holding home sensor(S22) 2153

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding front sensor (S17)

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the front paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2154 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-138 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2155

 Figure 5-1336 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1337 Remove six screws

2156 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1338 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1339 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

Remove the front door (finisher) 2157

 1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1340 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1341 Remove the top hinge pin

2158 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1342 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1343 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the front door (finisher) 2159

 Figure 5-1344 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1345 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

2160 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1346 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1347 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2161

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1348 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1349 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

2162 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1350 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1351 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

Remove the caster cover 2163

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1352 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1353 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

2164 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1354 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1355 Release the lower shield

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2165

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1356 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1357 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding sensor (S17)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor (S17).

2166 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Remove the sensor(callout 1, S17) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1358 Remove the paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2167

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding rear sensor (S31)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the rear paper holding sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-139 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

2168 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1359 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2169

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1360 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1361 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2170 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1362 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1363 Lift the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2171

 2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1364 Remove the top hinge pin

3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1365 Release the lower hinge pin

2172 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1366 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1367 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2173

 1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1368 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1369 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2174 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1370 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1371 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2175

 Figure 5-1372 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1373 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

2176 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1374 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1375 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the caster cover 2177

 Figure 5-1376 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1377 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

2178 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1378 Release the lower shield

3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1379 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2179

 4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1380 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31)

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper holding sensor(S31).

■ Remove the sensor(S31, callout 1) from the upper shield assembly.

Figure 5-1381 Remove the rear paper holding sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2180 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding Motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the paper holding Motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding Motor (M7) 2181

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-140 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01414A Paper holding motor assembly

JC93-01156A Paper holding motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2182 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1382 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1383 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2183

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1384 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1385 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the front door (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front door (finisher).

2184 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Lift the top hinge pin up to release it from the retainer.

Figure 5-1386 Lift the top hinge pin

2. Pull the top hinge pin up to remove it.

Figure 5-1387 Remove the top hinge pin

Remove the front door (finisher) 2185

 3. Use a small, flat-blade screwdriver to release the lower hinge pin from the retainer, and then rotate
it away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1388 Release the lower hinge pin

4. Support the door with one hand, and then pull the lower hinge pin straight up to remove it.

Figure 5-1389 Remove the lower hinge pin

5. Support the door with one hand, and then remove one screw (callout 1) to release the strap. Remove
the front door.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2186 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1390 Remove the front door

4. Remove the front cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the front cover (finisher).

1. Release one tab (callout 1), and then pull the jam-access knob away from the finisher to remove it.

Figure 5-1391 Remove the jam-access knob

2. If the punch unit is installed, remove the punch waste bin (callout 1).

Remove the front cover (finisher) 2187

 3. Remove one screw (callout 1) on top of the front cover.

Figure 5-1392 Remove one screw

4. Remove five machine screws (callout 1), and then remove the front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1393 Remove the front cover

5. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2188 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1394 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1395 Remove the rear cover

6. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 2189

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1396 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1397 Install the booklet output tray

7. Remove the caster cover

Follow these steps to remove the caster cover.

2190 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screw caps and two self-tapping screws (callout 1). Remove two screw caps and two
machine screws (callout 2).

Figure 5-1398 Remove four screws

2. Rotate the left edge of the cover away from the finisher (callout 1), and then slide the cover to the
left (callout 2) to remove it.

TIP: Make sure that two tabs (callout 3) are positioned under the front lower cover when
reinstalling the caster cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1399 Remove the caster cover

8. Remove the left lower cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the left lower cover (finisher).

Remove the left lower cover (finisher) 2191

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1).

NOTE: Raisethe lower output tray as needed to access the screws.

Figure 5-1400 Remove four screws

2. Slide the shield down (callout 1) to release it from four tabs (callout 2), and then rotate it away from
the finisher (callout 3).

CAUTION: The shield is still attached to the finisher. Do not attempt to completely remove the
shield.

TIP: Position the shield under the four tabs (callout 2) when reinstalling it.

Figure 5-1401 Release the lower shield

2192 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1), and then remove the shield.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1402 Disconnect two connectors

4. If you are replacing the left lower cover, locate three sensors (callout 1) on the back of the left lower
cover. Remove these sensors and transfer them to the replacement part.

Figure 5-1403 Remove the left lower cover

9. Remove the paper holding Motor (M7)

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding Motor (M7).

Remove the paper holding Motor (M7) 2193

 1. Release one retainer (callout 1), and then disconnect one connector (callout 2).

Figure 5-1404 Disconnect one connector

2. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor and bracket.

Figure 5-1405 Remove two screws

2194 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the motor.

Figure 5-1406 Remove two screws and the motor

4. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: paper holding Motor (M10)

When installing the motor and bracket, align the tab and slot on the motor bracket with the tab and
slot in the printer.

Figure 5-1407 Install the motor and bracket

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2195

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Buffer unit

Removal and replacement: Buffer motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2196 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-141 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Buffer motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2197

 Figure 5-1408 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1409 Remove six screws

2198 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1410 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1411 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2199

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1412 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1413 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the main exit cam motor(M10)

Follow these steps to remove the main exit cam motor(M10).

2200 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(callout 1).

Figure 5-1414 Remove two screws

2. Disconnect the connector(callout 1)

Figure 5-1415 Disconnect the connector

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2201

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Buffer solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the buffer solenoid.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the buffer solenoid on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

2202 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Table 5-142 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01675A Buffer solenoid

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1416 Remove the right upper cover

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2203

 2. Remove the top cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1417 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1418 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2204 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1419 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1420 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2205

 Figure 5-1421 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1)

Follow these steps to remove the buffer solenoid(SL1).

1. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1422 Remove two screws

2206 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1423 Remove two screws

3. Remove top jam cover assembly (Callout 1)

Figure 5-1424 Remove top jam cover assembly

Remove the buffer solenoid(SL1) 2207

 4. At the rear of the finisher, remove two screws(Callout 1)

Figure 5-1425 Remove two screws

5. Disconnect the connector(Callout 1) and remove the buffer solenoid(Callout 2)

Figure 5-1426 Remove the buffer solenoid

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2208 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet maker

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Booklet maker 2209

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-143 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00905A Booklet maker

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2210 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1427 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1428 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2211

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1429 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1430 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2212 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1431 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1432 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2213

 1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1433 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1434 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

2214 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1435 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1436 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2215

 5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1437 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1438 Remove one screw

2216 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1439 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1440 Position the hooks

Remove the booklet maker 2217

 9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1441 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1442 Align arrows

2218 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1443 Extend the right rail

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2219

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance motor (M15)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-144 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01152A Booklet entrance motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2220 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1444 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet entrance motor (M15)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance motor (M15).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove two screws (callout 2). Lift the motor away
from the booklet maker and release the belt (callout 3) from the back of the motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the booklet front cover 2221

 Figure 5-1445 Remove the booklet entrance motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2222 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet entrance sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-145 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet entrance sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Booklet entrance sensor (S36) 2223

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1446 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2224 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1447 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1448 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2225

 Figure 5-1449 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1450 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2226 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1451 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1452 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2227

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1453 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1454 Release the metal bracket

2228 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1455 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1456 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2229

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1457 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1458 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

2230 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1459 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1460 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2231

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1461 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1462 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

2232 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1463 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1464 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2233

 3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1465 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1466 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

2234 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1467 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36).

1. Entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1468 Entrance unit

Remove the booklet entrance sensor (S36) 2235

 2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1469 Unplug one connector

3. Use a tweezer to remove the entrance sensor (S36, callout1)

Figure 5-1470 Remove the entrance sensor

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2236 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle motor (M19)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

Booklet paddle unit 2237

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-146 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Booklet paddle motor

JC90-01430A Booklet paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2238 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1471 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1472 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19) 2239

 2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1473 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2240 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet paddle home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-147 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

Removal and replacement: Booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 2241

 1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1474 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1475 Remove six screws

2242 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1476 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1477 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2243

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1478 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1479 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

2244 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1480 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1481 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2245

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1482 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1483 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the booklet paddle motor (M19)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle motor (M19).

2246 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1484 Remove two screws

2. Remove the booklelt paddle motor (M19, callout1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1485 Remove the booklelt paddle motor and unplug one connector

7. Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41).

Remove the booklet paddle home sensor (S41) 2247

 1. Remove one e-clip on top of the white washer and then remove the white washer(callout 1)

Figure 5-1486 Remove white washer

2. Remove two belts (callout 1)

Figure 5-1487 Remove two belts

3. Remove the black actuator (callout 1)

Figure 5-1488 Remove the black actuator

2248 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1489 Unplug one connector

5. Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor (S41, callout 1) from the left side

Figure 5-1490 Use a tweezer to remove the Booklet paddle home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2249

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet end fence unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence unit

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2250 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-148 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01432A Booklet end fence unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2251

 Figure 5-1491 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1492 Remove six screws

2252 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1493 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1494 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2253

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1495 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1496 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

2254 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1497 Remove five screws and the cover

5. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1498 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2255

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1499 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1500 Remove the right lower shield

6. Remove the fold stopper unit

Follow these steps to remove the fold stopper unit.

2256 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. On the left side of the booklet maker, remove two screws through access openings in the jam
access cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1501 Remove two screws

2. Raise the jam access cover.

Figure 5-1502 Raise the jam access cover

Remove the fold stopper unit 2257

 3. Raise the booklet width guide.

Figure 5-1503 Raise the booklet width guide.

4. On the right side of the booklet maker, open two retainers (callout 1), and then disconnect three
connectors (callout 2).

Figure 5-1504 Disconnect three connectors

2258 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1505 Remove two screws

6. Release the tab (callout 1) on the guide arm, and then slide the guide off of the shaft (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1506 Release the guide arm

Remove the fold stopper unit 2259

 7. Lower the width guide to the lowest position.

Figure 5-1507 Lower the width guide

8. On the right side of the booklet maker, remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1508 Remove one screw

2260 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. Lift the right lower corner (callout 1) to clear the cable guide, and then slide the assembly to the
right (callout 2) to remove it.

Figure 5-1509 Remove the fold stopper unit

10. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse theremoval steps to finishinstalling theassembly.

Special installation instructions: Fold stopper unit

Loosen the two alignment screws (callout 1) and move the fold unit side to side to until the alignment
gauge is positioned on the center line. Tighten the screws and run a folded job through the finisher
and verify that the fold is correct. If the fold is not correct, loosen the screws, adjust the alignment,
and run another fold job. Continue this process until the fold is correct.

Figure 5-1510 Adjust the alignment gauge

Remove the fold stopper unit 2261

 7. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: End fence motor (M3)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2262 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-149 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet end fence motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2263

 Figure 5-1511 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1512 Remove two screws

2264 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1513 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1514 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet end fence motor (M20).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet end
fence motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the booklet end fence motor (M20) 2265

 Figure 5-1515 Remove the booklet end fence motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2266 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet end fence home sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-150 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet end fence home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Booklet end fence home sensor (S42) 2267
 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1516 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2268 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1517 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1518 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2269

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1519 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42)

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42).

1. Unplug one connector(callout 1) at the left of the booklet make

Figure 5-1520 Unplug one connector

2270 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor (S42, callout 1) at the right of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1521 Remove the Booklet end fence home sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2271

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet presser unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-151 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07237A Booklet presser

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2272 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1522 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2273

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1523 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1524 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2274 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1525 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1526 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2275

 Figure 5-1527 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1528 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2276 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1529 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1530 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2277

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1531 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1532 Slide the right rail

2278 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1533 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1534 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2279

 Figure 5-1535 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1536 Align arrows

2280 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1537 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1538 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet entrance unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet entrance unit.

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2281

 1. Remove two screws(callout 1) then remove the black cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1539 Remove two screws then remove the black cover

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and disconnect one connector(callout 2)

Figure 5-1540 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

2282 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

3. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1541 Remove two screws

4. Remove two screws(callout 1) to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit (callout2)

Figure 5-1542 Remove two screws to make it easy to pull off the booklet entrance unit

Remove the booklet entrance unit 2283

 5. Remove the booklet entrance unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1543 Remove the booklet entrance unit

6. Remove the booklet presser

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser.

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1544 Remove three screws

2284 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Disconnect one connector (callout 1) and remove the motor unit (callout 2)

Figure 5-1545 Disconnect one connector and remove the motor unit

3. Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear (callout 1)

Figure 5-1546 Remove one e-clip on top of the white gear then remove the white gear

Remove the booklet presser 2285

 4. Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush (callout 1)

Figure 5-1547 Remove one e-clip on top of the bush then remove the bush

5. Band (callout2) the booklet presser (callout 1) out to make it easy to pull out (callout 3)

Figure 5-1548 Band the booklet presser out to make it easy to pull out

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2286 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37) 2287

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-152 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet presser home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2288 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1549 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) .

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1550 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet presser home sensor (S37) 2289

 2. Use a tweezer to remove booklet presser home sensor (S37, callout 1)

Figure 5-1551 Remove booklet presser home sensor

3. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1552 Unplug one connector

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2290 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet presser motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet presser motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser motor (M16) 2291

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-153 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet presser motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2292 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1553 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet presser motor (M16)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet presser motor (M16).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
presser motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1554 Remove the booklet presser motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

Remove the booklet presser motor (M16) 2293

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet tamper unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2294 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-154 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01431A Booklet tamper unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2295

 Figure 5-1555 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1556 Remove six screws

2296 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1557 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1558 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2297

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1559 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1560 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2298 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1561 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1562 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2299

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1563 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1564 Remove one screw

2300 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1565 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1566 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2301

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1567 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1568 Position the hooks

2302 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1569 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1570 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2303

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1571 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1572 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2304 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1573 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1574 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2305

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1575 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1576 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2306 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1577 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1578 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2307

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1579 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1580 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1581 Disconnect one connector

2308 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1582 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1583 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2309

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1584 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1585 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1586 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2310 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1587 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1588 Remove two screws

2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1589 Booklet tamper unit

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the booklet tamper unit 2311

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet presser home sensor (S37)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

2312 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-155 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2313

 Figure 5-1590 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1591 Remove six screws

2314 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1592 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1593 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2315

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1594 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1595 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

2316 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1596 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1597 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2317

 3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1598 Release the metal bracket

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1599 Remove one screw

2318 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1600 Slide the right rail

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1601 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet maker 2319

 7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1602 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Figure 5-1603 Position the hooks

2320 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1604 Align arrows

10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1605 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2321

 11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1606 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1607 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

2322 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1608 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1609 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2323

 3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1610 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1611 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2324 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1612 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1613 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2325

 2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1614 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1615 Remove two screws

4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1616 Disconnect one connector

2326 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1617 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1618 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2327

 2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1619 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1620 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1621 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

2328 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1622 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1623 Remove two screws

2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1624 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38).

Remove the booklet tamper unit 2329

 1. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1625 Remove four screws

2. Use a tweezer to remove the booklet tamper home sensor (S38, callout 1)

Figure 5-1626 Remove booklet tamper home sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

2330 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet tamper motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet tamper motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-156 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01155A Booklet tamper motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet tamper motor (M23) 2331

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1627 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2332 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1628 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1629 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2333

 Figure 5-1630 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1631 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2334 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1632 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1633 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2335

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1634 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1635 Release the metal bracket

2336 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1636 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1637 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2337

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1638 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1639 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

2338 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1640 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1641 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2339

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1642 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1643 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2340 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1644 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1645 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2341

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1646 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1647 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

2342 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1648 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1649 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2343

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1650 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1651 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1652 Remove two screws

2344 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1653 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1654 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2345

 1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1655 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1656 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1657 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2346 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1658 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1659 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet tamper unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper unit.

1. Remove two screws and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1660 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet tamper unit 2347

 2. Booklet tamper unit (callout 1)

Figure 5-1661 Booklet tamper unit

11. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper motor (M23).

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1662 Remove two screws and unplug one connector

2348 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove the booklet tamper motor (M23, callout 1)

Figure 5-1663 Remove the booklet tamper motor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2349

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet stapler unit

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet stapler unit.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet stapler unit on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-157 Part information

Part number Part description

JC81-08274B Booklet stapler unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2350 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1664 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2351

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1665 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1666 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2352 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1667 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1668 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2353

 Figure 5-1669 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1670 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2354 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1671 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1672 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2355

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1673 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1674 Slide the right rail

2356 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1675 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1676 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2357

 Figure 5-1677 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1678 Align arrows

2358 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1679 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1680 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2359

 Figure 5-1681 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1682 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2360 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1683 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1684 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2361

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1685 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1686 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet stapler unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet stapler unit.

2362 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1687 Remove two screws

2. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1688 Remove two screws

3. Remove the metal frame (callout 1)

Figure 5-1689 Remove the metal frame

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2363

 4. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to remove the board cover (callout 2)

Figure 5-1690 Remove the board cover

5. Remove four screws (callout 1) and unplug the connector (callout 2) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1691 Remove four screws and unplug the connector

2364 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one screw (callout 1).

Figure 5-1692 Remove one screw

7. Remove the connector cover (callout 1).

Figure 5-1693 Remove the connector cover

8. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1694 Remove one screw

Remove the booklet stapler unit 2365

 9. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1695 Remove one screw

10. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker and pull the metal bracket (callout 2)
out each side.

Figure 5-1696 Remove two screws

11. Remove one screw(callout 1) and remove one screw(callout 2) (Remove two screws each side)

Figure 5-1697 Remove two screws each side

2366 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 12. Remove two screws (callout 1) and remove the black cover (callout 2) and pull the stapler unit
(callout 3) out

Figure 5-1698 Pull the stapler unit

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2367

 Booklet fold unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-158 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01163A Booklet blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

2368 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Post service test
Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1699 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2369

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1700 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1701 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2370 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1702 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1703 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2371

 Figure 5-1704 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1705 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2372 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1706 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1707 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2373

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1708 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1709 Slide the right rail

2374 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1710 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1711 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2375

 Figure 5-1712 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1713 Align arrows

2376 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1714 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1715 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2377

 Figure 5-1716 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1717 Remove two screws

2378 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1718 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1719 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2379

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1720 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1721 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

2380 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1722 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1723 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1724 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2381

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1725 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1726 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

2382 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1727 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1728 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1729 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2383

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1730 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1731 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade.

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) and disconnect one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1732 Remove two screws and disconnect one connector

2384 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove 7 screws (callout 1) and remove the booklet blade (callout 2)

Figure 5-1733 Remove 7 screws and remove the booklet blade

NOTE: Be sure to make the scale when you reassemble with the new blade

11. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2385

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet blade home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-159 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet blade home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

2386 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1734 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2387

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1735 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1736 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2388 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1737 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1738 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2389

 Figure 5-1739 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1740 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2390 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1741 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1742 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2391

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1743 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1744 Slide the right rail

2392 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1745 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1746 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2393

 Figure 5-1747 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1748 Align arrows

2394 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1749 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1750 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2395

 Figure 5-1751 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1752 Remove two screws

2396 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1753 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1754 Remove the right lower shield

7. Remove the booklet maker middle right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker middle right shield.

Remove the booklet maker middle right shield 2397

 1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1755 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1756 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet finisher upper right shield.

2398 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1)

Figure 5-1757 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Remove two screws(callout 1) and one screw(callout 2) at the back of the booklet maker and then
remove the board cover.

Figure 5-1758 Remove the board cover

3. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1759 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet finisher upper right shield 2399

 4. Disconnect one connector at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1760 Disconnect one connector

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1761 Disconnect one connector

9. Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit

Follow these steps to remove the booklet tamper and fold unit.

2400 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1762 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2. Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1763 Remove three screws at the right of the booklet maker

3. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1764 Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet tamper and fold unit 2401

 4. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1765 Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker

5. Disconnect one connector at the right of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1766 Disconnect one connector

10. Remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade home sensor (S45).

■ Disconnect one connector(callout 1) and remove the Booklet blade home sensor (S45, callout 2)

Figure 5-1767 Disconnect one connector and remove the Booklet blade home sensor

2402 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet blade motor (M22)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet blade motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet blade motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2403

 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-160 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01435A Booklet blade motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet blade motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2404 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1768 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet right lower shield

Follow these steps to remove the booklet right lower shield.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1769 Remove two screws

Remove the booklet right lower shield 2405

 2. Remove two screws at the back of the booklet maker (callout 1).

Figure 5-1770 Remove two screws

3. Slide the booklet maker out of the finisher (callout 1), and then rotate the top of the right lower shield
(callout 2) away from the booklet maker to remove it.

Figure 5-1771 Remove the right lower shield

3. Remove the booklet blade motor (M22)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet blade motor (M22).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
blade motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2406 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1772 Remove the booklet blade motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2407

 Removal and replacement: Booklet fold motor (M21)
Learn how to remove and replace the booklet fold motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet fold motor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-161 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01436A Booklet fold motor assembly

JC31-00144A Booklet fold motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

2408 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)
Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1773 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1774 Remove six screws

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2409

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1775 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1776 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2410 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1777 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1778 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet fold motor (M21)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet fold motor (M21).

Remove the booklet fold motor (M21) 2411

 ■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove four screws (callout 2), and then remove the folding
roller motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1779 Remove the booklet fold motor

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2412 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-162 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07366A Booklet c-fold blade

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade 2413

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1780 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2414 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1781 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1782 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2415

 Figure 5-1783 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1784 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2416 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1785 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1786 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2417

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1787 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1788 Release the metal bracket

2418 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1789 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1790 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2419

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1791 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1792 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

2420 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1793 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1794 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2421

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1795 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1796 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2422 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1797 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1798 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2423

 2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1799 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1800 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

2424 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1801 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1802 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade.

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade 2425

 ■ Remove four screws(callout 1) to remove the booklet c-fold blade

Figure 5-1803 Remove four screws to remove the booklet c-fold blade

NOTE:

● Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

● Make sure the metal located on the home position when you reassemble the unit.

You can make it by rotating the gear to the left direction.

TIP: Rotate the white gear (callout 1) to the left direction to make the metal (callout 2) to the home
postion.

2426 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

8. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2427

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade home sensor on
the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com.

Table 5-163 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Booklet c-fold blade home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

2428 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1804 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2429

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1805 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1806 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2430 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1807 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1808 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2431

 Figure 5-1809 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1810 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2432 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1811 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1812 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2433

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1813 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1814 Slide the right rail

2434 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1815 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1816 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2435

 Figure 5-1817 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1818 Align arrows

2436 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1819 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1820 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2437

 Figure 5-1821 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1822 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2438 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1823 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1824 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2439

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1825 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1826 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39).

2440 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1827 Remove three screws at the front of the booklet maker

2. Take motor unit (callout 1) out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1828 Take motor unit out from the booklet maker and unplug one connector

Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39) 2441

 3. Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor (S39, callout 1)

Figure 5-1829 Remove the booklet c-fold blade home sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2442 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet c-fold blade motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-164 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01154A Booklet c-fold blade motor

JC90-01396A Booklet c-fold blade motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2443

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1830 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17).

2444 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Note the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor (callout 1).
These arrows must be aligned in these positions when the motor is reinstalled.

Figure 5-1831 Check arrow alignment

2. Disconnect two connectors (callout 1).

Figure 5-1832 Disconnect two connectors

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2445

 3. Remove four screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1833 Remove four screws (callout 1).

4. Remove one e-clip (callout 1) on top of the white gear. Remove the white gear (callout 2) and release
the belt (callout 3).

Figure 5-1834 Remove one e-clip, gear, and belt

5. Remove the bracket and motor from the booklet maker.

CAUTION: Do not pull on the shaft (callout 1) while removing the bracket and motor. The shaft
might become dislodged at the other end. If the shaft becomes dislodged, remove the booklet
maker PCA shield and PCA bracket to reinstall the shaft.

2446 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1835 Remove the bracket and motor

6. Remove two screws (callout 1), and then remove the C fold motor.

Figure 5-1836 Remove two screws

7. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: C fold motor

Remove the booklet c-fold blade motor (M17) 2447

 a. When installing the motor, install one screw (callout 1) to hold the bracket in place while
installing the gear and belt.

b. Check the position of the alignment arrows on the upper white gear and the lower motor
(callout 1).

2448 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 c. If the arrows are not aligned, slightly pull up on the belt to create some slack around the gear
(callout 1), and then rotate the gear (callout 2) until the arrows align.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2449

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet diverter unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-165 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01398A Booklet diverter

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2450 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1837 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2451

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1838 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1839 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2452 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1840 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1841 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2453

 Figure 5-1842 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1843 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2454 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1844 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1845 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2455

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1846 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1847 Slide the right rail

2456 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1848 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1849 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2457

 Figure 5-1850 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1851 Align arrows

2458 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1852 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1853 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2459

 Figure 5-1854 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1855 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2460 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1856 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1857 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2461

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1858 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1859 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

2462 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).

Figure 5-1860 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.

Figure 5-1861 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet diverter 2463

 3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1862 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1863 Remove two screws

2464 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1864 Remove the white bush

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1865 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator

Remove the booklet diverter 2465

 7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1866 Remove the white bush

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1867 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2466 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter home sensor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter home sensor (S40) 2467

 Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-166 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Booklet diverter home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2468 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1868 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40).

1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1869 Remove three screws

Remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40) 2469

 2. Unplug one connector (callout 1) and remove the booklet diverter home sensor (S40, callout 2)

Figure 5-1870 Remove the booklet diverter home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2470 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18)

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet diverter motor on the
finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-167 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01397A Booklet diverter motor assembly

JC93-01153A Booklet diverter motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

Removal and replacement: Booklet diverter motor (M18) 2471

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1871 Remove five screws and the cover

2. Remove the booklet diverter motor (M18)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter motor (M18).

■ Disconnect one connector (callout 1), remove two screws (callout 2), and then remove the booklet
diverter motor.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2472 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1872 Remove the separate pawl motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2473

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet exit unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet exit sensor (S44)

Learn how to remove and replace the tray booklet exit sensor.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet exit sensor on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-168 Part information

Part number Part description

JC32-00020A Booklet exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

2474 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1873 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

Remove the right upper cover (finisher) 2475

 1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1874 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1875 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2476 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1876 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1877 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the rear cover (finisher) 2477

 Figure 5-1878 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1879 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

2478 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1880 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1881 Release the metal bracket

Remove the booklet maker 2479

 4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1882 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1883 Slide the right rail

2480 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1884 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1885 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

Remove the booklet maker 2481

 Figure 5-1886 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1887 Align arrows

2482 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1888 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1889 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet front cover

Follow these steps to remove the booklet front cover.

■ Slide the booklet maker slightly away from the finisher (callout 1). Remove one screw (callout 2), and
then slide the green knob away from the booklet maker to remove it (callout 3). Remove four screws
(callout 4), and then remove the booklet front cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Remove the booklet front cover 2483

 Figure 5-1890 Remove five screws and the cover

6. Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit

Follow these steps to remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit.

1. Remove two screws(callout 1) at the left of the booklet maker

Figure 5-1891 Remove two screws at the left of the booklet maker

2484 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

2. Remove three screws(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker to remove motor unit(callout 2) to
reach out to the screw.

Figure 5-1892 Remove three screws to remove motor unit to reach out to the screw

3. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the front of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1893 Remove one screw at the front of the booklet maker

Remove the Booklet c-fold blade unit 2485

 4. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1894 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

5. Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1895 Take the booklet c-fold blade unit out from the booklet maker

7. Remove the booklet diverter

Follow these steps to remove the booklet diverter.

2486 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover (callout
2).

Figure 5-1896 Remove two screws at the rear of the booklet maker and remove the PCA cover

2. Remove one screw(callout 1) at the rear of the booklet maker to make it easy to disconnect the
connector.

Figure 5-1897 Remove one screw at the rear of the booklet maker

Remove the booklet diverter 2487

 3. Pull the connector cover (callout 1) and disconnect the one connector (callout 2)

Figure 5-1898 Pull the connector cover and disconnect the one connector

4. Remove two screws(callout 1)

Figure 5-1899 Remove two screws

2488 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

5. Remove the white bush

Figure 5-1900 Remove the white bush

6. Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black actuator and make
sure not to lose the pin(callout 2) when you pull out the black actuator.

Figure 5-1901 Remove one e-clip on top of the black actuator (callout 1) and remove the black
actuator

Remove the booklet diverter 2489

 7. Remove the white bush (callout 1).

Figure 5-1902 Remove the white bush

8. Pull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1903 ull the booklet diverter out from the booklet maker

8. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44)

Follow these steps to remove the booklet exit sensor (S44).

2490 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove three screws (callout 1)

Figure 5-1904 Remove three screws

2. Unplug one connector (callout 1)

Figure 5-1905 Unplug one connector

3. Remove the booklet exit sensor (S44, callout 1)

Figure 5-1906 Remove the booklet exit sensor

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2491

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Booklet output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Booklet output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet output tray.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet output tray on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

2492 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 ○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-169 Part information

Part number Part description

JC61-07253B Booklet output tray

JC63-04978B Booklet output tray cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the booklet output tray

Follow these steps to remove the booklet output tray.

Remove the booklet output tray 2493

 1. Raise the booklet output tray up (callout 1), and then pull it away from the finisher (callout 2) to
remove it.

Figure 5-1907 Remove the booklet output tray

2. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly

Special installation instructions: booklet output tray

Position thetabs (callout 1) on the tray into the slots (callout 2) on the finisher.

Figure 5-1908 Install the booklet output tray

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

2494 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

PCA

Removal and replacement: Main PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the main PCA.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the main PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

PCA 2495
 ○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-170 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02968A Finisher mainPCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

2496 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1909 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1910 Remove six screws

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2497

 2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1911 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1912 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

2498 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1913 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

Figure 5-1914 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the controller PCA

Follow these steps to remove the controller PCA.

Remove the controller PCA 2499

 ■ Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the controller PCA.

TIP: Refer to the figure below for correct positioning and connection of the cables.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1915 Remove the controller PCA

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2500 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA

Learn how to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA.

Introduction
This document provides the procedures to remove and replace the booklet maker PCA on the finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Before performing service

○ Turn the printer power off. A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

○ Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

○ Release the finisher from the printer by pulling out on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Disconnect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Disconnect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
https://parts.hp.com..

Table 5-171 Part information

Part number Part description

JC92-02789B Booklet finisher PCA

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

○ Connect the cable from the finisher to the printer.

○ Connect the cable from the bridge unit to the finisher.

○ Attach the finisher to the printer, and then push in on the release latch inside the finisher door.

○ Connect the printer power cable.

Removal and replacement: Booklet finisher PCA 2501

 ○ Turn the printer power on.

Post service test

Process a job through the finisher and verify that the finisher works correctly.

1. Remove the right upper cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the right upper cover (finisher).

■ Remove one screw cap and three machine screws on the upper edge of the cover (callout 1). Remove
three sheet metal screws (callout 2) on the lower portion of the cover. Rotate the right edge of the
cover away from the finisher, and then slide the cover right to release three tabs (callout 3).

TIP: The lower screws are shorter in length than the upper screws.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Figure 5-1916 Remove the right upper cover

2. Remove the top cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the top cover (finisher).

2502 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove three screw caps and three self-tapping screws at the top of the rear cover (callout 1), and
then remove three machine screws (callout 2) on top of the cover.

Figure 5-1917 Remove six screws

2. Remove three self-tapping screws at the top of the front cover (callout 1), and then remove two
machine screws (callout 2) at the top of the right side.

Figure 5-1918 Remove five screws

3. Lift the cover up slightly. Disconnect one in-line connector (callout 1), and then release one retainer
(callout 2).

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the top cover (finisher) 2503

 Figure 5-1919 Disconnect one connector and release retainer

3. Remove the rear cover (finisher)

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover (finisher).

1. Remove two self-tapping screws (callout 1) on the top of the rear cover, and then remove five screw
caps and five machine screws (callout 2) on the left side of the cover.

Figure 5-1920 Remove seven screws

2. Remove one screw cap and four machine screws (callout 1) Remove the rear cover.

NOTE: Make sure to thread the power cable (callout 2) through the opening in the cover.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly

2504 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1921 Remove the rear cover

4. Remove the booklet maker

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker.

1. Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher.

Figure 5-1922 Slide the booklet maker away from the finisher

Remove the booklet maker 2505

 2. At the Disconnect one connector (callout 1), and then remove one screw (callout 2).

Figure 5-1923 Disconnect one connector and remove one screw

3. Release the metal bracket through the opening in the sheet metal.

Figure 5-1924 Release the metal bracket

2506 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

4. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1), and then release the alignment pin (callout 2) on the right
side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1925 Remove one screw

5. Slide the right rail toward the finisher.

Figure 5-1926 Slide the right rail

Remove the booklet maker 2507

 6. Remove one star-washer screw (callout 1) on the left side of the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1927 Remove one screw

7. Lift the booklet maker up on the left side while squeezing the right rail away from the finisher
slightly to clear the sheet metal. Remove the booklet maker.

Figure 5-1928 Remove the booklet maker

8. Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly. Also use the following special installation
instructions.

NOTE: Continue to reverse the removal steps to finish installing the assembly.

Special installation instructions: booklet maker

When installing the booklet maker, position the hooks on the rail under the slots on the booklet
maker.

2508 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 Figure 5-1929 Position the hooks

9. When installed correctly, the arrow on the front of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1930 Align arrows

Remove the booklet maker 2509

 10. When installed correctly, the arrow on the back of the booklet maker aligns with the arrow on the
finisher rail.

Figure 5-1931 Align arrows

11. Extend the right rail away from the finisher and position it in the booklet maker slot.

Figure 5-1932 Extend the right rail

5. Remove the booklet maker PCA

Follow these steps to remove the booklet maker PCA.

2510 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Remove two screws (callout 1).

Figure 5-1933 Remove two screws

2. Remove one screw (callout 1), and then remove the metal cover.

Figure 5-1934 Remove one screw and the metal cover

3. Disconnect all of the connectors, remove four screws (callout 1), and then remove the booklet
maker PCA.

TIP: Reverse the removal steps to install the assembly.

Remove the booklet maker PCA 2511

 Figure 5-1935 Remove four screws and the PCA

6. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2512 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Refer to Error codes (types and structure) for more details.

Clear paper jams

Learn about clearing paper jams.

Clear paper jams in the Booklet maker

Learn how to clear paper jams in the Booklet maker.

Clear jams in the top output area

Learn how to clear jams in the top output area.

1. Open the top cover.

Problem solving 2513

 2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker paper path

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker paper path.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2514 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 2. Release the lever.

3. Turn the knob.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker booklet output area 2515

 1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

2516 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 3. Turn the knob to advance the jammed paper.

4. Remove the jammed paper/booklet from the output area.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area

Learn how to clear paper jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper-area.

1. Open the booklet maker door.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly-right-upper area 2517

 2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Open the vertical tray by pulling outward on the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-middle-area.

2518 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left middle area 2519
 3. Pull the green tab.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area

Learn how to clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left-lower area.

2520 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the booklet maker door.

2. Pull out the booklet maker assembly until it stops.

3. Open the roller door.

4. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the booklet maker assembly left lower area 2521
 5. Open the clear plastic door at the left bottom.

6. Remove the jammed paper.

Clear jams in the IPTU

Learn how to clear jams in the IPTU.

1. Lift the IPTU cover and clear any jammed paper inside the IPTU.

2. Close the IPTU cover.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF)

Learn how to clear jams in the inner finisher (IF).

2522 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

1. Open the staple cartridge access door.

2. Rotate the lever to the left to release the hooks that secure the inner finisher (they hold the IF in
place).

3. Slide the inner finisher partially out.

Clear jams in the inner finisher (IF) 2523

 4. Release the lever to open the right cover on the inner finisher.

5. Lift the inner finisher jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper inside the rear of the
inner finisher.

6. Close the inner finisher jam access cover.

7. Close the inner finisher right cover.

2524 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

 8. Open the output side jam access cover, and then remove any jammed paper.

9. Close the output side jam access cover.

10. Slide the inner finisher in until it clicks into place.

11. Close the staple cartridge access door.

Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher

Learn how to clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher.

1. Open the top cover.

Clear paper jams in the High-volume finisher 2525

 2. Lift the TF feeder, and then turn the knob while the TF feeder is lifted.

3. Remove any jammed paper.

Finisher system diagram

Learn about the finisher system diagram.

Finisher system consists of the FINISHER PCA, BOOKLET MAKER PCA, SWITCH PCA, and HOLE PUNCH
PCA.

Figure 5-1936 Finisher system diagram

PCA function

● FINISHER PCA

This PCA controls the finisher modules and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

2526 Chapter 5 Stapler/stacker and booklet maker (SSBM)

● SWITCH PCA

This PCA shows the manual stapling condition and accepts the button input for manual staple
operation.

● BOOKLET MAKER PCA

This PCA controls the booklet maker module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

● HOLE PUNCH PCA

This PCA controls the hole punch module and consists of the micro-controller and driver ICs.

Finisher system diagram 2527

 6 Inner finisher

Learn more about the inner finisher.

Product specification and description

Learn about product specifications and descriptions.

Inner finisher view

Learn about the front view and rear view of the inner finisher.

Front & rear view

Figure 6-1 Inner finisher system - front view

Figure 6-2 Inner finisher system - rear view

2528 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-1 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*)

C1 Front cover JC90-01321B (*)

C2 Top cover JC90-01323B (*)

C3 Middle cover JC90-01322B (*)

C4 Punch cover JC90-01343B (*)

C5 Output tray JC90-01337B (*)

C6 PCA cover JC63-04792B (*)

C7 Left cover JC90-01324B (*)

C8 Rear cover JC63-04750B (*)

1 Lock release handle JC66-04233A (*)

2 Main interface harness JC39-02169A (*)

Not shown Exit bin full JC90-01546A (*)

(*) This part is in ordering system.

NOTE: Exit bin full is included in the box

Detailed specifications
Learn about the detailed specifications of the inner finisher.

Table 6-2 General specifications

Item Description

Capacity 550 Sheets (Main 500, Top 50) @ 80gsm

Sensing Paper Jam/Tray Sensing/Stapler/Cover Open

Media Sizes ● Main: 98mm - 320mm x 139.7mm - 457.2mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.5in - 18in)

● Top: 98mm - 320mm x 148.0mm - 430.0mm (3.86in - 12.59in x 5.83in - 16.93in)

Media types Plain/Thick/Heavy weight/Thin/Cotton/Colored/Recycled/Bond/Archive/Pre-Punched/Cardstock/

Glossy/Envelope

Media Weight ● Main: 52-256 gsm (13.9-68.3 lb.)

● Top: 52-325 gsm (13.9-86.7 lb.)

Detailed specifications 2529

 Table 6-2 General specifications (continued)

Item Description

Number of Bin 2 (Main/Top)

Dimension (W X D X H) 458 x 491 x 173 mm (18.0 X 19.3 X 6.8 inch)

Weight Net weight: 15 kg (33 lb.)

Packing weight: 18.39 kg (40.53 lb.)

Tray 1 Finishing 50 Sheets @ 80gsm

Capacity

Tray 1 Finishing Mode Stapling (Left, Right, Dual)/Punch (2/3, 2/4, Swedish)

Tray 2 Finishing 500 Sheets @ 80 gsm

Capacity

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF O O O X F/R1 O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

B5(ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O F/R1 X O

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X O X X X

Monarch Env 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X O X X X

PostCard 4X6 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X O X X X

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X O X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X O X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X O X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X O X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X O X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X O X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X X X

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X 0 X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

2530 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-3 Paper Size Specification (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Output Staple position

mm Inches Direction Main tray Top tray Corner DUAL

52-256 g Offset 52-325 g 45° Flat

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 X

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

Oficio 215.9 x 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O O O X F/R1 O

342.9

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X O X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O F/R1 X O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 12 x 18 SEF O X X X X X

457.2

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF O X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — O X O X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47.2 (W 98-297 ~

L 140-1200)
1 “F/R” means front side and rear side can be supported.

Table 6-4 Punch specifications

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

A5 210 x 148 8.3 x 5.8 LEF 0 X O X O

Statement 216 x 140 8.5 x 5.5 LEF 0 X O X O

Lt 279 x 216 11 x 8.5 LEF O O O O O

A4 297 x 210 8.3 x 11.7 LEF O O O O O

B5 (JIS) 257 x 182 10.1 x 7.2 LEF O O O X O

B5 (ISO) 250 x 176 9.8 x 6.9 LEF O O O X O

Executive 267 x 184 10.5 x 7.3 LEF O O O O O

Detailed specifications 2531

 Table 6-4 Punch specifications (continued)

Name Paper size Orientation Punch

mm Inches Direction NA 2/3 EU 2/4H Swedish

2H 3H 2H 4H 4H

No 9 Env 98 x 225 3.9 x 8.9 SEF X X X X X

Monarch 98.4 x 190.5 3.9 x 7.5 SEF X X X X X

Env

PostCard 101.6 x 152.4 4.0 x 6.0 SEF X X X X X

4X6

A6 105 x 148 4.1 x 5.8 SEF X X X X X

No 10 Env 105 x 241 4.1 x 9.5 SEF X X X X X

DL Env 110 x 220 4.3 x 8.7 SEF X X X X X

C6 Env 114 x 162 4.5 x 6.4 SEF X X X X X

B6 128 x 182 5.0 x 7.2 SEF X X X X X

Statement 140 x 216 5.5 x 8.5 SEF X X X X X

A5 148 x 210 5.8 x 8.3 SEF O X O X O

C5 Env 162 x 229 6.4 x 9.0 SEF X X X X X

B5(ISO) 176 x 250 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

B5(JIS) 182 x 257 6.9 x 9.8 SEF O X O X O

Executive 184 x 267 7.3 x 10.5 SEF O X O X O

16k 195 x 270 7.7 x 10.6 SEF O X O X O

A4 210 x 297 8.3 x 11.7 SEF O X O X O

Legal 216 x 356 8.5 x 14 SEF O X O X O

Letter 216 x 279 8.5 x 11 SEF O X O X O

Folio 216 x 330 8.5 x 13 SEF O X O X O

Oficio 215.9 x 342.9 8.5 x 13.5 SEF O X O X O

C4 229 x 324 9.1 x 12.8 SEF X X X X X

Tabloid 254 x 374 10 x 14.7 SEF O O O X O

B4 257 x 364 10 x 14.3 SEF O O O X O

8K 270 x 390 10.6 x 15.4 SEF O O O O

Ledger 279 x 432 11 x 17 SEF O O O O O

A3 297 x 420 11.7 x 16.5 SEF O O O O O

Tabloid Extra 304.8 x 457.2 12 x 18 SEF X X X X X

SRA3 320 x 450 12.6 x 17.7 SEF X X X X X

Custom W 98-320 ~ W3.9-12.6 ~ — X X X X X

L 140-1200 L 5.5-47

2532 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-5 Media performance

Paper Type Function

Main Tray Top Tray Staple Punch

Plain (71-90 g/m2) O O O O

Thick (91-105 g/m2) O O O O

Heavy weight (106-175 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 1 (176-216 g/m²) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 2 (217-256 g/m2) O O O O

Extra Heavy weight 3 (257-300 g/m2) X O X X

Extra Heavy weight 4 (301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin (60-70 g/m2) O O O O

Cotton (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Colored (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Pre-Printed (75-90 g/m2) O O O O

Recycled (60-90 g/m2) O O O O

Bond O O O O

Archive (75-105 g/m2) O O O O

LetterHead O O O O

Pre-Punched O O O X

Thin Cardstock (105-163 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Cardstock (170-216 g/m2) O O O X

Heavy Cardstock (217-256 g/m2) O O O X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 1(257-300 g/m²) X O X X

Extra Heavy Cardstock 2(301-325 g/m2) X O X X

Thin Glossy (106-169 g/m2) O O O O

Thick Glossy (170-216 g/m²) O O O X

Heavy Glossy (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Envelope (75-90 g/m2) X O X X

Thick Envelope (217-256 g/m2) O X X X

Tab O X X O

Inner finisher system

Learn about the inner finisher system.

Inner finisher system 2533

 Overview
Learn about the overview of the inner finisher.

Work flow
Figure 6-3 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Table 6-6 Inner finisher system - work flow overview

Item Unit Description

1 Punch unit holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper

2 Entrance unit allows paper to move into the finisher

3 Diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can stay out for seconds while the
stapled bundle of paper moves to the output tray

4 Exit unit moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit

5 Paper support unit prevents paper from being fallen down or bent when the long length paper such as
A3 is ejected from the exit unit

6 Main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle

7 Sub paddle unit moves paper to the end fence

8 End fence unit sets the standard position of the paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the
paper

9 Tamper unit aligns the paper on the right and left side of the paper

10 Stapler unit performs stapling to a bundle of aligned documents

11 Ejector 1 unit transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit

12 Ejector 2 unit grips a stack of paper up and ejects it onto the output tray

13 Output tray unit stacks the job ended paper

14 Paper holding unit controls the output tray movement

2534 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Sensor
Figure 6-4 Inner finisher system - sensor

Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S1 Entrance 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Photo emitter, Checks paper comes into the
sensor detector entrance unit

S2 Stapler position 0604-001393 113-0491 Photo Makes the stapler be positioned in

sensor interrupter the exact stapling position
113-0492

S3 Front cover JC39-01610A 113-0410 Cover open Checks whether the front cover is
switch switch closed or opened

S4 Main paddle 0604-001393 113-0370 Photo Checks the main paddle locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S5 Front tamper 0604-001393 113-0390 Photo Checks the front tamper locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S6 Output tray 0604-001393 113-0473 Photo Checks the output tray motor is
motor sensor interrupter operational

S7 Output tray JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Lower limit Checks the lower limit (=Output
lower limit switch tray is full) of the output tray
switch assembly

S8 Output tray top 0603-001309 (*) 113-0471 Photo TR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(receiver)

S9 Paper holding 0604-001393 113-0470 Photo Checks the location of the paper
sensor interrupter holding actuator

S10 Ejector 2 home 0604-001393 113-0462 Photo Checks the ejector 2 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position.

Overview 2535
 Table 6-7 Inner finisher system - sensor (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

S11 Ejector 2 motor 0604-001393 113-0463 Photo Checks the ejector 2 motor is
sensor interrupter operational

S12 Paper support 0604-001393 113-0481 Photo Checks the paper support locates
home sensor interrupter at the home position

S13 Output tray top 0601-003440 113-0471 LED IR Checks the upper limit of output
of stack sensor tray
(led)

S14 Rear tamper 0604-001393 113-0380 Photo Checks the rear tamper locates at
home sensor interrupter the home position

S15 Top cover JC39-01610A (*) 113-0420 Cover open Checks whether the top cover is
switch switch closed or opened

S16 Ejector 1 home 0604-001393 113-0461 Photo Checks the ejector 1 locates at the
sensor interrupter home position

S17 End fence 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Photo emitter, Check paper comes into the end
sensor detector fence unit

S18 Punch waste 0604-001393 113-0620 Photo Detects the punch waste box is
box sensor interrupter installed

S19 Punch waste 0604-001381 (*) 113-0621 Photo emitter, Checks the punch waste box is full
full sensor detector

S2 Finisher 0604-001393 113-0000 Photo Checks the finisher is installed

0 docking sensor interrupter

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Photo Checks paper comes into the exit
interrupter unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-5 Inner finisher system - Photo interrupter (0604-001393)

2536 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-6 Inner finisher system - Photo emitter, detector (0604-001381)

Motor and solenoid

Figure 6-7 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor

M1 Stapler JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Step motor Drives the stapler unit
position
motor

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Step motor Drives the exit roller and the
sub paddle unit

M3 Main paddle JC93-01001A (*) 113-0510 Step motor Home Drives the main paddle unit
motor
assembly

M4 Output tray JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 DC Motor Encoder Drives the output tray unit
motor
assembly

Overview 2537
 Table 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor, solenoid (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostic Type Motor Description

s sensor

M5 Rear tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Step motor Home Drives the rear tamper unit
motor
assembly

M6 Ejector2 JC93-01168A 113-0562 DC Motor Home, Drives the ejector 2 unit

motor encoder
assembly

M7 Ejector1 JC93-00998A 113-0561 Step Motor Home Drives the ejector 1 unit
motor
assembly

M8 Paper JC93-00802B 113-0571 Step Motor Home Drives paper support unit
support
motor
assembly

M9 Front tamper JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Step Motor Home Drives the front tamper unit
motor
assembly

M10 Entrance JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Step Motor Drives the entrance roller and
motor the middle roller
assembly

SL1 Paper holding JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Solenoid Drives paper holding unit
solenoid
(*) This part is in ordering system.

The sensor mounted at the driving motor detects motor operation. If a motor doesn’t work properly, an
event code only for the motor will pop up.

Figure 6-8 Inner finisher system - motor sensor

The home position sensor is installed for the purpose of checking the reference point when the specific
unit is operating.

2538 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-9 Inner finisher system - home sensor

Roller
Figure 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

Overview 2539
 Table 6-9 Inner finisher system - roller (continued)

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Roller Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

PCA
Figure 6-11 Inner finisher system - PCA

Table 6-10 Inner finisher system - roller

No Name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Type Description

1 Main PCA JC92-02774B (*)

2 Rear joint PCA JC92-02780A (*) Joint PCA between main PCA
and several parts punch, stapler,
entrance, and front door
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Punch unit (optional)

Learn about the punch unit of the inner finisher.

The punch unit is a device that punches holes in a specific location on a sheet of paper. The punch unit is
located immediately before the entrance unit and punches holes onto a paper.

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/3 Punch : Y1G02-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Hole2/4 Punch : Y1G03-67901

● HP LaserJet Inner Finisher Swedish Punch : Y1G04-67901

NOTE: Puncher types vary depending on the country/region.

2540 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

In case of 2/3 hole punch, the 5 hole-punches are mounted in the punch unit. As the punch motor rotates
clockwise, the inner gear moves to the right and the 3 hole-punches are moved downward to make holes.
When making 2 holes, the motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction and the inner gear rotates to
the left to drill two holes. The travel distance and position of the motor are detected and controlled by the
hole punch home sensor and the hole punch motor sensor.

Figure 6-12 Inner finisher system - punched hole location and pair

For more information, go to the HP WISE support portal and search for HP LaserJet Managed MFP - How
to use the hole punch (c05450959).
Figure 6-13 Inner finisher system - punch unit overview

Punch unit (optional) 2541

 Figure 6-14 Inner finisher system - punch unit detail view

Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

- Hole 2/3 Punch Y1G02-67901 (*) Punch unit assembly for hole
2/3
Hole 2/4 Punch Y1G03-67901
Punch unit assembly for hole
Swedish Punch Y1G04-67901 2/4

Punch cover JC90-01343B Punch unit assembly for

Swedish

Punch cover (for the finisher

punch is not installed)

1 Punch motor - 113-0610 Drives the entrance roller

connected by a belt

2 Punch motor sensor - 113-0600 Detects punch motor operation

3 Punch home sensor - 113-0612 Detects punchers’ home

position

Not Punch PBA 2-4 hole SS465-67001 (*)

show
n

Not Punch PBA 2-3 hole SS467-67001 (*)

show
n

2542 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-11 Inner finisher system - punch unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Not Punch PBA Swedish SS466-67001 (*)

show
n
(*) This part is in system.

Figure 6-15 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (3 holes)

Figure 6-16 Inner finisher system - punch unit operation (2 holes)

Entrance unit
Learn about the entrance unit of the inner finisher.

The entrance unit is located right after the punch unit. This unit is driven by entrance motor which is
installed on the rear of the finisher. This motor is connected to the entrance roller by a belt, which
transfers driving force to move paper from the printer to the finisher inside. If an error such as paper
jam occurs in the entrance unit, the entrance sensor detects the error and generates an event code
(13.60.xx).

Entrance unit 2543

 Figure 6-17 Inner finisher system - entrance unit overview

Figure 6-18 Inner finisher system - entrance unit detail view

Table 6-12 Inner finisher system - entrance unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S1 Entrance sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0350 Detects paper if it comes into

the entrance unit

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-0501 Drives the entrance roller
assembly connected by a belt

- Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R1 Entrance roller JC66-04243A (*) Moves paper forward

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit
Learn about the diverter unit of the inner finisher.

The diverter unit holds paper so that the newly printed paper can wait for a few seconds until the stapled
bundle moves to the output tray. The diverter unit is used to change paper path, which is done by a
spring mounted on the diverter unit. When paper exit from the unit, it goes through the upper path of
the diverter. When the paper rolls back, it passes the lower paper path created by the diverter. Here, the
paper sits for a while until the next paper is ready to come out together.

2544 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-19 Inner finisher system - diverter unit overview

Figure 6-20 Inner finisher system - diverter unit detail view

Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M10 Entrance motor JC90-01344A (*) 113-501 Drives the feed roller connected
assembly by a belt

Entrance motor JC31-00169B (*)

R2 Middle roller JC66-04243A (*) Drives paper forward installed

in front of the diverter

1 Diverter JC61-06392A Changes paper path when

paper goes backward

Diverter unit 2545

 Table 6-13 Inner finisher system - diverter unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

2 Diverter spring JC61-07269A Pulls the diverter to upward so

that it makes paper path to the
lower of the diverter
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Diverter unit operation

1. Paper goes forward to the output tray.

2. Exit roller stops after paper passes by the diverter unit.

3. Paper goes backward under the diverter unit.

2546 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Exit unit
Learn about the exit unit of the inner finisher.

The exit unit is the part that moves paper from the diverter unit to the ejector unit. The exit unit
is powered by an exit motor installed on the front of the finisher. The motor and the exit roller are
connected by a single belt. The exit motor rotates in both the forward and reverse directions, since it
serves to return paper to a new paper path created by the diverter unit. The exit sensor is installed right
in front of exit roller. It generates an event code when a paper jam occurred.

Figure 6-21 Inner finisher system - exit unit overview

Exit unit 2547

 Figure 6-22 Inner finisher system - exit unit detail view

Table 6-14 Inner finisher system - exit unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear compile guide JC61-07450A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

2 Front compile guide JC61-07449A (*) Guides to help paper move

through the paper path

3 Exit sensor actuator JC66-04199A (*) 113-0360 Makes the sensor on and off by
checking paper

S21 Exit sensor 0604-001415 (*) 113-0360 Detects paper if it passes

through the exit unit

M2 Exit motor assembly JC90-01331A 113-0502 Drives the exit roller connected
by a belt

Exit motor JC31-00169B (*)

R3 Exit roller JC66-04244A (*) Moves paper to the ejector unit

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Exit unit operation

1. When rotating the exit motor counter clockwise, paper goes forward to the output tray.

2548 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. When rotating the exit motor clockwise, paper goes backward to the end fence unit.

Paper support unit

Learn about the paper support unit of the inner finisher.

Paper support unit works to prevent the paper from falling out or being folded. Also, the newly printed
paper will not scatter papers already sitting on the output tray. Paper guides are installed on each front
and rear side of the finisher, these guides move towards the output tray when the paper exits, then the
guides return to the original position after the support operation is completed. The paper support home
sensor confirms the original position of the guide.

Paper support unit 2549

 Figure 6-23 Inner finisher system - paper support unit overview

Figure 6-24 Inner finisher system - paper support unit detail view

Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Rear paper support JC90-01311A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended

2 Front paper support JC90-01310A (*) Supports paper not to be

bended

S12 Paper support home 0604-001393 113-0481 Detects the paper support
sensor guides locate at the home
position

M8 Paper support motor JC93-00802B 113-0571 Drives paper support guides

assembly from the home position to the
forward direction

2550 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Table 6-15 Inner finisher system - paper support unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

Paper support motor JC31-00149A

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paper support unit operation

Paper support unit is extended to the arrow direction to help paper is bent of fallen to the output tray.

Figure 6-25 Inner finisher system - paper support unit operation

Paddle unit
Learn about the paddle unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit consists of two paddle systems, a main paddle and a sub paddle. First, when paper is
discharged from the exit unit, the main paddle unit moves paper to the sub paddle. Then the sub paddle
unit moves paper to the end fence unit so that it can be ready to be stapled.

The main paddle unit is operated by the main paddle motor. The main paddle sensor detects the main
paddle position. The sub paddle unit rotates by the exit motor.

Paddle unit 2551

 Figure 6-26 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (main paddle unit)

Figure 6-27 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system overview (sub paddle unit)

Figure 6-28 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (1/2)

2552 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-29 Inner finisher system - paddle unit driving system detail view (2/2)

Table 6-16 Inner finisher system - paddle unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Main paddle JC90-01327A (*) Moves paper to the sub paddle

unit

1-a Main paddle kit JC82-01038A (*)

1-b Main paddle A JC63-04957A (*)

1-c Main paddle B JC63-04958A (*)

1-d Main paddle holder JC81-07560A (*)

2 Sub paddle JC90-01336A (*) Gets paper move to the end

fence and arrange them to be
stapled correctly

S4 Main paddle home 0604-001393 113-0370 Detects the home position of

sensor the main paddle

M3 Main paddle motor JC90-01331A (*) 113-0510 Drives the main paddle unit
assembly connected by a belt

Main paddle motor JC31-00149A

M2 Exit motor JC31-00169B (*) 113-0502 Drives the sub paddle unit
connected by a belt
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Paddle unit operation

1. Main paddles get paper moves to the sub paddle unit.

Paddle unit 2553

 2. Sub paddle unit gets paper goes to the end fence unit.

Tamper unit
Learn about the tamper unit of the inner finisher.

The tamper unit functions to align the left and right sides of a bundle of paper in order to staple it to the
correct position. When a certain amount of paper for stapling is collected after printing, the tamper unit
hits the left and right ends of the paper to align the paper correctly.

Each temper has a motor on the back side that delivers driving force to move. The temper unit sensors
are mounted on the back side of the unit, to check the position of the temper unit.

2554 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-30 Inner finisher system - tamper unit overview

Figure 6-31 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-32 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (rear) (2/3)

Tamper unit 2555

 Figure 6-33 Inner finisher system - tamper unit detail view (front) (3/3)

Table 6-17 Inner finisher system - tamper unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Front tamper JC82-00899A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper

2 Rear tamper JC82-00900A (*) Aligns left and right side of

paper

M5 Rear tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0520 Drives the rear temper unit
assembly

Rear tamper motor JC31-00149A

S14 Rear tamper home 0604-001393 113-0380 Detects the reference position
sensor of the tamper unit

M9 Front tamper motor JC93-01001A (*) 113-0530 Drives the front tamper unit
assembly

Front tamper motor JC31-00149A

S5 Front tamper home 0604-001393 113-0390 Detects the reference position

sensor of the tamper unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Tamper unit operation

1. Paper is arranged at the end of the end fence unit.

2556 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. The left and right tampers arrange a stack of paper.

End fence unit

Learn about the end fence unit of the inner finisher.

The paddle unit moves paper to the end fence unit. The end fence unit sets the standard position of the
paper to be aligned towards top and bottom of the paper. The end fence is fixed onto the finisher, and the
end fence sensor can sense any paper entering the end fence unit.

End fence unit 2557

 Figure 6-34 Inner finisher system - end fence unit overview

Figure 6-35 Inner finisher system - end fence unit detail view

Table 6-18 Inner finisher system - end fence unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 End fence JC61-06428A Aligns paper toward top and

bottom direction

2 End fence sensor 0604-001381 (*) 113-0361 Detects paper whether paper
exists in the end fence unit
(*) This part is in ordering system.

End fence unit operation

1. Paper goes into the end fence unit through the main paddle unit and sub paddle unit. At the same
time the end fence unit is aligned paper to the direction of yellow line.

2558 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. The end fence sensor is checking whether paper goes into the end fence sensor.

Stapler unit
Learn about the stapler unit of the inner finisher.

Stapler unit is a device installed inside the finisher that staples a bundle of aligned documents.
Documents are collected as a bundle by the tamper unit and the end fence unit for stapling, then
stapler assembly staples the bundle. There are 6 options to make a bundle.

Figure 6-36 Inner finisher system - stapling options

The stapler unit moves using the stapler motor installed inside. The four stapler position sensors are
mounted so that the stapler can be positioned in the exact stapling position whether it is stapled on
the left, the right, or at the center of the document. Stapling is done by the motor inside the stapler
assembly.

Stapler unit 2559

 Figure 6-37 Inner finisher system - stapler unit overview

Figure 6-38 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-39 Inner finisher system - stapler unit detail view (2/2)

2560 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-19 Inner finisher system - stapler unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Stapler assembly JC59-00040A (*) Staples a bundle of paper

1-a Staple cartridge JC81-07408B (*) Staple cartridge

S2 Stapler position sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0491 Detects and moves the staple
assembly position to make a
113-0492 bundle of paper at the exact
location

M1 Stapler position motor JC93-00999A (*) 113-0581 Gets the staple assembly move
toward top and down direction
of paper
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Stapler unit operation

1. The stapler position motor delivers the stapler assembly to the horizontal direction (yellow line).

2. The stapler assembly checks front and rear home position and moves where the stapler position
sensors are located depending on stapling types.

Stapler unit 2561

 Ejector unit
Learn about the ejector unit of the inner finisher.

The ejector unit moves a bundle of stapled paper out. The ejector unit consists of ejector1 and ejector2.
The Ejector1 transfers a stapled paper loaded at the end fence unit to the ejector2 unit. During this
process, the ejector1 motor transmits the driving force to the ejector1 unit. And the ejector1 home
position sensor controls the movement of the ejector1. When the paper arrives at the ejector2 unit, the
ejector2 grabs a stack of paper and ejects it onto the output tray. The ejector2 motor is responsible for
this process, and the ejector2 motor sensor helps it to be controlled correctly. In addition, the ejector2
home position sensor is mounted to check the location of the ejector2.

Figure 6-40 Inner finisher system - ejector unit overview

2562 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Figure 6-41 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (1/3)

Figure 6-42 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (2/3)

Figure 6-43 Inner finisher system - ejector unit detail view (3/3)

Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

NA Ejector SS456-61001 (*)

1 Ejector2 Not applicable Moves paper from the ejector 1

to the output tray

2 Ejector1 Not applicable Moves the stack of paper from

the end fence to the ejector2

S10 Ejector2 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0462 Detects the home position of
the ejector2

Ejector unit 2563

 Table 6-20 Inner finisher system - ejector unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

S16 Ejector1 home sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0461 Detects the home position of
the ejector1

3 Ejector motor JC90-01309A Moves the ejector1 and ejector2

assembly

M6 Ejector2 motor JC93-01168A (*) 113-0562 Moves the ejector2 forward and
assembly backward

Ejector2 motor JC31-00175A Detects the ejector2 motor

rotation

S11 Ejector2 motor sensor 0604-001393 (*) 113-0463

M7 Ejector1 motor JC93-00998A (*) 113-0561 Grabs a stack of paper, then

assembly move it to the output tray

Ejector1 motor JC31-00009C

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Ejector unit operation

1. Ejector 1 pushes aligned paper at the end fence unit to ejector 2 unit.

2. Ejector 2 grabs paper, then moves forward to the output tray unit direction.

2564 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Ejector2 draws off paper on the output tray.

Output tray & paper holding unit

Learn about the output tray & paper holding unit of the inner finisher.

The output tray moves up and down along the rails inside the finisher, and the output tray motor controls
those movement according to the signals sent from the paper holding sensor. As paper stacks up on
the output tray, the paper holding unit is lifted by papers. When the paper holding sensor is touched, the
output tray moves downward.

The machine detects when the output tray is full as the output tray hits the lower limit switch. The output
tray top of stack sensor is mounted on both left and right sides for the case that the paper holding
sensor breaks down.

Output tray & paper holding unit 2565

 The paper holding solenoid lifts the paper holding actuator up when a new bundle of paper come to the
output tray.

Figure 6-44 Inner finisher system - output tray unit overview

Figure 6-45 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (1/2)

Figure 6-46 Inner finisher system - output tray unit detail view (2/2)

Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Output tray JC90-01337B (*) Stacking plate for ejected paper

2566 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-21 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information (continued)

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

M4 Output tray motor JC90-01334B (*) 113-0570 Moves the output tray up and
assembly down

Output tray motor JC31-00178B (*)

S6 Output tray motor 0604-001393 113-0473 Detects if the output tray motor
sensor is operational

2 Output tray frame JC90-01319A (*)

S7 Output tray lower limit JC90-01320A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
switch the output tray

3 Output tray lower JC66-04200A (*) 113-0472 Detects the lowest position of
actuator the output tray

4 Output tray top of JC82-01039A (*) 113-0471 Detects abnormal movement of

stack sensor kit output tray (Output tray top of
stack sensor receiver + led)

S8 Output tray top of 0603-001309 (*)

stack sensor (receiver)

S13 Output tray top of 0601-003440

stack sensor (led)
(*) This part is in ordering system.

Figure 6-47 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit overview

Output tray & paper holding unit 2567

 Figure 6-48 Inner finisher system - paper holding unit detail view

Table 6-22 Inner finisher system - output tray unit parts information

Item Part name Part number Orderable(*) Diagnostics Description

1 Paper holding actuator JC90-01313A (*) Controls the output tray height,
and grabs stacked paper not to
be scattered

2 Paper holding kit JC90-01314A (*) Paper holding solenoid + Paper

holding sensor

SL1 Paper holding solenoid JC33-00037A (*) 113-0591 Moves paper holding actuator
up when paper goes out to the
output tray

S9 Paper holding sensor 0604-001393 113-0470 Detects stacked paper position

(*) This part is in ordering system.

Inner finisher system - output tray & paper holding unit operation
1. Paper holding unit helps paper stores stable on the output tray. Besides it detects amount of
stacked paper and get the output tray moves downward.

2568 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. When paper goes out to the output tray, paper holding solenoid forcibly make paper holding
actuator goes upward to create the paper passage not to be jammed by the paper holding actuator.

3. As the paper accumulates, output tray moves downward. When it reaches at the end of the moving
range, output tray lower limit switch is pressed. The switch detects paper stacks full on the output
tray.

4. In case of fatal error in the output tray unit and paper holding unit, output tray top of stack sensor
makes the machine emergency stop so that output tray unit does not move upward.

Output tray & paper holding unit 2569

 PCA connection information
Learn about the PCA connection information.

Figure 6-49 Inner finisher system - PCA connection information

2570 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN1 Rear sensor ● Punch waste box

sensor (113-0620)

● Finisher docking
sensor (113-0000)

● Entrance sensor
(113-0350)

CN2 Rear ● Rear tamper motor ● Rear tamper home ● Top cover switch
(113-0520) sensor (113-0380) (113-0420)

● Paper support motor ● Output tray top

(113-0571) of stack sensor
(113-0471)

● Exit sensor
(113-0360)

● End fence sensor

(113-0361)

● Paper support home

sensor (113-0481)

CN3 Rear joint ● Stapler motor ● Stapler low ● Front cover switch
(113-0550) sensor(113-0440) (113-0420)

● Stapler position ● Stapler ready sensor

motor (113-0581) (113-0451)

● Entrance motor ● Stapler home

(113-0501) sensor(113-0430)

● Punch motor ● Stapler position

(113-0610) sensor (front home)
(113-0491)

● Stapler position
sensor (rear home)
(113-0492)

● Punch waste full

sensor (113-0621)

● Punch motor
sensor(113-0600)

● Punch home sensor

(113-0612)

CN4 Ejector ● Ejector2 motor ● Ejector2 motor

(113-0562) sensor (113-0463)

● Ejector1 motor ● Ejector2 home

(113-0561) sensor (113-0462)

● Ejector1 home
sensor (113-0461)

CN5 Main (to the main PBA)

PCA connection information 2571

 Table 6-23 Inner finisher system - PCA connectors, parts, and diagnostics information (continued)

CN No. Connector name Motor Sensor Switch & Solenoid

(Diagnostics) (Diagnostics) (Diagnostics)

CN6 Output tray lower limit ● Output tray lower

switch limit switch (113-0472)

CN7 Front ● Exit motor (113-0502) ● Output tray motor

sensor (113-0473)
● Main paddle motor
(113-0510) ● Main paddle home
sensor (113-0370)
● Output tray motor
(113-0570) ● Front tamper home
sensor (113-0390)
● Front tamper motor
(113-0530) ● Paper holding
sensor (113-0470)

● Output tray top

of stack sensor
(113-0471)

CN9 Paper holding solenoid ● Paper holding

solenoid (113-0591)

CN10 Stapler position sensor ● Stapler position

sensor (mid front) (-)

● Stapler position
sensor (mid rear) (-)

Service approach
Learn about the service approach of the inner finisher.

CAUTION: When working on the product, do not pick up the unit by the output tray, which will detach
under the weight of the product.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when replacing parts

Learn about precautions when replacing parts.

Precautions when assembling and disassembling

● Use only HP approved replacement parts. Make sure that the part number, product name, voltage,
and current or temperature ratings are correct. Failure to do so might result in damage to the
machine, circuit overload, fire, or electric shock.

● Do not make unauthorized changes or additions to the printer. Unauthorized changes might cause
the printer to malfunction and create electric shock or fire hazards.

● Use caution when dismantling the unit. Take note of the location of each screw or other part. This
printer contains different kinds of screws. Using the wrong screw might lead to system failure, short
circuit or electric shock.

2572 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Do not disassemble the laser scanner assembly. Once the laser scanner assembly is
disassembled, dust might enter the mirror chamber and will seriously degrade print quality. There
are no serviceable parts inside the laser scanner assembly.

● Regularly check the condition of the power cable, plug and socket. Bad contacts might lead to
overheating and fire. Damaged cables might lead to electric shock or unit malfunction.

Precautions when handling PCAs

Static electricity might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches might easily break. Be careful when
releasing them. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is
latched.

Precautions when handling PCA

Static electric might damage a PCA. Use approved, anti-static precautions when handling or storing a
PCA. Service personnel should use grounded ESD straps and/or mats when handling PCAs.

● Precautions when moving and storing a PCA

– Keep PCA in a conductive case, anti-static bag, or wrapped in aluminum foil.

– Do not store a PCA where it is exposed to direct sunlight.

Precautions when handling PCA 2573

 ● Precautions when replacing a PCA

– Disconnect power cables before disconnecting other cables.

– Do not touch any soldered connections, connector terminals, or other electronic parts when
handling insulated parts.

● Precautions when checking a PCA

– Touch a grounded area of the printer chassis to discharge static electric charge before
touching a PCA.

– Do not touch a PCA with bare hands or metal objects. Doing so might create a short circuit or
cause electric shock. Use caution when handling a PCA with moving parts such as sensors,
motors, or lamps, as they might become very hot.

– Use caution when fitting and removing screws. Watch for hidden screens. Make sure that the
correct screw is used and make sure that when toothed washers are removed, they are refitted
in their original positions.

– Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If
an ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal
chassis before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

Releasing plastic latches

Learn about releasing plastic latches.

Many of the parts are held in place with plastic latches. The latches can break easily; release them
carefully. To remove such parts, press the hook end of the latch away from the part to which it is latched.

Before performing service

Learn what to do before performing service.

● Remove all paper from the product.

● Turn off the power using the power button.

● Unplug the power cable and interface cable or cables.

● Place the product on an ESD workstation or mat, or use an ESD strap (if one is available). If an
ESD workstation, mat, or strap is not available, ground yourself by touching the sheet-metal chassis
before touching an ESD-sensitive part.

2574 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Remove the toner cartridges.

● Remove the Tray 2 cassette.

ESD precautions
Learn the importance of electrostatic discharge.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Look for the ESD reminder
when removing printer parts. Always perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If
an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground
before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly.
Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

After performing service

Learn what to do after performing service.

● Verify that the service performed was successful.

● Verify that the most recent firmware is installed on the printer.

● Verify that all parts are correctly reinstalled and are properly working.

● Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new
issues.

● Verify that the printer is in better condition than when you arrived, cosmetically and electrically.

Post-service test
Perform the following tests to verify that the repair or replacement was successful:

Print-quality test
Learn about the print-quality test.

1. Verify that you have completed the necessary reassembly steps.

2. Make sure that the tray contains clean, unmarked paper.

3. Attach the power cord and interface cable or interface cables, and then turn on the product.

4. Print a configuration page.

5. Print a print quality page, and then verify that there are no lines, streaks, banding, or other print
quality defects.

6. Send a print job from the host computer, and then verify that the output meets expectations.

Order parts by authorized service providers

Find information about ordering parts and supplies for the printer.

Ordering
Order parts by authorized service providers.

ESD precautions 2575

 Table 6-24 Ordering

Item or provider Description

Order supplies and paper www.hp.com/go/suresupply

Order parts from authorized service providers www.hp.com/buy/parts or partsurfer.hp.com

Order through service or support providers Contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.

Order using the HP Embedded Web Server (EWS) To access, in a supported web browser on your
computer, enter the printer IP address or host name
in the address/URL field. The EWS contains a link to
the HP SureSupply web site, which provides options for
purchasing Original HP supplies.

Orderable parts
Not all of the parts shown in the exploded assembly diagrams are orderable parts.

Refer to the tables following the diagrams or the alphabetical/numerical parts lists to determine if a part
is orderable.

Parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

Learn about parts, diagrams, removal and replacement (inner finisher)

NOTE: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always perform service work
at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not available, touch the sheet-
metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-
sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when they are out of the printer.

2576 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Parts and diagrams (inner finisher)
View inner finisher exploded diagrams and parts lists.

Inner finisher (main)

Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main).

Figure 6-50 Inner finisher (main)

6-1

6-2

Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main)

Ref Part number Description Qty

Complete Y1G00-67901 Inner finisher whole unit 1

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

3 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit assembly 1

4 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit assembly 1

Parts and diagrams (inner finisher) 2577

 Table 6-25 Inner finisher (main) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

5 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

6 JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

6-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

6-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

7 JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit 1

8 JC90-01337B Output tray 1

10 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

11 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

13 6102-003354 Slide pack 2

14 JC61-07713A Wavy roller retainer 1

Not shown JC39-02169A Main interface harness 1

2578 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (covers)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (covers)

Figure 6-51 Inner finisher (covers)

Table 6-26 Inner finisher (covers)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01321B Front cover 1

2 JC90-01322B Middle cover 1

3 JC90-01323B Top cover 1

4 JC90-01324B Left cover 1

4-1 JC82-01039A Output tray top of stack sensor kit 1

5 JC63-04750B Rear cover 1

6 JC63-04792B PCA cover 1

7 JC90-01546A Exit bin full 1

Inner finisher (covers) 2579

 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding
unit, and output tray unit).

Figure 6-52 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray
unit)

23-1

23
23-2

8-1

8-2

25 20
15-2
15-1

24

Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor 2

2 JC92-02774B Main PCA 1

4 6602-003644 Entrance motor timing belt 1

5 JC82-01038A Paddle kit 1

5-1 JC63-04957A Paddle A 2

5-2 JC63-04958A Paddle B 2

5-3 JC81-07560A Paddle holder 4

8-1 JC66-04243A Entrance roller 1

8-2 JC66-04243A Middle roller 1

2580 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-27 Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit)
(continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

10 JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly 1

13 JC66-04199A Exit sensor actuator 1

14 JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator 1

15 JC90-01314A Paper holding kit 1

15-1 JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid 1

15-2 0604-001393 Paper holding sensor 1

16 JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch 1

16-3 JC66-04200A Output tray lower limit switch actuator 1

17 JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly 1

17-1 JC31-00149A Main paddle motor 1

19-1 JC66-04244A Exit roller 1

19-2 JC61-07449A Front compile guide 1

19-3 JC61-07450A Rear compile guide 1

20 JC90-01331A Exit motor assembly 1

20-1 JC31-00169B Exit motor 1

21 JC90-01319A Output tray frame 1

22 JC92-02780A Rear joint PCA 1

23 shown JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly 1

23-1 JC31-00178B Output tray motor 1

23-2 0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor 1

24 0604-001415 Exit sensor 1

25 JC61-06391A Middle lower guide 1

Inner finisher (main paddle unit, entrance unit, exit unit, paper holding unit, and output tray unit) 2581
 Inner finisher (paper support unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (paper support unit).

Figure 6-53 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

2-2
2-1

1 2

Table 6-28 Inner finisher (paper support unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC90-01310A Front paper support 1

2 JC90-01311A Rear paper support 1

2-1 0604-001393 Paper support home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-00802B Paper support motor assembly 1

2582 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (tamper unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (tamper unit).

Figure 6-54 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

2 2-1
2-2

1-1

1-2

Table 6-29 Inner finisher (tamper unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC82-00900A Rear tamper unit 1

1-1 0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor 1

1-2 JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly 1

2 JC82-00899A Front tamper unit 1

2-1 0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor 1

2-2 JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly 1

Inner finisher (tamper unit) 2583

 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit).

Figure 6-55 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

7
6

8
2

Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 0604-001381 End fence sensor 1

2 0604-001393 Stapler position sensor 1

3 JC93-00999A Stapler position motor 1

4 0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor 1

5 JC39-01610A Top cover switch 1

6 0604-001393 Finisher docking sensor 1

2584 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Table 6-30 Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) (continued)

Ref Part number Description Qty

7 0604-001393 Punch waste box sensor 1

8 JC39-01610A Compile cover switch 1

Inner finisher (stapler unit, end fence unit) 2585

 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit).

Figure 6-56 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Table 6-31 Inner finisher (stapler assembly, entrance unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 JC59-00040A Stapler assembly 1

1-1 JC81-07408B Staple cartridge 1

2 JC90-01343B Punch cover 1

2-1 0604-001381 Entrance sensor 1

Not shown SS465-67001 Punch PBA 2-4 hole 1

Not shown SS467-67001 Punch PBA 2-3 hole 1

Not shown SS466-67001 Punch PBA Swedish 1

2586 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Inner finisher (ejector unit)
Parts diagram and parts list for the inner finisher (ejector unit).

Figure 6-57 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

5 7
2
6

Table 6-32 Inner finisher (ejector unit)

Ref Part number Description Qty

1 SS456-61001 Ejector 1

2 0604-001393 Ejector2 home sensor 1

3 0604-001393 Ejector1 home sensor 1

4 JC90-01309A Ejector motor assembly 1

5 JC93-01168A Ejector2 motor assembly 1

6 0604-001393 Ejector2 motor sensor 1

7 JC93-00998A Ejector1 motor assembly 1

Covers

Inner finisher (ejector unit) 2587

 Removal and replacement: Front cover (C1)
Learn how to remove and replace the front cover.

To view tear down and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a tear down video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-33 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01321B Front cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2588 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-58 Remove the front cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

Remove the front cover 2589

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear cover (C8)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-34 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04750B Rear cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2590 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-59 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-60 Remove the rear cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Remove the rear cover 2591

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Middle cover (C3)

Learn how to remove and replace the middle cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

2592 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-35 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01322B Middle cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-61 Open the top cover

Remove the rear cover 2593

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-62 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-63 Open the front door and punch cover

2594 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-64 Remove the middle cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2595

 Removal and replacement: Top cover (C2)
Learn how to remove and replace the top cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-36 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01323B Top cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2596 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-65 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-66 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the top cover

Follow these steps to remove the top cover.

Remove the rear cover 2597

 Figure 6-67 Remove the top cover

■ Remove one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the top cover by lifting off the
hinge pins at the front.

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2598 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6)
Learn how to remove and replace the PCA cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-37 Part information

Part number Part description

JC63-04792B PCA cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: PCA cover (C6) 2599

 1. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-68 Remove the PCA cover

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2600 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7)

Learn how to remove and replace the left cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-38 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01324B Left cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Left cover (C7) 2601

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-69 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2602 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-70 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-71 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2603

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-72 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-73 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2604 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-74 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-75 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2605

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2606 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-76 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2607

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-77 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-78 Remove four screws

2608 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-79 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2609

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Entrance unit

Removal and replacement: Entrance sensor (S1)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2610 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-39 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Entrance sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-80 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2611

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-81 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-82 Remove the slide shaft

2612 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-83 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-84 Remove the punch cover

3. Remove the entrance sensor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance sensor.

Remove the entrance sensor 2613

 1. Loosen the adhesive tape around, and then remove four screws. And then remove the punch cover.

Figure 6-85 Remove the punch cover

2. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the entrance sensor bracket.

Figure 6-86 Remove the entrance sensor bracket

2614 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove one screw, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-87 Remove the entrance sensor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Entrance motor (M10)

Learn how to remove and replace the entrance motor.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2615

 To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-40 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01344A Entrance motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

2616 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-88 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-89 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2617

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-90 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-91 Open the front door and punch cover

2618 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-92 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-93 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-94 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2619

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-95 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-96 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2620 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-97 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-98 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

Remove the middle paper guide 2621

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-99 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-100 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the entrance motor

Follow these steps to remove the entrance motor.

2622 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-101 Remove two screws

2. Open the clamps, and then unplug the connector.

Figure 6-102 Unplug the connector

Remove the entrance motor 2623

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-103 Remove the entrance motor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2624 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Exit unit

Removal and replacement: Exit roller (R3)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit roller.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-41 Part information

Part number Part description

JC66-04244A Exit roller

JC61-07449A Front compile guide

JC61-07450A Rear compile guide

Exit unit 2625

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-104 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2626 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-105 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-106 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

Remove the sub paddle unit 2627

 1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-107 Remove one screw

2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-108 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

2628 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-109 Remove the sub paddle unit

4. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-110 Remove the guide

Remove the exit roller 2629

 2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-111 Release the timing belt

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-112 Remove five screws

2630 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-113 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-114 Remove the exit roller

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2631

 1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit sensor (S21)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

2632 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-42 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001415 Exit sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2633

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-115 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-116 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2634 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-117 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-118 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2635

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-119 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-120 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-121 Open the punch cover

2636 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-122 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-123 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2637

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-124 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-125 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2638 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-126 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-127 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit sensor

Follow these steps to remove the exit sensor.

Remove the exit sensor 2639

 ■ Remove the exit sensor from the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-128 Remove the exit sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using

2640 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2)

Learn how to remove and replace the exit motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-43 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00169B Exit motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Exit motor (M2) 2641

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-129 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

2642 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-130 Remove the exit motor bracket

3. Remove the exit motor

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the exit motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-131 Remove the exit motor

4. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the exit motor 2643

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper support unit

Removal and replacement: Front paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the front paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2644 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-44 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01310A Front paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2645

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-132 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-133 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2646 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-134 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-135 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2647

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-136 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-137 Remove the pulley

2648 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-138 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2649

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2650 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-139 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-140 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2651

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-141 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-142 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2652 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2653

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-143 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-144 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2654 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-145 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-146 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2655

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-147 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-148 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2656 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-149 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2657

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-150 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-151 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2658 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-152 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-153 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2659

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-154 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-155 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2660 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-156 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-157 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2661

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-158 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-159 Remove four screws

2662 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-160 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-161 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2663

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-162 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-163 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support

Follow these steps to remove the front paper support.

2664 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove the e-ring and the bushing, and then pull and remove the drive shaft.

Figure 6-164 Remove the drive shaft

TIP: When reassembling the drive shaft, ensure the paper supports are in the full down
position(against the stops).

2. Remove one screw, and then remove the front paper support.

Figure 6-165 Remove the front paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2665

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear paper support

Removal and replacement: Rear paper support

Learn how to remove and replace the rear paper support.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2666 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-45 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2667

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-166 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-167 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2668 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-168 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-169 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2669

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-170 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-171 Remove the pulley

2670 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-172 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2671

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2672 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-173 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-174 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2673

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-175 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-176 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2674 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2675

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-177 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-178 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2676 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-179 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-180 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2677

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-181 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-182 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2678 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-183 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2679

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-184 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-185 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2680 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-186 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-187 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2681

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-188 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-189 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2682 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-190 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-191 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2683

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-192 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-193 Remove four screws

2684 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-194 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-195 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2685

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-196 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-197 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2686 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-198 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-199 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2687

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-200 Remove the rear paper support

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2688 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper support home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-46 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper support home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Paper support home sensor (S12) 2689

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-201 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2690 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-202 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-203 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2691

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-204 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-205 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2692 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-206 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-207 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2693

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2694 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-208 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2695

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-209 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-210 Remove four screws

2696 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-211 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2697

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-212 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-213 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2698 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-214 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-215 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2699

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-216 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-217 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2700 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-218 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2701

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-219 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-220 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2702 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-221 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-222 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2703

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-223 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-224 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2704 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-225 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-226 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2705

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-227 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-228 Remove four screws

2706 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-229 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-230 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2707

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-231 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-232 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the rear paper support

Follow these steps to remove the rear paper support.

2708 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-233 Remove one screw

2. Remove the shaft while pulling the bushing in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-234 Remove the shaft

Remove the rear paper support 2709

 3. Remove the rear paper support with attention for pinion.

Figure 6-235 Remove the rear paper support

17. Remove the paper support home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support home sensor.

■ Remove the sensor from the rear paper support.

Figure 6-236 Remove the paper support home sensor

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2710 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper support motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Paper support motor (M8) 2711

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-47 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00802B (not orderable) Paper support motor assembly

JC31-00149A (not orderable) Paper support motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2712 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-237 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-238 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2713

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-239 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-240 Remove four screws

2714 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-241 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-242 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2715

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-243 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2716 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2717

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-244 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-245 Remove two screws

2718 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-246 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-247 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2719

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2720 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-248 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-249 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2721

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-250 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-251 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2722 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-252 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-253 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2723

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-254 Remove one screw

2724 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-255 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-256 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2725

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-257 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-258 Release the timing belt

2726 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-259 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-260 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2727

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-261 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-262 Remove four screws

2728 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-263 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-264 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2729

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-265 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-266 Disconnect one connector

2730 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-267 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-268 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the paper support motor

Follow these steps to remove the paper support motor.

Remove the paper support motor 2731

 ■ Remove two screws, disconnect one connect, and then remove the paper support motor.

Figure 6-269 Remove the paper support motor

17. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2732 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paddle unit

Removal and replacement: Main paddle

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-48 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A Main paddle

JC82-01038A Main paddle kit

JC63-04957A Main paddle A

JC63-04958A Main paddle B

JC81-07560A Main paddle holder

Paddle unit 2733

 Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-270 Rotate the main paddle shaft

2734 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-271 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.

2. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Unpack the replacement assembly 2735

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle home sensor (S4)

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

2736 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-49 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Main paddle home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2737

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-272 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the main paddle home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor.

1. Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.

Figure 6-273 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

2738 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the main paddle home sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-274 Remove the main paddle home sensor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2739

 Removal and replacement: Main paddle motor (M3)
Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-50 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Main paddle motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2740 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-275 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the main paddle motor

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor.

Remove the front cover 2741

 1. Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-276 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-277 Remove the main paddle motor

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2742 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the main paddle assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Main paddle assembly 2743

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-51 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01327A (not orderable) Main paddle assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2744 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-278 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-279 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2745

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-280 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle home sensor bracket.

■ Remove one screw. Open the clamp and unplug one connector, and then remove the main paddle
home sensor bracket.

Figure 6-281 Remove the main paddle home sensor bracket

4. Remove the main paddle motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle motor bracket.

2746 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove three screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the main paddle motor bracket.

Figure 6-282 Remove the main paddle motor bracket

5. Remove the main paddle

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle.

1. Open the top cover.

2. Rotate the main paddle shaft to see the lower side of the main paddle.

Figure 6-283 Rotate the main paddle shaft

Remove the main paddle 2747

 3. Remove the main paddle by pushing both sides.

Figure 6-284 Remove the main paddle

TIP: When reassembling the main paddle, check the pin position of the paddle and the hole
position of the shaft, and then assemble them.

6. Remove the main paddle assembly

Follow these steps to remove the main paddle assembly.

2748 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the belt in the front.

Figure 6-285 Remove the belt

2. Remove the e-ring and the main paddle CAM in the rear. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-286 Remove the e-ring, cam, and bushing

Remove the main paddle assembly 2749

 3. Push the shaft to remove the main paddle shaft.

Figure 6-287 Remove the main paddle shaft

7. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2750 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit
Learn how to remove and replace the sub paddle unit.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-52 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01336A Sub paddle unit

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Sub paddle unit 2751

 1. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-288 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-289 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the sub paddle unit

Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

2752 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-290 Remove one screw

2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-291 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

Remove the sub paddle unit 2753

 3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-292 Remove the sub paddle unit

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2754 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Tamper unit

Front tamper

Removal and replacement: Front tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-53 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00899A Front tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Tamper unit 2755

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-293 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2756 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-294 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-295 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2757

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-296 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-297 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2758 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-298 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-299 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2759

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2760 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-300 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2761

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-301 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-302 Remove four screws

2762 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-303 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2763

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-304 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-305 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2764 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-306 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-307 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2765

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-308 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-309 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2766 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-310 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2767

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-311 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-312 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2768 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-313 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-314 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2769

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-315 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-316 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2770 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-317 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-318 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2771

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-319 Remove the front tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2772 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5)
Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-54 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Front tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper home sensor (S5) 2773

 1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-320 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-321 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2774 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-322 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-323 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2775

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-324 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-325 Remove the pulley

2776 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-326 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2777

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2778 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-327 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-328 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2779

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-329 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-330 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2780 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2781

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-331 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-332 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2782 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-333 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-334 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2783

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-335 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-336 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2784 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-337 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2785

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-338 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-339 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2786 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-340 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-341 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2787

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-342 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-343 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2788 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-344 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-345 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2789

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-346 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper home sensor.

■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the front tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-347 Remove the front tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2790 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9)

Learn how to remove and replace the front tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Front tamper motor (M9) 2791

 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-55 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Front tamper motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2792 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-348 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-349 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2793

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-350 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-351 Remove four screws

2794 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-352 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-353 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2795

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-354 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2796 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2797

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-355 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-356 Remove two screws

2798 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-357 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-358 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2799

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2800 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-359 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-360 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2801

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-361 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-362 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2802 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-363 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-364 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2803

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-365 Remove one screw

2804 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-366 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-367 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2805

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-368 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-369 Release the timing belt

2806 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-370 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-371 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2807

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-372 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-373 Remove four screws

2808 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-374 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the front tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-375 Remove the front tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the front tamper motor 2809

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Rear tamper

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2810 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-56 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-00900A Rear tamper

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2811

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-376 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-377 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2812 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-378 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-379 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 2813

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-380 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-381 Remove the pulley

2814 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-382 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 2815

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

2816 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-383 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-384 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 2817

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-385 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-386 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

2818 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2819

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-387 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-388 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2820 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-389 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-390 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2821

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-391 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-392 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2822 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-393 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2823

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-394 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-395 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2824 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-396 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-397 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2825

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-398 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-399 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2826 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-400 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-401 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2827

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-402 Remove the rear tamper

14. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2828 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper home sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-57 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Rear tamper home sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper home sensor (S14) 2829

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-403 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2830 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-404 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-405 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2831

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-406 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-407 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2832 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-408 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-409 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2833

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2834 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-410 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2835

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-411 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-412 Remove four screws

2836 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-413 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2837

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-414 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-415 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2838 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-416 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-417 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2839

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-418 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-419 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2840 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-420 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2841

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-421 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-422 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2842 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-423 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-424 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2843

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-425 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-426 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2844 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-427 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-428 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2845

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-429 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper home sensor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper home sensor.

■ Unplug the connector, and then remove the rear tamper home sensor.

Figure 6-430 Remove the rear tamper home sensor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

2846 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5)

Learn how to remove and replace the rear tamper motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

Removal and replacement: Rear tamper motor (M5) 2847

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-58 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-01001A Rear tamper motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2848 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-431 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-432 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2849

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-433 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-434 Remove four screws

2850 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-435 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-436 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2851

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-437 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2852 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2853

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-438 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-439 Remove two screws

2854 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-440 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-441 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2855

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2856 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-442 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-443 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2857

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-444 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-445 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2858 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-446 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-447 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2859

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-448 Remove one screw

2860 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-449 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-450 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2861

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-451 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-452 Release the timing belt

2862 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-453 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-454 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2863

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-455 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-456 Remove four screws

2864 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-457 Remove the rear tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper motor

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the motor.

Figure 6-458 Remove the rear tamper motor

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

Remove the rear tamper motor 2865

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Stapler unit

Removal and replacement: Stapler

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

2866 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-59 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01342A Stapler assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 2867

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-459 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-460 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

2868 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-461 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-462 Remove the exit motor bracket

4. Remove the stapler

Follow these steps to remove the stapler.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2869

 1. Push the stapler from the rear-side to the front-side.

Figure 6-463 Push the stapler

2. Remove one screw, unplug two connectors, and then remove the stapler assembly.

Figure 6-464 Remove the stapler assembly

2870 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove two screws, and then remove the stapler.

Figure 6-465 Remove the stapler

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2871

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position sensor (S2)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-60 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Stapler position sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

2872 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-466 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2873

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-467 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-468 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

2874 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-469 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-470 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-471 Remove the slide shaft

Remove the punch cover 2875

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-472 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-473 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

2876 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-474 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-475 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2877

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-476 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-477 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2878 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-478 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-479 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2879

 1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-480 Remove the bracket

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-481 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-482 Remove two screws

2880 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-483 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

9. Remove the stapler position sensor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position sensor.

1. Remove one screw from the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-484 Remove one screw

Remove the stapler position sensor 2881

 2. Remove one screw from the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-485 Remove one screw

3. Unplug four photo-sensor connectors. Open the six cable clamps.

Figure 6-486 Unplug connectors

4. Remove the assembly, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-487 Remove the stapler position sensor

2882 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

10. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Stapler position motor (M1)

Learn how to remove and replace the stapler position motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Unpack the replacement assembly 2883

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-61 Part information

Part number Part description

JC93-00999A Stapler position motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2884 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-488 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-489 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2885

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-490 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-491 Open the front door and punch cover

2886 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-492 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-493 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-494 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 2887

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-495 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-496 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2888 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-497 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-498 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

Remove the middle paper guide 2889

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-499 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-500 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the stapler position motor

Follow these steps to remove the stapler position motor.

2890 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove three screws, unplug the motor connector, and then remove the stapler position motor
bracket.

Figure 6-501 Remove the stapler position motor bracket

2. Remove two screws, and then remove the motor from the bracket.

Figure 6-502 Remove the stapler position motor

TIP: Use the following steps when reinstalling the stapler position motor.

1. Release the spring tension screw.

Remove the stapler position motor 2891

 2. Apply tension to the spring by pulling the belt, and then tighten the spring tension screw.
Tightening the screw puts maximum slack in the belt.

3. Lower the stapler position motor while placing the belt on the motor pulley, and then secure
the bracket with three screws.

4. Release the spring tension screw to allow the spring to apply tension to the belt, and then
tighten it again

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

2892 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Ejector unit

Removal and replacement: Ejector & paper support assembly

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector & paper support assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Ejector unit 2893

 Table 6-62 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

JC90-01310A Front paper support

JC90-01311A Rear paper support

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-503 Remove the front cover

2894 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-504 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-505 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the rear cover 2895

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-506 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-507 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2896 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-508 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-509 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2897

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2898 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-510 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2899

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-511 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-512 Remove four screws

2900 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-513 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2901

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-514 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-515 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2902 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-516 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-517 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2903

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-518 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-519 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2904 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-520 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2905

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-521 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-522 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2906 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-523 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-524 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2907

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-525 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-526 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2908 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-527 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-528 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2909

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-529 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-530 Remove four screws

2910 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-531 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-532 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2911

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-533 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-534 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2912 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7)

Learn how to remove and replace the ejector motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

Removal and replacement: Ejector motor assembly (S11/ M6/ M7) 2913
 ● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-63 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01309A (not orderable) Ejector motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

2914 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-535 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-536 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 2915

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-537 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-538 Remove four screws

2916 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-539 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-540 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2917

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-541 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2918 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2919

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-542 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-543 Remove two screws

2920 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-544 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-545 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2921

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

2922 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-546 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-547 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 2923

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-548 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-549 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

2924 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-550 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-551 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 2925

 11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-552 Remove one screw

2926 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-553 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-554 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

Remove the exit roller 2927

 1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-555 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-556 Release the timing belt

2928 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-557 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-558 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

Remove the exit roller 2929

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-559 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-560 Remove four screws

2930 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-561 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-562 Remove four screws

Remove the rear tamper 2931

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-563 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-564 Disconnect one connector

2932 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-565 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-566 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support 2933
 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-567 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-568 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

2934 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-569 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.

Figure 6-570 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2935

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-571 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

2936 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16)
Learn how to remove and replace the ejector assembly.

View videos on how to remove and reassemble the inner finisher below:

View a teardown video of the inner finisher .

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher .

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-64 Part information

Part number Part description

SS456-61001 Ejector

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Ejector assembly (include end fence, S10/ S16) 2937
 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-572 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2938 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-573 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-574 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2939

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-575 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-576 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2940 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-577 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-578 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2941

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2942 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-579 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2943

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-580 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-581 Remove four screws

2944 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-582 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2945

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-583 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-584 Remove the output tray motor assembly

2946 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-585 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-586 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 2947

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-587 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-588 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

2948 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-589 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 2949

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-590 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-591 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

2950 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-592 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-593 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 2951

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-594 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-595 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

2952 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-596 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-597 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 2953

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-598 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the rear tamper

Follow these steps to remove the rear tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

NOTE: Move cable guideout of position to access the screws.

Figure 6-599 Remove four screws

2954 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Unplug two connectors and release the hook, and then remove the rear tamper.

Figure 6-600 Remove the rear tamper

15. Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

1. Open one clamp, disconnect one connector.

Figure 6-601 Disconnect one connector

Remove the ejector & paper support assembly 2955

 2. Pull the rear paper support up, and then release one clamp and disconnect two connectors.

Figure 6-602 Disconnect two connector

3. Remove four screws, and then remove the ejector & paper support assembly.

Figure 6-603 Remove the ejector & paper support assembly

16. Remove the front paper support and the rear paper support
Follow these steps to remove the front paper support and the rear paper support.

2956 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove two screws, and then pull the paper support assembly out of ejector assembly.

Figure 6-604 Remove paper support assembly

17. Remove the ejector motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector motor assembly.

1. Remove the e-ring and washer. Remove two timing belts, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-605 Remove e-ring, washer, belt, and screw

Remove the ejector motor assembly 2957

 2. Remove the timing belt, and then remove one screw.

Figure 6-606 Remove the belt, screw

3. Remove the cable from clamp, and then disconnect two motor connectors and the sensor
connector.

Figure 6-607 Disconnect the motor and sensor connectors

2958 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 4. Remove the ejector motor assembly.

Figure 6-608 Remove the ejector motor assembly

18. Remove the ejector assembly

Follow these steps to remove the ejector assembly.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-609 Remove two screws

Remove the ejector assembly 2959

 2. Unplug two connectors, and then remove the ejector assembly.

Figure 6-610 Remove the ejector assembly

19. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2960 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

End fence unit

Removal and replacement: End fence sensor (S17)

Learn how to remove and replace the end fence sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-65 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 End fence sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

End fence unit 2961

 Post service test
Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-611 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-612 Open the top cover

2962 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-613 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-614 Open the front door and punch cover

Remove the middle cover 2963

 2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-615 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-616 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-617 Open the punch cover

2964 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-618 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-619 Remove the e-ring and bushing

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 2965

 2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-620 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-621 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

2966 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-622 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-623 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the exit motor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the exit motor bracket.

Remove the exit motor bracket 2967

 ■ Remove two screws, unplug the motor connector. And then remove exit motor bracket.

Figure 6-624 Remove the exit motor bracket

8. Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor bracket.

1. Remove three screws at the front of the inner finisher, and then remove the bracket.

Figure 6-625 Remove the bracket

2968 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-626 Remove two screws

3. Remove two screws at the rear of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-627 Remove two screws

4. Loosen three cable clamps. Unplug the connector at the sensor, and then remove the end fence
sensor bracket.

Figure 6-628 Remove the end fence sensor bracket

Remove the end fence sensor bracket 2969

 9. Remove the end fence sensor
Follow these steps to remove the end fence sensor.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the end fence sensor.

Figure 6-629 Remove the end fence sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

2970 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Output tray unit

Removal and replacement: Output tray

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the links below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

To view a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray, click the link below.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-66 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01337B Output tray

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Output tray unit 2971

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-630 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2972 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-631 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-632 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2973

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-633 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-634 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2974 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-635 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-636 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2975

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2976 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2977

 Removal and replacement: Output tray top of stack sensor (S8)
Learn how to remove and replace the output tray top of stack sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-67 Part information

Part number Part description

JC82-01039A output tray top of stack sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

2978 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the front cover
Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-637 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-638 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the front cover 2979

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-639 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-640 Remove four screws

2980 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-641 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-642 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 2981

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-643 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

2982 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 2983

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-644 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-645 Remove two screws

2984 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-646 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-647 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 2985

 7. Remove the output tray top of stack sensor
Follow these steps to Remove the output tray top of stack sensor.

■ Remove two screws from both sides of the left cover. Remove the bracket, and then remove the
sensor.

Figure 6-648 Remove the output tray top of stack sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not

2986 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray lower limit switch.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Removal and replacement: Output tray lower limit switch (S7) 2987
 Table 6-68 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01320A Output tray lower limit switch

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-649 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

2988 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-650 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-651 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 2989

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-652 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-653 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

2990 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-654 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-655 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 2991

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

2992 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-656 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 2993

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-657 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-658 Remove four screws

2994 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-659 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 2995

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-660 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray lower limit switch

Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

2996 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-661 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

9. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Unpack the replacement assembly 2997

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Output tray motor assembly

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor assembly (M4)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor assembly.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-69 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01334B Output tray motor assembly

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

2998 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-662 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 2999

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-663 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-664 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

3000 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-665 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-666 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 3001

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-667 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-668 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

3002 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 3003

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-669 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

3004 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-670 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-671 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 3005

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-672 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

3006 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-673 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-674 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 3007

 9. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor sensor (S6)

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

3008 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-70 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Output tray motor sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

Remove the front cover 3009

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-675 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-676 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3010 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-677 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-678 Remove four screws

Remove the output tray 3011

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-679 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-680 Remove the pulley

3012 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-681 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

Remove the output tray frame 3013

 c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

3014 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-682 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-683 Remove two screws

Remove the PCA cover 3015

 2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-684 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-685 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

3016 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 3017

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-686 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-687 Remove the output tray motor assembly

3018 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray motor sensor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor sensor.

■ Remove one screw, remove the shaft, and then remove the sensor.

Figure 6-688 Remove the output tray motor sensor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

Remove the output tray motor sensor 3019

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Output tray motor

Learn how to remove and replace the output tray motor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-71 Part information

Part number Part description

JC31-00178B Output tray motor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

3020 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 ● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-689 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

Remove the front cover 3021

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-690 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-691 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

3022 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-692 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-693 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 3023

 1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-694 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-695 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

3024 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

Remove the output tray frame 3025

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-696 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

3026 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-697 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-698 Remove four screws

Remove the left cover 3027

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-699 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

3028 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-700 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-701 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 3029

 9. Remove the output tray motor
Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor.

■ Remove two screws, unplug the connector, and then remove the output tray motor.

Figure 6-702 Remove the output tray motor

10. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3030 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Paper holding unit

Removal and replacement: Paper holding

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-72 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01313A Paper holding actuator

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Paper holding unit 3031

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-703 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

3032 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-704 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-705 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 3033

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-706 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-707 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

3034 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-708 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-709 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 3035

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

3036 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-710 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 3037

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-711 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-712 Remove four screws

3038 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-713 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 3039

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-714 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-715 Remove the output tray motor assembly

3040 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-716 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-717 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 3041

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-718 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-719 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

3042 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Unpack the replacement assembly
Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding sensor (S9)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Unpack the replacement assembly 3043

 Before performing service
Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-73 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001393 Paper holding sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

3044 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-720 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-721 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

Remove the rear cover 3045

 3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-722 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-723 Remove four screws

3046 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-724 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-725 Remove the pulley

Remove the output tray frame 3047

 2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-726 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

3048 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

Remove the output tray frame 3049

 5. Remove the PCA cover
Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-727 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-728 Remove two screws

3050 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-729 Remove four screws

3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-730 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

Remove the left cover 3051

 7. Remove the front harness guide
Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

3052 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-731 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-732 Remove the output tray motor assembly

Remove the output tray motor assembly 3053

 9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-733 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-734 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

3054 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-735 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-736 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

Remove the paper holding 3055

 11. Remove the paper holding sensor
Follow these steps to remove the paper holding sensor.

1. Unplug the connector.

2. Remove the adhesive strip from below the sensor.

3. Remove the paper holding sensor.

Figure 6-737 Remove the paper holding sensor

12. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3056 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1)

Learn how to remove and replace the paper holding solenoid.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-74 Part information

Part number Part description

JC33-00037A Paper holding solenoid

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

Removal and replacement: Paper holding solenoid (SL1) 3057

 ● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-738 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

3058 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-739 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-740 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the output tray

Follow these steps to remove the output tray.

Remove the output tray 3059

 1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-741 Remove four screws

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray.

Figure 6-742 Remove the output tray.

4. Remove the output tray frame

Follow these steps to remove the output tray frame.

3060 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame depart from the gear.

Figure 6-743 Remove the pulley

2. Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher, and then remove the output tray frame.

Figure 6-744 Remove the output tray frame

TIP: Push the paper holding actuator into the inner finisher when reassembling. Be sure to level
the output tray.

Use the following video and instructions when the reinstalling the output tray frame assembly.

View a video for aligning the inner finisher output tray.

Remove the output tray frame 3061

 a. Position the first wheel into the channel on both sides while pushing the paper holding
actuator.

b. Let the second wheel rest on the channel on both sides simultaneously.

c. Gently squeeze the wheels into channel until the output tray frame meet the gear.

d. Rotate the pulley until the output tray frame is no longer lifted. It can make to level the output
tray frame.

3062 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 e. Rotate the pulley in the opposite direction.

5. Remove the PCA cover

Follow these steps to remove the PCA cover.

■ Remove two screws, and then remove the PCA cover.

Figure 6-745 Remove the PCA cover

6. Remove the left cover

Follow these steps to remove the left cover.

Remove the PCA cover 3063

 1. Remove two screws.

Figure 6-746 Remove two screws

2. Remove four screws from both front and rear sides.

Figure 6-747 Remove four screws

3064 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Unplug two inline connectors, and then remove the left cover.

Figure 6-748 Unplug two connectors

TIP: Be sure to check the hook when reassembling.

7. Remove the front harness guide

Follow these steps to remove the front harness guide.

1. Open one clamp and unplug five connectors, and then remove the wire harness from the front
harness guide.

Remove the front harness guide 3065

 2. Remove four screws, and then remove the front harness guide.

Figure 6-749 Remove the front harness guide

8. Remove the output tray motor assembly

Follow these steps to remove the output tray motor assembly.

■ Remove three screws, and then remove the output tray motor assembly.

Figure 6-750 Remove the output tray motor assembly

3066 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

9. Remove the output tray lower limit switch
Follow these steps to remove the output tray lower limit switch.

■ Remove one screw, and then remove the output tray lower limit switch.

Figure 6-751 Remove the output tray lower limit switch

10. Remove the paper holding

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding.

1. Remove the paper holding actuator spring.

Figure 6-752 Remove the paper holding actuator spring

Remove the output tray lower limit switch 3067

 2. Remove the e-ring and the rack pinion gear. And then remove the pin and the e-ring, and then
remove the bushing.

Figure 6-753 Remove e-ring, rack pinion gear, pin, and bushing

NOTE: Be sure not to lose the pin.

3. Carefully remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator.

Figure 6-754 Remove the paper holding shaft and the actuator

3068 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

11. Remove the sub paddle unit
Follow these steps to remove the sub paddle unit.

1. Open the top cover, and then remove one screw securing the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-755 Remove one screw

Remove the sub paddle unit 3069

 2. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the pulley and timing belt. And then remove the e-ring and the
bushing.

Figure 6-756 Remove the e-ring, pulley, timing belt, and bushing

3. Lift up and remove the sub paddle unit.

Figure 6-757 Remove the sub paddle unit

12. Remove the exit roller

Follow these steps to remove the exit roller.

3070 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Remove the guide on the center of the exit roller.

Figure 6-758 Remove the guide

2. On the front of the inner finisher, release the timing belt connected to the exit motor.

Figure 6-759 Release the timing belt

Remove the exit roller 3071

 3. Remove five screws securing the rear harness guide.

Figure 6-760 Remove five screws

4. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and the pulley and then remove the e-ring and
the bushing.

Figure 6-761 Remove e-ring, pulley, and bushing

3072 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 5. Push the bushing to detach it, and then remove the exit roller.

Figure 6-762 Remove the exit roller

13. Remove the front tamper

Follow these steps to remove the front tamper.

1. Remove four screws.

Figure 6-763 Remove four screws

Remove the front tamper 3073

 2. Unplug the connector and release the hook, and then pull the front tamper up to remove.

Figure 6-764 Remove the front tamper

14. Remove the paper holding solenoid

Follow these steps to remove the paper holding solenoid.

1. Remove two screws at the front of the inner finisher.

Figure 6-765 Remove two screws

3074 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

2. Remove one screw.

Figure 6-766 Remove one screw

3. Disconnect two connectors and remove the solenoid assembly.

Figure 6-767 Remove the solenoid assembly

Remove the paper holding solenoid 3075

 4. Remove two screws, and then release the solenoid from the bracket.

Figure 6-768 Remove the paper holding solenoid

15. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Punch unit

3076 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Removal and replacement: Punch cover
Learn how to remove and replace the punch cover.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
http://www.hp.com/buy/parts .

Table 6-75 Part information

Part number Part description

JC90-01343B Punch cover

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

After performing service

Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

Removal and replacement: Punch cover 3077

 1. Remove the rear cover
Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-769 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-770 Remove the rear cover

2. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

3078 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-771 Remove the slide shaft

2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-772 Open the punch cover

Remove the punch cover 3079

 3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-773 Remove the punch cover

3. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

3080 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19)

Learn how to remove and replace the punch waste full sensor.

To view teardown and reassembling video of the inner finisher, click the link below.

View a teardown video of the inner finisher.

View a reassembling video of the inner finisher.

IMPORTANT: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the
end of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Mean time to repair:

Service level:

Before performing service

Turn the printer power off

● Press the power button on the front of the printer, and then turn off the power switch next to the
power cable.

● A shutting-down message appears on the control-panel display.

WARNING! To avoid damage to the printer, turn the power off and wait until the printer shuts
down before removing the power cable.

● Disconnect the printer power cable after the printer has completely shut down (the control-panel
display is blank).

Use the table below to identify the correct part number for your printer. To order the part, go to
www.hp.com/buy/parts.

Table 6-76 Part information

Part number Part description

0604-001381 Punch waste full sensor

Required tools
● #2 JIS screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Removal and replacement: Punch waste full sensor (S19) 3081

 After performing service
Turn the printer power on

● Connect the power cable.

● Use the power switch to turn the power on.

Post service test

Print any pages necessary to verify that the repair resolved the issue and did not create any new issues.

1. Remove the front cover

Follow these steps to remove the front cover.

1. Open the front door and open the punch cover.

2. Remove three screws in the front.

3. Remove the lever.

4. Open the top cover.

5. From the right side of the front cover, carefully lift and pry toward the top-left corner to remove the
front cover.

Figure 6-774 Remove the front cover

2. Remove the rear cover

Follow these steps to remove the rear cover.

3082 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 1. Open the top cover.

Figure 6-775 Open the top cover

2. Remove three screws.

3. Release hooks carefully and remove the rear cover.

Figure 6-776 Remove the rear cover

3. Remove the middle cover

Follow these steps to remove the middle cover.

Remove the middle cover 3083

 1. Open the front door and then open the punch cover.

Figure 6-777 Open the front door and punch cover

2. Remove left-side one screw at the rear of the inner finisher, and then remove the middle cover by
lifting off the hinge pins at the front.

Figure 6-778 Remove the middle cover

4. Remove the punch cover

Follow these steps to remove the punch cover.

1. Unplug the connector. Remove the e-ring, and then remove the slide shaft at the rear of the inner
finisher.

Figure 6-779 Remove the slide shaft

3084 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Open the punch cover.

Figure 6-780 Open the punch cover

3. Remove the front punch sheet, and then remove the e-ring and the washer. And then remove the
punch cover.

Figure 6-781 Remove the punch cover

5. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

Follow these steps to remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller 3085

 1. On the front of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring and bushing.

Figure 6-782 Remove the e-ring and bushing

2. On the rear of the inner finisher, remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring (slightly hidden
from view).

Figure 6-783 Remove the e-ring, pulley, bushing, belt, and spring

3086 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 3. Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller.

Figure 6-784 Remove the diverter guide and the middle roller

6. Remove the middle paper guide

Follow these steps to remove the middle paper guide.

1. Remove six screws, and then open the middle paper guide in the direction of the arrow.

Figure 6-785 Open the middle paper guide

NOTE: Becareful not to damage the sensor connector.

Remove the middle paper guide 3087

 2. Unplug the connector under the middle paper guide. And then, remove the middle paper guide.

Figure 6-786 Remove the middle paper guide

7. Remove the punch waste full sensor

Follow these steps to remove the punch waste full sensor.

1. Remove one screw, unplug the connector, and then remove the punch waste full sensor bracket.

Figure 6-787 Remove the punch waste full sensor bracket

3088 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

 2. Remove one screw, and then remove the punch waste full sensor from the bracket.

Figure 6-788 Remove the punch waste full sensor

8. Unpack the replacement assembly

Follow these steps to unpack the replacement assembly.

1. Dispose of the defective part.

NOTE: HP recommends responsible disposal of the defective part.

http://www8.hp.com/us/en/hp-information/environment/product-recycling.html

2. Unpack the replacement part from the packaging.

CAUTION: Some parts are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Always

perform service work at an ESD-protected workstation or mat. If an ESD workstation or mat is not
available, touch the sheet-metal chassis to provide a static ground before touching an ESD-
sensitive assembly. Protect the ESD-sensitive assemblies by placing them in ESD pouches when
they are out of the printer.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that all of the shipping materials (for example shipping tape) are removed
from the replacement part prior to installation.

NOTE: If the replacement part is a roller or pad, avoid touching the spongy part of it. Skin oils on
the roller or pad can cause paper pickup and/or print-quality problems. HP recommends using
disposable gloves when handling rollers or pads or washing your hands before touching rollers or
pads.

3. To install an assembly, reverse the removal steps.

NOTE: When applicable, special installation instructions are provided for an assembly at the end
of the removal procedure. Always completely read the removal instructions and follow all special
installation instructions.

Unpack the replacement assembly 3089

 Problem solving
Learn about problem solving.

Control panel message document (CPMD)

Learn about the control panel message document (CPMD).

Refer to Error codes (types and structure) for more details.

Electrical Mechanical Diagrams (Inner finisher)

3090 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Punch waste full sensor
Figure 6-789 Punch waste full sensor

Punch waste full sensor (0604-001381)

5V
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )
CN3, Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
5V 24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Punch waste full sensor 3091

 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Figure 6-790 Punch waste box sensor and finisher docking sensor
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN1, Rear sensor
5V 1 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR 5V
2 DGND
3 PUNCH WASTE BOX SENSOR
4 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR 5V
5 DGND
5V
6 FINISHER DOCKING SENSOR
7 DGND
JC39-02174A 8 ENTRANCE SENSOR
9 5V
Punch waste 10 OUT_PATH
box sensor 11 nDETECT_FAN
(0604-00139) 12 DGND

5V

5V
Finisher docking
sensor
(0604-00139)

3092 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Entrance motor
Figure 6-791 Entrance motor

24V

Entrance motor (JC31-00169B)

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B )

Inner
CN3,Finisher PCA
Rear joint I/F
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
JC39-02173A 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
15 FRONT COVER OPEN
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
24V 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V
22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Entrance motor 3093

 Exit sensor
Figure 6-792 Exit sensor

5V
Exit sensor Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
( 0604-001415 )
CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

JC39-02176A
6 DGND
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
5V 16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

3094 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and
paper holding solenoid
Figure 6-793 Exit motor, paddle motor&sensor, output tray lower limit sensor, and paper holding solenoid

Inner Finisher PCA

( JC92-02774B )

Exit motor CN7, Front

(JC31-00169B)
1 EXIT MOTOR B
24V 24V 2 EXIT MOTOR A
3 EXIT MOTOR nB
24V EXIT MOTOR nA
Main paddle 4
5 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
motor
JC39-02168A 6 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 7 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR
8 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR, 5V
5V 9 DGND
5V 10 MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR

Main paddle 11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B

home sensor 12 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb
24V 13 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na
(0604-001393) 14 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A

15 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1

16 OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2
17 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B
18 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb
19 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na
24V 20 FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A
21 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR, 5V
Paper holding 22
24V 5V DGND
sensor 23 FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR
(0604-001393) 24 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR, 5V
25 DGND
Output tray lower 5V 26 PAPER HOLDING SENSOR
Paper holding solenoid
limit switch
with harness (JC33-00037A) 27 DGND
with harness 28 OUTPUT TRAY
(JC39-02178A) TOP OF STACK SENSOR

CN6, Stacker limit switch

1 DGND
2 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NO/NC
24V 3 OUTPUT TRAY LOWER LIMIT SW NC

CN9, Paper holding solenoid

1 GND
24V 2 PAPER HOLDING SOLENOID

Exit motor, main paddle motor & home sensor, output tray lower limit switch, and paper holding solenoid 3095
 Paper support motor & home sensor
Figure 6-794 Paper support sensor and motor

Paper support motor ( JC93-00802B)

Paper support home

sensor (0604-001393)

24V
5V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4

REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5

DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10
JC39-02176A
N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21 5V
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25 24V
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

3096 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Front tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-795 Front tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

Front tamper home sensor
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
(0604-001393)
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17 5V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18 24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
20 Front tamper motor
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A JC39-02168A
21 (JC93-01001A)
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V
DGND 22 24V
5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

Front tamper motor and home sensor 3097

 Rear tamper motor and home sensor
Figure 6-796 Rear tamper sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
24V 2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
5V 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
JC39-02176A 9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED

Rear tamper 14 EXIT SENSOR 5V

home sensor 15 DGND
(0604-001393) 16 EXIT SENSOR
5V
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
24V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
Rear tamper motor 21 DGND
(JC93-01001A) 22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

3098 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

End fence sensor
Figure 6-797 End fence sensor

End fence sensor (0604-001381)

5V Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A

5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V

6 DGND
JC39-02176A 7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR

8 DGND
9 TOP COVER
10 TOP COVER SWITH
11 N.C

12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED

13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR
17 DGND
18 END FENCE SENSOR
5V 19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V
21 DGND
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A

End fence sensor 3099

 Stapler position motor and sensor
Figure 6-798 Stapler position sensor and motor

Inner Finisher PCA

(JC92-02774B)

CN3, Rear joint I/F

1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
24V 9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
1.7v /
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
1.7v or 3.3v or 3.3v /
Stapler position home 12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
5v Vcc (pull up) 5v
rear sensor (0604-001393) 13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
1.7v / 14 DGND
3.3v / 15 FRONT COVER OPEN
5V Stapler position middle front 5v 16 FRONT COVER SWITH
sensor (0604-001393) 17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
5V 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
Stapler position middle sensor (0604-001393) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
Stapler position home 21 STAPLER PCA 5V
1.7v or front sensor
3.3v or (0604-001393) 22 DGND
5v Vcc (pull up) 23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
24V 25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
Stapler position motor 28 DGND
(JC93-00999A) 29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
JC39-02173A 38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

CN10, Traverse sensor

5V 1 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT 5V

2 DGND
3 STAPLER POSITION MID FRONT

5V 4 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR 5V

5 DGND
6 STAPLER POSITION MID REAR

3100 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor
Figure 6-799 Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor

Ejector1 home sensor (0604-001393)

5V

Ejector2 motor Ejector1 motor

(JC93-00998A) Ejector2 home sensor
24V (JC93-01168A) (0604-001393)
24V
5V
Ejector2 motor sensor
(0604-001393)
5V

JC39-02165A
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN4, Ejector
24V 1 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT2
2 EJECTOR2 MOTOR OUT1
3 EJECTOR1 MOTOR B
4 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nB
24V 5 EJECTOR1 MOTOR nA
6 EJECTOR1 MOTOR A

5V 7 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR 5V

8 DGND
9 EJECTOR2 MOTOR SENSOR
5V 10 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR 5V
11 DGND
12 EJECTOR2 HOME SENSOR

5V 13 EJECTOR1 HOME 5V
14 DGND
15 EJECTOR1 HOME

Ejector 1 motor and home sensor, ejector 2 motor, motor sensor, and home sensor 3101
 Output tray motor and sensor
Figure 6-800 Output tray motor and sensor

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN7, Front
24V
EXIT MOTOR B 1
EXIT MOTOR A 2
EXIT MOTOR nB 3
EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5 5V
DGND 6
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9 JC39-02168A
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10

MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11

Output tray motor
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Nb 12
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR Na 13 (JC31-00178B)
MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15

OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
24V
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Nb 18
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR Na 19
FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20 5V
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
Output tray motor sensor
DGND 22
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23 (0604-001393)
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
DGND 25
PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26

DGND 27
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER

3102 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Output tray top of stack sensor
Figure 6-801 Output tray top of stack sensor

Output tray top of

stack sensor receiver
(0603-001309)
Output tray top of
stack sensor LED 3.3V
(0601-003440)

3.3V

JC39-02168A

JC39-02176A

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear CN7, Front

1 REAR TAMPER MOTOR B EXIT MOTOR B 1
2 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB EXIT MOTOR A 2
3 REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA EXIT MOTOR nB 3
4 REAR TAMPER MOTOR A EXIT MOTOR nA 4
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 5V 5
5 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V DGND 6
6 DGND OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR SENSOR 7
7 REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 5V 8
DGND 9
8 DGND
MAIN PADDLE HOME SENSOR 10
9 TOP COVER 24V
10 TOP COVER SWITCH MAIN PADDLE MOTOR B 11
11 MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nB 12
N.C
3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR nA 13
12 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 3.3V MAIN PADDLE MOTOR A 14
13 OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED
OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT1 15
14 EXIT SENSOR 5V OUTPUT TRAY MOTOR OUT2 16
15 DGND
16 EXIT SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR B 17
17 DGND FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nB 18
18 END FENCE SENSOR FRONT TAMPER MOTOR nA 19
19 END FENCE SENSOR 5V FRONT TAMPER MOTOR A 20
FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 21
20 PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V DGND 22
21 DGND FRONT TAMPER HOME SENSOR 23
22 PAPR SUPPORT HOME PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 5V 24
23 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B DGND 25
24 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB PAPER HOLDING SENSOR 26
25 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA
DGND 27
26 PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A
OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK 28
SENSOR RECEIVER 3.3V 3.3V

Output tray top of stack sensor 3103

 Top cover switch
Figure 6-802 Top cover switch

Top cover switch (JC39-01610A)

24V

Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)

CN2, Rear
REAR TAMPER MOTOR B 1
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nB 2
REAR TAMPER MOTOR nA 3
REAR TAMPER MOTOR A 4
JC39-02176A
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 5V 5
DGND 6
REAR TAMPER HOME SENSOR 7

DGND 8
TOP COVER 24V 9
TOP COVER SWITCH 10 24V

N.C 11

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK SENSOR LED 12

OUTPUT TRAY TOP OF STACK LED 13
EXIT SENSOR 5V 14
DGND 15
EXIT SENSOR 16
DGND 17
END FENCE SENSOR 18
END FENCE SENSOR 5V 19
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 5V 20
DGND 21
PAPR SUPPORT HOME 22
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR B 23
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nB 24
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR nA 25
PAPR SUPPORT MOTOR A 26

3104 Chapter 6 Inner finisher

Front cover switch
Figure 6-803 Frame front

Stapler motor JC39-02177A Staple joint PCA

(JC59-00040A) 24V (JC41-00900A)
Inner Finisher PCA (JC92-02774B)
CN3, Rear joint I/F
JC39-02164A
1 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
2 STAPLER MOTOR OUT1
3 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
Rear joint PCA 24V 4 STAPLER MOTOR OUT2
(JC41-00905A) 5 STAPLER LOW
6 STAPLER READY
7 STAPLER HOME
8 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR B
9 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nB
JC39-02173A 10 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR nA
11 STAPLER POSITION MOTOR A
12 STAPLER POSITION HOME REAR
13 STAPLER POSITION HOME FRONT
14 DGND
24V
15 FRONT COVER OPEN 24V
24V
16 FRONT COVER SWITH
17 ENTRANCE MOTOR B
Front cover switch 18 ENTRANCE MOTOR A
(JC39-01610A) 19 ENTRANCE MOTOR nB
20 ENTRANCE MOTOR nA
21 STAPLER PCA 5V

22 DGND
23 PUNCH WASTE FULL SENSOR
24 5V
25 24V
26 24V
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 DGND
30 5V
31 3.3V
32 PUNCH MOTOR SLE
33 PUNCH MOTOR EN
34 PUNCH MOTOR HA
35 PUNCH MOTOR SENSOR
36 PUNCH HOME SENSOR
37 PUNCH MOTOR DECAY
38 DS2 2
39 DS2 1
40 LED5 OU

Front cover switch 3105

 A Certificate of Volatility

Review the certificates of volatility for the printer.

Certificate of Volatility
Learn about the product certificate of volatility.

3106 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-1 Certificate of Volatility (E87640/50/60; 1 of 3)
Hewlett-Packard Certificate of Volatility
Model: Part Number: Address:
HP Color LaserJet Managed Managed Hewlett Packard Company
MFP E876XXdn X3A87A= E87640dn 11311 Chinden Blvd
X3A90A= E87650dn Boise, ID 83714
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A93A= E87660dn
Flow MFP E876XX z X3A86A= E87640z
X3A89A= E87650z
HP Color LaserJet Managed X3A92A= E87660z
MFP E876XXdu 5CM64A = E87640du
5CM65A = E87650du
5CM66A = E87660du
Volatile Memory
Does the device contain volatile memory (Memory whose contents are lost when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
HP Formatter Yes No Operation system and When the printer is powered off
DDR3 - DRAM 3GB- Obsidian print/scan buffer the memory is erased.
1 GB –Accel
board
4 GB - Main
Formatter

Type (SRAM, DRAM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Yes No

Non-Volatile Memory
Does the device contain non-volatile memory (Memory whose contents are retained when power is removed)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
IOD EEPROM 32KB Yes No Store customer setting data for There are no steps to clear
backup/restore this data.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:

HP side: SPI Flash 4MB Yes No Contains the boot code and There are no steps to clear
factory product configuration this data
data required for the device to
function. User modifications
are limited to downloading
digitally signed HP firmware
images.
Type (Flash, EEPROM, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Samsung MSOK : Yes No TPM NVRAM - stores HP- Drive lock password can be
MSOK – TPM NVRAM 2 KB signed immutable ID certificate changed through the
MSOK – EEProm 32 KB and associated RSA key pair device embedded web
MSOK – CRUM 32 KB in locked memory. server interface.
EEProm - stores device No other data stored on the
lifecycle data (e.g. device page MSOK can be cleared.
counts), copy of device speed
license, and SED (self-
encrypting drive) drive lock
password.
CRUM - stores device page
counts, consumables
information, device speed
information, and product serial
number.

Certificate of Volatility 3107

 Figure A-2 Certificate of Volatility (E87640/50/60; 2 of 3)
Mass Storage
Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
2 – Hard Drives (1 – HP 320GB/ea Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Secure Storage Erase –
formatter & 1 – Main board) OS, applications, Areas temporary files and job
digitally signed firmware data by overwriting information
images, persistent data, overwriting information one or
and temporary data three times.
used for processing and 2. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
system functions. files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
3. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

Optional Mass Storage

Does the device contain mass storage memory (Hard Disk Drive, Tape Backup)?
Yes No If Yes please describe the type, size, function, and steps to clear the memory below
Type (HDD, Tape, etc.): Size: User Modifiable: Function: Steps to clear memory:
Optional Formatter HDD 500 500GB Yes No Stores customer data, 1. Erase and Unlock Encrypted
GB FIPS Encrypted HDD OS, applications, Disk – This changes the
digitally signed firmware Encryption keys rendering all
images, persistent data, data unreadable.
and temporary data 2. Secure Storage Erase –
used for processing and Areas temporary files and job
system functions. data by overwriting information
overwriting information one or
three times.
3. Secure Disk Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.
4. Secure File Erase – Erases
files when jobs finish processing
by overwriting them one or three
times.

USB
Does the item accept USB input and if so, for what purpose (i.e. Print Jobs, device firmware updates, scan upload)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Print jobs, HP digitally signed firmware upgrades, 3rd party application loading. USB ports can be disabled.
Can any data other than scan upload be sent to the USB device)?
Yes No If Yes please describe below
Diagnostic service logs can be uploaded. Print files can be printed via a USB thumb drive.

RF/RFID
Does the item use RF or RFID for receive or transmit of any data including remote diagnostics. (e.g. Cellular phone,
Bluetooth) Yes No If Yes please describe below
Purpose:
Frequency: Bandwidth:
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications:

Other Transmission Capabilities

3108 Appendix A Certificate of Volatility

Figure A-3 Certificate of Volatility (E82540/50/60; 3 of 3)
Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: WiFi Direct Print
Frequency: 2.4 GHz, 5GHz Bandwidth: 2401 - 2495 MHz; depending on selected
channel in 2.4GHz band.
5180 - 5825 MHz; depending on selected channel in 5GHz
band.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: 802.11 b/g/n

Other Transmission Capabilities

Does the device employ any other methods of non-wired access to transmit or receive any data whatsoever (e.g. anything
other than standard hard wired TCP/IP, direct USB, or parallel connections)? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose: Device Beaconing, Secure Print Apps
Frequency: 2.4 GHz Bandwidth: 2400-2483.5 MHz; depending on selected
channel.
Modulation: Effective Radiate Power (ERP):
Specifications: BTLE4.0 compliant

Other Capabilities
Does the device employ any other method of communications such as a Modem to transmit or receive any data
whatsoever? Yes No If Yes please describe below:
Purpose:
Specifications:

Author Information
Name Title Email Business Unit
John Mast Technical Marketing Engineer [email protected] IPG
Robert Mejia System Engineer [email protected] IPG
Date Prepared: 9/14/2018

Certificate of Volatility 3109

 Index

Symbols/Numerics parts and diagrams - lower booklet entrance unit

image scanner 903 parts and diagrams 1409
2000-sheet HCI
parts and diagrams - LX Booklet entrance unit 1342, 2220
parts and diagrams -
models 728, 761, 772 booklet entrance-presser motor
cassette 972
parts and diagrams - main parts and diagrams 1410
parts and diagrams -
frame assembly LX 772 booklet exit
drive 957
parts and diagrams - pickup parts and diagrams 1415
parts and diagrams -
LX 761 booklet exit unit
frame 973
ADF pickup roller 816 parts and diagrams 1413
parts and diagrams -
ADF reverse roller 836 Booklet exit unit 1360, 2474
main 956
ADF sGX booklet finisher
parts and diagrams -
PCA-ADF sGX (dn models booklet blade 2368
pickup 979
only) 877 booklet blade home
3000-sheet sHCI (department;
after-service checklist 147, 149, sensor 2386
E82540/50/60 and
151, 1285, 1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, booklet blade motor 2403
E87640/50/60 only)
2575 booklet c-fold blade 2413
parts and diagrams -
alienation motor 543 booklet c-fold blade home
frame 1009
APS sensor 906 sensor 2428
parts and diagrams - main
authorized service providers, booklet c-fold blade
1 980
parts 148, 1372, 2575 motor 2443
parts and diagrams - main
booklet diverter 2450
3 989
B booklet diverter home
parts and diagrams - main
sensor 2467
5 1005 backup error
booklet diverter motor 2471
parts and diagrams - main 32.WX.YZ error 1011
booklet end fence 2250
6 1006 reset error 1011
booklet end fence home
parts and diagrams - pickup restore error 1011
sensor 2267
cover unit 1007 booklet blade
booklet end fence motor 2262
76.00.24 1013 parts and diagrams 1421
booklet entrance motor 2220
booklet blade motor
booklet entrance sensor 2223
A parts and diagrams 1421
booklet exit sensor 2474
booklet c-fold blade
accelerator board booklet fold motor 2408
parts and diagrams 1415
remove the accelerator booklet front cover 1515
booklet c-fold motor
board 265 booklet maker 2209
parts and diagrams 1417
accelerator board (GX ADF booklet maker PCA 2501
booklet diverter
only) 265 booklet output tray 2492
parts and diagrams 1415
accessories booklet paddle home
booklet diverter motor
dimensions 1, 6, 14 sensor 2241
parts and diagrams 1417
weight 1, 6, 14 booklet paddle motor 2237
booklet diverter unit
acoustic specifications 1, 6, 15 booklet presser 2272
parts and diagrams 1413
ACR frame assembly booklet presser home
Booklet diverter unit 1358, 2450
parts and diagrams 494 sensor 2287
booklet end fence unit
ACR unit booklet presser motor 2291
parts and diagrams 1424
electrical-mechanical booklet stapler unit 2350
Booklet end fence unit 1345,
relationships diagram 1235 booklet tamper home
2250
ADF sensor 2312
booklet entrance
parts and diagrams - exterior booklet tamper motor 2331
parts and diagrams 1410
LX 761 booklet tamper unit 2294

3110 Index
bridge door sensor 1445 paper holding home booklet maker baset
bridge entrance sensor 1427 sensor 2138 parts and diagrams 1426
bridge exit sensor 1440 paper holding Motor 2181 Booklet output tray unit 1361,
bridge motor 1434 paper holding solenoid 1372 2492
buffer motor 2196 paper support 1372 booklet paddle unit
buffer solenoid 2202 paper support home parts and diagrams 1423
caster cover 1483 sensor 1372 Booklet paddle unit 1343, 2237
dummy feed guide 1523 punch waste full 1372 booklet presser unit
ejector assembly 1372 rear cover 1462 parts and diagrams 1409
ejector motor 1372 rear paper holding Booklet presser unit 1347, 2272
ejector unit 1925 sensor 2168 booklet stapler unit
ejector1 1975 rear paper support 1372 parts and diagrams 1411
ejector1 motor sensor 1949 rear tamper home sensor 1791 Booklet stapler unit 1352
ejector2 home sensor 2001 rear tamper motor 1817 booklet tamper unit
ejector2 motor 2053 rear tamper unit 1766 parts and diagrams 1412
ejector2 motor sensor 2027 right upper cover 1450 Booklet tamper unit 1350, 2294
end fence home 1372 sensor 1372 bookletr finisher
end fence home sensor 1654 stacker lower limit switch 1372 exit motor 1372
end fence motor 1679 stacker motor 1372 bottom high-capacity input tray
entrance motor 1372 stapler 1372 (HCI) unit
entrance sensor 1372 stapler front sensor 1854 bottom high-capacity input tray
exir roller 1372 stapler mid-front sensor 1866 feed motor 958
exit motor 1608 stapler mid-rear sensor 1879 bottom high-capacity input tray
exit sensor 1372 stapler position motor 1912 lift-up motor 964
feed entrance motor 1517 stapler position sensor 1372 bottom high-capacity input tray
front cover 1467 stapler rear sensor 1891 pickup motor 962
front door 1456 stapler unit 1843 bottom high-capacity input tray
front lower cover 1475 switch 1372 feed motor 958
front paper holding top cover 1452 bottom high-capacity input tray lift-
sensor 2154 top exit sensor 1569 up motor 964
front paper support 1372 top jam cover assembly 1528 bottom high-capacity input tray
front tamper home top lower feed assembly 1556 pickup motor 962
sensor 1713 top output tray 1582 bridge entrance path sensor
front tamper motor 1740 top output tray paper full (SSBM)
front tamper unit 1688 sensor 1584 electrical-mechanical
left lower cover 1487 tray diverter 1539 relationships diagram 1283
left upper cover 1500 tray diverter home bridge motor, bridge middle
main exit cam motor 1613 sensor 1546 sensor, and bridge guide sensor
main exit sensor 1595 booklet finisher diagrams 1372, (SSBM)
main output tray lower limit 1407 electrical-mechanical
sensor 2109 booklet finisher parts 1372, 1407 relationships diagram 1282
main output tray motor 2129 booklet finisher remove and bridge unit 329
main output tray motor replace 1372 parts and diagrams 1378, 1380
sensor 2123 booklet finisher view 1285 remove the bridge unit 329
main output tray top of stack booklet fold motor Bridge unit 1378, 1427
sensor 2079 parts and diagrams 1417 buffer diverter
main output tray top of stack booklet fold roller parts and diagrams 1406
switch 2095 parts and diagrams 1419 buffer unit
main paddle 1372 booklet fold unit parts and diagrams 1404
main PCA 2495 parts and diagrams 1413 Buffer unit 1338, 2196
manual staple sensor 1903 Booklet fold unit 1354, 2368
motor 1372 booklet maker C
paddle 1621 detailed specifications 1287
Calibrate/Cleaning menu, control
paddle home sensor 1635 parts and diagrams 1407
panel 1011, 1027, 1048, 1137
paddle motor 1645 Booklet maker 2209

Index 3111
 card reader 301 remove the control panel DC controller firmware error
cartridge bezel 289 70.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013
dynamic security 64 Reports menu 1011, 1027, 1048 DCF 1, 135
cassette 1, 45, 51 Scan menu 1100 DCF frame
cassette lift drive 1, 74 Scan menu (MFP only) 1011, parts and diagrams -
Cassettes Tray 2/3 1027, 1048 cassette 942
parts and diagrams 426 Settings menu 1011, 1027, DCF rear frame
caution vi 1048, 1050 parts and diagrams 948
caution for moving the scanner 1, Supplies menu 1011, 1027, DCF second pickup
82, 91 1048, 1133 parts and diagrams -
CCDM PCA 1, 107, 133 Trays menu 1011, 1027, 1048, drive 955
certificate of volatility 3106 1134 decoding
CoV E87640/50/60 3106 troubleshooting menu 1011, message 1011
Channel partners 1027, 1048, 1134 defeating
WISE 147 USB Firmware Upgrade interlocks 1011, 1016, 1024,
Channel partners support menu 1011, 1027, 1048, 1137, 1025
HP Channel Services Network 1139 definitions and terms
(CSN) 147 control panel diagnostic glossary
checklists flowcharts 1011, 1016, 1019 determine problem source 1011,
after-service 147, 149, 151, control panel menus 1011, 1027, 1016
1285, 1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, 1048 developer fan 324
2575 control panel messages 1011 developer unit 1, 58, 59, 61, 178
preservice 147, 149, 151, 1285, conventions used vi diagnostics
1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, 2574 Copy menu (MFP only), control adjustment 1011, 1145, 1153,
cleaning page 1011, 1027, 1048, panel 1011, 1027, 1048, 1091 1178
1137 copy specifications 1, 6, 23 component 1011, 1016, 1024,
cleaning the paper dust stick 147, CoV 1026
152 certificate of volatility 3106 engine 1011, 1016, 1024, 1025,
cleaning the scan glass 147, 152 cover 1145, 1153
clear paper jams 1285, 2513, parts and diagrams 1374 fax 1011, 1145, 1153, 1168
3090 cover open sensor, cassette image management 1011, 1145,
component test installation sensor, feed motor, 1153, 1185
special mode test 1011, 1016, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2 motors, LED 1011, 1016, 1024
1024, 1026 and shift motor (DCF/HCI) print test patterns 1011, 1145,
components electrical-mechanical 1153, 1186
diagnostic tests 1011, 1016, relationships diagram 1256 scanner 1011, 1145, 1153, 1174
1024, 1026 Covers 1450, 2587 diagram
scanning system 1, 82, 85 parts and diagrams 617 fuser 1218
connection, electrical-mechanical CPMD 1011 HVPS/LVPS/FDB 1225
diagrams 1218 CPMP laser scanner assembly 1220
connector error WISE 1013 OPC 1223
65.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 CRUM connector 353 scanner 1219
control panel 289 CST lock diagram 1223 side/MP/feed/registration/
Backup/Restore menu 1011, curl pawl motor, fold motor, divert pickup 1221
1027, 1048, 1137 home sensor, and guide home diagram, electrical-mechanical
Calibrate/Cleaning menu 1011, sensor (SSBM) relationships
1027, 1048, 1137 electrical-mechanical ACR unit 1235
Copy menu (MFP only) 1011, relationships diagram 1268 bridge entrance path sensor
1027, 1048, 1091 current settings pages 1011, 1027 (SSBM) 1283
CPMD 1011 bridge motor, bridge middle
Fax menu (fax models D sensor, and bridge guide
only) 1011, 1027, 1048, 1129 sensor (SSBM) 1282
DC controller communication error
Print menu 1011, 1027, 1048, cover open sensor, cassette
55.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
1133 installation sensor, feed
remove the control panel 289 motor, pickup/lift-1 and lift-2

3112 Index
 motors, and shift motor paper empty , path, limit-1, and sensor, motor, and roller-inner
(DCF/HCI) 1256 path sensors (DCF/ finisher 2580
curl pawl motor, fold motor, HCI) 1253 stapler unit-inner
divert home sensor, and paper empty and limit-2 sensors finisher 2586
guide home sensor (DCF/HCI) 1252 tamper unit-inner
(SSBM) 1268 paper size sensors (DCF/ finisher 2583, 2584
entrance motors A/B, end fence HCI) 1253 use parts lists and
motor, buffer motor and pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and diagrams 149
sensor, and diverter close feed motor (DCF/HCI) 1261 Diagrams
sensor (SSBM) 1266 pickup drive 1231, 1239 2000-sheet HCI cassette 972
exit cam home sensor, main pickup lift motors, feed motor, 2000-sheet HCI drive 957
paddle home sensor, paddle and cover open sensor (DCF/ 2000-sheet HCI frame 973
motor, and exit motor HCI) 1250 2000-sheet HCI main 956
(SSBM) 1277 pickup unit 1233 2000-sheet HCI pickup 979
exit unit 1235 press home sensor, tamper 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
feed drive 1238 home sensor, paper detect E82540/50/60 and
feed entrance sensor sensor, tamper motor, press E87640/50/60 only)
(SSBM) 1269 motor, and feed motor frame 1009
front unit 1248 (SSBM) 1271 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
front/rear home sensors and registration drive 1237 E82540/50/60 and
tray open sensor (DCF/ registration unit 1233 E87640/50/60 only) main
HCI) 1263 right door guide 1244 1 980
front/rear tamper motors, front/ right door output 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
rear tamper home sensors, takeaway 1246 E82540/50/60 and
and end-fence home sensor side unit 1242 E87640/50/60 only) main
(SSBM) 1279 T1 drive 1227 3 989
fuser exit drive 1237 top door sensor, fold motor, and 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA knife home position sensor E82540/50/60 and
(HCI) 1254 (SSBM) 1275 E87640/50/60 only) main
home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, top-beam out sensor, stack 5 1005
and empty sensor (DCF/ motor, and SKU motor 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
HCI) 1260 (SSBM) 1267 E82540/50/60 and
knife motor, stopper home top-exit path and compile-exit E87640/50/60 only) main
sensor, and stopper solenoid path sensors (SSBM) 1273 6 1006
and motor (SSBM) 1274 tray upper front/rear sensors, 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
level-1/2 front/rear sensors, SCU home detect sensor, E82540/50/60 and
solenoid home sensor, and and stack beam in/out E87640/50/60 only) pickup
solenoid (DCF/HCI) 1259 sensors (SSBM) 1281 cover unit 1007
limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, upper/lower paper low sensors ACR frame assembly 494
prefeed sensor, and paper (DCF/HCI) 1262 ADF (LX models) 728
empty-1 sensor (DCF/ WTB drive 1229 ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX
HCI) 1261 diagrams models) 761
limit switch, prefeed sensor, connection, electrical- ADF lower image scanner 903
feed sensor, main limit and mechanical 1218 ADF main frame assembly (LX
empty sensors (DCF/ covers-inner finisher 2579 models) 772
HCI) 1258 ejector unit-inner booklet blade 1421
main drive 1225 finisher 2587 booklet blade motor 1421
main PCAs (SSBM) 1264 electrical-mechanical 1218 booklet c-fold blade 1415
MP unit 1240 finisher system 1285, 2526 booklet c-fold motor 1417
operational panel button PCA inner finisher 2577 booklet diverter 1415
and entrance path sensor paper support unit-inner booklet diverter motor 1417
(SSBM) 1276 finisher 2582 booklet diverter unit 1413
paper detection sensor relationships, electrical- booklet end fence unit 1424
(SSBM) 1265 mechanical 1225 booklet entrance 1410
booklet entrance unit 1409

Index 3113
 booklet entrance-presser main PCA 1395 feed drive 1, 74, 75
motor 1410 opt feed drive 954 fuser release drive 1, 74, 77
booklet exit 1415 paddle 1394 main drive unit motor 1, 74, 80
booklet exit unit 1413 paddle motor 1394 pickup drive 1, 74
booklet fold motor 1417 paddle unit 1392 registration drive 1, 74, 76
booklet fold roller 1419 paper holding motor 1403 toner reservoir drive 1
booklet fold unit 1413 paper holding unit 1399 toner reservoir drive [E876
booklet maker 1407 rear frame assembly 508 models only) 74
booklet maker base 1426 right door 655 toner supply drive 1, 74
booklet paddle unit 1423 right door exit 722 toner supply/reservoir
booklet presser unit 1409 right door guide 719 drive 81
booklet stapler unit 1411 right door takeaway 722 Drive system
booklet tamper unit 1412 right upper cover 1377 parts and diagrams 513
bridge unit 1378, 1380 stapler unit 1395 drivers, supported 1, 6
buffer diverter 1406 T2 transfer assembly 725 dual cassette feeder 1, 135
buffer unit 1404 tamper unit 1395, 1396 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
cassettes tray 2/3 426 toner reservoir (CMYK) 497 motor 926
cover 1374 top cover 1377 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
covers 617 top door 1377 PCA 944
DCF frame 942 top exit unit 1388 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
DCF rear frame 948 top lower cover 1390 motor 929
DCF second pickup 955 top output tray unit 1388 dual cassette feeder (DCF) pickup
drive system 513 tray 1 701 units 932
Dual cassette feeder DCF 918 Tray diverter CAM 1387 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
ejector unit 1395, 1398 tray diverter unit 1385 door 919
end fence unit 1392 tray jam cover 1387 dual cassette feeder (DCF) unit
entrance motor 1384 upper bridge 1378 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
entrance unit 1382, 1384 digital sending error (firmware) motor 926, 929
exit assemblies 404 44.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
exit motor 1390 dimensions PCA 944
flow ADF (GX/sGX) 787 accessories 1, 6, 14 dual cassette feeder (DCF)
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ printer 1, 6, 14 pickup units 932
sGX) 887 diverter unit 2544 dual cassette feeder (DCF) right
flow ADF main frame (GX/ document feeder door 919
sGX) 834 document feeder input tray Dual cassette feeder DCF)
flow ADF open cover (GX/ (LX) 738 parts and diagrams - Dual
sGX) 805 document feeder (LX) reverse cassette feeder DCF 918
flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 824 roller 774 duplex 1 sensor 361
flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ document feeder error duplexer error
sGX) 815 31.WX.YZ error 1011 69.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
front door 1377 document feeder pick roller dynamic security
front jam cover 1406 (LX 762 toner cartridge 64
hanress 1374 document feeder pickup 816
left lower cover 1402 document feeder skew (LX du E
left upper cover 1401 models) 1011
each unit functions
lower bridge 1380 documentation, printer error
finisher system 1285, 2528
main assembly 158 codes and messages
ejector home sensor 3101
main exit CAM motor 1390 WISE 1013
ejector motor 3101
main exit unit 1388, 1392 drive system 1, 74
ejector unit 2562
main frame assembly 429 cassette lift drive 1, 74
parts and diagrams 1395,
main frame pickup 610 drive motors 1, 74, 78
1398
main frame pickup 1 572 engage toner collection unit
Ejector unit 1330, 1925, 2893
main frame pickup 2 572 (TCU) drive 82
Ejector1 1949
main output tray motor 1403 engage transfer roller drive 81
ejector2 unit 2001
main output tray unit 1399 exit drive 1, 74, 77

3114 Index
electrical parts layout exit drive 1, 74, 77 finisher system 1285, 1293, 2528,
finisher system layout 1285, exit drive unit 536 2533
2528 exit gate solenoid/motors/ diagrams 1285, 2526
electrical specifications 1, 6, 15 sensor 406 each unit functions 1285, 2528
electrical-mechanical exit motor electrical parts layout 1285,
diagrams 1218 parts and diagrams 1390 2528
electrostatic discharge (ESD) 147, exit sensor 3094 finisher sectional view 1285,
149, 1285, 1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, exit unit 223, 2547 2528
2575 electrical-mechanical paper path 1285, 2528
Embedded Jetdirect error relationships diagram 1235 PCA connection
80.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013 exit 1 bin full sensor 370 information 1285, 2528
end fence sensor 3099 exit gate solenoid/motors/ finisher system diagram 1293,
end fence unit 2557 sensor 406 2533
parts and diagrams 1392 Exit unit 2625 finisher system electrical
End fence unit 1322, 1654, 2961 exploded parts views, use parts parts 1293, 2533
engine lists and diagrams 149 finisher system paper path 1293,
diagnostics 1011, 1016, 1024, 2533
1025 F finisher system PBA
engine error (LaserJet) connection 1293, 2533
fan error
46.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 finisher system sectional
58.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
63.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 view 1293, 2533
Fax menu (fax models only), control
engine error (PageWide) firmware communication error
panel 1011, 1027, 1048, 1129
61.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 49.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
feed 2 sensor 693
entrance motor 3093 firmware install error
feed drive 1, 74, 75
parts and diagrams 1384 99.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013
electrical-mechanical
entrance motors A/B, end fence hard disk error 1011, 1013
relationships diagram 1238
motor, buffer motor and sensor, remote firmware upgrade
feed drive unit or motor, Tray
and diverter close sensor error 1011, 1013
1 550
(SSBM) flatbed scanner system
feed entrance sensor, and guide
electrical-mechanical overview 1, 82
home sensor (SSBM)
relationships diagram 1266 flow ADF
electrical-mechanical
entrance unit 2543 contact image sensor
relationships diagram 1269
parts and diagrams 1382, (CIS) 841
feed roller
1384 contact image sensor (CIS)
multipurpose 702
Entrance unit 1382, 1517, 2610 fan 866
Tray 1 702
eraser PCA 1, 107, 129 document feeder PCA fan 859
feeding system 1, 45
error document feeder white
cassette 1, 45, 51
fault 1011 backing 216
main components and
ESD electrostatic discharge front motor 862
functions 1, 45, 46
(ESD) 147, 149, 1285, 1368, 1371, input tray 825
MP feeder assembly 1, 45, 53
2528, 2572, 2575 jam access cover 806
overview 1, 45
event log 1011, 1027, 1030 rear motors 849
pickup assembly 52
clear using touchscreen control scan in lower assembly 870
pickup unit 1, 45
panel 1011, 1027, 1030 ultrasonic sensor with
registration unit 1, 45, 52
event log error (firmware) PCA 795
rollers 1, 45, 46
42.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 Flow ADF (GX/sGX)
sensor, motor, and solenoid 1,
exit 1 bin full sensor 370 parts and diagrams 787
45, 46, 48
Exit assemblies Flow ADF image scanner (GX/sGX)
feeding system information 1, 45
parts and diagrams 404 parts and diagrams 887
FIH
exit cam home sensor, main Flow ADF main frame (GX/sGX)
HP Foreign interface harness
paddle home sensor, paddle parts and diagrams 834
(FIH) solution, install 299
motor, and exit motor (SSBM) Flow ADF open cover (GX/sGX)
finisher docking sensor 3092
electrical-mechanical parts and diagrams 805
finisher sectional view 1285,
relationships diagram 1277 flow ADF PCA 1, 107
2528
exit cover 632

Index 3115
 flow ADF skew (LX du paper path error 1011, 1012 master system operation
models) 1011 fuser error (LaserJet) key 1, 107, 109, 116
Flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 50.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 scan joint PCA 1, 107, 132
parts and diagrams 824 fuser exit drive WLED IF PCA 1, 107, 134
Flow ADF upper pickup (GX/sGX) electrical-mechanical WLED PCA 1, 107, 134
parts and diagrams 815 relationships diagram 1237 hardware integration pocket (HIP)
flow document feeder fuser fan 248 is not functioning 1011, 1016,
document feeder whole fuser out sensor 687 1019, 1023
unit 789 fuser PCA 1, 107, 130 HCI 1, 139
flow document feeder PCA 131 fuser release drive 1, 74, 77 HCI PCA and HCI sup PCA (HCI)
formatter fuser unit 1, 54, 231 electrical-mechanical
locating 1, 2 fuser unit drive 1, 54, 56 relationships diagram 1254
Formatter 284 overview 1, 54 high capacity input tray 1, 139
Formatter (du models) 281 temperature control 1, 54, 56 high voltage power supply (HVPS)
formatter hard disk drive 278 fuser unit drive 1, 54, 56 board 166
remove the hard disk fuser unit temperature control 1, high voltage power supply PCA 1,
drive 278 54, 56 107, 126
formatter hard disk drive (du fuser/exit drive unit 536 high-voltage rail assembly 475
models) 275 home button is
remove the hard disk drive (du G unresponsive 1011, 1016, 1019,
models) 275 1022
General Settings menu, control
formatter lights 1011, 1016, 1024 home-1/2 sensors, end sensor, and
panel 1011, 1027, 1048, 1050
front cover 619 empty sensor (DCF/HCI)
general specifications 1, 6, 15
open sensor 431 electrical-mechanical
glossary
front cover open sensor 431 relationships diagram 1260
terms and definitions
front cover switch 3105 HP Channel Services Network
front door H (CSN)
parts and diagrams 1377 Channel partners support 147
front jam cover hanress HP Foreign interface harness (FIH),
parts and diagrams 1406 parts and diagrams 1374 install 299
front power cover 627 hard disk drive (HDD) 254 HP internal users
front power switch 308 hard disk partition error WISE 147
Front tamper 1688, 2755 98.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013 HP Jetdirect print server
front tamper motor 3097 hardware configuration 1, 107 lights 1011, 1016, 1024
front tamper sensor 3097 CCDM PCA 1, 107, 133 HVPS PCA 1, 107, 126
front top inner cover 630 eraser PCA 1, 107, 129 HVPS/LVPS/FDB diagram 1225
front unit flow ADF PCA 1, 107
electrical-mechanical flow document feeder I
relationships diagram 1248 PCA 131
image creation 1, 58
front view 2528 fuser drive assembly 1, 107,
imaging unit 1, 58, 59
front/rear home sensors and tray 125
intermediate transfer belt
open sensor (DCF/HCI) fuser PCA 1, 107, 130
unit 65
electrical-mechanical high voltage power supply
overview 1, 58
relationships diagram 1263 PCA 1, 107, 126
paper transfer belt unit 1, 58,
front/rear tamper motors, front/ low voltage power supply PCA
59
rear tamper home sensors, and (Type 3R) 1, 107
toner cartridge 1, 58, 59, 63
end-fence home sensor (SSBM) low voltage power supply PCA
toner reservoir unit 67
electrical-mechanical (Type 4) 1, 107, 123
image quality
relationships diagram 1279 low voltage power supply PCA
black lines, vertical 1011, 1189,
fuser diagram 1218 (Type 5H) 1, 107, 121
1194
fuser drive assembly 1, 107, 125 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 107
blurred image 1011, 1189, 1201
fuser drive board 240 LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 107, 123
duplex blur, white spot blur on
fuser error LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 107, 121
color print-out 1207
41.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 main controller 1, 107, 109
laser scanner error 1011, 1012

3116 Index
 flow ADF or ADF skew (LX du entrance sensor 2576, 2610 rear cover 2590
models) 1011 exir roller 2576 rear paper support 2576,
foggy image 1011, 1189, 1200 exit motor 2576, 2641 2666
incorrect color exit roller 2625 rear tamper 2810, 2829
registration 1202 exit sensor 2576, 2632 rear tamper motor 2847
jitter image 1011, 1189, 1203 front cover 2588 sensor 2576
light image 1011, 1189, 1201 front paper support 2576, stacker lower limit
light lines, vertical 1011, 1189, 2644 switch 2576
1195 front tamper 2755 stacker motor 2576
periodic black dots, front tamper home stapler 2576, 2866
horizontal 1011, 1189, 1198 sensor 2773 stapler position motor 2883
periodic black lines, front tamper motor 2791 stapler position sensor 2576,
horizontal 1011, 1189, 1198 left cover 2601 2872
periodic light/dark dots, main paddle 2576, 2733 sub paddle unit 2751
horizontal 1011, 1189, 1199 main paddle assembly 2743 switch 2576
periodic light/dark lines, main paddle home top cover 2596
horizontal 1011, 1189, 1199 sensor 2736 inner finisher detailed
poor fusing 1011, 1189, 1205 main paddle motor 2740 specifications 2529
red/magenta hue middle cover 2592 inner finisher diagrams 2576
printouts 1209 motor 2576 inner finisher parts 2576
skewed image 1011, 1189, 1204 output tray 2971 inner finisher PCA 2570
stain on back side 1011, 1189, output tray lower limit inner finisher remove and
1206 switch 2987 replace 2576
standard tone, setting 1011, output tray motor 3020 inner front cover 621
1189, 1207 output tray motor input accessory error
uneven pitch 1011, 1189, 1203 assembly 2998 67.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
white lines, vertical 1011, 1189, output tray motor input/output error
1195 sensor 3008 40.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
image scanner assembly 199 output tray top of stack install
imaging drum unit 297 sensor 2978 HP Foreign interface harness
imaging unit 1, 58, 59 paper holding 3031 (FIH) solution 299
developer unit 1, 58, 59, 61 paper holding sensor 3043 interlocks
overview 1, 58, 59 paper holding solenoid 2576, defeating 1011, 1016, 1024, 1025
individual component 3057 intermediate transfer belt
diagnostics 1011, 1016, 1024 paper support 2576 overview 65
inductor unit 331 paper support home intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
information sensor 2576, 2689 unit 190
general 1011, 1145, 1150 paper support motor 2711 intermediate transfer belt unit 65
print reports 1011, 1145, 1150, parts and diagrams 2577 cleaning blade 65, 66
1152 parts and diagrams - overview 65
software version 1011, 1145, covers 2579 transfer belt drive 65, 66
1150, 1151 parts and diagrams - ejector internal diagnostics error
supply status 1011, 1145, 1150, unit 2587 90.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013
1151 parts and diagrams - paper video display error 1011, 1013
inner finisher support unit 2582 interpret control-panel messages
block diagram 2528 parts and diagrams - sensor, and event log entries 1285,
detailed specifications 2529 motor, and roller 2580 2513, 2528, 3090
ejector & paper support parts and diagrams - stapler Island of data (du bundles) 268
assembly 2893 unit 2586 Island of Data (IOD) 272
ejector assembly 2576, 2937 parts and diagrams - tamper ITB cleaner blade 187
ejector motor 2576 unit 2583, 2584
ejector motor assembly 2913 PCA cover 2599 J
end fence home 2576 punch cover 3077
jam error (LaserJet)
end fence sensor 2961 punch waste full 2576
13.WX.YZ error 1011
entrance motor 2576, 2615 punch waste full sensor 3081

Index 3117
 jam error (PageWide) level-1/2 front/rear sensors, main board 257
13.WX.YZ error 1011 solenoid home sensor, and main controller
jams solenoid (DCF/HCI) hardware configuration 1, 107,
locations 1011, 1139 electrical-mechanical 109
Jetdirect print server relationships diagram 1259 new model (IR/UI) 1, 107, 109,
lights 1011, 1016, 1024 lights 112
job accounting error (firmware) formatter 1011, 1016, 1024 previous model 1, 107, 109
48.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 troubleshooting with 1011, main drive
job management error 1016, 1024 electrical-mechanical
(firmware) 1011, 1012 limit switch, paper limit-1 sensor, relationships diagram 1225
job pipeline error prefeed sensor, and paper main drive unit 515
(firmware) 1011, 1012 empty-1 sensor (DCF/HCI) main exit CAM motor
job parser error (firmware) electrical-mechanical parts and diagrams 1390
47.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 relationships diagram 1261 main exit unit
printer calibration error 1011, limit switch, prefeed sensor, feed parts and diagrams 1388,
1012 sensor, main limit and empty 1392
sensors (DCF/HCI) Main exit unit 1317, 1595
K electrical-mechanical Main frame assembly
relationships diagram 1258 parts and diagrams 429
keyboard (z bundles) 292
low voltage power supply (LVPS) Main frame pickup
remove the keyboard 292
type 4 316 parts and diagrams 610
knife motor, stopper home sensor,
Type 5H 244 Main frame pickup 1
and stopper solenoid and motor
low voltage power supply (LVPS) parts and diagrams 572
(SSBM)
fans 312 Main frame pickup 2
electrical-mechanical
low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 572
relationships diagram 1274
(Type 3R) 1, 107 main output tray motor
L low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 1403
(Type 4) 1, 107, 123 main output tray unit
laser scanner assembly 1, 170 low voltage power supply PCA parts and diagrams 1399
laser scanning optical path 1, (Type 5H) 1, 107, 121 Main output tray unit 1333, 2079
70 lower bridge main parts 158
overview 1, 68 parts and diagrams 1380 main PCA
laser scanner assembly lower rear cover 641 parts and diagrams 1395
diagram 1220 lower tray connector 320 main PCAs (SSBM)
laser scanner assembly fan 175 LVPS PCA (Type 3R) 1, 107 electrical-mechanical
laser scanner error (LaserJet) LVPS PCA (Type 4) 1, 107, 123 relationships diagram 1264
51.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 LVPS PCA (Type 5H) 1, 107, 121 maintenance 147, 152
52.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 LVPS type 4 316 machine cleaning for
laser scanner unit 68 LVPS Type 5H 244 maintenance 147, 152
laser scanning optical preventive maintenance 152
path 68 M maintenance counts
overview 68 part replacement count 1011,
machine cleaning for
LED lamp module 891 1145, 1152
maintenance 147, 152
LEDs maintenance parts 1, 6, 26
cleaning the ADF) 152
See lights master system operation key 1,
cleaning the flow ADF white bar
left cover 647 107, 109, 116
and CIS (GX ADF) 147
left lower cover memory error
cleaning the flow ADF white bar
parts and diagrams 1402 82.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013
and CIS (LX/du model) 147
left rear corner cover 635 EMMC error 1011, 1013
cleaning the paper dust
left upper cover hard disk error 1011, 1013
stick 147, 152
parts and diagrams 1401 menu map 1011, 1027
cleaning the scan glass 147,
menus, control panel
152
Calibrate/Cleaning 1011, 1027,
main assembly
1048, 1137
parts and diagrams 158

3118 Index
 Copy (MFP only) 1011, 1027, optional configurations 1, 6, 38 paper handling specifications 1,
1048, 1091 options list 1, 6, 38, 39 6, 29
Fax (fax models only) 1011, orderable parts 149, 1372, 2576 paper holding motor
1027, 1048, 1129 ordering 1285, 1368, 2528, 2572 parts and diagrams 1403
General Settings 1011, 1027, other errors paper holding unit 2565
1048, 1050 drive unit 1011, 1189 parts and diagrams 1399
Manage Trays 1011, 1027, 1048, electrical circuit 1011, 1189 Paper holding unit 1335, 2138,
1134 feeding system 1011, 1189 3031
Print 1011, 1027, 1048, 1133 flow ADF 1011, 1189 paper jams
Reports 1011, 1027, 1048 fuser 1011, 1189 locations 1011, 1139
Scan 1100 image system 1011, 1189 paper path
Scan (MFP only) 1011, 1027, laser scanner assembly 1011, finisher system 1285, 2528
1048 1189 paper size sensor 509, 949
Supplies 1011, 1027, 1048, 1133 scanner 1011, 1189 paper size sensors (DCF/HCI)
motor error (LaserJet) output accessory error electrical-mechanical
59.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 66.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 relationships diagram 1253
MP unit output tray 2565 paper support motor 3096
electrical-mechanical output tray motor 3102 paper support sensor 3096
relationships diagram 1240 Output tray motor paper support unit 2549
MSOK 1, 107, 109, 116 assembly 2998 Paper support unit 2644
multipurpose feeder assembly 1, output tray motor sensor 3102 paper transfer belt unit 1, 58, 59
45, 53 Output tray top of stack cleaning blade 1, 58, 59
sensor 3103 overview 1, 58, 59
N Output tray unit 2971 transfer belt drive 1, 58, 59
output unit parts 148, 1372, 2575
Near Field Communication error
duplex 1 sensor 361 use parts lists and
81.WX.YZ error 1011, 1013
return sensor 415 diagrams 149
Bluetooth error 1011, 1013
OXPd/Web kit error Parts
external I/O card error 1011,
45.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 2000-sheet HCI cassette 972
1013
2000-sheet HCI drive 957
internal EIO error 1011, 1013
P 2000-sheet HCI frame 973
wireless error 1011, 1013
2000-sheet HCI main 956
network and software paddle
2000-sheet HCI pickup 979
specifications 1, 6, 34 parts and diagrams 1394
3000-sheet sHCI (department;
network interface 1, 6, 34 paddle motor
E82540/50/60 and
NFC kit 301 parts and diagrams 1394
E87640/50/60 only)
no control panel sound 1011, 1016, paddle unit 2551
frame 1009
1019, 1021 parts and diagrams 1392
3000-sheet sHCI (department;
note vi Paddle unit 1320, 1621, 2733
E82540/50/60 and
page error
O E87640/50/60 only) main
21.WX.YZ error 1011
1 980
paper detection sensor (SSBM)
OPC diagram 1223 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
electrical-mechanical
OPE diagram 1220 E82540/50/60 and
relationships diagram 1265
operating systems, supported 1, E87640/50/60 only) main
paper dust brush 183
6 3 989
paper empty , path, limit-1, and path
operating-environment range 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
sensors (DCF/HCI)
printer 15 E82540/50/60 and
electrical-mechanical
operational panel button PCA and E87640/50/60 only) main
relationships diagram 1253
entrance path sensor (SSBM) 5 1005
paper empty and limit-2 sensors
electrical-mechanical 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
(DCF/HCI)
relationships diagram 1276 E82540/50/60 and
electrical-mechanical
Opt feed drive E87640/50/60 only) main
relationships diagram 1252
parts and diagrams - 6 1006
paper handling error (LaserJet)
drive 954 3000-sheet sHCI (department;
56.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
option specifications 1, 6, 38, 41 E82540/50/60 and

Index 3119
 E87640/50/60 only) pickup flow ADF main frame (GX/ tray diverter unit 1385
cover unit 1007 sGX) 834 tray jam cover 1387
ACR frame assembly 494 flow ADF open cover (GX/ upper bridge 1378
ADF (LX models) 728 sGX) 805 parts and accessories 1285,
ADF exterior and ADF pickup(LX flow ADF stacker (GX/sGX) 824 1368, 2528, 2572
models) 761 flow ADF upper pickup (GX/ parts and diagrams 147
ADF lower image scanner 903 sGX) 815 parts and diagrams, using 149
ADF main frame assembly (LX front door 1377 parts list and diagrams, how to
models) 772 front jam cover 1406 use 149
booklet blade 1421 hanress 1374 parts, main 158
booklet blade motor 1421 inner finisher 2577 parts, order by authorized service
booklet c-fold blade 1415 left lower cover 1402 providers 148, 1372, 2575
booklet c-fold motor 1417 left upper cover 1401 parts, orderable 149, 1372, 2576
booklet diverter 1415 lower bridge 1380 parts, ordering 148, 1372, 2575
booklet diverter motor 1417 main assembly 158 PCA 2495
booklet diverter unit 1413 main exit CAM motor 1390 PCA connection
booklet end fence unit 1424 main exit unit 1388, 1392 information 1364
booklet entrance 1410 main frame assembly 429 finisher system 1285, 2528
booklet entrance unit 1409 main frame pickup 610 PCA precautions 1285, 1368,
booklet entrance-presser main frame pickup 1 572 1370, 2572, 2573
motor 1410 main frame pickup 2 572 PCA-ADF sGX (dn models
booklet exit 1415 main output tray motor 1403 only) 877
booklet exit unit 1413 main output tray unit 1399 pick roller
booklet fold motor 1417 main PCA 1395 document feeder (LX) 762
booklet fold roller 1419 opt feed drive 954 pick/feed separation roller 612
booklet fold unit 1413 paddle 1394 pick/lift-1 motor, lift-2 motor, and
booklet maker 1407 paddle motor 1394 feed motor (DCF/HCI)
booklet maker base 1426 paddle unit 1392 electrical-mechanical
booklet paddle unit 1423 paper holding motor 1403 relationships diagram 1261
booklet presser unit 1409 paper holding unit 1399 pickup assembly 52
booklet stapler unit 1411 paper support unit-inner pickup drive 1, 74
booklet tamper unit 1412 finisher 2582 electrical-mechanical
bridge unit 1378, 1380 rear frame assembly 508 relationships diagram 1231,
buffer diverter 1406 right door 655 1239
buffer unit 1404 right door exit 722 pickup drive (Tray 2) 342
cassettes tray 2/3 426 right door guide 719 pickup drive Tray 3 or motor 553
cover 1374 right door takeaway 722 pickup lift motors, feed motor, and
covers 617 right upper cover 1377 cover open sensor (DCF/HCI)
covers-inner finisher 2579 ssensor, motor, and roller-inner electrical-mechanical
DCF frame 942 finisher 2580 relationships diagram 1250
DCF rear frame 948 stapler unit 1395 pickup lifting and empty
DCF second pickup 955 stapler unit-inner sensor 583, 600
drive system 513 finisher 2586 pickup roller
Dual cassette feeder DCF 918 T2 transfer assembly 725 ADF 816
ejector unit 1395, 1398 tamper unit 1395, 1396 multipurpose 702
ejector unit-inner tamper unit-inner Tray 1 702
finisher 2587 finisher 2583, 2584 pickup unit 1, 45
end fence unit 1392 toner reservoir (CMYK) 497 electrical-mechanical
entrance motor 1384 top cover 1377 relationships diagram 1233
entrance unit 1382, 1384 top door 1377 pickup unit 1 573
exit assemblies 404 top exit unit 1388 pickup lifting and empty
exit motor 1390 top lower cover 1390 sensor 583
flow ADF (GX/sGX) 787 top output tray unit 1388 prefeed sensor 1 388
flow ADF image scanner (GX/ tray 1 701 pickup unit 2 592
sGX) 887 Tray diverter CAM 1387

3120 Index
 pickup lifting and empty Process Cleaning Page 1011, imaging drum unit 297
sensor 600 1027, 1048, 1137 intermediate transfer belt (ITB)
prefeed sensor 2 381 product number unit 190
plastic latches information 1285, locating 1, 2 ITB cleaner blade 187
1368, 1370, 2572, 2574 punch unit 1310, 2540 multipurpose (Tray 1 pickup/
post-service tests 147, 149, 151, Punch unit 1523, 3076 reverse/feed roller 702
1285, 1368, 1372, 2528, 2572, punch waste box sensor 3092 pick/feed separation roller 612
2575 Punch waste full sensor 3091 toner collection unit 163
power replacing parts
consumption 1, 6, 15 R precautions 149, 1369, 2572
power subsystem 1011, 1016 replacing the main
real-time clock error
power supply fuser fan 248
11.WX.YZ error 1011
troubleshooting 1011, 1016, replacing the main SVC part 257
rear frame assembly
1017 alienation motor 543
parts and diagrams 508
power-on troubleshooting bridge unit 329
Rear paper support 2666
overview 1011, 1016, 1017 CRUM connector 353
Rear tamper 1766, 2810
pre-boot menu options 1011, 1027, developer fan 324
rear tamper motor 3098
1030 exit cover 632
rear tamper sensor 3098
precations exit drive unit 536
rear view 2528
information 1285, 1368, 2572 exit unit 223
registration assembly 446
precautions feed 2 sensor 693
registration drive 1, 74, 76
replacing parts 149, 1369, 2572 feed drive unit or motor, Tray
electrical-mechanical
prefeed sensor 1 388 1 550
relationships diagram 1237
prefeed sensor 2 381 Formatter 284
registration drive assembly 563
preservice checklist 147, 149, 151, Formatter (du models) 281
registration pickup diagram 1221
1285, 1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, 2574 front cover 619
registration sensor
press home sensor, tamper home front power cover 627
assembly 437
sensor, paper detect sensor, front power switch 308
registration unit 1, 45, 52
tamper motor, press motor, and front top inner cover 630
electrical-mechanical
feed motor (SSBM) fuser drive board 240
relationships diagram 1233
electrical-mechanical fuser/exit drive unit 536
relationships, electrical-
relationships diagram 1271 hard disk drive (HDD) 254
mechanical
print bar error (PageWide) high voltage power supply
diagrams 1225
62.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 (HVPS) board 166
removal and replacement 147
print drivers, supported 1, 6 high-voltage rail assembly 475
removal and replacement booklet
Print menu, control panel 1011, inductor unit 331
finisher 1372
1027, 1048, 1133 inner front cover 621
removal and replacement inner
print quality Island of data (du
finisher 2576
test 147, 149, 151, 1285, 1368, bundles) 268
removal and replacement
1372, 2528, 2572, 2575 Island of Data (IOD) 272
precautions 1285, 1368, 2572
print quality troubleshooting 1011, laser scanner assembly 170
removal order
1189 laser scanner assembly
removing order 147, 149, 151,
flow ADF skew adjust 1011 fan 175
152, 1372, 2575
image quality 1011, 1189 left cover 647
removing parts
other errors 1011, 1189 left rear corner cover 635
checklists 147, 149, 151, 1285,
print specifications 1, 6, 18 low voltage power supply (LVPS)
1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, 2574
Print Test Page 1011, 1027, 1048, fans 312
replacement of maintenance parts
1050 lower rear cover 641
developer unit 178
printer lower tray connector 320
flow ADF pickup roller
dimensions 1, 6, 14 main drive unit 515
assembly 816
operating-environment paper dust brush 183
flow ADF separation roller
range 15 pickup drive (Tray 2) 342
assembly 836
weight 1, 6, 14 pickup drive Tray 3 or
fuser unit 231
printer memory error motor 553
image scanner assembly 199
20.WX.YZ error 1011 pickup unit 1 573

Index 3121
 pickup unit 2 592 right rear cover 638 mode menu tree 1011, 1145,
registration assembly 446 right upper cover 1146
registration drive parts and diagrams 1377 service functions 1011, 1145,
assembly 563 1186
registration sensor S sHCI 1, 143
assembly 437 side high capacity input (sHCI)
scan glass 889
reservoir unit 498 feed motor 994
scan joint PCA 1, 107, 132
right door 219 lift-up motor 998
Scan menu (MFP only), control
right door dampener 457 pickup motor 990
panel 1011, 1027, 1048
right rear cover 638 rear cover 981
Scan menu, control panel 1100
toner collection unit (TCU) sHCI PCA 984
scan specifications 1, 6, 21
drive 556 side high capacity input tray 1,
scanner
toner collection unit (TCU) 143
caution for moving 1, 82, 91
sensors 347 side unit
CDD and lens 905
toner reservoir motors 529 electrical-mechanical
scanner glass 889
toner supply drive unit 522 relationships diagram 1242
scanner assembly - CDD and
toner supply motors 529 size sensor 949
lens 905
top right cover 650 size sensor, paper 509
scanner diagram 1219
Tray 1 feed drive unit or software and solutions 1, 6, 34,
scanner error
motor 550 36
30.WX.YZ error 1011
tray closing unit 452 solve problems
scanning system
upper rear cover 644 control panel messages 1011
components 1, 82, 85
Reports menu, control panel 1011, CPMD 1011
scanning system components 1,
1027, 1048 specifications 1, 6
82, 85
reservoir unit 498 copy specifications 1, 6, 23
security error
return sensor 415 electrical and acoustic 1, 6, 15
33.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
reverse roller general specifications 1, 6, 15
sensor error
ADF 836 maintenance parts 1, 6, 26
54.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
document feeder (LX) 774 network interface 1, 6, 34
58.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
multipurpose 702 network specifications 1, 6, 34
serial number
Tray 1 702 options 1, 6, 38
locating 1, 2
revision history iii options list 1, 6, 38, 39
service and support
right door 219 paper handling
WISE 147
fuser out sensor 687 specifications 1, 6, 29
service and support information
open switch 335 print specifications 1, 6, 18
WISE and CSN 147
Tray 1 empty sensor 667 scan specifications 1, 6, 21
service approach 147, 149, 1285,
Tray 1 paper length sensor 677 software and solutions 1, 6, 34,
1368, 2528, 2572
Tray 1 solenoid 706 36
precautions 149, 1369, 2572
Tray 1 unit 657 software specifications 1, 6,
service functions
Right door 34
capture log 1011, 1145, 1186
parts and diagrams 655 supplies 1, 6, 25
debug log 1011, 1145, 1186
right door dampener 457 stacker finisher 1285
envelope rotate 1011, 1145,
Right door exit Stacker finisher 1293
1186, 1188
parts and diagrams 722 standard (du bundles) document
main memory clear 1011, 1145,
right door guide feeder
1186
electrical-mechanical document feeder white
transfer assembly
relationships diagram 1244 backing 213
control 1011, 1145, 1186, 1187
Right door guide standard (LX models) document
service mode 1011, 1145
parts and diagrams 719 feeder
diagnostics 1011, 1145, 1153
right door open switch 335 document feeder whole
entering service mode 1011,
right door output takeaway unit 729
1145
electrical-mechanical standard (LX) document feeder
information 1011, 1145, 1150
relationships diagram 1246 document feeder (ADF)
maintenance counts 1011,
Right door takeaway PCA 767
1145, 1152
parts and diagrams 722

3122 Index
 document feeder feed terms and definitions parts and diagrams 701
motor 781 glossary Tray 1 empty sensor 667
standard (LX) document feeder tests Tray 1 feed drive unit or
(ADF) post-service 147, 149, 151, 1285, motor 550
contact image sensor 1368, 1372, 2528, 2572, 2575 Tray 1 paper length sensor 677
(CIS) 743 print-quality 147, 149, 151, 1285, Tray 1 solenoid 706
document feeder (ADF) jam 1368, 1372, 2528, 2572, 2575 Tray 1 unit 657
access cover (LX) 734 tip vi Tray 2
standard (LX/du model) document toner cartridge 1, 58, 59, 63 jams, clearing 1011, 1139
feeder dynamic security 64 Tray 3
document feeder main toner collection unit 163 jams, clearing 1011, 1139
motor 753 toner collection unit (TCU) tray closing unit 452
stapler finisher 1285 drive 556 Tray diverter CAM
Stapler finisher 1293 toner collection unit (TCU) parts and diagrams 1387
stapler position motor 3100 sensors 347 tray diverter unit
stapler position sensor 3100 toner reservoir (CMYK) parts and diagrams 1385
stapler unit 2559 parts and diagrams 497 Tray diverter unit 1313, 1385, 1528
parts and diagrams 1395 toner reservoir motors 529 tray jam cover
Stapler unit 1843, 2866 toner reservoir unit 67 parts and diagrams 1387
Stapler unit (booklet) 2350 toner supply drive unit 522 tray motor error (LaserJet)
stapler-stacker finisher toner supply motors 529 60.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012
detailed specifications 1287 top cover tray selection - use requested
stapler-stacker finisher and parts and diagrams 1377 tray 1011, 1027, 1048, 1050
booklet maker top cover switch 3104 tray upper front/rear sensors, SCU
detailed specifications 1287 top door home detect sensor, and stack
stapler/stacker diagrams 1373 parts and diagrams 1377 beam in/out sensors (SSBM)
stapler/stacker parts 1373 top door sensor, fold motor, and electrical-mechanical
static, precautions for 147, 149, knife home position sensor relationships diagram 1281
1285, 1368, 1371, 2528, 2572, (SSBM) trays
2575 electrical-mechanical jams, clearing 1011, 1139
supplies 1285, 1368, 2528, 2572 relationships diagram 1275 Trays menu, control panel 1011,
supplies error (LaserJet) top exit unit 1027, 1048, 1134
10.WX.YZ error 1011 parts and diagrams 1388 troubleshooting
supplies error (PageWide) Top exit unit 1315, 1556 checklist 1011, 1027
17.WX.YZ error 1011 top lower cover control panel checks 1011,
Supplies menu, control parts and diagrams 1390 1016, 1019
panel 1011, 1027, 1048, 1133 Top output tray unit 1316, 1582 lights, using 1011, 1016, 1024
system error (LaserJet) top output tray unitr power 1011, 1016, 1017
62.WX.YZ error 1011, 1012 parts and diagrams 1388 process 1011, 1016
system requirements top right cover 650 troubleshooting tools
minimum 1, 6 top-beam out sensor, stack motor, control panel messages 1011
and SKU motor (SSBM) CPMD 1011
T electrical-mechanical
relationships diagram 1267 U
T1 drive
top-exit path and compile-exit path
electrical-mechanical understand lights on the formatter
sensors (SSBM)
relationships diagram 1227 formatter lights 1011, 1016,
electrical-mechanical
T2 transfer assembly 1024
relationships diagram 1273
parts and diagrams 725 understand the lights on the
touchscreen blank, white, or dim
tamper unit 2554 formatter
(no image) 1011, 1016, 1019,
parts and diagrams 1395, HP Jetdirect LEDs 1011, 1016,
1020
1396 1024
touchscreen has an unresponsive
Tamper unit 1324, 1327, 1688, unit, bridge 329
zone 1011, 1016, 1019, 1020
2755 upper bridge
Tray 1
parts and diagrams 1378
jams, clearing 1011, 1139

Index 3123
 upper rear cover 644
upper/lower paper low sensors
(DCF/HCI)
electrical-mechanical
relationships diagram 1262
USB diagram 1220
Use Requested Tray 1011, 1027,
1048, 1050

W
warning vi
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine
WISE 147
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine (WISE)
HP internal users and Channel
partners 147
weight
accessories 1, 6, 14
printer 1, 6, 14
WISE
CPMD 1013
HP internal users and Channel
partners 147
Web-based Interactive Search
Engine 147
WLED IF PCA 1, 107, 134
WLED PCA 1, 107, 134
WTB diagram 1223
WTB drive
electrical-mechanical
relationships diagram 1229

3124 Index